EN
2
The Five-Way Access System
The five-way access system of The Business Writer’s Handbook provides readers with multiple ways of retrieving information:
1. Alphabetically Organized Entries
Alphabetically organized entries with color tabs enable readers to find information quickly. Within the entries, terms shown as links refer to other entries that contain definitions of key concepts or further information on related topics.
2. Contents by Topic
The complete “Contents by Topic” on the inside front cover groups entries into categories and serves as a quick reference for finding all topics covered in the book. The “Contents by Topic” allows a writer focusing on a specific task or problem to locate helpful entries; it is also useful for instructors who want to correlate the Handbook with standard textbooks or their own course materials. The list of “Commonly Misused Words and Phrases” (see page 601) extends this topical key by listing all the usage entries in the book.
3. Checklist of the Writing Process
The “Checklist of the Writing Process” (see page xxv) helps readers reference all writing-process–related entries.
4. Comprehensive Index
The user-friendly Index (see page 555) lists all the topics covered in the book—including subtopics and model documents—in an alphabetical arrangement.
5. Model Documents and Figures by Topic
The list of “Model Documents and Figures by Topic” (see page 610)
3
makes it easy for readers to find the abundant real-world examples and sample documents throughout the text that provide models for effective business communication.
Contents by Topic Use this list as a quick reference for finding entries by topic. To
search this book in more detail, see the Index.
Business Writing Documents and Elements Business Plans Description FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) Forms Indexing Instructions Job Descriptions Mission Statements Policies and Procedures Process Explanation Promotional Writing
Brochures Newsletter Articles Newsletters Press Releases Sales Letters
Proposals Grant Proposals
4
Questionnaires Report Components
Abstracts Appendixes Conclusions Executive Summaries Glossaries Introductions Tables of Contents Titles
Reports Annual Reports Feasibility Reports Formal Reports Incident Reports Investigative Reports Progress and Activity Reports Trip Reports
Writing for the Web
Correspondence Acknowledgments Adjustment Messages Collection Letters Complaints Correspondence Cover Messages (or Transmittals) E-mail Form Letters
5
Inquiries and Responses Instant Messaging and Live Chat International Correspondence Letters Memos Reference Letters Refusal Letters Sales Letters Text Messaging
Job Search and Application Acceptances / Refusals (for Employment) Application Cover Letters Interviewing for a Job Job Search Resignation Letters Résumés
Design and Visuals Layout and Design
Forms Headers and Footers Headings Lists
Visuals Drawings Flowcharts Global Graphics
6
Graphs Infographics Maps Organizational Charts Photographs Tables
Presentations and Meetings Listening Meetings Minutes of Meetings Presentations
Research and Documentation Adapting to New Technologies Bibliographies Brainstorming Copyrights, Patents, and Trademarks Documenting Sources Interviewing for Information Note-Taking Paraphrasing Plagiarism Questionnaires Quotations Research
Organization, Writing, and Revision
7
Blogs and Forums Collaborative Writing Description Document Management Ethics in Writing Exposition Global Communication Logic Errors Methods of Development
Cause-and-Effect Chronological Comparison Definition Division-and-Classification General and Specific Order-of-Importance Sequential Spatial
Narration Organization Outlining Persuasion Preparation
Audience Brainstorming Context Purpose Readers Scope Selecting the Medium
8
Proofreading Repurposing Revision Social Media Writing a Draft
Style and Language Style
Affectation Allusions Ambiguity Awkwardness Biased Language Business Writing Style Buzzwords Clarity Clichés Comparison Conciseness Contractions Defining Terms Direct Address Double Negatives Emphasis English, Varieties of Euphemisms Expletives Figures of Speech Gobbledygook
9
Idioms Intensifiers Jargon Nominalizations Pace Parallel Structure Plain Language Point of View Positive Writing Repetition Rhetorical Questions Sentence Variety Subordination Telegraphic Style Tone “You” Viewpoint
Word Choice Abstract / Concrete Words Antonyms Buzzwords Connotation / Denotation Foreign Words in English Functional Shift Malapropisms Synonyms Thesaurus Usage Vague Words
10
Sentences and Paragraphs Sentence Construction
Appositives Clauses Complements Expletives Modifiers Objects Phrases Restrictive and Nonrestrictive Elements Syntax
Sentence Faults Comma Splice Dangling Modifiers Garbled Sentences Mixed Constructions Run-on Sentences Sentence Fragments
Paragraphs Coherence Transition Unity
Parts of Speech and Grammar Grammar
Agreement Case English as a Second Language
11
Gender Mood Number (Grammar) Person Possessive Case Pronoun Reference Tense Voice
Parts of Speech Adjectives Adverbs Articles Conjunctions Functional Shift Interjections Nouns Prepositions Pronouns Verbals Verbs
Punctuation and Mechanics Mechanics
Abbreviations Acronyms and Initialisms Ampersands Capitalization Compound Words Contractions
12
Dates Italics Numbers Prefixes Proofreading Spelling Suffixes
Punctuation Apostrophes Brackets Colons Commas Dashes Ellipses Exclamation Marks Hyphens Parentheses Periods Question Marks Quotation Marks Semicolons Slashes
13
The Business Writer’s Handbook
14
About the Authors Gerald J. Alred is Professor Emeritus of English at the
University of Wisconsin–Milwaukee, where he is a teaching-
award recipient and an adviser to the Professional Writing
Program. He is the author of numerous scholarly articles and
several standard bibliographies on business and technical
communication, and he served as Associate Editor of the
Journal of Business Communication. He is a recipient of the
prestigious Jay R. Gould Award for “profound scholarly and
textbook contributions to the teaching of business and technical
writing.” He developed and manages the Web site
InlandChorus.com .
Charles T. Brusaw served as a faculty member at NCR
Corporation’s Management College, where he developed and
taught courses in professional writing, editing, and
presentation skills for the corporation worldwide. Previously,
he worked in advertising, technical writing, public relations,
and curriculum development. He was also a communications
consultant, an invited speaker at academic conferences, and a
teacher of business writing at Sinclair Community College. He
passed away in 2015.
Walter E. Oliu served as Chief of the Publishing Services Branch
at the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, where he managed
the agency’s printing, graphics, editing, and publishing
programs, as well as the daily operations of the agency’s public
Web site. He is the recipient of the agency’s Meritorious Service
TM
15
Award. He has also taught at Miami University of Ohio, Slippery
Rock State University, Montgomery College, and George Mason
University.
16
The Business Writer’s Handbook Twelfth Edition
Gerald J. Alred
Charles T. Brusaw
Walter E. Oliu
17
For Bedford/St. Martin’s
Vice President, Editorial, Macmillan Learning Humanities:
Edwin Hill
Executive Program Director for English: Leasa Burton
Senior Program Manager: Laura Arcari
Marketing Manager: Laura Arrant
Director of Content Development: Jane Knetzger
Executive Development Editor: Jane Carter
Editorial Assistant: William Hwang
Content Project Manager: Louis C. Bruno Jr.
Senior Workflow Project Supervisor: Joe Ford
Production Supervisor: Robin Besofsky
Media Project Manager: Allison Hart
Director of Media Editoral, Humanities: Adam Whitehurst
Manager of Publishing Services: Andrea Cava
Project Management: Lumina Datamatics, Inc.
Editorial Services: Lumina Datamatics, Inc.
Composition: Lumina Datamatics, Inc.
Text Permission Manager: Kalina Ingham
Text Permissions Researcher: Claire Paschal
Photo Permissions Manager: Angela Boehler
Photo Permissions Researcher: Kerri Wilson, Lumina
Datamatics, Inc.
Director of Design, Content Management: Diana Blume
Text Design: Books By Design, Inc.; Glenna Collett
Cover Design: William Boardman
Cover Image: Malorny / Getty Images
18
Copyright © 2019, 2015, 2012, 2009 by Bedford/St. Martin’s.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by
any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording,
or otherwise, except as may be permitted by law or expressly
permitted in writing by the Publisher.
1 2 3 4 5 6
23 22 21 20 19 18
For information, write: Bedford/St. Martin’s, 75 Arlington
Street, Boston, MA 02116
ISBN: 978-1-319-23418-8(mobi)
Acknowledgments
Copyrights appear on the same page as the art selections they
cover; these copyrights constitute an extension of the copyright
page.
Page 511, Kitty O. Locker. “ ‘As Per Your Request’: A History of
Business Jargon,” Journal of Business and Technical
Communication 1, no. 1 (1987): 27–47. Reprinted by permission
of SAGE Publications.
19
Contents Contents by Topic
Preface
Five Steps to Successful Writing
Checklist of the Writing Process
The Business Writer’s Handbook: Alphabetical Entries
Index
Commonly Misused Words and Phrases
Model Documents and Figures by Topic
20
Preface The Business Writer’s Handbook is the text students and
professionals need to land, navigate, and stand out on the job.
Like previous editions, the twelfth edition is a comprehensive,
easy-access guide that places business writing in a real-world
context, with quick reference to hundreds of topics and scores
of model documents and visuals.
Anticipating the needs of today’s professionals and job
seekers, this edition has been judiciously trimmed, while areas
related to finding a job and using social media as a professional
tool have been updated and expanded, based on expert advice.
Further, LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing provides
online tutorials on today’s most relevant digital writing topics,
from content management to personal branding. This resource
can be packaged with the text at no additional cost.
Helpful Features The Business Writer’s Handbook offers alphabetically arranged
entries on an array of topics crucial to effective business
writing, from “Abbreviations” and “Abstracts” through “Writing
for the Web” and the “‘You’ Viewpoint.” In its focus on the job
search and résumé preparation, it provides up-to-date advice on
how to network using professional and social media and offers
tips on developing application materials that will spark the
interest of prospective employers. Its concise yet
comprehensive coverage of the writing process and in-depth
treatment of grammar and usage provide detailed help for every
21
stage of writing, from preparation, audience analysis, and
research, to drafting, revising, and proofreading.
Real-world samples provide students with authentic models
of business correspondence for a variety of workplace
situations. Up-to-date instruction gives students the latest
advice on writing and designing for the Web, using social media
in business, conducting Internet research, and approaching
new software. An emphasis on the latest workplace
technologies stresses the importance of tailoring every message
— from a formal business e-mail to a quick text — to its purpose,
audience, and medium.
Quick reference features — including Contents by Topic (on
the inside front cover), a comprehensive index, and a list of
model documents and figures — make it easy to navigate.
Checklists help writers tackle complex tasks such as
proofreading and revising, communicating with international
audiences, and evaluating sources. Throughout the text, “Ethics
Notes” and “Professionalism Notes” highlight central concerns
in today’s business world and offer advice for dealing with those
concerns. A thorough discussion of copyright and plagiarism
clarifies what plagiarism is in the digital age and highlights the
ethical aspects of using and documenting sources
appropriately. Guidelines for online and interpersonal
communication and tips on preparing important projects and
presentations offer valuable advice on which students and
professionals can rely.
22
New to This Edition Our focus in revising the handbook for this edition has been on
refining and updating existing entries to provide information
that is especially relevant for securing a job in today’s economy
and for navigating the technologies needed to succeed on the
job. We have made the following additions and improvements:
A new entry on creating an online professional profile helps business writers select the appropriate forum and represent themselves and their accomplishments effectively on sites such as LinkedIn, AngelList, and Academia.edu. A new entry on spreadsheets explains how and why to use them and provides resources for up-to-date help. A thorough updating of the job-search entry includes new coverage of co-ops, service internships, and “gap year” opportunities — crucial information for students and professionals seeking a new career. Updated coverage of interviewing for a job offers more tips on what to do after the interview and includes a new model of a follow-up letter. Updated coverage of documenting sources provides current guidelines for citing sources in CMS style. A new professionalism note on the etiquette of mobile devices helps students move seamlessly between their personal and professional worlds. New instructor support materials, including advice on structuring the class and sample course plans, are available on the instructor’s tab on the book’s catalog page at
23
macmillanlearning.com.
How to Use This Book The Business Writer’s Handbook is made up of alphabetically
organized entries, with colored tabs delineating each letter
section. Within each entry, underlined, boldfaced cross-
references — for example, proposals — link readers to entries
that contain further information. Many entries present advice
and guidelines in the form of convenient “Writer’s Checklists”
and annotated model documents and figures.
The Handbook’s alphabetical organization enables readers to
find specific topics quickly and easily; however, readers with
general questions have several different ways to locate
information in the book.
Contents by Topic. The complete “Contents by Topic” on the inside front cover groups the alphabetical entries into topic categories. This topical key allows a writer focusing on a specific task or problem to browse all related entries; it also helps instructors correlate the Handbook to standard textbooks or to their own course materials. Commonly Misused Words and Phrases. The list of “Commonly Misused Words and Phrases” on pages 601–02 extends the “Contents by Topic” by listing all the usage entries, which appear in italics throughout the book — for example, and/or. Model Documents and Figures by Topic. The topically organized list of “Model Documents and Figures by Topic”
24
on the inside back cover makes it easier to browse the book’s most commonly referenced sample documents and visuals to find specific examples of business writing genres. Checklist of the Writing Process. The checklist on pages xxv–xxvi helps readers reference key entries in a sequence useful for planning and carrying out a writing project. Comprehensive Index. The user-friendly index lists all the topics covered in the book — including subtopics and model documents — in an alphabetical arrangement.
Acknowledgments For their invaluable comments and suggestions for this edition
of The Business Writer’s Handbook, we thank the following
reviewers who responded to our questionnaires: William
Allegrezza, Indiana University Northwest; Jeanne Allison,
University of Missouri–St. Louis; Stevens Amidon, Indiana
University–Purdue University Fort Wayne; Greg Brecht,
University of South Florida, St. Petersburg; Carol Davis,
California State University, Monterey Bay; Sonia
Khatchadourian, University of Wisconsin–Milwaukee; Nancy
Nygaard, University of Wisconsin–Milwaukee; and Teeanna
Rizkallah, California State University, Fullerton. Additional
thanks go out to Sonia Khatchadourian, who kindly let us share
her syllabus on our book’s catalog page, so that other
instructors could benefit from her experience with the book.
For this edition, we’d especially like to thank Richard C. Hay,
founder and CEO of Twenty Six Design, LLC, for his advice on
updating the figures and model documents throughout the
25
book, and especially for his update of the brochure entry,
including the new model brochure. We also owe special thanks
to Traci Gardner, Virginia Tech, for her update of the entries on
social media and for creating an online profile. Finally, we want
to thank Saundra Williams, Human Resources Business Partner
at Macmillan Learning, for her advice on updating the job
search entries. We are indebted to Kenneth J. Cook, president
of Ken Cook Co., for his ongoing support of this and earlier
editions of the Handbook and for his continued permission to
reprint the exemplary company newsletter.
We wish to thank Bedford/St. Martin’s for supporting this
book, especially Edwin Hill, Vice President, Humanities
Editorial; Leasa Burton, Senior Program Director, English;
Laura Arcari, Senior Program Manager, Rhetorics and Business
and Technical Writing; and Lauren Arrant, Marketing Manager.
We are grateful to Andrea Cava, Publishing Services Manager;
Louis Bruno, Content Project Manager; and Robin Besofsky,
Production Supervisor, for their patient management of the
book’s production. We thank Hilary Newman, Director of
Rights and Permissions; Kalina Ingham, Permissions Manager;
Angie Boehler, Permissions Editor; and Claire Paschal,
Permissions Associate, for their help in managing the
permissions process. We thank Billy Boardman, Senior Design
Manager; Diana Blume, Design Director; and Diana’s design
team, as well as Rachel Comerford, Director of Content
Standards, for helping make this book accessible to all readers.
Our gratitude also goes out to William Hwang for his
26
conscientious work on this project. Finally, we wish to thank
Executive Development Editor Jane Carter for her editorial
direction on this always-challenging project.
At Lumina Datamatics, we thank Jana Lewis, Bharathi
Sriram, Sudheer Purushothaman, Kerri Wilson, Jamie Thaman,
and Rebecca Roby for their help in the copyediting,
proofreading, permissions, and production processes.
We offer our heartfelt gratitude to Barbara Brusaw for her
patience and time spent preparing the manuscript for the first
five editions. We also gratefully acknowledge the ongoing
contributions of many students and instructors at the University
of Wisconsin–Milwaukee. Finally, special thanks go to Janice
Alred for her many hours of help in coordinating this project
and for continuing to hold everything together.
With sorrow, we mark the 2015 passing of our esteemed
coauthor, Charles “Ted” Brusaw, and dedicate this edition of
The Business Writer’s Handbook to his memory. Ted began his
professional career as a freelance writer and moved on to a
variety of positions in business and industry as a technical
writer and corporate trainer. For many years, he was manager
of technical publications at the NCR Corporation. Ted
coauthored Practical Writing, The Business Writer’s Handbook,
Handbook of Technical Writing, The Professional Writer, The
Business Writer’s Companion, and Writing That Works. He also
independently authored a well-reviewed book of World War II
27
military history (a Book of the Month Club selection), a Civil
War novel, a biography of Benedict Arnold, and a historical
novel on the Lewis and Clark expedition. Ted was an
accomplished writer, teacher, and mentor (most especially to
both of us), whose standards were simply the highest. We are
grateful to have had the good fortune to work with this
consummate professional, who was also our friend.
Gerald J. Alred and Walter E. Oliu
We’re All In. As Always Bedford/St. Martin’s is as passionately committed to the
discipline of English as ever, working hard to provide support
and services that make it easier for you to teach your course
your way.
Find community support at the Bedford/St. Martin’s English
Community (community.macmillan.com), where you can
follow our Bits blog for new teaching ideas, download titles
from our professional resource series, and review projects in
the pipeline.
Choose curriculum solutions that offer flexible custom
options, combining our carefully developed print and digital
resources, acclaimed works from Macmillan’s trade imprints,
and your own course or program materials to provide the exact
resources your students need. Our approach to customization
makes it possible to create a customized project uniquely suited
for your students, and based on your enrollment size, return
28
money to your department, and raise your institutional profile
with a high-impact author visit through the Macmillan Author
Program (“MAP”).
Rely on outstanding service from your Bedford/St. Martin’s
sales representative and editorial team. Contact us or visit
macmillanlearning.com to learn more about any of the
following options.
LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing: Where Students Learn Launch-Pad provides engaging content and new ways to get the
most out of your book. Get an interactive e-book combined with
assessment tools in a fully customizable course space, then
assign and mix our resources with yours.
Sample documents provide a wide range of effective professional writing models for students to emulate, including e-mails, résumés, cover letters, reports, proposals, brochures, and questionnaires. Tutorials show students how to maximize free online tools to access projects across platforms, design dynamic presentations, develop podcasts, manage their personal brand, and build common citations in APA and MLA styles. Diagnostics provide opportunities to assess areas for improvement and assign additional exercises based on students’ needs. Visual reports show performance by topic, class, and student as well as improvement over time. Prebuilt units — including readings, videos, and quizzes —
29
are easy to adapt by mixing your materials with our high- quality multimedia content and ready-made assessment options, such as LearningCurve adaptive quizzing and Exercise Central. Use LaunchPad on its own or integrate it with your school’s learning management system so that your students are always on the same page.
LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing can be purchased on
its own or packaged with the print book at a significant
discount. An activation code is required. To order LaunchPad
Solo for Professional Writing with the print handbook, use ISBN
978-1-319-23939-8. For more information, go to
launchpadworks.com.
Choose from Alternative Formats of The Business Writer’s Handbook Bedford/St. Martin’s offers a range of formats. Choose what
works best for you and your students:
Spiral-bound edition To order the spiral-bound edition, use ISBN 978-1-319-05849-4. Popular e-book formats For details of our e-book partners, visit macmillanlearning.com/ebooks.
Select Value Packages Add value to your text by packaging Writer’s Help 2.0 with The
Business Writer’s Handbook at a significant discount. Contact
your sales representative for more information. Writer’s Help
30
2.0 is a powerful online writing resource that helps students
find answers, whether they are searching for writing advice on
their own or as part of an assignment.
Smart search. Built on research with more than 1,600 student writers, the smart search in Writer’s Help provides reliable results even when students use novice terms, such as flow and unstuck. Trusted content from our best-selling handbooks. Choose Writer’s Help 2.0, Hacker Version, or Writer’s Help 2.0, Lunsford Version, and ensure that students have clear advice and examples for all of their writing questions. Diagnostics that help establish a baseline for instruction. Assign diagnostics to identify areas of strength and areas for improvement and to help students plan a course of study. Use visual reports to track performance by topic, class, and student as well as improvement over time. Adaptive exercises that engage students. Writer’s Help 2.0 includes LearningCurve, game-like online quizzing that adapts to what students already know and helps them focus on what they need to learn.
Student access is packaged with The Business Writer’s
Handbook at a significant discount. Order ISBN 978-1-319-23941-
1 for Writer’s Help 2.0, Hacker Version, or ISBN 978-1-319-
23945-9 for Writer’s Help 2.0, Lunsford Version, to ensure that
your students have easy access to online writing support.
Students who rent or buy a used book can purchase access;
instructors may request free access at
31
macmillanlearning.com/writershelp2.
Instructor Resources You have a lot to do in your course. We want to make it easy for
you to find the support you need — and to find it quickly.
Suggestions for structuring your course, including sample
course plans, can be downloaded from macmillanlearning.com.
Visit the instructor’s tab for The Business Writer’s Handbook.
32
Five Steps to Successful Writing Successful writing on the job is not the product of inspiration,
nor is it merely the spoken word converted to print; it is the
result of knowing how to structure information using both text
and design to achieve an intended purpose for a clearly defined
audience. The best way to ensure that your writing will succeed — whether it is a proposal, a résumé, a Web page, or any other
document — is to approach writing using the following steps:
1. Preparation 2. Research 3. Organization 4. Writing 5. Revision
You will no doubt need to follow those steps consciously at first.
The same is true the first time you use new software, interview
a job candidate, or chair a committee meeting. With practice,
the steps become nearly automatic. This is not to suggest that
writing becomes easy — it does not. However, the easiest and
most efficient way to write effectively is to do it systematically.
As you master the five steps, keep in mind that they are
interrelated and often overlap. For example, your readers’
needs and your purpose, which you determine in step 1, will
affect decisions you make in subsequent steps. You may also
need to retrace steps. When you conduct research, for example,
you may realize that you need to revise your initial impression
33
of the document’s purpose and audience. Similarly, when you
begin to organize in step 3, you may discover the need to return
to research (step 2) to gather more information.
The time required for each step varies with different writing
tasks. When writing an informal memo, for example, you might
accomplish the first three steps (preparation, research, and
organization) by simply listing the points in the order you want
to cover them. In such situations, you gather and organize
information mentally as you consider your purpose and
audience. For a formal report, the first three steps require well-
organized research, careful note-taking, and detailed outlining.
For a routine e-mail message to a coworker, the first four steps
merge as you type the information onto the screen. In short, the
five steps expand, contract, and at times must be repeated to fit
the complexity or context of the writing task.
Dividing the writing process into steps is especially useful
when you are writing as a part of a team. In that case, you
typically divide work among team members, keep track of a
project, and save time by not duplicating efforts. When you
collaborate, you can use e-mail to share text and other files,
suggest improvements to one an other’s work, and generally
keep everyone informed of your progress as you follow the
steps in the writing process.
Preparation Writing, like most professional tasks, requires solid
34
preparation. In fact, adequate preparation is as important as
writing a draft. In preparation for writing, your goal is to
accomplish the following four major tasks:
Establish your primary purpose. Assess your audience (or readers) and the context. Determine the scope of your coverage. Select the appropriate medium. See selecting the medium.
Establishing Your Purpose To establish your primary purpose, simply ask yourself what
you want your readers to know, to believe, or to be able to do
after they have finished reading what you have written. Be
precise. Often a writer states a purpose so broadly that it is
almost useless. A purpose such as “to report on possible
locations for a new research facility” is too general. However,
“to compare the relative advantages of Paris, Singapore, and
San Francisco as possible locations for a new research facility
so that top management can choose the best one” is a purpose
statement that can guide you throughout the writing process. In
addition to your primary purpose, consider possible secondary
purposes for your document. For example, a secondary purpose
of the research-facility report might be to make corporate
executive readers aware of the staffing needs of the new facility
so that they can ensure its smooth operation in whichever
location is selected.
Assessing Your Audience and Context The next task is to assess your audience. Again, be precise and
1
35
ask key questions. Who exactly is your reader? Do you have
multiple readers? Who needs to see or to use the document?
What are your readers’ needs in relation to your subject? What
are your readers’ attitudes about the subject? (Are they
skeptical? Supportive? Anxious? Bored?) What do your readers
already know about the subject? Should you define basic
terminology, or will such definitions merely bore, or even
impede, your readers? Are you communicating with
international readers and therefore dealing with issues inherent
in global communication? To be a successful writer in any
language, you must understand the cultural values that underlie
the language in which you are writing. In the United States,
conciseness, coherence, and clarity characterize good writing.
Make sure readers can follow your writing, and say only what is
necessary to communicate your message.
For the research-facility report, the readers are described as
“top management.” Who is included in that category? Will one
of the people evaluating the report be the human resources
manager? That person would likely be interested in the
availability of qualified professionals as well as in the presence
of training, housing, and even recreational facilities available to
potential employees in each city. The purchasing manager
would be concerned with available sources for needed
materials. The marketing manager would give priority to a
facility’s proximity to the primary markets and transportation to
important clients. The chief financial officer would want to
know about land and building costs and about each city’s tax
36
structure. The chief executive officer would be interested in all
this information and perhaps more. As in this example, many
workplace documents have audiences composed of multiple
readers. You can accommodate their needs through one of a
number of approaches described in the entry audience.
Part of knowing the needs and interests of your readers is
learning as much as you can about the context. Simply put,
context is the environment or circumstances in which writers
produce documents and within which readers interpret their
meanings. Everything is written within a context, as is
illustrated in many of the entries and examples throughout this
book. To determine the effect of context on the research-facility
report, you might ask both specific and general questions about
the situation and about your readers’ backgrounds: Is this the
company’s first new facility, or has the company chosen
locations for new facilities before? Have the readers visited all
three cities? Have they already seen other reports on the three
cities? What is the corporate culture in which your readers
work, and what are its key values? What specific factors, such as
competition, finance, and regulation, are recognized as
important within the organization?
Determining the Scope Determining your purpose and assessing your readers and
context will help you decide what to include and what not to
include in your writing. Those decisions establish the scope of
your writing project. If you do not clearly define the scope, you
37
will spend needless hours on research because you will not be
sure what kind of information you need or even how much.
Given the purpose and audience established for the report on
facility locations, the scope would include such information as
land and building costs, available labor force, cultural issues,
transportation options, and proximity to suppliers. However, it
would probably not include the early history of the cities being
considered or their climate and geological features, unless
those aspects were directly related to your particular business.
Selecting the Medium Finally, you need to determine the most appropriate medium
for communicating your message. Professionals on the job face
a wide array of options — from e-mail, text messaging, and
videoconferencing to more traditional means, like letters,
memos, reports, and face-to-face meetings.
The most important considerations in selecting the
appropriate medium are the audience and the purpose of the
communication. For example, if you need to collaborate with
someone to solve a problem or if you need to establish rapport
with someone, written exchanges would be far less efficient
than a phone call or a face-to-face meeting. However, if you
need to use precise wording or you need to provide a record of a
complex message, communicating in writing would be best. If
you need to make information that is frequently revised
accessible to employees at a large company, the best choice
might be to place the information on the company’s intranet
38
site. If reviewers need to make handwritten comments on a
proposal, you may need to provide paper copies that can be
faxed, or you can use collaborative software so that reviewers
can insert comments electronically. The comparative
advantages and primary characteristics of the most typical
means of communication are discussed in selecting the
medium.
Research The only way to be sure that you can write about a complex
subject is to thoroughly understand it. To do that, you must
conduct adequate research, whether that means conducting an
extensive investigation for a major proposal — through
interviewing, library and Internet research, careful note-
taking, and documenting sources — or simply checking a
reputable Web site and jotting down points before you send an
e-mail message to a colleague.
Methods of Research Researchers frequently distinguish between primary and
secondary research, depending on the types of sources
consulted and the method of gathering information. Primary
research refers to the gathering of raw data compiled from
interviews, direct observation, surveys, experiments,
questionnaires, audio and video recordings, and the like. In
fact, direct observation and hands-on experience are the only
ways to obtain certain kinds of information, such as the
behavior of people and animals, certain natural phenomena,
39
mechanical processes, and the operation of systems and
equipment. Secondary research refers to gathering information
that has been analyzed, assessed, evaluated, compiled, or
otherwise organized into accessible form. Such forms or
sources include books, articles, reports, Web documents, e-mail
discussions, and brochures. Use the methods most appropriate
to your needs, recognizing that some projects may require
several types of research and that collaborative projects may
require those research tasks to be distributed among team
members.
Sources of Information As you conduct research, keep in mind all the sources of
information that are available to you:
Your own knowledge and that of your colleagues The knowledge of people outside your workplace, gathered through interviewing for information Internet sources, including Web sites, directories, archives, and discussion groups Library resources, including databases and indexes of articles as well as books and reference works Printed and electronic sources in the workplace, such as brochures, memos, e-mail, and Web documents
The amount of research you will need to do depends on the
scope of your project.
Organization
40
Without organization, the material gathered during your
research will be incoherent to your readers. To organize
information effectively, you need to determine the best way to
structure your ideas; that is, you must choose a primary method
of development.
Methods of Development To choose the development method best suited to your
document, consider your subject, your readers’ needs, and your
purpose. An appropriate method will help focus your
information and make it easy for readers to follow your
presentation.
For example, if you were writing instructions for assembling
office equipment, you might naturally present the steps of the
process in the order readers should perform them: the
sequential method of development. If you were writing about
the history of an organization, your account might naturally go
from the beginning to the present: the chronological method of
development. If your subject naturally lends itself to a certain
method of development, use it — do not attempt to impose
another method on it.
Often you will need to combine methods of development. For
example, a persuasive brochure for a charitable organization
might combine a specific-to-general method of development
with a cause-and-effect method of development. That is, you
could begin with persuasive case histories of individual people
41
in need and then move to general information about the
positive effects of donations on recipients.
Outlining Once you have chosen a method of development, you are ready
to prepare an outline. Outlining breaks large or complex
subjects into manageable parts. It also enables you to
emphasize key points by placing them in the positions of
greatest importance. By structuring your thinking at an early
stage, a well-developed outline ensures that your document will
be complete and logically organized, allowing you to focus
exclusively on writing when you begin the rough draft. An
outline can be especially helpful for maintaining a collaborative
writing team’s focus throughout a large project. However, even
a short letter or memo needs the logic and structure that an
outline provides, whether the outline exists in your mind, on-
screen, or on paper.
At this point, consider layout and design elements that will
be helpful to your readers and appropriate to your subject and
purpose. For example, if visuals such as photographs or tables
will be useful, this is a good time to think about where they may
be deployed and what kinds of visual elements will be effective,
especially if they need to be prepared by someone else while
you write and revise the draft. The outline can also suggest
where headings, lists, and other special design features may be
useful.
42
Writing When you have established your purpose, your readers’ needs,
and your scope, and you have completed your research and
your outline, you will be well prepared to write a first draft.
Expand your outline into paragraphs without worrying about
grammar, usage, or punctuation. Writing and revising are
different activities; refinements come with revision.
Write the rough draft, concentrating entirely on converting
your outline into sentences and paragraphs. You might try
writing as though you were explaining your subject to a reader
sitting across from you. Do not worry about a good opening.
Just start. Do not be concerned in the rough draft about exact
word choice unless it comes quickly and easily — concentrate
instead on ideas.
Even with good preparation, writing the draft remains a
chore for many writers. The most effective way to get started
and keep going is to use your outline as a map for your first
draft. Do not wait for inspiration — you need to treat writing a
draft as you would any on-the-job task. The entry writing a
draft describes tactics used by experienced writers; discover
which ones are best suited to you and your task.
Consider writing the introduction last because then you will
know more precisely what is in the body of the draft. Your
opening should announce the subject and give readers essential
background information, such as the document’s primary
43
purpose. For longer documents, an introduction should serve as
a frame into which readers can fit the detailed information that
follows.
Finally, you will need to write a conclusion that ties the main
ideas together and emphatically makes a final, significant point.
The final point may be to recommend a course of action, make
a prediction or a judgment, or merely summarize your main
points; the way you conclude depends on the purpose of your
writing and your readers’ needs.
Revision The clearer a finished piece of writing seems to the reader, the
more effort the writer has likely put into its revision. If you
have followed the steps of the writing process to this point, you
will have a rough draft that needs to be revised. Revising,
however, requires a different frame of mind than does writing
the draft. During revision, be eager to find and correct faults,
and be honest. Be hard on yourself for the benefit of your
readers. Read and evaluate the draft as if you were a reader
seeing it for the first time.
Check your draft for accuracy, completeness, and
effectiveness in achieving your purpose and meeting your
readers’ needs and expectations. Trim extraneous information:
Your writing should give readers exactly what they need, but it
should not burden them with unnecessary information or
sidetrack them into loosely related subjects.
44
Do not try to revise for everything at once. Read your rough
draft several times, each time looking for and correcting a
different set of problems or errors. Concentrate first on larger
issues, such as unity and coherence; save mechanical
corrections, like spelling and punctuation, for later
proofreading.
Finally, for important documents, consider having others
review your writing and make suggestions for improvement.
For collaborative writing, of course, team members must
review one another’s work on the various segments of the
document as well as the final master draft. Use the “Checklist of
the Writing Process” on pages xxv–xxvi to guide you not only as
you revise but also throughout the writing process. See also
ethics in writing.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Style Guides and Standards organizations and professional associations often follow such guides as The Chicago Manual of Style, MLA Style Manual and Guide to Scholarly Publishing, and United States
Government Publishing Office Style Manual to ensure consistency in their publications on issues of usage, format, and documentation. Because this type of advice often varies from one guide to another, some organizations set their own standards for documents. Where such standards or specific style guides are recommended or required by regulation or policy, be sure to follow those style guidelines.
Throughout this book, words and phrases shown as links — underlined and set in1
45
boldface type — refer to specific entries in the book.
46
Checklist of the Writing Process This checklist arranges key entries of The Business Writer’s
Handbook according to the sequence presented in “Five Steps to
Successful Writing.” This checklist is useful both for following
the steps and for diagnosing writing problems.
Preparation ✓ Establish your purpose ✓ Identify your audience or readers ✓ Consider the context ✓ Determine your scope of coverage ✓ Select the medium
Research ✓ Brainstorm to determine what you already know ✓ Conduct research ✓ Take notes (note-taking) ✓ Interview for information ✓ Create and use questionnaires ✓ Avoid plagiarism ✓ Document sources
Organization ✓ Choose the best methods of development ✓ Outline your notes and ideas ✓ Develop and integrate visuals ✓ Consider layout and design
47
logic errors positive writing voice
✓ Check for ethics in writing biased language copyrights, patents, and trademarks plagiarism
✓ Check for appropriate word choice abstract / concrete words affectation, buzzwords, jargon, and plain language clichés connotation / denotation defining terms
✓ Eliminate problems with grammar
Writing a Draft ✓ Select an appropriate point of view ✓ Adopt an appropriate style and tone ✓ Use effective sentence construction ✓ Construct effective paragraphs ✓ Use quotations and paraphrasing ✓ Write an introduction ✓ Write a conclusion ✓ Choose a title
Revision ✓ Check for unity and coherence
conciseness
48
pace transition
✓ Check for sentence variety emphasis parallel structure subordination
✓ Check for clarity agreement ambiguity awkwardness case modifiers pronoun reference sentence faults
✓ Review mechanics and punctuation abbreviations capitalization contractions dates italics numbers proofreading spelling
49
The Business Writer’s Handbook
50
A
51
a / an A and an are indefinite articles because the noun designated by
the article is not a specific person, place, or thing but one of a
group.
► The insurance agent sold a policy. [This is not a specific policy but an unnamed policy.]
Use a before words or abbreviations beginning with a
consonant or a vowel with a consonant sound. See also
adjectives.
► We were awarded a DMV contract. ► It was a historic event for the organization. [Historic begins
with the consonant h.] ► The year’s activities are summarized in a one-page report.
[One begins with the consonant sound “wuh.”]
Use an before words or abbreviations beginning with a vowel or
a consonant with a vowel sound.
► He seems an unlikely candidate for the job. ► The applicant arrived an hour early. [Hour begins with a
silent h.] ► She received an SBA loan. [SBA begins with the vowel
sound “ess.”]
52
a lot A lot is often incorrectly written as one word (alot). The phrase
a lot is informal and often too vague for business writing. Use
many or numerous for estimates, or give a specific number or
amount.
53
abbreviations DIRECTORY
Using Abbreviations Writer’s Checklist: Using Abbreviations Forming Abbreviations
Abbreviations are shortened versions of words or combinations
of the first letters of words (Corp./Corporation, URL/ Uniform
Resource Locator). If used appropriately, abbreviations can be
convenient for both the reader and the writer. Like symbols,
they can be important space savers in business writing.
Abbreviations that are formed by combining the initial letter
of each word in a multiword term are called initialisms.
Initialisms are pronounced as separate letters (SEC/Securities
and Exchange Commission). Abbreviations that combine the
first letter or letters of several words — and can be pronounced
— are called acronyms (PIN/personal identification number,
LAN/local area network).
Using Abbreviations The most important consideration in the use of abbreviations is
whether they will be understood by your audience. The same
abbreviation, for example, can have two different meanings
(NEA stands for both National Education Association and the
54
National Endowment for the Arts). Like jargon, shortened forms are easily understood within a group of specialists;
outside the group, however, shortened forms might be
incomprehensible. In fact, abbreviations can be easily
overused, either as an affectation or in a misguided attempt to
make writing concise, even with instant messaging and live
chat, where abbreviations are often appropriate. Remember
that memos, e-mail, or reports addressed to specific people
may be read by others, so consider those secondary audiences
as well. A good rule to follow: “When in doubt, spell it out.”
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Using Abbreviations
✓ Except for commonly used abbreviations (U.S., a.m.), spell out a term to be abbreviated the first time it is used, followed by the abbreviation in parentheses. Thereafter, the abbreviation may be used alone.
✓ In long documents, repeat the full term in parentheses after the abbreviation at regular intervals to remind readers of the abbreviation’s meaning. For digital texts, consider linking abbreviations to a glossary or providing a pop-up definition that appears when the cursor hovers over an abbreviation.
✓ Do not add an additional period at the end of a sentence that ends with an abbreviation. (“The official name of the company is DataBase, Inc.”)
✓ For abbreviations specific to your profession or discipline, use a style guide recommended by your professional organization or company.
✓ Write acronyms in capital letters without periods. The only
55
exceptions are acronyms that have become accepted as common nouns, such as scuba (self-contained underwater breathing apparatus).
✓ Generally, use periods for lowercase initialisms (a.k.a., p.m.) but not for uppercase ones (GDP, IRA). Exceptions include geographic names (U.S., E.U.) and the traditional expression of academic degrees (B.A., M.B.A.).
✓ Form the plural of an acronym or initialism by adding a lowercase s. Do not use an apostrophe (CARs, DVDs).
✓ Do not follow an abbreviation with a word that repeats the final term in the abbreviation (ATM location, not ATM machine location).
✓ Avoid creating your own abbreviations; they will confuse readers.
Forming Abbreviations Names of Organizations A company may include in its name a term such as Brothers,
Incorporated, Corporation, Company, or Limited Liability
Company. If the term is abbreviated in the official company
name that appears on letterhead stationery or on its Web site,
use the abbreviated form: Bros., Inc., Corp., Co., or LLC. If the
term is not abbreviated in the official name, spell it out in
writing, except in addresses, footnotes, bibliographies, and
lists where abbreviations may be used. Likewise, use an
ampersand (&) only if it appears in the official company name.
For names of divisions within organizations, terms such as
Department and Division should be abbreviated only when
space is limited (Dept. and Div.).
56
Measurements Except for abbreviations that may be confused with words (in.
for inch and gal. for gallon), abbreviations of measurement
terms do not require periods (yd for yard and qt for quart).
Abbreviations of units of measure are identical in the singular
and plural: 1 cm and 15 cm (not 15 cms). Some abbreviations
can be used in combination with symbols (°F for degrees
Fahrenheit and ft for square feet).
For a listing of abbreviations for the basic units used in the
International System of Units (SI), see
http://physics.nist.gov/cuu/Units/units.html. For additional
definitions and background, search the National Institute of
Standards and Technology Web site at www.nist.gov and
generally online for units of information. For information on
abbreviating dates and time, see numbers.
Personal Names and Titles Personal names should generally not be abbreviated: Thomas
(not Thos.) and William (not Wm.). An academic, civil,
religious, or military title should be spelled out and lowercase
when it does not precede a name. (“The captain checked the
orders.”) When preceding names, some titles are customarily
abbreviated (Dr. Smith, Mr. Mills, Ms. Katz). See also Ms. / Miss
/ Mrs.
An abbreviation of a title may follow the name; however, be
certain that it does not duplicate a title before the name
2
57
(Angeline Martinez, Ph.D., or Dr. Angeline Martinez). When
addressing correspondence and including names in other
documents, you should normally spell out titles (The Honorable
Mary J. Holt; Professor Charles Matlin).
Common Scholarly Abbreviations and Terms The following is a partial list of abbreviations commonly used in
reference books and for documenting sources in research
papers and reports. Other than in such documents, generally
avoid these abbreviations.
anon. anonymous
bibliog. bibliography, bibliographer, bibliographic
ca., c. circa, “about” (used with approximate dates: ca. 1756)
cf. confer, “compare”
chap. chapter
diss. dissertation
ed., eds. edited by, editor(s), edition(s)
e.g. exempli gratia, “for example” (see e.g. / i.e.)
esp. especially
et al. et alii, “and others”
etc. et cetera, “and so forth” (see etc.)
f., ff. and the following page(s) or line(s)
GPO Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
i.e. id est, “that is”
MS, MSS manuscript, manuscripts
n., nn. note, notes (used immediately after page number: 56n., 56n.3, 56nn.3–5)
N.B., n.b.
nota bene, “take notice, mark well”
n.d. no date (of publication)
58
n.p. no place (of publication); no publisher; no page
p., pp. page, pages
proc. proceedings
pub. published by, publisher, publication
rev. revised by, revised, revision; review, reviewed by (spell out “review” where “rev.” might be ambiguous)
rpt. reprinted by, reprint
sec., secs.
section, sections
sic so, thus; inserted after a misspelled or misused word in quotations ([sic]) (see brackets)
supp., suppl.
supplement
trans. translated by, translator, translation
UP University Press (used in MLA style, as in Oxford UP)
viz. videlicet, “namely”
vol., vols.
volume, volumes
vs., v. versus, “against” (v. preferred in titles of legal cases)
59
above Avoid using above to refer to a preceding passage or visual,
because its reference is vague and often an affectation. The
same is true of afore-said and aforementioned. (See also former
/ latter.) To refer to something previously mentioned, repeat
the noun or pronoun, or construct your paragraph so that your
reference is obvious.
60
absolutely Absolutely means “definitely,” “entirely,” “completely,” or
“unquestionably.” Avoid it as a redundant intensifier to mean
“very” or “much.”
61
abstract / concrete words Abstract words refer to general ideas, qualities, conditions, acts,
or relationships — intangible things that cannot be detected by
the five senses (sight, hearing, touch, taste, and smell), such as
learning, leadership, and technology. Concrete words identify
things that can be perceived by the five senses, such as diploma,
manager, and keyboard.
Abstract words must often be further defined or described.
Abstract words are best used with concrete words to help make
intangible concepts specific and vivid.
► Public transportation [abstract] in Chicago includes buses [concrete] and commuter trains [concrete].
See also context, purpose, and word choice.
62
abstracts An abstract summarizes and highlights the major points of a
formal report, journal article, dissertation, or other long work.
Its primary purpose is to enable readers to decide whether to
read the work in full. For a discussion of how summaries differ
from abstracts, see executive summaries.
Although abstracts, typically 200 to 250 words long, are
published with the longer works they condense, they can also
be published separately in periodical indexes, by abstracting
services, and in introductory sections of online journals (see
research). For this reason, an abstract should be readable apart
from the original document and contain appropriate key search
terms for researchers using online databases.
Types of Abstracts Depending on the kind of information they contain, abstracts
are often classified as descriptive or informative (see Figure A–
1). A descriptive abstract summarizes the purpose, scope, and
methods used to arrive at the reported findings. It is a slightly
expanded table of contents in sentence and paragraph form. A
descriptive abstract need not be longer than several sentences.
An informative abstract is an expanded version of the
descriptive abstract, including a summary of any results,
conclusions, and recommendations. The informative abstract
retains the tone and essential scope of the original work while
omitting its details. The first two paragraphs of the abstract
63
shown in Figure A–1 alone would be descriptive; with the
addition of the paragraphs that detail the findings and
conclusions of the report, the abstract becomes informative.
FIGURE A–1. Informative Abstract (from a Report)
64
The type of abstract you should write depends on your
audience and the organization or publication for which you are
writing. Informative abstracts work best for wide audiences that
need to know conclusions and recommendations; descriptive
abstracts work best for compilations, such as proceedings and
progress reports that do not contain conclusions or
recommendations.
Writing Strategies Write the abstract after finishing the report or document.
Otherwise, the abstract may not accurately reflect the longer
work. Begin with a topic sentence that announces the subject
and scope of your original document. Then, using the major
and minor headings of your outline or table of contents to
distinguish primary ideas from secondary ones, decide what
material is relevant to your abstract. (See outlining.) Write with
clarity and conciseness, eliminating unnecessary words and
ideas. Do not, however, become so terse that you omit articles
(a, an, or the) and important transitional words and phrases
(however, therefore, but, next). Write complete sentences, but
avoid stringing together a group of short sentences end to end;
instead, combine ideas by using subordination and parallel
structure. Spell out all but the most common abbreviations. In
a report, an abstract follows the title page and is numbered page
iii.
65
accept / except Accept is a verb meaning “consent to,” “agree to take,” or
“admit willingly.” (“I accept the responsibility.”) Except is
normally used as a preposition meaning “other than” or
“excluding.” (“We agreed on everything except the schedule.”)
66
acceptances / refusals (for employment) When you decide to accept a job offer, you can notify your new
employer by telephone or in a meeting — but to make your
decision official, you should send an acceptance in writing.
What you include in your message and whether you send a
letter or an e-mail depends on your previous conversations
with your new employer. See also correspondence. Figure A–2
shows an example of a job acceptance written by a graduating
student. (See his résumé in Figure R–8 on Page 470.)
FIGURE A–2. Acceptance (for Employment)
When you decide to reject a job offer (Figure A–3), send a
written job refusal to make that decision official, even if you
67
have already notified the employer during a meeting or on the
phone. Writing to an employer is an important goodwill
gesture. For general advice on handling refusals and negative
messages, see refusal letters.
FIGURE A–3. Refusal (for Employment)
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Be especially tactful and courteous — the employer you are refusing has spent time and effort interviewing you and may have counted on your accepting the job. Remember, you may want to apply for another job at that company in the future.
68
acknowledgments When a colleague or client sends you something or makes a
request, you should acknowledge what was sent, respond to the
request, or explain that you cannot immediately respond to the
request in a short, polite note. Send a message, like the one
shown in Figure A–4, in the medium used or preferred by your
reader, whether a letter, an e-mail, or a text message. See also
correspondence.
FIGURE A–4. Acknowledgment
69
acronyms and initialisms (see abbreviations)
70
active voice (see voice)
71
ad hoc Ad hoc is Latin for “for this” or “for this particular occasion.” An
ad hoc committee is one set up temporarily to consider a
particular issue. The term is not italicized. See foreign words in
English.
72
adapt / adept / adopt Adapt is a verb meaning “adjust to a new situation.” Adept is an
adjective meaning “highly skilled.” Adopt is a verb meaning
“take or use as one’s own.”
► The company will adopt a policy of finding executives who are adept managers and who can adapt to new situations.
73
adapting to new technologies When faced with a new technology, ask “How much do I need
to know about the specific technology to do my work?” What
you need to learn will depend on your workplace context.
Sometimes you may need only basic knowledge to accomplish
specific and limited tasks. Other times, you may need much
more in-depth knowledge — even expert knowledge — to serve
as an adviser or as a resource for your colleagues. See also
selecting the medium.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Strategies for Learning a New Technology
✓ Experiment. Acquaint yourself with a new technology simply by using it until it becomes familiar.
✓ Conduct careful Internet searches. Make terminology precise by including the name of the tool and keywords that describe your specific problem.
✓ Consult IT staff and trusted colleagues. Seek help from your organization’s technology specialists and trainers as well as your tech-savvy colleagues.
✓ Use built-in help and official help manuals. Use tutorials, digital or printed instructional materials, and links to searchable online help sites.
✓ Take product workshops and online tutorials. Workshops teach everything from the basics to advanced functions of devices and software, and you benefit from the experiences of other
74
attendees. Check for product vendor workshops and tutorials before looking for free and paid tutorials from such sites as Lynda.com, PCWorld, and YouTube.
✓ Refer to third-party help manuals. These documents often simplify information with full-color printing, photos, and a casual, friendly tone.
75
adjectives DIRECTORY
Limiting Adjectives Comparison of Adjectives Placement of Adjectives Use of Adjectives
An adjective is any word that modifies a noun or pronoun.
Descriptive adjectives identify a quality of a noun or pronoun
(hot surface). Limiting adjectives impose boundaries on the
noun or pronoun (three phone lines).
Limiting Adjectives Limiting adjectives include the following categories:
Articles (a, an, the) Demonstrative adjectives (this, that, these, those) Possessive adjectives (my, your, his, her, its, our, their) Numeral adjectives (two, first) Indefinite adjectives (all, none, some, any)
Articles Articles (a, an, the) are traditionally classified as adjectives
because they modify nouns by either limiting them or making
them more specific. See also a / an, articles, and English as a
second language.
76
Demonstrative Adjectives A demonstrative adjective points to the thing it modifies,
specifying the object’s position in space or time. This and these
specify a closer position; that and those specify a more remote
position.
► This version is more current than that version, which was produced last month.
► These test reports are more recent than those reported last week.
Demonstrative adjectives often cause problems when they
modify the nouns kind, type, and sort. Demonstrative adjectives
used with those nouns should agree with them in number.
► this kind, these kinds; that type, those types
Confusion often develops when the preposition of is added (this
kind of, these kinds of ) and the object of the preposition does
not conform in number to the demonstrative adjective and its
noun. See also agreement and prepositions.
Avoid demonstrative adjectives like kind, type, and sort that can
easily lead to vagueness. Be more specific. See also kind of /
sort of.
77
Possessive Adjectives Because possessive adjectives (my, your, his, her, its, our, their)
directly modify nouns, they function as adjectives, even though
they are pronoun forms (my idea, her plans, their projects). See
also functional shift.
Numeral Adjectives Numeral adjectives identify quantity, degree, or place in a
sequence. They always modify count nouns. Numeral adjectives
are divided into two subclasses: cardinal and ordinal. A cardinal
adjective expresses an exact quantity (one pencil, two
computers); an ordinal adjective expresses degree or sequence
(first quarter, second edition).
In most writing, an ordinal adjective should be spelled out if
it is a single word (tenth) and written in figures if it is more than
one word (312th). Ordinal numbers can also function as
adverbs. (“John arrived first.”) See also first / firstly and
numbers.
Indefinite Adjectives Indefinite adjectives do not designate anything specific about
the nouns they modify (some monitors, all designers). The
articles a and an are included among the indefinite adjectives (a
chair, an application).
Comparison of Adjectives Most adjectives in the positive form (for example, long) show
78
the comparative form with the suffix -er (longer) for two items
and the superlative form with the suffix -est (longest) for three
or more items. Many two-syllable adjectives and most three-
syllable adjectives are preceded by the word more or most to
form the comparative or the superlative.
► The new media center is more impressive than the old one. It is the most impressive in the county.
A few adjectives have irregular forms of comparison (much,
more, most; little, less, least). Some adjectives (round, unique,
exact, accurate) — often called absolute words — are not
logically subject to comparison. See also equal / unique /
perfect.
Placement of Adjectives When limiting and descriptive adjectives appear together, the
limiting adjectives precede the descriptive adjectives, with the
articles usually in the first position.
► The ten yellow taxis were sold at auction. [article (The), limiting adjective (ten), descriptive adjective (yellow)]
Within a sentence, adjectives may appear before the nouns they
modify (the attributive position) or after the nouns they modify
(the predicative position).
► The small jobs are given priority. [attributive position] ► The exposure is brief. [predicative position]
79
Use of Adjectives Nouns often function as adjectives to clarify the meaning of
other nouns.
► The accident report prompted a product redesign.
When adjectives modifying the same noun can be reversed and
still make sense or when they can be separated by and or or,
they should be separated by commas.
► The company seeks bright, energetic, creative managers.
Notice that there is no comma after creative. Never use a
comma between a final adjective and the noun it modifies.
When an adjective modifies a phrase, no comma is required.
► We need an updated Web-page design. [Updated modifies the phrase Web-page design.]
Writers sometimes string together a series of nouns used as
adjectives to form a unit modifier, thereby creating stacked
(jammed) modifiers, which can confuse readers.
► Your staffing-level authorization reassessment plan should result in a major improvement.
See also word choice.
Do not add -s or -es to an adjective to make it plural: the long
trip, the long trips.
80
Capitalize adjectives of origin (city, state, nation, continent):
Venetian canals, Texas longhorn steer, French government,
African deserts.
In English, verbs of feeling (bore, interest, surprise) have two
adjectival forms: the present participle (-ing) and the past
participle (-ed). Use the present participle to describe what
causes the feeling. Use the past participle to describe the person
who experiences the feeling.
► We heard the surprising election results. [The election results cause the feeling.]
► Only the losing candidate was surprised by the election results. [The candidate experienced the feeling of surprise.]
Adjectives follow nouns in English in only two cases: when
the adjective functions as a subjective complement (“That
project is not finished”) and when an adjective phrase or clause
modifies the noun (“The project that was suspended
temporarily”). In all other cases, adjectives are placed before
the noun.
When a sentence has multiple adjectives, it is often difficult
to know the right order. The guidelines illustrated in the
following example would apply in most circumstances, but
there are exceptions. (Normally, do not use a phrase with so
many stacked modifiers.) See also adverbs and articles.
81
82
adjustment messages An adjustment letter or e-mail is written in response to a
complaint and tells a customer or client what your organization
intends to do about the complaint. Although sent in reply to a
complaint, an adjustment message actually provides an
excellent opportunity to build goodwill for your organization.
An effective adjustment message, such as the examples shown
in Figures A–5 and A–6, can not only repair any damage done
but also restore the customer’s confidence in your company.
Consider that while an e-mail may allow you to respond more
quickly, a printed or an attached letter with organizational
letterhead may carry more weight.
83
84
FIGURE A–5. Adjustment (When Company Takes Responsibility)
FIGURE A–6. Partial Adjustment
No matter how unreasonable the complaint, the tone of your
response should be positive and respectful. Avoid emphasizing
the problem, but do take responsibility for it when appropriate.
Focus your response on what you are doing to correct the
problem. Settle such matters quickly and courteously, and lean
toward giving the customer or client the benefit of the doubt at
a reasonable cost to your organization. See also refusal letters
and “you” viewpoint.
85
Full Adjustments Before granting an adjustment to a claim for which your
company is at fault, first determine what happened and what
you can do to satisfy the customer. Be certain that you are
familiar with your company’s adjustment policy — and be
careful with word choice.
► We have just received your letter of May 7 about our defective gas grill.
Saying something is “defective” could be ruled in a court of law
as an admission that the product is in fact defective. When you
are in doubt, seek legal advice.
Grant adjustments graciously: A settlement made grudgingly
will do more harm than good. Not only must you be gracious,
but you must also acknowledge the error in such a way that the
customer will not lose confidence in your company. Emphasize
early what the reader will consider good news.
► Enclosed is a replacement for the damaged part. ► Yes, you were incorrectly billed for the delivery. ► Please accept our apologies for the error in your account.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
If an explanation will help restore your reader’s confidence, explain what caused the problem. You might point out any steps you are taking to prevent a recurrence of the problem. Explain that customer feedback
86
helps your firm keep the quality of its product or service high. Close
pleasantly, looking toward the future, and avoid recalling the problem in your closing (do not write, “Again, we apologize . . .”).
Partial Adjustments You may sometimes need to grant a partial adjustment — even if
a claim is not really justified — to regain the lost goodwill of a
customer or client. If, for example, a customer incorrectly uses
a product or service, you may need to help that person better
understand the correct use of that product or service. In such a
circumstance, remember that your customer or client believes
that his or her claim is justified. Therefore, you should give the
explanation before granting the claim — otherwise, your reader
may never get to the explanation. If your explanation
establishes customer responsibility, do so tactfully. Figure A–6
is an example of a partial adjustment message. See also
correspondence.
87
adverbs An adverb modifies the action or condition expressed by a verb.
► The wrecking ball hit the side of the building hard. [The adverb tells how the wrecking ball hit the building.]
An adverb can also modify an adjective, another adverb, or a
clause.
► The brochure design used remarkably bright colors. [Remarkably modifies the adjective bright.]
► The redesigned brake pad lasted much longer than the previous version. [Much modifies the adverb longer.]
► Surprisingly, the engine failed. [Surprisingly modifies the clause the engine failed.]
Use adverbs sparingly in business writing. Because they are
often subjective (hot/cold, hard/soft, long/short), consider
providing specifics that define them or provide context. How
hot? (Give the temperature.) How fast? (State the speed or rate.)
How short or long? (State the length.) How expensive or
efficient? (Compare relative costs or provide data on time
savings.)
Types of Adverbs A simple adverb can answer one of the following questions:
Where? (adverb of place)
88
► Move the display forward slightly.
When? or How often? (adverb of time)
► Replace the thermostat immediately. ► I worked overtime twice this week.
How? (adverb of manner)
► Add the deductions cautiously.
How much? (adverb of degree)
► The nearly completed report was sent to the director.
An interrogative adverb can ask a question (Where? When?
Why? How?).
► How many hours did you work last week? ► Why was the hard drive reformatted?
A conjunctive adverb can modify the clause that it introduces as
well as join two independent clauses with a semicolon. The
most common conjunctive adverbs are however, nevertheless,
moreover, therefore, further, then, consequently, besides,
accordingly, also, and thus.
► I rarely work on weekends; however, this weekend will be an exception.
In this example, note that a semicolon precedes and a comma
follows however. The conjunctive adverb (however) introduces
89
the independent clause (this weekend will be an exception) and
indicates its relationship to the preceding independent clause (I
rarely work on weekends). See also transition.
Comparison of Adverbs Most one-syllable adverbs (such as fast) show comparison with
the suffixes -er (faster, comparative form) and -est (fastest,
superlative form).
Most adverbs with two or more syllables end in -ly, and most
adverbs ending in -ly are compared by inserting the
comparative more or less or the superlative most or least in
front of them.
► The patient recovered more quickly than the staff had expected.
► Most surprisingly, the engine failed during the final test phase.
A few irregular adverbs require a change in form to indicate
comparison (well, better, best; badly, worse, worst; far, farther,
farthest).
► The training program functions well. ► Our training program functions better than most others in
the industry. ► Many consider our training program the best in the
industry.
90
Placement of Adverbs An adverb should usually be placed in front of the verb it
modifies.
► The pilot methodically performed the preflight check.
An adverb may, however, follow the verb (or the verb and its
object) that it modifies.
► The system failed unexpectedly. ► They replaced the battery quickly.
In a verb phrase, the adverb is typically placed between the
helping verb and the main verb.
► In this temperature range, the pressure will quickly drop.
Adverbs such as only, nearly, almost, just, and hardly should be
placed immediately before the words they limit. See also
modifiers and only.
91
affect / effect Affect is a verb that means “influence.” (“The decision could
affect the company’s stock value.”) Effect can function as a
noun that means “result” (“The decision had a positive effect”)
or as a verb that means “bring about” or “cause.” However,
avoid using effect as a verb when you can replace it with a less
formal word, such as make or produce.
92
affectation Affectation is the use of language that is more formal, technical,
or showy than necessary to communicate information to the
reader. Affectation is a widespread writing problem in the
workplace because many people feel that it lends a degree of
authority to their writing. In fact, affectation can alienate
customers, clients, and colleagues because it forces readers to
work harder to understand the writer’s meaning.
Affected writing typically contains inappropriately abstract,
highly technical, or foreign words and is often liberally
sprinkled with trendy buzzwords.
ETHICS NOTE
Jargon and euphemisms can become affectation, especially if their purpose is to hide relevant facts or give a false impression of competence. See ethics in writing.
Writers easily slip into affectation through the use of long
variants — words created by adding prefixes and suffixes to
simpler words (orientate for orient; utilization for use).
Unnecessarily formal words (such as penultimate for next to
last), created words using -ese (such as managementese), and
outdated words (such as aforesaid) can produce affectation.
(See also above.) Elegant variation — attempting to avoid
repeating a word within a paragraph by substituting a
93
pretentious synonym — is also a form of affectation. Either
repeat the term or use a pronoun.
Another type of affectation is gobbledygook, which is wordy,
roundabout writing with many legal- and technical-sounding
terms (such as wherein and morphing). See also clichés,
conciseness, nominalizations, and word choice.
94
affinity Affinity refers to the attraction of two persons or things to each
other. Affinity should not be used to mean “ability” or
“aptitude.”
95
agreement DIRECTORY
Subject-Verb Agreement Compound Subjects Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement
Grammatical agreement is the correspondence in form between
different elements of a sentence to indicate number, person,
gender, and case.
A subject and its verb must agree in number.
► The design is acceptable. [The singular subject, design, requires the singular verb, is.]
► The new products are going into production soon. [The plural subject, products, requires the plural verb, are.]
A subject and its verb must agree in person.
► I am the designer. [The first-person singular subject, I, requires the first-person singular verb, am.]
► They are the designers. [The third-person plural subject, they, requires the third-person plural verb, are.]
A pronoun and its antecedent must agree in person, number,
gender, and case.
► The employees report that they are more efficient in the
96
new facility. [The third-person plural subject, employees, requires the third-person plural pronoun, they.]
► Kaye McGuire will meet with the staff on Friday, when she will assign duties. [The third-person singular subject, Kaye McGuire, requires she, the third-person feminine pronoun, in the subjective case.]
See also sentence construction.
Subject-Verb Agreement Subject-verb agreement is not affected by intervening phrases
and clauses.
► One in 20 hard drives we receive from our suppliers is faulty. [The verb, is, must agree in number with the subject, one, not hard drives or suppliers.]
The same is true when nouns fall between a subject and its
verb.
► Only one of the emergency lights was functioning. [The subject of the verb is one, not lights.]
► Each of the managers supervises a very large region. [The subject of the verb is each, not managers.]
Note that one and each are normally singular.
Indefinite pronouns such as some, none, all, more, and most
may be singular or plural, depending on whether they are used
with a mass noun (“Most of the oil has been used”) or with a
97
count noun (“Most of the drivers know why they are here”).
Mass nouns are singular, and count nouns are plural. Other
words, such as type, part, series, and portion, take singular
verbs even when they precede a phrase containing a plural
noun.
► A series of meetings was held to develop a marketing strategy.
► A large portion of most annual reports is devoted to promoting the corporate image.
Modifying phrases can obscure a simple subject.
► The advice of two engineers, one lawyer, and three executives was obtained before making a commitment. [The subject of the verb was is advice.]
Inverted word order can cause problems with agreement.
► From this work have come several important improvements. [The subject of the verb is improvements, not work.]
The number of a subjective complement does not affect the
number of the verb — the verb must always agree with the
subject.
► The topic of his report is employee benefits. [The subject of the sentence is topic, not benefits.]
A subject that expresses measurement, weight, mass, or total
98
often takes a singular verb even when the subject is plural in form. Such subjects are treated as a unit.
► Four weeks is the normal duration of the training program.
A verb following the relative pronoun who or that agrees in
number with the noun to which the pronoun refers (its
antecedent).
► This is one of those management problems that require careful analysis. [That refers to problems.]
► She is one of those employees who are rarely absent. [Who refers to employees.]
The word number sometimes causes confusion. When used to
mean a specific number, it is singular.
► The number of committee members was six.
When used to mean an approximate number, it is plural.
► A number of people were waiting for the announcement.
Relative pronouns (who, which, and that) may take either
singular or plural verbs, depending on whether the antecedent
is singular or plural. See also who / whom.
► He is a manager who seeks the views of others. ► He is one of those managers who seek the views of others.
Some abstract nouns are singular in meaning but plural in
99
form: mathematics, news, physics, and economics.
► News of the merger is on page 4 of the Chronicle.
Some words, such as the plural jeans and scissors, cause special
problems.
► The scissors were ordered last week. [The subject is the plural scissors.]
► A pair of scissors is on order. [The subject is the singular pair.]
A book with a plural title takes a singular verb.
► Accounting Essentials is an essential resource.
A collective noun (committee, faculty, class, jury) used as a
subject takes a singular verb when the group is thought of as a
unit and a plural verb when the individuals in the group are
thought of separately.
► The committee is unanimous in its decision. ► The committee are returning to their offices.
A clearer way to emphasize the individuals would be to use a
phrase.
► The committee members are returning to their offices.
Compound Subjects A compound subject is composed of two or more elements
100
joined by a conjunction such as and, or, nor, either . . . or, or
neither . . . nor. When the elements are connected by and, the
subject is usually plural and requires a plural verb.
► Writing skill and technical aptitude are prerequisites for this position.
One exception occurs when the elements connected by and
form a unit or refer to the same thing. In that case, the subject is
regarded as singular and takes a singular verb.
► Bacon and eggs is a high-cholesterol meal. ► Our greatest challenge and business opportunity is the
Internet.
A compound subject with a singular element and a plural
element joined by or or nor requires that the verb agree with
the closer element.
► Neither the director nor the project assistants were available.
► Neither the project assistants nor the director was available.
If each or every modifies the elements of a compound subject,
use the singular verb.
► Each manager and supervisor has a production goal to meet.
► Every manager and supervisor has a production goal to meet.
101
Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement Every pronoun must have an antecedent — a noun to which it
refers. See also pronoun reference.
► When employees are hired, they must review the policy manual. [The pronoun they refers to the antecedent employees.]
Gender A pronoun must agree in gender with its antecedent.
► Mr. Swivet in the accounting department acknowledges his share of responsibility for the misunderstanding, just as Ms. Barkley in the research division must acknowledge hers.
Traditionally, a masculine, singular pronoun was used to agree
with such indefinite antecedents as anyone and person. (“Each
may stay or go as he chooses.”) Because such usage ignores or
excludes women, use alternatives when they are available. One
solution is to use the plural. Another is to use both feminine and
masculine pronouns, although that combination is clumsy
when used too often.
Do not attempt to avoid expressing gender by resorting to a
102
plural pronoun when the antecedent is singular. An acceptable
alternative is to avoid the pronoun entirely.
Avoid gender-related stereotypes in general references, as in
“the nurse . . . she” or “the doctor . . . he.” What if the nurse is
male or the doctor female? See also biased language.
Number A pronoun must agree with its antecedent in number. Many
problems of agreement are caused by expressions that are not
clear in number.
Use singular pronouns with the antecedents everybody and
everyone unless to do so would be illogical because the
meaning is obviously plural. See also everybody / everyone.
► Everyone pulled his or her share of the load. ► Everyone thought my plan should be revised, and I really
couldn’t blame them.
Collective nouns may use a singular or plural pronoun,
depending on the meaning.
► The committee agreed to the recommendations only after it had deliberated for days. [committee thought of as
103
collective singular] ► The committee quit for the day and went to their respective
offices. [committee thought of as plural]
Demonstrative adjectives sometimes cause problems with
agreement of number. This and that are used with singular
nouns, and these and those are used with plural nouns.
Demonstrative adjectives often cause problems when they
modify the nouns kind, type, and sort. When used with those
nouns, demonstrative adjectives should agree with them in
number.
► this kind, these kinds; that type, those types
Confusion often develops when the preposition of is added
(this kind of, these kinds of ) and the object of the preposition
does not agree in number with the demonstrative adjective and
its noun.
Avoid that error by remembering to make the demonstrative
adjective, the noun, and the object of the preposition — all three
— agree in number. The agreement makes the sentence not
only correct but also more precise. Using demonstrative
adjectives with words like kind, type, and sort can easily lead to
vagueness. See kind of / sort of.
Compound Antecedents
104
A compound antecedent joined by or or nor is singular if both
elements are singular and plural if both elements are plural.
► Neither the engineer nor the technician could do his job until he understood the new concept.
► Neither the executives nor the directors were pleased at the performance of their company.
When one of the antecedents connected by or or nor is singular
and the other is plural, the pronoun agrees with the closer
antecedent.
► Either the computer or the printers should have their serial numbers registered.
► Either the printers or the computer should have its serial number registered.
A compound antecedent with its elements joined by and
requires a plural pronoun.
► Seon Ju and Juanita took their layout drawings with them.
If both elements refer to the same person, however, use the
singular pronoun.
► The noted economist and author departed from her prepared speech.
105
allegedly / supposedly Allegedly refers to an unproved assertion and is used
appropriately for accusations or suspicions of illegal or
undesirable behavior. (“He allegedly participated in the
embezzlement.”) Supposedly refers to something assumed to be
true but for which there is some doubt. (“The new process will
supposedly prevent delays.”)
106
all ready / already All ready is a two-word phrase meaning “completely prepared.”
Already is an adverb that means “before this time” or
“previously.” (“They were all ready to cancel the order;
fortunately, we had already corrected the shipment.”)
107
all right All right means “all correct.” (“The answers were all right.”) In
workplace writing, it should not be used to mean “good” or
“acceptable.” It is always written as two words; alright is
nonstandard.
108
all together / altogether All together means “all acting together” or “all in one place.”
(“The new employees were all together at the orientation.”)
Altogether means “entirely” or “completely.” (“The trip was
altogether unnecessary.”)
109
allude / elude / refer Allude means to make an indirect reference to something.
(“The report simply alluded to the problem, rather than stating
it explicitly.”) Elude means to escape notice or detection. (“The
discrepancy in the account eluded the auditor.”) Refer is used to
indicate a direct reference to something. (“She referred to the
merger during her presentation.”)
110
allusion / illusion An allusion is an indirect reference to something not
specifically mentioned. (“He made an allusion to metal fatigue
in the airframe.”) An illusion is a mistaken perception or a false
image. (“The manager is under the illusion that the
reorganization will cost very little.”)
111
allusions An allusion is an indirect reference to something from past or
current events, literature, or other familiar sources. The use of
allusion promotes economical writing because it is a shorthand
way of referring to a body of material in a few words or of
helping to explain a new and unfamiliar process in terms of one
that is familiar. In the following example, the writer sums up a
description with an allusion to a well-known story. The allusion,
with its implicit reference to “right standing up to might,”
concisely emphasizes the writer’s point.
► As it currently exists, the review process involves the consumer’s attorney sitting alone, usually without adequate technical assistance, faced by two or three government attorneys, two or three attorneys from AccroSystems, and large teams of experts who support the government and the corporation. The process is a classic David versus Goliath confrontation.
Be sure, of course, that your reader is familiar with the material
to which you allude. Allusions should be used with restraint,
especially in international correspondence. If overdone,
allusions can lead to affectation or can be viewed merely as
clichés. See also business writing style.
112
also Also is an adverb that means “additionally.” (“Two 5,000-gallon
tanks are on-site, and several 2,500-gallon tanks are also
available.”) Also should not be used as a connective in the sense
of “and.”
Avoid starting sentences with also. It is a weak transitional word
that suggests an afterthought rather than planned writing.
113
ambiguity A word or passage is ambiguous when it can be interpreted in
two or more ways yet provides the reader with no certain basis
for choosing among the alternatives. Ambiguity can take many
forms, as in ambiguous pronoun reference.
AMBIGUOUS Inadequate quality-control procedures have resulted in more equipment failures. This is our most serious problem at present. [Does this refer to inadequate quality-control procedures or to equipment failures?]
SPECIFIC Inadequate quality-control procedures have resulted in more equipment failures. These failures are our most serious problem at present.
SPECIFIC Inadequate quality-control procedures have resulted in more equipment failures. Quality control is our most serious problem at present.
Incomplete comparison and missing or misplaced modifiers
(including dangling modifiers) cause ambiguity.
The placement of some modifiers enables them to be
interpreted in either of two ways.
► She volunteered immediately to deliver the bad news.
By moving the word immediately, the meaning can be clarified.
114
► She immediately volunteered to deliver the bad news. ► She volunteered to deliver the bad news immediately.
Imprecise word choice (including faulty idioms) can cause
ambiguity.
Various forms of awkwardness also can cause ambiguity.
115
amount / number Amount is used with things that are thought of in bulk and that
cannot be counted (mass nouns), as in “the amount of
electricity.” Number is used with things that can be counted as
individual items (count nouns), as in “the number of
employees.”
116
ampersands The ampersand (&) is sometimes used to represent the word
and, especially in the names of organizations (Rubin &
Associates). When you are writing the name of an organization
in sentences, addresses, or references, spell out the word and
unless the ampersand appears in the organization’s official
name on its letterhead stationery or Web site.
117
and / or And/or means that either both circumstances are possible or
only one of two circumstances is possible. This term is awkward
and confusing because it makes the reader stop to puzzle over
your distinction.
AWKWARD Use A and/or B.
IMPROVED Use A or B or both.
118
annual reports The corporate annual report is, in effect, a state-of-the-
company message, which publicly traded companies and some
nonprofits are legally required to publish annually. Written
primarily for shareholders, the report also addresses other
audiences and stakeholders, such as employees, bankers, labor
unions, the financial media, and local elected officials. An
annual report usually covers the high points of the previous
year’s operations and finances, and forecasts the coming year’s
operations. It may also explain the company’s current direction
and highlight its strengths. If weaknesses have developed or
failures have occurred, the annual report may analyze them and
explain the efforts being made to overcome them.
Begin with a study of your company’s annual reports of the
past several years for content, style, and format. Then review
and use the steps of the writing process outlined in the
“Checklist of the Writing Process” on pages xxv–xxvi. Finally,
collaborate closely with your company’s (or outside
contractor’s) graphic designers and production staff. Learn
their file-format requirements, schedule photographs, and
determine milestones for producing print and digital versions
of the report. See also business plans, collaborative writing,
mission statements, selecting the medium, and writing for the
Web.
Structure and Parts 119
Some annual reports are lavishly produced publications that
present the company and its operations in glowing terms;
others are spartan financial summaries that merely meet the
legal requirements for annual financial reporting. For details,
visit http://www.sec.gov/fast-answers/answers-
annrephtm.html. Most are a combination of both. Annual
reports vary greatly in organization, but they typically include
five major sections:
Financial highlights A statement to the shareholders or a letter from the president A narrative section on the company’s operations A financial statement A listing of the company’s board of directors and officers
Financial Highlights The financial highlights section is a brief review of the
company’s sales and earnings that usually precedes the
statement to the stockholders, sometimes even appearing on
the inside of the front cover. This section often compares sales
and earnings for three years and typically includes the
percentage of change from year to year.
Statement to Shareholders This section is a direct statement to shareholders from the
company’s president or the chair of the board of directors. It
sets the stage for the rest of the report. This section should not
repeat the financial facts already cited in the financial
120
highlights; instead, it should interpret the entire year’s
performance, touch on plans and future directions, and give the
company’s explanations for any failures.
This statement may be an in-depth review of the company’s
operations during the past year or a brief summary of the entire
report. A brief summary is sometimes followed by a question-
and-answer section in which the president of the company
reviews the past year’s operations.
Narrative Section The narrative section of the annual report is normally used to
present company operations and new products or
developments in a positive light. Topics for this section might
include the following:
Major profit factors in the last year’s performance Prospects for increasing stock dividends Significant new products or services The company’s performance compared with that of its competition Outlook for next year (for the company as a whole or by divisions) Major acquisitions and restructuring Significant organizational changes Research and development Global operations and economic climate (when appropriate) Service and support operations
121
Social responsibilities (such as environmental responsibility and community service)
Financial Statement The financial statement should be uncluttered and inviting.
Most annual reports include a comparison of financial results
from the past three years. Most financial statements include the
following topics:
A company balance sheet A statement of income Changes in financial position An independent auditor’s statement Footnotes, as necessary
Financial statement footnotes should be simple and direct,
avoiding technical accounting terms; the auditor’s statement
should be no more than one-third of a page.
Board of Directors and Company Officers The final part of the annual report lists the company’s board of
directors and their corporate affiliations. Many annual reports
also include a photograph of each director, as well as a listing of
the company’s officers by name and title — often with
photographs that personalize what is essentially a financial
report. The officers generally include the chair of the board of
directors, the president, vice presidents, the secretary, the
treasurer, and legal counsel.
122
Preparing the Report First, interview the president of the company to determine the
general direction of the report. Next, interview vice presidents
or division heads to determine the proper emphasis to place on
each division’s performance (but stay within the general
direction established by the president or chair). See
interviewing for information.
Compose a list of primary topics, as previously described,
and allot space as necessary to each division or subsidiary in
order to make decisions such as these:
Whether to show sales and earnings as a company total only or by division as well What should be included in charts and graphs How lavish or spartan the report should be in appearance and cost What media should be used to publish and distribute the report
Tone is critical in writing and designing an annual report.
The annual report should convey the image your company has
established or wants to establish.
Design and Visuals Typography, graphics, and design communicate a message
about a company as strongly as words do. Select visual elements
that enhance your company’s image and accurately reflect your
industry. See layout and design and visuals.
123
Use photographs and visuals liberally, although
purposefully, in the narrative section to enhance the company’s
image, and complement the photographs and visuals with
informative and well-written captions. Choose only those
photographs and illustrations that will make the maximum
contribution to the report’s theme. Both photographs and their
captions are critical in enlivening your annual report and
putting a human face on your company. Colorful photographs
that are carefully composed and show action or people enjoying
themselves attract favorable interest.
Charts and graphs enable readers to grasp numerical
material quickly and easily, provided that they are not so
complex that they defeat the purpose. Subjects that most easily
lend themselves to graphs and charts, usually shown in a three-
year comparison arrangement, are the following:
Assets Capital expenditures Dividends Earnings (by product groups or divisions) Industry growth Inventories Liabilities Net worth Price trends Reserves Sales (by product groups or divisions) Source and disposition of funds (taxes, wages, working
124
capital)
The following information is normally printed on the inside
front and back covers of the annual report: (1) notice of the
annual meeting; (2) corporate address; and (3) names of
transfer agents, registrar, and stock exchange. Some annual
reports use the inside front cover solely for the announcement
of the annual meeting.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Annual Reports
✓ Review past annual reports for their content, style, and format. ✓ Review the annual reports of organizations similar to yours (see
www.annualreports.com). ✓ Interview senior company officials to learn which issues they wish
to highlight. ✓ Allocate topics and space to reach your company’s target
audiences. ✓ Adopt a writing style and a layout and design consistent with your
company’s image. ✓ Consider available enhancements and applications for digital
versions of the report. ✓ Work closely with the graphic designers and your production staff
to ensure that the report is professionally designed and produced on schedule.
125
antonyms An antonym is a word with a meaning opposite that of another
word (good/bad, wet/dry, fresh/stale). Many pairs of words that
look as if they are antonyms, such as limit/delimit, are not. See
also dictionaries, synonyms, and word choice.
126
apostrophes An apostrophe (’) is used to show possession or to indicate the
omission of letters. Sometimes it is also used to avoid confusion
with certain plurals of words, letters, and abbreviations.
Showing Possession An apostrophe is used with an s to form the possessive case of
some nouns (the report’s title). For further advice on using
apostrophes to show possession, see possessive case.
Indicating Omission An apostrophe is used to mark the omission of letters or
numbers in a contraction or a date (can’t, I’m, I’ll, the class of
’17).
Forming Plurals An apostrophe can be used in forming the plurals of letters,
words, or lowercase abbreviations if confusion might result
from using s alone and thus forming a word.
► The search program does not find a’s and i’s ► Do not replace all of which’s in the document. ► I’s need to be distinguished from the number 1. ► The prescription included several bid’s. [Bid is an
abbreviation used for “twice daily medications”.]
In general, however, add only s in roman (or regular) type when
127
referring to words as words or capital letters. See also italics.
► Five ands appear in the first sentence. ► The applicants received As and Bs in their courses.
Do not use an apostrophe for plurals of abbreviations with all
capital letters (PDFs) or a final capital letter (ten PhDs) or for
plurals of numbers (7s, the late 1990s).
128
appendixes An appendix — located at the end of a formal report, a
proposal, or another long document — supplements or clarifies
the information in the body of the document. Appendixes (or
appendices) can provide information that is too detailed or
lengthy for the primary audience of the document. For
example, an appendix could contain such material as maps,
statistical analyses, résumés of key personnel involved in a
proposed project, or other documents needed by secondary
readers.
A document may have more than one appendix, with each
providing only one type of information. When you include more
than one appendix, arrange them in the order they are
mentioned in the body of the document. List the titles and
beginning page numbers of the appendixes in the table of
contents. Begin each appendix on a new page, and identify
each with a letter, starting with the letter A (Appendix A:
Sample Questionnaire). If you have only one appendix, title it
simply “Appendix.”
129
application cover letters Job applications require both a résumé and a cover letter, even
if it is a relatively short e-mail (or e-note) with an attached
résumé. The application cover letter is essentially a sales letter
in which you demonstrate how your skills, knowledge, and
experience will benefit an employer by meeting the
requirements of a position. See also cover letters, letters, and
persuasion.
The letter must quickly capture the employer’s attention,
allow readers to easily skim the contents, and point to the
attached or enclosed résumé. It should (1) introduce you as a
candidate with the skills that can contribute to the particular
organization, (2) explain what particular job interests you and
why, (3) highlight for the reader specific qualifications in your
résumé that match the position, and (4) provide the opportunity
for an interview. See job search and interviewing for a job.
The job ad in Figure A–7 seeks someone with experience in a
professional design environment for a natural history museum.
Figure A–8 (page 38) shows a cover letter for a résumé that
responds to the job ad in Figure A–7. (The applicant’s résumé is
shown in Figure R–8 on page 470.)
130
FIGURE A–7. Partial Job Ad (Description and Requirements)
131
FIGURE A–8. Application Cover Letter (Graduate Applying for a Graphic Design Job)
The sample application letters shown in Figures A–9 (page
39) and A–10 (page 40) also follow the guidelines described in
132
this entry. In each sample, the emphasis, tone, and style are
tailored to fit the employer’s need and highlight the applicant’s
qualifications. Note that the letter shown in Figure A–10
matches the résumé in Figure R–9 (Robert Mandillo) on pages
471–72.
FIGURE A–9. Application Cover Letter Sent as an E-mail (College Student Applying for an Internship)
133
FIGURE A–10. Application Cover Letter (Applicant with Years of Experience)
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Tailoring a Cover Letter to a Job Ad
134
✓ Read the job ad carefully, and follow the instructions precisely. ✓ Provide context by referring to the job ad or mentioning how you
learned about a possible opening. ✓ Match the tone of your letter to the language of the ad. ✓ Show how the job is appropriate for you while using vocabulary
from the ad. See word choice. ✓ Avoid copying sections of text verbatim from the job ad. ✓ Show that you meet or exceed the employer’s minimum
requirements. ✓ Describe how you are upgrading your skills in any areas in which
you fall short.
Opening In the opening paragraph, provide context by indicating how
you heard about the position, and name the specific job title or
area. If you have been referred to a company by an employee, a
career counselor, a professor, or someone else, be sure to say so
(“I understand from Mr. John Smith, Director of Operations,
that your agency . . .”). Show enthusiasm by explaining why you
are interested in the job, and demonstrate your initiative as well
as your knowledge of the organization by relating your interest
to some facet of the organization, as in Figure A–8.
Body In the middle paragraphs, use specific examples to
demonstrate that you are qualified for the job. Aim for
conciseness, and limit the content by focusing on one clearly
stated basic point in each topic sentence. For example, your
135
second paragraph might focus on educational achievements,
and your third paragraph might focus on work experience. Do
not just tell readers that you are qualified—show them by
including examples and details. (“Most recently, as an intern at
SJX Engineering, I assisted in the infrastructure design for a
multimillion-dollar seaside resort.”) Highlight a notable
achievement that portrays your value, and refer the reader to
your enclosed résumé. Do not simply list information found in
your résumé rather, indicate how your talents can make
valuable contributions to the company.
Closing In the final paragraph, request an interview. Let the reader
know how to reach you by including your phone number and
professional e-mail address (see Writer’s Checklist: Maintaining
Professionalism on pages 168–69). End with a statement of
goodwill, as shown in the examples in this entry.
Proofreading and Follow-up Proofread your letter carefully. Research shows that many
employers eliminate candidates from consideration when they
notice even one spelling, grammatical, or mechanical error.
Such errors give employers the impression that you are careless
in the way you present yourself professionally. See
proofreading.
After a reasonable period, consider following up with a
136
reminder.(“I wrote to you a week ago about your graphic design
position, and I wonder if that position is still available.”) Your
initiative will portray your sincere interest in the opportunity.
This approach may also provoke a need for action in the
reviewer—for example, the need to pass your application to the
hiring authority.
137
appositives An appositive is a noun or noun phrase that follows and
amplifies another noun or noun phrase. It has the same
grammatical function as the noun it complements.
► George Thomas, the noted economist, summarized the president’s speech in a confidential memo.
► The noted economist George Thomas summarized the president’s speech in a confidential memo.
For detailed information on the use of commas with
appositives, see restrictive and nonrestrictive elements.
If you are in doubt about the case of an appositive, check it
by substituting the appositive for the noun it modifies. See also
pronouns.
138
articles Articles (a, an, the) function as adjectives because they modify
the items they designate by either limiting them or making
them more specific. Articles may be indefinite or definite.
The indefinite articles, a and an, denote an unspecified item.
► A package was delivered yesterday. [not a specific package]
The choice between a and an depends on the sound rather than
on the letter following the article, as described in the entry a /
an. The definite article, the, denotes a particular item.
► The package was delivered yesterday. [one specific package]
Do not omit all articles from your writing in an attempt to be
concise. Including articles costs nothing; eliminating them
makes reading more difficult. (See also telegraphic style.)
However, do not overdo it. An article can be superfluous.
► I’ll meet you in a half an hour. [Choose one article and eliminate the other.]
Whether to use a definite or an indefinite article is determined
by what you can safely assume about your audience’s
knowledge. In both the following sentences, you can safely
assume that the reader can clearly identify the noun. Therefore,
use a definite article.
139
► Did you know that yesterday was the coldest day of the year so far? [The modified noun refers to yesterday.]
► The man who left his briefcase in the conference room was in a hurry. [The relative phrase who left his briefcase in the conference room restricts and therefore identifies the man.]
In the following sentence, however, you cannot assume that the reader can clearly identify the noun.
► A package is on the way. [It is impossible to identify specifically what package is meant.]
A more important question for some people is when not to use
articles. These generalizations will help. Do not use articles
with the following:
Singular proper nouns
► Utah, Main Street, Harvard University, Mount Hood
Plural nonspecific count nouns (when making
generalizations)
► Helicopters are the new choice of transportation for the rich and famous.
Singular mass nouns
► She loves coffee.
Plural count nouns used as complements
140
► Those women are physicians.
See also English as a second language.
141
as / because / since As, because, and since are commonly used to mean “because.”
To express cause, because is the strongest and most specific
connective for unequivocally stating a causal relationship.
(“Because she did not have an MBA, she was not offered the
job.”)
Since is a weak substitute for because as a connective to
express cause. However, since is an appropriate connective
when the emphasis is on circumstance, condition, or time
rather than on cause and effect. (“Since it went public, the
company has earned a profit every year.”)
As is the least definite connective to indicate cause; its use for
that purpose is best avoided. See also subordination.
Avoid colloquial, nonstandard, or wordy phrases sometimes
used instead of as, because, or since. See also as much as /
more than, as such, as well as, conciseness, and due to /
because of.
PHRASE REPLACE WITH
being as, being that because, since
inasmuch as, insofar as since, because
on account of because
on the grounds of / that because
due to the fact that because, since
142
as much as / more than The phrases as much as and more than are sometimes
incorrectly combined, especially when separated by
intervening phrases.
143
as such The phrase as such is seldom useful and should be omitted.
144
as well as Do not use as well as with both. The two expressions have
similar meanings; use one or the other, and adjust the verb as
needed.
145
audience Considering the needs of your audience is crucial to achieving
your purpose. When you are writing to a specific reader, for
example, you may find it useful to visualize a reader sitting
across from you as you write. (See correspondence.) Likewise,
when writing to an audience composed of relatively
homogeneous readers, you might create an image of a
composite reader and write for that reader. In such cases, using
the “you” viewpoint and an appropriate tone will help you meet
the needs of your readers as well as achieve an effective
business writing style. For meeting the needs of an audience
composed of listeners, see presentations.
Analyzing Your Audience’s Needs Determine the readers’ needs relative to your purpose and goals
by asking key questions during preparation.
Who specifically is your reader? Do you have multiple readers? Who needs to see or use the document? What do your readers already know about your subject? What are your readers’ attitudes about the subject? (Are they skeptical? Supportive? Anxious? Bored?) What particular information about your readers (experience, training, and work habits, for example) might help you write at the appropriate level of detail? (See scope.) What does the context or medium suggest about meeting the readers' expectations for content? (See layout and
146
design and selecting the medium.) Do you need to adapt your message for international readers? If so, see global communication, global graphics, and international correspondence.
In the workplace, your readers are often less familiar with the
subject than you are. You have to be careful, therefore, when
writing on a topic that is unique to your area of specialization.
Be sensitive to the needs of those whose training or experience
lies in other areas; provide definitions of nonstandard terms
and explanations of principles that you, as a specialist, take for
granted. See also defining terms.
Writing for Varied and Multiple Audiences In writing to a broad or varied audience, such as when writing
for the Web, visualize a few readers who have different
backgrounds but who share purpose or need in reading your
text. For documents aimed at multiple audiences with different
needs, consider segmenting the document for different groups
of readers: an executive summary for top managers, an
appendix with detailed data for technical specialists, and a body
for those readers who need to make decisions based on a
detailed discussion. See also formal reports and proposals.
When you have multiple audiences with various needs but
cannot segment your document, first determine your primary,
or most important, readers — such as those who will make
147
decisions based on your content — and be sure to meet their
needs. Then meet the needs of secondary readers, such as those
who need only some of the document’s contents, making sure
not to sacrifice the needs of your primary readers. See also
persuasion and “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”
148
augment / supplement Augment means to increase or magnify in size, degree, or
effect. (“Our retirees can augment their incomes through
consulting.”) Supplement means to add something to make up
for a deficiency. (“This patient should supplement his diet with
Vitamin D3.”)
149
average / median / mean The average (or arithmetic mean) is determined by adding two
or more quantities and dividing the sum by the number of items
totaled. For example, if one report is 10 pages, another is 30
pages, and a third is 20 pages, their average length is 20 pages. It
is incorrect to say that “each report averages 20 pages” because
each report is a specific length.
The median is the middle number in a sequence of numbers.
For example, the median of the series 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 is 4.
150
awhile / a while The adverb awhile means “for a short time.” The preposition
for should not precede awhile because for is inherent in the
meaning of awhile. The two-word noun phrase a while means
“a period of time.”
151
awkwardness Any writing that strikes readers as awkward — that is, as forced
or unnatural — impedes their understanding. The following
checklist and the entries indicated will help you smooth out
most awkward passages.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Eliminating Awkwardness
✓ Strive for clarity and coherence during revision. ✓ Check for organization to ensure that your writing develops
logically. ✓ Keep sentence construction as direct and simple as possible. ✓ Use subordination appropriately, and avoid needless repetition. ✓ Correct any logic errors within your sentences. ✓ Revise for conciseness, and avoid expletives where possible. ✓ Use the active voice unless you have a justifiable reason to use
the passive voice. ✓ Eliminate jammed or misplaced modifiers, and for particularly
awkward constructions, apply the tactics in garbled sentences.
152
B
153
bad / badly Bad is the adjective form that follows such linking verbs as feel
and look. (“We don’t want to look bad at the meeting.”) Badly is
an adverb. (“The shipment was badly damaged.”) To say “I feel
badly” would mean, literally, that your sense of touch is
impaired.
154
balance / remainder One meaning of balance is “a state of equilibrium”; another
meaning is “the amount of money in a bank account after
deposits and withdrawals have been credited and debited.”
Remainder, in all applications, means “what is left over.”
155
beside / besides Besides, meaning “in addition to” or “other than,” should be
carefully distinguished from beside, meaning “next to” or “apart
from.” (“Besides two of us from Marketing, three people from
Production stood beside the president during the ceremony.”)
156
between / among Between is normally used to relate two items or persons.
(“Preferred stock offers a middle ground between bonds and
common stock.”) Among is used to relate more than two. (“The
subcontracting was distributed among three firms.”)
157
between you and me The expression between you and I is incorrect. Because the
pronouns are objects of the preposition between, the objective
case of the personal pronoun (me) must be used.
158
bi- / semi- When used with periods of time, bi- means “two” or “every
two,” as in published biweekly, meaning “once in two weeks.”
The prefix semi- means “half of” or “occurring twice within a
period of time,” as in published semimonthly, meaning “twice a
month.” Because these prefixes often cause confusion,
substitute expressions like every two months or twice a month
where possible. Normally bi- and semi- are joined with the
following element without a space or hyphen.
159
biannual / biennial In conventional usage, biannual means “twice during the year,”
and biennial means “every other year.” See also bi- / semi-.
160
biased language Biased language refers to words and expressions that offend
because they make inappropriate assumptions or stereotypes
about gender, ethnicity, physical or mental disability, age, or
sexual orientation. Even if used unintentionally, biased
language can damage your credibility.
Sexist Language Sexist language can be an outgrowth of sexism—the arbitrary
stereotyping of men and women—that can breed and reinforce
inequality. To avoid sexism in your writing, treat men and
women equally and use nonsexist occupational descriptions.
INSTEAD OF CONSIDER
chairman, chairwoman chair, chairperson
man-hours staff hours, worker hours
policeman, policewoman police officer
salesman, saleswoman salesperson
Use parallel terms to describe men and women.
INSTEAD OF USE
ladies and men ladies and gentlemen, women and men
Ms. Jones and Bernard Weiss
Ms. Jones and Mr. Weiss, Mary Jones and Bernard Weiss
One common way of handling pronoun references that
could apply equally to a man or a woman is to use the
161
expression his or her. Repeated use of this phrase, however,
can be awkward; to avoid overuse, try rewriting the sentence in
the plural. See also he / she.
Another solution is to omit pronouns completely if they are not
essential to the meaning of the sentence.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
The easiest way to avoid bias is simply not to mention differences among people unless the differences are relevant to the discussion. Keep current with accepted usage and, if you are unsure of the appropriateness of an expression or the tone of a passage, have several colleagues assess the material. See also ethics in writing.
162
bibliographies A bibliography is an alphabetical list of books, articles, online
sources, and other works that have been consulted in preparing
a document or that are useful for reference purposes. A
bibliography provides a convenient list of sources in a
standardized form for readers interested in getting further
information on the topic or in assessing the scope of the
research.
A list of references or works cited refers to works actually
cited in the text; a bibliography also includes works consulted
for general background information. For information on using
various citation styles, see documenting sources.
Entries in a bibliography are listed alphabetically by the
author’s last name. If an author is unknown, the entry is
alphabetized by the first word in the title (other than A, An, or
The). Entries also can be arranged by subject and then ordered
alphabetically within those categories.
An annotated bibliography includes complete bibliographic
information about a work (author, title, place of publication,
publisher, and publication date) followed by a brief description
or evaluation of what the work contains. The following is an
annotation of a historical bibliography:
Alred, G. J., Reep, D. C., & Limaye, M. R. (1981). Business and technical writing: An annotated bibliography of books, 1880–
163
1980. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow.
This 240-page bibliography annotates books that “deal
significantly with writing or the analysis of writing, either
for business or in technical and professional contexts”
from 1880 through 1980. The nine-page “Introduction”
surveys and assesses the collected works. Each 100- to 250-
word annotation describes the purpose of the book, its
scope, primary and unusual topics covered, pedagogical
materials, and historical interest. Included are 27 previous
bibliographies (books and articles), 847 books in the main
section, and 230 items in unannotated lists (“Industry and
Society Style Guides”; “Government Style Guides”;
“Publishing”; “Oral Communication”; and “Style, Language,
and Readability”). The book concludes with coauthor, title,
and subject indexes.
164
blogs and forums A blog (from Web log) is a Web-based journal in which an
individual or a blogger team post entries (displayed from the
most recent to the earliest posting) that document experiences,
express opinions, provide information, and respond to other
bloggers on subjects of mutual interest. A blog should have a
well-defined focus (or subject), audience, and purpose. You
will also need to establish and maintain a regular posting
schedule. As you plan a blog, survey such popular blogging
platforms as WordPress (www.wordpress.com) and Tumblr
(www.tumblr.com) and consult with your information
technology and marketing staff on how a blog might contribute
to your organization.
Although blogs may allow readers to post comments, a forum
typically fosters a wider “conversation” in which site visitors
can not only respond to the posts of others but also begin new
topics or discussion threads. Organizations often use forums for
customer or technical support; therefore, monitoring and
responding to messages is crucial. If your Web site features a
forum, you must promote it, contribute content, and solicit
content from users; otherwise, the forum will quickly lose its
usefulness and fade. See also social media and writing for the
Web.
Organizational Uses Organizations create blogs and forums to help meet such goals
165
as attracting and retaining clients or customers, promoting
goodwill, obtaining valuable feedback on their products and
services, providing support to clients or customers, and
developing a sense of community among their customers and
employees. Blogs and forums can be both external and internal.
External sites are publicly available on the Internet both for
an organization’s customers or clients and for executives,
spokespeople, or employees to share their views. Blogs and
forums can help build loyalty for a company because customers
can make a direct connection with the organization’s
representatives and with other customers. They can also
exchange current information that may not be available in
published documents or elsewhere online. Internal sites are
usually created for an organization’s employees and can be
accessed only through the company’s intranet. Internal blogs
may serve as interactive newsletters that help build a sense of
community within an organization or as a way to share
“breaking news” about product development, employee
benefits, or new team members.
Writing Style Write blog or forum entries in an informal, conversational style
that uses contractions, first person, and active voice. (See style
and clarity.)
BLOG POSTING
Check out the latest concept for our new Toyota Camry dashboards— we’ve added enough space to hold your coffee and a digital device by moving the air ducts. Tell us what you think.
166
FORUM POSTING
I’m new to this thread, but I’m surprised no one’s discussed the issue of confidentiality. My experience has been that Facebook’s recent changes in privacy settings are just confusing. Have I missed something?
Keep your sentences and paragraphs concise. Use bulleted lists,
italics, and other design elements, such as boldface and white
space if possible. (See layout and design and visuals.) Doing so
can help readers scan the postings or text to find information
that is interesting or relevant to them. Keep headlines short,
meaningful, and direct to catch readers’ attention and increase
visual appeal and readability. Where helpful, provide links to
other sites and resources that participants might find useful.
When blogs expand or forums become popular, you may need
to organize them using categories (links to discussion topics) or
tags (keywords for searching the site’s postings).
ETHICS NOTE
Because organizations expect employees to assume full responsibility for the content they post on a company blog or forum, you must maintain high ethical standards. See also ethics in writing.
Do not post information that is confidential, proprietary, or sensitive to your employer. Do not attack competitors or use abusive language toward other participants while making strong points on topics. Do not post content that is profane, libelous, or harassing, or that violates the privacy of others. See also biased language. Be aware that everything you post becomes permanently accessible to a wide public audience, especially for external sites. Obtain permission before using any material that is protected by
167
copyright, patents, and trademarks, and identify sources for quotations. See also plagiarism.
168
both . . . and Statements using the both . . . and construction should always
be balanced grammatically and logically. See also parallel
structure.
169
brackets The primary use of brackets ([ ]) is to enclose a word or words
inserted by the writer or editor into a quotation.
► The text stated, “Web sites can be categorized as either static [non-changing] or interactive [responding to user activity].”
Brackets are used to set off a parenthetical item within
parentheses.
► We must credit Emanuel Foose (and his brother Emilio [1912–1982]) for founding the institute.
Brackets are also used to insert the Latin word sic, indicating
that a writer has quoted material exactly as it appears in the
original, even though it contains a misspelled or wrongly used
word. See also abbreviations and quotations.
► The contract states, “Tinted windows will be installed to protect against son [sic] damage.”
170
brainstorming Brainstorming, a form of free association used to generate ideas
about a topic, can be done individually or in groups.
Brainstorming can stimulate creative thinking and reveal fresh
perspectives and new connections. When brainstorming alone,
jot down as many random ideas as you can think of about the
topic. When working in a group, designate a person to record
ideas the group suggests. Do not stop to analyze ideas or hold
back, looking for only the “best” ideas; just note everything that
comes to mind. After compiling a list of initial ideas, ask what,
when, who, where, how, and why for each idea, then list
additional details that those questions bring to mind. When you
run out of ideas, analyze each one you recorded, discarding
those that are redundant or not relevant. Then group the
remaining items in the most logical order, based on your
purpose and the needs of the audience, to create a tentative
outline of the document. Although the outline will be sketchy
and incomplete, it will show where further brainstorming or
research is needed and provide a framework for any new details
that additional research yields. (See outlining.)
Many writers find a technique called clustering (also called
mind mapping), as shown in Figure B–1, helpful in recording
and organizing ideas created during a brainstorming session.
To cluster, begin on a blank page, a flip chart, or an outline tool
such as a Bubbl.us mind map. Think of a key term that best
characterizes your topic, and put it in a boxed or bubbled area
171
at the center of the page. Figure B–1 shows brainstorming about
the best way to communicate with customers, so the chosen
topic was “Customer communication.” Then think of subtopics
most closely related to the main topic. In Figure B–1, the main
topic (“Customer communication”) led to such subtopics as
“Advertising,” “Internet,” and “Direct mail.” Place the subtopics
in boxes or bubbles, connecting each to the center topic like
spokes to a wheel hub. Repeat the exercise for each subtopic. In
Figure B–1, for example, the subtopic “Internet” stimulated the
additional subtopics “E-mail,” “Web site,” and “Social media.”
Continue the process until you map all possible ideas.
172
FIGURE B–1. Cluster Map from a Brainstorming Session
173
brochures Brochures are short publications, typically printed and folded
into pamphlets or leaflets, that promote a business and its
products and services to a target audience. The purpose of a
brochure is to inform, persuade, or both. Compared with flyers,
brochures typically allow information to be better
compartmentalized and presented in a smaller space.
Brochures may be distributed in paper or online, typically as
PDF files. See also selecting the medium, persuasion, and
promotional writing.
Types of Brochures The two major types of brochures are sales brochures and
informational brochures. Sales brochures are created
specifically to sell a company’s products and services. For
example, a brochure for a manufacturing company might
showcase the company’s equipment, capabilities, and
certifications, whereas a brochure for a consulting company
might describe the company’s specific services and available
seminars. Informational brochures are created to inform and
educate the reader without attempting to sell a product or
service directly. A counseling clinic, for example, might create a
brochure describing how to recognize depression in teenagers.
Designing a Brochure Before you begin to write, determine your brochure’s specific
174
purpose and audience. For example, is your goal to provide
information about a new service to existing customers, market a
product to prospective customers, or educate new employees
about their insurance options?
Next, consider the amount of information you need to
present in terms of the type of brochure you plan to create. For
example, a trifold brochure might be the best choice for
presenting sales information about a company’s multiple
products, since it provides six distinct panels, whereas a bifold
brochure might be more appropriate for showing detailed
product schematics, since it provides four larger panels.
Develop a style and design that is consistent with the
established brand image of your organization. Make sure that
written and graphical content is clear and consistent in its
presentation and makes sense in its placement. For example, a
brochure for a cruise line might feature photos of passengers
and a short title on the front panel, a brief discussion of the
line’s history on the first inside panel, details on the company’s
ships on subsequent panels, and contact information on the
back panel. See Figures B–2 and B–3, which showcase a
company’s capabilities through the use of graphs, bulleted lists,
and images.
175
FIGURE B–2. Front and Back Panels of a Bifold Brochure
176
FIGURE B–3. Center Panels of a Bifold Brochure
Cover Panel The main goal of the front cover panel is to gain the audience’s
attention and to show the purpose of the brochure clearly. It
should identify the organization or product being promoted
through a headline, logo, and carefully selected image. Keep the
177
amount of text to a minimum. Reserve the back cover panel for
your organization’s complete contact information and any
necessary legal or copyright disclaimers. If your audience needs
to locate your company, include a map.
First Inside Panel The first inside panel of a brochure should again identify the
organization and attract the reader with headlines and brief,
readable content. This panel is typically used to tell an
organization’s “story,” to highlight its history and
accomplishments, or to describe how material will be presented
in subsequent panels.
Subsequent Panels Subsequent panels should describe the product or service from
the reader’s point of view, clearly stating any benefits or
solutions it offers. Include relevant and accurate supporting
facts, testimonials, and visuals, such as photographs and
cutaway drawings. Use subheadings and bulleted lists to break
up the text and highlight key points. In the final panel, be clear
about the action you want the reader to take, such as calling to
arrange a quote, placing an order using the included discount
code, or following the included map to visit your showroom.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Designing a Brochure
✓ Evaluate your content to ensure that the information you provide
178
is consistent and logical. ✓ Stimulate your thinking by examining brochures for products or
services similar to yours. ✓ Create a thumbnail sketch for each panel to help you decide on
the number of panels needed, place text, and select visuals. See layout and design.
✓ Experiment with margins, spacing, and the amount of text on each panel. You may need to edit content to allow for adequate white space for readability and to ensure that the most important information is visually highlighted and easily found.
✓ Experiment with fonts and formatting, such as using a different font for short testimonials or headlines, but do not overuse unusual fonts or alternative styles.
✓ Choose colors coordinated with your brand, but consider that while color may be worth the cost for high-end products or services, economical black-and-white printing may be more appropriate for internal documents.
✓ Evaluate the selection of images: Do they accurately portray the subject? Are they high quality and properly licensed? (See copyrights, patents, and trademarks.) Refrain from using clip art unless it fits with your purpose.
✓ Consider ways to repurpose your brochure for digital accessibility and for use on social media.
179
bulleted lists (see lists)
180
business plans A business plan is a proposal that allows potential supporters to
evaluate ideas for a new business venture. Business plans are
written primarily for bankers and other outside funders or
consultants and sometimes for internal audiences (mostly
senior management). Usually readers are targeted to provide
funding, resources, cooperation, or, in the context of a large
corporation, approval or financial support for an operational
plan.
Purposes and Audience A business plan can fulfill a single purpose or several purposes.
The most common include the following:
To persuade potential investors or lenders to finance a business venture. A comprehensive business plan allows investors to review objectively the company’s assumptions, facts, and future outlook. To allow reviewers (usually senior management) within a company to assess the profitability and goals of a new internal business venture. They typically want to evaluate economic forecasts and determine future profitability and perhaps provide creative direction.
Before you write a business plan, identify and analyze your
audience. The purposes of a business plan can differ
dramatically, depending on which audience you are trying to
convince. If you are addressing a banker, the central purpose of
181
the business plan is to obtain funding for the new venture; to
accomplish that, you need to demonstrate credibility by
documenting a solid history of financial success. If you are
addressing senior management, the central purpose is to
demonstrate how the venture is likely to add value to the
company. See also persuasion.
When writing a business plan, find out which issues are of
most interest to your audience, and respond directly to those
issues. If you are writing for multiple audiences with diverse
interests and needs, be comprehensive in addressing all
interests and needs in your plan.
Format, Length, and Sections Because the audiences and purposes of business plans vary, the
lengths and designs of the plans vary as well. Business plans
can be as brief as one page, but they typically run between four
and ten pages. The length also depends on the nature and
complexity of the proposed business ideas.
The contents and sections will vary, but many plans (like
formal reports) include a title page, a table of contents, and an
executive summary. Most plans cover the following topic areas
in subsequent sections: company description and strategy,
market analysis and strategy, marketing plan, financial
analysis, and supporting documents.
Company Description and 182
Strategy The first section of a business plan typically describes the
company’s functions, products, and services; its overall strategy
in a vision or mission statement; its goals and milestones; and
its management team and key members.
Business Description A business plan should begin with a concise but complete
description of the type of organization, its products, and its
services, as well as a brief mention of the company’s place in
the market.
Identify the company’s legal name and status. Explain exactly what the company does. Define the percentage and growth opportunity of each product or service, and describe the customer base. Describe current products or services and what makes them unique and competitive. Mention products and services in development.
Use this section to describe the company’s competitive
advantage and the cost versus benefits of its current and
anticipated expenses.
Vision and Mission Statements Vision and mission statements can be the same; however, they
often are written separately and serve different purposes.
Vision statements broadly describe the perceived future of the
183
company, and mission statements usually summarize the
purpose of the business. Vision and mission statements may
vary in length from one sentence to multiple pages. When both
are included, a mission statement usually precedes a vision
statement.
Goals and Milestones State short-term as well as long-term goals, with a timetable
showing when the company expects to achieve specific
milestones. Be realistic, especially when defining and setting
short-term goals. Identify in specific, measurable terms what
the company can reasonably achieve within a specified time
frame.
Management and Key Team Members Identify all members of management. Describe their strengths,
including any experiences or skills that particularly contribute
to the business or to a specific venture.
Identify those who will work closely with management, such
as accountants, lawyers, insurance agents, and partners. Briefly
describe their backgrounds and qualifications. If you are
proposing that new positions be added to the company,
mention that in the plan and describe basic elements of a
human resources policy, such as working hours, wages,
vacation time, and sick leave. You can include résumés of
candidates for the new positions in appendixes, along with
other supporting documents.
184
Market Analysis and Strategy Perhaps most important, the business plan needs to define and
analyze the market and the competitive climate in which the
writer proposes to launch the business venture. Once you have
demonstrated a solid understanding of the market, describe the
new venture or the new product or service, and propose your
strategy for launching the venture and managing it over time to
contribute to overall profits.
This section of the business plan also needs to identify and
analyze the major competitors and describe how the company
will address the competition to ensure that its products and
services will make a strong entry into the marketplace. See also
research.
Marketing Plan Provide a specific plan for advertising and promoting products
or services. Indicate the specific actions the company will take
to achieve its sales and promotional objectives. This section is
often written by a marketing director and includes discussions
of promotional strategies and costs in different market
channels, as well as sales projections for each market segment.
See also collaborative writing.
Financial Analysis In one or more subsections, present the company’s financial
plan and financial statements, especially if the business plan’s
185
purpose is to obtain venture capital. Provide historical
information about financial status as well as projections about
the company’s financial growth. Identify both strengths and
weaknesses, including new opportunities for growth, areas
where the company can control costs, and ways of restructuring
to make the company more efficient. Predict problems and
describe the company’s strategy to prevent or minimize their
effects. These sections often benefit from strategically placed
graphs and tables.
Provide complete and detailed financial statements (perhaps
in an appendix). Bankers and other investors typically want to
see a balance sheet, profit-and-loss statements, a three-year
cash-flow projection, and source and use-of-funds statements.
Until the business venture is up and running, the company
might be able to provide only projections of profit-and-loss
statements or balance sheets. Also describe the company’s
liability and property insurance. Make estimates of calculations
conservative by using slightly low or low-end sales and margin
figures and by slightly overstating expected costs.
Supporting Documents In appendixes, provide résumés of key members of
management and any other supporting information that
demonstrates the company’s potential and management’s
credibility. Other documents might include positive reviews of a
new product, service, or venture, or positive articles about the
company from industry or the popular press. Finally, provide
186
copies of contracts with impressive clients (with the clients’
permission) or information that would demonstrate
relationships between the company and such clients. For
further information, go to www.sba.gov and search for
“business plans.”
187
business writing style Business writing has evolved from a formal and elaborate style
to one that is more personal and direct. Business writing today
varies from the casual style you might use in a text message to
the formal, legalistic style found in contracts. For most e-mails,
letters, and memos, a style between those two extremes is
generally appropriate. Writing that is too formal can alienate
your audience. But an inappropriate attempt to be informal
may strike readers as insincere and unprofessional, especially
clients or those you do not know well.
The use of personal pronouns is important in
correspondence. In fact, one way you can make your business
writing natural and persuasive is through the use of the “you”
viewpoint, which often uses the pronoun you to place the
reader’s interest foremost.
ETHICS NOTE
Be careful when you use the pronoun we in writing to clients and others outside your organization because you are committing your organization to what you have written. In general, when a statement is your opinion, use I; when it is company policy, use we. Do not refer to yourself in the third person by using one or the writer. It is perfectly
188
natural and appropriate to refer to yourself as I and to the reader as you. In a report, however, you may be writing to more than one reader and may not necessarily want to refer to collective readers as you. See also ethics in writing, persuasion, and point of view.
The best writers strive to write in a style that is so clear that
their message cannot be misunderstood. In fact, you cannot be
persuasive without being clear. One way to achieve clarity,
especially during revision, is to eliminate overuse of the passive
voice. Although the passive voice is sometimes necessary, often
it not only makes your writing dull but also makes it ambiguous,
indirect, or overly impersonal.
You can also achieve clarity with conciseness. Proceed
cautiously here, however, because business writing should not
be an endless series of short, choppy sentences that are blunt or
deliver too little information to be helpful to the reader. (See
also sentence variety and telegraphic style.) Appropriate and
effective word choice is also essential to clarity. Finally, the
careful use of punctuation can promote clarity. See also “Five
Steps to Successful Writing.”
189
buzzwords Buzzwords are popular words or phrases that, because of an
intense period of overuse, tend to lose their freshness and
precision. They often become popular through their association
with technology, popular culture, or even sports. See also
jargon and word choice.
► action items, face time, F2F meeting, impact [as a verb], same page, takeaway [as a noun], touch base, 24/7, win/win
Obviously, the words in this example are appropriate when
used in the right context. See also interface.
We include buzzwords in our vocabulary because they seem
to give force and vitality to our language. Actually, they often
sound like an affectation in business writing.
190
C
191
can / may In writing, can refers to capability (“I can have the project
finished today”). May refers to possibility (“I may be in Boston
on Monday”) or permission (“May I leave early?”).
192
cannot Cannot is one word (“We cannot meet today”).
193
capital / capitol Capital refers either to financial assets or to the city that hosts
the government of a state or a nation. Capitol refers to the
building in which a state or national legislature meets. Capitol is
often written with a small c when it refers to a state building,
but it is always capitalized when it refers to the home of the U.S.
Congress in Washington, D.C.
194
capitalization DIRECTORY
Proper Nouns Common Nouns First Words Specific Groups Specific Places Specific Institutions, Events, Concepts Titles of Works Professional and Personal Titles Abbreviations and Letters Miscellaneous Capitalizations
The use of capital, or uppercase, letters is determined by
custom. Capital letters are used to call attention to certain
words, such as proper nouns and the first word of a sentence.
Use capital letters carefully because they can affect a word’s
meaning (march / March, china / China) and because many
spell checkers would fail to identify such an error.
Proper Nouns Capitalize proper nouns that name specific persons, places, or
things (Pat Wilde, Peru, Business Writing 205, Microsoft). When
in doubt, consult a general or subject-area dictionary.
Common Nouns 195
Common nouns name general classes or categories of people,
places, things, concepts, or qualities rather than specific ones
and are not capitalized (person, country, business writing class,
company).
First Words The first letter of the first word in a sentence is always
capitalized. (“Of the plans submitted, ours is best.”) The first
word after a colon is capitalized when the colon introduces two
or more sentences (independent clauses) or when the colon
precedes a formal statement or question.
► The meeting will address only one issue: What is the firm’s role in environmental protection?
If a subordinate element follows the colon or if the thought is
closely related, use a lowercase letter following the colon.
► We kept working for one reason: the approaching deadline.
The first word of a complete sentence in quotation marks is
capitalized.
► Peter Drucker said, “The most important thing in communication is to hear what isn’t being said.”
The first word in the salutation (Dear Mr. Smith:) and in the
complimentary close (Sincerely yours,) are capitalized, as are
the names of the recipients. See also letters.
196
Specific Groups Capitalize the names of ethnic groups, religions, and
nationalities (Native American, Christianity, Mongolian). Do not
capitalize the names of social and economic groups (middle
class, unemployed).
Specific Places Capitalize the names of all political divisions (Ward Six,
Chicago, Cook County, Illinois) and geographic divisions
(Europe, Asia, North America, the Middle East). Do not
capitalize geographic features unless they are part of a proper
name.
► The mountains in some areas, such as the Great Smoky Mountains, make cell-phone reception difficult.
The words north, south, east, and west are capitalized when
they refer to sections of the country. They are not capitalized
when they refer to directions.
► I may relocate further west, but my family will remain in the South.
Specific Institutions, Events, Concepts Capitalize the names of institutions, organizations, and
associations (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services).
197
An organization usually capitalizes the names of its internal
divisions and departments (Aeronautics Division, Human
Resources Department). Types of organizations are not
capitalized unless they are part of an official name (a business
communication association, Association for Business
Communication). Capitalize historical events (the Great
Depression of the 1930s). Capitalize words that designate
holidays, specific periods of time, months, or days of the week
(Labor Day, the Renaissance, January, Monday). Do not
capitalize seasons of the year (spring, summer, autumn, winter)
unless they are used in a title (Winter Semester Schedule).
Titles of Works Capitalize the initial letters of the first, last, and major words in
the title of a book, an article, a play, or a film. Do not capitalize
articles, coordinating conjunctions, or prepositions unless
they begin or end the title (The Wealth of Nations). Capitalize
prepositions within titles when they contain five or more letters
(Between, Within, Until, After) unless you are following a style
that recommends otherwise. The same rules apply to the
subject lines of e-mails or memos. However, various citation
styles may have different requirements for using capital letter
in titles in references or footnotes. See documenting sources.
Professional and Personal Titles Titles preceding proper names are capitalized (Ms. Berger,
Senator King). Appositives following proper names are not
198
normally capitalized (Angus King, senator from Maine).
However, the word president is often capitalized when it refers
to the chief executive of a national government. See
appositives.
Job titles used with personal names are capitalized (H. S.
Kim, Division Manager). Job titles used without personal names
are not capitalized. (“The division manager will meet us
tomorrow.”) Use capital letters to designate family relationships
only when they occur before a name (my uncle, Uncle Fred).
Abbreviations and Letters Capitalize abbreviations if the words they stand for would be
capitalized, such as MBA (Master of Business Administration).
Capitalize letters that serve as names or indicate shapes
(vitamin B, U-turn).
Miscellaneous Capitalizations The first word of a complete sentence enclosed in dashes,
brackets, or parentheses is not capitalized when it appears as
part of another sentence.
► We must improve our safety record this year (accidents last year were up 10 percent).
When specifically identified by number, certain units, such as
parts and chapters of books and rooms in buildings, are
capitalized (Chapter 5, Ch. 5; Room 72, Rm. 72). Minor divisions
199
within such units are not capitalized unless they begin a
sentence (page 11, verse 14, seat 12).
200
case DIRECTORY
Subjective Case Objective Case Possessive Case Appositives Determining the Case of Pronouns
Grammatical case indicates the functional relationship of a
noun or a pronoun to the other words in a sentence. Nouns
change form only in the possessive case; pronouns may change
form in the subjective, objective, or possessive case.
The case of a noun or pronoun is always determined by its
function in a phrase, clause, or sentence. If it is the subject of a
phrase, clause, or sentence, it is in the subjective case; if it is an
object in a phrase, clause, or sentence, it is in the objective
case; if it reflects possession or ownership and modifies a noun,
it is in the possessive case. Figure C–1 is a chart of pronouns in
the subjective, objective, and possessive cases. See also
sentence construction.
201
FIGURE C–1. Pronoun-Case Chart
The subjective case can indicate the person or thing acting
(“He sued the vendor”), the person or thing acted on (“He was
sued by the vendor”), or the topic of description (“He is the
vendor”). The objective case can indicate the thing acted on
(“The vendor sued him”) or the person or thing acting but in the
objective position (“The vendor was sued by him”). (See also
voice.) The possessive case indicates the person or thing
owning or possessing something (“It was his company”). See
also modifiers.
Subjective Case A pronoun is in the subjective case (also called nominative case)
when it represents the person or thing acting or is the receiver
of the action even though it is in the subject position.
► I wrote a proposal.
A linking verb links a pronoun to its antecedent to show that
they identify the same thing. Because they represent the same
202
thing, the pronoun is in the subjective case even when it follows
the verb, which makes it a subjective complement.
► She is the new manager. [subject] ► The new manager is she. [subjective complement]
The subjective case is used after the words than and as because
of the understood (although unstated) portion of the clauses in
which those words appear.
► George is as good a designer as I [am]. ► Our subsidiary can do the job better than we [can].
Objective Case A pronoun is in the objective case (also called the accusative
case) when it indicates the person or thing receiving the action
that is expressed by a verb in the active voice.
► The company promoted me in July.
Pronouns that follow action verbs (which excludes all forms of
the verb be) must be in the objective case. Do not be confused
by an additional name (“The company promoted John and me
in July”).
A pronoun is in the objective case when it is the object of a
preposition or gerund or the subject of an infinitive.
► Between you and me, his facts are questionable. [objects of a preposition]
203
► Training him was the best thing I could have done. [object of a gerund]
► We asked them to return the deposit. [subject of an infinitive]
English does not differentiate between direct objects and
indirect objects; both require the objective form of the pronoun.
See also complements.
► The interviewer seemed to like me. [direct object] ► They wrote me a letter. [indirect object]
Possessive Case A noun or pronoun is in the possessive case when it represents
a person, place, or thing that possesses something. To make a
singular noun possessive, add ’s (the manufacturer’s robotic
inventory system). With plural nouns that end in s, show the
possessive by placing an apostrophe after the s that forms the
plural (a managers’ meeting). For other guidelines, see
possessive case.
Appositives An appositive is a noun or noun phrase that follows and
amplifies the meaning of another noun or noun phrase.
Because it has the same grammatical function as the noun it
complements, an appositive should be in the same case as the
noun it complements.
► Two auditors, Jim Knight and I, were asked to review the
204
books. [subjective case] ► The group leader selected two members to represent the
department—Mohan Pathak and me. [objective case]
Determining the Case of Pronouns One test to determine the proper case of a pronoun is to try it
with a transitive verb, such as resembled or hit. If the pronoun
would logically precede the verb, use the subjective case; if it
would logically follow the verb, use the objective case.
► She [He, They] resembled her father. [subjective case] ► Angela resembled him [her, them]. [objective case]
In the following example, try omitting the noun to determine
the case of the pronoun. The proper pronoun will sound
correct.
SENTENCE (We / Us) pilots fly our own airplanes.
INCORRECT Us fly our own airplanes.
CORRECT We fly our own airplanes.
To determine the case of a pronoun that follows as or than,
mentally add the words that are omitted but understood.
► The other sales representative is not paid as well as she [is paid]. [You would not write “Her is paid.”]
► His partner was better informed than he [was informed]. [You would not write “Him was informed.”]
205
If pronouns in compound constructions cause problems, try
using them singly to determine the proper case.
SENTENCE (We / Us) and the clients are going to lunch.
CORRECT We are going to lunch.
For advice on when to use who and whom, see who / whom.
206
cause-and-effect method of development The cause-and-effect method of development is a common
strategy to explain why something happened or why you think
something will happen. The goal is to make as plausible as
possible the relationship between a situation and either its
cause or its effect. The conclusions you draw about the
relationships should be based on evidence you have gathered.
Like all methods, this one is often used in combination with
others. If you were examining a problem with multiple causes,
for example, you might combine this method of development
with the order-of-importance method of development as you
examine each cause and its effect.
Evaluating Evidence Because not all the evidence you gather will be of equal value,
keep in mind the following guidelines:
Your facts and arguments should be relevant to your topic. Be careful not to draw a conclusion that your evidence does not support. For example, you may have researched some statistics showing that an increasing number of Americans are licensed to fly small airplanes cannot be used as evidence for a decrease in new car sales in the United States. Your evidence should be sufficient. Not having enough evidence can lead to false conclusions.
207
► Driver-training classes do not help prevent auto accidents. Two people I know who completed driver- training classes were involved in accidents.
A thorough investigation of the usefulness of driver-training
classes in keeping down the accident rate would require more
than one or two examples. It would require a systematic
comparison of the driving records for a representative sample
of drivers who had completed driver training and those who
had not.
Your evidence should be representative. If you conduct a survey to obtain your evidence, do not solicit responses from only individuals or groups whose views are identical to yours; be sure you obtain responses from a diverse population. Your evidence should be demonstrable. Two events that occur close to each other in time or place may or may not be causally related. For example, the fact that new traffic signs were placed at an intersection and the next day an accident occurred does not prove that the signs caused the accident. You must demonstrate the relationship between the two events with pertinent facts and arguments. See logic errors.
Linking Causes to Effects To show a true relationship between a cause and an effect, you
must demonstrate that the existence of the one requires the
existence of the other. It is often difficult to establish beyond
208
any doubt that one event was the cause of another event. More
often, a result will have more than one cause. As you research a
subject, your task is to determine which cause or causes are
most plausible.
When several probable causes are equally valid, report your
findings accordingly, as in the following excerpt from an article
on the use of an energy-saving device called a furnace-vent
damper. The damper is a metal plate that fits inside the flue or
vent pipe of a furnace to allow poisonous gases to escape up the
flue. Tests run on several dampers showed a number of
probable causes for their malfunctioning.
► One damper was sold without proper installation instructions, and another was wired incorrectly. Two of the units had slow-opening dampers (15 seconds) that prevented the [furnace] burner from firing. And one damper jammed when exposed to a simulated fuel temperature of more than 700 degrees.
— Don DeBat, “Save Energy but Save Your Life, Too,” Family
Safety
The investigator located more than one cause of damper
malfunctions and reported on them. Without such a thorough
account, recommendations to prevent malfunctions would be
based on incomplete evidence.
209
center on Use the phrase center on in writing, not center around. (“The
experiments center on the new discovery.”) Often, however, the
idea intended by center on is better expressed by other words.
210
chronological method of development The chronological method of development arranges the events
under discussion in sequential order, as in Figure C–2,
emphasizing time as it begins with the first event and continues
chronologically to the last. Trip reports, instructions, work
schedules, some minutes of meetings, and certain incident
reports are among the types of writing in which information is
organized chronologically. Chronological order is typically used
in narration.
211
212
FIGURE C–2. Chronological Method of Development
In the e-mail shown in Figure C–2, a retail store manager
describes the steps taken over a one-year period to reduce
shoplifting at his store. After providing important background
information, the writer presents the steps taken in
chronological order.
213
cite / sight / site Cite means “acknowledge” or “quote an authority.” (“The
speaker cited several famous economists.”) Sight is the ability to
see. (“He feared that he might lose his sight.”) Site is a plot of
land (a construction site) or the place where something is
located (a storage site).
214
clarity Clarity is essential to effective communication with your
readers. You cannot achieve your purpose or a goal like
persuasion without clarity.
A logical method of development and an outline will help
you avoid presenting your reader with a jumble of isolated
thoughts. A method of development and an outline that puts
your thoughts into a logical, meaningful sequence brings
coherence as well as unity to your writing. Clear transition
contributes to clarity by providing the smooth flow that enables
the reader to connect your thoughts with one another without
conscious effort. See also outlining.
Proper emphasis and subordination are mandatory if you
want to achieve clarity. If you do not use those two
complementary techniques wisely, all your clauses and
sentences will appear to be of equal importance; your reader
will only be able to guess which are most important, which are
least important, and which fall somewhere in between. The
pace at which you present your ideas is also important to
clarity; if the pace is not carefully adjusted to both the topic and
the reader, your writing will appear cluttered and unclear.
Point of view establishes through whose eyes or from what
vantage point the reader views the subject. A consistent point of
view is essential to clarity; if you inappropriately switch from
the first person to the third person in midsentence, you are
215
certain to confuse your reader.
Precise word choice contributes to clarity and helps
eliminate ambiguity and awkwardness. Vague words, clichés,
poor use of idioms, and inappropriate usage detract from
clarity. That conciseness is a requirement for clear writing
should be evident to anyone who has ever attempted to
decipher a product liability or privacy statement. For clarity,
remove unnecessary words from your writing. See also plain
language.
216
clauses A clause is a group of words that contains a subject and a
predicate. (See sentence construction.) Every sentence must
contain at least one independent, that is, a clause that can stand
alone as a sentence: “The scaffolding fell when the rope broke.”
A dependent clause must be attached to an independent clause:
“I was at the St. Louis branch when the decision was made. If a
dependent clause is not attached to an independent clause, it
becomes a sentence fragment.
Dependent (or subordinate) clauses are useful in making the
relationship between thoughts clearer and more succinct than
if the ideas were presented in a choppy series of simple
sentences or in a compound sentence. Dependent clauses are
especially effective for expressing thoughts that describe or
explain another statement.
CHOPPY The recycling facility is located between Millville and Darrtown. Both villages use it. [The two thoughts are of approximately equal importance.]
SUBORDINATED The recycling facility, which is located between Millville and Darrtown, is used by both villages. [One thought is subordinated to the other.]
Too much subordination, however, can be confusing and foster
wordiness. See also conciseness.
217
A clause can be connected to the rest of its sentence by a
coordinating conjunction, a subordinating conjunction, a
relative pronoun, or a conjunctive adverb.
► It was 500 miles to the facility, so we made arrangements to fly. [coordinating conjunction]
► Drivers will need to be alert because snow may cause hazardous conditions near the entrance to the warehouse. [subordinating conjunction]
► Robert M. Fano was the scientist who developed the earliest multiple-access computer system at MIT. [relative pronoun]
► We arrived in the evening; nevertheless, we began the tour of the facility. [conjunctive adverb]
218
clichés Clichés are expressions that have been used for so long they are
no longer fresh but come to mind easily because they are so
familiar. Clichés are often wordy and vague, and they can be
confusing, especially to speakers of English as a second
language. A better, more direct word or phrase is given for each
of the following clichés.
INSTEAD OF USE
all over the map scattered, unfocused
the game plan strategy, schedule
last but not least last, finally
Some writers use clichés in a misguided attempt to appear
casual or spontaneous, just as other writers try to impress
readers with buzzwords. Although clichés may come to mind
easily while you are writing a draft, eliminate them during
revision. See also affectation, conciseness, and international
correspondence.
219
coherence Writing is coherent when the relationships among ideas are
clear to readers. The major components of coherent writing are
a logical sequence of related ideas and clear transitions between
those ideas. See also clarity and organization.
Presenting ideas in a logical sequence is the most important
requirement in achieving coherence. The key to achieving a
logical sequence is a good outline. (See outlining.) An outline
forces you to establish a beginning, a middle, and an end. That
structure contributes greatly to coherence by enabling you to
experiment with sequences and lay out the most direct route to
your purpose without digressing.
Thoughtful transition is also essential; without it, your
writing cannot achieve the smooth flow from sentence to
sentence and paragraph to paragraph that results in coherence.
During revision, check your draft carefully for coherence. If
possible, have someone else review it to see how well it
expresses the relationships among ideas. See also unity.
220
collaborative writing Collaborative writing occurs when two or more writers work
together to produce a single document for which they share
responsibility and decision-making authority. Collaborative
writing teams are formed when (1) the size of a project or the
time constraints imposed on it require a joint effort, (2) the
project involves multiple areas of expertise, or (3) the project
requires the melding of divergent views into a single
perspective that is acceptable to the whole team or to another
group. Many types of collaborations are possible, from the
collaboration of a primary writer with a variety of contributors
and reviewers to a highly interactive collaboration in which
everyone on a team plays a relatively equal role in shaping the
document.
Tasks of the Collaborative Writing Team The collaborating team strives to achieve a compatible working
relationship by dividing the work in a way that uses each
writer’s expertise and experience to its advantage. The team
should also designate a coordinator, who will guide the team
members’ activities, organize the project, and ensure
coherence and consistency within the document. The
coordinator’s duties can be determined by mutual agreement,
assigned by management, or assigned on a rotating basis if the
team often works together.
221
Planning The team members collectively identify the audience, purpose,
context, and scope of the project. See also meetings and “Five
Steps to Successful Writing.”
At this stage, the team establishes a project plan that may
include guidelines for communication among team members,
version control (naming, dating, and managing document
drafts), review procedures, and writing style standards that
team members are expected to follow. The plan includes a
schedule with due dates for completing initial research tasks,
outlines, drafts, reviews, revisions, and the final document.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Deadlines must be met because team members rely on one another, and one missed deadline can delay the entire project. A missed project deadline can result in a lost opportunity or, in the case of proposals, disqualify an application. Individual writers must adjust their schedules and focus on their own writing process to finish drafts and meet the deadline.
Research and Writing The team next completes initial research tasks, elicits
comments from team members, creates a broad outline of the
document (see outlining), and assigns writing tasks to
individual team members based on their expertise. Depending
on the project, each team member further researches an
222
assigned segment of the document, expands and develops the
broad outline, and produces a draft from the detailed outline.
See also writing a draft.
Reviewing Keeping the audience’s needs and the document’s purpose in
mind, each team member critically yet diplomatically reviews
the other team members’ drafts, from the overall organization
to the clarity of each paragraph, and offers advice to help
improve the writers’ work. Team members can easily solicit
feedback by sharing files and then working with track and
comment features that allow reviewers to suggest changes
without deleting the original text.
Revising In this final stage, individual writers evaluate their colleagues’
reviews and accept, reject, or build on their suggestions. Then
the team coordinator can consolidate all drafts into a final
master copy and maintain and evaluate it for consistency, tone,
and coherence. See also revision.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
As you collaborate, be ready to tolerate some disharmony, but temper it with mutual respect. Team members may have differing perspectives that can easily lead to conflict, ranging from minor differences to major showdowns. However, creative differences resolved respectfully can energize the team and actually strengthen a finished document by compelling writers to reexamine assumptions and issues in
223
unanticipated ways. See listening.
Using Collaborative Writing Software Software and online systems help teams work together on a
common writing task whether they are in the same office or in
different countries. Online synchronous whiteboards, for
example, allow teams to collaborate online and discuss and edit
texts in real time. Many such technologies also make it easy to
conduct live chat sessions, share documents, track changes
from one version of a document to the next, alert collaborators
when a document is altered, and export documents for offline
editing. Word processing; Web-based file sharing; and
collaborative systems like wikis, Google Docs, and Microsoft
Word Online enable team members to draft, review, edit, and
comment with text or voice on their collective work. Project
management programs can also help organize and manage
schedules as well as track versions and deadlines. See also
document management.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing Collaboratively
✓ Designate one person as the team coordinator. ✓ Identify the audience, purpose, context, and scope of the project. ✓ Create a project plan, including a schedule and style or format
standards.
224
✓ Create a working outline of the document. ✓ Assign sections or tasks to each team member. ✓ Research and write drafts of each document section. ✓ Use the agreed-upon standards for style and format. ✓ Exchange sections for team member reviews. ✓ Revise sections as needed. ✓ Meet the established deadlines for drafts, revisions, and final
versions. ✓ Consider using online tools to facilitate working with team
members.
225
collection letters Collection letters serve two purposes: (1) collecting an overdue
bill and (2) preserving the customer relationship. In some
states, legal requirements may force you to use an attorney to
write such letters. See also correspondence and letters.
Most companies use a series of collection letters like those
shown in Figures C–3 through C–5, in which the letters become
increasingly demanding and urgent. All letters should be
courteous and show a genuine interest in the customer as well
as concern for whatever problems may be preventing prompt
payment. See also “you” viewpoint.
226
FIGURE C–3. First-Stage Collection Letter
227
FIGURE C–4. Second-Stage Collection Letter
228
FIGURE C–5. Third-Stage Collection Letter
The first stage should include reminders stamped on the
invoice (“overdue”), form letters, or brief personal notes. These
early reminders should maintain a friendly tone, as shown in
Figure C–3.
In the second stage, your tone should be firm, but it should
never be rude, sarcastic, or threatening. Ask directly for
payment, and inquire whether some circumstances are
preventing payment. Make it easy for the customer to respond,
as shown in Figure C–4.
Third-stage collection letters reflect a sense of urgency
because the customer has not responded to your previous
letters. Although your tone should remain courteous, make
your demand for payment explicit, as shown in Figure C–5.
Point out how reasonable you have been, and urge the customer
to pay at once to avoid a collection service or legal action.
229
colons The colon (:) is a mark of introduction that alerts readers to the
close connection between the preceding statement and what
follows.
Colons in Sentences A colon links independent clauses to words, phrases, clauses,
or lists that identify, rename, emphasize, amplify, explain, or
illustrate the sentence that precedes the colon.
► Two topics will be discussed: the new accounting system and the new bookkeeping procedures. [phrases that identify]
► Only one thing will satisfy Mr. Sturgess: our finished report. [appositive (renaming) phrase for emphasis]
► Any organization is confronted with two separate, though related, information problems: It must maintain an effective internal communication system and an effective external communication system. [clause to amplify and explain]
► Heart patients should make key lifestyle changes: stop smoking, exercise regularly, eat a low-fat diet, and reduce stress. [list to identify and illustrate]
Colons with Salutations, Titles, Citations, and Numbers A colon follows the salutation in formal correspondence, even
230
when the salutation refers to a person by first name.
► Dear Professor Jeffers: or Dear Mary:
Colons separate titles from subtitles and separate references to
sections of works in citations. See also documenting sources.
► “ ‘We Regret to Inform You’: Toward a New Theory of Negative Messages”
► International Journal of Business Communication 51:279– 303 [volume 51, pages 279–303]
Colons separate numbers in time references and indicate
numerical ratios.
► 9:30 a.m. [9 hours and 30 minutes] ► The cement is mixed with water and sand at a ratio of 5:3:1.
[The colon is read as the word to.]
Punctuation and Capitalization with Colons A colon always goes outside quotation marks.
► This was the real meaning of the manager’s “suggestion”: Cooperation within our department must improve.
As this example shows, the first word after a colon may be
capitalized if the statement following the colon is a complete
sentence and functions as a formal statement or question. If the
element following the colon is subordinate, however, use a
231
lowercase letter to begin that element. See also capitalization.
► We have only one way to stay within our present budget: to reduce expenditures for research and development.
Unnecessary Colons Do not place a colon between a verb and its objects.
Likewise, do not use a colon between a preposition and its
objects.
Do not insert a colon after including, such as, or for example to
introduce a simple list.
One common exception is made when a verb or preposition is
followed by a stacked list; however, it may be possible to
introduce the list with a complete sentence instead.
232
comma splice A comma splice is a grammatical error in which two
independent clauses are joined by only a comma.
INCORRECT It was 500 miles to the facility, we arranged to fly.
A comma splice can be corrected in several ways.
1. Substitute a semicolon, a semicolon and a conjunctive adverb followed by a comma, or a comma and a coordinating conjunction.
It was 500 miles to the facility; we arranged to fly. [semicolon] It was 500 miles to the facility; therefore, we arranged to fly. [conjunctive adverb] It was 500 miles to the facility, so we arranged to fly. [coordinating conjunction]
2. Create two sentences. It was 500 miles to the facility. We arranged to fly.
3. Subordinate one clause to the other. (See subordination.) Because it was 500 miles to the facility, we arranged to fly.
See also sentence construction and sentence faults.
233
commas DIRECTORY
Linking Independent Clauses Enclosing Elements Introducing Elements Separating Items in a Series Clarifying and Contrasting Showing Omissions Using with Numbers and Names Using with Other Punctuation Avoiding Unnecessary Commas
Like all punctuation, the comma (,) helps readers understand
the writer’s meaning and prevents ambiguity. Notice how the
comma helps make the meaning clear in the second example.
AMBIGUOUS To be successful managers with MBAs must continue their education.
CLEAR To be successful, managers with MBAs must continue their education.
Do not follow the old myth that you should insert a comma
wherever you would pause if you were speaking. Effective use
of commas depends on an understanding of sentence
construction.
Linking Independent Clauses Use a comma before a coordinating conjunction (and, but, or,
234
nor, and sometimes so, yet, and for) that links independent clauses.
► The new microwave disinfection system was delivered, but the installation will require an additional week.
However, if two independent clauses are short and closely
related — and there is no danger of confusing the reader — the
comma may be omitted. Both of the following examples are
correct.
► The cable snapped and the power failed. ► The cable snapped, and the power failed.
Enclosing Elements Commas are used to enclose nonessential information in
nonrestrictive clauses, phrases, and parenthetical elements. See
also restrictive and nonrestrictive elements.
► Our new factory, which began operations last month, should add 25 percent to total output. [nonrestrictive clause]
► The accountant, working quickly and efficiently, finished early. [nonrestrictive phrase]
► We can, of course, expect their lawyer to call us. [parenthetical element]
Yes and no are set off by commas.
► Yes, I think we can finish by the deadline.
235
A direct address, as well as an interjection (oh, well, indeed,
yes, no), should be enclosed in commas.
► You will note, Jeff, that the budget figure matches our estimate. [direct address]
► We must, indeed, rethink the proposal. [interjection]
If the direct address or interjection appears at the beginning of
the sentence, only one comma following the direct address or
interjection is needed.
An appositive phrase (which reidentifies another expression
in the sentence) is enclosed in commas.
► Our company, NT Insurance Group, won several awards last year.
Interrupting parenthetical and transitional words or phrases
are usually set off with commas. See also transition.
► The report, therefore, needs to be revised.
Commas are omitted when the word or phrase does not
interrupt the continuity of thought.
► I therefore recommend that we begin construction.
For other means of punctuating parenthetical elements, see
dashes and parentheses.
236
Introducing Elements Clauses and Phrases Generally, place a comma after an introductory clause or
phrase, especially if it is long, to identify where the introductory
element ends and the main part of the sentence begins.
► Because we have not yet reached our hiring goals for the Sales Division, we recommend the development of an aggressive recruiting program.
A long modifying phrase that precedes the main clause should
always be followed by a comma.
► During the first series of field-performance tests at our Colorado proving ground, the new engine failed to meet our expectations.
When an introductory phrase is short and closely related to the
main clause, the comma may be omitted.
► In two seconds a decision was reached.
A comma should always follow an absolute phrase, which
modifies the whole sentence.
► The presentation completed, we returned to our offices.
Words and Quotations Certain types of introductory words are followed by a comma.
237
One example is a transitional word or phrase that connects the preceding clause or sentence with the thought that follows.
► Furthermore, we should include college job fairs in our recruiting plans, provided our budget is approved.
► For example, this change will make us more competitive in the global marketplace.
Use a comma to separate a direct quotation from its
introduction.
► Morton and Lucia White said, “People live in cities but dream of the countryside.”
Do not use a comma when giving an indirect quotation.
► Morton and Lucia White said that people dream of the countryside, even though they live in cities.
When an adverb closely modifies the verb or the entire
sentence, it should not be followed by a comma.
► Perhaps we can still solve the high turnover problem. Certainly we should try. [Perhaps and certainly closely modify each statement.]
Separating Items in a Series Although the comma before the last item in a series is
sometimes omitted, it is generally clearer to include it.
► Random House, Bantam, Doubleday, and Dell were once
238
separate publishing companies. [Without the final comma, “Doubleday and Dell” might refer to one company or two.]
Phrases and clauses in coordinate series are also punctuated
with commas.
► Plants absorb noxious gases, act as receptors of dirt particles, and cleanse the air of other impurities.
When phrases or clauses in a series contain commas, use
semicolons rather than commas to separate the items.
► Among those present were John Howard, President of the Howard Paper Company; Thomas Martin, CEO of AIR Recycling, Inc.; and Larry Stanley, President of Northland Papers.
When adjectives modifying the same noun can be reversed and
make sense, or when they can be separated by and, they should
be separated by commas.
► The aircraft featured a modern, sleek, swept-wing design.
When an adjective modifies a phrase, no comma is required.
► She investigated the damaged inventory-control system. [The adjective damaged modifies the phrase inventory- control system.]
Never separate a final adjective from its noun.
► He is a conscientious, honest, reliable, worker.
239
Clarifying and Contrasting Use a comma to separate two contrasting thoughts or ideas.
► The project was finished on time, but not within the budget.
Use a comma after an independent clause that is only loosely
related to the dependent clause that follows it or that could be
misread without the comma.
► I should be able to finish the plan by July, even though I lost time because of illness.
Showing Omissions A comma sometimes replaces a verb in certain elliptical
constructions.
► Some were punctual; others, late. [The comma replaces were.]
It is better, however, to avoid such constructions in business
writing.
Using with Numbers and Names Commas are conventionally used to separate distinct items. Use
commas between the elements of an address written on the
same line (but not between the state and the ZIP Code).
► Kristen James, 4119 Mill Road, Dayton, Ohio 45401
240
A full date that is written in month-day-year format uses a
comma preceding and following the year.
► November 30, 2025, is the payoff date.
Do not use commas for dates in the day-month-year format,
which is used in many parts of the world and by the U.S.
military.
► Note that 30 November 2025 is the payoff date.
Do not use commas when showing only the month and year or
month and day in a date.
► The target date of May 2020 is optimistic, so I would like to meet on March 4 to discuss our options.
Use commas to separate the elements of large arabic numbers.
► 1,528,200 feet
In many countries, the comma is a decimal marker, with
periods or spaces used for large numbers (1.528.200 meters or 1
528 200 meters).
A comma may be substituted for the colon in the salutation of
a personal letter or e-mail. Do not, however, use a comma in
the salutation of a formal business letter or e-mail, even if you
use the person’s first name.
► Dear Marie, [personal letter or e-mail]
241
► Dear Marie: [formal business letter or e-mail]
Use commas to separate the elements of geographic names.
► Toronto, Ontario, Canada
Use a comma to separate names that are reversed (Smith,
Alvin), and use commas with professional abbreviations.
► Jim Rogers Jr., M.D., chaired the conference. [ Jr. or Sr. does not require a comma.]
Using with Other Punctuation Conjunctive adverbs (however, nevertheless, consequently, for
example, on the other hand) that join independent clauses are
preceded by a semicolon and followed by a comma. Such
adverbs function both as modifiers and as connectives.
► The idea is good; however, our budget is not sufficient.
As shown earlier in this entry, use semicolons rather than
commas to separate items in a series when the items
themselves contain commas.
When a comma should follow a phrase or clause that ends
with words in parentheses, the comma always appears outside
the closing parenthesis.
► Although we left late (at 7:30 p.m.), we arrived on time.
242
Commas always go inside quotation marks.
► The status display indicates “ready,” but the unit requires an additional warm-up period.
Except with abbreviations, a comma should not be used with a
dash, an exclamation mark, a period, or a question mark.
Avoiding Unnecessary Commas A number of common writing errors involve placing commas
where they do not belong. As stated earlier, such errors often
occur because writers assume that a pause in a sentence should
be indicated by a comma.
Do not place a comma between a subject and a verb or
between a verb and its object.
Do not use a comma between the elements of a compound
subject or a compound predicate consisting of only two
elements.
243
Do not include a comma after a coordinating conjunction such
as and or but.
Do not place a comma before the first item or after the last item
of a series.
Do not use a comma to separate a prepositional phrase from the
rest of the sentence unnecessarily.
244
compare / contrast When you compare things, you point out similarities or both
similarities and differences. (“We should compare both brands
before making our choice.”) When you contrast things, you
point out only the differences. (“Their speaking styles contrast
sharply.”) In either case, you compare or contrast only things
that are part of a common category.
When compare is used to establish a general similarity, it is
followed by to. (“He compared our receiving the grant to
winning a marathon.”) When compare is used to indicate a
close examination of similarities or differences, it is followed by
with. (“We compared the features of the new copier with those
of the current one.”)
Contrast is normally followed by with. (“The new policy
contrasts sharply with the earlier one.”) When the noun form of
contrast is used, one speaks of the contrast between two things
or of one thing being in contrast to the other.
245
comparison When you are making a comparison, be sure that both or all of
the elements being compared are clearly evident to your
reader.
The things being compared must be of the same kind.
Be sure to point out the parallels or differences between the
things being compared. Do not assume your reader will know
what you mean.
A double comparison in the same sentence requires that the
first comparison be completed before the second one is stated.
Do not attempt to compare things that are not comparable.
246
comparison method of development As a method of development, comparison points out
similarities and differences between the elements of your
subject. The comparison method of development can help
readers understand a difficult or unfamiliar subject by relating
it to a simpler or more familiar one.
You must first determine the basis for the comparison. For
example, if you were comparing bids from contractors for a
remodeling project at your company, you would most likely
compare such factors as price, previous experience, personnel
qualifications, availability, and completion date. Once you have
determined the basis or bases for comparison, you can
determine the most effective way to structure your comparison:
whole by whole or part by part.
In the whole-by-whole method, all the relevant
characteristics of one item are examined before all the relevant
characteristics of the next item. The descriptions of typical
woodworking glues in Figure C–6 are organized according to the
whole-by-whole method. This document would be useful for
those readers who wish to learn about all types of wood glues.
247
FIGURE C–6. Whole-by-Whole Method of Comparison
If your purpose is to help readers consider the various
characteristics of all the glues, the information might be
arranged according to the part-by-part method of comparison,
in which the relevant features of the items are compared one by
one (as shown in Figure C–7). The part-by-part method could
accommodate further comparison — such as temperature
ranges, special warnings, and common use.
248
FIGURE C–7. Part-by-Part Method of Comparison
Comparisons can also be made effectively with the use of
tables, as shown in Figure C–8. The advantage of a table is that
it provides a quick reference, allowing readers to see and
compare all the information at once. The disadvantage is that a
table cannot convey as much related detailed information as a
narrative description can.
249
FIGURE C–8. Comparison Using a Table to Illustrate Key Differences
250
complaints A complaint message, sent by e-mail or letter, describes a
problem that the writer requests the recipient to solve. The tone
of the message is important: If your message is angry and
belligerent, you may not be taken seriously. Likewise,
immediately posting a complaint to a company’s social media
site or to a public forum might be seen as an attack rather than
an honest attempt to work out a problem and reach a
resolution. Assume that the recipient will be conscientious in
correcting the problem. However, anticipate reader reactions
or rebuttals. See audience and correspondence.
► I reviewed my user manual’s “Safe Operating Guidelines” carefully before I installed the device. [This assures readers you followed instructions.]
Without such explanations, readers may be tempted to dismiss
your complaint. Figure C–9 shows a complaint message that
details a billing problem. Although the circumstances and
severity of the problem may vary, you should generally do the
following when composing an effective complaint message:
1. Identify the problem or faulty item(s), and include relevant invoice numbers, part names, and dates.
2. Explain logically, clearly, and specifically what went wrong, especially for a problem with a service. (Avoid guessing why you think some problem occurred.)
3. State what you expect the reader to do to solve the problem.
251
4. Include or attach a copy of the receipt, bill, or contract, or perhaps photographs of damaged parts, and keep the original(s) for your records.
FIGURE C–9. Complaint Message (Sent as E-mail)
Be sure to check the company’s Web site for any instructions on
submitting a complaint. When you cannot find specific
instructions, you may address your complaint to Customer
Service for large organizations. In smaller organizations, you
might write to a vice president in charge of sales or service, or
directly to the owner. Often, a well-written e-mail, followed if
necessary by a letter sent through standard mail, will elicit the
252
best response. If you do not receive a timely response to your
complaint, try sending it to a different person in the company.
See also adjustment messages and refusal letters.
253
complement / compliment Complement means “anything that completes a whole” (see also
complements). It is used as either a noun or a verb.
► A complement of four employees would bring our staff up to its normal level. [noun]
► The two programs complement one another perfectly. [verb]
Compliment means “praise.” It too is used as either a noun or a
verb.
► The manager’s compliment boosted staff morale. [noun] ► The manager complimented the staff on its proposal.
[verb]
254
complements A complement is a word, phrase, or clause used in the
predicate of a sentence to complete the meaning of the
sentence.
► Pilots fly airplanes. [word] ► To invest is to risk losses. [phrase] ► John knew that he would be late. [clause]
Four types of complements are generally recognized: direct
object, indirect object, objective complement, and subjective
complement. See also sentence construction.
A direct object is a noun or noun equivalent that receives the
action of a transitive verb; it answers the question What? or
Whom? after the verb.
► I designed a Web site. [noun phrase] ► I like to work. [verbal] ► I like it. [pronoun] ► I like what I saw. [noun clause]
An indirect object is a noun or noun equivalent that occurs with
a direct object after certain kinds of transitive verbs, such as
give, wish, cause, and tell. It answers the question To whom or
what? or For whom or what?
► We should buy the office a scanner. [Scanner is the direct object, and office is the indirect object.]
255
An objective complement completes the meaning of a sentence
by revealing something about the object of its transitive verb.
An objective complement may be either a noun or an adjective.
► They call him a genius. [noun phrase] ► We painted the building white. [adjective]
A subjective complement, which follows a linking verb rather
than a transitive verb, describes the subject. A subjective
complement may be either a noun or an adjective.
► His sister is a consultant. [noun phrase follows linking verb is]
► His brother is ill. [adjective follows linking verb is]
256
compose / constitute / comprise Compose and constitute both mean “make up the whole.” The
parts compose or constitute the whole. (“The nine offices
compose the division. Unethical activities constitute cause for
dismissal.”) Comprise means “include,” “contain,” or “consist
of.” The whole comprises the parts. (“The division comprises
nine offices.”)
257
compound words A compound word is made from two or more words that
function as a single concept. A compound may be hyphenated,
written as one word, or written as separate words (low-level,
underestimate, post office).
If you are not certain whether a compound word should use a
hyphen, check a dictionary.
Be careful to distinguish between compound words
(greenhouse) and words that simply appear together but do not
constitute compound words (green house). For plurals of
compound words, generally add s to the last letter (bookcases
and Web sites). However, when the first word of the compound
is more important to its meaning than the last, the first word
takes the s (editors in chief ). Possessives are formed by adding
’s to the end of the compound word (the editor in chief’s desk,
the pipeline’s diameter, the post office’s hours). See also
possessive case.
258
conciseness Concise writing is free of unnecessary words, phrases, clauses,
and sentences without sacrificing clarity or appropriate detail.
Conciseness is not a synonym for brevity; a long report may be
concise, while its abstract may be brief and concise.
Conciseness is always desirable, but brevity may or may not be
desirable in a given passage, depending on the writer’s
purpose. (See also text messaging.) Although concise
sentences are not guaranteed to be effective, wordy sentences
always sacrifice some of their readability and coherence.
Causes of Wordiness Modifiers that repeat an idea present or implicit in the word
being modified contribute to wordiness by being redundant.
See also reason is [because].
basic essentials completely finished
final outcome present status
Coordinated synonyms that merely repeat each other
contribute to wordiness.
each and every basic and fundamental
finally and for good first and foremost
Excess qualification also contributes to wordiness.
perfectly clear completely accurate
259
Expletives, relative pronouns, and relative adjectives,
although they have legitimate purposes, often result in
wordiness.
WORDY There are [expletive] many Web designers who [relative pronoun] are planning to attend the conference, at which [relative adjective] time the committee should meet.
CONCISE Because many Web designers plan to attend the conference, the committee should meet then.
Circumlocution (a long, indirect way of expressing things) is a
leading cause of wordiness. See also gobbledygook.
WORDY The payment to which a subcontractor is entitled should be made promptly so that in the event of a subsequent contractual dispute we, as general contractors, may not be held in default of our contract by virtue of nonpayment.
CONCISE Pay subcontractors promptly. Then, if a contractual dispute occurs, we cannot be held in default of our contract because of nonpayment.
Balance is important. When conciseness is overdone, writing
can become choppy and ambiguous. (See also telegraphic
style.) Too much conciseness can produce a style that is not
only too brief but also too blunt, especially in correspondence.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Achieving Conciseness Wordiness is understandable when you are writing a draft, but it should not survive revision.
✓ Use subordination to achieve conciseness.
260
✓ Avoid affectation by using simple words and phrases.
WORDY It is the policy of the company to provide Internet access to enable employees to conduct the online communication necessary to discharge their responsibilities; such should not be utilized for personal communications or nonbusiness activities.
CONCISE Employee Internet access should be used only for appropriate company business.
✓ Eliminate redundancy.
WORDY Post-installation testing, which is offered to all our customers at no further cost to them whatsoever, is available with each Line Scan System One purchased from this company.
CONCISE Free post-installation testing is offered with each purchase of a Line Scan System One.
✓ Change the passive voice to the active voice and the indicative mood to the imperative mood whenever possible.
WORDY Bar codes are normally used when an order is intended to be displayed on a monitor, and inventory numbers are normally used when an order is to be placed with the manufacturer.
CONCISE Use bar codes to display the order on a monitor, and use inventory numbers to place the order with the manufacturer.
✓ Eliminate or replace wordy introductory phrases or pretentious words and phrases (in the case of, it appears that, needless to say).
REPLACE WITH
in order to, with a view to to
due to the fact that, for the reason that, owing to the fact that, the reason for
because
by means of, by using, in connection with, through the use of by, with
at this time, at this point in time, at present, at the present now, currently
✓ Do not overuse intensifiers, such as very, more, most, best, quite,
261
great, really, and especially. Instead, provide specific and useful details.
✓ Use the search-and-replace command to locate and revise wordy expressions, including to be, and unnecessary helping verbs, such as will.
262
conclusions The conclusion of a document ties the main ideas together and
can even clinch a final significant point. This final point may,
for example, make a prediction or offer a judgment, summarize
key findings, or recommend a course of action. Figure C–10 is a
conclusion from a proposal to reduce a company’s health-care
costs by having the employer sponsor employee health-club
memberships. Notice that it summarizes key points, points to
the benefits, and makes a recommendation.
263
FIGURE C–10. conclusion
The way you conclude depends on your purpose, the needs
of your audience, and the context. For example, a lengthy sales
proposal might conclude persuasively with a summary of the
proposal’s salient points and the company’s relevant strengths.
The following examples are typical concluding strategies.
264
RECOMMENDATION Our findings suggest that you need to alter your marketing
to adjust to the changing demographics for your products.
We recommend that your placement of ads include . . .
SUMMARY As this report describes, we would attract more recent
graduates with the following strategies:
1. Establish our presence on social media to reach college students before they graduate.
2. Increase our attendance at college career fairs. 3. Establish more internships and work-study programs.
JUDGMENT Based on the scope and degree of the storm’s damage, the
current construction code for roofing on light industrial
facilities is inadequate.
IMPLICATION Although our estimate calls for a substantially higher
budget than in the three previous years, we believe that it is
reasonable given our planned expansion.
PREDICTION Although I have exceeded my original estimate for
equipment, I have reduced my labor costs; therefore, I will
easily stay within the original bid.
265
The concluding statement may merely present ideas for
consideration, call for action, or deliberately provoke thought.
IDEAS FOR CONSIDERATION The new prices become effective the first of the year. Price
adjustments are routine for the company, but some of your
customers will not consider them acceptable. Please bear
in mind the needs of both your customers and the company
as you implement these price adjustments.
CALL FOR ACTION Please make a payment of $250 now if you wish to keep
your account active. If you have not responded to our
previous letters because of some special hardship, I will be
glad to work out a solution with you.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING STATEMENT Can we continue to accept the losses incurred by
inefficiency? Or should we take the necessary steps to
control it now?
Be especially careful not to introduce a new topic when you
conclude. A conclusion should always relate to and reinforce
the ideas presented earlier in your writing. Moreover, the
conclusion must be consistent with what the introduction
promised the report would examine (its purpose) and how it
would do so (its method).
For guidance about the location of the conclusions section in
266
a report, see formal reports. For short closings, see
correspondence and entries on specific types of documents
throughout this book.
267
conjunctions A conjunction connects words, phrases, or clauses and can also
indicate the relationship between the elements it connects.
Coordinating conjunctions join two sentence elements that
have identical functions. The coordinating conjunctions are
and, but, or, for, nor, yet, and so.
► Nature and technology affect petroleum prices. [joins two nouns]
► To hear and to listen are two different things. [joins two phrases]
► I would like to include the survey, but that would make the report too long. [joins two clauses]
Coordinating conjunctions in the titles of books, articles,
plays, and movies should not be capitalized unless they are the
first or last word in the title.
► Our library contains Consulting and Financial Independence as well as So You Want to Be a Consultant?
Occasionally, a conjunction may begin a sentence; in fact,
conjunctions can be strong transitional words and at times can
provide emphasis. See also transition.
► I realize that the project is more difficult than expected and that you have encountered staffing problems. But we must meet our deadline.
268
Correlative conjunctions are used in pairs. The correlative
conjunctions are either . . . or, neither . . . nor, not only . . . but
also, both . . . and, and whether . . . or.
► The auditor will arrive on either Wednesday or Thursday.
Subordinating conjunctions connect sentence elements of
different relative importance, normally independent and
dependent clauses. Frequently used subordinating conjunctions
are so, although, after, because, if, where, than, since, as,
unless, before, that, though, and when.
► I left the office after I had finished the report.
Conjunctive adverbs function as conjunctions because they join
two independent clauses. The most common conjunctive
adverbs are however, moreover, therefore, further, then,
consequently, besides, accordingly, also, and thus.
► The engine performed well in the laboratory; however, it failed under road conditions.
269
connotation / denotation The denotations of a word are its literal meanings, as defined in
a dictionary. The connotations of a word are its meanings and
associations beyond its literal definitions. For example, the
denotations of Hollywood are “a district of Los Angeles” and
“the U.S. movie industry as a whole”; for many people, its
connotations are “glamour, opulence, and superficiality.”
Often words have particular connotations for audiences
within professional groups and organizations. Choose words
with both the most accurate denotations and the most
appropriate connotations for the context. See also defining
terms and word choice.
270
consensus Because consensus means “harmony of opinion” among most of
those in a group, the phrases consensus of opinion and general
consensus defeat conciseness. The word consensus can be used
to refer only to a group.
271
context Context is the environment or circumstances in which writers
produce documents and within which readers interpret the
meanings of those documents, whether they are reports or
correspondence. This entry considers the significance of
context for workplace writing and suggests how you can be
aware of it as you write. See also audience.
The context for any document is determined by interrelated
events or circumstances both inside and outside an
organization. For example, when you write a proposal to fund a
project within your company, the economic condition of that
company is part of the context that will determine how your
proposal is received. If the company has recently laid off a
dozen employees, its management may not be inclined to
approve a proposal to expand its operations — regardless of
how well the proposal is written.
When you correspond with someone, the events that
prompted you to write shape the context of the message and
affect what you say and how you say it. If you write to a
customer in response to a complaint, for example, the tone and
approach of your message will be determined by the context —
what you find when you investigate the issue. Is your company
fully or partly at fault? Has the customer incorrectly used a
product? contributed to a problem? (See also adjustment
messages.) If you write instructions for staff members who
272
must use high-volume document-processing equipment, other
questions will reveal the context. What are the lighting and
other physical conditions near the equipment? Will these
physical conditions affect the layout and design of the
instructions? What potential safety issues might the users
encounter?
Assessing Context Each time you write, the context needs to be clearly in your
mind so that your document will achieve its purpose. The
following questions are starting points to help you become
aware of the context, how it will influence your approach and
your readers’ interpretation of what you have written, and how
it will affect the decisions you need to make during the writing
process. See also “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”
What is your professional relationship with your readers, and how might that affect the tone, style, and scope of your writing? What is “the story” behind the immediate reason you are writing — that is, what series of events or perhaps previous documents led to your need to write? What is the preferred medium of your readers, and which medium is best suited to your purpose? See also selecting the medium. What specific factors (such as competition, finance, and regulation) are important to your organization or department? What is the corporate culture in which your readers work,
273
and what are the key values found in its mission statement? What current events within or outside an organization or a department may influence how readers interpret your writing? What national cultural differences might affect your readers’ expectations or interpretations of the document? See also global communication.
As these questions suggest, context is specific each time you
write and often involves the history of a specific organization or
your past dealings with individual readers.
Signaling Context Because context is so important, remind your reader in some
way of the context for your writing, as in the following opening
for a cover message to a proposal. (See cover messages.)
► During our meeting last week on improving quality, you mentioned that we have previously required usability testing only for documents going to high-profile clients because of the costs involved. The idea occurred to me that we might try less extensive usability testing for many of our other clients. Because you asked for suggestions, I have proposed in the attached document a method of limited usability testing for a broad range of clients in order to improve overall quality while keeping costs at a minimum.
Of course, as described in introductions, providing context for
a reader may require only a brief background statement or
274
short reminders.
► Several weeks ago, a financial adviser noticed a recurring problem in the software developed by CGF Systems. Specifically, error messages repeatedly appeared when, in fact, no specific trouble . . .
► Jane, as I promised in my e-mail yesterday, I’ve attached the personnel budget estimates for the next fiscal year.
As the last example suggests, provide context for attachments to
e-mail.
275
continual / continuous Continual implies “happening over and over” or “frequently
repeated.” (“Writing well requires continual practice.”)
Continuous implies “occurring without interruption” or
“unbroken.” (“The continuous roar of the machinery was
deafening.”)
276
contractions A contraction is a shortened spelling of a word or phrase, with
an apostrophe substituting for the missing letter or letters
(cannot / can’t; have not / haven’t; it is / it’s). Contractions are
often used in speech and informal writing; they are generally
not appropriate in reports, proposals, and formal
correspondence. See also business writing style.
277
copyrights, patents, and trademarks This entry offers advice for writers both in the classroom and in
the workplace related to copyrights, patents, and trademarks.
See also plagiarism and visuals.
Copyrights Copyright establishes legal protection for original works of
authorship, including literary, dramatic, musical, artistic, and
other intellectual works in printed or electronic form; it gives
the copyright owner exclusive rights to reproduce, distribute,
perform, or display a work. Copyright protects all original
works of authorship from the moment of their creation,
regardless of whether they are published or contain a notice of
copyright (©).
ETHICS NOTE
If you plan to reproduce copyrighted material in your own publication or on your Web site, you must obtain permission from the copyright holder unless one of the following exceptions applies. To do otherwise is a violation of U.S. law.
Permissions To seek permission to reproduce copyrighted material, you
must contact the copyright holder. In some cases, it is the
278
author; in other cases, it is the publisher of the work. For Web
sites, read the site’s “terms-of-use” information (if available),
and e-mail your request to the appropriate party. State
specifically which portion of the work you wish to reproduce
and how you plan to use it. The copyright holder has the right to
charge a fee and specify conditions and limits of use.
Exceptions Some material — including text, visuals, and digital forms —
may be reproduced without permission. The rules governing
copyright can be complex, so it is prudent to carefully check the
copyright status of anything you plan to reproduce.
Fair use. A small amount of material from a copyrighted source may be used for educational purposes (such as classroom handouts), commentary, criticism, news reporting, and scholarly reports without permission or payment as long as the use satisfies the “fair-use” criteria, as described at the U.S. Copyright Office Web site, www.copyright.gov. Whether a particular use qualifies as fair use depends on all the circumstances. Company boilerplate. In the workplace, employees often borrow material freely from in-house manuals and reports, as well as other company documents, to save time and ensure consistency. Using such “boilerplate,” or “repurposed,” material is not a copyright violation because the company is considered the author of works prepared by its employees on the job. See also repurposing. Public domain material. Works created by or for the U.S.
279
government and not classified or otherwise protected are in the public domain — that is, they are not copyrighted. The same is true for older written works when their copyright has lapsed or never existed. Be aware that some otherwise public domain works may include “value-added” features — such as introductions, visuals, and indexes — that may be copyrighted separately from the original work and thus may require permission. Copyleft Web material. Some public access Web sites, such as Wikipedia, follow the “copyleft” principle and grant permission to freely copy, distribute, or modify material so long as the modified material is also made freely available on the same basis.
ETHICS NOTE
The Internet has changed the face of copyright, creating an illusion of universal access to online material, when in fact permission is often required to alter or use it in any way. Alternative forms of permissions — like those offered by Creative Commons — allow users to freely incorporate specific content into their documents and to license their own original content. Still, even when you use material that may be reproduced or published without permission, you must give appropriate credit to the source from which the material was taken, as described in documenting sources and plagiarism.
Patents The United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO) defines
a patent as an intellectual property right granted by the U.S.
1
280
government to an inventor for a limited time in exchange for
public disclosure of the invention when the patent is granted.
U.S. patents differ from copyright in that they protect
inventions rather than written, musical, and artistic works.
The USPTO grants three types of patents.
Design patents cover the invention of new designs for manufactured items (for example, a design for a mobile phone, desk chair, or car hood) and are valid for fourteen years. Plant patents cover inventions for new plant varieties (for example, an ornamental shrub or a disease-resistant orange tree) and are valid for twenty years. Utility patents cover inventions of machinery, manufacturing processes, or new materials (for example, a personal three-dimensional printer, composite material for a car bumper, or a technique to mine the seabed for minerals) and are valid for twenty years.
To obtain information about international patents, links to
patent offices around the world, and tutorials on patent laws in
different countries and regions, visit the global online patent
resource the Lens at www.lens.org.
Trademarks A trademark is a word, phrase, graphic symbol, logo, or some
other device that identifies and distinguishes the goods of one
merchant or manufacturer from those of others. The two
281
primary marks are trademarks and service marks.
Trademarks identify physical commodities (automobiles, computers, shoes) distributed through interstate commerce. Service marks identify services (the preparation and sale of food, the provision of transportation or lodging, the sale of life or health insurance).
The term trademark is often used to refer to both trademarks
and service marks.
Trademarks for goods and services registered with the
USPTO include the ® symbol or the phrase “Reg. U.S. Pat. & TM
off.” The phrase “Patent Pending” on a manufactured item
means that the inventor has applied for a patent on the item.
Before trademarks are registered with the USPTO, service
providers commonly use the superscript symbol SM.
Trademark names must be capitalized. When citing a
trademark, include the superscript trademark symbol ® if it’s
used in the trademark name.
2
282
FIGURE C–11. Sample Trademarks
To obtain additional information about patents and
trademarks, go to the FAQ page of the U.S. Patent and
Trademark Office Web site at www.uspto.gov/learning-and-
resources/general-faqs.
“Copyleft” is a play on the word copyright and is the effort to free materials from many of the restrictions of copyright. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Copyleft.
The USPTO registers other less frequently used types of marks that have different registration requirements than trademarks and service marks: certification marks, collective marks, collective trademarks, and collective service marks. These are described at www.uspto.gov.
1
2
283
correspondence DIRECTORY
Audience and Writing Style Openings and Closings Goodwill and the “You” Viewpoint Writer’s Checklist: Using Tone to Build Goodwill Direct and Indirect Patterns Clarity and Emphasis Writer’s Checklist: Correspondence and Accuracy
Correspondence in the workplace — whether through e-mail,
letters, memos, or another medium — requires many of the
steps described in “Five Steps to Successful Writing.” As you
prepare even a simple e-mail, for example, you might study
previous messages (research) and then list or arrange the
points you wish to cover (organization) in an order that is
logical for your readers. See also selecting the medium.
Corresponding with others in the workplace also requires
that you focus on both establishing and maintaining a positive
working relationship with your readers and conveying a
professional image of yourself and your organization. See also
audience.
Audience and Writing Style Effective correspondence uses an appropriate conversational
284
style. To achieve that style, imagine your reader sitting across from you and write to the reader as if you were talking face to
face. Take into account your reader’s needs and feelings. Ask
yourself, “How might I feel if I received this letter or e-mail?”
and then tailor your message accordingly. Remember, an
impersonal and unfriendly message to a customer or client can
tarnish the image of you and your business, but a thoughtful
and sincere one can enhance it.
Whether you use a formal or an informal writing style
depends entirely on your reader and your purpose. You might
use an informal (or casual) style, for example, with a colleague
you know well and a formal (or restrained) style with a client
you have not met.
CASUAL It worked! The new process is better than we had dreamed.
RESTRAINED You will be pleased to know that the new process is more effective than we expected.
You will probably find yourself using the restrained style more
frequently than the casual style. Remember that an overdone
attempt to sound casual or friendly can sound insincere.
However, do not adopt so formal a style that your writing reads
like a legal contract. Affectation not only will irritate and baffle
readers but also can waste time and produce costly errors.
AFFECTED Per yesterday’s discussion, we no longer possess an original copy of the brochure requested. Please be advised that a PDF copy is attached herewith to this e-mail.
IMPROVED We are out of printed copies of the brochure we discussed yesterday, so I am attaching a PDF copy to this e-mail.
285
The improved version is not only clearer and less stuffy but also
more concise. See also business writing style and conciseness.
Openings and Closings The opening of any correspondence should identify the subject
and often the main point of the message.
► Attached is the final installation report, which I hope you can review by Monday, December 14. You will notice that the report includes . . .
When your reader is not familiar with the subject or
background of a problem, you may provide an introductory
paragraph before stating the main point of the message. Doing
so is especially important in correspondence that will serve as a
record of crucial information. Generally, long or complex
subjects benefit most from more thorough introductions.
However, even when you are writing a short message about a
familiar subject, remind readers of the context. In the following
example, words that provide context are shown in italics.
► As Maria recommended, I reviewed the office reorganization plan. I like most of the features; however, the location of the receptionist and assistant . . .
Do not state the main point first when (1) readers are likely to
be highly skeptical or (2) key readers, such as managers or
clients, may disagree with your position. In those cases, a more
286
persuasive tactic is to state the problem or issue first, then
present the specific points supporting your final
recommendation, as is discussed under the heading “indirect
pattern” (page 114). See also persuasion.
Your closing can accomplish many important tasks, such as
building positive relationships with readers, encouraging
colleagues and employees, letting recipients know what you will
do or what you expect of them, and stating any assignment
deadlines.
► I will discuss the problem with the marketing consultant and let you know by Wednesday (August 5) what we are able to change.
Routine statements are sometimes unavoidable. (“If you have
further questions, please let me know.”) However, try to make
your closing work for you by providing specific prompts to
which the reader can respond. See also conclusions.
► Thanks again for the report, and let me know if you want me to send you a copy of the test results.
Goodwill and the “You” Viewpoint Write concisely, but do not be so blunt that you risk losing the
reader’s goodwill. Responding to a vague written request with
“Your request was unclear” or “I don’t understand” could offend
287
your reader. Instead, establish goodwill to encourage your
reader to provide the information you need.
► I will be glad to help, but I need additional information to locate the report you requested. Specifically, can you give me the report’s title, release date, or number?
Although this version is a bit longer, it is more tactful and will
elicit a helpful response. See also telegraphic style.
You can also build goodwill by emphasizing the reader’s
needs or benefits. Suppose you received a refund request from
a customer who forgot to include the receipt with the request.
In a response to that customer, you might write the following:
WEAK We must receive the sales receipt before we can process a refund. [The writer’s needs are emphasized: “We must.”]
If you consider how to keep the customer’s goodwill, you could
word the request this way:
IMPROVED Please send the sales receipt so that we can process your refund. [Although polite, the sentence still focuses on the writer’s needs: “so that we can process.”]
You can put the reader’s needs and interests foremost by
writing from the reader’s perspective. Often, doing so means
using the words you and your rather than we, our, I, and mine
— a technique called the “you” viewpoint. Consider the
following revision:
288
EFFECTIVE So that you can receive your refund promptly, please mail or fax the sales receipt. [The reader’s needs are emphasized with you and your.]
This revision stresses the reader’s benefit and interest. By
emphasizing the reader’s needs, the writer will be more likely to
accomplish the purpose: to get the reader to act. See also
positive writing.
If overdone, however, goodwill and the “you” viewpoint can
produce writing that is fawning and insincere. Messages that
are full of excessive praise and inflated language may be
ignored — or even resented — by the reader.
EXCESSIVE PRAISE
You are just the kind of astute client that deserves the finest service that we can offer — and you deserve our best deal. Understanding how carefully you make decisions, I know you’ll think about the advantages of using our consulting service.
REASONABLE From our earlier correspondence, I understand your need for reliable service. We strive to give all our priority clients our full attention, and after you have reviewed our proposal, I am confident you will appreciate our “five-star” consulting option.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Using Tone to Build Goodwill Use the following guidelines to achieve a tone that builds goodwill with your recipients.
✓ Be respectful, not demanding.
DEMANDING Submit your answer in one week.
RESPECTFUL I would appreciate your answer within one week.
✓ Be modest, not arrogant.
289
ARROGANT My attached report is thorough, and I’m sure that you won’t be able to continue without it.
MODEST The attached report contains details of the refinancing options that I hope you will find useful.
✓ Be polite, not sarcastic.
SARCASTIC I just now received the shipment we ordered six months ago. I’m sending it back — we can’t use it now. Thanks a lot!
POLITE I am returning the shipment we ordered on March 12. Unfortunately, it arrived too late for us to be able to use it.
✓ Be positive and tactful, not negative and condescending.
NEGATIVE Your complaint about our prices is way off target. Our prices are definitely not any higher than those of our competitors.
TACTFUL Thank you for your suggestion concerning our prices. We believe, however, that our prices are comparable to those of our competitors.
Direct and Indirect Patterns Direct Pattern The direct pattern is effective in workplace correspondence
because readers appreciate messages that get to the main point
quickly. The direct pattern shown in the following list also
accomplishes the goals described on pages 110–11.
1. Main point of message 2. Explanation of facts or details 3. Goodwill closing
The direct pattern is especially appropriate for presenting good
news, as shown in Figure C–12. This message presents the good
290
news in the opening (the main point), follows with an
explanation of the facts, and closes by looking toward the future
(goodwill). The direct pattern may also be appropriate for
negative messages in situations where little is at stake for the
writer or reader and the reasons for the negative message are
relatively unimportant.
FIGURE C–12. A Direct-Pattern Message (Good News)
► Dear Mr. Coleman: We do not have the part you requested currently in stock,
but we hope to have it within the next month. Our supplier,
who has been reliable in the past, assures us that the
manufacturer that produces those parts will be able . . .
[Continues with details and goodwill closing.]
291
Indirect Pattern The indirect pattern delays stating the main point and may be
effective when you need to present especially sensitive or
negative messages. Research has shown that people form their
impressions and attitudes very early when reading
correspondence. For this reason, presenting bad news, refusals,
or sensitive messages indirectly is often more effective than
presenting negative information directly, especially if the stakes
are high. See also refusal letters.
As with any type of writing, imagine how your audience will
react to your message. Consider the thoughtlessness in the job
rejection that follows:
► Dear Ms. Mauer: Your application for the position of Records Administrator
at Southtown Dental Center has been rejected. We found
someone more qualified than you.
Sincerely,
Although the message is concise and uses the pronouns you and
your, the writer has not considered how the recipient will feel
as she reads the message. The message is, in short, rude. The
pattern of this message is (1) bad news, (2) curt explanation, (3)
close.
The indirect pattern for such bad-news correspondence
allows the explanation or details to lead logically and tactfully to
3
292
the negative message, as in the following pattern:
1. Context of message 2. Explanation or details 3. Bad news or negative message 4. Goodwill closing
The opening (traditionally called a “buffer”) should provide a
context for the subject and establish a professional tone.
However, it must not mislead the reader to believe that good
news may follow, and it must not contain irrelevant
information.
The body should provide an explanation by reviewing the
details or facts that led to the negative decision or refusal. Give
the negative message simply, based on the facts; do not belabor
the bad news or provide an inappropriate apology. Neither the
details nor an overdone apology can turn bad news into
something positive. Your goal should be to establish for the
reader that the writer or organization has been reasonable
given the circumstances. To accomplish this goal, you need to
organize the explanation carefully and logically.
The closing should establish or reestablish a positive
relationship through goodwill or helpful information. Consider,
for example, the revised bad-news message, shown in Figure C–
13. This message carries the same disappointing news as the
message in the preceding example, but the writer of this
message begins by not only introducing the subject but also
4
293
thanking the reader for her time and effort. Then the writer
explains why Ms. Mauer was not accepted for the job and offers
her encouragement by looking toward a potential future
opportunity. Bad news is never pleasant; however, information
that either puts the bad news in perspective or makes the bad
news reasonable maintains respect between the writer and the
reader. The goodwill closing reestablishes an amicable
professional relationship.
FIGURE C–13. A Courteous Indirect-Pattern Message (Bad News)
The indirect pattern can also be used in relatively short e-
mail messages and memos. Consider the unintended secondary
message a manager conveys in the following notice:
WEAK It has been decided that the office will be open the day after Thanksgiving.
“It has been decided” not only sounds impersonal but also
294
communicates an authoritarian, management-versus-employee
tone. The passive voice also suggests that the decision maker
does not want to say “I have decided” and thus accept
responsibility for the decision. One solution is to remove the
first part of the sentence.
IMPROVED The office will be open the day after Thanksgiving.
The best solution, however, would be to suggest that there is a
good reason for the decision and that employees are privy to (if
not a part of) the decision-making process.
EFFECTIVE Because we must meet the December 15 deadline for submitting the Bradley Foundation proposal, the office will be open the day after Thanksgiving.
By describing the context of the bad news first (the need to meet
the deadline), the writer focuses on the reasoning behind the
decision to work. Employees may not necessarily like the
message, but they will at least understand that the decision is
not arbitrary and is tied to an important deadline.
Clarity and Emphasis A clear message is one that is adequately developed and
emphasizes your main points. The following example illustrates
how adequate development is crucial to the clarity of your
message.
VAGUE Be more careful on the loading dock.
DEVELOPED To prevent accidents on the loading dock, follow these
295
procedures:
1. Check to make sure . . . 2. Load only items that are rated . . . 3. Replace any defective parts . . .
Although the first version is concise, it is not as clear and
specific as the “developed” revision. Do not assume your
readers will know what you mean: vague messages are easily
misinterpreted.
Lists Vertically stacked words, phrases, and other items
distinguished with numbers or bullets can effectively highlight
such information as steps in sequence, materials or parts
needed, key or concluding points, and recommendations. As
described in lists, provide context and be careful not to overuse
lists. A message that consists almost entirely of lists is difficult
to understand because it forces readers to connect separate and
disjointed items. Further, lists lose their impact when they are
overused.
Headings Headings are particularly useful because they call attention to
main topics, divide material into manageable segments, and
signal a shift in subject. Readers can scan the headings and read
only the section or sections appropriate to their needs.
Subject Lines Subject lines for e-mails, memos, and some letters announce
296
the topic and focus of the correspondence. Because they also
aid filing and later retrieval, they should be specific and
accurate.
VAGUE Subject: Tuition Reimbursement
VAGUE Subject: Time-Management Seminar
SPECIFIC Subject: Tuition Reimbursement for Time-Management Seminar
Capitalize all major words in a subject line. Lowercase articles,
prepositions, and conjunctions with fewer than five letters
unless they are the first or last words. Remember that the
subject line should not substitute for an opening that provides
context for the message. See also titles.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Correspondence and Accuracy
✓ Begin by establishing your purpose, analyzing your reader’s needs, determining your scope, and considering the context.
✓ Prepare an outline, even if it is only a list of points to be covered in the order you want to cover them. (See outlining.)
✓ Write the first draft. (See writing a draft.) ✓ Allow for a cooling-off period prior to revision or seek a
colleague’s advice, especially for correspondence that addresses a problem.
✓ Revise the draft, checking for key problems in clarity and coherence.
✓ Use the appropriate or standard format for letters, memos, and so forth.
✓ Check for accuracy: make sure that all facts, figures, and dates are
297
correct. ✓ Use effective proofreading techniques to check your
punctuation, grammar, spelling, and appropriate usage. ✓ Consider who should receive a copy of the message and in what
order the names or e-mail addresses should be listed (alphabetize if rank does not apply).
✓ Remember that when you send a message or sign a letter, you are accepting responsibility for it.
Alred, G. J. (1993). “We regret to inform you”: Toward a new theory of negative messages. In B. R. Sims (Ed.), Studies in technical communication (pp. 17–36). Urbana, IL: U of North Texas & NCTE.
Locker, K. O. (1999). Factors in reader responses to negative letters: Experimental evidence for changing what we teach. Journal of Business and Technical
Communication, 13(1), 29.
3
4
298
cover messages (or transmittals) A cover e-mail, memo, or letter accompanies a document (such
as a proposal), a digitial file, or other material. It identifies an
item that is being sent, the person to whom it is being sent, the
reason that it is being sent, and any content that should be
highlighted for readers. (See purpose.) A cover message (or
transmittal) provides a permanent record for both the writer
and the reader. For cover messages accompanying résumés,
see application cover letters.
The cover message shown in Figure C–14 is concise, but it
also includes such details as how the information for the report
was gathered.
299
FIGURE C–14. Cover Message
300
credible / creditable Something is credible if it is believable. (“The statistics in this
report are credible.”) Something is creditable if it is worthy of
praise or credit. (“The accountant did a creditable job.”)
301
critique A critique is a written or an oral evaluation of something. Avoid
using critique as a verb meaning “criticize.”
302
D
303
dangling modifiers Phrases that do not clearly and logically refer to the correct
noun or pronoun are called dangling modifiers. Dangling
modifiers usually appear at the beginning of a sentence as an
introductory phrase.
DANGLING While eating lunch, the computer malfunctioned. [Who was eating lunch?]
CORRECT While I was eating lunch, the computer malfunctioned.
Dangling modifiers can appear at the end of the sentence as
well.
DANGLING The program gains efficiency by eliminating the superfluous coding. [Who eliminates the superfluous coding?]
CORRECT The program gains efficiency when you eliminate the superfluous coding.
To correct a dangling modifier, add the appropriate subject to
either the dangling modifier or the main clause.
DANGLING After finishing the research, the proposal was easy to write. [The appropriate subject is I, but it is not stated in either the dangling phrase or the main clause.]
CORRECT After I finished the research, the proposal was easy to write. [The pronoun I is now the subject of an introductory clause.]
CORRECT After finishing the research, I found the proposal easy to write. [The pronoun I is now the subject of the main clause.]
For a discussion of misplaced modifiers, see modifiers.
304
dashes The em dash (—), usually called just the “dash,” can perform all
the punctuation duties of linking, separating, and enclosing.
The dash is indicated by two consecutive hyphens that may
auto-correct to a dash, depending on the program settings.
Use the dash cautiously to indicate more emphasis,
informality, or abruptness than the other punctuation marks
would show. A dash can emphasize a sharp turn in thought.
► The project will end May 13—unless we receive additional funding.
A dash can indicate an emphatic pause.
► The project will begin—after we are under contract.
Sometimes, to emphasize contrast, a dash is used with but.
► We completed the survey quickly—but the results were not accurate.
A dash can be used before a final summarizing statement or
before repetition that has the effect of an afterthought.
► It was hot near the heat-treating ovens—steaming hot.
Such a statement may also complete the meaning of the clause
preceding the dash.
1
305
► We try to write as we speak—or so we believe.
Dashes set off parenthetical elements more sharply and
emphatically than commas do. Unlike dashes, parentheses
tend to deemphasize what they enclose. Compare the following
sentences:
► Only one person—the president—can authorize such activity.
► Only one person, the president, can authorize such activity.
► Only one person (the president) can authorize such activity.
Dashes can be used to set off parenthetical elements that
contain commas. The first word after a dash is capitalized only
if it is a proper noun.
► Three of the applicants—John Evans, Rosalita Fontiana, and Kyong-Shik Choi—seem well qualified for the job.
The dash can also indicate the omission of letters. (“Mr. A—
admitted his error.”)
Another type of dash is the en dash (–), which is used
between letters and numbers to indicate to or through (pages
84–92, the years 2015–2018, the letters A–Z, the Detroit–Toledo
Expressway).
In publishing and HTML coding, the term em dash and other terms or codes are often used for dashes, hyphens, and related special characters. For detailed
1
306
discussions, see The Chicago Manual of Style, Seventeenth Edition (sections 6.75–
6.94), or a reputable HTML guide, such as the Web Style Guide, Fourth Edition (Yale University Press, 2016).
307
data In formal and scholarly writing, data is generally used as a
plural, with datum as the singular form. In much informal
writing, however, data is considered a collective singular noun.
Base your usage on whether your readers are likely to consider
the data as a single collection or as a group of individual facts.
Whatever you use, be sure that your pronouns and verbs agree
in number with the selected usage. See also agreement.
► These data are persuasive. They indicate a need for additional research questions. [formal]
► The attached data is confidential. It is the result of a survey of employee records. [less formal]
308
dates In the United States, full dates are generally written in the
month-day-year format, with a comma preceding and following
the year.
► November 30, 2025, is the payoff date.
Do not use commas in the day-month-year format, which is
used in many parts of the world and by the U.S. military.
► Note that 30 November 2025 is the payoff date.
No commas are used when showing only the month-year or
month-day in a date.
► The target date of May 2020 is optimistic, so I would like to meet on March 4 to discuss our options.
When writing days of the month without the year, use the
cardinal number (“March 4”) rather than the ordinal number
(“March 4th”). Of course, in speech or presentations, use the
ordinal number (“March fourth”).
Avoid the strictly numerical form for dates (11/6/18) because
the date is not always immediately clear, especially in
international correspondence. In many countries, 11/6/18
means June 11, 2018, rather than November 6, 2018. Writing out
the name of the month makes the entire date immediately clear
to all readers.
309
Centuries often cause confusion with numbers because their
spelled-out forms, which are not capitalized, do not correspond
to their numeral designations. The twentieth century, for
example, is the 1900s: 1900–1999.
When the century is used as a noun, do not use a hyphen
between the number and the word century.
► During the twenty-first century, technology transformed business practices.
When the centuries are written as adjectives, however, use
hyphens.
► Twenty-first-century technology relies on innovation.
310
de facto / de jure De facto means that something exists or is a fact and therefore
is accepted for practical purposes. De jure means that
something legally exists.
► The law states that no signs should be erected along Highway 127. Storeowners have disregarded that law, and many signs exist along Highway 127. The presence of the signs along Highway 127 is de facto but not de jure—their presence is “a fact,” but it is not “lawful.”
Limit the use of Latin and legal terms because they can easily
become an affectation.
311
defective / deficient If something is defective, it is faulty. (“The wiring was
defective.”) If something is deficient, it is lacking or is
incomplete in an essential component. (“The firm was deficient
in meeting its legal obligations.”)
312
defining terms Defining key terms and concepts is often essential for clarity.
Terms can be defined either formally or informally, depending
on your purpose, your audience, and the context.
A formal definition is a form of classification. You define a
term by placing it in a category and then identifying the
features that distinguish it from other members of the same
category.
TERM CATEGORY DISTINGUISHING FEATURES
An auction is
a public sale
in which property passes to the highest bidder through successively increased offers.
An informal definition explains a term by giving a more
familiar word or phrase as a synonym.
► Businesses can have symbiotic, or mutually beneficial, relationships with their competitors and partners.
State definitions positively; focus on what the term is rather
than what it is not.
NEGATIVE In a legal transaction, real property is not personal property.
POSITIVE Real property is legal terminology for the right or interest a person has in land and the permanent structures on that land.
For a discussion of when negative definitions are appropriate,
see definition method of development.
313
Avoid circular definitions, which merely restate the term to
be defined.
CIRCULAR Spontaneous combustion is fire that begins spontaneously.
REVISED Spontaneous combustion is the self-ignition of a flammable material through a chemical reaction.
In addition, avoid “is when” and “is where” definitions. Such
definitions fail to include the category and are too indirect.
314
definite / definitive Definite and definitive both apply to what is precisely defined,
but definitive more often refers to what is complete and
authoritative. (“Once we receive a definite proposal, our
attorney can provide a definitive legal opinion.”)
315
definition method of development Definition is often essential to clarity and accuracy. Although
defining terms may be sufficient, sometimes definitions need
to be expanded through (1) extended definition, (2) definition
by analogy, (3) definition by cause, (4) definition by
components, (5) definition by exploration of origin, and (6)
negative definition. See also methods of development.
Extended Definition When you need more than a simple definition to explain an
idea, use an extended definition, which explores a number of
qualities of the item being defined. How an extended definition
is developed depends on your audience and on the complexity
of the subject. Readers familiar with a topic might be able to
handle a long, fairly complex definition, whereas readers less
familiar with a topic might require simpler language and more
basic information.
The easiest way to give an extended definition is with specific
examples. Examples give readers easy-to-picture details that
help them see and thus understand the term being defined.
► Form, which is the shape of landscape features, can best be represented both by small-scale features, such as trees and shrubs, and by large-scale elements, such as mountains
316
and mountain ranges.
Definition by Analogy An analogy can help a nonspecialist understand an unfamiliar
term by showing its similarities with a more familiar term. In
the following description of “management by objective,” notice
how the writer develops an analogy to make a point.
► Management by objective has been quite popular, but the key to its success is carefully selecting objectives. Think, for example, of a golfer who wishes to improve by hitting the ball farther. Every decision the golfer makes is governed by that goal—hitting the ball as far as possible. The golfer is thus managing the game by objective. However, the golfer is shortsighted because golf is as much a game of accuracy as it is of hitting balls for distance. In fact, some of the decisions the golfer makes to hit the ball farther might well be counterproductive to achieving the larger goal of obtaining the lowest possible score. Likewise, when a company decides to use a management-by-objective strategy, it must be certain that the objective is appropriate for achieving the desired results.
Definition by Cause Some terms are best defined by an explanation of their causes,
as the following explanation of the term stagflation illustrates.
► Traditional economic theory says that a decline in business activity and employment causes the rate of inflation to
317
decrease. However, in the 1970s, because of massive increases in energy prices, the economy stagnated while higher energy prices worked their way into the cost of virtually everything, and the currency inflated. To describe that condition, economist Paul Samuelson coined the term stagflation.
Definition by Components Sometimes a formal definition of a concept can be made
simpler by breaking the concept into its component parts. In
the following example, the formal definition of fire is given in
the first paragraph, and the component parts are given in the
second.
FORMAL DEFINITION
Fire is the visible heat energy released from the rapid oxidation of a fuel. A substance is “on fire” when the release of heat energy from the oxidation process reaches visible light levels.
COMPONENT PARTS
The classic fire triangle illustrates the elements necessary to create fire: oxygen, heat, and burnable material (fuel). Air provides sufficient oxygen for combustion; the intensity of the heat needed to start a fire depends on the characteristics of the burnable material. A burnable substance is one that will sustain combustion after an initial application of heat to start the combustion.
Definition by Exploration of Origin Under certain circumstances, the meaning of a term can be
clarified and made easier to remember by an exploration of its
origin. Medical terms, because of their sometimes unfamiliar
Greek and Latin roots, especially benefit from an explanation of
318
this type. Tracing the derivation of a word can also be useful
when you want to explain why a word has favorable or
unfavorable associations, particularly if your goal is to
influence your reader’s attitude toward an idea or activity. See
also persuasion.
► Efforts to influence legislation generally fall under the head of lobbying, a term that once referred to people who prowled the lobbies of houses of government, buttonholing lawmakers and trying to get them to take certain positions. Lobbying today is all of this, and much more, too. It is a respected—and necessary—activity. It tells the legislator which way the winds of public opinion are blowing, and it helps inform [legislators] of the implications of certain bills, debates, and resolutions [that they must face].
—Bill Vogt, How to Build a Better Outdoors
Negative Definition In some cases, it is useful to point out what something is not in
order to clarify what it is. A negative definition is effective only
when the reader is familiar with the item with which the
defined item is being contrasted. In a crane operator’s manual,
for instance, a negative definition is used to show that, for
safety reasons, a hydraulic crane cannot be operated in the
same manner as a lattice boom crane.
► A hydraulic crane is not like a lattice boom crane [a friction machine] in one very important way. In most cases, the
319
safe lifting capacity of a lattice boom crane is based on the weight needed to tip the machine. Therefore, operators of friction machines sometimes depend on signs that the machine might tip to warn them of impending danger. This practice is very dangerous with a hydraulic crane.
—Operator’s Manual (Model W-180), Harnischfeger
Corporation
320
description The key to effective description is the accurate presentation of
details, as in Figures D–1 and D–2. In Figure D–1, notice that the
simple description contained in the purchase order includes
five specific details (in addition to the part number), structured
logically.
FIGURE D–1. Simple Description
321
FIGURE D–2. Illustrated Description
SOURCE: Federal Emergency Management Agency, www.fema.gov.
Complex descriptions, of course, involve more details. In
describing a mechanical device, for example, describe the
whole device and its function before giving a detailed
description of how each part works. The description should
322
conclude with an explanation of how each part contributes to
the functioning of the whole.
In descriptions intended for an audience unfamiliar with the
topic, details are crucial. Details help readers visualize the
specifics of the new image, object, or idea that the writer wants
to convey. In the following description of a company’s
headquarters, notice the detailed discussion of colors, shapes,
and features. The writer assumes that the reader knows such
terms as colonial design and haiku fountain.
► Their company’s headquarters, which reminded me of a rural college campus, are located north of the city in a 90- acre lush, green wooded area. The complex consists of five three-story buildings of redbrick colonial design. The buildings are spaced about 50 feet apart and are built in a U- shape surrounding a reflection pool that frames a striking haiku fountain.
You can also use analogy, as described in figures of speech, to
explain unfamiliar concepts in terms of familiar ones, such as
“U-shape” in the previous example.
Visuals can be powerful aids in descriptive writing,
especially when they show features too intricate to explain
completely in words. The example in Figure D–2 on page 127
illustrates a storm-shutter installation that small businesses can
use to protect windows from windborne-debris damage. Note
that the description concentrates on the types of shutters
323
available and their function. The illustration, with call-outs
highlighting important features, largely eliminates the need for
extensive written details to describe their relationship to one
another and their function.
324
design (see layout and design)
325
differ from / differ with Differ from suggests that two things are not alike. (“Our earlier
proposal differs from the current one.”) Differ with indicates
disagreement between persons. (“The architect differed with
the contractor on the proposed site.”)
326
different from / different than In formal writing, the preposition from is used with different.
(“The product I received is different from the one I ordered.”)
Different than is used when it is followed by a clause. (“The
actual cost was different than we estimated in our proposal.”)
327
direct address Direct address refers to a sentence or phrase in which the
person being spoken or written to is explicitly named. It is often
used in presentations and in e-mail messages. Notice that the
person’s name in a direct address is set off by commas: (“Jane,
call me when you arrive.”)
328
discreet / discrete Discreet means “having or showing prudent or careful
behavior.” (“Because the matter was personal, he asked Bob to
be discreet.”) Discrete means something is “separate, distinct,
or individual.” (“Plans for the corporate headquarters include
five discrete buildings.”)
329
disinterested / uninterested Disinterested means “impartial, objective, unbiased.”
► Like good judges, researchers should be passionately interested in the problems they tackle but completely disinterested when they seek to solve those problems.
Uninterested means simply “not interested.”
► Despite Asha’s enthusiasm, her manager remained uninterested in the project.
330
division-and-classification method of development An effective method of development for a complex subject is
either to divide it into manageable parts and then discuss each
part separately (division) or to classify (or group) individual
parts into appropriate categories and then discuss each
category separately (classification). See also instructions and
process explanation.
Division You might use division to describe a physical object, such as the
parts of a copy machine; to examine an organization, such as a
company; or to explain the components of a system, such as the
Internet. The emphasis in division as a method of development
is on breaking down a complex whole into a number of like
units—it is easier to consider smaller units and to examine the
relationship of each to the other than to attempt to discuss the
whole. The basis for division depends, of course, on your
subject and your purpose.
If you were a financial planner describing the types of
mutual funds available to your investors, you could divide the
variety available into three broad categories: money-market
funds, bond funds, and stock funds. Such division would be
accurate, but it would be only a first-level grouping of a
complex whole. The three broad categories could, in turn, be
331
subdivided into additional groups based on investment strategy,
as follows:
MONEY-MARKET FUNDS
• Taxable money market • Tax-exempt money market
BOND FUNDS
• Taxable bonds • Balanced (mix of stocks and bonds)
• Tax-exempt bonds
STOCK FUNDS
• Balanced • International growth
• Equity income • Small capitalization
• Domestic growth • Aggressive growth
• Growth and income • Specialized
Specialized stock funds could be further subdivided as follows:
SPECIALIZED STOCK FUNDS
• Communications • Health services
• Energy • Technology
• Environmental services • Utilities
• Financial services • Worldwide capital goods
• Gold
Classification The process of classification is the grouping of a number of
units (such as people, objects, or ideas) into related categories.
Consider the following list:
triangular file steel tape ruler needle-nose pliers
vise pipe wrench keyhole saw
332
mallet tin snips C-clamps
rasp hacksaw plane
glass cutter ball-peen hammer steel square
spring clamp claw hammer utility knife
crescent wrench folding extension ruler slip-joint pliers
crosscut saw tack hammer utility scissors
To group the items in the list, you would first determine what
they have in common. The most obvious characteristic they
share is that they all belong in a carpenter’s tool chest. With that
starting point, you can begin to group the tools into related
categories. Pipe wrenches belong with slip-joint pliers because
both tools grip objects. The rasp and the plane belong with the
triangular file because all three tools smooth rough surfaces. By
applying this kind of thinking to all the items in the list, you can
group (classify) the tools according to function (Figure D–3).
333
FIGURE D–3. Classification (Tools Placed into Categories)
To classify a subject, you must first sort the individual items
into the largest number of comparable groups. For explaining
the functions of carpentry tools, the classifications (or groups)
334
in Figure D–3 (smoothing, hammering, measuring, gripping,
and cutting) are excellent. For recommending which tools a
new homeowner should buy first, however, those classifications
are not helpful—each group contains tools that a new
homeowner might want to purchase right away.
Once you have established the basis for the classification,
apply it consistently, putting each item in only one category.
For example, it might seem logical to classify needle-nose pliers
as both a tool that cuts and a tool that grips because most
needle-nose pliers have a small section for cutting wires.
However, the primary function of needle-nose pliers is to grip.
So listing them only under “tools that grip” would be consistent
with the basis used for listing the other tools.
335
document management Document management refers to processes and programs that
allow for the organized storage and quick retrieval of digital
documents. These procedures allow organizations to track a
document’s changes and contributors, and provide tools
designed to quickly locate a single document within a larger
archive. Unlike content-management systems designed to allow
for the easy creation, modification, and display of data within a
final document or Web site, document-management systems
are designed to keep track of the full life cycle of a single
document. See content management.
Document-Management Systems Various technologies exist to help organizations and individuals
manage their documents, and each system provides different
but overlapping capabilities:
Search tools. Many document-management programs, including those found on most personal computers, allow a document to be quickly located through a keyword search. These tools often rely on metadata to help locate the correct document quickly. “Metadata” refers to extra information that a writer includes with a document, such as a short description of the document, a series of keywords, the document’s collaborators, or information on the document’s purpose and relationship to a larger project. Workflow and version management. Document- management programs can simplify the workflow
336
necessary to move a draft to publication by tracking a document as it is edited and passed from employee to employee. In doing so, these systems automatically record changes to the document as progressing “versions,” complete with data on who made changes, when changes were made, and who is next responsible for working on the document. Some systems allow writers to temporarily check out, or lock, a document in order to prevent others from working with that document at the same time. Other systems automatically restrict access to specific documents or to all documents at specific points in the composing or revision process. Document capture and linking. Document-management systems can also house large collections of documents and related items, and allow documents (such as those related to a single project) to be easily linked together and categorized. For example, product photographs, competitor sales sheets, topical e-mails, and scanned magazine or journal articles can be stored with the document generated from that information.
Regardless of the tools or programs available within your
organization, consistency and ease of use are key to successful
document management. Take the time to carefully learn and
follow your organization’s best practices. See also adapting to
new technologies.
If your organization does not have a dedicated process or
program in place, consider implementing your own document-
337
management practices. For example, consistency in a file’s
name and placement within a folder hierarchy or document
group allows members of an organization to quickly locate the
latest version of a given document. When setting your
document’s filename and location, consider where it will
appear in an existing list of documents. Construct filenames
from left to right, beginning with the most general category and
ending with the most specific detail. For example, the
introduction to the second version of an annual report could be
named “AnnualReport-Introduction-2019-V2.pdf.” Since most
systems automatically store creation and revision dates, a
filename with substantial details allows for a specific document
to be found quickly through an electronic search or by scanning
a directory either alphabetically or chronologically.
338
documenting sources DIRECTORY
APA Documentation APA In-Text Citations APA Documentation Models APA Sample Pages
CMS Documentation CMS Footnotes and Endnotes CMS Documentation Models CMS Sample Pages
MLA Documentation MLA In-Text Citations MLA Documentation Models MLA Sample Pages
Documenting sources achieves three important purposes:
It allows readers to locate and consult the sources used and to find further information on the subject. It enables writers to support their assertions and arguments in such documents as proposals, reports, and trade journal articles. It helps writers give proper credit to others and thus avoid plagiarism by identifying the sources of facts, ideas, visuals, quotations, and paraphrases. See also paraphrasing.
This entry shows citation models and sample pages for three
339
principal documentation systems: American Psychological Association (APA), Chicago Manual of Style (CMS), and Modern
Language Association (MLA). The following examples compare
these three styles for citing a book by one author: Work Smarter
with LinkedIn by Alexandra Samuel, which was published in
2017 by Harvard Business Review in Boston, Massachusetts.
The APA system of citation is often used in the social sciences. It is referred to as an author-date method of documentation because parenthetical in-text citations and a reference list (at the end of the paper) in APA style emphasize the author(s) and date of publication so that the currency of the research is clear. The Chicago Manual of Style (CMS) is widely used in publishing and various academic specialties. It presents two systems of documentation: the notes and bibliography system and the author-date system. The author-date system uses in-text citations similar to those in MLA style (see page 135) and bibliography entries similar to those in APA style (except that the publication date is not given in parentheses). This text shows the notes and bibliography system, which uses the more traditional footnotes (at the bottom of the page) or endnotes (at the end of the document) and a bibliography.
340
The Chicago Manual of Style (CMS) offers two options:
1. A full bibliography with shortened footnotes (or endnotes) 2. A selected bibliography (most important works cited) with
footnotes providing full bibliographic information for all sources at first mention and shortened footnotes thereafter
341
The MLA system is used in literature and the humanities. MLA style uses parenthetical in-text citations and a list of works cited and places greater importance on the pages on which cited information can be found than on the publication date.
These systems are described in full detail in the following style
manuals:
Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association. 6th ed., American Psychological Association, 2010. See also www.apastyle.org.
The Chicago Manual of Style. 17th ed., University of Chicago Press, 2010. See also www.chicagomanualofstyle.org.
MLA Handbook. 8th ed., Modern Language Association, 2016. See also www.mla.org/style.
See also bibliographies and research.
APA Documentation APA In-Text Citations Generally, cite the author or authors in a signal phrase (the
342
authors’ names plus an appropriate verb), with the publication
date in parentheses following the name(s). If you do not cite the
author(s) in a signal phrase, include a parenthetical citation
including the author’s (or authors’) surname(s) followed by the
publication date. Include a page reference for all quotations.
SIGNAL PHRASE Slade (2012) claims that “we look to machines to perform human functions: They provide communications, calculations, care, and company” (p. 9).
PARENTHETICAL CITATION
Technology that once remedied loneliness may now lead to feelings of seclusion and sadness (Slade, 2012).
When APA parenthetical citations are needed midsentence,
place them after the closing quotation marks and continue with
the rest of the sentence.
► In short, these “prosthetic substitutes” (Slade, 2012, p. 13) replace the flesh-and-blood friends in our lives.
If the APA parenthetical citation follows a block quotation,
place it after the final punctuation mark.
► . . . a close collaboration with the marketing staff and the development group is essential. (Thompson, 2010)
When a work has two authors, cite both names joined by the
word and in a signal phrase or an ampersand (&) in a
parenthetical citation:
► Barlett and Steele (2012) argue that . . . ► (Barlett & Steele, 2012)
343
For the first citation of a work with three, four, or five
authors, include all names. For subsequent citations and for
works with more than five authors, include only the last name
of the first author followed by “et al.” (not italicized and with a
period after “al.”). When two or more works by different
authors are cited in the same parentheses, list the citations
alphabetically and use semicolons to separate them: (Bartlett &
Steele, 2012; Dauch, 2012).
APA Documentation Models In reference lists, APA requires that the first word of book and
article titles and subtitles be capitalized and all other words—
except proper nouns (Einstein) and proper adjectives
(Cartesian, French)—be lowercased. In titles of periodicals,
capitalize all major words.
For online versions of books and articles, include retrieval
information at the end of the citation. If a DOI (digital object
identifier, a permanent code) is available, include that; if not,
include the URL. (No periods follow DOIs or URLs.) If no date is
available, use “(n.d.).” Include a retrieval date only if the
content could be changed later.
BOOKS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)
Single Author
Wheeler, A. (2012). Designing brand identity: An essential guide for the whole branding team. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Kranich, N. (2004). The information commons. New York,
344
NY: Brennan Center for Justice. Retrieved from http://brennancenter.org/publication/information- commons
Multiple Authors
Kaye, B., & Giulioni, J. W. (2012). Help them grow or watch them go: Career conversations employees want. San Francisco, CA: Berrett-Koehler.
Corporate Author
Standard and Poor’s. (2012). Standard and Poor’s 500 guide. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
Edition Other Than First
Mongan, J., Giguere, E., & Kindler, N. (2013). Programming interviews exposed: Secrets to landing your next job (3rd ed.). Indianapolis, IN: Wiley.
Multivolume Work
Kozlowski, S. W. J. (Ed.). (2012). The Oxford handbook of organizational psychology (Vols. 1–2). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Work in an Edited Collection
Snider, L. (2013). The technological advantages of stock market traders. In S. Will, S. Handelman, & D. C. Brotherton (Eds.), How they got away with it: White collar criminals and the financial meltdown (pp. 151–
345
170). New York, NY: Columbia University Press.
Encyclopedia or Dictionary Entry
Satterwhite, M. (2014). Decision making. In Encyclopedia of business and finance (3rd ed., Vol. 1, pp. 202–203). Farmington Hills, MI: Macmillan Reference. Retrieved from http://go.galegroup.com/ps/i.do? p=GVRL&v=2.1&it=r&id=GALE%7CCX3727500091&asid=9ca00312919e3480a72e988bf3652b9b
ARTICLES IN PERIODICALS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)
Magazine Article
Paul, I. (2012, September). Spotify takes on Pandora. Macworld, 29(9), 71.
Haney, M. (2016, March). Boldly go: Space is cold, vast, empty, and deadly; here is how we’ll get there anyway. Wired, 24(3), 58–67. Retrieved from https://www.wired.com
Journal Article
Moriarty, J. (2010). Participation in the workplace: Are employees special? Journal of Business Ethics, 92(3), 373–384.
Boiral, O., Henri, J.-F., & Talbot, D. (2012). Modeling the impacts of corporate commitment on climate change. Business Strategy and the Environment, 21(8), 495–516. doi:10.1002/bse.723
Newspaper Article
346
Jones, R. (2012, December 4). Nations meet to discuss web rules. Wall Street Journal, p. B7.
Metz, Cade. (2017, August 16). Microsoft teaches autonomous gliders to make decisions on the fly. The New York Times. Retrieved from https://nyti.ms/2v0DSJc
Article with an Unknown Author
What sold, for how much, and why? (2009, Fall). Modern, 1(2), 22.
OTHER ELECTRONIC AND MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
Entire Web Site
Association for Business Communication. (2014). Retrieved from http://www.businesscommunication.org
Short Work from a Web Site, with an Author
Marshall, R. (2009, August 18). IBM bolsters green sensor portfolio. Retrieved from http://www.businessgreen.com/business- green/news/2248007/ibm-bolsters-smart-grid
Short Work from a Web Site, with a Corporate or an Organizational Author
General Motors. (2009). Company profile. Retrieved from http://www.gm.com/corporate/about/company.jsp
Short Work from a Web Site, with an Unknown Author
Women owned businesses. (2009, July 20). Retrieved from
347
http://www.sba.gov/business-guide/grow/women- owned-businesses-programs
E-mail Message
E-mail messages are not cited in an APA reference list.
They can be cited in the text as follows: “According to A.
Kalil (personal communication, January 12, 2014), Web
pages need to reflect . . .”
Online Messages and Posts (Lists, Forums, Discussion Boards)
Articles posted on Wikis and electronic discussion sources
—including text messages, postings to electronic mailing
lists, online forums, and discussion groups—are seldom
cited in formal publications because they are not
considered scholarly material. Authors may not be experts,
and authorship may be difficult to determine; versions may
vary over time; and sources may be difficult to retrieve. If
you do include one of these sources, provide the real name
of an author if given; otherwise, provide the screen name.
Follow the name with the date of the posting, the subject
line of the message, and any identifiers for the message in
brackets after the title. If the source is likely to change (as
with wikis), include a retrieval date.
Article Posted on a Wiki
Artificial neural network. (2017, September 3). Retrieved September 7, 2017, from https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php? title=Artificial_neural_network&action=history
348
Online Forum Entry
Senior scholar. (2009, March 15). Re: Surviving the job search [Online forum comment]. Retrieved from http://chronicle.com/forums/index.php/topic,40486.msg1221730.html#msg1221730
Blog Entry
Chang, J. (2009, August 17). Sharing with Google groups [Web log post]. Retrieved from http://googleblog.blogspot.com/2009/08/sharing-with- google-groups.html
Film or Video
Chiu, K. (2012, November 15). Trends in mobile gaming [Video file]. Retrieved from http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zPD1ZyrilNw
Radio or Television Program or Podcast
Winkler, A. (Producer). (2009, February 11). Battle brewing over electronic books [Radio program]. In All things considered. Retrieved from http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php? storyId=100584020
Bettag, T. (Producer). (2009, February 28). The fast lane [Television series episode]. In Koppel: People’s republic of capitalism. Washington, DC: Discovery Channel.
Hirsch, P. (2009, February 10). Write-downs [Video podcast]. In APM: Marketplace whiteboard. Retrieved from https://www.youtube.com/watch?
349
v=GEB1KgNUNQo
OTHER SOURCES
Published Interview
Barro, R. (2009, February 5). Interview by C. Clarke. Retrieved from http://www.theatlantic.com
Personal Communications
Personal communications such as lectures, letters,
interviews, and e-mail messages are generally not cited in
an APA reference list because they are not accessible to
others. Instead, you can cite them in the text.
According to Elizabeth Andersen (personal
communication, October 2, 2018), Web pages need to
reflect . . .
Brochure or Pamphlet
U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. (2012). Historic preservation tax incentives [Brochure]. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.
Government Document
U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics. (2016). Highlights of women’s earnings in 2015. Retrieved from https://www.bls.gov/opub/reports/womens- earnings/2015/home.htm
350
Report
World Bank. (2015, September 14). Global financial development report 2015/2016: Long-term finance. Retrieved from http://www.worldbank.org/en/publication/gfdr/report
APA Sample Pages
351
352
FIGURE D–4. APA Sample Page (from a Report)
353
354
FIGURE D–5. APA Sample List of References
CMS Documentation CMS Footnotes and Endnotes CMS footnote and endnote citations use superscript numerals in
the text with corresponding numbered footnotes (at the bottom
of the page where referenced) or endnotes (on a separate page
at the end of the paper). The CMS recommends footnotes for
the reader’s ease. However, if you have numerous long
footnotes that are difficult to fit on their respective pages,
consider using endnotes.
Place superscript numbers at the end of the summary,
paraphrase, quotation, or sentence, after the punctuation
marks. Indent the first line of the footnote or endnote entry half
an inch. Use the number (followed by a period) corresponding
to the number in the text, but do not make it superscript.
Include the author’s name (first name first); the title of the
source (in quotation marks for shorter works, such as article
titles, and in italics for longer works, such as books); the title (in
italics) of the longer work in which the source appeared (if any);
the city of publication and publisher (separated by a colon) and
the year of publication, enclosed in parentheses; page
number(s) of the passage cited; and the URL (if the cited work is
digital), all separated by commas.
355
► Holder’s memo was nonetheless written in the wake of a year of fairly vigorous prosecutions of companies that had committed crimes like theft, fraud, and market manipulation.
► 4. Matt Taibbi, The Divide: American Injustice in the Age of the Wealth Gap (New York: Spiegel & Grau, 2014), 47.
If the bibliography contains all the works cited in the notes,
or if the work has been cited in full previously, you may
abbreviate the note to eliminate duplication of information. Use
the author’s last name, a shortened version of the title (the first
few important words in the same order as the title), and the
page number(s) of the material cited.
► 4. Taibbi, Divide, 47.
The CMS recommends that references to online sources, in
addition to the usual content, also provide a URL, preferably a
URL that includes a digital object identifier (DOI, a permanent
code) or another permalink. If a direct link will not be
accessible to your readers, include the name of the database
through which you accessed the source. For online books, you
may include the URL, the name of the database, or the format
(such as Kindle), whichever is most likely to help readers locate
and assess the source. If the source is unpaginated or if it
repaginates in response to changes in the screen or font size,
include the section heading, chapter number (for example,
chap. 5), paragraph number (for example, para. 6, par. 6, or ¶6)
if available, or even a descriptive phrase, so readers can more
4
356
readily locate the section you refer to. If you cite an online
source with no publication or “last update” date, include an
access date in its place, immediately before the URL.
CMS Documentation Models BOOKS (PRINTED AND ELECTRONIC)
Single Author
1. Nassim Nicholas Taleb, Antifragile: Things That Gain
from Disorder (New York: Random House, 2012), 29.
Taleb, Nassim Nicholas. Antifragile: Things That Gain from Disorder. New York: Random House, 2012.
2. Willard Eugene Hotchkiss, Higher Education and
Business Standards (Boston: Houghton-Mifflin, 1918), chap.
2, http://gutenberg.org/ebooks/29674.
Hotchkiss, Willard Eugene. Higher Education and Business Standards. Boston: Houghton-Mifflin, 1918, http://gutenberg.org/ebooks/29674.
3. Peter W. Cardon, Business Communication:
Developing Leaders for a Networked World (New York:
McGraw-Hill, 2014), Kindle.
Cardon, Peter W. Business Communication: Developing Leaders for a Networked World. New York: McGraw- Hill, 2014. Kindle.
357
Two or Three Authors
4. Beverly Kaye and Julie Winkle Guilioni, Help Them
Grow or Watch Them Go: Career Conversations Employees
Want (San Francisco: Berrett-Koehler, 2012), 120.
Kaye, Beverly, and Julie Winkle Guilioni. Help Them Grow or Watch Them Go: Career Conversations Employees Want. San Francisco: Berrett-Koehler, 2012.
Four or More Authors
5. Bruce Jefferson et al., Urban Water Recycling:
Techniques and Applications (Burlington, MA:
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2013), 277.
Jefferson, Bruce, Paul Jeffrey, Claire Diaper, and James Crook. Urban Water Recycling: Techniques and Applications. Burlington, MA: Butterworth-Heinemann, 2013.
Multiple Books by Same Author
6. Suze Orman, Suze Orman’s 2009 Action Plan: Keeping
Your Money Safe and Sound (New York: Spiegel & Grau,
2009), 54.
7. Suze Orman, The Money Class: How to Stand in Your
Truth and Create the Future You Deserve (New York:
Spiegel & Grau, 2012), 212.
In the bibliography, list the works alphabetically by title.
Orman, Suze. The Money Class: How to Stand in Your
358
Truth and Create the Future You Deserve. New York: Spiegel & Grau, 2012.
———. Suze Orman’s 2009 Action Plan: Keeping Your Money Safe and Sound. New York: Spiegel & Grau, 2009.
Corporate Author
8. J. K. Lasser Institute, J. K. Lasser’s Your Income Tax
2010: For Preparing Your 2009 Tax Return (New York:
Wiley, 2009), 65.
J. K. Lasser Institute. J. K. Lasser’s Your Income Tax 2010: For Preparing Your 2009 Tax Return. New York: Wiley, 2009.
Edition Other Than First
9. James M. Kouzes and Barry Z. Posner, The Leadership
Challenge: How to Make Extraordinary Things Happen in
Organizations, 5th ed. (New York: Jossey-Bass, 2012), 17.
Kouzes, James M., and Barry Z. Posner. The Leadership Challenge: How to Make Extraordinary Things Happen in Organizations. 5th ed. New York: Jossey-Bass, 2012.
Multivolume Work
10. Standard and Poor’s, Standard and Poor’s Register of
Corporations, Directors, and Executives (New York:
Standard and Poor’s, 2010), 2:128.
Standard and Poor’s. Standard and Poor’s Register of Corporations, Directors, and Executives. 2 vols. New York: Standard and Poor’s, 2010.
359
Work in an Edited Collection
11. Laureen Snider, “The Technological Advantages of
Stock Market Traders,” in How They Got Away with It:
White Collar Criminals and the Financial Meltdown, ed.
Susan Will, Stephen Handelman, and David C. Brotherton
(New York: Columbia University Press, 2013), 155.
Snider, Laureen. “The Technological Advantages of Stock Market Traders.” In How They Got Away with It: White Collar Criminals and the Financial Meltdown, edited by Susan Will, Stephen Handelman, and David C. Brotherton, 151–70. New York: Columbia University Press, 2013.
Encyclopedia or Dictionary Entry
12. World Book Encyclopedia, 2007 ed., s.v. “particle
detector.”
13. Wikipedia, s.v. “Labor Theory of Value,” last
modified September 19, 2017, 21:08,
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Labor_theory_of_value.
Well-known reference books, such as encyclopedias and
dictionaries, are not included in the bibliography. The titles
of reference Web sites with no print counterpart, like
Wikipedia, are generally not italicized. For Web sites that
do not indicate when they were published or most recently
updated, include an access date. For sites that are updated
frequently (again, like Wikipedia), include the date the
entry was last modified along with a time stamp.
360
ARTICLES IN PERIODICALS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)
Magazine Article
14. Nathan Heller, “Mark as Read: What Do We Learn
When Our Private E-mail Becomes Public,” New Yorker,
July 24, 2017, 28–31.
Heller, Nathan. “Mark as Read: What Do We Learn When Our Private E-mail Becomes Public.” New Yorker, July 24, 2017, 28–31.
15. Mariette DiChristina, “Designing the City of
Tomorrow Today,” Scientific American, July 2017, 4,
http://www.scientificamerican.com/article/designing-the-
city-of-tomorrow-today/.
DiChristina, Mariette. “Designing the City of Tomorrow Today.” Scientific American, July 2017, 4. http://www.scientificamerican.com/article/designing- the-city-of-tomorrow-today/.
Journal Article
16. Jeffrey Moriarty, “Participation in the Workplace:
Are Employees Special?” Journal of Business Ethics 92, no.
3 (2010): 373.
Moriarty, Jeffrey. “Participation in the Workplace: Are Employees Special?” Journal of Business Ethics 92, no. 3 (2010): 373–84.
17. Honor J. Passow and Christian H. Passow, “What
361
Competencies Should Undergraduate Engineering Programs Emphasize? A Systematic Review,” Journal of
Engineering Education 106, no. 3 (2017): 475–526, Academic
Search Complete.
Passow, Honor J., and Christian H. Passow. “What Competencies Should Undergraduate Engineering Programs Emphasize? A Systematic Review.” Journal of Engineering Education 106, no. 3 (2017): 475–526. Academic Search Complete.
18. Oliver Boiral, Jean-François Henri, and David Talbot,
“Modeling the Impacts of Corporate Commitment on
Climate Change,” Business Strategy and the Environment
21, no. 8 (2012): 497, https://doi.org/10.1002/bse.723.
Boiral, Oliver, Jean-François Henri, and David Talbot. “Modeling the Impacts of Corporate Commitment on Climate Change.” Business Strategy and the Environment 21, no. 8 (2012): 495–516. https://doi.org/10.1002/bse.723.
Newspaper Article
19. Rory Jones, “Nations Meet to Discuss Web Rules,”
Wall Street Journal, December 4, 2012, sec. B.
20. Cade Metz, “Chips Off the Old Block: Computers Are
Taking Design Cues from Human Brains,” New York Times,
September 18, 2017, https://nyti.ms/2y5xcLS.
362
The CMS notes that newspaper articles are typically cited in
the text or notes, not in the bibliography. If a bibliography
entry were needed, however, it would look like this:
Metz, Cade. “Chips Off the Old Block: Computers Are Taking Design Cues from Human Brains.” New York Times, September 18, 2017. https://nyti.ms/2y5xcLS.
Article with an Unknown Author
21. “What Sold, for How Much, and Why?” Modern, Fall
2009, 22.
“What Sold, for How Much, and Why?” Modern, Fall 2009, 22.
OTHER ELECTRONIC SOURCES AND MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
Unlike online magazines and journals, less formally
published online sources, such as Web content (including
Web sites and Web pages, blogs, and social media), are
typically cited only in the text or notes. If a bibliography
entry is needed, begin with the author or site sponsor. (In a
note, the site sponsor follows the title of the Web site; in a
bibliography entry, if needed, the site sponsor appears in
the author position.) Include as much information as you
would for any other source, but be aware that full
bibliographic information may not be available. If readers
will not recognize the source type, include the relevant
label (Web site, blog) in parentheses following the title.
Titles of Web sites are not italicized. If a site is frequently
updated (as with a blog or a wiki), include a time stamp
363
along with the date last modified. If a blog is part of another publication, include that title as well. If you cite
comments on a blog post, include the date the comment
was posted following the name of the commenter. If an
author publishes under a pseudonym but you know the
writer’s actual name, you may include it following the
pseudonym in square brackets ([ ]).
Entire Web Site
22. Association for Business Communication (Web site),
accessed September 19, 2014,
http://www.businesscommunication.org.
Web sites are typically sited only in the notes. However, if a
bibliography entry is needed, it would look like this:
Association for Business Communication (Web site). Accessed September 19, 2014. http://www.businesscommunication.org.
Short Work from a Web Site, with an Author
23. Michael Calore, “Personalize Your Map with a
Custom Map Marker,” Webmonkey, October 7, 2010,
http://www.webmonkey.com/2010/10/personalize-your-
map-with-a-custom-map-marker.
Calore, Michael. “Personalize Your Map with a Custom Map Marker.” Webmonkey, October 7, 2010. http://www.webmonkey.com/2010/10/personalize-your- map-with-a-custom-map-marker.
364
Short Work from a Web Site, with a Corporate or an Organizational Author
24. “Global Diversity and Inclusion,” Microsoft, last
modified 2017, https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/diversity.
Microsoft. “Global Diversity and Inclusion.” Last modified 2017. https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/diversity.
Short Work from a Web Site, with an Unknown Author
25. “Women-Owned Business,” U.S. Small Business
Administration, last modified July 20, 2009,
http://www.sba.gov/business-guide/grow/women-owned-
businesses-programs.
U.S. Small Business Administration. “Women-Owned Business.” Last modified July 20, 2009. http://www.sba.gov/business-guide/grow/women- owned-businesses-programs.
Article Posted on a Wiki
26. “Labor Theory of Value,” Wikipedia, Wikimedia
Foundation, last modified September 19, 2017, 21:08,
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/labor_theory_of_value.
E-mail Message and Other Personal Communications
27. Ari Kalil, “Customer Satisfaction Survey,” e-mail
message to author, January 12, 2014.
E-mail messages and other personal communications, such
as letters and text messages, are usually cited in the text but
are omitted from bibliographies.
365
Online Posting (Lists, Forums, Discussion Boards)
28. Senior scholar, “Re: Surviving the Job Search,”
Chronicle Forums, Chronicle of Higher Education, March
15, 2009,
http://www.chronicle.com/forums/index.php/topic,40486.msg1221730.html#msg1221730.
Blog Posts and Comments on Blog Posts
29. Barbara Brynko, “Weathering Turbulent Times,”
Infotoday Blog, November 30, 2009,
http://www.infotodayblog.com/2009/11/30/weathering-
turbulent-times.
Brynko, Barbara. “Weathering Turbulent Times.” Infotoday Blog, November 30, 2009. http://www.infotodayblog.com/2009/11/30/weathering- turbulent-times.
30. OllyPye [Lynne Forbes], December 12, 2015,
comment on Graham Readfern, “Paris Agreement a Victory
for Climate Change and Ultimate Defeat for Fossil Fuels,”
Planet Oz (blog), Guardian,
http://www.theguardian.com/environment/planet-
oz/2015/dec/12/paris-agreement-a-victory-for-climate-
science-and-ultimate-defeat-for-fossil-fuels#comments-
64993862.
OllyPye [Lynne Forbes]. December 12, 2015. Comment on Graham Readfern, “Paris Agreement a Victory for Climate Change and the Ultimate Defeat for Fossil Fuels.” Planet Oz (blog). Guardian.
366
http://www.theguardian.com/environment/planet- oz/2015/dec/12/paris-agreement-a-victory-for-climate- science-and-ultimate-defeat-for-fossil-fuels#comments- 64993862.
Film or Video
31. Ken Chiu, “Trends in Mobile Gaming,” China 2.0
Conference, Stanford Program on Regions of Innovations
and Entrepreneurship, September 28, 2012, Stanford CA,
video, 01:53, http://www.youtube.com/watch?
v=zPD1ZyrilNw.
Chiu, Ken. “Trends in Mobile Gaming.” China 2.0 Conference, September 28, 2012. Stanford Program on Regions of Innovations and Entrepreneurship, Stanford, CA. Video, 01:53. http://www.youtube.com/watch? v=zPD1ZyrilNw.
Radio or Television Program, or Podcast
32. “Dobbs Law,” Lou Dobbs Tonight, CNN, May 14,
2013.
“Dobbs Law.” Lou Dobbs Tonight. CNN. May 14, 2013.
33. Felix Salmon, Anna Szymanski, and Jordan
Weissman, “The Bad Eggs Edition,” episode 167, July 29,
2017, on Slate Money, produced by Daniel Schroeder,
podcast audio, 1:14:19,
http://www.slate.com/articles/podcasts/slate_money/2017/07/
anthony_scaramucci_productivity_and_hampton_creek_s_eggless_mayo
367
_on_slate.html.
Salmon, Felix, Anna Szymanski, and Jordan Weissman. “The Bad Eggs Edition.” Episode 167. Produced by Daniel Schroeder. Slate Money, July 29, 2017. Podcast audio, 1:14:19. http://www.slate.com/articles/podcasts/slate_money/2017/07/ anthony_scaramucci_productivity_and_hampton_creek_s_eggless_mayo_on _slate.html.
OTHER SOURCES
Visual from a Secondary Source
The CMS classifies visuals as tables and illustrations (such
as paintings, photographs, drawings, maps, and charts). If
a table or an illustration is under copyright, follow the
citation requirements of the copyright owner. If a table or
an illustration is not under copyright, include a source note
following the caption or directly under the illustration.
Include the artist or author (if known), the title of the work,
publication details including the copyright date, and any
original figure or table unnumber.
Source: Reproduced by permission of the publisher from Neil Lindeman, “Subjectivized Knowledge and Grassroots Advocacy: An Analysis of an Environmental Controversy in Northern California,” Journal of Business and Technical Communication 27, no. 1 (2014): 77, table 1, © 2014 by SAGE Publications.
Source: “Global Warming Effects” [map], National
368
Geographic, n.d., accessed October 2, 2014, http://green.nationalgeographic.com/environment/global- warming/gw-impacts-interactive.html.
If the illustration is cited in the bibliography, then you may
abbreviate the credit line in the source note.
Source: Table from Lindeman (2014).
Lindeman, Neil. “Subjectivized Knowledge and Grassroots Advocacy: An Analysis of an Environmental Controversy in Northern California.” Journal of Business and Technical Communication 27, no. 1 (2014): 77, table 1.
Published Interview
34. Robert Barro, “Interview with Robert Barro,”
interview by Conor Clarke, Atlantic, February 5, 2009,
https://www.theatlantic.com/politics/archive/2009/02/an-
interview-with-robert-barro/370/.
Barro, Robert. “Interview with Robert Barro.” By Conor Clarke. Atlantic, February 5, 2009. https://www.theatlantic.com/politics/archive/2009/02/an- interview-with-robert-barro/370/.
Personal Communications
35. Mahmood Sariolghalam, interview by the author,
January 29, 2010.
36. Monica Pascatore, text message to the author, April
10, 2017.
369
Personal communications are generally not included in
bibliographies.
Brochure or Pamphlet
37. Library of Congress, Copyright Basics, U.S. Copyright
Office, 2012, 4, https://www.copyright.gov/circs/circ01.pdf.
Library of Congress. Copyright Basics. U.S. Copyright Office, 2012. https://www.copyright.gov/circs/circ01.pdf.
Government Document
38. “Highlights of Women’s Earnings in 2015,” BLS
Reports, no. 1064, U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of
Labor Statistics, November 2016,
https://www.bls.gov/opub/reports/womens-
earnings/2015/pdf/home.pdf.
“Highlights of Women’s Earnings in 2015,” BLS Reports. U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics. “Highlights of Women’s Earnings in 2015.” BLS Reports, no. 1064. November 2016. https://www.bls.gov/opub/reports/womens- earnings/2015/pdf/home.pdf.
Report
39. World Development Report: Governance and the
Law, World Bank, 2017,
https://openknowledge.worldbank.org/handle/10986/25880.
World Bank. World Development Report: Governance and the Law. 2017.
370
https://openknowledge.worldbank.org/handle/10986/25880.
CMS Sample Pages
371
372
FIGURE D–6. CMS Sample Page (from a Report)
373
374
FIGURE D–7. CMS Sample Bibliography
MLA Documentation MLA In-Text Citations The MLA parenthetical citation within the text of a paper gives a
brief citation listing the author and relevant page number(s),
separated only by a space.
► Achieving results is one thing while maintaining results is another because “like marathon runners, companies hit a performance wall” (Studer 3).
When no author is named, provide a shortened title of the work
(the first noun and any modifiers) in parentheses.
► As Studer writes, the poor performance of a few employees will ultimately affect the performance—and the morale—of all employees (8).
If the author is cited in the text, include only the page
number(s) in parentheses. If no page reference is available, as
with a work from a Web site, use a paragraph or section
number if provided; do not create your own.
► In 1810, Peter Durand invented the can, which was later used to provide soldiers and explorers with canned rations and ultimately “saved legions from sure starvation” (“Forgotten Inventors”).
375
If the parenthetical citation refers to a long, indented quotation
(more than four lines when run in), set the quotation as a block
indented half an inch, and place the parenthetical citation
outside the punctuation of the last sentence.
► Frank Sprague, a naval officer and inventor, devised a new electric motor that transformed American subway systems:
[His engine] produced no sparks. It could operate at a
constant speed for long stretches, whether it was pulling 20
pounds, 200 pounds, or more. When Sprague’s idol and
mentor Thomas Edison visited the exhibition and saw
Sprague’s motor, he had one thing to say: “His is the only
true motor.” (“Forgotten Hero”)
If you are using more than one work by the same author, give a
shortened version of the title in the parenthetical citation unless
you name the title in the text (a “signal phrase”). A citation for
Quint Studer’s book Results That Last: Hardwiring Behaviors
That Will Take Your Company to the Top would appear as
(Studer, Results 93).
MLA Documentation Models The MLA Handbook, Eighth Edition, encourages writers to
think of citations as being made up of three core elements—the
author, the title of the source, and the “container” in which the
source appears. The container might be a magazine, a
newspaper, a journal, or an anthology. (Note: If the source is a
book, the source is self-contained, and the publication
376
information follows the title.) Follow each of these main
sections with a period. Other information that you should
include about the container includes the following:
names of the editors version or edition number number (volume and issue for a journal, volume number for a multivolume work) name of the publisher (omit business words or abbreviations, such as Company or Inc.) publication date location information (page unnumbers, URL, or DOI)
Follow each bit of information about the container with a
comma, except the last. End the citation with a period.
If a source appears in multiple containers, add information
about the second following that of the first. For example, if you
access an article in a journal via a database, the journal is
container 1, and the database is container 2; if you download a
selection from a book from an online database, the book is
container 1, and the database is container 2.
In the case of books, which are self-contained, follow the title
of the source with a period, then add the publication
information. MLA style no longer requires that you include the
city of publication.
BOOKS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)
377
Single Author
Wheeler, Alina. Designing Brand Identity: An Essential Guide for the Whole Branding Team. John Wiley and Sons, 2012.
Dolbear, A. E. The Machinery of the Universe: Mechanical Conceptions of Physical Phenomena. E. and J. B. Young, 1897. Project Gutenberg, www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/29444.
Multiple Authors
Kaye, Beverly, and Julie Winkle Giulioni. Help Them Grow or Watch Them Go: Career Conversations Employees Want. Berrett, 2012.
Corporate Author
Standard and Poor’s. Standard and Poor’s 500 Guide. McGraw-Hill Education, 2013.
Edition Other Than First
Mongan, John, Eric Giguere, and Noah Kindler. Programming Interviews Exposed: Secrets to Landing Your Next Job. 3rd ed., John Wiley and Sons, 2013.
Multivolume Work
Kozlowski, Steve W. J., editor. The Oxford Handbook of Organizational Psychology. Oxford UP, 2012. 2 vols.
D. E. Knuth. The Art of Computer Programming. vol. 4, Addison-Wesley, 2009.
378
Work in an Edited Collection
Snider, Laureen. “The Technological Advantages of Stock Market Traders.” How They Got Away with It: White Collar Criminals and the Financial Meltdown, edited by Susan Will, Stephen Handelman, and David C. Brotherton, Columbia UP, 2013, pp. 151–70.
Encyclopedia or Dictionary Entry
“Agent Technology.” Wiley Encyclopedia of Computer Science and Engineering, edited by B. W. Wah, John Wiley and Sons, 2009.
Brunblecombe, P. “Air Pollution Episodes.” Encyclopedia of Environmental Health, edited by Jerome O. Nriagu, vol. 1, Elsevier, 2011, pp. 39–45. Gale Virtual Reference Library, go.galegroup.com/ps/retrieve.do? resultlisttype=9780444522726&prodid=gvrl&Isetoc=true&docid=gale|cx1503700016.
ARTICLES IN PERIODICALS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)
Magazine Article
Heller, Nathan. “Mark as Read: What Do We Learn When Our Private E-mail Becomes Public.” The New Yorker, 24 July 2017, pp. 28–31.
DiChristina, Mariette. “Designing the City of Tomorrow Today.” Scientific American, July 2017, p. 4, www.scientificamerican.com/article/designing-the-city- of-tomorrow-today/.
Journal Article
379
Moriarty, Jeffrey. “Participation in the Workplace: Are Employees Special?” Journal of Business Ethics, vol. 92, no. 3, 2010, pp. 373–84.
Passow, Honor J., and Christian H. Passow. “What Competencies Should Undergraduate Engineering Programs Emphasize? A Systematic Review.” Journal of Engineering Education, vol. 106, no. 3, July 2017, pp. 475–526. Academic Search Complete, doi:10.1002/jee.20171.ONLINE.
Shrestha, Maria E. I., et al. “Urban Energy Scenario: The Case of the Kathmandu Valley.” Journal of Engineering and Technological Sciences, vol. 49, no. 2, 2017, pp. 210– 24, journals.itb.ac.id/index.php/jets/article/view/5073/2810.
Newspaper Article
Jones, Rory. “Nations Meet to Discuss Web Rules.” The Wall Street Journal, 4 Dec. 2012, p. B7.
Metz, Cade. “Chips Off the Old Block: Computers Are Taking Design Cues from Human Brains.” The New York Times, 18 Sept. 2017, nyti.ms/2y5xcLS.
Article with an Unknown Author
“What Sold, for How Much, and Why?” Modern, vol. 1, no. 2, 2009, p. 22.
OTHER ELECTRONIC AND MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
Entire Web Site
380
Society for Technical Communication. 2017, www.stc.org.
Short Work from a Web Site, with an Author
Marshall, Rosalie. “IBM Bolsters Green Sensor Portfolio.” BusinessGreen, 18 Aug. 2009, www.businessgreen.com/bg/news/1802285/ibm-bolsters- green-sensor-portfolio.
Short Work from a Web Site, with an Unknown Author
“Women-Owned Businesses.” U.S. Small Business Administration, 20 July 2009, www.sba.gov/business- guide/grow/women-owned-businesses-programs.
Article Posted on a Wiki
“Labor Theory of Value.” Wikipedia, 2 Sept. 2017, en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Labor_theory_of_value.
Online Posting and Comments (Lists, Forums, Discussion Boards, Blogs)
trabb. “Surviving the Job Search.” Chronicle Forums, 15 Mar. 2009, Chronicle of Higher Education, www.chronicle.com/forums/index.php/topic,40486.0.html.
scamster. “Re Surviving the Job Search,” by trabb. Chronicle Forums, 17 Aug. 2017, Chronicle of Higher Education, www.chronicle.com/forums/index.php/topic,40486.1230.html.
E-mail Message
Kalil, Ari. “Customer Satisfaction Survey.” Received by
381
Gerald Alred, 12 Jan. 2018.
Map or Chart
“Australia.” Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection, U of Texas, 1999, www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/australia/australia_pol99.jpg.
Film or Video
Chiu, Ken. “Trends in Mobile Gaming.” Stanford U, 15 Nov. 2012, www.youtube.com/watch?v=zPD1ZyrilNw.
Radio or Television Program
“Obama’s Failures Have Made Millennials Give Up Hope.” The Rush Limbaugh Show, hosted by Rush Limbaugh, Premiere Radio Networks, 14 Apr. 2014, www.rushlimbaugh.com/daily/2014/04/14/obama_s_failures_have_made_millennials_give_up_hope.
“Hacks or Malfunction, US Election Infrastructure Still Vulnerable.” The Rachel Maddow Show, hosted by Rachel Maddow, MSNBC, 1 Sept. 2017, www.msnbc.com/rachel-maddow-show.
Podcast
McDougall, Christopher. “How Did Endurance Help Early Humans Survive?” TED Radio Hour, National Public Radio, 20 Nov. 2015, www.npr.org/2015/11/20/455904655/how-did-endurance- help-early-humans-survive.
382
Broadcast Interview
Russell, David O. Interview by Terry Gross. Fresh Air, WNYC, 20 Feb. 2014.
Personal Interview
Andersen, Elizabeth. Personal interview, 29 Nov. 2014.
Brochure or Pamphlet
Historic Preservation Tax Incentives. United States, Department of the Interior, National Park Service, 2016, www.nps.gov/tps/tax-incentives.htm.
Government Document
Highlights of Women’s Earnings in 2015. Bureau of Labor Statistics, U.S. Department of Labor, Nov. 2016, www.bls.gov/opub/reports/womens- earnings/2015/home.htm.
Report
World Development Report: Governance and the Law. World Bank, 2017, hdl.handle.net/10986/25880.
MLA Sample Pages
383
384
FIGURE D–8. MLA Sample Page (from a Report)
385
386
FIGURE D–9. MLA Sample List of Works Cited
387
double negatives A double negative is the use of an additional negative word to
reinforce an expression that is already negative. In writing and
speech, avoid such constructions.
UNCLEAR We don’t have none. [This sentence literally means that we have some.]
CLEAR We have none.
Barely, hardly, and scarcely cause problems when writers do
not recognize that the words are already negative.
Not unfriendly, not without, and similar constructions are not
double negatives because in such constructions two negatives
are meant to suggest the gray area between negative and
positive meanings. Be careful how you use such constructions;
they can be confusing to the reader and should be used only if
they serve a purpose.
► He is not unfriendly. [He is neither hostile nor friendly.] ► It is not without regret that I offer my resignation. [I have
mixed feelings rather than only regret.]
The correlative conjunctions neither and nor may appear
together in a clause without creating a double negative, so long
as the writer does not attempt to use the word not in the same
clause.
388
Negative forms are full of traps that often entice writers into
logic errors, as illustrated in the following example:
ILLOGICAL The book reveals nothing that has not already been published in some form, but some of it is, I believe, relatively unknown.
In this sentence, “some of it” can logically refer only to “nothing
that has not already been published.” The sentence can be
corrected by stating the idea in more positive writing.
LOGICAL Everything in the book has been published in some form, but some of it is, I believe, relatively unknown.
389
drawings A drawing can depict an object’s appearance and illustrate the
steps in procedures or instructions. It can emphasize the
significant parts or functions of a device or product, omit what
is not significant, and focus on details or relationships that a
photograph cannot reveal. Think about your need for drawings
during your preparation and research. Include the drawings in
your outline, indicating approximately where each should be
placed (“drawing of . . .” enclosed in brackets). For advice on
integrating drawings into your text, see outlining and visuals.
Consider your medium, as well as your purpose and
audience, when choosing the type of drawing to include. For
example, publishing to an online digital format (such as a Web
page) could allow you to include a line drawing that can be
enlarged, automatically breaking into labeled cutaway parts.
See also infographics and selecting the medium.
The types of drawings discussed in this entry are
conventional line drawings, exploded-view drawings, cutaway
drawings, and clip-art images.
A conventional line drawing is appropriate if your audience
needs an overview of a series of steps or an understanding of an
object’s appearance or construction, as in Figure D–10.
390
FIGURE D–10. Conventional Line Drawing
An exploded-view drawing, like that in Figure D–11, can be
useful when you need to show the proper sequence in which
parts fit together or to show the details of individual parts.
Figure D–11 shows owners of a Xerox WorkCentre copier how
to safely unpack the machine and its key parts.
391
FIGURE D–11. Exploded-View Drawing
SOURCE: Xerox Corporation.
392
A cutaway drawing, like the one in Figure D–12, can be useful
when you need to show the internal parts of a device or
structure and illustrate their relationship to the whole.
FIGURE D–12. Cutaway Drawing
If you need only general-interest images to illustrate
newsletters and brochures or to create presentation slides,
consider using free noncopyrighted clip-art drawings from
online specialty sources. You may also consider purchasing
images from online stock-image companies.
393
ETHICS NOTE
Do not use drawings from the Web or other copyrighted sources without proper documentation; if you intend to publish your work, seek permission from the copyright holder. See also copyrights, patents and trademarks, documenting sources, and plagiarism.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Creating and Using Drawings
✓ Seek the help of graphics specialists for drawings that require a high degree of accuracy and precision.
✓ Show equipment and other objects from the point of view of the person who will use them.
✓ When illustrating a subsystem, show its relationship to the larger system of which it is a part.
✓ Draw the parts of an object in proportion to one another, and identify any parts that are enlarged or reduced.
✓ When a sequence of drawings is used to illustrate a process, arrange them from left to right or from top to bottom on the page.
✓ Label parts in the drawing so that the text references to them are clear and consistent.
✓ Depending on the complexity of what is shown, label the parts themselves, as in Figure D–11, or use a key, as in Figure G–11 on page 244.
394
due to / because of Due to (meaning “caused by”) is acceptable following a linking
verb.
► His absence was due to a work-related injury.
Due to is not acceptable, however, when it is used with a
nonlinking verb to replace because of.
395
E
396
each When each is used as a subject, it takes a singular verb or
pronoun. (“Each of the reports is to be submitted ten weeks
after it is assigned.”) When each refers to a plural subject, it
takes a plural verb or pronoun. (“The reports each have
company logos on their title pages.”)
397
economic / economical Economic refers to the production, development, and
management of material wealth. (“Tax rates have an economic
impact on communities.”) Economical simply means “not
wasteful or extravagant.” (“Employees should be as economical
as possible in their equipment purchases.”)
398
editing (see revision and proofreading)
399
e.g. / i.e. The abbreviation e.g. stands for the Latin exempli gratia,
meaning “for example”; i.e. stands for the Latin id est, meaning
“that is.” Because the English expressions (for example and that
is) are clear to all readers, avoid the Latin e.g. and i.e.
abbreviations except to save space in notes and visuals. If you
must use i.e. or e.g., do not italicize either of them. If i.e. or e.g.
connects two independent clauses, a semicolon should precede
the abbreviation, and a comma should follow it.
► The conference reflected international viewpoints; e.g., speakers included Germans, Italians, Japanese, Chinese, and Americans.
If i.e. or e.g. connects a noun and an appositive, a comma
should precede it and follow it.
► The conference included speakers from five countries, i.e., Germany, Italy, Japan, China, and the United States.
400
ellipses An ellipsis is the omission of words from quoted material; it is
indicated by three spaced periods called ellipsis points (. . .).
When you use ellipsis points, omit original punctuation marks
unless they are necessary for clarity or the omitted material
comes at the end of a quoted sentence.
ORIGINAL TEXT
“Promotional material sometimes carries a fee, particularly in high- volume distribution to schools, although prices for these publications are much lower than the development costs when all factors are considered.”
WITH OMISSION AND ELLIPSIS POINTS
“Promotional material sometimes carries a fee . . . although prices for these publications are much lower than the development costs. . . .”
Notice in the preceding example that the final period is retained
and what remains of the quotation is grammatically complete.
When the omitted part of the quotation is preceded by a period,
retain the period and add the three ellipsis points after it, as in
the following example.
ORIGINAL TEXT
“Of the 172 major ethics cases reported, 57 percent were found to involve unsubstantiated concerns. Misinformation was the cause of unfounded concerns of misconduct in 72 cases. Forty-four cases, or 26 percent of the total cases reported, involved incidents partly substantiated by ethics officers as serious misconduct.”
WITH OMISSION AND ELLIPSIS POINTS
“Of the 172 major ethics cases reported, 57 percent were found to involve unsubstantiated concerns. . . . Forty-four cases, or 26 percent of the total cases reported, involved incidents partly substantiated by ethics officers as serious misconduct.”
401
Do not use ellipsis points when the beginning of a quoted
sentence is omitted. Notice in the following example that the
comma is dropped to prevent a grammatical error. See also
quotations.
► The ethics report states that “26 percent of the total cases reported involved incidents partly substantiated by ethics officers as serious misconduct.”
402
e-mail DIRECTORY
Review and Confidentiality Writer’s Checklist: Maintaining Professionalism Writing and Design Writer’s Checklist: Managing Your E-mail and Reducing Overload
E-mail (or email) functions in the workplace as a primary
medium to exchange information and share electronic files
with colleagues, clients, and customers. E-mail messages range
from short, informal notes to longer, more formal
communications. For general writing strategy and appropriate
professional style, see correspondence. See also letters,
memos, and selecting the medium.
Review and Confidentiality Avoid the temptation to send the first draft of a message without
rereading it for clarity and appropriateness. As with all
correspondence, your message should include all crucial details
and be free of grammatical and factual errors, ambiguities, and
unintended implications. See proofreading and spelling.
Keep in mind that e-mails are easily forwarded and are never
truly deleted. Most companies back up and save all their e-mail
messages and are legally entitled to monitor e-mail use.
403
Companies can be compelled, depending on circumstances, to provide e-mail and digital messaging logs in response to legal
requests. Consider the content of all your messages in the light
of these possibilities, and carefully review your message before
you click “Send.”
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Be especially careful when sending messages to superiors in your organization or to people outside the organization. Spending extra time reviewing your e-mail can save you the embarrassment caused by a carelessly written message. One helpful strategy is to write the draft and revise your e-mail before filling in the “To” line with the address of your recipient.
FIGURE E–1. E-mail Signature Block
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
404
Maintaining Professionalism
✓ Review your organization’s policy regarding the appropriate use of e-mail.
✓ Do not forward jokes or spam, discuss office gossip, or use biased language.
✓ Do not send flames (e-mails that contain abusive, obscene, or derogatory language) to attack someone. See also blogs and forums.
✓ Avoid abbreviations (BTW for by the way, for example), emoticons, and emojis used in personal e-mail, discussion forums, text messaging, and instant messaging and live chat.
✓ Use typographical features (like bold or colors) carefully to provide emphasis. Do not write in all lowercase letters or in ALL UPPERCASE LETTERS.
✓ Base your personal e-mail username on your personal name ([email protected]). Avoid clever names ([email protected]), since you may need to use your account for professional or job search purposes.
✓ Write a cover message when including attachments (“Attached is a copy of . . .”), and double-check that it is indeed attached. See cover letters.
✓ Always sign the e-mail and use a signature block (see Figure E–1 on page 170); doing so is both polite and a way to avoid possible confusion.
✓ Send a “courtesy response” informing the sender when you need additional time to reply or when you need to confirm that you have received a message or an attachment.
✓ When absent, use “out of office” autoresponder messages that state the dates you will be unavailable or an alternative way to reach you and who to contact in your absence. Add a reminder to your calendar to remove the message the day you return.
405
Writing and Design Make the main point early and use short paragraphs to avoid
dense blocks of text. For longer and more detailed messages,
provide a brief paragraph overview at the beginning. Adapt
forwarded messages by revising the subject line to reflect the
current content and cut irrelevant previous text or highlight key
text, based on your purpose and context.
Provide a specific subject line, as described on page 117, after
composing the message so that your topic is precise and clear to
the reader. An empty subject line is unprofessional and may be
interpreted as spam and thus routed to junk mail.
Adapt your salutation and complimentary closing to your
audience and the context.
When e-mail functions as a traditional business letter, consider the standard salutation (Dear Ms. Tucker: or Dear Docuform Customer:) and closing (Sincerely, or Best wishes,). When you send e-mail to individuals or small groups inside an organization, you may wish to adopt a more personal greeting (Dear Andy, or Dear Project Colleagues,) and closing (Regards, or Good luck). When e-mail functions as a personal note to a friend or close colleague, you can use an informal greeting (Hi, Mike, or Hello, Jenny) or only a first name and a closing (Take care, or Best,).
406
Be aware that in some cultures, professionals do not refer to
recipients or colleagues by their first names. See international
correspondence.
Many companies and professionals include signature blocks
(also called signatures) at the bottom of their messages.
Signatures, which are set to appear at the end of every e-mail,
supply information traditionally provided on company
letterhead. Many organizations provide graphic signature forms
or formatting standards. If yours does not, consider the
following guidelines for formatting text-based signatures:
Keep line length to sixty characters or fewer to avoid unpredictable line wraps. Test your signature block in plain-text e-mail systems to verify your format. Avoid using quotations, aphorisms, proverbs, or other sayings from popular culture, religion, or poetry in professional signatures.
The pattern shown in Figure E–1 is typical.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Managing Your E-mail and Reducing Overload
✓ Avoid becoming involved in an e-mail exchange if a phone call or meeting would be more efficient.
✓ Consider whether an e-mail message could prompt an unnecessary response from the recipient, and make clear to the recipient whether you expect a response.
407
✓ Send a copy (“cc:”) of an e-mail only when the person copied needs or wants the information, and don’t expect a response.
✓ Review all messages on a subject before responding to avoid dealing with issues that are no longer relevant.
✓ Set priorities for reading e-mail by skimming sender names and subject lines as well as where you appear (in the “to” or “cc:” line).
✓ Check the e-mail address before sending an e-mail to make sure it is correct.
✓ Determine the best way to organize e-mails in your system: using flags to highlight topics, search commands to find topics, or folders to group e-mails. You may want to save important e-mails as PDFs in an appropriate folder.
✓ Check your in-box regularly, and try to either clear it or categorize it and file new messages by the end of each day.
ETHICS NOTE
The blind-copy (bcc:) function allows writers to send copies of a message to someone without the primary receiver’s knowledge. Use the bcc: notation with great care. Sending sensitive or confidential information to a third party as a blind copy without the original recipient’s knowledge is unethical when used to play office politics. The blind-copy function is both ethical and useful, however, when used to protect the privacy of the e-mail addresses of a large group of recipients. Keep in mind that such addresses might be visible to your supervisors or your company’s IT team.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Double-check your “To” box addressees carefully before hitting the
408
“Send” button. The auto-fill feature in e-mail programs automatically fills in the names of recipients and other information in your “To” box based on the first few letters you type. Although it is a convenient feature, be aware that your e-mail can easily wind up in the wrong in- box when the names of people in your address book are similar (Donna/Donnie) or when two people share the same last name. The result can lead to embarrassing misunderstandings or to confidential information being sent to the wrong people.
409
emphasis Emphasis in writing means highlighting the facts and ideas you
consider important and subordinating those of secondary
importance. You can achieve emphasis with any of these
techniques: position, climactic order, sentence length, sentence
type, active voice, repetition, intensifiers, direct statements,
long dashes, and typographical devices.
Achieving Emphasis Position Place the idea in a conspicuous position. The first and last
words of a sentence, paragraph, or document stand out.
► Moon craters are important to understanding the earth’s history because they reflect geological history.
The term moon craters is emphasized because it appears at the
beginning of the sentence, and geological history is emphasized
because it appears at the end of the sentence. See also
subordination.
Climactic Order List the ideas or facts within a sentence in sequence from least
to most important, as in the following example. See also lists.
► Discontinuation of the HGX212 line of circuit boards would cause some technicians to be relocated to other cities, some
410
to be reclassified to a lower grade, and some to lose their jobs.
Sentence Length Vary sentence length strategically. A short sentence that follows
a long sentence or a series of long sentences stands out in the
reader’s mind, as in the short sentence that ends the following
paragraph (“We must cut costs.”). See sentence construction.
► We have already reviewed the problem the accounting department has experienced during the past year. We could continue to examine the causes of our problems and point an accusing finger at all the culprits beyond our control, but in the end it all leads to one simple conclusion. We must cut costs.
Sentence Type Vary sentences by the strategic use of a compound sentence, a
complex sentence, or a simple sentence. See sentence variety.
► The report submitted by the committee was carefully illustrated, and it covered five pages of single-spaced copy. [This compound sentence carries no special emphasis; it contains two coordinate independent clauses.]
► The committee’s report, which was carefully illustrated, covered five pages of single-spaced copy. [This complex sentence emphasizes the size of the report.]
► The carefully illustrated report submitted by the committee covered five pages of single-spaced copy. [This simple sentence emphasizes that the report was carefully
411
illustrated.]
Active Voice Use the active voice to emphasize the performer of an action:
Make the performer the subject of the verb.
► Our department designed the new system. [This sentence emphasizes our department, which is the performer and the subject of the verb, designed.]
Repetition Repeat key terms, as in the use of the word remains and the
phrase come and go in the following sentence.
► Similarly, atoms come and go in a molecule, but the molecule remains; molecules come and go in a cell, but the cell remains; cells come and go in a body, but the body remains; persons come and go in an organization, but the organization remains.
— Kenneth Boulding, Beyond Economics
Intensifiers Although you can use intensifiers (most, much, very) for
emphasis, this technique is so easily abused that it should be
used with caution.
► The final proposal is much more persuasive than the first one. [The intensifier much emphasizes the contrast.]
412
Direct Statements Use direct statements, such as “most important,” “foremost,” or
someone’s name in a direct address.
► Most important, keep in mind that everything you do affects the company’s bottom line.
► John, I believe we should rethink our plans.
Long Dashes Use a dash to call attention to a particular word or statement.
► The job will be done—after we are under contract.
Typographical Devices Use italics, bold type, underlining, color, and CAPITAL
LETTERS—but use them sparingly because overuse can create
visual clutter and cause readers to ignore truly important
information. See also capitalization, italics, and layout and
design.
413
English as a second language
DIRECTORY
Count and Mass Nouns Articles and Modifiers Gerunds and Infinitives Adjective Clauses Present Perfect Verb Tense Present Progressive Verb Tense
Learning to write well in a second language takes a great deal of
effort and practice. The most effective way to improve your
command of written English is to read widely beyond the
reports and professional articles your job requires, such as
magazines, newspapers, articles, novels, biographies, and any
other writing that interests you. In addition, listen carefully to
native speakers on television, on the radio, on podcasts, and in
person. Do not hesitate to consult a native speaker of English—
especially for important writing tasks, such as e-mails, memos,
and reports. Focus on those particular areas of English that give
you trouble. This entry covers several areas often confusing to
nonnative speakers and writers of English. See also global
communication.
Count and Mass Nouns 414
Count nouns refer to things that can be counted (tables, pencils,
projects, employees). Mass nouns (also called noncount nouns)
identify things that cannot be counted (electricity, air, loyalty,
information). This distinction can be confusing with words like
electricity and water. Although we can count kilowatt-hours of
electricity and bottles of water, counting becomes
inappropriate when we use the words electricity and water in a
general sense, as in “Water is an essential resource.” Following
is a list of typical mass nouns.
advice equipment news technology
biology furniture oil transportation
business honesty precision waste
education money research work
The distinction between something that can and something that
cannot be counted determines the form of the noun to use
(singular or plural), the kind of article that precedes it (a, an,
the, or no article), and the kind of limiting adjective it requires
(such as fewer or less and much or many). (See also fewer /
less.) Notice that count and mass nouns are always common
nouns; they are not proper nouns, such as the names of people.
Articles and Modifiers Every singular count noun must be preceded by an article (a,
an, or the), a demonstrative adjective (this, that, these, or
those), a possessive adjective (my, your, her, his, its, our, their,
or whose), or some expression of quantity (one, two, several,
415
many, a few, a lot of, some, no). The article, adjective, or
expression of quantity appears either directly in front of the
noun or in front of the whole noun phrase.
► Beth read a report last week. [article] ► Those reports Beth read were long. [demonstrative
adjective] ► Their report was long. [possessive adjective] ► Some reports Beth read were long. [indefinite adjective]
The articles a and an are used with count nouns that refer to
one item of the whole class of like items.
► Matthew has a pen. [Matthew could have any pen.]
The article the is used with nouns that refer to a specific item
that both the reader and the writer can identify.
► Matthew has the pen. [Matthew has a specific pen that is known to both the reader and the writer.]
When making generalizations with count nouns, writers can
either use a or an with a singular count noun or use no article
with a plural count noun. Consider the following generalization
using an article.
► An egg is a good source of protein. [any egg, all eggs, eggs in general]
However, the following generalization uses a plural count noun
with no article.
416
► Eggs are a good source of protein. [any egg, all eggs, eggs in general]
When you are making a generalization with a mass noun, do not
use an article in front of the mass noun.
► Sugar is bad for your teeth.
Gerunds and Infinitives Nonnative writers of English are often puzzled about whether to
use a gerund or an infinitive as a direct object of a verb (see
verbals) because no structural rule exists for distinguishing
which form to use. Any particular verb may take an infinitive as
its object, others may take a gerund, and still others take either
an infinitive or a gerund. At times, even the base form of the
verb is used.
► He enjoys working. [gerund as a complement] ► She promised to fulfill her part of the contract. [infinitive
as a complement] ► The president had the manager assign her staff to another
project. [basic verb form as a complement]
To make such distinctions accurately, rely on what you hear
native speakers use or what you read. You might also consult a
reference book for ESL students.
Adjective Clauses Because of the variety of ways adjective clauses are constructed
417
in different languages, they can be particularly troublesome.
The following guidelines will help you form adjective clauses
correctly.
Place an adjective clause directly after the noun it modifies.
The adjective clause who is standing across the room modifies
woman, not company, and thus should come directly after
woman.
Avoid using a relative pronoun with another pronoun in an
adjective clause.
Present Perfect Verb Tense In general, use the present perfect tense to refer to events
completed in the past that have some implication for the
present.
PRESENT PERFECT
She has performed the experiment three times. [She might perform it again.]
When a specific time is mentioned, however, use the simple
past tense.
SIMPLE PAST
I wrote the letter yesterday morning. [The action, wrote, does not affect the present.]
418
Use the present perfect with a since or for phrase to describe
actions that began in the past and continue in the present.
► This company has been in business for fifteen years. ► This company has been in business since 2000.
Present Progressive Verb Tense The present progressive tense is especially difficult for those
whose native language does not use this tense. The present
progressive tense is used to describe some action or condition
that is ongoing (or in progress) in the present and may continue
into the future.
PRESENT PROGRESSIVE
I am searching for an error in the document. [The search is occurring now and may continue.]
In contrast, the simple present tense more often relates to
routine actions.
SIMPLE PRESENT
I search for errors in my documents. [I regularly search for errors, but I am not necessarily searching now.]
419
English, varieties of Written English includes two broad categories: standard and
nonstandard. Standard English is used in business, industry,
government, education, and all professions. It has rigorous and
precise criteria for capitalization, punctuation, spelling, and
usage. Nonstandard English does not conform to such criteria;
it is often regional in origin, or it reflects the special usages of a
particular ethnic or social group. As a result, although
nonstandard English may be vigorous and colorful, its
usefulness as a means of communication is limited to certain
contexts and to people already familiar and comfortable with it
in those contexts. It rarely appears in printed material except
for special effect. Nonstandard English is characterized by
inexact or inconsistent Capitalization., punctuation, spelling,
diction, and usage choices.
Colloquial English Colloquial English is spoken English or writing that uses words
and expressions common to casual conversation. (“We need to
get him up to speed.”) Colloquial English is appropriate in some
kinds of writing (personal letters, notes, some e-mail) but not in
most workplace writing.
Dialectal English Dialectal English is a social or regional variety of the language
that is comprehensible to people of that social group or region
420
but may be incomprehensible to outsiders. Dialect, which is
usually nonstandard English, involves distinct word choice,
grammatical forms, and pronunciations. For example, residents
of southern Louisiana who descended from French colonists
speak a dialect often referred to as Cajun.
Localisms A localism is a regional wording or phrasing. For example, a
large sandwich on a long split roll is known in various regions
of the United States as a sub, hero, hoagie, grinder, poor boy, or
torpedo. Localisms should normally be avoided in workplace
writing, unless the writer is confident that all readers will be
familiar with a term.
Slang Slang is an informal vocabulary composed of figures of speech
and colorful words used in humorous or extravagant ways.
There is no objective test for slang, and many standard words
are given slang applications. For instance, slang may be a
familiar word used in a new way (chill meaning “relax”) or a
completely new word (selfie meaning “an informal photograph
taken of oneself”).
Most slang is short lived and has meaning only for a narrow
audience. Sometimes, however, slang becomes standard
because the word fills a legitimate need. Skyscraper and date
(as in “go on a date”), for example, were once considered slang
421
expressions. Nevertheless, although slang may be valid in
informal and personal writing or fiction, it should generally be
avoided in workplace writing. See also jargon and business
writing style.
422
equal / unique / perfect Logically, equal (meaning “having the same quantity or value as
another”), unique (meaning “one of a kind”), and perfect
(meaning “a state of highest excellence”) are words with
absolute meanings and therefore should not be compared.
However, colloquial usage of more and most as modifiers of
equal, unique, and perfect is so common that an absolute
prohibition on such use is impossible.
► Our system is more unique [or more perfect] than theirs.
Some writers try to overcome the problem by using more nearly
(more nearly equal, more nearly unique, more nearly perfect).
When clarity and preciseness are critical, the use of
comparative degrees with equal, unique, and perfect can be
vague. It is best to avoid using comparative degrees with
absolute terms. See also comparison.
VAGUE Ours is a more equal percentage split than theirs.
PRECISE Our percentage split is 51–49; theirs is 54–46.
423
etc Etc. is an abbreviation for the Latin et cetera, meaning “and
others” or “and so on.” Therefore, do not use the redundant
phrase and etc. Likewise, do not use etc. at the end of a series
introduced by the phrases such as and for example—those
phrases already indicate unnamed items of the same category.
Use etc. with a logical progression (1, 2, 3, etc.) and when at
least two items are named. Do not italicize etc.
► The sorting machine processes coins (pennies, nickels, etc.) and then packages them for redistribution.
Otherwise, avoid etc. because the reader may not be able to
infer what other items a list might include.
VAGUE He will bring notepads, paper clips, etc., to the trade show.
CLEAR He will bring notepads, paper clips, and other office supplies to the trade show.
424
ethics in writing Ethics refers to the choices we make that affect others for good
or ill. Ethical issues are inherent in writing and speaking
because what we write and say can influence others. Further,
how we express ideas affects our audience’s perceptions of us
and our organization’s ethical stance. See also audience.
ETHICS NOTE
No book can describe how to act ethically in every situation, but this entry describes some typical ethical lapses to watch for during revision. In other entries throughout this book, ethical issues are highlighted using the symbols surrounding this paragraph.
Avoid language that attempts to evade responsibility. Some
writers use the passive voice because they hope to avoid
responsibility or to obscure an issue: “It has been decided”
(Who has decided?) or “Several mistakes were made” (Who
made them?).
Avoid deceptive language. Do not use words with more than
one meaning to circumvent the truth. Consider the company
document that stated, “A nominal charge will be assessed for
using our facilities.” When clients objected that the charge was
actually very high, the writer pointed out that the word nominal
means “the named amount” in addition to “very small.” In that
situation, clients had a strong case in charging that the
1
425
company was attempting to be deceptive. The use of various
abstract words, technical and legal jargon, and euphemisms is
unethical when those words and phrases are used to mislead
readers or to hide a serious or dangerous situation, even though
technical or legal experts could interpret those words and terms
as accurate. See also word choice.
Do not deemphasize or suppress important information. Not
including information that a reader would want to have, such as
potential safety hazards or hidden costs for which a customer
might be responsible, is unethical and possibly illegal.
Likewise, do not hide information in dense paragraphs of
gobbledygook with small type and little white space, as is
common in credit-card contracts. Use such layout and design
features as legible type sizes, bulleted or numbered Lists, and
footnotes to highlight information that is important to readers.
Do not mislead with partial or self-serving information. For
example, avoid the temptation to highlight a feature or service
that readers would find attractive but that is available only with
certain product models or at extra cost. (See also logic errors
and positive writing.) Readers could justifiably object that you
have given them a false impression to sell them a product or
service, especially if you also deemphasize the extra cost or
other special conditions.
In general, treat others—individuals, companies, groups—
with fairness and with respect. Avoid language that is biased,
426
racist, or sexist or that perpetuates stereotypes. See also biased
language.
Finally, be aware that both plagiarism and violations of
Copyright not only are unethical but also can have serious
professional and legal consequences for you in the classroom
and on the job.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing Ethically Ask yourself the following questions:
✓ Am I willing to take responsibility, publicly and privately, for what I have written? Make sure you can stand behind what you have written.
✓ Is the document or message honest and truthful? Scrutinize findings and conclusions carefully. Make sure that the data support them.
✓ Am I acting in my employer’s, my client’s, the public’s, or my own best long-term interest? Have an impartial and appropriate outsider review and comment on what you have written.
✓ Does the document or message violate anyone’s rights? If information is confidential and you have serious concerns, consider a review by the company’s legal staff or an attorney.
✓ Am I ethically consistent in my writing? Consistently apply the principles outlined here and those you have assimilated throughout your life.
✓ How will your reader interpret your message? If you were the intended reader, consider whether the message is acceptable and respectful.
427
If the answers to these questions do not come easily, consider asking a trusted colleague to review and comment on what you have written.
Information from Sims, B. R. (1993). Linking ethics and language in the technical communications classroom. Technical communication quarterly 2(3): 285–99.
1
428
euphemisms A euphemism is an inoffensive substitute for a word or phrase
that could be distasteful, offensive, or too blunt: passed away
for died; previously owned or preowned for used; lay off or
downsize for fire or terminate employees. Used judiciously,
euphemisms can help you avoid embarrassing or offending
someone.
ETHICS NOTE
Euphemisms can also hide the facts of a situation (incident or event for accident) or be a form of affectation if used carelessly. Avoid them especially in international correspondence and other forms of global communication where their meanings could be not only confusing but also misleading. See also ethics in writing.
429
everybody / everyone Both everybody and everyone are usually considered singular
and take singular verbs and pronouns.
► Everyone here leaves at 4:30 p.m. ► Everybody at the meeting presented his or her individual
assessment.
However, their meaning can be obviously plural.
► Everyone thought the plan should be rejected, and I really couldn’t blame them.
Although normally written as one word, they can be written as
two words if you wish to emphasize each individual in a group.
(“Every one of the team members contributed to this
discovery.”) See also agreement.
430
everyday / every day Everyday (one word) is an adjective that means
“commonplace,” “normal,” or “ordinary.” Every day (two
words) means “each day.”
► We now purchase everyday office supplies from MCL Products.
► I need to travel to the construction site every day this week.
431
exclamation marks The exclamation mark (!) indicates strong feeling, urgency,
elation, or surprise (“Hurry!” “Great!” “Wow!”). (See also
interjections.) However, it cannot make an argument more
convincing, lend force to a weak statement, or call attention to
an intended irony.
An exclamation mark can be used after a whole sentence or
an element of a sentence.
► This meeting—please note it well!—concerns our budget deficit.
When used with quotation marks, the exclamation mark goes
outside unless what is quoted is an exclamation.
► The paramedic shouted, “Don’t touch the victim!” The bystander then, according to a witness, “jumped like a kangaroo”!
In instructions, the exclamation mark is often used in cautions
and warnings (“Danger!” “Stop!”) or enclosed within a triangle
. See also emphasis.
432
executive summaries An executive summary consolidates the principal points of a
formal report or another long document. Executive summaries
differ from abstracts in that readers scan abstracts to decide
whether to read the work in full. An executive summary may be
the only section of a longer work read by many readers, so it
must accurately and concisely represent the original document.
It should restate the document’s purpose, scope, methods,
findings, conclusions, and recommendations, as well as
summarize how results were obtained or the reasons for the
recommendations. Executive summaries tend to be about 10
percent of the length and generally follow the same sequence of
the documents they summarize.
Write the executive summary so that it can be read
independently of the report or proposal it summarizes.
Executive summaries may occasionally include a figure, table,
or footnote—if that information is essential to the summary.
However, do not refer by number to figures, tables, or
references contained elsewhere in the document. See the
sample executive summary in Figure F–6 (pages 207–8).
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing Executive Summaries
✓ Write the executive summary after you have completed the original document.
433
✓ Avoid or define terminology that may not be familiar to your intended audience.
✓ Spell out all uncommon symbols and abbreviations. ✓ Make the summary concise, but do not omit transitional words
and phrases (however, moreover, therefore, for example, next). ✓ Include only information discussed in the original document. ✓ Place the executive summary at the beginning of the body of the
report, as described in formal reports.
434
expletives An expletive is a word that fills the position of another word,
phrase, or clause. It and there are common expletives.
► It is certain that he will be promoted.
In the example, the expletive it occupies the position of subject
in place of the real subject, that he will be promoted. Expletives
are sometimes necessary to avoid awkwardness, but they are
commonly overused, and most sentences can be better stated
without them.
In addition to its grammatical use, the word expletive means a
profane exclamation or oath.
435
explicit / implicit An explicit statement is one expressed directly, with precision
and clarity.
► He gave us explicit directions to the Wausau facility.
An implicit meaning is one that is not directly expressed.
► Although the CEO did not mention the lawsuit directly, the company’s commitment to ethical practices was implicit in her speech.
436
exposition Exposition, or expository writing, refers to writing intended
primarily to inform readers by presenting facts and ideas in
direct and concise language; it usually relies less on colorful or
figurative language than writing meant to be expressive or
persuasive. It is aimed at readers’ understanding rather than at
their imagination or emotions. For this reason, exposition is
widely used in reports, Memos, and other types of technical
and workplace writing. Expository writing aims to provide
accurate, complete information and to analyze it for readers. As
with all workplace writing, include only enough information to
meet your readers’ needs and your purpose. See also audience
and business writing style.
437
F
438
fact Expressions containing the word fact (“due to the fact that,”
“except for the fact that,” “as a matter of fact,” or “because of
the fact that”) are often wordy substitutes for more accurate
terms. See conciseness and logic errors.
Do not use the word fact to refer to matters of judgment or
opinion.
The word fact is, of course, valid when facts are what is meant.
► Our study uncovered numerous facts to support your conclusion.
439
FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) An FAQ is a List of questions, paired with their answers, that
readers will likely ask about products, services, or other
information presented on a Web site or in customer-oriented
documents. By presenting commonly sought information in one
place, FAQs save readers from searching through an entire Web
site or document to find what they need.
A well-planned FAQ list can help create a positive impression
with customers or clients because the writer acknowledges that
the reader’s time is valuable. An FAQ list also helps a company
spend less time responding to questions. However, an FAQ list
is not a substitute for solving problems with a product or
service.
ETHICS NOTE
If customers are experiencing numerous problems because of a product design or programming flaw, you need to work with your company’s product developers to correct the problem rather than attempting to avoid the issue by burying it within an FAQ.
Questions to Include Develop the list of questions and their answers by
brainstorming with colleagues who are regularly in contact with
440
customers. If customers frequently ask about company stock
information and request annual reports, for example, your
FAQ list could include the question “How do I obtain a copy of
your latest annual report?” This question can be followed with a
brief answer that includes the Web address from which the
annual report can be downloaded or the name, phone number,
and e-mail address of the person who distributes the annual
reports. See also writing for the Web.
Organization Organize the list so that readers can find the information they
need quickly and easily. List your questions in decreasing order
of importance for your readers so that they can obtain the most
important information first. If you have a number of questions
that are related to a specific topic, such as investor relations,
product returns, or completing forms, group them into
categories and identify each category with a heading, such as
“Investor Relations,” “Shipping,” and “Forms.” You may also
want to create a table of contents at the top of the FAQ page so
that readers can quickly find the topics relevant to their
interests.
Study other FAQ lists for products or services similar to
yours. Analyze them for their approach and organization: Can
you find answers quickly, or do you need to scroll through
many pages to find them? Are the questions plus answers
separated into logical categories or listed in random order? Is it
easy to differentiate a question from its answer? Do the answers
441
provide too little or too much information? Does the FAQ list
offer specialized search tools to help readers find information
for longer FAQs?
Placement The location of your FAQ list should enable readers to find
answers quickly. On Web sites, an FAQ page is usually linked
from the homepage. In small printed documents, such as
brochures, FAQs are usually highlighted and placed after the
body of the document.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Developing FAQs
✓ Focus on your reader. Write your questions and answers from a “you” viewpoint and with a positive, conversational tone.
✓ Separate long FAQ lists into groups. Group related questions under topic headings. For long online FAQ lists, consider listing only questions and include links to separate pages, each containing an individual question and answer.
✓ Distinguish questions from answers. Use boldface for questions and use white space to separate questions from answers. Be sparing in your use of multiple colors, italics, or other formatting styles that can make the list difficult to read.
✓ Keep questions and answers concise. If a question has a long answer, add a link to a separate Web page or refer to an appropriate page number in a printed document.
✓ Keep the list updated. Review and update FAQs at least monthly — or more frequently if your content changes often.
✓ Give readers the opportunity to respond. Provide an e-mail link for
442
existing and potential customers to submit questions they would like to see added to the FAQ list.
✓ Consider available tools for automating the process. Many content- management systems, for example, have built-in FAQ-writing software.
443
feasibility reports When organizations consider a new project — developing a new
product or service, purchasing equipment, or moving
operations — they first try to determine the project’s chances
for success. A feasibility report presents evidence about the
practicality of a proposed project based on specific criteria, as
in Figure F–1. It answers such questions as the following: Is new
construction or development necessary? Is sufficient staff
available? What are the costs? Is funding available? What are
the legal or regulatory ramifications? Based on the findings of
this analysis, the report offers logical conclusions and
recommends whether the project should be carried out. When
feasibility reports stress specific steps that should be taken as a
result of a study of a problem or an issue, they are often
referred to as recommendation reports. In the condensed
feasibility report shown in Figure F–1, a consultant conducts a
study to determine how to upgrade a company’s computer
system and Internet capability.
444
445
FIGURE F–1. Feasibility Report
Before beginning to write a feasibility report, analyze the
needs of the audience as well as the context and purpose of the
study. Then write a purpose statement, such as “The purpose of
this study is to determine the feasibility of expanding our
Pacific Rim operations,” to guide you or a collaborative team.
See also brainstorming and collaborative writing.
446
Report Sections Every feasibility report should contain an introduction, a body,
a conclusion, and a recommendation. See also proposals and
formal reports.
Introduction The introduction states the purpose of the report, describes the
circumstances that led to the report, and includes any pertinent
background information. It may also discuss the scope of the
report, any procedures or methods used in the analysis of
alternatives, and any limitations of the study.
Body The body of the report presents a detailed review of the
alternatives for achieving the goals of the project. Examine each
option according to specific criteria — such as cost and
financing, availability of staff, and other relevant requirements
— identifying the subsections with headings to guide readers.
Conclusion The conclusion interprets the available options and leads to one
option as the best, or most feasible.
Recommendation The recommendation section clearly presents the writer’s (or
team’s) opinion on which alternative best meets the criteria as
summarized in the conclusion.
447
few / a few In certain contexts, few carries more negative overtones than
does the phrase a few.
NEGATIVE The report offers few helpful ideas.
POSITIVE The report offers a few helpful ideas.
448
fewer / less Fewer refers to items that can be counted (count nouns).
(“Fewer employees retired than we expected.”) Less refers to
mass quantities or amounts (mass nouns). (“We had less rain
this year than forecasts predicted.”) See also English as a
second language.
449
figuratively / literally Literally means “actually” and is often confused with
figuratively, which means “metaphorically.” To say that
someone “literally turned green with envy” would mean that the
person actually changed color.
► In the winner’s circle the jockey was, figuratively speaking, ten feet tall.
► When he said, “Let’s bury our competitors,” he did not mean it literally.
Avoid the use of literally to reinforce the importance of
something.
450
figures of speech A figure of speech is an imaginative expression that often
compares two things that are basically not alike but have at
least one thing in common. For example, if a device is cone
shaped and has an opening at the narrow end, you might say
that it looks like a volcano.
Figures of speech can clarify the unfamiliar by relating a new
concept to one with which readers are familiar. In that respect,
they help establish understanding between the specialist and
the nonspecialist. (See audience.) Figures of speech can help
translate the abstract into the concrete; in the process of doing
so, they can also make writing more colorful and graphic. (See
also abstract / concrete words.) A figure of speech must make
sense, however, to achieve the desired effect.
ILLOGICAL Without the fuel of tax incentives, our economic engine would operate less efficiently. [An engine would not operate at all without fuel.]
Figures of speech must also be consistent to be effective.
A figure of speech should not overshadow the point the writer is
trying to make. It is better to use no figure of speech at all than
to use a trite one. A surprise that comes “like a bolt out of the
blue” seems stale and not much of a surprise. See also clichés
and idioms.
451
Types of Figures of Speech Analogies are comparisons that show the ways in which two
objects or concepts are similar and are often used to make one
of them easier to understand. The following example explains a
computer search technique by comparing it to the use of
keywords in a dictionary.
► Indexed sequential processing on a computer works the same way as searching for a word in a dictionary. You might scan the keywords located at the top of each dictionary page that identify the first and last words on each page until you find the keywords that encompass the word you seek. Indexed sequential processing works the same way with computer files.
Hyperboles are gross exaggerations used to achieve an effect or
emphasis.
► We were dead after working all night on the grant proposal.
Litotes are understatements, for emphasis or effect, achieved
by denying the opposite of the point you are making.
► Over 1,600 pages is no small size for a book.
Metaphors are figures of speech that point out similarities
between two things by treating them as though they were the
same thing.
452
► The astronaut’s umbilical cord carries life-sustaining oxygen for spacewalking.
Metonyms are figures of speech that use one aspect of a thing to
represent it, such as the blue for the sky and wheels for a car.
► The economist predicted a decrease in hard-hat jobs.
Personification is a figure of speech that attributes human
characteristics to nonhuman things or abstract ideas. We might
refer, for example, to the birth of a planet or apply emotions to
machines.
► She said that she was frustrated with the stubborn security system.
Similes are direct comparisons of two essentially unlike things,
linking them with the word like or as.
► Reconstructing the plane’s fuselage following the accident was like piecing together a jigsaw puzzle.
Avoid figures of speech in global communication and
international correspondence because people in other cultures
may translate figures of speech literally and be confused by
their meanings.
453
fine When used in expressions such as “I feel fine” or “a fine day,”
fine is colloquial and, like the word nice, is often too vague for
business writing. Use the word fine to mean “refined,”
“delicate,” or “pure.”
► A fine film of oil covered the surface of the water. ► Fine crystal is made in Austria. ► The court made a fine distinction between the two statutes.
454
first / firstly First and firstly are both adverbs. Avoid firstly in favor of first,
which sounds less stiff than firstly. See also numbers.
455
flowcharts A flowchart is a diagram using symbols, words, or pictures to
show the stages of a process in sequence from beginning to end.
A flowchart provides an overview of a process and allows the
reader to identify its essential steps quickly and easily.
Flowcharts can take several forms. The steps might be
represented by labeled blocks, as shown in Figure F–2; pictorial
symbols, as shown in Figure F–3; or ISO (International
Organization for Standardization) symbols, as shown in Figure
F– 4. Useful tools for constructing flowcharts include Microsoft
PowerPoint, Visio, SmartDraw, and Lucidchart.
FIGURE F–2. Flowchart Using Labeled Blocks
456
457
FIGURE F–3. Flowchart Using Pictorial Symbols
SOURCE: http://portlandrealestateblog.com/short-sales/.
FIGURE F–4. Common ISO Flowchart Symbols (with Annotations)
For advice on integrating flowcharts into your text, see
visuals. See also global graphics and infographics.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Creating Flowcharts
458
✓ Label each step in the process or identify each step with labeled blocks, pictorial representations, or standardized symbols.
✓ Follow the standard flow directions: left to right and top to bottom. Indicate any nonstandard flow directions with arrows.
✓ Include a key (or callouts) to define symbols your audience may not understand.
✓ Use standardized symbols for flowcharts that document computer programs and other information-processing procedures, as detailed in Information Processing — Documentation Symbols and Conventions for Data, Program and System Flowcharts, Program Network Charts, and System Resources Charts, ISO 5807: 1985. (Publication available at www.iso.org.)
459
footnotes (see documenting sources)
460
forceful / forcible Although forceful and forcible are both adjectives meaning
“characterized by or full of force,” forceful is usually limited to
persuasive ability and forcible to physical force.
► John made a forceful presentation at the committee meeting.
► Firefighters must often make forcible entries into buildings.
461
foreign words in English The English language has a long history of borrowing words
from other languages. Most borrowing occurred so long ago
that we seldom recognize the borrowed terms (also called loan
words) as being of foreign origin (kindergarten from German,
animal from Latin, church from Greek).
Words not fully assimilated into the English language are set
in italics and use appropriate diacritical marks (sine qua non, in
camera, piñata, coup de grâce). Even when they have been fully
assimilated, some retain their diacritical marks for clarity
(résumé versus resume), while others are either optional (café
or cafe) or dropped (facade, apropos). As foreign words are
absorbed into English, their plural forms give way to English
plurals (agenda becomes agendas and formulae becomes
formulas). Most dictionaries offer guidance, although you
should also be guided by the context.
Foreign expressions should be used only if they serve a real
need. (See also e.g. / i.e. and etc.) The overuse of foreign words
in an attempt to impress your reader is affectation. Effective
communication can be accomplished only if your readers
understand what you write, so choose foreign expressions only
when they make an idea clearer or when there is no English
substitute (schadenfreude for “pleasure taken from someone
else’s misfortune”).
462
foreword / forward Although the pronunciation is the same, the spellings and
meanings of these two words are quite different. The word
foreword is a noun meaning “introductory statement at the
beginning of a book or other work.”
► The director wrote a foreword for the report.
The word forward is an adjective or adverb meaning “at or
toward the front.”
► Sliding the throttle to the forward position [adjective] will cause the boat to move forward. [adverb]
463
form letters A form letter or message is a type of correspondence (including
letters and e-mail) in which the identical (or near identical)
message is sent to more than one person; only the name and
address of the recipient differ. The recipients’ names,
addresses, and other information may be stored and merged
with the text of the message.
When to Use Form Letters Form letters and e-mails are ideal for simultaneously reaching
hundreds or thousands of customers, clients, or employees with
announcements and other information. In fact, sales letters are
usually mass-produced. Form letters and e-mails are also useful
for situations that occur regularly, such as responses to
inquiries, standard orders, acknowledgments of orders, and
early-stage collection letters. (See also acknowledgments and
inquiries and responses.) Of course, if a particular situation
calls for an individual response (such as an adjustment
message in response to a complaint), a form letter is not the
best choice. Most people resent obviously impersonal treatment
when they believe they deserve individual attention.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
For routine circumstances, few readers object to an obvious form letter or message, especially if the information is clear and the tone is positive. For example, a computer company may send purchasers a
464
brief form letter or e-mail to let them know their orders have been shipped and when to expect delivery.
Writing Form Letters By using the principles of correspondence and the “you”
viewpoint, you can produce a form letter or e-mail tailored to
your potential audience and to your purpose. Even though your
readers know they are reading a form letter or message, you
should personalize the message to fit the recipients’ situation as
much as possible.
PERSONAL If you have a question about your MAX-PC and cannot find the answer in the User’s Guide, visit our Web site or get 24-hour personal assistance at our customer help number. [This sentence seems aimed more at the individual reader.]
Be careful about using first names to personalize messages —
the name that appears in a database might be different from the
name familiar to the recipient’s friends (William/Bill or
Kimberly/Kim). Further, many cultures avoid first names when
addressing all but those closest to them. (See also international
correspondence.)
Form letters and e-mails that do not need to be personalized
often use a “headline lead” to replace the standard salutation, as
shown in Figure F–5. By “talking” directly to the reader, you can
make form letters and messages less stiff and impersonal. Some
form letters can be personalized by adding a typed or
handwritten postscript.
465
FIGURE F–5. Headline Lead
Repurposing Form Letters Paragraphs from previously used form letters and messages can
be combined with newly written paragraphs that are tailored to
fit a specific context. Repurposed paragraphs are ideal for use
in recurring circumstances that require more personal and
varied responses than form letters or e-mails provide. (See
repurposing.) They are useful, for example, when you wish
either to adapt parts of the correspondence for particular
readers or to construct sets of messages from standardized
parts, as in application cover letters, reference letters, refusal
letters, and some memos. Be sure to provide adequate
transition and proofread carefully.
466
formal reports Formal reports are usually written accounts of major projects
that require substantial research, and they often involve more
than one writer. See also collaborative writing.
Most formal reports are divided into three primary parts —
front matter, body, and back matter — each of which contains a
number of elements. The number and arrangement of the
elements vary depending on the subject, the length of the
report, and the kinds of material covered. Many organizations
have a preferred style for formal reports and furnish guidelines
for report writers. If you are not required to follow a specific
style, use the format recommended in this entry. The following
list includes most of the elements a formal report might
contain, in the order they typically appear. (The items shown
with page numbers appear in the sample formal report on
pages 203–19.) Often, a cover message or memo precedes the
front matter and identifies the report by title, the person or
persons to whom it is sent, the reason it was written, the scope,
and any information that the audience considers important, as
shown on page 203.
FRONT MATTER
Title Page (204)
Abstract (205)
467
Table of Contents (206)
List of Figures
List of Tables
Foreword
Preface
List of Abbreviations and Symbols
BODY
Executive Summary (207)
Introduction (209)
Text (including headings) (212)
Conclusions (217)
Recommendations (217)
Explanatory Notes
References (or Works Cited) (219)
BACK MATTER
Appendixes
468
Bibliography
Glossary
Index
Front Matter The front matter serves several functions: It explains the
writer’s purpose, describes the scope and type of information
in the report, and lists where specific information is covered in
the report. Not all formal reports include every element of front
matter described here. A title page and table of contents are
usually mandatory. But the scope of the report and its context,
as well as the intended audience, determine whether the other
elements are included.
Title Page Although the formats of title pages may vary, they often include
the following:
The full title of the report. The title describes the topic, scope, and purpose of the report, as discussed in titles. The name of the writer(s), principal investigator(s), or compiler(s). Sometimes contributors identify themselves by their job title or role on the project (Olivia Jones, Principal Investigator). The date(s) of the report. For one-time reports, use the date the report is distributed. For reports issued periodically (monthly, quarterly, or yearly), the subtitle shows the
469
period that the report covers, and the distribution date is shown elsewhere on the title page, as shown in Figure F–6 on page 203. The name of the organization for which the writer(s) works. The name of the organization to which the report is being submitted. Include this information if the report is written for a customer or client.
Front-matter pages are numbered with roman numerals. The
title page should not be numbered, as in the example on page
204, but it is considered page i for subsequent pagination. The
back of the title page, which is left blank and unnumbered, is
considered page ii, so the abstract falls on page iii. The body of
the report begins with arabic number 1, and a new chapter or
large section typically begins on a new right-hand (odd-
numbered) page. Reports with printing on only one side of each
sheet can be numbered consecutively regardless of where new
sections begin. Center page numbers at the bottom of each page
throughout the report.
Abstract An abstract, which normally follows the title page, highlights
the major points of the report, as shown on page 205, enabling
readers to decide whether to read the report.
Table of Contents A table of contents lists all the major sections or headings of
the report in their order of appearance, as shown on page 206,
along with their page numbers. If the report is distributed
470
electronically, link headings in the table of contents (as well as
figure numbers and titles in a list of figures, and table numbers
and titles in a list of tables) to the relevant sections of the report.
List of Figures All visuals contained in the report — drawings, photographs,
maps, charts, and graphs — are labeled as figures. When a
report contains more than five figures, list them, along with
their page numbers, in a separate section, beginning on a new
page immediately following the table of contents. Number
figures consecutively with arabic numbers.
List of Tables When a report contains more than five tables, list them, along
with their titles and page numbers, in a separate section
immediately following the list of figures (if there is one).
Number tables consecutively with arabic numbers.
Foreword A foreword is an optional introductory statement about a formal
report or publication that is written by someone other than the
author(s). The foreword author is usually an authority in the
field or an executive of the organization sponsoring the report.
The foreword author’s name and affiliation appear at the end of
the foreword, along with the date it was written. The foreword
provides background information about the publication’s
significance, and places it in the context of other works in the
field. The foreword precedes the preface when a work has both.
471
Preface The preface, another type of optional introductory statement, is
written by the author(s) of the formal report. It may announce
the work’s purpose, scope, and context (including any special
circumstances leading to the work). A preface may also specify
the audience for a work, those who helped in its preparation,
and permissions obtained for the use of copyrighted works. See
also copyrights, patents, and trademarks.
List of Abbreviations and Symbols When a report uses numerous abbreviations and symbols that
readers may not be able to interpret, the front matter may
include a section listing symbols and abbreviations with their
meanings.
Body The body is the section of the report that provides context for
the report, describes in detail the methods and procedures used
to generate the report, demonstrates how results were obtained,
describes the results, draws conclusions, and, if appropriate,
makes recommendations.
Executive Summary The body of the report begins with the executive summary,
which provides a more complete overview of the report than
the abstract does. See an example on pages 207–208, and review
the abstract entry cross-referenced earlier.
472
Introduction The introduction gives readers any general information — such
as the report’s purpose, scope, and context — necessary to
understand the detailed information in the report (see pages
209–211).
Text The text of the body presents, as appropriate, the details of how
the topic was investigated, how a problem was solved, what
alternatives were explored, and how the best choice among
them was selected. This information is enhanced by the use of
visuals, tables, headings, and references that both clarify the
text and persuade the reader. See also persuasion.
Conclusions The conclusions section pulls together the results of the
research and interprets the findings of the report, as shown on
page 217.
Recommendations Recommendations, which are sometimes combined with
conclusions, state what course of action should be taken based
on the earlier arguments and conclusions of the study, as
shown on pages 217–218.
Explanatory Notes Occasionally, reports contain notes that amplify terms or points
that might interrupt the text of the report. Such notes may be
473
included as footnotes, or they may appear in a “Notes” section
at the end of the report.
References (or Works Cited) A list of references or works cited appears in a separate section
if the report refers to or quotes directly from research sources.
If your employer has a preferred reference style, follow it;
otherwise, use one of the guidelines provided in the entry
documenting sources. For a relatively short report, place a
reference or works-cited section at the end of the body of the
report, as shown on page 219. For a report with a number of
sections or chapters, place a reference or works-cited section at
the end of each major section or chapter. In either case, begin
the reference or works-cited section on a new page. If a
particular reference appears in more than one section or
chapter, repeat it in full in each appropriate reference section.
ETHICS NOTE
Always identify the sources of any facts, ideas, quotations, and paraphrases you include in a report. Even if unintentional, plagiarism is unethical and may result in formal academic misconduct charges in a college course. On the job, it can result in legal action or even dismissal. Repurposed in-house material (“boilerplate”) may not require a citation — see repurposing.
Back Matter The back matter of a formal report contains supplementary
474
material, such as where to find additional information about the
topic (bibliography), and expands on certain subjects
(appendixes). Other back-matter elements define special terms
(glossary) and provide information on how to easily locate
information in the report (index). For very large formal reports,
back-matter sections may be individually numbered or labeled
(Appendix A, Appendix B).
Appendixes An appendix clarifies or supplements the report with
information that is too detailed or lengthy for the primary
audience but is relevant to secondary audiences.
Bibliography A bibliography lists alphabetically all the sources that were
consulted to prepare the report — not just those cited in the
report — and suggests additional resources that readers might
want to consult.
Glossary A glossary is an alphabetical list of specialized terms used in
the report and their definitions.
Index An index is an alphabetical list of all the major topics and
subtopics discussed in the report. It cites the page numbers
where discussion of each topic can be found, allowing readers
to find information on topics quickly and easily. The index is
475
always the final section of a report. Most word-processing
programs can save you time by creating an index automatically
based on keywords that you mark while composing the report.
See also indexing.
Sample Formal Report Figure F–6 shows the typical sections of a formal report. Keep in
mind that the number and arrangement of the elements vary
depending on the context, especially the requirements of an
organization or a client.
476
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Cover Memo)
477
478
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Title Page)
479
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Abstract)
480
481
482
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Table of Contents)
483
484
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Executive Summary)
485
486
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Executive Summary)
487
488
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Introduction)
489
490
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Introduction)
491
492
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Introduction)
493
494
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)
495
496
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)
497
498
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)
499
500
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)
501
502
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)
503
504
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Conclusions and Recommendations)
505
506
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Conclusions and Recommendations)
507
508
FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Works Cited)
509
format Format refers to both the organization of information in a
document and the physical arrangement of information on the
page.
In one sense, format refers to the conventions that govern
the scope and placement of information in such job-related
writing as formal reports, proposals, and various types of
correspondence. For example, in formal reports, the table of
contents precedes the preface but follows the title page and the
abstract. Likewise, although variations exist, parts of letters —
such as inside address, salutation, and complimentary closing
— are arranged in standard patterns. See also e-mail and
memos.
Format also refers to the general physical appearance of a
finished document. You can use styles and templates in word-
processing programs to automate the design of headings,
paragraphs, lists, and visuals. (Using styles and templates also
helps make word-processing documents accessible to screen
readers.) See also layout and design and writing for the Web.
510
former / latter Former refers to the first and latter refers to the last of two
items in a sentence or paragraph. Because these terms make
the reader look to previous material to identify the reference,
they complicate reading and are best avoided.
511
forms Forms are used widely to gather data and information from
respondents in a standardized design. Figure F–7 shows an
example of a typical form used for a medical claim. See also
questionnaires.
512
FIGURE F–7. Form (for a Medical Claim)
513
An effective form makes it easy for one person to supply
information and for another person to retrieve, record, and
interpret that information. Ideally, a form should be self-
explanatory to someone seeing it for the first time. When
preparing a form, determine the kind of information you are
seeking, and arrange the requests for information or questions
in a logical order. To ensure the usability of the form, test it
with people from your target audience or others before
distributing the final version.
ETHICS NOTE
Information gathered on forms can be sensitive, personal, or subject to confidentiality laws, so make sure to request information in a way that is not invasive or illegal. Unless otherwise indicated on the form, the person filling out the form should have the expectation of confidentiality. If you are concerned about issues of confidentiality or legality, check your organization’s policy; in a classroom seek your instructor’s advice.
Choosing Paper or Digital You can develop forms as printed documents or interactive
digital versions. Printed forms can help individuals in some
manufacturing and service industries. Printed forms can also be
useful at conferences or other in-person events. Digital forms,
however, are especially well suited for conference or seminar
registrations, job applications, and various order forms. Digital
forms not only standardize respondents’ interfaces but also link
514
to databases that tabulate and interpret data. A digital form can
be encrypted for security and programmed to ensure that all
necessary fields are completed correctly before the form can be
successfully submitted. See also writing for the Web.
Designing a Form At the top of the form, clearly indicate preliminary information,
such as the name of your organization, the title of your form,
and any reference number. Place instructions at the beginning
of the form or at the beginning of each section of the form and
use headings or other design elements, such as the boldface
type and shaded text boxes in Figure F–7. Place instructions for
submitting printed forms or distributing the copies of multiple-
copy forms at the bottom of each page. For printed forms, allow
space for elements such as signatures and dates.
You can design digital forms specific to your needs with
form-design software, word-processing software, or markup
languages (such as HTML or PHP/MySQL). At the end of digital
forms, include a “submit” button to record the data, to open a
new page, or to send a confirming e-mail reporting successful
completion. See also layout and design.
Entry Lines and Fields A print form can be designed so that the person filling it out
provides information on a writing line, in a writing block, or in
square boxes. A writing line is simply a rule with a caption, such
as the line for “Employee Name” shown in Figure F–7. A writing
515
block is essentially the same as a writing line, except that each
entry is enclosed in a ruled block, making it unlikely for the
respondent to associate a caption with the wrong line.
When it is possible to anticipate all likely responses, you can
make the form easy to fill out by writing the question on the
form, supplying a labeled box for each anticipated answer, and
asking the respondent to check the appropriate boxes. Such a
design also makes it easy to tabulate the data.
For digital forms, these functions are accomplished with
form fields such as text boxes, option (or radio) buttons, drop-
down menus, lists, and check boxes, which can be aligned using
table cells or grouping. Each form field should have a label
prompting users to type information or to select from a list of
options. Labels for text boxes, drop-down menus, and lists
should be positioned to the left; labels for radio buttons and
check boxes should be positioned to the right. Be sure also to
indicate required form fields.
Sequencing Entries The main portion of the form includes the entries that are
required to obtain the necessary data. Arrange entries in an
order that will be the most logical to the person filling out the
form.
Open with questions that are easy for respondents to complete or answer. Sequence entries to fit the subject matter. A form
516
requesting travel reimbursement would logically be organized chronologically from the beginning to the end of the appropriate period. If the response to one item is based on the response to another item, be sure the items appear in the correct order. Group requests for related information together whenever possible.
Writing Questions Forms should ask questions in ways that are best suited to the
types of data you hope to collect. The two main types are open-
ended questions and closed-ended questions.
Open-ended questions allow respondents to answer questions in their own words. Such questions are most appropriate if you wish to elicit responses you may not have anticipated (as in a complaint form) or if there are too many possible answers to use a multiple-choice format. However, the responses to open-ended questions can be difficult to tabulate and analyze. Closed-ended questions provide a list of options from which the respondent can select, limiting the range of possible responses. When you want to make sure you receive a standardized, easy-to-tabulate response, use any of the types of closed-ended questions that follow:
Multiple choice: Choose one (or sometimes more than one) response from a preset list of options. Ranked choice: Rank items according to preference, such as selecting vacation days or choosing job
517
assignments. Forced choice: Choose between two preset options, such as yes/no or male/female. Likert choice: Choose among a range of options on a numerically defined scale, such as 1 = very unsatisfied, 3 = neither satisfied nor unsatisfied, or 5 = very satisfied.
Be sure your questions are both simple and specific, and
provide enough space for an adequate response.
► Would your department order another X2L Copier? Yes ☐ No ☐
Questions are often worded as captions. Keep captions brief and
to the point; avoid wordy repetition by combining related
information under an explanatory heading.
WORDY What make of car (or vehicle) do you drive? ___________
What year was it manufactured? __________________
What model is it? _______________________________
What is the body style? _________________________
CONCISE Vehicle Information
Make ___________ Year ___________
Model _______________ Body Style _______________
Make captions (Make, Model, Year, Body Style) as specific as
possible. If a requested date is other than the date on which the
form is being filled out, the caption should read, for example,
“Effective date” or “Date issued,” rather than simply “Date.” As
518
in all writing, put yourself in your reader’s place and imagine
what sort of requests would be clear.
For detailed and up-to-date information on designing paper
and digital forms, see
www.stcsig.org/usability/topics/forms.html.
519
forums (see blogs and forums)
520
fragments (see sentence fragments)
521
functional shift Many words shift easily from one part of speech to another,
depending on how they are used. When they do, the process is
called a functional shift, or a shift in function.
► It takes ten minutes to walk from the sales office to the accounting department. However, the long walk reduces efficiency. [Walk shifts from verb to noun.]
► I talk to Jim in the Chicago office on the phone every day. He was concerned about the office phone expenses. He will phone the home office from London. [Phone shifts from noun to adjective to verb.]
► After we discuss the project, we will begin work. After lengthy discussions, we began work. The partners worked well together forever after. [After shifts from conjunction to preposition to adverb.]
Jargon is often the result of functional shifts. In hospitals, for
example, an attending physician is often referred to simply as
the “attending” (a shift from an adjective to a noun). Likewise,
in nuclear plant construction, a reactor containment building is
called a “containment” (a shift from an adjective to a noun). Do
not shift the function of a word indiscriminately merely to
shorten a phrase or an expression. See also affectation,
audience, and conciseness.
522
G
523
garbled sentences A garbled sentence is one that is so tangled with structural and
grammatical problems that it cannot be repaired. Garbled
sentences often result from an attempt to squeeze too many
ideas into one sentence.
► My job objectives are accomplished by my having a diversified background which enables me to operate effectively and efficiently, consisting of a degree in computer science, along with twelve years of experience, including three years in Staff Engineering-Packaging sets a foundation for a strong background in areas of analyzing problems and assessing economical and reasonable solutions.
Do not try to patch such a sentence; rather, analyze the ideas it
contains, list them in a logical sequence, and then construct one
or more entirely new sentences. The preceding example
contains the following five ideas:
My job requires that I analyze problems to find economical and workable solutions. My diversified background helps me accomplish my job. I have a computer science degree. I have twelve years of job experience. Three of these years have been in Staff Engineering- Packaging.
Using those five ideas — together with parallel structure,
524
sentence variety, subordination, and transition — the writer
might have described the job as follows:
► My job requires that I analyze problems to find economical and workable solutions. Both my education and experience help me achieve this goal. Specifically, I have a computer- science degree and twelve years of job experience, three of which have been in the Staff Engineering-Packaging Department.
See also clarity, mixed constructions, and sentence
construction.
525
gender In English grammar, gender refers to the classification of
nouns and pronouns as masculine, feminine, and neuter. The
gender of most words can be identified only by the choice of the
appropriate pronoun (he, she, it). Only these pronouns and a
select few nouns (man/woman, buck/doe) or noun forms
(heir/heiress) reflect gender. Many such nouns have been
replaced by single terms that apply to both sexes. See also
agreement and he / she.
Writers must make sure that nouns and pronouns within a
grammatical construction agree in gender. A pronoun, for
example, must agree with its noun antecedent in gender. We
refer to a woman as she or her, not as it; to a man as he or him,
not as it; to a building as it, not as he or she.
Nonnative speakers of English may be confused if their
native language assigns gender because the English language
has so few gender distinctions. Be sure to follow the guidelines
for nonsexist writing under biased language.
526
general and specific methods of development General and specific methods of development organize
information either from general points to specific details
(Figure G–1) or from specific details to a general conclusion
(Figure G–2). As with all methods of development, most writers
blend and use combinations of methods.
FIGURE G–1. General-to-Specific Method of Development
527
General to Specific The general-to-specific method of development is especially
useful for teaching readers about something with which they
are not familiar because you can begin with generally known
information and progress to new and increasingly specific
details. This method can also be used to support a general
statement with facts or examples that validate the statement.
For example, if you begin your writing with the general
statement “Companies that diversify are more successful than
those that do not,” you could follow that statement with
examples and statistics that prove to the reader that companies
that diversify are, in fact, more successful than companies that
do not.
A memo or short report organized entirely in a general-to-
specific sequence discusses only one point. All other
information in the document supports the general statement, as
illustrated in Figure G–1 (on page 228) from a memo about
locating additional computer-chip suppliers.
Specific to General Specific-to-general development is especially useful when you
wish to persuade skeptical readers of a general principle with
an accumulation of specific details and evidence that reach a
logical conclusion. It carefully builds its case, often with
examples and analogies in addition to facts or statistics, and it
does not actually make its point until the end. (See also order-
528
of-importance method of development.) Figure G–2 is an
example of the specific-to-general method of development.
FIGURE G–2. Specific-to-General Method of Development
529
global communication The continual expansion of the global marketplace and the
growing need for many businesses to participate globally means
that the ability to communicate with international audiences
from varied backgrounds is essential. See audience.
Many entries in this book, such as meetings and résumés,
are based on dominant cultural patterns in the United States.
The treatment of such topics might be very different in other
cultures, where leadership styles, persuasive strategies, and
even legal constraints differ.
As illustrated in the entry for international correspondence,
organizational patterns, forms of courtesy, and ideas about
efficiency can vary significantly from culture to culture. What
might be seen as direct and efficient in the United States could
be considered blunt and even impolite in other cultures. The
explanations for these differing ways of viewing
communication are complex. Researchers often measure
cultural differences through such concepts as the importance of
honor or saving face, perceptions of time, and preferences for
avoiding uncertainty. Because cultures evolve and global
communication affects cultural patterns, you must be able to
adapt to cultural variations. Figure G–3 (on page 230) shows an
ineffective global business communication, whereas Figure G–4
(on page 231) demonstrates an effective global business
communication. The checklist that follows offers useful
530
approaches that can help you adapt. See also global graphics.
531
532
FIGURE G–3. Ineffective Global Business Communication
533
FIGURE G–4. Effective Global Business Communication
534
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Communicating Globally
✓ Discuss the differing cultures within your company or region to reinforce the idea that people can interpret verbal and nonverbal communications differently.
✓ Invite global and intercultural communication experts to speak at your workplace. Companies in your area may have employees who could be resources for cultural discussions.
✓ Understand that the key to effective communication with global audiences is recognizing that cultural differences, despite the challenges they may present, offer opportunities for growth for both you and your organization.
✓ Consult with someone from your intended audience’s culture. Many phrases, gestures, and visual elements are so subtle that only someone from that culture can explain the effect they may have on others from that culture. See also global graphics.
✓ Intercultural Press is a source for “intercultural, multicultural and cross-cultural studies and informative country guides to help you do business and form strong relationships in foreign countries.” See www.hodder.co.uk/Nicholas%20Brealey/Nicholas%20Brealey.page. Geert Hofstede, a leading researcher in national and organizational culture, also offers cultural comparison tools and other resources on his Web site. See geert-hofstede.com/.
535
global graphics In a global business and technology environment, graphs and
other visuals require the same careful attention given to other
aspects of global communication. The complex cultural
connotations of visuals challenge writers to think beyond their
own experience when they are aiming for audiences outside
their own culture.
Symbols, images, and even colors are not free from cultural
associations — they depend on context, and context is culturally
determined. For instance, in North America, a red cross is
commonly used as a symbol for first aid or a hospital. In
Muslim countries, however, a cross (red or otherwise)
represents Christianity, whereas a crescent (usually green)
signifies first aid or a hospital. A manual for use in Honduras
could indicate “caution” by using a picture of a person touching
a finger below the eye. In France, however, that gesture means
“You can’t fool me.”
Figure G–5 shows two different graphics depicting weight
lifters. The drawing on the left may be appropriate for U.S.
audiences and others. However, that graphic would be highly
inappropriate in many cultures, where the image of a partially
clothed man and woman in close proximity would be contrary
to deeply held cultural beliefs and even laws about the public
depiction of men and women. The drawing at the right in
Figure G–5, however, depicts a weight lifter with a neutral icon
536
that avoids the connotations associated with more realistic
images of people.
FIGURE G–5. Graphics for U.S. (left) and Global (right) Audiences
These examples suggest why the International Organization
for Standardization (ISO) established agreed-upon symbols,
such as those shown in Figure G–6, for public signs,
guidebooks, and manuals.1
537
FIGURE G–6. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Symbols
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Using Appropriate Global Graphics
✓ Consult with an expert or test your use of graphics with individuals from your intended audience’s country who understand the effect that visuals may have on that audience. See also presentations.
✓ Organize visual information for the intended audience. Some culture groups read visuals from left to right in clockwise rotation; others read visuals from right to left in counterclockwise rotation.
✓ Be sure that your graphics have no unintended political or religious implications.
✓ Carefully consider how you depict people in visuals — body exposure, positions, and clothing (see Figure G–5).
✓ Use outlines or neutral abstractions to represent human beings. Consider stick figures, as in Figure G–6.
✓ Choose neutral colors (or those you know are appropriate) or gray scale, which carries no connotation, for your graphics. In some cultures, red symbolizes good fortune or joy; in others, red indicates danger.
✓ Check your use of punctuation marks, which are as language
538
specific as symbols. For example, in North America, the question mark generally represents the need for information or help. In many countries, that symbol has no meaning at all.
✓ Create simple visuals with universal shapes, as illustrated in Figure G–6.
✓ Explain the meaning of icons or symbols that cannot be changed, such as a company logo.
Learn more through the useful illustrations in “The International Language of ISO Graphical Symbols” at www.iso.org/publication/PUB100243.html.
1
539
glossaries A glossary is an alphabetical list of definitions of specialized
terms used in a formal report, a manual, or another long
document. You may want to include a glossary if some readers
in your audience are not familiar with specialized or technical
terms you use.
Keep glossary entries concise, and be sure they are written in
language that all the readers of your document can understand.
► Amortize: To write off an expenditure by prorating it over a specific period of time.
Arrange the terms alphabetically, with each entry beginning on
a new line. The definitions then follow the terms, dictionary
style. In a formal report, the glossary begins on a new page and
appears after the appendix(es) and bibliography.
Including a glossary does not relieve you of the responsibility
of defining terms that your reader will not know when those
terms are first mentioned in the text.
540
gobbledygook Gobbledygook is writing that suffers from an overdose of traits
guaranteed to make it stuffy, pretentious, and wordy. Such
traits include the overuse of big and mostly abstract words,
affectation (especially long variants), buzzwords, clichés,
euphemisms, inappropriate jargon, stacked modifiers, and
vague words. (See also abstract / concrete words.)
Gobbledygook is writing that attempts to sound official
(officialese), legal (legalese), or scientific. Consider the
following statement from an auto-repair release form.
LEGALESE I hereby authorize the above repair work to be done along with the necessary material and hereby grant you and/or your employees permission to operate the car or truck herein described on streets, highways, or elsewhere for the purpose of testing and/or inspection. An express mechanic’s lien is hereby acknowledged on above car or truck to secure the amount of repairs thereto.
DIRECT You have my permission to do the repair work listed on this work order and to use the necessary material. You may drive my vehicle to test its performance. I understand that you will keep my vehicle until I have paid for all repairs.
See also clarity, conciseness, plain language, and word
choice.
541
good / well Good is an adjective, and well is an adverb.
ADJECTIVE Janet presented a good plan.
ADVERB She presented the plan well.
Well can also be used as an adjective to describe health (a well
child, wellness programs). See also bad / badly.
542
grammar Grammar is the systematic description of the way words work
together to form a coherent language. In that sense, it is an
explanation of the structure of a language. However, grammar
is popularly taken to mean the set of rules that governs how a
language ought to be spoken and written. In that sense, it refers
to the usage conventions of a language.
Those two meanings of grammar are easily confused. To
clarify the distinction, consider the expression ain’t. Unless
used intentionally to add colloquial flavor, ain’t is unacceptable
because its use is considered nonstandard. Yet taken strictly as
a part of speech, the term functions perfectly well as a verb.
Whether it appears in a declarative sentence (“I ain’t going”) or
an interrogative sentence (“Ain’t I going?”), it conforms to the
normal pattern for all verbs in the English language. Although
readers may not approve of its use, they cannot argue that it is
ungrammatical in such sentences.
To achieve clarity, you need to know grammar both as a
description of the way words work together and as the
conventions of usage. Knowing the conventions of usage helps
you select the appropriate over the inappropriate word or
expression. (See also word choice.) A knowledge of grammar
helps you diagnose and correct problems arising from how
words and phrases function in relation to one another.
Understanding dangling modifiers, for example, helps you
543
avoid or correct a construction that obscures the intended
meaning. For a complete list of grammar entries, see the
Contents by Topic on the inside front cover.
544
grant proposals Grant proposals are written to nonprofit and government
organizations to request the approval of and funding for
projects that solve a problem or fulfill a need. A scientist, for
example, may write a grant proposal to the National Institutes
of Health requesting a specific sum of money to study a new
cancer therapy, or the executive director of Habitat for
Humanity may write a grant proposal to a local government
requesting funding to purchase supplies to construct new
housing for disadvantaged families in the area.
The advice in the entry proposals for assessing audience and
purpose, writing persuasively, maintaining ethics in writing,
and managing a project within a tight deadline applies as well to
writing grant proposals. This entry focuses on the particular
needs of grant-proposal writers.
Granting organizations typically post opportunities, along
with detailed application guidelines, on their Web sites and
specify their requirements for the format and content of
proposals. Most federal, state, and large nonprofit government
grants are now submitted electronically, and various sections
may have imposed word, character, or content limits that are
enforced electronically. When preparing a proposal document,
always organize its elements in the exact order described or
required in the request for proposals (RFP) or in the grant
maker’s guidelines. Although application guidelines and
545
processes may differ from one organization to another, grant
proposals generally require the following sections at a
minimum:
Cover message Title page Application form Introduction (summary) Literature review (if needed) Project narrative
Project description Project outcomes Budget narrative Task schedule
Organization description Conclusion Attachments
Cover Message Usually one page long, the cover message (or letter) should
identify who you are and your professional affiliation. It should
specify the grant that you are applying for, summarize the
proposed project, and include the amount of funding you are
requesting.
Title Page On a single page, show the title of the project, the names of
project staff and their affiliations, the date submitted, and the
546
name of the recipient’s organization. This page serves as the
cover of the grant proposal.
Application Form Especially in online grant applications, an application form may
replace the cover message or letter and title page. This form
may be one or more pages and may require you to check boxes,
fill in blanks, or insert brief descriptions or other information
into text boxes or blank spaces. A word or character limit
(typically 250 – 400 words) may be imposed or enforced. An
official signature (or its electronic equivalent) is often required.
This form may request detailed information about the applicant
organization, such as the staff’s or board of directors’
demographic composition or the organization’s human
resources policies.
Introduction The introduction or summary is your proposal at a glance — it
briefly describes (within a given limit) the problem to be solved
and projects the expected outcomes of your grant proposal. If
substantial research is involved, you may also describe your
proposed research methods (interviews, questionnaires, videos,
observations, and so on) in a separate paragraph. See also
abstracts.
Literature Review The literature review lists the relevant research sources you
547
consulted in preparing your proposal. Also called a References
or Works Cited section, it allows reviewers of your proposal to
assess your familiarity with current research in the field. Is your
research up to date? Thorough? Pertinent? Be selective: Include
only relevant journal articles, books, interviews, broadcasts,
blogs and forums, and other sources. In nonresearch proposals
(those not based on secondary or formal research), a limited
number of citations are frequently included within the project
narrative or as footnotes or endnotes.
Project Narrative The heart of the proposal, the project narrative describes in
detail the scope of the work, expected outcomes, a list of tasks,
a project activity schedule from start to finish, and estimated
costs. Be specific and thorough.
Project Description The project description includes an overview of the project and
details of how the research project or program will be
conducted (its methodology). In nonresearch proposals, include
a succinct statement of need — also called a case statement —
which presents the facts and evidence that support the need for
the project. The information presented can come from
authorities in the field as well as from your organization’s own
experience or research. A logical and persuasive statement of
need demonstrates that your company or nonprofit
organization sufficiently understands the situation and is
therefore capable of addressing it satisfactorily. Clearly indicate
548
why or how your solution improves on existing or previous
ones, and cite evidence to support this. Emphasize the benefits
of the proposed activities for the grant maker’s intended
constituency or target population, and explain why your
solution to the problem or plan to fulfill the need should be
approved. Most RFPs and grant-maker guidelines provide a list
of specific questions for applicants to answer or required topics
that must be persuasively addressed in this section.
Project Outcomes Having described the preparations and justification for the
program, the grant writer must describe the outcomes or
deliverables of the proposal — what the funding organization
can expect as a result of the time, labor, and financial support it
has invested in the program. Outcomes are stated as
quantifiable objectives—improvements in reading scores,
volume of carbon emission reductions, aerobic fitness
measures, and so on. Grant proposals, especially those solicited
by government agencies, must also provide detailed plans for
collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data to evaluate the
success or failure of the research or program in achieving the
stated outcomes.
Budget Narrative Next, include a budget-narrative section that provides a detailed
listing of costs for personnel, equipment, building renovations,
and other grant-related expenses. This information must be
clear, accurate, and arranged in an easily understood format for
549
those evaluating the data (usually in a table). Many granting
organizations, including government agencies, require that
specified budget forms be used. If your proposal is approved,
you are being entrusted with funds belonging to someone else,
and you are accountable for them. Your cost estimates may also
be subject to changes over which you have no control, such as
price increases for equipment, software, or consulting
assistance. The project may also require ongoing funding
following completion of the grant’s tasks. Either provide an
estimate of such costs, or note that they will appear in a Future
Funding or Sustainability section.
Task Schedule Next, prepare a schedule of tasks that need to be performed in
order to implement the program or complete the project.
Arrange them as bulleted points in sequence from first to last,
with due dates for each, or present them in a table or perhaps in
a Gantt chart, as described in graphs.
Organization Description The organization description may follow the Introduction or it
may be placed just prior to the Conclusion, depending on RFP
requirements or the granting organization’s guidelines.
Describe the applicant organization briefly in terms of mission,
history, qualifications, and credibility (significant, related
accomplishments), taking care to include all information
requested in the RFP or grant guidelines. Granting
organizations consider not only the merits of the proposed
550
program or research but also your organization’s standing in
the community and similar advantages.
Conclusion This brief wrap-up section emphasizes the benefits or
advantages of your project. This section affords you one more
opportunity to give the funding organization a reason why your
proposal merits its support. Emphasize the benefits of the
research, program, or other activities for the grant maker’s
intended constituency or target population. Finally, express
your appreciation for the opportunity to submit the proposal,
and close with a statement of your willingness to provide
further information.
Attachments Funding organizations request supporting information, such as
nonprofit-status documentation, copies of legal documents (for
example, articles of incorporation or bylaws), or lists of
information that you may need to design and compose yourself.
Provide a comprehensive list of attachments, and clearly label
each item to guide the grant reviewer in evaluating the proposal
package. See also appendixes.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing Grant Proposals
✓ Analyze the granting organization’s RFP or guidelines carefully to
551
best formulate your request to match its funding interests and priorities.
✓ Review the descriptions of proposal contexts, strategies, and types in the proposals entry.
✓ Respond to every question or address every topic requested. ✓ Strive for conciseness in the narrative without sacrificing clarity
— make every word count. ✓ Emphasize the benefits of your proposal to the granting
organization and its constituents. ✓ Follow all instructions meticulously, because failure to include
requested information or to observe format requirements may be grounds for rejection or lack of review.
✓ Review the final grant proposal carefully. Because many online submission systems do not have a spell-check function, draft sections in a word-processing program, then paste them into the electronic form.
552
graphs A graph presents numerical or quantitative data in visual form
and offers several advantages over presenting data within the
text or in tables. Trends, movements, distributions,
comparisons, and cycles are more readily apparent in graphs
than they are in tables. However, although graphs present data
in a more comprehensible form than tables do, they are often
less precise. For that reason, some audiences may need graphs
to be accompanied by tables that give exact data. The types of
graphs described in this entry include line graphs, bar graphs,
pie graphs, and picture graphs. For advice on integrating
graphs within text, see visuals; for information about using
presentation graphics, see presentations. For combining
graphs with other elements, see infographics.
Line Graphs A line graph shows the relationship between two variables or
sets of numbers by plotting points in relation to two axes drawn
at right angles (Figure G–7). The vertical axis usually represents
amounts, and the horizontal axis usually represents increments
of time. Line graphs that portray more than one set of variables
(double-line graphs) allow for comparisons between two sets of
data for the same period of time. You can emphasize the
difference between the two lines by shading the space between
them, as shown in Figure G–7.
553
FIGURE G–7. Double-Line Graph (with Shading)
ETHICS NOTE
Be especially careful to proportion the vertical and horizontal scales so that they present the data precisely and free of visual distortion. To do otherwise is not only inaccurate but potentially unethical. (See ethics in writing.) In Figure G–8 (on page 242), the graph at the left gives the appearance of a slight decline followed by a steady increase in investment returns because the scale is compressed, with some years selectively omitted. The graph at the right represents the trend more accurately because the years are evenly distributed without omissions.
554
FIGURE G–8. Distorted (left) and Distortion-Free (right) Expressions of Data
Bar Graphs Bar graphs consist of horizontal or vertical bars of equal width,
scaled in length to represent some quantity. They are
commonly used to show (1) quantities of the same item at
different times, (2) quantities of different items at the same
time, and (3) quantities of the different parts of an item that
make up a whole (in which case, the segments of the bar graph
must total 100 percent). The horizontal bar graph in Figure G–9
shows the quantities of different items for the same period of
time.
555
FIGURE G–9. Bar Graph (Quantities of Different Items During a Fixed Period)
Bar graphs can also show the different portions of an item
that make up the whole, as shown in Figure G–10. Such a bar
graph is divided according to the appropriate proportions of the
subcomponents of the item. This type of graph, also called a
column graph when constructed vertically, can indicate
multiple items. Where such items represent parts of a whole, as
in Figure G–10, the segments in the bar graph must total 100
percent. Note that in addition to labels, each subdivision of a
bar graph must be marked clearly by color, shading, or
crosshatching, with a key or labels that identify the subdivisions
represented. Be aware that three-dimensional graphs can make
sections seem larger than the amounts they represent.
556
FIGURE G–10. Bar (Column) Graph (Showing the Parts That Make Up the Whole)
A Gantt chart is a type of horizontal bar graph designed to
plan and track the status of projects from beginning to end. As
shown in Figure G–11 (on page 244), the horizontal axis
represents the length of a project divided into time increments
— days, weeks, or months. The timeline usually runs across the
top of the chart. The vertical axis represents the individual tasks
that make up the project and can include a second column
listing the staff responsible for each task. The horizontal bars in
557
the body of the chart identify each task and show its beginning
and end dates. Gantt charts are often prepared with spreadsheet
or project-management software. See also collaborative
writing.
FIGURE G–11. Gantt Chart Showing Project Schedule
Pie Graphs A pie graph presents data as wedge-shaped sections of a circle.
The circle equals 100 percent, or the whole, of some quantity,
and the wedges represent how the whole is divided. Many
times, the data shown in a bar graph could also be depicted in a
pie graph. For example, Figure G–10 shows percentages of a
whole in bar-graph form. Figure G–12 shows the same data
converted into a pie graph, dividing “Your Municipal Tax
Dollars” into wedge-shaped sections that represent percentages,
558
with salaries emphasized. Pie graphs provide a quicker way of
presenting information than can be shown in a table, yet a more
detailed breakdown of the same information often accompanies
a pie graph.
FIGURE G–12. Pie Graph (Showing Percentages of the Whole)
Picture Graphs Picture graphs are modified bar graphs that use pictorial
symbols of the item portrayed. Each symbol corresponds to a
specified quantity of the item, as shown in Figure G–13 (on page
559
246). Note that for precision and clarity, the picture graph
includes the total quantity following the symbols.
FIGURE G–13. Picture Graph
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Creating Graphs FOR ALL GRAPHS
✓ Give your graph a descriptive title that is accurate and concise. ✓ Use, as needed, a key or legend that lists and defines symbols (see
Figure G–7). ✓ Include a source line under the graph at the lower left when the
data come from another source.
560
✓ Place explanatory footnotes directly below the figure caption or label (see Figures G–10 and G–12).
FOR LINE GRAPHS
✓ Indicate the zero point of the graph (the point where the two axes intersect).
✓ Insert a break in the scale if the range of data shown makes it inconvenient to begin at zero.
✓ Divide the vertical axis into equal portions, from the least amount (or zero) at the bottom to the greatest amount at the top.
✓ Divide the horizontal axis into equal units from left to right, and label the units to show what they represent.
✓ Make all lettering read horizontally if possible, although the caption or label for the vertical axis is usually positioned vertically (see Figure G–7).
FOR BAR GRAPHS
✓ Differentiate among the types of data each bar or part of a bar represents by color, shading, or crosshatching.
✓ Avoid three-dimensional graphs when they make bars seem larger than the amounts they represent.
FOR PIE GRAPHS
✓ Make sure that the complete circle is equivalent to 100 percent. ✓ Sequence the wedges clockwise from largest to smallest,
beginning at the 12 o’clock position, whenever possible. ✓ Limit the number of items in the pie graph to avoid clutter and to
ensure that the wedges are thick enough to be clear. (Some software allows users to open and examine wedges in greater detail.)
✓ Give each wedge a distinctive color, pattern, shade, or texture. ✓ Label each wedge with its percentage value, and keep all callouts
561
(labels that identify the wedges) horizontal. ✓ Detach a wedge, as shown in Figure G–12, if you wish to draw
attention to a particular segment of the pie graph.
FOR PICTURE GRAPHS
✓ Use picture graphs to add interest to presentations and documents (such as newsletters) that are aimed at wide audiences.
✓ Choose symbols that are easily recognizable. See also global graphics.
✓ Let each symbol represent the same number of units. ✓ Indicate larger quantities by using more symbols instead of larger
symbols, because relative sizes are difficult to judge accurately. ✓ Indicate the total quantity following the symbols, as shown in
Figure G–13. ✓ Indicate the zero point of the graph when appropriate.
562
H
563
he / she The use of either he or she to refer to both sexes excludes half
of the population. (See also biased language.) To avoid this
problem, you could use the phrases he or she and his or her.
(“Whoever is appointed will find his or her task difficult.”)
However, he or she and his or her are clumsy when used
repeatedly, as are he/she and similar constructions. One
solution is to reword the sentence to use a plural pronoun; if
you do, change the nouns or other pronouns to match the
plural form.
In other cases, you may be able to avoid using a pronoun
altogether.
Of course, a pronoun cannot always be omitted without
changing the meaning of a sentence.
Another solution is to omit troublesome pronouns by using
the imperative mood.
564
headers and footers A header in a formal report or other document appears at the
top of each page, and a footer appears at the bottom of each
page. The header and footer shown in Figure H–1 are typical.
The header or footer should include at least the page number
but may also include the document title, the topic (or subtopic)
of a section, the date of the document, the names of the author
or recipients, and other identifying information to help readers
keep track of where they are in the document. Keep your
headers and footers concise, because too much information in
them can create visual clutter. For examples of headers used in
correspondence, see letters and memos. See also layout and
design and writing for the Web.
565
FIGURE H–1. Header and Footer
566
headings Headings (also called heads) are titles or subtitles that highlight
main topics and signal topic changes within the body of a
document, whether an e-mail, a memo, a report, or a Web
page. (See also writing for the Web.) Headings help readers
find information and divide the material into comprehensible
segments. Some documents, such as formal reports and
proposals, may need several levels of headings (as shown in
Figure H–2 (on page 250)) to indicate major divisions,
subdivisions, and even smaller units. If possible, avoid using
more than four levels of headings. See also layout and design.
Headings typically represent the major topics of a document.
In a short document, you can use the major divisions of your
outline as headings; in a longer document, you may need to use
both major and minor divisions.
General Heading Style No one format for headings is correct. Often an organization
settles on a standard format, which everyone in that
organization follows. Sometimes a client for whom a report or
proposal is being prepared requires a particular format. In the
absence of specific guidelines, follow the system illustrated in
Figure H–2.
567
FIGURE H–2. Headings Used in a Document
568
Decimal Numbering System The decimal numbering system uses a combination of numbers
and decimal points to differentiate among levels of headings.
Some documents, such as policies and procedures, benefit
from the decimal numbering system for ease of cross-
referencing sections. For an example of the decimal numbering
system of headings, see outlining.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Using Headings
✓ Use headings to signal a new topic. Use a lower-level heading to indicate a new subtopic within the larger topic.
✓ Make headings concise but specific enough to be informative, as in Figure H–2.
✓ Avoid too many or too few headings or levels of headings; too many clutter a document, and too few fail to provide recognizable structure.
✓ Ensure that headings at the same level are of relatively equal importance and have parallel structure.
✓ Subdivide sections only as needed; when you do, try to subdivide them into at least two lower-level headings.
✓ Do not allow a heading to substitute for discussion; the text should read as if the heading were not there.
✓ Do not leave a heading as the final line of a page. If two lines of text cannot fit below a heading, start the section at the top of the next page.
569
hyphens The hyphen (-) is used primarily for linking and separating
words and parts of words. The hyphen often improves clarity
(as in re-sign and resign). The hyphen is sometimes confused
with the dash (—), which has many other functions.
Hyphens with Compound Words Some compound words are formed with hyphens (able-bodied,
over-the-counter). Hyphens are also used with multiword
numbers from twenty-one through ninety-nine and fractions
when they are written out (three-quarters). Most current
dictionaries indicate whether compound words are
hyphenated, written as one word, or written as separate words.
Hyphens with Modifiers Two- and three-word modifiers that express a single thought
are hyphenated when they precede a noun.
► It was a well-written report.
However, a modifying phrase is not hyphenated when it follows
the noun it modifies.
► The report was well written.
If each of the words can modify the noun without the aid of the
other modifying word or words, do not use a hyphen (a new
laser printer). If the first word is an adverb ending in -ly, do not
570
use a hyphen (a privately held company). A hyphen is always
used as part of a letter or number modifier (A-frame house, 22-
inch monitor).
In a series of unit modifiers that all have the same term
following the hyphen, the term following the hyphen need not
be repeated throughout the series; for greater smoothness and
brevity, use the term only at the end of the series.
► The third-, fourth-, and fifth-floor laboratories were inspected.
Hyphens with Prefixes and Suffixes A hyphen is used with a prefix when the root word is a proper
noun (pre-Columbian, anti-American, post-Newtonian). A
hyphen may be used when the prefix ends and the root word
begins with the same vowel (re-enter, anti-inflammatory). A
hyphen is used when ex- means “former” (ex-dean, ex-CEO) and
may be used to emphasize a prefix. (“He is anti-change.”) The
suffix-elect is hyphenated (president-elect).
Hyphens and Clarity The presence or absence of a hyphen can alter the meaning of a
sentence.
AMBIGUOUS We need a biological waste management system.
571
That sentence could mean one of two things: (1) We need a
system to manage “biological waste” or (2) We need a
“biological” system to manage waste.
CLEAR We need a biological-waste management system. [1]
CLEAR We need a biological waste-management system. [2]
To avoid confusion, some words and modifiers should always
be hyphenated. Re-cover does not mean the same thing as
recover, for example; the same is true of un-ionized and
unionized.
Other Uses of the Hyphen Hyphens are used between letters to show how a word is
spelled.
► In his e-mail, he misspelled believed as b-e-l-e-i-v-e-d.
The en dash (see dashes) is preferred in ranges (pages 44–46,
letters A–L), but hyphens are used when the en dash is not
available as a special character.
Hyphens are commonly used in telephone numbers (800-555-
1212), Web addresses (computer-parts.com), filenames (report-
15.doc), and similar number/symbol combinations. See also
dates.
Hyphens are also used to divide words at the end of a line,
especially for full-justified margins within small columns. The
572
following are standard guidelines for using hyphens to divide
words at the end of lines.
Do not divide one-syllable words. Divide words at syllable breaks, which you can determine with a dictionary. Do not divide a word if only one letter would remain at the end of a line or if fewer than three letters would start a new line. Do not divide a word at the end of a page; carry the word over to the next page. If a word already has a hyphen in its spelling, divide the word at the existing hyphen. Do not use a hyphen to break a URL or an e-mail address at the end of a line.
573
I
574
idioms An idiom is a group of words that has a special meaning apart
from its literal meaning. Someone “runs for political office” in
the United States, for example, while a candidate “stands for
office” in the United Kingdom. Because such expressions are
specific to a culture, nonnative speakers must memorize them.
Idioms are often constructed with prepositions that follow
adjectives (similar to), nouns (need for), and verbs (approve
of). Some idioms can change meaning slightly with the
preposition used, as in agree to (“consent”) and agree with (“in
accord”). The following are typical idioms that give nonnative
speakers trouble.
call off [cancel] hand in [submit]
call on [visit a client] hand out [distribute]
drop in on [visit unexpectedly] look up [research a subject]
find out [discover information] run into [meet by chance]
get through with [finish] run out of [deplete supply]
give up [quit] watch out for [be careful]
Idioms often provide helpful shortcuts. In fact, they can make
writing more natural and lively. Avoid them, however, if your
writing is to be translated into another language or read in other
English-speaking countries. Because no language system can
fully explain such usages, a reader must check dictionaries or
usage guides to interpret the meaning of idioms. See also
English as a second language, global communication, and
575
international correspondence.
576
illustrations (see visuals)
577
imply / infer If you imply something, you hint at or suggest it. (“Her e-mail
implied that the project would be delayed.”) If you infer
something, you reach a conclusion based on evidence or
interpretation. (“The manager inferred from the e-mail that the
project would be delayed.”)
578
in / into In means “inside of”; into implies movement from the outside
to the inside. (“We were in a meeting when the intern brought
copies of the contract into the conference room.”)
579
in order to Most often, in order to is a meaningless filler phrase that is
dropped into a sentence without thought. See also conciseness.
However, the phrase in order to is sometimes essential to the
meaning of a sentence.
► The committee will need to leave by 3 p.m. in order to make the 5 p.m. flight.
In order to also helps control the pace of a sentence, even when
it is not essential to the meaning of the sentence.
► The committee must know the estimated costs in order to evaluate the feasibility of the project.
580
in terms of When used to indicate a shift from one kind of language or
terminology to another, the phrase in terms of can be useful.
► In terms of gross sales, the year has been relatively successful; however, in terms of net income, it has been discouraging.
When simply dropped into a sentence because it easily comes to
mind, in terms of is meaningless affectation. See also
conciseness.
581
incident / incidence Incident refers to a particular occurrence or event. (“The
incident went unreported.”) Incidence refers to the rate of
occurrence of something. (“We found a high incidence of type 2
diabetes.”)
582
incident reports The incident report is used to analyze such events as accidents,
failures, or health emergencies. For example, the report shown
in Figure I–1 describes an accident involving personal injury.
The report assesses the causes of the problem and suggests
changes necessary to prevent its recurrence. Because it is
usually an internal document, an incident report normally
appears as a memo or on a standard incident report form.
583
584
FIGURE I–1. Incident Report
In the subject line, state the precise problem you are
reporting. Then, in the body of the report, provide a detailed,
precise description of the event. What happened? Where and
when did the problem occur? Was anybody hurt? Was there any
property damage? Was there a work stoppage?
In your conclusion, state what has been or will be done to
correct the conditions that led to the event. That may include,
for example, recommendations for training in safety practices,
using improved equipment, and wearing protective clothing.
See also reports.
ETHICS NOTE
Because insurance claims, workers’ compensation awards, and even lawsuits may hinge on the information contained in an incident report, be sure to include precise times, dates, locations, treatment of injuries, names of any witnesses, and any other crucial information. (Notice the careful use of language and factual detail in Figure I–1.) Be thorough and accurate in your analysis of the problem, and support any judgments or conclusions with facts. Be objective: Always use a neutral tone, and avoid assigning blame. If you speculate about the cause of the problem, make it clear to your readers that you are speculating. See also ethics in writing.
585
indexing An index is an alphabetical list of all the major topics and
subtopics in a written work. It cites the pages where each topic
can be found and allows readers to find particular topics
quickly and easily, as shown in Figure I–2. The index comes at
the very end of the work. Do not attempt to compile an index
until pages are finalized, because terminology and page
numbers will not be accurate before then.
FIGURE I–2. Index Entry (with Main Entry, Subentries, and Sub-subentries)
The key to compiling a useful index is selectivity. Instead of
listing every possible reference to a topic, select references to
passages where the topic is fully discussed or significantly
mentioned. For index entries like those in Figure I–2, choose
key terms that best represent a topic. Key terms are those words
or phrases that a reader would most likely look for in an index.
For example, the key terms in a reference to the development of
586
legislation about environmental impact statements would
probably be legislation and environmental impact statement,
not development. In selecting index terms, use chapter or
section titles only if they include such key terms. For index
entries on tables and visuals, use the words from their titles
that will function as key terms a reader might seek.
Most word-processing programs include tools that provide a
quick and efficient way to create an alphabetical subject index
of your document. The index generated by your word-
processing software will still need careful review, but using the
software to create the first draft can save time. If you need to
index a highly complex document, you may want to consider
specialized indexing software, designed for use by professional
indexers and publishers.
587
indiscreet / indiscrete Indiscreet means “lacking in prudence or sound judgment.”
(“His public discussion of the proposed merger was
indiscreet.”) Indiscrete means “not divided or divisible into
parts.” (“The separate departments, once combined, become
indiscrete.”) See also discreet / discrete.
588
infographics Infographics are visual forms of communication that make
complex information understandable by combining text,
numbers, icons, graphs, flowcharts, drawings, and other
visuals into a unified whole, as shown in Figure I–3. They are
often used to educate wide audiences and can be especially
useful for instructions and presentations. Infographics might
be used to show an overview of a process (how to take out a
personal loan), a natural phenomenon (the evolution of an
animal species), an accident (the anatomy of a train wreck), or a
project plan (public transportation options in a city and
projected passenger use). Each of these subjects might prove
difficult to illustrate concisely with text or with images alone.
See also tables.
589
FIGURE I–3. Infographic
SOURCE: Department of Energy, https://www.energy.gov/eere/bioenergy/bioenergizeme-infographic-challenge- travel-future-bioenergy
590
Infographics can be static, noninteractive visuals intended
for public display, print publication, or high-resolution online
download. They can also take digital, interactive forms,
including such tools as mouseover pop-ups that reveal
additional details or animated elements that showcase multiple
cause-and-effect scenarios.
They are frequently created by graphic designers who
collaborate with subject-area experts on the content. However,
professionals without a formal design background can also
create infographics for the workplace using a range of free
online tools. Search for “tools for creating infographics,” or visit
such sites as piktochart.com, infogr.am, and creately.com. See
Writer’s Checklist: Creating Infographics (on page 260).
Note the infographic in Figure I–3 depicting how bioenergy
fuels transportation. It combines explanatory text, typographic
devices, images, and data, all organized into a unified overview
of this growing trend. It also cites the source information for
the infographic. This process could have been described in a
text-dense article, but the impact and explanatory power of the
graphic are striking.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Creating Infographics
✓ Use images appropriate to the topic, purpose, and audience. ✓ Select images (illustrations and icons), where possible, that are
591
self-explanatory. ✓ Arrange text and images in the appropriate sequence to illustrate
a process. ✓ Do not use dated or obsolete images or icons. ✓ Use culturally neutral images for international audiences (see
global graphics). ✓ Use design elements—logo, typeface, colors—consistent with
your organization’s branding practices. ✓ Ensure that all types of data, graphics, and illustrations are
uniform in color and design (see layout and design). ✓ Check the text for conciseness, clarity, and accuracy. ✓ Cite your sources of information appropriately (see plagiarism).
592
inquiries and responses The purpose of writing inquiry messages is to obtain responses
to requests or to specific questions, as in Figure I–4, which
shows a college student’s request for information from an
official at a power company. Inquiries may benefit either the
reader (as in requests for information about a product that a
company sells) or the writer (as in the student’s inquiry in
Figure I–4). Inquiries that primarily benefit the writer require
the use of persuasion and special consideration of the needs of
the audience. See also correspondence.
593
FIGURE I–4. Inquiry
Respond to an inquiry by answering promptly, and be sure to
answer every inquiry or question asked, as shown in Figure I–5.
How long and how detailed your response should be depends
on the nature of the question and the information the writer
provides. If you have received an inquiry that you feel you
cannot answer, find out who can and forward the inquiry to that
person. The person who replies to a forwarded inquiry should
594
state in the first paragraph of the response who has forwarded
the original inquiry, as shown in Figure I–5.
FIGURE I–5. Response to an Inquiry
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing Inquiries and Responding
✓ Make your questions specific, clear, and concise to receive a prompt, helpful reply.
595
✓ Phrase your request so that the reader will know immediately the type of information you are seeking, why you need it, and how you will use it.
✓ Present questions in a numbered or bulleted list, if possible, to make it easy for your reader to respond.
✓ Keep the number of questions to a minimum to improve your chances of receiving a prompt response.
✓ Offer some incentive for the reader to respond, if possible, such as sharing the results of your research. See “you” viewpoint.
✓ Promise to keep responses confidential, when appropriate. ✓ Provide a date by which you need a response. ✓ Close by thanking the reader for taking the time to respond, and
provide your contact information, as shown in Figure I–4. ✓ Respond to an inquiry promptly if you have the information and
authority. ✓ Check organizational policy and special issues related to your
response. ✓ Notify the writer if you need to forward the inquiry to someone
else for response.
596
inside / inside of In the phrase inside of, the word of is redundant and should be
omitted.
Using inside of to mean “in less time than” is colloquial and
should be avoided in writing.
597
instant messaging and live chat Instant messaging and live chat are communications media that
allow both real-time text communications and the transfer of
text or other files, such as an image or a document. (See also
text messaging.) Instant messaging and live chat are especially
useful to those who are working in an environment that
demands near-instant, brief written exchanges between two or
more participants. See also e-mail and selecting the medium.
When writing instant messages or chat, keep your responses
simple and to the point, covering only one subject in each
message to prevent confusion and inappropriate responses.
Because screen space is often limited and speed is essential,
many who communicate this way use abbreviations and
shortened spellings (“u” for “you”). Be sure that your reader will
understand such abbreviations; when in doubt, avoid them.
ETHICS NOTE
Be sure to follow your employer’s policies, such as those concerning confidentiality. If no specific policy exists, check with your management before using these media.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
598
Privacy and Security with Instant Messaging and Chat
✓ Set up distinct business and professional contact lists (or accounts) to avoid inadvertently sending a personal message to a business associate.
✓ Learn the options (such as away messages) and security limitations, and set the preferences that best suit your use of the system.
✓ Save significant exchanges (or logs) for future reference. ✓ Be aware that instant messages and chats can be saved by your
recipients and may be archived by your employer. (See the Professionalism Note on page 168.)
✓ Do not use professional IM or chat for office gossip or inappropriate exchanges.
599
instructions Business writers often prepare many kinds of instructions for
coworkers. (See also policies and procedures.) Instructions
that are clear and easy to follow can build goodwill because they
help readers complete tasks efficiently and prevent
miscommunication. To write effective instructions, you must
thoroughly understand the process or system you are
describing. Keep in mind that the most effective instructions
often combine written elements and visual elements that
reinforce each other. See also process explanation.
Writing Instructions Consider the level of knowledge of primary and secondary
readers in your audience. If all your readers have good
backgrounds in the topic, you can use fairly specialized terms.
If that is not the case, use plain language or include a glossary
of specialized terms that you cannot avoid. See also
repurposing.
Clear and easy-to-follow instructions are written as
commands in the imperative mood, active voice, and
(whenever possible) present tense.
Although conciseness is important in instructions, clarity is
essential. You can make sentences shorter by leaving out some
600
articles (a, an, the), some pronouns (you, this, these), and
some verbs, but such sentences may result in telegraphic style
and be harder for the reader to understand. For example, the
first version of the following instruction for submitting a
medical claim is confusing.
CONFUSING Submit negotiated claim to HR with statement from attending.
CLEAR Submit the negotiated claim to the Human Resources Office with the statement of the attending physician who prescribed the treatment.
One good way to make instructions easy to follow is to divide
them into short, simple steps in their proper sequence. Steps
can be organized with words (first, next, finally) that indicate
time or sequence.
► First, determine the problem the customer is having with the computer. Next, observe the system in operation. At that time, question the customer until you are sure that the problem has been explained completely. Then analyze the problem and make any necessary adjustments.
You can also use numbers, as in the following:
1. Open
601
the top cover and remove the toner cartridge.
2. Use the green handle to lift the paper access plate.
3. Slowly and carefully pull the jammed paper out of the
printer.
Consider using the numbered- or bulleted-list feature of your
word-processing software to create sequenced steps. See lists.
Plan ahead for your reader. If the instructions in step 2 will
affect a process in step 9, say so in step 2. Sometimes your
instructions have to make clear that two operations must be
performed simultaneously. Either state that fact in an
introduction to the specific instructions, or include both
operations in one step.
CONFUSING 1. Hold down the CONTROL key. 2. Press the RETURN key before releasing the CONTROL key.
CLEAR 1. While holding down the CONTROL key, press the RETURN key.
Alert your readers to any potentially hazardous actions before
they reach the applicable step.
If your instructions involve many steps, break them into
stages, each with a separate heading so that each stage begins
again with step 1. Using headings as dividers is especially
important if your reader is likely to be performing the operation
as he or she reads the instructions.
602
Illustrating Instructions Illustrations should be developed together with the text,
especially for complex instructions. Using drawings,
flowcharts, infographics, maps, photographs, and other
visuals fosters clarity by enabling your readers to identify
relationships more easily than they would from long
explanations.
Consider the layout and design of your instructions to most
effectively integrate visuals. Highlight important visuals and
text by making them stand out from the surrounding text.
Consider using boxes and boldface or distinctive headings.
Experiment with font style, size, and color to determine which
devices are most effective.
The instructions in Figure I–6 (page 266) guide the reader
through the steps of streaking a saucer-sized disk of material
(called agar) used to grow bacteria colonies. The purpose is to
thin out the original specimen (the inoculum) so that the
bacteria will grow in small, isolated colonies. This section could
be part of other, larger instructional documents for which
streaking is only one step among others.
603
FIGURE I–6. Illustrated Instructions
Finally, to test the accuracy and clarity of your instructions,
604
ask someone who is not familiar with the task to follow your
directions. A first-time user can spot missing steps or point out
passages that should be worded more clearly.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing Instructions
✓ Use the imperative mood and the active voice. ✓ Use short sentences and simple present tense as much as
possible. ✓ Avoid jargon that your readers might not know, including
undefined abbreviations. ✓ Do not use elegant variation (two different words for the same
thing). See also affectation. ✓ Eliminate any ambiguity. ✓ Use effective visuals and highlighting devices. ✓ Test your instructions by having someone follow them while you
observe. ✓ Provide a warning before any potentially hazardous steps.
605
insure / ensure / assure Insure, ensure, and assure all mean “make secure or certain.”
Assure refers to people, and it alone has the connotation of
setting a person’s mind at rest. (“I assure you that the
equipment will be available.”) Ensure and insure mean “make
secure from harm.” Only insure is widely used in the sense of
guaranteeing the value of life or property.
► We need all the data to ensure the success of the project. ► We should insure the contents of the warehouse.
606
intensifiers Intensifiers are adverbs that emphasize degree, such as very,
quite, rather, such, and too. Although intensifiers serve a
legitimate and necessary function, unnecessary intensifiers can
weaken your writing. Eliminate those that do not make an
obvious contribution, or replace them with specific details. See
also conciseness, emphasis.
Some words (such as perfect, impossible, and final) do not
logically permit intensification because, by definition, they do
not allow degrees of comparison. Although usage often ignores
that logical restriction, avoid such comparisons in business
writing. See also adjectives, conciseness, and equal / unique /
perfect.
607
interface An interface is a surface that provides a common boundary
between two bodies or areas. The bodies or areas may be
conceptual or physical (“the interface of a computer and an
external storage device”). Do not use interface as a substitute
for the verbs cooperate, interact, or even work with. See also
affectation and buzzwords.
608
interjections An interjection is a word or phrase standing alone or inserted
into a sentence to exclaim or to command attention.
Grammatically, it has no connection to the sentence. An
interjection can be strong (Hey! Ouch! Wow!) or mild (oh, well,
indeed). A strong interjection is followed by an exclamation
mark.
► Wow! Profits more than doubled last quarter.
A weak interjection is followed by a comma.
► Well, we need to rethink the proposal.
An interjection inserted into a sentence usually requires a
comma before it and after it.
► We must, indeed, rethink the proposal.
Because they get their main expressive force from sound,
interjections are more common in speech than in writing. Use
them sparingly.
609
international correspondence Business correspondence varies among national cultures.
Organizational patterns, persuasive strategies, forms of
courtesy, levels of comfort with uncertainty, and ideas about
efficiency differ from country to country. For example, in the
United States, direct, concise correspondence usually
demonstrates courtesy by not wasting the reader’s time. In
many other countries, however, such directness and brevity
may suggest to readers that the writer is dismissive or lacking in
manners. (See audience and tone.) Similarly, a U.S. writer
might consider one brief letter or e-mail sufficient to
communicate a request, while a writer in another country
might expect an exchange of three or four e-mails to pave the
way for action.
Cultural Differences in Correspondence When you read correspondence from businesspeople in other
cultures or countries, be alert to variations in such features as
customary expressions, openings, and closings. For example,
business writers in some cultures traditionally use indirect
openings that may express good wishes about the recipient’s
family or compliment the reader’s success or prosperity.
Consider deeper issues as well, such as how writers from other
610
cultures express bad news. Some cultures traditionally express
negative messages, such as refusals, indirectly to avoid
embarrassing the recipient. Such differences in
correspondence are often based on cultural perceptions of
time, face-saving, and other traditions. The features and
communication styles of specific national cultures are complex;
the entries global communication and global graphics provide
information and resources for cross-cultural study.
Cross-Cultural Examples Figures I–7 and I–8 show a draft and a final version of a letter
written by an American businessperson to a Japanese
businessperson. The opening and closing of the draft in Figure
I–7 do not include enough of the politeness strategies that are
important in Japanese culture, and the informal salutation
inappropriately uses the recipient’s first name (Dear Ichiro:).
This draft also contains idioms and figures of speech (looking
forward, company family), jargon (transport), contractions
(I’m, don’t), informal language (just e-mail or fax, Cheers), and
humor and allusion (“ptomaine palace” across from our main
offices).
611
612
FIGURE I–7. Inappropriate International Correspondence (Draft Marked for Revision)
613
614
615
FIGURE I–8. Appropriate International Correspondence
Compare that letter to the one in Figure I–8, which is written
in language that is courteous, literal, and specific. This revised
letter begins with concern about the recipient’s family and
prosperity because that opening honors traditional Japanese
patterns in business correspondence. The letter is free of slang,
idioms, and jargon. The sentences are shorter than in the draft;
in addition, the writer uses bulleted lists to break up the
paragraphs, avoids contractions, spells out months, and uses
twenty-four-hour–clock time.
When writing for international readers, rethink the
ingrained habits that define how you express yourself, learn as
much as you can about the cultural expectations of others, and
focus on politeness strategies that demonstrate your respect for
readers. Doing so will help you achieve clarity and mutual
understanding with international readers.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing International Correspondence
✓ Observe the guidelines for courtesy, such as those in the Writer’s Checklist: Using Tone to Build Goodwill on page 112.
✓ Write clear and complete sentences: Unusual word order or rambling sentences will frustrate and confuse readers. See garbled sentences.
✓ Avoid an overly simplified style that may offend or any
616
affectation that may confuse the reader. See also English as a second language.
✓ Avoid humor, irony, and sarcasm; they are easily misunderstood outside their cultural context.
✓ Do not use idioms, jargon, slang expressions, unusual figures of speech, or allusions to events or attitudes particular to life in the United States. See clarity and style.
✓ Consider whether necessary technical terminology can be found in abbreviated English-language dictionaries; if it cannot, carefully define such terminology.
✓ Do not use contractions or abbreviations that may not be clear to international readers.
✓ Avoid inappropriate informality, such as using first names too quickly.
✓ Write out dates, whether in the month-day-year style (June 11, 2018, not 6/11/18) used in the United States or the day-month-year style (11 June 2018, not 11/6/18) used in many other parts of the world.
✓ Specify time zones or refer to international standards, such as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).
✓ Use international measurement standards, such as the metric system (18 °C, 14 cm, 45 kg), where possible.
✓ Consult local laws concerning e-mail to ensure that you are in compliance with those regulations, particularly marketing messages. For example, some countries require businesses to have an individual’s express consent before sending that person any e-mail messages.
✓ Ask someone from your intended audience’s culture or with appropriate expertise to review your draft before you complete your final proofreading.
617
interviewing for information Interviewing others who have knowledge of your subject is
often an essential method of research in business writing.
Determining the Proper Person to Interview Many times, your subject or purpose logically points to the
proper person to interview for information. For example, if you
were writing a feasibility report about marketing consumer
products in India, you would want to interview someone with
extensive experience in that area. The following sources can
help you determine the appropriate person to interview: (1)
workplace colleagues or faculty in appropriate academic
departments, (2) local chapters of professional societies, (3)
“Contact” and “About” sections on organizational Web sites, and
(4) targeted Internet searches.
Preparing for the Interview Before the interview, learn as much as possible about the
person you are going to interview and the organization for
which he or she works.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
618
When you contact the prospective interviewee, explain who you are, why you would like an interview, the subject and purpose of the interview, the best setting or medium for the interview (in person, phone, videoconference, e-mail), and approximately how much time it will take. You should also ask permission if you plan to record the interview, and let your interviewee know that you will allow him or her to review your draft.
After you have made the appointment, prepare a list of
questions to ask your interviewee. Avoid vague, general
questions. A question such as “Do you think the Web would be
helpful for you?” is too general to elicit useful information. It is
better to ask specific but open-ended questions, such as the
following: “Many physicians in your specialty are using the Web
to answer routine patient questions. How might providing such
information on your Web site affect your relationship with your
patients?”
Conducting the Interview Arrive promptly or connect on time if videoconferencing, and
be prepared to guide the discussion. During the interview, take
only memory-jogging notes that will help you recall the
conversation later; do not ask your interviewee to slow down so
that you can take detailed notes. As the interview is reaching a
close, take a few moments to skim your notes and ask the
interviewee to clarify anything that is ambiguous.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
619
If you plan to conduct an interview using videoconferencing, find an environment that is quiet and allows you to focus on the interview. Be mindful of your surroundings, personal appearance, and the appearance of your videoconferencing platform because all will be conveyed to the person you are interviewing. Make sure that you can take notes in a way that allows you to maintain your focus on your subject, as described in listening. Finally, ensure that you are using high-quality, reliable software and connections.
Expanding Your Notes Soon After the Interview Immediately after leaving the interview, use your memory-
jogging notes to help you mentally review the interview and
expand those notes. Do not postpone this step; otherwise, you
risk forgetting important points. See also note-taking.
Interviewing by Phone or E-mail When an interviewee is not available for a face-to-face meeting
or video-conference, consider a phone interview. Most of the
principles for conducting face-to-face interviews apply to phone
interviews; be aware, however, that phone calls do not offer the
important nonverbal cues of face-to-face or video meetings.
Consider using a high-quality headset or speakerphone to make
note taking easier.
Another alternative is to consider an e-mail interview, in
which you exchange a number of back-and-forth messages.
620
Such an interview, however, lacks the spontaneity and the
immediacy of an in-person, a video, or a phone conversation.
Before you send any questions, make sure that your contact is
willing to participate and respond to follow-up clarifications. As
a courtesy, give the respondent a general idea of the number of
questions you plan to ask and the level of detail you expect.
When you send the questions, ask for a reasonable deadline
from the interviewee (“Would you be able to send your
response by . . . ?”).
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Interviewing Successfully
✓ Be pleasant but purposeful. You are there to get information, so don’t be timid about asking leading questions on the subject.
✓ Use the list of questions you have prepared, starting with the less complex topics to get the conversation started and moving toward the more challenging ones.
✓ Let your interviewee do most of the talking. Remember that the interviewee is the expert.
✓ Be objective. Do not offer your opinions on the subject. You are there to get information, not to debate.
✓ Ask additional questions as they arise. ✓ Do not get sidetracked. If the interviewee strays too far from the
subject, ask a specific question to direct the conversation back on track.
✓ If you use audio or video recording, do not let it lure you into relaxing so that you neglect to ask crucial questions.
✓ After thanking the interviewee, ask permission to contact him or her again to clarify a point or two as you complete your interview
621
notes. ✓ A day or two after the interview, send a thank-you note to the
interviewee.
622
interviewing for a job Job interviews can take place in person, by phone, or by Skype
or a similar program and may last thirty minutes to several
hours. Sometimes an initial job interview is followed by a series
of additional interviews. Often just one or two people conduct
the interview, but on occasion a group or panel of four or more
attend. Because it is impossible to know exactly what to expect,
it is important to be well prepared. See also job search.
Before the Interview Before the interview, learn everything you can about the
organization, drawing on both internal, company-produced
materials—including Web sites, annual reports, and corporate
advertisements—and external sources—such as newspaper
articles about an organization and industry reports ranking a
company alongside its competitors. Ask yourself questions such
as the following:
What kind of organization (profit, nonprofit, government) is it? What are the mission, goals, and objectives of the organization? What types of services or products does the company provide? What is the organization’s history, and what sort of reputation has it built over time? Does the company operate locally, regionally, or
623
internationally? Is the company privately owned or employee owned? How many employees are there? Is the company a subsidiary of a larger operation? How long has the company been in business? How does the company differentiate itself from its competitors?
How does it advertise its mission, expectations, and benefits to potential employees? What strategies does it employ to market its products and services to clients or consumers?
Where and how will I fit in? Does there appear to be opportunity for advancement?
You can obtain information from current employees, the
company’s Web site, press releases, prospectuses, annual
reports, business articles about the company, and local news
sources. The company’s Web site in particular may help you
learn about the company’s size, sales volume, product line,
credit rating, branch locations, subsidiary companies, new
products and services, expansion plans, and similar
information. Careful Internet research can provide important
background information, but do not hesitate to seek help from a
librarian for sources accessible through a library, such as Dun
& Bradsteet’s Million Dollar Directory, Standard & Poor’s
Register of Corporations, Directors and Executives, and
Thomas’ Register.
Try to anticipate the questions an interviewer might ask, and
624
think through your answers in advance. Be sure you understand
a question before answering it, and avoid responding too
quickly with a rehearsed reply. The most appealing tone to
adopt for interviews is conversational, which will allow you to
come across as natural and relaxed as opposed to overly
rehearsed. The following are traditional questions you might be
asked during an interview:
What are your short-term and long-term occupational goals? Where do you see yourself five years from now? What are your major strengths and weaknesses? Do you work better with others or alone? What academic or career accomplishment are you particularly proud of? Describe it. Why are you leaving your current job? May we contact your previous employer? Why do you want to work for this organization? What will you bring to the organization? What salary and benefits do you expect? (see page 280 for salary negotiations) What is an example of a mistake from which you learned something valuable? What is your greatest accomplishment? Why?
Some employers, however, rather than ask straightforward
questions, use behavioral interviews that focus on asking the
candidate to provide examples or respond to hypothetical
situations. Interviewers who use behavior-based questions are
625
looking for specific examples from your experience. Prepare for
the behavioral interview by recollecting challenging situations
or problems that you successfully resolved. Examples of
behavior-based questions include the following:
Tell me about a time when you experienced conflict while on a team. If I were your boss and you disagreed with a decision I made, what would you do? How have you used your leadership skills to bring about change? Tell me about a time when you failed and what you learned from the experience.
Other kinds of interviews are also becoming more common.
For example, airline companies have routinely interviewed
multiple applicants for onboard positions simultaneously in
group settings. Surrounded by job applicants, individuals are
positioned to respond to a crisis with a passenger (played by an
actor) or a technical failure. As they respond, individuals or
groups with the authority to make hiring decisions evaluate
applicants’ decision-making choices and group dynamics. It is
important in such settings to consider which outcomes are most
in line with the organization’s goals and values.
Organizations are sometimes willing to share information
about their interviewing approach when scheduling applicants.
Feel free to inquire about the type of interview process you
might expect beforehand, and ask whether it would be
626
appropriate to bring particular materials with you to the
interview (see the following section, “During the Interview”) or
whether you might be better prepared in other ways. Maintain a
confident and enthusiastic tone when asking questions about
what to expect during the interview, since the goal should be to
communicate your desire to make a professional impression on
the interviewer and other members of the organization.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Plan to arrive ten to fifteen minutes early to the interview; never be late. Always bring extra copies of your résumé, a note pad, samples of your work or portfolio (if applicable), and a list of references with contact information. Turn off any electronic devices prior to your arrival. If you are asked to complete an application form, read it carefully before you write and proofread it when you are finished. The form provides a written record for company files and indicates to the company how well you follow directions and complete a task.
During the Interview The interview enables a potential employer to learn about you,
and it allows you to learn how you might fit into that
organization. The interview actually begins when you arrive.
What you wear and how you act make a first impression. In
general, dress professionally and in a manner that is
appropriate for working in the particular organization and in
the position for which you are applying. Usually, it is wise to
dress simply and conservatively, avoid extremes in fragrance
627
and cosmetics, and be well groomed. Also, be polite to other
employees you meet. Think of the interview from start to finish
as your first day on the job. First impressions matter. The
development of a professional identity begins early—if not
when you enter college, then by the time you start taking
courses in your major area of study—and continues to take
shape as you start your career.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Be aware that visible tattoos and body piercings are not acceptable in many white-collar and service-industry positions. Employers are within their legal rights to maintain such a policy if they believe your appearance might negatively affect the image of the organization. Act prudently if you suspect tattoos and piercings are not acceptable— cover tattoos and remove piercings.
Behavior After introductions, thank the interviewer for his or her time,
express your pleasure at meeting him or her, and remain
standing until you are offered a seat. Sit up straight (good
posture suggests self-assurance), maintain eye contact with the
interviewer, and try to appear relaxed and confident. During
the interview, use nervous energy to your advantage by
channeling it into the alertness that you will need to listen and
respond effectively. Do not attempt to take extensive notes. You
can jot down a few facts, but keep your focus on the
interviewer. Do not use an electronic device (laptop or tablet)
628
unless you need to showcase a portfolio. See also listening.
Responses When you answer questions, stay on topic. Respond directly to
the question, and then provide concrete evidence to support
your answer. For example, if you reveal to the interviewer that
you do not have formal leadership experience, refer to a
specific officer position that you were elected to in an
organization, or describe your responsibilities as a trainer for
other employees at your part-time job during college. Avoid
simple yes or no answers—they usually do not allow the
interviewer to learn enough about you. Some interviewers allow
a silence to fall just to see how you will react. The burden of
conducting the interview is the interviewer’s, not yours—and he
or she may interpret your rush to fill a void in the conversation
as a sign of insecurity. If such a silence makes you
uncomfortable, be ready to ask an intelligent question about the
company, drawing on the research you have done about the
organization and the particular position to which you are
applying.
If the interviewer overlooks important points, bring them up.
Let the interviewer mention salary first. Doing so yourself may
indicate that you are more interested in the money than in the
work. Make sure, however, that you are aware of prevailing
salaries and benefits in your field and geographic region.
Interviewers look for a degree of self-confidence and an
629
applicant’s understanding of the field, as well as genuine
interest in the field, the company, and the job. Ask questions to
communicate your interest in the job and the company.
Interviewers respond favorably to applicants who can
communicate and present themselves well.
ETHICS NOTE
Questions that seem personal, appear to breach legal ethics, or otherwise make you uncomfortable not only can be hard to answer but also can quickly erode the confidence you worked so hard to build during your preparation. Remaining composed and remembering that the employer’s objective is simply to determine whether you are the best candidate for the position will help you respond appropriately to difficult questions. Be brief, concise, and truthful in your answers. Common questions that may broach sensitive subjects may include the following:
Have you ever experienced a layoff or been terminated? Why did you stay with previous employers on average for just a year? Why do you have such a large gap of employment between these dates?
Salary Salary negotiations can take place at the end of a job interview,
after a formal job offer, or over the course of several
conversations. Prepare by determining salary ranges in your
field by checking Web sites, such as salary.com, payscale.com,
630
and glassdoor.com. If you are on campus, check with your career-development office, which can advise you on local salary
ranges.
Remember that you are negotiating a package and not just a
starting salary. Some employers have excellent benefits
packages that can balance a lower base salary, as the following
possibilities suggest:
Tuition reimbursement for continued education Payment of relocation costs Paid personal leave or paid vacations Overtime potential and compensation Flexible hours and work-from- home options
Health, dental, optical, and disability coverage Retirement and pension plans Profit sharing: investment or stock options Bonuses or cost-of-living adjustments Commuting or parking-cost reimbursement Family leave or elder-care benefits
If you do not wish to provide a specific salary requirement
during a job interview, you can respond with a salary range that
you know would be reasonable for someone at your level in
your line of work in that region of the country. For example,
you could say, “I would hope for a salary somewhere between
$35,000 and $45,000, but of course this is negotiable.” The salary
range you provide should be in line with the industry average
(see job search). Throughout this process, focus on what is
most important to you (not others) and on what you would find
acceptable.
If you decide to request a salary on the higher end of the
631
average range in the particular industry to which you are
applying, be prepared to offer specific, concrete evidence of
experiences and skills you have developed that warrant a higher
salary. Once you have gained some work experience in the
industry, you will be in a better position to make such a request.
In the meantime, though, you may refer to projects you have
completed in college courses, computer software programs
with which you have gained expertise, or internships in the
field.
Conclusion At the conclusion of the interview, thank the interviewer for his
or her time. Be sure to make note of each interviewer’s name,
or request business cards if convenient. Reiterate your interest
in the position, and try to get an idea of when the company
expects to make a final decision. Reaffirm friendly contact with
a firm handshake.
After the Interview After you leave the interview, jot down the pertinent
information you obtained, as it may be helpful in comparing job
offers. As soon as possible following a job interview, send the
interviewer(s) a thank-you note or e-mail. Many interviewers
and other employees you have met will appreciate a
handwritten note that mentions a personal detail about your
time at the organization, for example, thanking an individual
who recommended a particularly good restaurant for lunch.
Such messages also often include the following:
632
Your thanks for the interview and to individuals or groups that gave you special help or attention during the interview The name of the specific job for which you interviewed Your impression of the opportunity Your confidence that you can perform the job well An offer to provide further information or to answer further questions
Figure I–9 shows a typical example of follow-up
correspondence.
633
FIGURE I–9. Follow-up Correspondence
If you are offered a job you want, accept the offer verbally
and write a brief letter of acceptance as soon as possible—
certainly within a week. If you do not want the job, write a
634
refusal letter or e-mail, as described in acceptances / refusals.
In some instances, you may be interested in accepting a
position but are more enthusiastic about a competing
organization with which you have interviewed but that has not
yet made you an offer. If you face this situation, it is appropriate
to notify the interviewer with whom you spoke at the competing
organization to let him or her know that you have been offered
a position elsewhere but are still interested in pursuing a
position with his or her organization.
635
introductions DIRECTORY
Routine Openings Opening Strategies
Objective Problem Statement Scope Background Summary Interesting Detail Definition Anecdote Quotation Forecast Persuasive Hook
Full-Scale Introductions
Every document must have either an opening or an
introduction. Usually an opening simply focuses the reader’s
attention on your topic and then proceeds to the body of your
document. A full-scale introduction, discussed later in this
entry, sets the stage by providing information necessary to
understand the discussion that follows in the body. In general,
correspondence and routine reports need only an opening;
formal reports, major proposals, and other complex
documents need a full-scale introduction. For a discussion of
comparable sections for Web sites, see writing for the Web. See
636
also conclusions.
Routine Openings When your audience is familiar with your topic or if what you
are writing is brief or routine, then a simple opening will
provide adequate context, as shown in the following examples.
LETTER
Dear Mr. Ignatowski:
You will be happy to know that we corrected the error in
your bank balance. The new balance shows . . .
Jane, as I promised in my e-mail yesterday, I’ve attached
the human resources budget estimates for fiscal year 2018.
MEMO
To date, 18 of the 20 specimens your department submitted
for analysis have been examined. Our preliminary analysis
indicates . . .
Opening Strategies Opening strategies are aimed at focusing readers’ attention and
motivating them to read the entire document.
637
Objective You might open with a statement of a project’s objective so that
readers have a basis for judging the results.
► The primary goal of this project was to develop new techniques to solve the problem of waste disposal. Our first step was to investigate . . .
Problem Statement To give readers the perspective of your report, briefly describe
the problem that led to the study or project being reported.
► Several weeks ago a manager noticed a recurring problem in the software developed by Datacom Systems. Specifically, error messages repeatedly appeared when, in fact, no specific trouble . . . After an extensive investigation, we found that Datacom Systems . . .
For proposals or formal reports, of course, problem statements
may be more elaborate and part of the full-scale introduction,
which is discussed later in this entry.
Scope You may present the scope of your document in your opening.
By providing the parameters of your material, the limitations of
the subject, or the amount of detail to be presented, your
readers can determine whether they want or need to read your
document.
► This pamphlet provides a review of the requirements for
638
obtaining a private pilot’s license. It is not intended as a textbook to prepare you for the examination itself; rather, it outlines the steps you need to take and the costs involved.
Background The background or history of a subject may provide interest,
perspective, or insight into a subject. Consider the following
example from a newsletter describing the process of oil drilling:
► From the bamboo poles the Chinese used when the pyramids were young to today’s giant rigs drilling in deep water, there has been considerable progress in the search for oil. But whether in ancient China or a modern city, underwater or on a mountaintop, the objective of drilling has always been the same—to manufacture a hole in the ground, inch by inch.
Summary You can provide a summary opening by describing in
abbreviated form the results, conclusions, or recommendations
of your article or report. Be concise: Do not begin a summary by
writing “This report summarizes . . . ”
CHANGE This report summarizes the advantages offered by the photon as a means of examining the structural features of the atom.
TO As a means of examining the structure of the atom, the photon offers several advantages.
Interesting Detail Often an interesting detail will attract the readers’ attention and
639
pique their curiosity. Readers of an annual report for a
manufacturer of telescopes and scientific instruments, for
example, may be persuaded to invest if they believe that the
company is developing innovative, cutting-edge products.
► The rings of Saturn have puzzled astronomers ever since they were discovered by Galileo in 1610 using the first telescope. Recently, even more rings have been discovered.
Our company’s Scientific Instrument Division designs
and manufactures research-quality, computer-controlled
telescopes that promise to solve the puzzles of Saturn’s
rings by enabling scientists to use multicolor differential
photometry to determine the rings’ origins and
compositions.
Definition Although a definition can be useful as an opening, do not define
something with which your audience is familiar or provide a
definition that is obviously a contrived opening (such as
“Webster defines technology as . . .”). A definition should be
used as an opening only if it offers insight into what follows.
► Risk is often a loosely defined term. In this report, risk refers to a qualitative combination of the probability of an event and the severity of the consequences of that event. In fact, . . .
Anecdote An anecdote can be used to attract and build interest in a
640
subject that may otherwise be mundane; however, this strategy
is best suited to longer documents and presentations.
► In his poem “The Calf Path” (1895), Sam Walter Foss tells of a wandering, wobbly calf trying to find its way home at night through the lonesome woods. It made a crooked path, which was taken up the next day by a lone dog. Then “a bellwether sheep pursued the trail over vale and steep, drawing behind him the flock, too, as all good bellwethers do.” This forest path became a country lane that bent and turned and turned again. The lane became a village street, and at last the main street of a flourishing city. The poet ends by saying, “A hundred thousand men were led by a calf near three centuries dead.”
Many companies today follow a “calf path” because they
react to events rather than planning.
Quotation You can use a quotation to stimulate interest in your subject. To
be effective, however, the quotation must be pertinent—not any
loosely related quotation you find.
► Richard Smith, founder of PCS Corporation, recently said, “I believe that managers need to be more ‘people smart’ than ever before. The management style of today involves much more than just managing the operations of a department—it requires understanding the personalities that comprise a corporation.” His statement represents a growing feeling among corporate leaders that . . .
641
Forecast Sometimes you can use a forecast of a new development or
trend to gain the audience’s attention and interest.
► In the not-too-distant future, we may be able to use a handheld medical diagnostic device similar to those in science fiction to assess the physical condition of accident victims. This project and others are now being developed at Seldi Group, Inc.
Persuasive Hook Although all opening strategies contain persuasive elements,
the hook uses persuasion most overtly. A Web site touting the
newest innovation in tax-preparation software might address
readers as follows:
► Welcome to the newest way to do your taxes! TaxPro EZ ends the headache of last-minute tax preparation with its unique TaxPro app.
Full-Scale Introductions The purpose of a full-scale introduction is to give readers
enough general information about the subject to enable them to
understand the details in the body of the document. (See Figure
F–6, pages 203–19.) An introduction should accomplish any or
all of the following:
State the subject. Give background information, such as definition, history, or theory, to provide context for your
642
readers. State the purpose. Make your readers aware of why the document exists and whether the material provides a new perspective or clarifies an existing perspective. State the scope. Tell readers the amount of detail you plan to cover. Preview the development of the subject. Especially in a longer document, outline how you plan to develop the subject. Providing such information allows readers to anticipate how the subject will be presented and helps them evaluate your conclusions or recommendations.
Consider writing an opening or introduction last. Many writers
find that only after they have drafted the body of the document
do they have a full enough perspective on the subject to
introduce it adequately.
643
investigative reports An investigative report offers a precise analysis of a workplace
problem or issue in response to a need for information. The
investigative report shown in Figure I–10, for example,
evaluates whether a company should adopt a program called
Basic English to prepare documentation for and to train non–
English-speaking readers.
644
645
FIGURE I–10. Investigative Report
Open an investigative report with a statement of its primary
and any secondary purposes, then define the scope of your
investigation. If the report includes a survey of opinions, for
example, indicate the number of people surveyed and other
identifying information, such as income categories and
occupations. (See also questionnaires.) Include any
information that is pertinent in defining the depth of the
investigation. Then report your findings and discuss their
significance with your conclusions.
Sometimes the person requesting the investigative report
may need to make recommendations based on your findings. In
that case, the report may be referred to as a recommendation
report. See also feasibility reports and incident reports.
646
italics Italics is a style of type used to denote emphasis and to
distinguish book titles, foreign expressions, and certain other
elements. You may need to italicize words that require special
emphasis in a sentence. (“Contrary to projections, sales have
not improved.”) Do not overuse italics for emphasis, however.
(“This will hurt you more than me.”)
Foreign Words and Phrases Foreign words and phrases are italicized: bonjour, guten tag,
the sign said “Se habla español.” Foreign words that have been
fully assimilated into English need not be italicized: cliché,
etiquette, vis-à-vis, de facto, résumé. When in doubt about
whether to italicize a word, consult a current dictionary.
Titles Italicize the titles of separately published documents (print or
electronic), such as books, Web and blog sites, periodicals,
newspapers, pamphlets, brochures, and legal cases.
► Turning Workplace Conflicts into Collaboration [book] was reviewed in the New York Times [newspaper].
► CNN Money [Web site] reports that “written communication skills remain a top priority for U.S. businesses.”
Abbreviations of such titles are italicized if their spelled-out
647
forms would be italicized.
► The NYT is one of the nation’s oldest newspapers.
Italicize the titles of CDs, DVDs, movies, plays, long poems,
paintings, sculptures, and long musical works.
DVD Computer Security Tutorial
PLAY Arthur Miller’s Death of a Salesman
LONG POEM T. S. Eliot’s The Wasteland
MUSICAL WORK Gershwin’s Porgy and Bess
Use quotation marks for parts of publications, such as chapters
of books and sections within larger works.
► Small Business Trends (smallbiztrends.com) [blog] posted “Microbusiness Economic Trends: Into the Future.” [article]
Proper Names The names of ships, trains, and aircraft (but not the companies
or governments that own them) are italicized: U.S. aircraft
carrier Independence, Amtrak’s passenger train Coast Starlight.
Craft that are known by model or serial designations are not
italicized: DC-7, Boeing 747.
Words, Letters, and Figures Words, letters, and figures discussed as such are italicized.
► The word inflammable is often misinterpreted.
648
► The S and 6 keys on my keyboard do not function.
Subheads Subheads in a report are sometimes italicized.
► Training Managers. We are leading the way in developing first-line managers who not only are professionally competent but . . .
Exceptions Some titles are not set off by italics, quotation marks, or
underlining, although they are capitalized.
► Professional Writing [college course title], the Constitution, the Bible, Lincoln’s Gettysburg Address, the Lands’ End Catalog.
Keep in mind your context, especially as you prepare material
for screen display, as in writing for the Web. See also headings
and layout and design.
649
its / it’s Its is a possessive pronoun and does not use an apostrophe. It’s
is a contraction of it is.
See also expletives and possessive case.
650
J
651
jargon Jargon is a specialized slang that is unique to an occupational or
a professional group. For example, human resource personnel
use the term headhunter to describe specialists who recruit
professional and executive personnel. Jargon is at first
understood only by insiders; over time, it may become known
more widely and become a buzzword. If all your readers are
members of a particular occupational group, jargon may
provide an efficient means of communicating. However, if you
have any doubt that your entire audience is part of such a
group, avoid using jargon. See also affectation, functional
shift, gobbledygook, and plain language.
652
job descriptions Most companies use formal job descriptions to specify the
duties of and requirements for many of the positions in the
organization. Job descriptions fulfill several important
functions: They provide information on which equitable salary
scales can be based, they help management determine whether
all functions within a company are adequately supported, and
they let both prospective and current employees know exactly
what is expected of them. Together, all the job descriptions in a
company present a picture of the organization’s structure. The
job description shown in Figure J–1 is typical. It never mentions
the person holding the job described; instead, it focuses on the
job and the qualifications required to fill the position.
1
653
FIGURE J–1. Job Description
Although job-description formats vary from organization to
654
organization, they commonly contain the following sections:
The accountability section identifies, by title only, the person to whom the employee reports. The scope of responsibilities section provides an overview of the primary and secondary functions of the job and states, if applicable, who reports to the employee. The specific duties section gives a detailed account of the particular duties of the job as concisely as possible. The requirements section lists the required or preferred education, training, experience, and licensing for the job.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing Job Descriptions
✓ Before attempting to write your job description, list all the different tasks you do in a week or a month. Otherwise, you will almost certainly leave out some of your duties.
✓ Focus on content. Remember that you are describing your job, not yourself.
✓ List your duties in the decreasing order of importance. Knowing how your various duties rank in importance makes it easier to set valid job qualifications.
✓ Begin each statement of a duty with a verb, and be specific. Write “Orient new staff members to the department” rather than “New staff orientation.”
✓ Review existing job descriptions that are considered well written.
Job descriptions are sometimes called position descriptions, a term also used for formal announcements of openings for professional or administrative positions.
1
655
job search Individuals seek jobs for a number of reasons, including to
Gain experience in a particular field. Develop contacts with professionals, and strengthen networking skills. Build concrete evidence of skills and knowledge for inclusion in a professional portfolio. Diversify skills and knowledge to help set a job seeker apart from the competition. Explore another career option prior to a career shift or an opportunity that complements current employment (for instance, a freelance career that can be developed on the side). Participate in activities that support personal values and character traits.
Whether you are applying for your first job or want to change
careers entirely, begin by assessing your knowledge, skills,
interests, and abilities through brainstorming. Next, consider
your career goals and values. For instance, do you prefer
working independently or collaboratively? Do you enjoy public
settings? Do you like meeting people? How important are career
stability and location? What would you most like to be doing in
the immediate future? In two years? In five years? Be honest:
What kinds of tasks and responsibilities, big and small, would
you like to occupy your days?
2
656
Once you have narrowed your goals and identified a
professional area that is right for you, consider the following
sources to locate the job and work environment you are
seeking. It is important to consult both internal sources
(documents and other kinds of evidence produced by the
organization to which you are applying) and external sources
(perspectives on the organization written by an outside party).
Some examples of sources from each perspective follow:
Internal Sources:
Informational interviews with organizational insiders Published job ads announcing current position openings Organizational Web sites Annual reports Corporate ads speaking to the identity and reputation of an organization Employees currently working for an organization
External Sources:
Newspaper articles about an organization Industry reports that speak to the successes and failures of several organizations, including the one to which you are applying Unpaid reviews of an organization’s products and services Forecasts by investment and workforce experts
Organization is key to a successful job search. Keep files,
preferably electronic and hard copy, for potential jobs, and
657
include in each file copies of job ads, application letters,
résumés, follow-up correspondence, and contact information.
Consider logging your job-search activity on a spreadsheet or
any other accessible format so that you can always easily
determine who you have contacted and why. Whatever system
you use, keeping track of names and what you have sent to
potential employers is crucial.
In an era when multiple communications are sent daily
through e-mail, texting, and a variety of social-media outlets, it
is crucial to record the names and positions of individuals from
an organization with whom you have corresponded in any
form. Set up file folders for e-mail exchanges. For example,
keep all messages you exchange with an organization’s human
resources director and any other individuals from the
organization in one place for easy reference.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Personal branding is a concept introduced by business guru Tom Peters that has increasingly gained in popularity. Businesses work to establish a positive image and a reputation for high-quality products and the successful execution of services. Personal branding is the idea of marketing a positive image or reputation of yourself. For example, if you are a consultant who sells products or services, your consistently professional and successful execution of services will be remembered as a core part of your brand. By learning how to influence other people’s perceptions of your brand, you will gain an immediate advantage over the competition. See “Seven Things You Can Do to
658
Build an Awesome Personal Brand” by Shama Hyder at www.forbes.com.
Many components of the job search discussed in this entry
can help you establish a strong personal brand. As you evaluate
the opportunities of networking, social media, and internships,
for example, keep in mind the core message you would like to
send about yourself. Every interaction provides opportunities to
enhance your visibility through a full suite of job-search
materials. These materials may include a video résumé,
business cards, a narrative biography, LinkedIn and other
social media profiles, a personal Web site, a portfolio,
reference letters, and testimonials. As you prepare these
materials, project a consistent and unified branding message
across all media outlets.
To achieve consistency of your brand and to enter a job or
career that is personally and professionally satisfying, you must
be honest with yourself about what you bring to the workplace
and how you self-identify. Avoid trying to maintain a personal
brand that sounds like a good fit for a particular organization
but that does not genuinely reflect your values, interests, and
goals.
Along with “personal branding,” consider the way in which
you “package” yourself for the job search. Qualified applicants
for a position will likely possess many of the same credentials
(for instance, an undergraduate degree in a relevant discipline
659
or a required license for entering a particular field) and similar
experiences (for example, an internship during college). It is
important to consider, then, what unique traits or experiences
set you apart from your competitors. These can include
anything from a meaningful mission trip in which you
participated to a passion you have for painting to a significant
feature of your upbringing. By combining your unique feature
with qualifications that employers expect to see in applicants’
materials, you can set yourself apart. For example, each of the
following statements reflects effective applicant packaging:
In addition to bringing knowledge of current marketing theory and practice to this position, my experiences of watching my parents grow their dry cleaning business in our small town taught me much about the importance of building relationships in the community. My grades in my civil engineering courses and the leadership roles I played in group projects reveal my commitment to the field. It was my summer work for Habitat for Humanity, though, that taught me the importance of using my training to serve the community.
Networking and Informational Interviews Career-development experts agree that many open positions are
filled through networking. Networking involves communicating
with people who can provide useful advice or who may know of
potential jobs in your interest areas. Your network may include
660
people already working in your chosen field, contacts in
professional organizations, professors, family members, or
friends. Discussion groups and networking sites, such as
LinkedIn, can be helpful in this process. In general, you should
always be networking, even when you do not need assistance.
Even a simple gesture, such as providing a reference for a
recently unemployed colleague, can go a long way toward
expanding your network.
Informational interviews are appointments you schedule
with working professionals who can give you “insider” views of
an occupation or industry. These brief meetings (usually 20 to
30 minutes) also offer you the chance to learn about
employment trends as well as leads for employment
opportunities. Because you ask the questions, these interviews
allow you to participate in an interview situation that is less
stressful than the job interview itself. To make the most of
informational interviews, prepare carefully and review both
interviewing for information and interviewing for a job.
Campus Career Services A visit to a college career-development center is another good
way to begin your job search. Government, business, and
industry recruiters often visit campus career offices to
interview prospective employees; recruiters also keep career
counselors aware of their companies’ current employment
needs and provide them with job descriptions. Career
counselors not only help you select a career but also put you in
661
touch with the best and most current resources — identifying
where to begin your search and saving you time. Career-
development centers often hold workshops on résumé
preparation and offer other job-finding resources on their Web
sites.
Strategic Web Searches In addition to professional and social-networking sites, you can
use the Web in several ways to enhance your job search.
Consult sites that give advice about careers, job seeking, and résumé preparation like www.careerbuilder.com. Learn about businesses and organizations that may hire employees in your field by visiting their Web sites. Such company sites often describe the company’s culture, list job openings, provide instructions for applicants, and offer an overview of employee benefits. You can learn about jobs in your field and post your résumé for prospective employers at privately owned or government-sponsored online employment databases. For instance, among the many resources found at CareerOneStop (www.careeronestop.org), a job seeker can research salary ranges for a particular region or career field. This tool is particularly valuable when you are moving to a new location, considering a career transition, or determining a valid salary and benefits range for negotiating compensation packages.
Social Media 662
Social-media sites, such as LinkedIn, allow you to connect with
people of like-minded interests both on an individual level and
in a broad forum. Social media provides the opportunity to
develop a positive image of your work through comments,
personal and professional profiles, résumés, associations to
which you belong, and your connections. These components of
your social-media presence can help enhance your reputation
and personal brand.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Surveys show that employers and employment recruiters peruse social media and search engines before recruiting candidates, so carefully consider the material that you post online when using such media as LinkedIn, Facebook, and Twitter. Keep in mind that many software packages allow prospective employers to compile an overview of a job seeker’s online presence. Share online only what you would comfortably share with your boss, and regularly check the privacy settings on any sites that you use. It is important to remain consistent to your personal brand in any communications you share online, which is all the more reason to articulate a brand that is genuine.
Job Advertisements Many employers advertise job openings on their Web sites, job
boards, social-media sites, and newspapers. Because job listings
can differ, search in both the printed and Web editions of local
and big-city newspapers under employment or job market. Use
the search options they provide or the general strategies for
663
database searches discussed in the entry research.
A human-relations specialist interested in training, for
example, might find the specialty listed under “Human
Resources” or “Consulting Services.” Depending on a company’s
or government agency’s needs, the listing could be even more
specific, such as “Software Education Specialist” or “Learning
and Development Coordinator.”
Set up job alerts on job-aggregator sites, such as indeed.com
and simplyhired.com, and scour job boards, company Web
sites, and newspaper listings for jobs that meet your criteria and
send you e-mail notifications. As you read the ads, take notes on
salary ranges, job locations, job duties and responsibilities, and
even the terminology used in the ads to describe the work.
Not all organizations publish job ads. Rather, they rely on
current employees to spread news of any hiring needs to
contacts in their personal and professional networks. It is
appropriate to send a “prospecting” application letter and
résumé to an organization to let the human resources director
or other appropriate representative know that you are
interested in working with the organization and in what
capacities.
Remember, too, that job ads are often wish lists —
descriptions of ideal candidates for a position. Not everyone
who applies will meet all the requirements listed, nor may the
individual who is ultimately selected for the position. Pay
664
attention to the language used in an ad to determine which
qualifications are “required” as opposed to “desired” or
“preferred.”
Trade and Professional Journal Listings Many industry associations publish periodicals of interest to
people working in the industry. Such periodicals often contain
job listings. To learn about the trade or professional
associations for your occupation, consult online resources
offered by your library or campus career office. Also, head to
the central office for your major to see what kinds of resources
are available for students pursuing careers in related fields.
Often, those who are on the forefront of the discipline will be in
the loop regarding which industries and organizations are
seeking employees, are in the process of expanding, or are
interested in taking on students for internships or co-ops.
Employment Agencies (Private, Temporary, Government) Private employment agencies are organizations that are in
business to help people find jobs. Be sure you understand who
is paying the agency’s fee. Often the employer pays the agency’s
fee; however, if you have to pay, make sure you know exactly
how much. As with any written agreement, read the fine print
carefully.
665
A staffing agency or temporary placement agency could
match you with an appropriate temporary or permanent job in
your field. Temporary work for an organization for which you
might want to work permanently is an excellent way to build
your network while continuing your job search. Choose an
employment or a temporary-placement agency carefully. Some
are well established and reputable; others are not. Check with
your local Better Business Bureau and your college career office
before you sign any agreements.
Recruitment firms (sometimes called headhunters) are hired
by organizations to fill general needs or specific positions.
Especially if you have experience in a field, it is a good idea to
make connections with recruiters on networking sites like
LinkedIn. You can also search online for recruiters who
specialize in your career field, and send your résumé to them
through their Web-site form or by e-mail. Even if there is no
suitable job opportunity, a résumé submitted to a recruitment
firm could turn up in a future database search.
Local, state, and federal government agencies also offer
many free or low-cost employment services. Locate local
government agencies in Web or telephone directories under the
name of your city, county, or state. For information on
occupational trends, see the Occupational Outlook Handbook at
www.bls.gov/oco. For information on jobs with the federal
government, see the U.S. Office of Personnel Management at
www.opm.gov or USAJOBS, the federal government’s official
666
jobs site, at www.usajobs.gov. For information on salary
negotiations, see page 280.
Internships and Co-ops As you evaluate job options, consider taking an internship or a
co-op. Internships typically last from six weeks to an entire
semester (if not longer), whereas co-ops (or cooperatives) are
often taken on by a student while in school, with the
understanding that the position may become full time once the
student completes his or her education. An internship or a co-
op provides you with the chance to gain experience in a field
through a variety of career opportunities. It enables you to
Try a position without making a permanent commitment. Explore a field to clarify your career goals. Develop skills and gain experience in a new field or industry. Evaluate a prospective employer or firm. Acquire a mentor in the workplace. Establish networking contacts and professional references. Position yourself for a future job offer with the employer.
Ask if the internship is paid or unpaid during your interview. If
it is not paid, find out how the internship will benefit you based
on recent legal criteria for unpaid internships. (See “Fact Sheet
#71: Internship Programs Under The Fair Labor Standards Act”
on the U.S. Department of Labor’s Web site, www.dol.gov.) For-
profit employers are required to pay interns at least the
minimum wage unless the internship experience is designed for
667
the benefit of the intern, such as training that would be given in
an educational environment. When this condition is met, the
employer is not required to pay the intern for the internship.
To locate internship opportunities, begin with your campus
career-development office. Such offices usually post internship
opportunities on their Web site, but you can also make
appointments with counselors or take advantage of walk-in
hours. Finally, try www.internships.com, a site that lists
internships by type of employer, location, means of
compensation (paid or unpaid), and whether the work is full or
part time.
Service Internship and “Gap Year” Opportunities Not all internships involve working for an organization that is in
your chosen field. Increasingly, students are choosing to spend
a period of time following graduation working in a position
sponsored by organizations like Teach for America.
One option that many college graduates consider before
pursuing full-time employment in a field that dovetails with
their major and career goals is to apply for a position with
AmeriCorps or the Peace Corps. These governmental
organizations seek volunteers for a limited amount of time
(usually between one and two years) to help improve the lives of
individuals in the United States and abroad.
668
AmeriCorps offers opportunities for Americans who are
interested in contributing their talents to “nonprofits, schools,
public agencies, and community and faith-based groups across
the country” (www.nationalservice.gov/programs/americorps).
A specific example of an AmeriCorps program is City Year,
which requires selected applicants to work for one year in an
urban school that lacks sufficient resources.
Working for the Peace Corps can take volunteers to all
corners of the world, on such missions as rebuilding structures
damaged by tsunamis in places like Thailand or helping farmers
in developing countries like Nepal attempt new techniques in
agriculture.
There are advantages to spending a gap year (or more) in
these kinds of positions. In addition to learning new skills,
interacting with people from different locales and backgrounds,
and having the opportunity in some cases to acquire another
language, governmental programs like these will often assist in
the repayment of student loans.
Direct Inquiries If you would like to work for a particular firm, peruse the
organization’s Web site to see if any openings for individuals
with your qualifications are advertised. You may also e-mail or
call the human resources director or the head of a particular
division to which you are interested in applying. Remember
that all correspondence, even a simple phone call, should be
669
professional, because every interaction with an organization
reflects your identity. Such contacts work best if you have
networked, as described earlier in this entry.
A related strategy is to prepare a prospecting letter — a highly
targeted letter that outlines why your skills and credentials
would be valuable to the employer. Before writing the letter,
research the employer to find out about any upcoming plans,
goals, and even obstacles to its success. Your prospecting letter
can show that you understand the challenges the employer is
facing and you want to be part of the solution. Describe what
you expect to accomplish, both short term and long term, if
given the opportunity.
Other Application Genres Other kinds of documents, print and digital, are used for
pursuing positions in the contemporary workplace.
Application forms: Some organizations ask applicants to complete online or print application forms, providing information about work history in an accessible and standard format. When completing these forms, be sure to answer all questions, targeting the word count specified in the instructions. If a specific word count is not provided, gauge the preferred length for responses according to the amount of space provided. LinkedIn profile: LinkedIn is an online site for managing professional profiles and networking with individuals in related fields. Many employers will check LinkedIn profiles
670
as a first step in the screening process. Check your LinkedIn profile frequently to see what comments have been added by those who visit your page and to ensure that all information is updated. Digital (and print) portfolios: Throughout college, it is important to keep a careful record of your accomplishments, whether academic achievements (for example, being named to the dean’s list or earning awards for work in a particular class) or participation in campus organizations and clubs. A digital or print (usually bound) portfolio will offer evidence of the knowledge, skills, and personal traits that you claim to possess when applying for a position. In addition to a résumé and a reflective statement, which will unify the other materials in your portfolio, include samples of your work in classes and jobs, images of events or programs in which you participated, letters of reference, and any other evaluations of your work. Video résumés: Applicants are increasingly producing more sophisticated multimedia résumés in addition to traditional print versions. Like digital portfolios, video résumés provide extras — for example, short taped statements by the applicant to further demonstrate an item listed on the résumé or a link to supporting images.
ETHICS NOTE
Providing false information on your job application can result in a dismissal and will reflect poorly on your character. Be honest and keep in mind that if you are wrong for a position and lie to obtain it, the
671
employer can just as easily discover this after you are hired.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Completing Job Applications: Print and Online
✓ Read the entire application, and keep your résumé at hand before you begin.
✓ Copy and paste responses to online applications, as appropriate, from your current résumé.
✓ Provide all requested information, and complete irrelevant entries with N/A (for “not applicable”).
✓ List a specific job title for the “Position Seeking” entry — entries “any” or “open” receive less consideration.
✓ List salary requirements as “negotiable,” or give a range commensurate with the industry and region.
✓ Use positive phrases if asked why you left a previous employer: “relocation,” “seeking new challenge,” “career advancement,” or possibly “will discuss at interview.”
✓ List references (with their permission) who can speak to your professionalism, character, or work ethic.
✓ Attach a brief cover letter and résumé with your completed job application, if possible.
✓ Proofread for accuracy and consistency: Review the instructions, and check all entries or fields, dates, position titles, links, grammar, and spelling.
✓ Make sure you date, sign (if print), and submit or post the application by the deadline.
✓ Save for your records a copy or screen capture of your completed application.
672
ETHICS NOTE
When faced with questions that are sensitive, you must carefully consider your response. If the question does not seem to raise a problem, you can choose to answer it. If you feel the question is inappropriate, you can respond with N/A or another response (such as a line through the blank); this will indicate that you have read the content.
Understanding that many employers conduct background checks on candidates to protect their interests will help you determine the validity of a question. For example, a banking institution might be concerned about a candidate’s credit history, current debts, or bankruptcy status, or a government organization might be concerned about citizenship or ties to foreign countries.
A good source for stimulating your thinking is the most recent edition of What Color
Is Your Parachute? A Practical Manual for Job-Hunters & Career-Changers by Richard N. Bolles, published by Ten Speed Press. Also, it is a good idea to head to your university’s career services office to ask for current information about industries in which you have interest as well as any positions that have been listed with the office. While you are there, you might inquire about the possibility of signing up to take a personality test, like the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator, or a career aptitude test; both can provide clues to the types of work and work environments in which you might be most successful.
2
673
K
674
kind of / sort of The phrases kind of and sort of should be used only to refer to a
class or type of things.
► We require a special kind of training to ensure employee safety
Do not use kind of or sort of to mean “rather,” “somewhat,” or
“somehow.” That usage can lead to vagueness; it is better to be
specific.
VAGUE It was kind of a bad year for the company.
SPECIFIC The company’s profits fell 10 percent last year.
675
know-how The informal term know-how, meaning “special competence or
knowledge,” should be avoided in formal writing style.
676
L
677
lay / lie Lay is a transitive verb — a verb that requires a direct object to
complete its meaning — that means “place” or “put.”
► We will lay the foundation one section at a time.
The past-tense form of lay is laid.
► We laid the first section of the foundation last month.
The perfect-tense form of lay is also laid.
► Since June, we have laid all but two sections of the foundation.
Lay is frequently confused with lie, which is an intransitive verb
— a verb that does not require an object to complete its meaning
— that means “recline” or “remain.”
► People in shock should lie down with their legs slightly elevated.
The past-tense form of lie is lay (not lied). This form causes the
confusion between lie and lay.
► The injured employee lay still for approximately five minutes.
The perfect-tense form of lie is lain.
► The injured employee had lain still for five minutes before
678
the EMTs arrived.
679
layout and design DIRECTORY
Design Principles Grouping Contrast Repetition
Typography Typeface and Type Size Type Style and Emphasis
Page-Design Elements Justification Headings Headers and Footers Lists Columns White Space Color
Visuals Icons Captions Rules
Page Layout and Thumbnails
Thoughtful layout and design can make even the most complex
information accessible and give readers a favorable impression
of the writer and the organization. To accomplish those goals, a
design should help readers find information easily; offer a
simple and uncluttered presentation; and highlight structure,
680
hierarchy, and order. The design must also fit the purpose of the document and its context. For example, clients paying a
high price for consulting services might expect a more
sophisticated, polished design, while employees aware of
pressing deadlines and budgets are likely to accept — or even
expect — a standard, functional design for internal documents.
Design Principles Readers are quick to make inferences based on the pattern,
form, and organization of document elements. When creating
documents and visuals, use those instincts to your advantage by
keeping in mind three major principles of design: grouping,
contrast, and repetition.
Grouping Grouping highlights relationships among items on a page or
screen, which helps readers grasp how information is organized
and what is important. Grouping can occur in three different
ways.
Proximity: Items that are close together seem like part of a group, while items that are far apart seem dissimilar. Related items (for example, a heading and the paragraph that follows it) should be closer together than less closely related items (a heading and the paragraph above the heading). Similarity: Items that share qualities (such as size, shape, or color) are viewed as similar and tend to be associated as
681
part of a group. Alignment: Items that are aligned tend to be seen as part of a group. If the items in a bulleted list are aligned with one another and indented from the rest of the text, for example, readers immediately recognize them as related.
Contrast Contrast sets items apart and helps readers quickly grasp which
items are different from one another. For example, to
emphasize one data bar in a graph, you might give it a different
color or pattern from the other bars. To give readers an easy
way to navigate a long docu-ment, you might contrast the
headings from the body text by making them larger or a
different color from the surrounding text.
Repetition Repetition communicates consistency and predictability
through repeated patterns of design elements whether on a
page, screen, table, or visual. Inconsistencies in these patterns
are confusing and distracting. If like items on a page (headings,
footers, bulleted lists) vary slightly from one another in their
design, readers will not know whether the items are supposed
to be part of a related group. Consistency ensures that the
patterns in a document or visual are clear and unambiguous.
Repetition thus allows the users of a document to focus on the
things the writer wishes to emphasize.
Typography 682
Typography refers to the style and arrangement of type on a
page. A complete set of all the letters, numbers, and symbols
available in one typeface (or style) is called a font. The letters in
a typeface have a number of distinctive characteristics, as
shown in Figure L–1.
FIGURE L–1. Primary Components of Letter Characters
Typeface and Type Size For most on-the-job writing, select a typeface primarily for its
legibility. Avoid typefaces that make text difficult to read or that
may distract readers. Instead, choose popular typefaces with
which readers are familiar, such as Times New Roman or Arial.
Avoid using more than two typefaces in the text of a document.
For documents like brochures and newsletters, however, you
may wish to use distinctively different typefaces for contrast
among various elements, such as headlines, headings, inset
quotations, and sidebars. Experiment before making final
decisions, keeping in mind your audience.
683
One way typefaces are characterized is by the presence or
absence of serifs. Serif typefaces have projections, as shown in
Figure L–1; sans serif styles do not. (Sans is French for
“without.”) The text of this book is set in Sabon, a serif typeface.
Although sans serif type has a clean and uncluttered look, serif
type is easier to read in print, especially in the smaller sizes.
Sans serif, however, works well for headings (like the entry
titles in this book) and for Web sites and documents read on-
screen.
Ideal font sizes for the main text of paper documents range
from 10 to 12 points. However, for some elements or
documents, you may wish to select typeface sizes that are
smaller (as in footnotes) or larger (as in headlines for
brochures). See Figure L–2 for a comparison of type sizes in a
serif typeface.
FIGURE L–2. Type Sizes (6- to 14-Point Type)
Your readers and the distance from which they will read a
document should help determine type size. For example,
1
684
instructions that will rest on a table at which the reader stands
require a larger typeface than a document that will be read up
close. For presentations and writing for the Web, preview your
document to see the effectiveness of your choice of point sizes
and typefaces.
Type Style and Emphasis One method of achieving emphasis through typography is to
use uppercase letters. HOWEVER, LONG STRETCHES OF ALL
UPPERCASE LETTERS ARE DIFFICULT TO READ. (See also e-
mail.) Use all uppercase letters only in short spans, such as in
headings. Likewise, use italics sparingly, because continuous
italic type reduces legibility and thus slows readers. Of course,
italics are useful if your aim is to slow readers, as in cautions
and warnings. Highlighting in color may be useful to call
attention to individual words or brief sections. Boldface, used
in moderation, may be the best cuing device because it is
visually different yet retains the customary shape of letters and
numbers.
Page-Design Elements Thoughtfully used design elements can provide not only
emphasis but also visual logic within a document by
highlighting organization. The following typical elements can
make your document accessible and effective: justification,
headings, headers and footers, lists, columns, white space, and
color. Some of these elements are illustrated in the formal
report.
685
Justification Left-justified (ragged-right) margins are generally easier to read
than full-justified margins, especially for text using wide
margins on 8½ × 11” pages. Left justification is also better if full
justification causes your word-processing or desktop-publishing
software to insert irregular spaces between words, producing
unwanted white space or unevenness in blocks of text. Full-
justified text is more appropriate for publications aimed at a
broad audience that expects a more formal, polished
appearance. Full justification is also useful with narrow,
multiple-column formats because the spaces between the
columns (called alleys) need the definition that full justification
provides. The body text of this book is full justified.
Headings Headings reveal the organization of a document and help
readers decide which sections they need to read. Provide
typographic contrast between headings and the body text with
either a different typeface or a different style (bold, italic, CAPS,
and so on). Headings are often effective in boldface sans serif
typeface that contrasts with a body text in a serif typeface.
Headers and Footers A header in a report, a letter, or another document appears at
the top of each page (as in this book), and a footer appears at
the bottom of each page. Document pages may have headers or
footers (or both) that include such elements as the topic or
subtopic of a section, the date the document was written, the
686
page number, and the document name. Keep your headers and
footers concise, because too much information in them can
create visual clutter. However, a multipage document should, at
a minimum, include the page number in a header or footer. For
headers used in letters and memos, see correspondence.
Lists Vertically stacked words, phrases, and other items with
numbers or bullets can effectively highlight such information
as steps in sequence, materials or parts needed, key or
concluding points, and recommendations. For further detail,
see lists.
Columns Consider how columns may improve the readability of your
document. A single-column format works well with larger
typefaces, double-spacing, and left-justified margins. For
smaller typefaces and single-spaced lines, the two-column
structure keeps text columns narrow enough so that readers
need not scan back and forth across the width of the entire page
for every line. Columns of different size can separate main text
from secondary material. Avoid a single word or line carried
over to the top of the next column or page; likewise, avoid
opening a paragraph or stranding a word at the end of a column
or page.
White Space The area on a page or screen that is free of text or design
687
elements is called white space. It is an important element of
design because it visually frames text and other elements, and
breaks pages into manageable chunks. For example, white
space between paragraphs or sections can serve as a visual cue
to signal the ending or beginning of a topic or section.
Color Color and screening (shaded areas on a page) can distinguish
one part of a document from another or unify a series of
documents. They can set off sections within a document,
highlight examples, or emphasize warnings. In tables,
screening can highlight column titles or sets of data to which
you want to draw the reader’s attention.
Visuals Readers notice visuals before they notice text, and they notice
larger visuals before they notice smaller ones. Thus, the size of
an illustration suggests its relative importance. For newsletter
articles and publications aimed at wide audiences, consider
especially the proportion of the visual to the text. Magazine
designers have traditionally used the three-fifths rule: Page
layout is more dramatic and appealing when the major element
(photograph, drawing, or other visual) occupies three-fifths
rather than one-half of the available space.
Visuals can be gathered in one place (for example, at the end
of a report), but placing them in the text closer to their
accompanying explanations makes them more effective.
688
Illustrations in the text also provide visual relief. For advice on
the placement of visuals, see the Writer’s Checklist: Creating
and Integrating Visuals on pages 542–43.
Icons Icons are simplified pictorial or symbolic representations that
are used online as links to programs (as in apps), commands, or
files. In a printed document, icons can indicate a recurring
feature or quality, such as a special cross-reference. Icons must
be simple and easily recognized without accompanying text. For
example, on the Web, national flags might symbolize different
language versions of a document. For advice on using icons that
are culturally appropriate, see global graphics.
Captions Captions are titles that highlight or describe visuals. Captions
often appear below figures and above tables; they may be
aligned with the visual to the left, or they may be centered.
Rules Rules are vertical or horizontal lines used to enclose material in
a box or to divide one area of the page from another. For
example, rules and boxes set off visuals from surrounding
explanations or highlight warning statements from the steps in
instructions.
Page Layout and Thumbnails Page layout involves combining typography, design elements,
689
and visuals on a page to make a coherent whole. The flexibility
of your design is affected by your design software, your method
of printing the document, your budget, and whether your
employer or client requires you to use a template.
Before you spend time positioning actual text and visuals on
a page, especially for visually complex documents such as
brochures, you may want to create a thumbnail sketch, in
which blocks of simulated text and visuals indicate the
placement of elements. You can go further by roughly
assembling all the thumbnail pages to show the size, shape,
form, and general style of a large document. Such a mock-up,
called a dummy, allows you to see how a finished printed
document will look.
A point is a unit of type size equal to 0.01384 inch, or approximately 1/72 of an inch.1
690
lend / loan Both lend and loan can be used as verbs, but lend is more
common. (“The bank can lend [or loan] them the money.”)
Unlike lend, loan can be a noun. (“The bank approved our
loan.”)
691
letters Business letters — normally written for those outside an
organization — are often the most appropriate choice for formal
communications with professional associates or customers.
Letters may be especially effective for those people who receive
a high volume of e-mail and other electronic messages. Letters
printed on organizational letterhead communicate formality,
respect, and authority. See correspondence for advice on
writing strategy and style. See also selecting the medium.
Although templates are available to format business letters,
they may not provide the appropriate dimensions and elements
you need. The following sections offer specific advice on
formatting and related etiquette for business letters.
Letter Format If your employer requires a particular letter format, use it.
Otherwise, follow the design guidelines shown in Figure L–3,
which illustrates the popular full-block style. In this format, the
entire letter is aligned at the left margin. To achieve a
professional appearance, center the letter on the page vertically
and horizontally. Regardless of the default margin provided by
a template, it is more important to establish a picture frame of
blank space surrounding the text of the letter. When you use
organizational stationery with letterhead at the top of the page,
consider the bottom of the letterhead as the top edge of the
paper. The right margin should be approximately as wide as the
2
692
left margin. To give a fuller appearance to short letters,
increase both margins to about an inch and a half. Use your
full-page or print-preview feature to check for proportion.
693
694
FIGURE L–3. Full-Block-Style Letter (with Letterhead)
Heading Unless you are using letterhead stationery, place your full
return address and the date in the heading. Because your name
appears at the end of the letter, it need not be included in the
heading. Spell out words such as street, avenue, first, and west
rather than abbreviating them. You may either spell out the
name of the state in full or use the standard postal service
abbreviation. The date usually goes directly beneath the last
line of the return address. Do not abbreviate the name of the
month. Begin the heading about two inches from the top of the
page. If you are using letterhead that gives the company
address, enter only the date, about three lines below the last
line of the letterhead.
Inside Address The inside address includes the recipient’s full name, title, and
address. Place the inside address two to six lines below the date,
depending on the length of the letter. The inside address should
be aligned with the left margin, and the left margin should be at
least one inch wide.
Salutation Place the salutation, or greeting, two lines below the inside
address, and align it with the left margin. In most business
695
letters, the salutation contains the recipient’s personal title
(Mr., Ms., Dr.) and last name, followed by a colon. If you are on
a first-name basis with the recipient, use only the first name in
the salutation.
Address women as Ms. unless they have expressed a
preference for Miss or Mrs. However, professional titles
(Professor, Senator, Major) take precedence over Ms. and
similar courtesy titles.
When a person’s first name could refer to either a woman or
a man, one solution is to use both the first and last names in the
salutation (Dear Pat Smith:).
For multiple recipients, the following salutations are
appropriate:
► Dear Professor Allen and Dr. Rivera: [two recipients] ► Dear Ms. Becham, Ms. Moore, and Mr. Stein: [three
recipients] ► Dear Colleagues: [Members, or other suitable collective
term]
Subject Line An optional element in a letter is a subject line, which should
follow the salutation. Insert one blank line above and one blank
line below the subject line. The subject line in a letter functions
as it does for e-mail and other correspondence: as an aid in
focusing the topic and filing the letter. (For more information,
696
see the subsection on creating subject lines on page 117.)
Subject lines are especially useful if you are writing to a large
company and do not know the name or title of the recipient. In
such cases, you may address a letter to an appropriate
department or identify the subject in a subject line and use no
salutation.
► National Medical Supply Group 501 West National Avenue Minneapolis, MN 55407
Attention: Customer Service Department
Subject: Defective Cardio-100 Stethoscopes
I am returning six stethoscopes with damaged diaphragms
that . . .
In other circumstances in which you do not know the
recipient’s name, use a title appropriate to the context of the
letter, such as Dear Customer or Dear IT Professional.
Body The body of the letter should begin two lines below the
salutation (or any element that precedes the body, such as a
subject or an attention line). Single-space within and double-
space between paragraphs, as shown in Figure L–3. To provide
a fuller appearance to a very short letter, you can increase the
side margins or increase the font size. You can also insert extra
697
space above the inside address, the writer’s signature block, and
the initials of the person typing the letter — but do not exceed
twice the recommended space for each of these elements.
Complimentary Closing Type the complimentary closing two spaces below the body.
Use a standard expression, such as Sincerely, Sincerely yours,
or Yours truly. (If the recipient is a friend as well as a business
associate, you can use a less formal closing, such as Best wishes
or Best regards or simply Best.) Capitalize only the initial letter
of the first word, and follow the expression with a comma.
Writer’s Signature Block Type your full name four lines below and aligned with the
complimentary closing. On the next line, include your business
title, if appropriate. The following lines may contain your
individual contact information, such as a telephone number or
an e-mail address, if not included in the letterhead or the body
of your letter. Sign the letter in the space between the
complimentary closing and your name.
End Notations Business letters sometimes require additional information that
is placed at the left margin, two spaces below the typed name
and title of the writer in a long letter, four spaces below in a
short letter.
698
Reference initials show the letter writer’s initials in capital
letters, followed by a slash mark (or colon), and then the initials
of the person typing the letter in lowercase letters, as shown in
Figure L–3. When the writer is also the person typing the letter,
no initials are needed.
Enclosure notations indicate that the writer is sending
material (such as an invoice or an article) along with the letter.
Note that you should mention the enclosure in the body of the
letter. Enclosure notations may take several forms:
► Enclosure: Final Safety Report ► Enclosures (2) ► Enc. or Encs.
Copy notation (“cc:”) tells the reader that a copy of the letter
is being sent to the named recipient(s) (see Figure L–3). Use a
blind-copy notation (“bcc:”) when you do not want the
addressee to know that a copy is being sent to someone else. A
blind-copy notation appears only on the copy, not on the
original (“bcc: Dr. Brenda Shelton”). See the Ethics Note in e-
mail.
Continuing Pages If a letter requires a second page (or, in rare cases, more),
always carry at least two lines of the body text over to that page.
Use plain (nonletterhead) paper of quality equivalent to that of
the letterhead stationery for the second page. It should have a
699
header with the recipient’s name, the page number, and the
date. Place the header text in the upper left-hand corner or
across the page, as shown in Figure L–4.
FIGURE L–4. Alternative Headers for the Second Page of a Letter
For additional details on letter formats and design, you may wish to consult a guide such as Sabin, W. A. (2010). The Gregg reference manual (11th ed.). New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
2
700
like / as To avoid confusion between like and as, remember that like is a
preposition and as (or as if ) is a conjunction. Use like with a
noun or pronoun that is not followed by a verb.
► The supervisor still behaves like a novice.
Use as before clauses, which contain verbs.
► He responded as we hoped he would. ► The presentation seemed as if it would never end.
Like and as are used in comparisons: Like is used in
constructions that omit the verb, and as is used when the verb is
retained.
► He adapted to the new system like a duck to water. ► He adapted to the new system as a duck adapts to water.
701
listening Effective listening enables the listener to understand the
directions of an instructor, the message in a speaker’s
presentation, the goals of a manager, and the needs and wants
of customers. Above all, it lays the foundation for productive
communication.
Fallacies About Listening Most people assume that because they can hear, they know how
to listen. In fact, hearing is passive, whereas listening is active.
Hearing voices in a crowd or a ringing telephone requires no
analysis and no active involvement — we have no choice but to
hear such sounds. Listening, however, requires actively
focusing on a speaker, interpreting the message, and assessing
its worth. Listening also requires that you consider the context
of messages and the differences in meaning that may be the
result of differences in the speaker’s and the listener’s
occupation, education, culture, sex, race, or other factors. See
also biased language, connotation / denotation, English as a
second language, and global communication.
Active Listening To become an active listener, you need to take the following
steps:
Step 1: Make a Conscious Decision
702
The first step to active listening is simply making up your mind
to listen. Active listening requires a conscious effort. This well-
known precept offers good advice: “Seek first to understand and
then to be understood.”
Step 2: Define Your Purpose Knowing why you are listening can go a long way toward
managing the most common listening problems: letting your
attention drift, formulating your response while the speaker is
still talking, and interrupting the speaker. To help you define
your purpose for listening, ask yourself these questions:
What kind of information do I hope to get from this exchange, and how will I use it? What kind of message do I want to send while I am listening? (Do I want to portray understanding, determination, flexibility, competence, or patience?) What factors — boredom, daydreaming, anger, impatience — might interfere with listening during the interaction? How can I keep these factors from placing a barrier between the speaker and me?
Step 3: Take Specific Actions Becoming an active listener requires a willingness to become a
responder rather than a reactor. A reactor simply says the first
thing that comes to mind or draws a conclusion without
checking to make sure that he or she accurately understands
the message. In contrast, a responder waits to be certain that he
or she understands the speaker’s intended message before
3
703
responding. Take the following actions to help you become a
responder and not a reactor.
Make a conscious effort to be impartial when evaluating a message. For example, do not dismiss a message because you dislike the speaker or are distracted by the speaker’s appearance, mannerisms, or accent. Slow down the communication by asking for more information or by paraphrasing the message received before you offer your thoughts. Paraphrasing lets the speaker know you are listening, gives the speaker an opportunity to clear up any misunderstanding, and keeps you focused. Listen with empathy by putting yourself in the speaker’s position. When people feel they are being listened to empathetically, they tend to respond with appreciation and cooperation, thereby improving the communication. Take notes, when possible, to help you stay focused on what a speaker is saying. Note-taking not only communicates your attentiveness to the speaker but also reinforces the message and helps you remember it.
Step 4: Adapt to the Situation The requirements of active listening differ from one situation to
another. For example, when you are listening to a lecture, you
may be listening only for specific information. However, if you
are working on a team project that depends on everyone’s
contribution, you need to listen at the highest level so that you
can gather information as well as pick up on nuances the other
704
speakers may be communicating. See also collaborative
writing.
Covey, S. R. (2004). The seven habits of highly effective people: Powerful lessons in
personal change (15th ed.). New York, NY: Free Press.
3
705
lists Vertically stacked lists of words, phrases, and other items are
often highlighted with bullets, numbers, or letters to set them
apart from surrounding text. Lists can save readers time by
allowing them to see at a glance specific items or key points.
They also help readers by breaking up complex statements and
by focusing on such information as steps in sequence, materials
or parts needed, questions or concluding points, and
recommendations, as shown in Figures L–5 and I–1.
FIGURE L–5. Bulleted List in a Paragraph
As Figure L–5 also shows, you should provide context for a
706
list with an introductory sentence followed by a colon (or no
punctuation for an incomplete sentence). Ensure coherence by
following the list with some reference to the list or the
statement that introduced it.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Using Lists Follow your organization’s practices, or use these guidelines for consistency and formatting.
CONSISTENCY
✓ Do not overuse lists or create extended lists in documents or in presentation slides.
✓ List only comparable items, such as tasks or equipment, that are balanced in importance (as in Figure L–5).
✓ Begin each listed item in the same way — whether with nouns, verbs, or other parts of speech — and maintain parallel structure throughout.
✓ List bulleted items in a logical order, keeping your audience and purpose in mind. See also methods of development and persuasion.
FORMATTING
✓ Capitalize the first word in each listed item, unless doing so is visually awkward.
✓ Use periods or other ending punctuation when the listed items are complete sentences.
✓ Avoid commas or semicolons following items, and do not use the conjunction and before the last item in a list.
707
✓ Use numbers to indicate sequence or rank. ✓ Follow each number with a period. ✓ Use bullets (round, square, arrow) when you do not wish to
indicate rank or sequence. ✓ When lists need subdivisions, use letters with numbers (see
outlining).
708
logic errors Logic is the study of the principles of reasoning. In most
writing, especially in writing intended to persuade an audience,
logic is essential to demonstrating that your conclusions are
valid. This entry describes typical errors in logic that can
undermine the point you are trying to communicate and your
credibility. See also persuasion.
ETHICS NOTE
Many logic errors occur unintentionally. However, when they are used intentionally to mislead readers, that practice is unethical. See also ethics in writing.
Lack of Reason When a statement is contrary to the reader’s common sense,
that statement is not reasonable. If, for example, you stated,
“New York City is a small town,” your reader might immediately
question your statement. However, if you stated, “Although
New York City’s population is over eight million, it is composed
of neighborhoods that function as small towns,” your reader
could probably accept the statement as reasonable.
Sweeping Generalizations Sweeping generalizations are statements that are too broad or
all-inclusive to be supportable. They are statements that
709
disregard exceptions: A flat statement such as “Management is
never concerned about employees” ignores evidence that many
managers are in fact concerned for their employees. Such
generalizations weaken your credibility.
Non Sequiturs A non sequitur is a statement that does not logically follow a
previous statement.
► I cleared off my desk, and the report is due today.
The missing link in these statements is that the writer cleared
his or her desk to make space for materials to help finish the
report that is due today. Avoid non sequiturs by making sure
you explicitly state the logical connections of ideas and facts in
your writing.
False Cause A false cause (also called post hoc, ergo propter hoc) refers to
the logical fallacy that because one event followed another
event, the first somehow caused the second.
► I didn’t bring my umbrella today. No wonder it is now raining.
► Because we now have our board meetings at the Education Center, our management turnover rate has declined.
Such errors in reasoning can happen when the writer hastily
concludes that two events are related without examining
710
whether a causal connection between them actually exists.
Biased or Suppressed Evidence A conclusion reached as a result of biased or suppressed
evidence — self-serving data, questionable sources, purposely
omitted or incomplete facts — is both illogical and unethical.
Suppose you are preparing a report on the acceptance of a new
policy among employees. If you distribute questionnaires only
to those who think the policy is effective, the resulting evidence
will be biased. Intentionally ignoring relevant data that might
not support your position not only produces inaccurate results
but is unethical.
Fact Versus Opinion Distinguish between fact and opinion. Facts include verifiable
data or statements; opinions are personal conclusions that may
or may not be based on facts. For example, it is verifiable that
distilled water boils at 100 °C; that it tastes better or worse than
tap water is an opinion. Distinguish facts from opinions so that
readers can draw their own conclusions.
Loaded Arguments When you include an opinion in a statement and then reach
conclusions that are based on that statement, you are loading
the argument. Consider the following opening for a memo:
► I have several suggestions to improve the poorly written
711
policy manual. First, we should change ...
Unless everyone agrees that the manual is poorly written,
readers may reject a writer’s entire message because they
disagree with this loaded premise. Conclusions reached with
loaded statements are weak and can produce negative reactions
in readers who detect the loading.
712
loose / lose Loose is an adjective meaning “not fastened” or “unrestrained.”
(“He discovered a loose wire.”) Lose is a verb meaning “be
deprived of” or “fail to win.” (“I hope we do not lose the
contract.”)
713
M
714
malapropisms A malapropism is a word that sounds similar to the one
intended but is ludicrously wrong in the context.
INCORRECT Our employees are less sedimentary now that we have a fitness center.
CORRECT Our employees are less sedentary now that we have a fitness center.
Intentional malapropisms are sometimes used in humorous
writing; unintentional malapropisms can confuse readers and
embarrass a writer. See also figures of speech.
715
maps Maps are often used to show specific geographic areas and
features (such as roads, mountains, and rivers). They can also
illustrate geographic distributions of populations, climate
patterns, corporate branch office locations, and so forth. The
map in Figure M–1, from an environmental assessment, shows
the overlapping geographic areas served by three electric
utilities in Missouri, Iowa, and Illinois. Note that the map
contains a figure number and title, scale of distances, key (or
legend), compass, and distinctive highlighting for emphasis.
Maps are often used in reports, proposals, brochures,
environmental impact statements, and other documents in
which readers need to know the location or geographic
orientation of natural and human-constructed features. For
maps and cartographic resources, see
www.lib.utexas.edu/maps.
716
FIGURE M–1. Map
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Creating and Using Maps
✓ Follow the guidelines discussed in visuals for placement of maps. ✓ Label each map clearly, and assign each map a figure number if it
717
is one of a number of illustrations. ✓ Clearly identify all significant boundaries while eliminating those
unnecessary for your purposes. ✓ Eliminate unnecessary information that may clutter a map. For
example, if the purpose of the map is to show population centers, do not include mountain elevations, rivers, or other physical features.
✓ Include a scale of miles/kilometers or feet/meters to give your readers an indication of the map’s proportions.
✓ Indicate which direction is north with an arrow or a compass symbol.
✓ Emphasize key features by using color, shading, dots, crosshatching, or other appropriate symbols.
✓ Include a key, or legend, that explains what the different colors, shadings, or symbols represent.
✓ Consider copyright and potential plagiarism when incorporating maps found online into your documents.
718
maybe / may be Maybe (one word) is an adverb meaning “perhaps.” (“Maybe
the legal staff can resolve this issue.”) May be (two words) is a
verb phrase. (“It may be necessary to hire a specialist.”)
719
media / medium Media is the plural of medium and requires a plural verb.
► Many communication media are available today. ► The Internet is a multifaceted medium.
720
meetings Meetings enable people to share information and collaborate
more productively than exchanges of multiple messages or
conversations allow. Like a presentation, a successful meeting
requires planning and preparation. See also selecting the
medium.
Planning a Meeting Begin by determining the focus of the meeting, deciding who
should attend, and choosing the best time and place to hold it.
Prepare an agenda for the meeting, and determine who should
take the minutes.
Determine the Purpose of the Meeting The first step in planning a meeting is to focus on the desired
outcome by asking questions to help you determine the
meeting’s purpose: What should participants know, believe, or
be able to do as a result of attending the meeting? Once you’ve
narrowed your focus, write a purpose statement for the meeting
that answers the questions what and why.
► The purpose of this meeting is to gather ideas from the sales force [what] in order to create a successful sales campaign for our new Model PN-4 tablet computer [why].
Decide Who Should Attend Determine first the key people who need to attend the meeting.
721
If a meeting must be held without some key participants, ask
for their contributions prior to the meeting or invite them to
participate by speakerphone, videoconference, or other remote
methods.
Choose the Meeting Time Schedule a meeting for a time when all or most key people can
attend. Consider other factors, such as time of day and length of
the meeting, that can influence its outcome:
Monday morning is often a time people use to prepare for the coming week’s work. Friday afternoon is often when people focus on completing the current week’s tasks. Long meetings may need to include breaks to allow participants to respond to messages and take restroom breaks. Meetings held during the last fifteen minutes of the day will be quick, but few people will remember what happened. Remote participants may need consideration for their time zones.
Choose the Meeting Location Having a meeting at your own location can give you an
advantage: You feel more comfortable than your guests, who
are new to the surroundings. Holding the meeting on someone
else’s premises, however, can signal cooperation. For balance,
especially when people are meeting for the first time or are
discussing sensitive issues, meet at a neutral site, where no one
722
gains an advantage and attendees may feel freer to participate.
Establish the Agenda A tool for focusing the group, the agenda is an outline of what
the meeting will address, as shown in Figure M–2. Always
prepare an agenda, even if it is only an informal list of main
topics. Ideally, the agenda should be distributed to attendees a
day or two before the meeting. For a longer meeting in which
participants are required to make a presentation, try to
distribute the agenda a week or more in advance.
FIGURE M–2. Meeting Agenda
The agenda should list the attendees, the meeting time and
place, and the topics you plan to discuss. If the meeting
723
includes presentations, list the time allotted for each speaker.
Finally, indicate an approximate length for the meeting so that
participants can plan the rest of their day.
If the agenda is distributed in advance of the meeting, it
should be accompanied by a memo or an e-mail informing
people of the following:
The purpose of the meeting The date and place of the meeting The meeting start and stop times The names of the people invited Instructions on how to prepare for the meeting
Figure M–3 shows a cover message to accompany an agenda.
724
FIGURE M–3. E-mail Announcing a Meeting with an Attached Agenda
Assign the Minute-Taking Delegate the minute-taking to someone other than the leader.
The minute-taker should record major decisions and assigned
tasks. To avoid misunderstandings, clarify that the minute-taker
needs to record each assignment, the person responsible for it,
725
and its due date. If the minute-taker will need to follow any
legal or organizational rules for recording the minutes,
establish that in advance of the meeting. The minute-taker is
responsible for distributing the minutes to everyone, including
appropriate nonattendees. For a standing committee, it is best
to rotate the responsibility of taking minutes. See also minutes
of meetings and note-taking.
Conducting the Meeting Assign someone to write on a board or project an image of
information that needs to be viewed by everyone present.
During the meeting, keep to your agenda; however, create a
productive environment by allowing room for differing views
and fostering an environment in which participants listen
respectfully to one another.
Consider the feelings, thoughts, ideas, and needs of others —do not let your own agenda blind you to other points of view. Help other participants feel valued and respected by listening to them and responding to what they say. Respond positively to the comments of others whenever possible. Consider communication styles and approaches that are different from your own, particularly those from other cultures. See also global communication.
Deal with Conflict
726
Despite your best efforts, conflict is inevitable. However,
conflict is potentially valuable; when managed positively, it can
stimulate creative thinking by challenging complacency and
showing ways to achieve goals more efficiently or economically.
See collaborative writing.
Members of any group are likely to vary in their personalities
and attitudes, and you may encounter people who approach
meetings differently. Consider the following tactics for the
interruptive, negative, rambling, overly quiet, and territorial
personality types.
The interruptive person rarely lets anyone finish a sentence and may intimidate the group’s quieter members. Tell that person in a firm but nonhostile tone to let the others finish in the interest of getting everyone’s input. By addressing the issue directly, you signal to the group the importance of putting common goals first. The negative person has difficulty accepting change and often considers a new idea or project from a negative point of view. Such negativity, if left unchecked, can demoralize the group and suppress enthusiasm for new ideas. If the negative person brings up a valid point, however, ask for the group’s suggestions to remedy the issue being raised. If the negative person’s reactions are not valid or are outside the agenda, state the necessity of staying focused on the agenda and perhaps recommend a separate meeting to address those other issues. The rambling person cannot collect his or her thoughts
727
quickly enough to verbalize them succinctly. Restate or clarify this person’s ideas. Try to strike a balance between providing your own interpretation and drawing out the person’s intended meaning. The overly quiet person may be timid or may just be deep in thought. Ask for this person’s ideas, being careful not to embarrass the person. In some cases, you can have a quiet person jot down his or her ideas and give them to you later. The territorial person fiercely defends his or her group against real or perceived threats and may refuse to cooperate with members of other departments, companies, and so on. Point out that although such concerns may be valid, everyone is working toward the same overall goal, and that goal should take precedence.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Many businesses discourage or do not allow smartphones and digital devices in meetings. If your organization allows such devices, meeting attendees should keep them on silent or on vibrator mode and out of sight so that they do not interrupt the meeting. If you are expecting a crucial call, inform the meeting chair and leave the room to respond. The best practice is to have a colleague or your assistant take the call or bring a note to you in the meeting when the call comes in.
Close the Meeting Just before closing the meeting, review all decisions and
assignments. Paraphrase each to help the group focus on what
individual participants have agreed to do and to ensure that the
728
minutes will be complete and accurate. Now is the time to raise
questions and to clarify any misunderstandings. Set a date by
which everyone at the meeting can expect to receive copies of
the minutes. Finally, thank everyone for participating, and
close the meeting on a positive note.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Planning and Conducting Meetings
✓ Develop a purpose statement for the meeting to focus your planning.
✓ Invite only those essential to fulfilling the purpose of the meeting. ✓ Select a time and place convenient to all those attending. ✓ Create an agenda, and distribute it at least a day or two before the
meeting. ✓ Assign someone to take meeting minutes. ✓ Ensure that the minutes record key decisions; assignments; due
dates; and the date, time, and location of any follow-up meeting. ✓ Follow the agenda to keep everyone focused. ✓ Respect the views of others and how they are expressed. ✓ Use the strategies in this entry for handling conflict and attendees
whose style of expression may make it difficult to get everyone’s best thinking.
✓ Close the meeting by reviewing key decisions and assignments.
729
memos Memos use a standard format (To:, From:, Date:, Subject:). Even
for organizations in which e-mail messages are used for routine
communication and other internal documents, a printed or an
attached memo with organizational letterhead can
communicate with formality and authority. In addition, a memo
can offer the full range of word-processing features for short
reports and proposals. Paper memos are also useful in
manufacturing and service industries, as well as in other
businesses where employees do not have easy access to e-mail.
For a discussion of writing strategies for memos, see
correspondence. See also selecting the medium.
Memo Format The memo shown in Figure M–4 illustrates a typical memo
format. As this example illustrates, the use of headings and lists
foster clarity by providing emphasis and highlighting
organization. See also letters. For a discussion of subject lines,
see page 117.
730
731
FIGURE M–4. Typical Memo Format (Printed or Attached to E-mail)
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
As with e-mail, be alert to the practices of addressing and distributing memos in your organization. Consider who should receive or needs to be copied on a memo and in what order—senior managers, for example, take precedence over junior managers. If rank does not apply, alphabetizing recipients by last name is safe.
Some organizations ask writers to initial or sign formal
memos that are printed (hard copy) to verify that the writer
accepts responsibility for a memo’s content.
732
methods of development A logical method of development satisfies the readers’ need for
shape and structure in a document, whether it is an e-mail, a
report, or a Web page. It helps you as a writer move smoothly
and logically from the introduction to a conclusion. Choose the
method or combination of methods that best suits your subject,
audience, and purpose. Following are the most common
methods.
Cause-and-effect method of development begins with either the cause or the effect of an event. This approach can be used to develop a report that offers a solution to a problem, beginning with the problem and moving on to the solution, or vice versa. Chronological method of development emphasizes the time element of a sequence, as in an incident report that traces events as they occurred in time. Comparison method of development is useful when writing about a new topic that is in many ways similar to another topic that is more familiar to your readers. Definition method of development extends definitions with details, examples, comparisons, or other explanatory devices. See also defining terms. Division-and-classification method of development either separates a whole into component parts and discusses each part separately (division) or groups parts into categories that clarify the relationship of the parts (classification). General and specific methods of development proceed
733
either from general information to specific details or from specific information to a general conclusion. Order-of-importance method of development presents information in either decreasing order of importance, as in a proposal that begins with the most important point, or increasing order of importance, as in a presentation that ends with the most important point. Sequential method of development emphasizes the order of elements in a process and is particularly useful when writing step-by-step instructions. Spatial method of development describes the physical appearance of an object or area from top to bottom, inside to outside, front to back, and so on.
Rarely does a writer rely on only one of these methods.
Documents often blend methods of development. For example,
in a report that describes the organization of a company, you
might use elements from three methods of development. You
could divide the larger topic (the company) into operations
(division and classification), arrange the operations according
to what you see as their impact within the company (order of
importance), and present their manufacturing operations in the
order they occur (sequential). When outlining a document, you
may base your major division on one primary method of
development appropriate to your purpose and then subordinate
other methods to it.
734
minutes of meetings Organizations and committees refer to official records of their
meetings as minutes. Because minutes are often used to record
decisions and to settle disputes, they must be accurate,
complete, and clear. When approved, minutes of meetings are
official and can be used as evidence in legal proceedings. A
section from the minutes of a meeting is shown in Figure M–5.
FIGURE M–5. Minutes of a Meeting (Partial Section)
735
Keep your minutes brief and to the point. Except for
recording formally presented motions, which must be
transcribed word for word, summarize what occurs and
paraphrase discussions. To keep the minutes concise, follow a
set format, and use headings for each major point discussed.
See also note-taking.
Avoid abstractions and generalities; always be specific. Refer
to everyone in the same way—a lack of consistency in titles or
names may suggest deference to one person at the expense of
another. Avoid adjectives and adverbs that suggest good or bad
qualities, as in “Mr. Sturgess’s capable assistant read the
comprehensive report to the subcommittee.” Minutes should be
objective and impartial.
If a member of the committee is to follow up on something
and report back to the committee at its next meeting, clearly
state the person’s name and the responsibility he or she has
accepted.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Items to Include in Minutes of Meetings
✓ The name of the group or committee holding the meeting ✓ The topic of the meeting ✓ The kind of meeting (a regular meeting or a special meeting called
to discuss a specific subject or problem) ✓ The number of members present and, for committees or boards of
ten or fewer members, the names of those present and absent
736
✓ The place, time, and date of the meeting ✓ A statement that the chair and the secretary were present or the
names of any substitutes ✓ A statement that the minutes of the previous meeting were
approved or revised ✓ A list of any reports that were read and approved ✓ All the main motions that were made, with statements as to
whether they were carried, defeated, or tabled (vote postponed), and the names of those who made and seconded the motions (motions that were withdrawn are not mentioned)
✓ A full description of resolutions that were adopted and a simple statement of any that were rejected
✓ A record of all ballots, indicating the number of votes cast for and against resolutions
✓ The time the meeting was adjourned (officially ended) and the place, time, and date of the next meeting
✓ The recording secretary’s signature and typed name and, if desired, the signature of the chairperson
737
mission statements A mission statement articulates an organization’s unique reason
for being and attempts to motivate its stakeholders (employees,
customers, and stockholders) to pursue common goals. (See
audience.) A good mission statement can achieve a focused
allocation of organizational resources by answering questions
such as the following: Why do we exist? What is our business?
What are we trying to accomplish? A good mission statement
can foster the success of an organization.
Mission statements can be distributed in an organization’s
annual report, framed for display, or repurposed for the Web
and social media applications. (See also repurposing.) Figure
M–6 shows a typical mission statement.
738
FIGURE M–6. Mission Statement
Writing a Mission Statement Most mission statements have certain elements in common,
739
such as a statement of purpose; a description of the
organization’s line of business; and an acknowledgment of the
organization’s stakeholders, including customers, employees,
and stockholders. Following is a list of various goals that
mission statements may be aimed to achieve:
Reflect an organization’s purpose, function, and primary reason for existing Guide the development and execution of organizational strategies Offer benchmarks toward which long-range goals can be targeted and against which progress can be measured Build and communicate company values over periods of time, thus providing an organization and its employees with a sense of identity Distinguish an organization from others of the same type, and identify the scope of the organization’s operations in product and market terms
Before beginning to write a mission statement, get approval
of your general approach from top management. Then
determine who will write the draft. In a small organization, the
top person normally writes it. In a large organization, it is often
written by a committee made up of representatives from key
stakeholder groups.
Gather as much information as possible about your
organization and its goals by interviewing top management and
researching annual reports and other company documents. If
740
you have a committee to assist you, use brainstorming to
answer the following questions, which will help you understand
the context of the mission statement:
Why was our organization established? Who are our customers and clients? What needs do we meet? What image do we want our products and services to project? What message do we want to send the community, customers, stockholders, and employees about the organization? Where do we see our organization in five or ten years? What does our organizational culture need to be to get us there?
Next, create an outline (see outlining) and then write a draft
(see writing a draft). As you write, try to find words and phrases
that capture the essence of the organization’s purpose and
goals. Avoid jargon, buzzwords, platitudes, meaningless
superlatives, overuse of the word quality, and other language
that can move readers to cynicism. A mission to “Be the best
computer manufacturer in the world” sounds good, but “To
develop products that adapt to the ever-changing needs of our
customers” is a good deal more definable, measurable, and
actionable—and it is motivational.
When you are satisfied with your draft, circulate it to selected
reviewers (involving as many employees, customers, and
741
stockholders as possible, to give everyone a sense of
ownership). Then revise the draft based on the feedback you
receive.
Format and Length The format and length may vary, from a pithy one-sentence
statement—such as a pet-food company’s concise “To enhance
the well-being of dogs and cats”—to a longer document that
includes the company’s vision, values, philosophy, objectives,
and strategies. Avoid a lengthy mission statement because
readers will more readily remember a shorter statement and
incorporate its values into their daily business activities and
planning. You can find mission statements at organizational
Web sites as well as at general sites, such as
www.missionstatements.com. See also business plans.
742
mixed constructions A mixed construction is a sentence in which the elements do
not sensibly fit together. The problem may be a grammar error,
a logic error, or both.
The original sentence mixes a subordinate clause (because the
copier wouldn’t start) with a verb (explains) that attempts to
incorrectly use the subordinate clause as its subject. The
revision correctly uses the pronoun we as the subject of the
main clause. See also sentence construction.
743
modifiers Modifiers are words, phrases, or clauses that expand, limit, or
make more specific the meaning of other elements in a
sentence. Although we can create sentences without modifiers,
we often need the detail and clarification they provide.
WITHOUT MODIFIERS Production decreased.
WITH MODIFIERS Glucose production decreased rapidly.
Most modifiers function as adjectives or adverbs. Adjectives
describe qualities or impose boundaries on the words they
modify.
► noisy machinery, ten files, this printer, a workstation
An adverb modifies an adjective, another adverb, a verb, or an
entire clause.
► Under test conditions, the brake pad showed much less wear than it did under actual conditions. [The adverb much modifies the adjective less.]
► The redesigned brake pad lasted much longer. [The adverb much modifies another adverb longer.]
► The wrecking ball hit the wall of the building hard. [The adverb hard modifies the verb hit.]
► Surprisingly, the motor failed even after passing all those durability and performance tests. [The adverb surprisingly modifies an entire clause.]
744
Adverbs are intensifiers when they increase the impact of
adjectives (very fine, too high) or adverbs (very slowly, rather
quickly). Be cautious using intensifiers; their overuse can lead
to vagueness and a resulting lack of precision.
Stacked (Jammed) Modifiers Stacked (or jammed) modifiers are strings of modifiers
preceding nouns that make writing unclear or difficult to read.
► Your staffing-level authorization reassessment plan should result in a major improvement.
The noun plan is preceded by three long modifiers, a string that
forces the reader to slow down to interpret its meaning. Stacked
modifiers often result from the overuse of buzzwords or
jargon. See how breaking up the stacked modifiers makes the
example easier to read.
► Your plan for reassessing the staffing-level authorizations should result in a major improvement.
Misplaced Modifiers A modifier is misplaced when it applies to the wrong word or
phrase. A misplaced modifier can cause ambiguity.
► We almost lost all the files. [The files were almost lost but were not.]
► We lost almost all the files. [Most of the files were in fact lost.]
745
Note the two meanings possible when the phrase is shifted in
the following sentences:
► The equipment without the accessories sold the best. [Different types of equipment were available, some with and some without accessories.]
► The equipment sold the best without the accessories. [One type of equipment was available, and the accessories were optional.]
To avoid ambiguity, place clauses as close as possible to the
words they modify.
REMOTE We sent the brochure to several local firms that had four-color art.
CLOSE We sent the brochure that had four-color art to several local firms.
Squinting Modifiers A squinting modifier is one that can be interpreted as modifying
either of two sentence elements simultaneously, thereby
confusing readers about which is intended.
► We agreed on the next day to make the adjustments. [Did they agree to make the adjustments on the next day? Or on the next day, did they agree to make the adjustments?]
A squinting modifier can sometimes be corrected simply by
changing its position, but often it is better to rewrite the
sentence.
► We agreed that on the next day we would make the
746
adjustments. [The adjustments were to be made on the next day.]
► On the next day, we agreed that we would make the adjustments. [The agreement was made on the next day.]
See also dangling modifiers.
747
mood The grammatical term mood refers to the verb functions that
indicate whether the verb is intended to make a statement, ask
a question, give a command, or express a hypothetical
possibility.
The indicative mood states a fact, gives an opinion, or asks a
question.
► The setting is correct. / Is the setting correct?
The imperative mood expresses a command, suggestion,
request, or plea. In the imperative mood, the implied subject
you is not expressed. (“Install the system today.”)
The subjunctive mood expresses something that is contrary
to fact or that is conditional, hypothetical, or purely
imaginative; it can also express a wish, a doubt, or a possibility.
In the subjunctive mood, were is used instead of was in clauses
that speculate about the present or future, and the base form
(be) is used following certain verbs, such as propose, request, or
insist. See also progressive tense.
► If we were to close the sale today, we would meet our monthly goal.
► The senior partner insisted that she [I, you, we, they] be the project leader.
The most common use of the subjunctive mood is to express
748
that the writer considers a condition to be contrary to fact. If the
condition is not considered to be contrary to fact, use the
indicative mood.
SUBJUNCTIVE If I were president of the firm, I would change several hiring policies.
INDICATIVE Although I am president of the firm, I don’t control every aspect of its policies.
749
Ms. / Miss / Mrs. Ms. is used in business and public life to address or refer to a
woman. Some women may indicate a preference for Ms., Miss,
or Mrs., which you should honor. If a woman has an academic
or a professional title, use the appropriate form of address
(Doctor, Professor, Captain) instead of Ms., Miss, or Mrs. See
also biased language.
750
mutual / common Common is used when two or more persons (or things) share
something or possess it jointly.
► We have a common desire to make the program succeed. ► Our departments have common office space.
Mutual may also mean “shared” (mutual friend, of mutual
benefit), but it usually implies something given and received
reciprocally and is used with reference to only two persons or
parties.
► Evans respects Roth, and from my observations, the respect is mutual. [Roth also respects Evans.]
751
N
752
narration Narration is a writing that describes a series of events in a
prescribed (often chronological) sequence. Much narrative
writing explains how something happened: a laboratory
procedure, a site visit, an accident, a decision reached at an
important meeting. See also chronological method of
development, trip reports, and incident reports.
Effective narration rests on two key writing techniques: a
careful, accurate sequencing of events and a consistent point of
view on the part of the narrator. Narrative sequence and
essential shifts in the sequence are signaled in three ways:
chronology (clock and calendar time), transitional words
pertaining to time (before, after, next, first, while, then), and
verb tenses that indicate whether something has happened
(past tense) or is under way (present tense). The point of view
indicates the writer’s relation to the information being narrated
as reflected in the use of person. Narration usually expresses a
first or third-person point of view. First-person narration
indicates that the writer is a participant, and third-person
narration indicates that the writer is writing about what
happened to someone or something else.
The narrative shown in Figure N–1 tells the story of a train
accident at the Chicago Loop in detail so that any lessons
learned could be used to improve safety. Although narration
often exists in combination with other forms of discourse
753
(description, exposition, persuasion), avoid interrupting a
narrative with lengthy explanations or analyses. Explain only
what a reader would need to follow the events. See audience.
754
FIGURE N–1. Narration from an Accident Report
SOURCE: National Transportation Safety Board, “Railroad Accident Brief:
755
Chicago Transit Authority, DCA-02-FR-005, Chicago, Illinois, February 26, 2002.” www.ntsb.gov/investigations/AccidentReports/Reports/RAB0304.pdf
756
nature Nature, when used to mean “kind” or “sort,” is vague. Avoid this
usage in your writing. Say exactly what you mean.
757
needless to say The phrase needless to say sometimes occurs in speech and
writing. Eliminate the phrase, or replace it with a more
descriptive word choice.
758
newsletter articles If your organization publishes a newsletter, you may be asked
to contribute an article on a subject in your area of expertise. In
fact, an article is a good way to promote your work or your
department.
Before you begin to write, consider the traditional questions
of journalism (Who did it? What was done? Where was it done?
When was it done? Why was it done?) and then add how, which
may be of as much interest to your colleagues as any of the five
w’s. Next, determine whether the company or management has
an official policy toward or attitude about your subject. If it
does, adhere to it as you prepare your article. See also audience
and context.
Review several fairly recent issues of the newsletter, and
study the style and tone of the writing and the approach used
for various kinds of subjects. Then ask yourself the following
question about your subject: What is its significance to the
organization and to my coworkers? The answer to that question
should help you establish the style, tone, and approach for your
article and also heavily influence your conclusion.
Research for a newsletter article frequently consists of
interviewing for information. Interview key personnel
concerned with your subject. Get all available information and
all points of view. Be sure to give maximum credit to the
maximum number of people by quoting statements from those
759
involved in projects and naming those who have developed
initiatives. See also quotations.
Figure N–2 shows an article written for Connection, a
newsletter produced by Ken Cook Company and distributed to
current and prospective clients. This article describes how the
company employed a third-party expert to perform an audit of
the company’s Quality Management System (designed to
comply with ISO 9001:2000 standards). Notice the inset
quotation (sometimes called a pull quote), which draws readers
to the article and gives them a sense of the article’s content. By
describing this process, the article aims to demonstrate Ken
Cook Company’s “commitment to quality.”
760
FIGURE N–2. Newsletter Article
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
761
Writing Newsletter Articles
✓ Write an intriguing title to catch the audience’s attention; rhetorical questions often work well.
✓ Include as many eye-catching photographs or visuals as appropriate to entice your audience to read the lead paragraph of your introduction. See also layout and design.
✓ Fashion a lead (or lede), or first paragraph, that will encourage further reading. The first paragraph generally makes the transition from the title to the body of the article.
✓ Offer a well-developed presentation of your subject to hold readers’ interest to the end of the article.
✓ Write a conclusion that emphasizes the significance of your subject to your audience and stresses the points you want your readers to retain. See emphasis.
✓ Follow the steps listed in the “Checklist of the Writing Process” as you prepare your newsletter article.
762
newsletters Newsletters are designed to inform and to create and sustain
interest and membership in an organization. They can also be
used to sell products and services. We show an example of a
newsletter in the entry newsletter articles. The Web site for the
American Marketing Association also provides a number of
sample e-newsletters
(www.ama.org/publications/eNewsletters/Pages/default.aspx).
See also blogs and forums.
Types of Newsletters Organizational newsletters, like the one shown in Figure N–2,
are sent to employees, clients, or members of an association to
keep them informed about issues regarding their company or
group, such as the development of new products or policies or
the accomplishments of individuals or teams. Stories in
organizational newsletters can both enhance the group’s image
and foster pride among employees of the organization’s
products or services. For example, Figure N–2 shows how
important quality management is to Ken Cook Company.
Subscription newsletters are designed to attract and build a
readership interested in buying specific products or services or
in learning more about a specific subject. Subscribers are
buying information, and they expect value for their money. For
example, a person with experience in the stock market could
create a financial newsletter and charge subscribers a monthly
763
fee for the investing advice in that newsletter; a person who
collects movie memorabilia could create an online newsletter
that includes stories about ways to find and sell rare movie
posters.
Developing Newsletters Before you begin to develop a newsletter, decide on its purpose
and the specific audience you will target; then make sure the
newsletter’s appearance and content reflect the shared interests
and values of the readership. Newsletters often involve
collaborative writing in which different individuals work on
design, content, and project management. See also persuasion
and promotional writing. If you are asked to contribute an
article to a newsletter, see newsletter articles.
You will need to develop a contact list of your readers and
decide on the most strategic way to get the newsletter to these
readers: postal mail, interoffice mail, e-mail, or Web or blog
posting. Consider using a list-hosting service.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Update your subscriber lists regularly to be sure you are contacting only those who wish to continue receiving your newsletter. You risk damaging your reputation and that of your company if you badger former customers or current clients with unwanted mail or e-mail. Include an opt-out waiver with each newsletter sent, giving subscribers the opportunity to remove themselves from your mailing list. If sending a newsletter electronically, be sure to include opt-out instructions to
1
764
ensure compliance with such laws as the CAN-SPAM Act of 2003.
Your research should include a review of trade journals,
industry blogs, business and technology magazines, Web news
sites, and other sources to find specific angles for the articles
that will appeal to your select audience. Attempt to provide
content that your readers will not find elsewhere — for
example, by interviewing and profiling customers, association
members, or employees. Check your facts meticulously —
newsletter readers are generally specialists in their fields.
Because newsletters are often distributed to branches and
clients abroad, see global communication and global graphics.
See also interviewing for information.
As shown in Figure N–2, a newsletter’s format should be
simple and consistent yet visually appealing to your readership.
Use the active voice and a conversational tone. Use headings
and bullets to break up the text, and make the newsletter easy to
read. Keep your sentences simple and your paragraphs short.
See conciseness and layout and design.
Using desktop-publishing or Web-development software,
create newspaper columns and one or two visuals per page that
complement the text. On the front page, identify the
organization and include the date, volume and issue numbers,
and a contents box. For Web newsletters, follow the principles
of good Web design. See also photographs and writing for the
Web.
765
E-mail list-hosting services have their own servers and provide commercial delivery of premium e-mail that often contains graphic and other digital forms used for advertising.
1
766
nominalizations A nominalization is a noun form of a verb that is often
combined with vague and general (or “weak”) verbs, like make,
do, give, perform, and provide. Avoid nominalizations when
you can use specific verbs that communicate the same idea
more directly and concisely.
If you use nominalizations solely to make your writing sound
more formal, the result will be affectation. See also business
writing style, conciseness, plain language, and voice.
767
none None can be either a singular or a plural pronoun, depending
on the context. See also agreement.
► None of the material has been ordered. [Always use a singular verb with a singular noun—in this case, “material.”]
► None of the clients has been called yet. [Use a singular verb even with a plural noun (clients) if the intended emphasis is on the idea of not one.]
► None of the clients have been called yet. [Use a plural verb if you intend none to refer to all clients.]
For emphasis, substitute no one or not one for none and use a
singular verb.
768
nor / or Nor always follows neither in sentences with continuing
negation. (“They will neither support nor approve the plan.”)
Likewise, or follows either in sentences. (“The firm will accept
either a short-term or a long-term loan.”)
Two or more singular subjects joined by or or nor usually
take a singular verb. However, when one subject is singular and
one is plural, the verb agrees with the subject nearer to it. See
also conjunctions and parallel structure.
SINGULAR Neither the architect nor the client was happy with the design.
PLURAL Neither the architect nor the clients were happy with the design.
SINGULAR Neither the architects nor the client was happy with the design.
769
note-taking The purpose of note-taking is to summarize and record
information you extract during research. The challenge in
taking notes is to condense someone else’s thoughts into your
own words without distorting the original thinking. As you
extract information, let your knowledge of the audience and the
purpose of your writing guide you. For taking notes at a
meeting, see minutes of meetings.
ETHICS NOTE
Resist copying your source word for word as you take notes; instead, paraphrase the author’s idea or concept. If you only change a few words from a source and incorporate that text into your document without giving credit to your source, you will be guilty of plagiarism. See also paraphrasing.
If an expert source states something that is especially
precise, striking, or noteworthy or that reinforces your point,
you can justifiably quote the source directly and incorporate it
into your document. If you use a direct quotation, enclose the
material in quotation marks in your notes. In your finished
writing, document the source of your quotation. You will rarely
need to quote anything longer than a paragraph. See also
documenting sources and quotations.
When taking notes on abstract ideas, as opposed to factual
770
data, do not sacrifice clarity for brevity—notes expressing
concepts can lose their meaning if they are too brief. The test is
whether you can understand the note a week later and recall the
significant ideas of the passage.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Taking Notes
✓ Ask yourself the following questions: What information do I need to fulfill my purpose? What are the needs of my audience?
✓ Record only the most important ideas and concepts. Be sure to record all vital names, dates, and definitions.
✓ When in doubt about whether to take a note, consider the difficulty of finding the source again should you want it later.
✓ Use direct or indirect quotations when sources state something that is precise, striking, or noteworthy, or that succinctly reinforces a point you are making.
✓ Photocopy, scan, or download pages, and highlight passages that you intend to quote.
✓ Give proper credit. Record the author; title; publisher; place; page number; URL; and date of publication, posting, or retrieval. (On subsequent notes from the same source, include only the author and page number or URL.)
✓ Record notes in a way that you find efficient and useful for outlining, whether using the latest note-taking software or traditional index cards.
✓ Check your notes for accuracy against the original material before moving on to another source.
771
nouns DIRECTORY
Types of Nouns Noun Functions Collective Nouns Plural Nouns
A noun is a part of speech that names a person, a place, a thing,
a concept, an action, or a quality.
Types of Nouns The two basic types of nouns are proper nouns and common
nouns. Proper nouns, which are capitalized, name specific
people, places, and things (H. G. Wells, Boston, United Nations,
Nobel Prize). See also capitalization.
Common nouns, which are not capitalized unless they begin
sentences or appear in titles, name general classes or
categories of persons, places, things, concepts, actions, and
qualities (writer, city, organization, award). Common nouns
include concrete nouns, abstract nouns, collective nouns, count
nouns, and mass nouns.
Concrete nouns are common nouns used to identify those
things that can be discerned by the five senses (paper,
keyboard, glue, nail, grease).
772
Abstract nouns are common nouns that name ideas,
qualities, or concepts that cannot be discerned by the five
senses (loyalty, pride, valor, peace, devotion).
Collective nouns are common nouns that indicate a group or
collection. They are plural in meaning but singular in form
(audience, jury, staff, committee). (See “Collective Nouns” for
advice on using singular or plural forms with collective nouns.)
Count nouns are concrete nouns that identify things that can
be separated into countable units (desks, envelopes, printers,
pencils, books).
Mass nouns are concrete nouns that identify things that
cannot be separated into countable units (water, air, electricity,
oil, cement). See also English as a second language.
Noun Functions Nouns function as subjects of verbs, direct and indirect objects
of verbs, objects of prepositions, subjective and objective
complements, or appositives.
► The metal failed during the test. [subject] ► The bricklayer cemented the blocks efficiently. [direct
object of a verb] ► The state presented our department a safety award.
[indirect object] ► The event occurred within the year. [object of a
preposition]
773
► A dynamo is a generator. [subjective complement] ► The regional manager was appointed chairperson.
[objective complement] ► Philip Garcia, the treasurer, gave his report last.
[appositive]
Words normally used as nouns can also be used as adjectives
and adverbs.
► It is company policy. [adjective] ► He went home. [adverb]
Collective Nouns When a collective noun refers to a group as a whole, it takes a
singular verb and pronoun.
► The staff was divided on the issue and could not reach its decision until May 15.
When a collective noun refers to individuals within a group, it
takes a plural verb and pronoun.
► The staff have returned to their offices after the conference.
A better way to emphasize the individuals on the staff would be
to use the phrase the staff members.
► The staff members have returned to their offices after the conference.
774
Treat organization names and titles as singular.
► LRM Associates has grown 30 percent in the last three years; it will move to a new facility in January.
Plural Nouns Most nouns form the plural by adding s (desk/desks, pen/pens).
Nouns ending in ch, s, sh, x, and z form the plural by adding es.
► search/searches, glass/glasses, wish/wishes, six/sixes, buzz/buzzes
Nouns that end in a consonant plus y form the plural by
changing the y to ies (delivery/deliveries). Some nouns ending
in o add es to form the plural, but others add only s
(tomato/tomatoes, dynamo/dynamos). Some nouns ending in f
or fe add s to form the plural; others change the f or fe to ves.
► cliff/cliffs, cafe/cafes, hoof/hooves, knife/knives
Some nouns require an internal change to form the plural.
► woman/women, man/men, mouse/mice, goose/geese
Some nouns do not change in the plural form.
► many fish, several deer, fifty sheep
Some nouns remain in the plural form whether singular or
plural.
775
► headquarters, means, series, crossroads
Hyphenated and open compound nouns form the plural in the
main word.
► sons-in-law, high schools, editors in chief
Compound nouns written as one word add -s to the end (two
tablespoonfuls).
If you are unsure of the proper usage, check a dictionary. See
possessive case for a discussion of how nouns form
possessives.
776
number (grammar) Number is the grammatical property of nouns, pronouns, and
verbs that signifies whether one thing (singular) or more than
one thing (plural) is being referred to. (See also agreement.)
Nouns normally form the plural by simply adding -s or -es to
their singular forms.
► Partners in successful businesses are not always personal friends.
Some nouns require an internal change to form the plural.
► woman/women, man/men, goose/geese, mouse/mice
All pronouns except you change internally to form the plural.
► I/we, he/they, she/they, it/they
By adding s or es, most verbs show the singular of the third
person, present tense, indicative mood.
► he stands, she works, it goes
The verb be normally changes form to indicate the plural.
SINGULAR I am ready to begin work.
PLURAL We are ready to begin work.
777
numbers DIRECTORY
Numerals or Words Plurals Measurements Fractions Money Time Dates Addresses Documents
The standards for using numbers vary; however, unless you are
following an organizational or a professional style manual,
observe the following guidelines.
Numerals or Words Write numbers from zero through nine as words, and write
numbers ten and above as numerals.
► I rehearsed my presentation three times. ► The association added 152 new members.
Spell out numbers that begin a sentence, however, even if they
would otherwise be written as numerals.
► One hundred and fifty-two new members joined the
778
association.
If spelling out such a number seems awkward, rewrite the
sentence so that the number does not appear at the beginning
(“We added 152 new members.”).
Spell out approximate and round numbers.
► We’ve had more than a thousand requests this month.
In most writing, spell out ordinal numbers under nine (first
through ninth) and use numerals over nine (10th, 11th, and so
on) or when they modify a century (the twenty-first century).
However, avoid ordinal numbers in dates (use March 30 or 30
March, not March 30th). In mathematical copy or in copy with
lots of numbers, it may be less awkward to use numerals
consistently, except at the beginning of a sentence.
Plurals Indicate the plural of numerals by adding s (7s, the late 1990s).
Form the plural of a written number (like any noun) by adding s
or es or by dropping the y and adding ies (elevens, sixes,
twenties). See also apostrophes.
Measurements Express units of measurement as numerals (3 miles, 45 cubic
feet, 9 meters). When numbers run together in the same
phrase, write one as a numeral and the other as a word.
779
Generally give percentages as numerals and write out the word
percent. (“Approximately 85 percent of the land has been sold.”)
However, in a table, use a numeral followed by the percent
symbol (85%).
Fractions Express fractions as numerals when they are written with whole
numbers (27½ inches, 4¼ miles). Spell out fractions when they
are expressed without a whole number (one-fourth, seven-
eighths). Always write decimal numbers as numerals (5.21
meters).
Money In general, use numerals to express exact or approximate
amounts of money.
► We need to charge $28.95 per unit. ► The new system costs $60,000.
Use words to express indefinite amounts of money.
► The printing system may cost several thousand dollars.
Use numerals and words for rounded amounts of money over
one million dollars.
► The contract is worth $6.8 million.
780
Use numerals for more complex or exact amounts.
► The corporation paid $2,452,500 in taxes last year.
For amounts under a dollar, use numerals and the word cents
(“The pens cost 75 cents each”) unless other numerals that
require dollar signs appear in the same sentence.
► The business-card holders cost $10.49 each, the pens cost $.75 each, and the pencil cup holders cost $6.49 each.
Time Divide hours and minutes with colons when a.m. or p.m.
follows (7:30 a.m., 11:30 p.m.). Do not use colons with the 24-
hour system (0730, 2330). Spelled-out time is not followed by
a.m. or p.m. (seven o’clock in the evening).
Dates In the United States, dates are usually written in a month-day-
year sequence (August 11, 2018). Never use the strictly
numerical form for dates (8/11/18) because the date is not
immediately clear, especially in international correspondence.
Addresses Spell out numbered streets from one through ten unless space
is at a premium (East Tenth Street). Write building numbers as
numerals. The only exception is the building number one (One
East Monument Street). Write highway numbers as numerals
781
(U.S. 40, Ohio 271, I-94).
Documents Page numbers are written as numerals in manuscripts (page
37). Chapter and volume numbers may appear as numerals or
words (Chapter 2 or Chapter Two, Volume 1 or Volume One),
but be consistent. Express figure and table numbers as
numerals (Figure 4, Table 3).
Do not follow a word representing a number with a numeral
in parentheses that represents the same number. Doing so is
redundant.
782
O
783
objects Objects are nouns or noun equivalents: pronouns, verbals, and
noun phrases or clauses. The three kinds of objects are direct
objects, indirect objects, and objects of prepositions. See also
complements.
A direct object answers the question what? or whom? about a
verb and its subject.
► We sent a full report. [We sent what?] ► Michelle e-mailed the client. [Michelle e-mailed whom?]
An indirect object is a noun or noun equivalent that occurs with
a direct object after certain kinds of transitive verbs, such as
give, wish, cause, and tell. The indirect object answers the
question to whom or what? or for whom or what? The indirect
object always precedes the direct object.
► We sent the general manager a full report. [Report is the direct object; the indirect object, general manager, answers the question, “We sent a full report to whom?”]
The object of a preposition is a noun or pronoun that is
introduced by a preposition, forming a prepositional phrase.
► At the meeting, the district managers approved the contract. [Meeting is the object, and at the meeting is the prepositional phrase.]
784
OK / okay The expression okay (also spelled OK) is common in informal
writing, but it should be avoided in most business writing.
785
on / onto / upon On is normally used as a preposition meaning “attached to” or
“located at.” (“Install the shelf on the north wall.”) On also
stresses a position of rest. (“The victim lay on the stretcher.”)
Onto implies movement to a position on or movement up and
on. (“The commuters surged onto the platform.”) Upon is a
formal word for on, whose use is unnecessary in most contexts.
Upon is the correct choice, however, when referring to when
something happened or needs to happen. (“The report is due
upon completion of the project.”)
786
one When used as an indefinite pronoun, one may help you avoid
repeating a noun. (“We need a new plan, not an old one.”) One
is often redundant in phrases in which it restates the noun, and
it may take the proper emphasis away from the adjective.
One can also be used in place of a noun or personal pronoun in
a statement. (“One cannot ignore one’s physical condition.”)
Using one in that way is formal and impersonal; in any but the
most formal writing, you should address your reader directly
and personally as you. (“You cannot ignore your physical
condition.”) See also point of view.
787
one of those . . . who A dependent clause beginning with who or that and preceded
by one of those takes a plural verb. See also agreement.
► She is one of those managers who are concerned about their writing.
In this example, who refers to a plural antecedent (managers)
and thus takes a plural verb (are).
If the phrase one of those is preceded by the only, however,
the verb should be singular.
► She is the only one of those managers who is concerned about her writing. [The verb is singular because its subject, who, refers to a singular antecedent, one. If the sentence were reversed, it would read, “Of those managers, she is the only one who is concerned about her writing.”]
788
online professional profile Online professional profiles — such as those on LinkedIn,
AngelList, and Academia.edu, and in Figure O–1 — can help you
in your job search as well as in your efforts to network with
colleagues, clients, and customers. Online profiles can often be
posted on community sites for professional associations, like
IEEE’s Collabratec. They typically include information on
education, skills and abilities, work history, certifications,
recommendations, awards and honors, and interests. Accessed
through Web browsers or mobile devices, these sites include
tools to communicate and network with colleagues and friends,
including the ability to recommend one another for particular
skills or knowledge and to connect with others through status
updates (see also social media) and private messaging. In
addition, some sites, like LinkedIn, have profiles for
companies, nonprofit organizations, and other groups.
789
FIGURE O–1. Online Profile
790
As a job seeker, you can use your online professional profile
to share your qualifications and interests with potential
employers and colleagues. Employment agencies and human
resources staff often search these profile sites to find possible
candidates for job openings. You can also ask friends and
colleagues to review your online profile to see if it matches any
job openings or needs in their workplaces.
Personally, you can use your online profile to network with
others in the same career or field as you. These personal
connections can help you solve problems, share industry news,
and collaborate on projects. Although these are personal uses,
be sure to stick with professional information in your updates
and on your online profile. Post more personal information on
other sites, such as Facebook, rather than on professional
networking sites.
Choosing the Appropriate Site When choosing a site, consider the information it allows you to
share and the fields and careers of those already on the site.
Consider, too, your audience and purpose for the profile: Do
you want to connect with potential employers? Are you hoping
to network with others in the field? Do you plan to build a
portfolio where you can archive your work? Your answers to
questions like these will help you decide which site is best for
you. For example, an engineering or accounting student looking
for a job after graduation would probably choose LinkedIn,
where she can post information about her education and skills
791
using keywords that will attract and interest potential
employers. An undergraduate student interested in entering
graduate school might build a profile on Academia.edu, which
will allow her to post papers she has written and her curriculum
vitae (CV) along with basic personal information. A student
interested in cutting-edge technology or product development
might create a profile on AngelList, which is a network for
startups.
Writing Style and Tips The writing style for your online profile is similar to the style
for your résumé and other job-search documents. Focus on
composing a professional and honest statement of your
education, experience, and other details. In addition, pay close
attention to the context, purpose, and audience of your
message, ensuring that your message is clear, precise, and free
of grammatical errors. See proofreading.
The information that you publish on your online profile is
immediately available to the public and can have long-lasting
effects. Do not post anything on your profile that you would not
want to follow you throughout your career. You can, of course,
update your profile as necessary, but once information has
been published, it can be archived or printed so that readers
can still access what you have written. If the site that you
choose allows you to create a personalized link to your profile,
use the name that you go by professionally.
792
Personal Information and Overview As on a résumé, include some personally identifying
information, such as your name and location, but omit
specifics, such as street address, phone number, or e-mail
address. Include a strong description of your skills and
experience in the opening summary. Beyond the basic
identifying information at the top of your profile, these opening
descriptions are critical to making a good first impression. Most
profiles allow you to add links to your Web site or to upload
examples of your work. Add supporting materials that illustrate
your skills and capabilities.
In particular, pay attention to sections such as the summary
on LinkedIn or the biography on Academia.edu, which allow
you to include descriptive details of your qualifications,
interests, personal brand, and career goals. Leaving these
sections blank or writing only a sentence or brief phrase
reduces the power of your profile. Use the full space to tell
readers why they should connect with you.
These sites include a place for a profile photo. Look at the
profiles of others in your field to determine whether self-
portraits are typically used in your industry. If you decide to
include a photograph, choose a professional and current image.
(Remember that photographs may not be appropriate in all
professions.) You should be shown wearing the clothes that you
might wear to an interview or when on the job. Ensure that
there are no distractions or unnecessary objects in the
793
background of the image. Finally, choose an image that is
specifically for your professional profile. This is not the place to
use an image from which you have cut out family members or
friends.
Experience, Education, and Skills Outline your experience, just as you would on your résumé. Be
sure that the details on your profile (such as the dates of
employment) are consistent with your résumé and other job-
search documents but not necessarily identical. Concentrate on
representing your personal brand (see job search) with the
information that you share.
In addition to listing the details of your experience, provide a
description of your duties and accomplishments. These
specifics will help potential employers and colleagues visualize
your experience. Take advantage of the description area in the
education section by listing specific courses or
accomplishments (such as scholarships or the dean’s list). List
your skills, using industry-specific terms, tools, or software. For
example, rather than stating “image editing” as a skill, state
exactly what software you are proficient with. If you have
industry certifications, list that information as well.
794
only The word only should be placed immediately before the word or
phrase it modifies. See also modifiers.
Be careful with the placement of only because it can change the
meaning of a sentence.
► Only he said that he was tired. [He alone said that he was tired.]
► He only said that he was tired. [He actually was not tired, although he said he was.]
► He said only that he was tired. [He said nothing except that he was tired.]
► He said that he was only tired. [He said that he was nothing except tired.]
795
order-of-importance method of development The order-of-importance method of development is a
particularly effective and common organizing strategy. This
method can use one of two ordering strategies — decreasing
order (Figure O–2), which is often best for written documents,
and increasing order, which is especially effective for oral
presentations.
796
FIGURE O–2. Decreasing Order-of-Importance Method of Development
797
Decreasing Order Decreasing order begins with the most important fact or point,
then moves to the next most important, and so on, ending with
the least important. This order is especially appropriate for a
memo or other correspondence addressed to a busy decision
maker (see Figure O–2), who may be able to reach a decision
after considering only the most important points. If you’re
addressing a report to various readers, some of whom may be
interested in only the major points and others who may need all
the information, decreasing order may be ideal for your
purpose.
The advantages of decreasing order are that it (1) gets the
reader’s attention immediately by presenting the most
important point first, (2) makes a strong initial impression, and
(3) ensures that even the most hurried reader will not miss the
most important point.
Increasing Order Increasing order begins from the least important point or fact,
then progresses to the next more important, and builds finally
to the most important or strongest point.
In workplace contexts, increasing order of importance can
be effective in writing but is more often used in oral
presentations in which (1) you want to save your strongest
798
points until the end or (2) you need to build the ideas point by
point to an important conclusion.
Many oral presentations benefit especially from increasing
order because it leaves the audience with the strongest points
freshest in their minds. For example, consider an oral
presentation to an audience of managers in which you must
present the benefits of a new quality management system. You
might begin with a benefit that is valid but of the least value to
the organization generally and build to the benefit that is most
valuable to all operations within the organization. The
disadvantage of increasing order, especially for written
documents, is that it begins weakly, and the reader may become
impatient or distracted before reaching your main point.
799
organization Organization is essential to the success of a formal report, a
Web page, or an effective presentation. Good organization is
achieved by outlining and by using a logical and appropriate
method of development that suits your subject, your audience,
and your purpose.
During the organization stage of the writing process,
consider a layout and design that will highlight structure,
hierarchy, and order, and determine the format appropriate to
your subject and purpose. If you intend to include visuals with
your writing, consider them as you create your outline,
especially if they need to be prepared by someone else while
you are writing and revising the draft. See also “Five Steps to
Successful Writing.”
800
organizational charts An organizational chart shows how the various divisions or
units of an organization are related to one another. This type of
visual is useful when you want to give readers an overview of
an organization or to display the lines of authority within it, as
in Figure O–3.
FIGURE O–3. Organizational Chart
The title of each organizational component (office, section,
division) is placed in a separate box. The boxes are then linked
to a central authority. If readers need the information, include
the name of the person and position title in each box.
801
outlining An outline is the skeleton of the document you are going to
write; at the least, it should list the main topics and subtopics of
your subject in a logical method of development.
Advantages of Outlining An outline provides structure to your writing by ensuring that it
has a beginning (introduction), a middle (main body), and an
end (conclusion). Using an outline offers many other benefits:
Larger and more complex subjects are easier to handle because an outline breaks them into manageable parts. Like a road map, an outline indicates a starting point and keeps you moving logically so that you do not lose your way before you arrive at your conclusion. Parts of an outline are easily moved around so that you can choose the most effective arrangement of your ideas. (The outline feature in your word-processing program is useful for checking the organization of a document before revising.) Creating a good outline frees you from concerns of organization while you are writing a draft. An outline enables you to provide coherence and transition so that one part flows smoothly into the next without omitting important details. Logic errors are much easier to detect and correct in an outline than in a draft. An outline helps with collaborative writing because it
802
enables a team to refine a project’s scope, divide responsibilities, and maintain focus.
Types of Outlines Two types of outlines are most common: short topic outlines
and lengthy sentence outlines. A topic outline consists of short
phrases arranged to reflect your primary method of
development. A topic outline is especially useful for short
documents, such as e-mails, letters, or memos. See also
correspondence.
For a large writing project, create a topic outline first, and
then use it as a basis for creating a sentence outline. A sentence
outline uses a complete sentence for each idea that may become
the topic sentence for a paragraph. If most of your notes can be
shaped into topic sentences for paragraphs in your rough draft,
you can be relatively sure that your document will be well
organized. See also note-taking and research.
Creating an Outline For large and complex subjects with many pieces of
information, the first step is to group your research notes into
related categories. Sort your notes by major and minor division
headings. For example, the major divisions for this discussion
of outlining could be as follows:
I. Advantages of outlining II. Types of outlines
803
III. Creating an outline
The second step is to establish your minor divisions within each
major division. Using a method of development, create your
minor points and arrange them under their major division, then
label them with capital letters.
You will sometimes need more than two levels of headings. If
your subject is complicated, you may need three or four levels
of headings to better organize all your ideas in proper
relationship to one another. In that event, use the following
numbering scheme:
I. First-level heading A. Second-level heading
1. Third-level heading a. Fourth-level heading
The third step is to mark each of your notes with the
appropriate roman numeral and capital letter. Arrange the
notes logically within each minor heading, and mark each with
the appropriate sequential arabic number. As you do, make
sure your organization is logical and your headings have
parallel structure. For example, all the second-level headings
804
under “III. Creating an outline” are complete sentences in the
active voice.
Treat visuals as an integral part of your outline, and plan
approximately where each should appear. Either include a
rough sketch of the visual, or write “illustration of . . .” at each
location. As with other information in an outline, freely move,
delete, or add visuals as needed.
Another outlining format is the decimal numbering system,
as shown in the following example:
1. FIRST-LEVEL HEADING 1.1 Second-level heading 1.2 Second-level heading
1.2.1 Third-level heading 1.2.2 Third-level heading
1.2.2.1 Fourth-level heading 1.2.2.2 Fourth-level heading
1.3 Second-level heading 2. FIRST-LEVEL HEADING
This system should not go beyond the fourth level because the
numbers get too cumbersome beyond that point. In many
documents, such as policies and procedures, the decimal
numbering system is carried over from the outline to the final
version of the document for ease of cross-referencing sections.
Create your draft by converting your notes into complete
sentences and paragraphs. If you have a sentence outline, the
805
most difficult part of the writing job is over. However,
remember that any outline is flexible; it may need to change as
you write the draft, but it should always be your point of
departure and return.
806
outside [of] In the phrase outside of, the word of is redundant.
Do not use outside of to mean “aside from” or “except for.”
807
over [with] In the expression over with, the word with is redundant; such
words as completed or finished often better express the
thought.
808
P
809
pace Pace is the speed at which you present ideas to the reader. Your
goal should be to achieve a pace that fits your audience,
purpose, and context. The more knowledgeable the reader is
about the subject, the faster your pace can be. Be careful,
though, not to lose control of the pace. In the following
example, the first version piles facts on top of each other at a
rapid pace. The second version presents the same facts at a
controlled pace in two more easily assimilated sentences. In
addition, the second version achieves a different and more
desirable emphasis.
RAPID The corporate records database (CRD) contains each employee’s full name, mailing address, social security number, and current job classification and is intended to help individual departments and offices process records for every one of the 21,000 employees worldwide.
CONTROLLED The corporate records database (CRD) contains identifying information for every one of the 21,000 employees worldwide. The CRD enables individual departments and offices to process employee records, and it contains each employee’s full name, mailing address, social security number, and current job classification.
810
paragraphs A paragraph performs three functions: It (1) develops the unit
of thought stated in the topic sentence; (2) provides a logical
break in the material; and (3) creates a visual break on the page,
which signals a new topic.
Topic Sentence A topic sentence states the paragraph’s main idea; the rest of
the paragraph supports and develops that statement with
related details. The topic sentence, which is often the first
sentence, tells the reader what the paragraph is about.
► The cost of training new employees is high. In addition to the cost of classroom facilities and instructors, an organization must pay employees their regular salary while they sit in the classroom. For the companies to break even on this investment in their professional employees, those employees must stay in the job for which they have been trained for at least one year.
The topic sentence is usually most effective early in the
paragraph, but a paragraph can lead to the topic sentence,
which is sometimes done to achieve emphasis.
► Energy does far more than simply make our daily lives more comfortable and convenient. Suppose someone wanted to stop — and reverse — the economic progress of this nation. What would be the surest and quickest way to
811
do it? Simply block the nation’s ability to produce energy! The nation would face a devastating economic crisis. Our economy, in short, is energy based.
On rare occasions, the topic sentence may logically fall in the
middle of a paragraph.
► It is time to insist that science does not progress by carefully designed steps called “experiments,” each of which has a well-defined beginning and end. Science is a continuous and often a disorderly and accidental process. We shall not do the young psychologist any favor if we agree to reconstruct our practices to fit the pattern demanded by current scientific methodology.
— B. F. Skinner, “A Case History in Scientific Method”
Paragraph Length A paragraph should be just long enough to deal adequately with
the subject of its topic sentence. A new paragraph should begin
whenever the subject changes significantly. A series of short,
undeveloped paragraphs can indicate poor organization by
breaking a single idea into several pieces. A series of long
paragraphs, however, can fail to provide the reader with
manageable subdivisions of thought. Paragraph length should
aid the reader’s understanding of ideas.
Occasionally, a one-sentence paragraph is acceptable if it is
used as a transition between longer paragraphs or as a one-
812
sentence introduction or conclusion in correspondence.
Writing Paragraphs Careful paragraphing reflects the writer’s logical organization
and helps the reader follow the writer’s thoughts. A good
working outline makes it easy to group ideas into appropriate
paragraphs. (See also outlining.) The following partial topic
outline plots the course of the subsequent paragraphs:
TOPIC OUTLINE (PARTIAL)
I. Advantages of Chicago as location for new facility A. Transport infrastructure
1. Rail 2. Air 3. Truck 4. Sea (except in winter)
B. Labor supply 1. Engineering and scientific personnel
a. Similar companies in area b. Major universities
2. Technical and manufacturing personnel a. Community college programs b. Custom programs
RESULTING PARAGRAPHS Probably the greatest advantage of Chicago as a location for
our new facility is its excellent transport facilities. The city
is served by three major railroads. Both domestic and
813
international air-cargo service are available at O’Hare
International Airport; Midway Airport’s convenient
location adds flexibility for domestic air-cargo service.
Chicago is a major hub of the trucking industry, and most
of the nation’s large freight carriers have terminals there.
Finally, except in the winter months, when the Great Lakes
are frozen, Chicago is a seaport, accessible through the St.
Lawrence Seaway.
Chicago’s second advantage is its abundant labor force.
An ample supply of engineering and scientific staff is
assured not only by the presence of many companies
engaged in activities similar to ours but also by the
presence of several major universities in the metropolitan
area. Similarly, technicians and manufacturing personnel
are in abundant supply. The colleges in the Chicago City
College system, as well as half a dozen other two-year
colleges in the outlying areas, produce graduates with
associate’s degrees in a wide variety of technical specialties
appropriate to our needs. Moreover, three of the outlying
colleges have expressed an interest in developing off-
campus courses attuned specifically to our requirements.
Paragraph Unity and Coherence A good paragraph has unity and coherence as well as adequate
development. Unity is singleness of purpose, based on a topic
sentence that states the core idea of the paragraph. When every
sentence in the paragraph develops the core idea, the
814
paragraph has unity. Coherence is holding to one point of view,
one attitude, one tense; it is the joining of sentences into a
logical pattern. Transitional words tie ideas together and lead to
coherence, as shown by the boldfaced italicized words in the
following paragraph.
TOPIC SENTENCE
Over the past several months, I have heard complaints about the Merit Award Program. Specifically, many employees feel that this program should be linked to annual salary increases. They believe that salary increases would provide a much better incentive than the current $500 to $700 cash awards for exceptional service. In addition, these employees believe that their supervisors consider the cash awards a satisfactory alternative to salary increases. Although I don’t think this practice is widespread, the fact that the employees believe that it is justifies a reevaluation of the Merit Award Program.
Simple enumeration (first, second, then, next, and so on) also
provides effective transition within paragraphs. Notice how the
boldfaced italicized words and phrases give coherence to the
following paragraph.
► Most adjustable office chairs have nylon tubes that hold metal spindle rods. To keep the chair operational, lubricate the spindle rods occasionally. First, loosen the set screw in the adjustable bell. Then, lift the chair from the base. Next, apply the lubricant to the spindle rod and the nylon washer. When you have finished, replace the chair and tighten the set screw.
815
parallel structure Parallel structure requires that sentence elements that are alike
in function be alike in grammatical form as well. This structure
achieves an economy of words, clarifies meaning, expresses the
equality of the ideas, and achieves emphasis. Parallel structure
assists readers because it allows them to anticipate the meaning
of a sentence element on the basis of its construction.
Parallel structure can be achieved with words, phrases, or
clauses.
► If you want to benefit from the jobs training program, you must be punctual, courteous, and conscientious. [parallel words]
► If you want to benefit from the jobs training program, you must recognize the importance of punctuality, of courtesy, and of conscientiousness. [parallel phrases]
► If you want to benefit from the jobs training program, you must arrive punctually, you must behave courteously, and you must study conscientiously. [parallel clauses]
Correlative conjunctions (either ... or, neither ... nor, not
only ... but also) should always join elements that use parallel
structure. Both parts of the pairs should be followed
immediately by the same grammatical form: two similar words,
two similar phrases, or two similar clauses.
► Viruses carry either DNA or RNA, never both. [parallel words]
816
► Clearly, neither serological tests nor virus isolation studies alone would have been adequate. [parallel phrases]
► Either we must increase our production efficiency or we must decrease our production goals. [parallel clauses]
To make a parallel construction clear and effective, it is often
best to repeat an article, a pronoun, a helping verb, a
preposition, a subordinating conjunction, or the mark of an
infinitive (to).
► The association has a mission statement and a code of ethics. [article]
► The software is popular because it is compatible across platforms and because it is easily customized. [subordinating conjunction]
Parallel structure is especially important in creating lists,
outlines, tables of contents, and headings because it lets
readers know the relative value of each item. See also outlining.
Faulty Parallelism Faulty parallelism results when joined elements are intended to
serve equal grammatical functions but do not have equal
grammatical form.
Faulty parallelism sometimes occurs because a writer tries to
compare items that are not comparable.
NOT PARALLEL
The company offers special college training to help hourly employees move into professional careers, like engineering management, software
817
development, service technicians, and sales trainees. [Notice faulty comparison of occupations — engineering management and software development — to people — service technicians and sales trainees.]
To avoid faulty parallelism, make certain that each element in a
series is similar in form and structure to all others in the same
series.
PARALLEL The company offers special college training to help hourly employees move into professional careers, like engineering management, software development, technical services, and sales.
818
paraphrasing Paraphrasing is restating or rewriting the essential ideas of
another writer in your own words. The following example is an
original passage and a paraphrased version that accurately
restates the essential information in a form appropriate for a
report.
ORIGINAL Generally, the goals of workplace professionals demand that they think in specific, practical, and immediately applicable ways; those of us in the academy must think in terms that are more abstract, conceptual, and long-term. It is understandable, then, that works that might be highly valued by either practitioners or academics can seem entirely irrelevant to the other.
— Gerald J. Alred, “Bridging Cultures: The Academy and the Workplace,” Journal of Business Communication
PARAPHRASE Practitioners who value specific, practical goals and academics who need to think in abstract, long-term ways understandably value different works (Alred, 2006).
ETHICS NOTE
Because paraphrasing does not quote a source word for word, quotation marks are not used. However, paraphrased material should be credited because the ideas are taken from someone else. See also note-taking, plagiarism, and quotations.
819
parentheses Parentheses are used to enclose explanatory or digressive
words, phrases, or sentences. Material in parentheses often
clarifies or defines the preceding text without altering its
meaning.
► She severely bruised her tibia (or shinbone) in the accident.
Parenthetical information may not be essential to a sentence (in
fact, parentheses deemphasize the enclosed material), but it
may be helpful to some readers.
Parenthetical material does not affect the punctuation of a
sentence, and any punctuation (such as a comma or period)
should appear following the closing parenthesis.
► She could not fully extend her knee because of a torn meniscus (or cartilage), and she suffered pain from a severely bruised tibia (or shinbone).
When a complete sentence within parentheses stands
independently, the ending punctuation is placed inside the final
parenthesis.
► The project director listed the problems her staff faced. (This was the third time she had complained to the board.)
For some constructions, however, you should consider using
820
subordination rather than parentheses.
Parentheses are also used to enclose numerals or letters that
indicate sequence.
► The following sections deal with (1) preparation, (2) research, (3) organization, (4) writing, and (5) revision.
Do not follow spelled-out numbers with numerals in
parentheses representing the same numbers.
Use brackets to set off a parenthetical item that is already
within parentheses.
► We should be sure to give Emanuel Foose (and his brother Emilio [1912–1982]) credit for his part in founding the institute.
See also documenting sources and quotations.
821
parts of speech The term parts of speech describes the class of words to which a
particular word belongs, according to its function in a sentence.
PART OF SPEECH FUNCTION
noun, pronoun naming / referring
verb acting / asserting
adjective, adverb describing / modifying
conjunction, preposition joining / linking
interjection exclaiming
Many words can function as more than one part of speech. See
also functional shift.
822
party In legal language, party refers to an individual, a group, or an
organization. (“The injured party sued my client.”) The term
party is inappropriate in all but legal writing; when you are
referring to a person, use the word person.
Party is appropriate when it refers to a group. (“Jim arranged a
tour of the facility for the members of our party.”)
823
per When per is used to mean “for each,” “by means of,” “through,”
or “on account of,” it is appropriate (per gallon, per capita, per
diem). When used to mean “according to” (per your request, per
your order), the expression is jargon and should be avoided.
824
percent / percentage The word percent is normally used instead of the symbol %
(“only 15 percent”), except in tables, where space is at a
premium. Percentage, which is never used with numbers,
indicates a general size (“only a small percentage”).
825
periods A period is a mark of punctuation that usually indicates the end
of a declarative or an imperative sentence. Periods are also used
to end questions that are actually polite requests, or instructions
to which an affirmative response is assumed. (“Will you call me
as soon as he arrives.”) See also sentence construction.
Periods, or dots, when used to indicate omissions are called
ellipses, and rows of dots that link topics with page numbers
are called leaders in tables of contents.
Periods in Quotations Use a comma, not a period, after a declarative sentence that is
quoted in the context of another sentence.
► “There is every chance of success,” she stated.
A period is placed inside quotation marks. See also quotations.
► He stated clearly, “My vote is yes.”
Periods with Parentheses Place a period outside the final parenthesis when a
parenthetical element ends a sentence.
► The institute was founded by Harry Denman (1902–1972).
Place a period inside the final parenthesis when a complete
sentence stands independently within parentheses.
826
► The project director listed the problems her staff faced. (This was the third time she had complained to the board.)
Other Uses of Periods Use periods following the numerals in a numbered list and
following the complete sentences in a list.
1. Enter
your name and PIN.
2. Enter your address with ZIP Code.
3. Enter your home telephone number.
Use periods after initials in names (Wilma T. Grant, J. P.
Morgan). Use periods as decimal points with numbers (27.3
degrees Celsius, $540.26, 6.9 percent). Use periods to indicate
certain abbreviations (Ms., Dr., Inc.). When a sentence ends
with an abbreviation that ends with a period, do not add
another period. (“Please meet me at 3:30 p.m.”)
Period Faults When a period is inserted prematurely, the result is a sentence
827
fragment.
FRAGMENT After a long day at the office, during which we finished the quarterly report. We left hurriedly for home.
SENTENCE After a long day at the office, during which we finished the quarterly report, we left hurriedly for home.
When two independent clauses are joined without any
punctuation, the result is a fused, or run-on, sentence. Adding a
period between the clauses is one way to correct a run-on
sentence.
RUN-ON Bill was late for ten days in a row Ms. Sturgess had to dismiss him.
CORRECT Bill was late for ten days in a row. Ms. Sturgess had to dismiss him.
Other options are to add a comma and a coordinating
conjunction (and, but, for, or, nor, so, or yet) between the
clauses, to add a semicolon, or to add a semicolon with a
conjunctive adverb — such as therefore or however — followed
by a comma.
828
person Person refers to the form of a personal pronoun that indicates
whether the pronoun represents the speaker, the person
spoken to, or the person or thing spoken about. A pronoun
representing the speaker is in the first person. (“I could not find
the answer in the manual.”) A pronoun that represents the
person or people spoken to is in the second person. (“You will
be a good manager.”) A pronoun that represents the person or
people spoken about is in the third person. (“They received the
news quietly.”) The following list shows first-, second-, and
third-person pronouns. See also case, number, and one.
PERSON SINGULAR PLURAL
First I, me, my, mine we, us, our, ours
Second you, your, yours you, your, yours
Third he, him, his, she, her, hers, it, its they, them, their, theirs
829
personal / personnel Personal is an adjective meaning “of or pertaining to an
individual person” (a personal problem). Personnel is a noun
meaning “a group of people engaged in a common job” (military
personnel). Be careful not to use personnel when the word you
need is persons, people, or a more descriptive word.
830
persons / people The word persons is used to refer to a specific category or
number of people, often in legal or official contexts.
(“Admittance is limited to persons 18 and over.”) In all other
contexts, use people. (“We need more qualified people to fill the
vacant positions.”)
831
persuasion Persuasive writing attempts to convince an audience to adopt
the writer’s point of view or take a particular action. Workplace
writing often uses persuasion to reinforce ideas that readers
already have, to convince readers to change their current ideas,
or to lobby for a particular suggestion or policy (as in Figure P–
1). You may find yourself advocating for safer working
conditions, justifying the expense of a new program, or writing
a proposal for a large purchase. See also context and purpose.
In persuasive writing, you must support your appeal with logic
and a sound presentation of facts, statistics, and examples. See
also logic errors. A writer also gains credibility, and thus
persuasiveness, through the readers’ impressions of the
document’s appearance. For this reason, consider carefully a
document’s layout and design.
832
833
FIGURE P–1. Persuasive Memo
ETHICS NOTE
Never make false claims. You should also acknowledge any real or potentially conflicting opinions; doing so allows you to anticipate and overcome objections and builds your credibility. See also ethics in writing and promotional writing.
The memo shown in Figure P–1 was written to persuade the
marketing staff to participate actively in a change to a new
server. Notice that not everything in this memo is presented in a
positive light. Change brings disruption and challenges — and
the writer acknowledges that fact.
A persuasive technique that places the focus on your reader’s
interest and perspective is discussed in the entry “you”
viewpoint. See also correspondence.
834
photographs Photographs are effective in catching the readers’ attention and
adding personal relevance to brochures, newsletters, annual
reports, presentations, and other promotional writing.
Photographs are also an effective way to illustrate products in
print and online catalogs. They are often used for instructions
to show the appearance of an object, although they cannot
depict the internal workings of a mechanism or below-the-
surface details of objects or structures. Such details are better
represented in drawings. See also readers.
Figure P–2 shows a photograph from an interactive Web
presentation for buyers of corporate aircraft. This photograph
is one in a series that simulates a pilot’s “walk-around” — a
procedure in which pilots visually examine an aircraft in a 360-
degree safety inspection prior to takeoff. In this photo, the stair
steps are lowered to show the relative size of the aircraft.
835
FIGURE P–2. Photo (of Aircraft Door)
For reports, treat photographs as you do other visuals,
giving them figure numbers, callouts (labels) to identify key
features, and captions, if needed. Position the figure number
and caption so that readers can view them and the photograph
from the same orientation.
ETHICS NOTE
Be careful to avoid plagiarism by appropriately documenting sources for photographs and by obtaining permission from the copyright
836
holder if you plan to publish photographs that you do not take yourself. For such photos, you should provide a source line, as shown in Figure P–2. For stock images obtained through services like Getty Images (www.gettyimages.com), you will need to obtain a license and pay a fee, depending on the final use. If you do take your own photographs, be sure to get the full name, contact information, and permission of any persons featured before publishing.
837
phrases DIRECTORY
Prepositional Phrases Participial Phrases Infinitive Phrases Gerund Phrases Verb Phrases Noun Phrases
A phrase is a meaningful group of words that does not make a
complete statement because it lacks both a subject and a
predicate, as opposed to clauses. Phrases, which are based on
nouns, nonfinite verb forms, or verb combinations, provide
context within a clause or sentence in which they appear. See
also sentence construction.
► She reassured her staff by her calm confidence. [phrase]
A phrase may function as an adjective, an adverb, a noun, or a
verb.
► The subjects on the agenda were all discussed. [adjective] ► We discussed the project with great enthusiasm. [adverb] ► Working hard is her way of life. [noun] ► The human resources director should have been notified.
[verb]
Even though phrases function as adjectives, adverbs, nouns, or
838
verbs, they are normally named for the kind of word around
which they are constructed — preposition, participle, infinitive,
gerund, verb, or noun. A phrase that begins with a preposition
is a prepositional phrase, a phrase that begins with a participle
is a participial phrase, and so on. For typical verb phrases and
prepositional phrases that can cause difficulty for speakers of
English as a second language, see idioms.
Prepositional Phrases A preposition is a word that shows relationship and combines
with a noun or pronoun (its object) to form a modifying phrase.
A prepositional phrase, then, consists of a preposition plus its
object and the object’s modifiers.
► After the meeting, the district managers adjourned to the cafeteria.
Prepositional phrases, because they normally modify nouns or
verbs, usually function as adjectives or adverbs. A prepositional
phrase may function as an adverb of motion (“Turn the dial four
degrees to the left”) or an adverb of manner (“Answer
customers’ questions in a courteous fashion”). A prepositional
phrase may also function as an adverb of place and may appear
in different places in the sentence.
► In home and office computer systems, security is essential. ► Security is essential in home and office computer systems.
Prepositional phrases may function as adjectives; when they do,
839
they follow the nouns they modify.
► Food waste with a high protein content can be processed into animal food.
Be careful when you use prepositional phrases, because
separating a prepositional phrase from the noun it modifies can
cause ambiguity.
AMBIGUOUS The woman standing by the security guard in the gray suit is our division manager.
CLEAR The woman in the gray suit who is standing by the security guard is our division manager.
Watch as well for the overuse of prepositional phrases where
modifiers would be more economical.
OVERUSED The man with gray hair in the blue suit with pinstripes is the former president of the company.
ECONOMICAL The gray-haired man in the blue pin-striped suit is the former company president.
Participial Phrases A participle is any form of a verb that is used as an adjective. A
participial phrase consists of a participle plus its object and its
modifiers.
► The division having the largest sales increase will win the award.
The relationship between a participial phrase and the rest of the
840
sentence must be clear. For that reason, every sentence
containing a participial phrase must have a noun or pronoun
that the participial phrase modifies; if it does not, the result is a
dangling participial phrase.
Dangling Participial Phrases A dangling participial phrase occurs when the noun or pronoun
that the participial phrase is meant to modify is not stated but
only implied. See also dangling modifiers.
DANGLING Being unhappy with the job, his efficiency suffered. [His efficiency was not unhappy with the job; what the participial phrase really modifies — he — is not stated but merely implied.]
CORRECT Being unhappy with the job, he grew less efficient. [In this version, what the participial phrase modifies — he — is explicitly stated.]
Misplaced Participial Phrases A participial phrase is misplaced when it is too far from the
noun or pronoun it is meant to modify and so appears to modify
something else.
MISPLACED We saw a large warehouse driving down the highway.
CORRECT Driving down the highway, we saw a large warehouse.
Infinitive Phrases An infinitive is the basic form of a verb (go, run, talk), without
the restrictions imposed by person and number. An infinitive is
generally preceded by the word to (which is usually a
preposition but in this use is called the sign, or mark, of the
infinitive). An infinitive phrase consists of the word to plus an
841
infinitive and any objects or modifiers.
► To improve as a writer, you must be willing to accept criticism.
Do not confuse a prepositional phrase beginning with to with an
infinitive phrase. In an infinitive phrase, to is followed by a
verb; in a prepositional phrase, to is followed by a noun or
pronoun.
PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE
We went to the building site.
INFINITIVE PHRASE Our firm tries to provide a comprehensive training program.
The implied subject of an introductory infinitive phrase should
be the same as the subject of the sentence. If it is not, the
phrase is a dangling modifier. In the following example, the
implied subject of the infinitive is you or one, not practice.
Gerund Phrases A gerund is a verbal ending in ing that is used as a noun. A
gerund phrase consists of a gerund plus any objects or
modifiers and always functions as a noun.
SUBJECT Preparing an annual report is a difficult task.
DIRECT OBJECT She liked chairing the committee.
842
Verb Phrases A verb phrase consists of a main verb and its helping verb.
► He is [helping verb] working [main verb] hard this summer.
Words can appear between the helping verb and the main verb
of a verb phrase. (“He is always working.”) The main verb is
always the last verb in a verb phrase.
Questions often begin with a verb phrase. (“Will he audit
their account?”) The adverb not may be appended to a helping
verb in a verb phrase. (“He did not work today.”)
Noun Phrases A noun phrase consists of a noun and its modifiers. (“Have the
two new employees fill out these forms.”)
843
plagiarism Plagiarism is the use of someone else’s unique ideas without
acknowledgment or the use of someone else’s exact words
without quotation marks and appropriate credit. Plagiarism is
considered to be the theft of someone else’s creative and
intellectual property and can result in legal action, academic
sanctions, and serious professional consequences. See also
copyright, ethics in writing, and research.
Citing Sources Quoting a passage — including cutting and pasting a passage
from an Internet source into your work — is permissible only if
you enclose the passage in quotation marks and properly cite
the source. For detailed guidance on quoting correctly, see
quotations. If you intend to publish, reproduce, or distribute
material that includes quotations from published works,
including Web sites, you may need to obtain written permission
from the copyright holders of those works.
Even Web sites that grant permission to copy, distribute, or
modify material under the “copyleft” principle, such as
Wikipedia, nonetheless caution that you must give appropriate
credit to the source from which material is taken (see
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Citing_Wikipedia).
Paraphrasing the words and ideas of another also requires
that you cite your source, even though you do not enclose
844
paraphrased ideas or materials in quotation marks. (See also
documenting sources.) Paraphrasing a passage without citing
the source is permissible only when the information
paraphrased is common knowledge.
Common Knowledge Common knowledge generally refers to information that is
widely known and readily available in handbooks, manuals,
atlases, and other references. For example, the “law of supply
and demand” is common knowledge and is found in nearly
every economics textbook.
Common knowledge also refers to information within a
specific field that is generally known and understood by most
others in that field — even though it is not widely known by
those outside the field.
An indication that something is common knowledge is its
appearance in multiple sources without citation. However,
when in doubt, cite the source.
ETHICS NOTE
In the workplace, employees often borrow material freely from in- house manuals, reports, and other company documents. Using or repurposing such material is neither plagiarism nor a violation of copyright. For information on the use of public domain and government material, see copyright.
845
plain language Plain language is writing that is logically organized and
understandable on the first reading. Such writing avoids
unnecessary jargon, affectation, and technical terminology.
Even with the best of intentions, however, you cannot always
avoid using specialized terms and concepts. Therefore, assess
your audience carefully to ensure that your language connects
with their level of knowledge. Replace jargon and complex legal
wording with familiar words or terms when possible.
COMPLEX The systems integration specialist must be able to visually perceive the entire directional response module.
PLAIN LANGUAGE
The operator must be able to see the entire control panel.
If you are a health-care provider, for example, use the
appropriate plain-language equivalent for medical terminology
with patients in conversations and written guidelines: bleeding
instead of hemorrhaging, heart attack instead of myocardial
infarction, stitches instead of sutures. If a plain-language
alternative does not exist, define or explain a technical term on
its first use and use visuals where necessary.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Using Plain Language
✓ Identify your average reader’s level of technical knowledge. ✓ Avoid unnecessary jargon and legal language.
846
✓ Avoid confusing terms and constructions. Define necessary abbreviations and acronyms. Use the same words consistently for the same things. Do not give an obscure meaning to a word.
✓ Use the active voice for directness and for identifying the doer of an action.
✓ Use the second person (you / yours) or imperative mood to write directly to the reader.
✓ Write coherent sentences. Aim for one message in each sentence. Break up complex information into smaller, easier-to- understand units. Use positive writing and the present tense as much as possible.
✓ Select word placement carefully. Keep subjects and objects close to their verbs. Put only, always, and other conditional words next to the words they modify.
Plain-language principles are especially useful when writing
international correspondence. For format and visual elements
that promote clarity, see layout and design and lists. See also
English as a second language. For information on plain-
language laws and practices, see
www.plainlanguage.gov/site/about.cfm and
plainlanguagenetwork.org.
847
point of view Point of view is the writer’s relation to the information
presented, as reflected in the use of grammatical person. The
writer usually expresses the point of view in first-, second-, or
third-person personal pronouns. Use of first person indicates
that the writer is a participant or an observer. Use of second or
third person indicates that the writer is giving directions,
instructions, or advice or is writing about other people or
something impersonal.
FIRST PERSON
I scrolled down to find the settings option.
SECOND PERSON
You need to scroll down to find the settings option. [You is explicitly stated.]
Scroll down to find the settings option. [You is understood in such an instruction.]
THIRD PERSON
He scrolled down to find the settings option.
Consider the following sentence, revised from an impersonal to
a more personal point of view. Although the essential meaning
of the sentence does not change, the revision indicates that
people are involved in the communication.
848
Some people think they should avoid the pronoun I in business
writing, but doing so often leads to awkward sentences, with
people referring to themselves in the third person as one or as
the writer instead of as I.
However, do not use the personal point of view when an
impersonal point of view would be more appropriate or more
effective because you need to emphasize the subject matter
over the writer or the reader. In the following example, it does
not help to personalize the situation; in fact, the impersonal
version may be more tactful.
PERSONAL I received objections to my proposal from several of your managers.
IMPERSONAL Several managers have raised objections to the proposal.
Whether you adopt a personal or an impersonal point of view
depends on the purpose and the audience of the document. For
example, in an informal e-mail to an associate, you would most
likely adopt a personal point of view. However, in a report to a
large group or in global communications, you would probably
emphasize the subject and avoid sounding impolite by using an
impersonal point of view. (In some cultures, stating an opinion
in writing may be considered impolite or unnecessary.) See also
plain language.
ETHICS NOTE
849
Avoiding the first person may convey the impression that the writer is evading responsibility (See voice.) When using the first person, think carefully about whether to use the singular I or the plural we. In company correspondence, using the pronoun we may be interpreted as reflecting company policy, whereas I clearly reflects personal opinion. Which pronoun to use should be decided according to whether you are speaking for yourself (I) or for the company (we).
► I understand your frustration with the price increase, but we must now add the import tax to the sales price.
850
policies and procedures A policy states an organization’s position on a subject; a
procedure may describe the steps or provide instructions for
carrying out the policy. Policies and procedures are often
written at the same time, usually by top or middle managers.
Policies and procedures are subjected to a careful review
process, often by legal staff. Writing these documents requires
careful planning as well as precise language and word choice
so that the policies and procedures are clear and
understandable. See also plain language.
Policies A statement of policy may be preceded by an explanation of the
policy’s purpose or rationale. Specific details then follow in
numbered sections, as in the following company policy
regarding tuition refunds.
1. TUITION REIMBURSEMENT POLICY 1.1 The Tuition Reimbursement Plan is available only to full-time staff. 1.2 To receive a reimbursement, an individual must be employed by the company at the time of enrollment and at the time of completion of the course. Should an individual’s employment be terminated because of a reduction of staff, fees will be refunded for approved courses upon their satisfactory completion. 1.3 Satisfactory completion means that the employee has completed the course work and has achieved a grade at
851
least one level above passing. If a course is not satisfactorily completed, reimbursement may be deferred if the employee, upon completion of the degree, attains a cumulative grade average of at least C (B for most graduate- degree programs).
Policies may be kept in loose-leaf binders or posted on an
organization’s internal Web site so that they can be easily
referred to and updated.
Procedures Procedures provide a step-by-step explanation of how to carry
out a policy. They often provide instructions not only for
employees but also for managers, who must ensure that the
company’s policy is properly implemented.
To prepare for writing procedures, keep track of who must
do what. An easy and effective way is to create a chart, as shown
in Figure P–3. Draw a vertical line down a page. Label the left
column “Actor” and the right column “Directions.” Under
“Actor,” list who must perform the action in each step; under
“Directions,” describe each step of the procedure fully and in
the correct sequence. In effect, the list serves as an outline for
the procedure you will write. The draft created from the chart
in Figure P–3 might look like this:
1. PROCEDURES 1.1 Tuition Reimbursement Approval
1.1.1 An employee who meets school requirements and
852
is interested in receiving tuition reimbursement should gain the approval of his or her manager and submit the request to the Human Resources (HR) Department. HR may ask the manager to justify, in writing, the benefits of the academic work, if the reason is not obvious. 1.1.2 After reaching an agreement, the employee should complete Sections I and II of Form F-6970. After HR has obtained two levels of management approval — from the employee’s supervisor and the head of the department — it approves the employee’s enrollment in the course or degree program. 1.1.3 The employee who has been granted approval must submit to HR proof of enrollment and payment of appropriate fees to receive tuition reimbursement.
FIGURE P–3. Procedures Chart
853
positive writing Presenting positive information as though it were negative is
confusing to readers.
NEGATIVE If the error does not involve data transmission, the backup function will not be used.
In this sentence, the reader must reverse two negatives to
understand the exception that is being stated. (See also double
negatives.) The following sentence presents the exception in a
positive and straightforward manner. See also plain language.
POSITIVE The backup function is used only when the error involves data transmission.
ETHICS NOTE
Negative facts or conclusions, however, should be stated negatively; stating a negative fact or conclusion positively is deceptive because it can mislead the reader.
DECEPTIVE In the first quarter of this year, employee exposure to airborne lead averaged within 10 percent of acceptable state health standards.
ACCURATE In the first quarter of this year, employee exposure to airborne lead averaged 10 percent below acceptable state health standards.
See also ethics in writing.
Even if what you are saying is negative, do not state it more
negatively than necessary.
854
NEGATIVE We are withholding your shipment because we have not received your payment.
POSITIVE We will forward your shipment as soon as we receive your payment.
See also correspondence and “you” viewpoint.
855
possessive case A noun or pronoun is in the possessive case when it represents
a person, place, or thing that possesses something. Possession
is generally expressed with an apostrophe and an s (“the
report’s title”), with a prepositional phrase using of (“the title of
the report”), or with the possessive form of a pronoun (“our
report”).
Practices vary for some possessive forms, but the following
guidelines are widely used. Above all, be consistent.
Singular Nouns Most singular nouns show the possessive case with ’s.
► the hospital’s medical staff an employee’s paycheck the witness’s testimony the bus’s schedule
When pronunciation with ’s is difficult or when a multisyllable
noun ends in a z sound, you may use only an apostrophe.
► New Orleans’ convention hotels
Plural Nouns Plural nouns that end in s or es show the possessive case with
only an apostrophe.
856
► the managers’ reports the employees’ paychecks the companies’ joint project the witnesses’ testimony
Plural nouns that do not end in s show the possessive with ’s.
► children’s clothing, women’s resources, men’s shoes
Apostrophes are not always used in official names (“Consumers
Union”) or for words that may appear to be possessive nouns
but function as adjectives (“a computer peripherals supplier”).
Compound Nouns Compound nouns form the possessive with ’s following the final
letter.
► the attorney general’s decision, the editor-in-chief’s desk, the pipeline’s diameter
Plurals of some compound expressions are often best expressed
with a prepositional phrase (“presentations of the editors in
chief”).
Coordinate Nouns Coordinate nouns show joint possession with ’s following the
last noun.
► Fischer and Goulet’s partnership was the foundation of their business.
857
Coordinate nouns show individual possession with ’s following
each noun.
► The difference between Barker’s and Washburne’s test results was not statistically significant.
Possessive Pronouns The possessive pronouns (its, whose, his, her, our, your, my,
their) do not require apostrophes. (“Even good systems have
their flaws.”) Only the possessive form of a pronoun should be
used with a gerund (a noun formed from an ing verb).
► The safety officer insisted on our wearing protective clothing. [Wearing is the gerund.]
Possessive pronouns are also used to replace nouns. (“The
responsibility was theirs.”) See also its / it’s.
Indefinite Pronouns Some indefinite pronouns (all, any, each, few, most, none,
some) form the possessive case with the preposition of.
► We tested both packages and found bacteria on the surface of each.
Other indefinite pronouns (everyone, someone, anyone, no
one) use ’s.
► Everyone’s contribution is welcome.
858
prefixes A prefix is a letter or group of letters placed in front of a root
word that changes the meaning of the root word. When a prefix
ends with a vowel and the root word begins with a vowel, the
prefix is often separated from the root word with a hyphen (co-
opt, anti-inflammatory). Some words with the double vowel are
written without a hyphen (cooperate) and others with or
without a hyphen (re-elect or reelect).
Prefixes, such as neo- (derived from a Greek word meaning
“new”), are often hyphenated when used with a proper noun
(neo-Keynesian). Such prefixes are not normally hyphenated
when used with common nouns, unless the base word begins
with the same vowel (neonatal, neo-orthodoxy).
A hyphen may be necessary to clarify the meaning of a
prefix; for example, reform means “correct” or “improve,” and
re-form means “change the shape of.” When in doubt, check a
current dictionary.
859
preparation The preparation stage of the writing process is essential. By
determining the needs of your audience, your purpose, the
context, and the scope of coverage, you will come to
understand what information you need to gather during
research. See also collaborative writing and “Five Steps to
Successful Writing” (pages xvii–xxiv).
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Preparing to Write
✓ Determine who your readers are, and learn certain key facts about them — their knowledge, attitudes, expectations, and needs relative to your subject.
✓ Determine the document’s primary purpose: What exactly do you want your readers to know, believe, or do when they have finished reading your document?
✓ Consider the context of your message and how it should affect your writing.
✓ Establish the scope of your document — the type and amount of detail you must include — not only by understanding your readers’ needs and purpose but also by considering any external constraints, such as word limits for trade journal articles or how you might need to compress text, as in writing for the Web.
✓ Select the medium appropriate to your readers and purpose. See also selecting the medium.
860
prepositions A preposition is a word that links a noun or pronoun to another
sentence element by expressing such relationships as direction
(to, into, across, toward), location (at, in, on, under, over,
beside, among, by, between, through), time (before, after,
during, until, since), or position (for, against, with). Together,
the preposition, its object (the noun or pronoun), and the
object’s modifiers form a prepositional phrase, which acts as a
modifier.
► Answer help-line questions in a courteous manner. [The prepositional phrase in a courteous manner modifies the verb answer.]
The object of a preposition (the word or phrase following the
preposition) is always in the objective case. When the object is a
compound expression, both nouns and pronouns should be in
the objective case. For example, the phrase “between you and
me” is frequently and incorrectly written as “between you and
I.” Me is the objective form of the pronoun, and I is the
subjective form.
Many words that function as prepositions also function as
adverbs. If the word takes an object and functions as a
connective, it is a preposition; if it has no object and functions
as a modifier, it is an adverb.
PREPOSITIONS The thermostat is behind the column in the conference room.
861
ADVERBS The customer lagged behind; then he came in and sat down.
Certain verbs, adverbs, and adjectives are normally used with
certain prepositions (interested in, aware of, equated with,
adhere to, capable of, object to, infer from). See also idioms.
Prepositions at the End of a Sentence A preposition at the end of a sentence can be an indication that
the sentence is awkwardly constructed.
However, if a preposition falls naturally at the end of a
sentence, leave it there. (“I don’t remember which file name I
saved it under.”)
Prepositions in Titles Capitalize prepositions in titles when they are the first or last
words, or when they contain five or more letters (unless you are
following a style that recommends otherwise). See also
capitalization.
► The newspaper column “In My Opinion” included a review of the article “New Concerns About Distance Education.” [In and About are prepositions.]
862
Preposition Errors Do not use redundant prepositions, such as “off of,” “in back
of,” “inside of,” and “at about.”
Avoid unnecessarily adding the preposition up to verbs.
Do not omit necessary prepositions.
See also conciseness and English as a second language.
863
presentations DIRECTORY
Determining Your Purpose Analyzing Your Audience Gathering Information Structuring the Presentation Using Visuals Writer’s Checklist: Using Visuals in a Presentation Delivering a Presentation Writer’s Checklist: Preparing for and Delivering a Presentation
To prepare an effective presentation, determine your purpose
and analyze your audience. Then research your subject and
logically organize the information that supports your point of
view or proposal. Presentations differ from written documents
because your spoken delivery requires as much attention as
your content, and your organization and visuals must be
adapted to the audience that will view your presentation.
Determining Your Purpose Determine your primary purpose by asking the following
question: What do I want the audience to know, believe, or do
when I have finished the presentation? Based on the answer to
that question, write a purpose statement that answers the what?
and why? questions.
864
► The purpose of my presentation is to convince my company’s senior management of the need to hire a full- time social-media marketing coordinator [what] so that they will be persuaded to allocate additional funds in the budget for this position in the next fiscal year [why].
Analyzing Your Audience Once you have determined the desired end result of the
presentation, ask yourself these questions about your audience
so that you can tailor your presentation to their needs.
What is their level of experience or knowledge about your topic? What are their educational levels, ages, and other demographics? What is their attitude toward your topic and — based on that attitude — what are their possible concerns, fears, or objections? Are there subgroups in the audience with different concerns or needs? What questions might audience members ask about this topic?
Gathering Information Once you have focused the presentation, you need to find the
facts and arguments that support your point of view or the
action you propose. As you gather information, keep in mind
that you should give the audience only what will accomplish
865
your goals; too much detail will overwhelm them, and too little
will not adequately inform your listeners or support your
recommendations.
Structuring the Presentation Focus on your audience as listeners. Listeners are freshest at
the outset and refocus their attention near the end. Take
advantage of that pattern. Give your audience a brief overview
of your presentation at the beginning, use the body to develop
your ideas, and end with a summary of what you covered and, if
appropriate, a call to action. See also listening and methods of
development.
The Introduction Include in the introduction an opening that focuses your
audience’s attention, as in the following examples:
► [Definition of a problem] “You have to write an important report, and you’d like to incorporate lengthy handwritten notes from several meetings. But handwriting all those pages seems an incredible waste of time! Have I got a solution for you.”
► [An attention-getting statement] “As many as 70 million Americans have high blood pressure.”
► [A rhetorical question] “Would you be interested in a full- size computer keyboard that’s waterproof, noiseless, and rolls up like a rubber mat?”
► [A personal experience] “On a recent business trip, my rental car’s navigation system had me on the wrong
866
highway — and thirty miles in the wrong direction! After I managed to head in the right direction, I realized: we need a mobile alert app.”
► [An appropriate quotation] “According to researchers at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, ‘Garlic and its cousin, the onion, confer major health benefits — including fighting cancer, infections, and heart disease.’”
Following your opening, use the introduction to provide an
overview of the presentation. An overview can include general
or background information that will be needed to understand
the detailed information that follows, or it can preview how you
have organized the material.
► This presentation analyzes three high-volume, networked on-demand printers for us to consider purchasing. Based on a comparison of all three, I will recommend the one I believe best meets our needs. To do so, I’ll discuss the following five points:
1. Why we need a networked high-volume printer [the problem]
2. The basics of networked on-demand technology [general information]
3. The criteria I used to compare the three printer models [comparison]
4. The printer models I compared and why [possible solutions]
5. The printer I propose we buy [proposed solution]
The Body
867
If your goal is to persuade, present the evidence that will
convince the audience to accept your conclusions and act on
them. (See persuasion.) If you are discussing a problem,
demonstrate that it exists and offer a solution or range of
possible solutions. For example, if your introduction stated that
the problem for a company is low profits, high costs, or
outdated technology, you could use the following approach:
1. Prove your point. Strategically organize the facts and data you need. Present the information using easy-to-understand visuals.
2. Offer solutions. Increase profits by lowering production costs. Cut overhead to reduce costs, or abolish specific programs or product lines. Replace outdated technology, or upgrade existing technology.
3. Anticipate questions (“How much will it cost?”) and objections (“We’re too busy now — when would we have time to learn the new software?”), and incorporate the answers into your presentation.
Transitions Planned transitions should appear between the introduction
and the body, between major points in the body, and between
the body and the closing. Transitions are simply a sentence or
two to let the audience know that you are moving from one
topic to the next. They also prevent a choppy presentation and
868
provide the audience with assurance that you know where you
are going and how to get there.
► Before getting into the specifics of each printer I compared, I’d like to present the benefits of networked on- demand printers in general. That information will provide you with the background you’ll need to compare the differences among the printers and their capabilities, which I discuss in this presentation.
It is also a good idea to pause for a moment after you have
delivered a transition between topics to let your listeners shift
gears with you. Remember, they do not know your plan.
The Closing Your closing is what your audience is most likely to remember,
so use that time to be strong and persuasive. If your purpose is
to motivate the listeners to take action, ask them to do what you
want them to do. If it is to open your listeners’ minds, conclude
by stating why your position is viable. Consider the following
typical closing.
► Based on all the data, I believe that the Worthington TechLine 5510 Production Printer best suits our needs. It produces 40 pages per minute more than its closest competitor and provides modular systems that can be upgraded to support new applications. The Worthington is also compatible with our current network, and staff training at our site is included with our purchase. Although the initial cost is higher than that for the other two models,
869
the additional capabilities, compatibility with most standard environments, lower maintenance costs, and strong customer-support services make it a better value.
I recommend we allocate the funds necessary for this
printer by the fifteenth of this month to be well prepared
for the production of next quarter’s customer publications.
This closing brings the presentation full circle and asks the
audience to fulfill the purpose of the presentation — exactly
what a conclusion should do.
Using Visuals Well-planned visuals can add interest, focus, and emphasis to
your presentation. Charts, graphs, and illustrations can greatly
increase audience understanding and retention of information,
especially for complex issues and technical information that
could otherwise be misunderstood or overlooked.
ETHICS NOTE
Be sure to provide credit for any visual taken from a print or an online source. You can include a citation either on an individual visual (such as a slide) or in a list of references or works cited that you distribute to your audience. For information on citing visuals, see documenting sources.
You can create and present the visual components of your
presentation by using a variety of media — flip charts,
870
whiteboards or chalkboards, or presentation software. See also
layout and design.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
If your presentation contains a lot of details or complex drawings, prepare handouts for your audience, on which they can jot down notes for future reference.
Flip Charts Flip charts, usually on easels, are ideal for use with smaller
groups in a conference room or classroom and work well for
brainstorming with your audience.
Whiteboards or Chalkboards The whiteboards or chalkboards common to classrooms are
convenient for creating sketches and for jotting down notes
during your presentation.
Presentation Software Presentation software, such as Microsoft Power-Point, Prezi,
and open-source products, helps you integrate text, audio,
images, links, and video content into your presentation. These
programs and others that offer various collaborative and file-
sharing capabilities constantly evolve and require that you keep
current with the latest versions and enhancements. (See
adapting to new technologies.) Avoid using too many
enhancements, which may distract your audience from your
871
message. Figure P– 4 shows well-balanced slides for a
presentation based on the sample formal report in Figure F–6.
FIGURE P–4. Presentation Slides
872
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Be sure to prepare for potential technical difficulties. Should you encounter a technical snag during the presentation, stay calm and give yourself time to solve the problem. If you cannot solve the problem, move on without the technology. As a precaution, always carry a printout of your slides and copies for your audience, and save a backup copy of your digital presentation file.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Using Visuals in a Presentation
✓ Limit each visual to a number of words that can be quickly read by your audience.
✓ Use a font size readable to audience members at the back of the room.
✓ Limit the number of items in lists to no more than five or six per visual, and use numbers if sequence is important and bullets if not.
✓ Create lists with parallel structure and balanced content. ✓ Make your visuals consistent in font style, size, and spacing. ✓ Consider the contrast between your content and the background
to ensure that text and images are clear to those in the audience. ✓ Use only one or two illustrations per visual (or slide) to avoid
clutter. ✓ Use graphs, charts, and infographics to show data trends. ✓ Avoid overloading your presentation with so many visuals that
you distract or tax the audience’s concentration: One visual for every two minutes is a common guideline.
✓ Avoid using sound or visual effects in presentation software that distract from the content or may seem unprofessional.
873
✓ Do not read the text on your visual word for word. Your audience can read the visuals; they look to you to develop the key points.
✓ Match your delivery of the content to your visuals. Do not put one visual on the screen and talk about the previous visual or the next one.
Delivering a Presentation Once you have outlined and drafted your presentation and
prepared your visuals, you are ready to practice your
presentation and delivery techniques. See also outlining.
Practice Familiarize yourself with the sequence of the material — major
topics, notes, and visuals — in your outline. Once you feel
comfortable with the content, you are ready to practice the
presentation (in front of others if possible).
PRACTICE ON YOUR FEET AND OUT LOUD. Try to practice
on-site to get the feel of the room: the lighting, the equipment,
the seating, the location of outlets and switches, and so forth.
Practice out loud to gauge the length of your presentation, to
uncover problems (such as awkward transitions), and to
eliminate verbal tics (for example, “um,” “you know,” and
“like”).
PRACTICE WITH YOUR VISUALS AND TEXT. Integrate your
visuals into your practice sessions to help your presentation go
more smoothly. Operate the equipment (computer or
874
presentation system) until you are comfortable with it.
Delivery Techniques That Work Your delivery is both aural and visual. In addition to your words
and message, your nonverbal communication affects your
audience. Be animated — your words have impact and staying
power when they are delivered with physical and vocal
animation. If you want listeners to share your point of view,
show enthusiasm for your topic. The most common delivery
techniques include making eye contact; using movement and
gestures; and varying voice inflection, projection, and pace.
EYE CONTACT. The best way to establish rapport with your
audience is through eye contact. In a large audience, directly
address those who seem most responsive to you in different
parts of the room. Doing so also gives you important visual cues
about how your message is being received. Do the listeners
seem engaged? Based on your observations, you may need to
adjust your pace.
MOVEMENT. Animate the presentation with physical
movement. Take a step or two to one side after you have been
talking for a minute or so. That type of movement is most
effective at transitional points in your presentation, such as
between major topics or after pauses or emphases. Too much
movement, however, can be distracting, so try not to pace.
Another way to integrate movement into your presentation is
to walk to the screen and point to the visual as you discuss it.
875
Touch the screen with the pointer and then turn back to the
audience before beginning to speak (remember the three t’s:
touch, turn, and talk).
GESTURES. Gestures both animate your presentation and
help communicate your message. Most people gesture naturally
when they talk; nervousness, however, can inhibit gesturing
during a presentation. Keep one hand free, and use that hand to
gesture.
VOICE. Your voice can be an effective tool in communicating
your sincerity, enthusiasm, and command of your topic. Vocal
inflection is the rise and fall of your voice at different times,
such as the way your voice naturally rises at the end of a
question (“You want it when?”). Conversational delivery and eye
contact promote the feeling among audience members that you
are addressing them directly. Use vocal inflection to highlight
differences between key and subordinate points.
PROJECTION. Most presenters think they are speaking
louder than they are. Remember that your presentation will be
ineffective for anyone in the audience who cannot hear you.
Correct projection problems by practicing out loud with
someone listening from the back of the room.
PACE. Be aware of the speed at which you deliver your
presentation. If you speak too fast, your words will run
together, making it difficult for your audience to follow. If you
speak too slowly, your listeners will become impatient and
876
distracted.
Presentation Anxiety Everyone experiences nervousness before a presentation.
Instead of letting fear inhibit you, channel your nervous energy
into a helpful stimulant. The best way to master anxiety is to
know your topic thoroughly — knowing what you are going to
say and how you are going to say it will help you gain
confidence and reduce anxiety as you become immersed in
your subject.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Preparing for and Delivering a Presentation
✓ Prepare a set of notes that will trigger your memory during the presentation.
✓ Make as much eye contact as possible with your audience to establish rapport and maximize opportunities for audience feedback.
✓ Animate your delivery by integrating movement, gestures, and vocal inflection into your presentation. However, keep your movements and speech patterns natural.
✓ Speak loudly and slowly enough to be heard and understood. ✓ Review Writer’s Checklist: Using Visuals in a Presentation (pages
400–401) as well as this entry’s advice on presentation delivery.
For tips on communicating with cross-cultural audiences, see
global communication, global graphics, and international
correspondence.
877
press releases The purpose of a press release (or news release) is both to
inform the public about the company and its products and
services, and to enhance the organization’s brand identity.
Large corporations and institutions usually have their own
public relations staff or use outside agencies. However, if you
work for a small company without public relations resources,
you may be called on to write a press release.
The press release should be clear, concise, and written with
particular attention to the five w’s: who, what, where, when,
and why. Begin the first paragraph with the place and date of
the announcement, as shown in Figure P–5. Put all critical
information in the first paragraph, then use the decreasing
order-of-importance method of development to organize the
following paragraphs. Use the final paragraph to provide a brief
overview of the organization as well as its products, services,
and locations. Make sure your facts are accurate, and be careful
to define any unfamiliar terms.
878
FIGURE P–5. Press Release
News releases are usually distributed through online outlets
as well as by local newspapers and television and radio stations.
879
Organizations also post versions of releases on their own Web
sites or social media sites, and distribute them to trade and
professional associations. See also blogs and forums and
newsletter articles.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Preparing Press Releases
✓ Use company stationery with a minimum of one-inch margins. ✓ Use boldface type for the headlines and double-space paragraphs
for easy reading and copying. ✓ Consider including a professional photograph of a new hire (head
shot) or product. ✓ Use “-more-” centered at the bottom of the page when you need
to indicate that another page follows. ✓ Allow one blank line, then center “# # #” or “-30-” or “-End-” to
indicate where the press release ends. ✓ Send the release to a specific person, such as a business or
technology editor or blogger.
880
principal / principle Principal, meaning “an amount of money on which interest is
earned or paid” or “a chief official in a school or court
proceeding,” is sometimes confused with principle, which
means “a basic truth or belief.”
► The bank will pay 3.5 percent on the principal. ► He sent an e-mail to the principal of the high school. ► She objected to the idea on principle.
Principal is also an adjective, meaning “main” or “primary.”
(“My principal objection is that it will be too expensive.”)
881
process explanation A process explanation may describe the steps in a process, an
operation, or a procedure, such as the steps necessary to start a
small business. The introduction often presents a brief
overview of the process or lets readers know why it is
important for them to become familiar with the process you are
explaining. Be sure to define terms that readers might not
understand and provide visuals to clarify the process. See also
defining terms and instructions.
In describing a process, use transitional words and phrases
to create unity within paragraphs, and select headings to
provide a transition from one step to the next. The example of a
“Tuition Reimbursement Approval” describes a step-by-step
process.
882
progress and activity reports Progress reports provide details on the tasks completed for
major workplace projects, whereas activity reports focus on the
ongoing work of individual employees. Both are sometimes
called status reports. Although many organizations use
standardized templates and others use Web-based report forms,
the content and structure shown in Figures P– 6 and P–7 are
typical. See also reports.
Progress Reports A progress report provides information to decision-makers
about the status of a project — whether it is on schedule and
within budget. Progress reports are often submitted by a
contracting company to a client company, as shown in Figure
P– 6. They are used mainly for projects that involve many steps
and are issued at regular intervals to describe what has been
done and what remains to be done. Progress reports help
projects run smoothly by helping managers assign work, adjust
schedules, allocate budgets, and order supplies and equipment.
All progress reports for a particular project should have the
same format.
883
884
FIGURE P–6. Progress Report (Using Letter Format)
The introduction to the first progress report should identify
the project, methods used, necessary materials, expenditures,
and completion date. Subsequent reports summarize the
progress achieved since the preceding report and list the steps
that remain to be taken. The body of the progress report should
describe the project’s status, including such details as schedules
and costs, a statement of the work completed, and perhaps an
estimate of future progress. The report ends with conclusions
and recommendations about changes in the schedule,
materials, techniques, and other information important to the
project.
Activity Reports Within an organization, employees often submit activity reports
to managers on the status of ongoing projects. Managers may
combine the activity reports of several individuals or teams into
larger activity reports and, in turn, submit those larger reports
to their own managers. The activity report shown in Figure P–7
was submitted by a manager (Wayne Tribinski) who supervises
11 employees; the reader of the report (Kathryn Hunter) is
Tribinski’s manager.
885
FIGURE P–7. Activity Report (Using E-mail Format)
886
Because the activity report is issued periodically (usually
monthly) and contains material familiar to its readers, it
normally needs no introduction or conclusion, although it may
need a brief opening to provide context. Although the format
varies from company to company, these sections are typical:
Current Projects, Current Problems, Plans for the Next Period,
and Current Staffing Level (for managers).
887
promotional writing Promotional writing is vital to the success of any company or
organization; high-quality, state-of-the-art products or services
are of little value if customers and clients do not know they
exist. Although you may not be a marketing or public relations
specialist, you may be asked to prepare promotional (or
marketing) materials, especially if you work for a small
organization or are self-employed. Even at a large company,
you may contribute to Web sites, brochures, newsletters,
press releases, sales letters, blogs and forums, or social
media feeds. See also collaborative writing and writing for the
Web.
Many other documents described in this book often include
the additional or secondary purpose of promoting an
organization. For example, adjustment letters, which are
usually concerned with resolving a specific problem, offer
opportunities to promote your organization.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Promotional Writing
✓ Analyze the needs, interests, concerns, makeup, and activities of your audience.
✓ Conduct adequate research to understand your audience, especially by talking to those with firsthand knowledge of the product or service. (See interviewing for information.)
✓ Use the principles of persuasion to gain attention, build interest,
888
reduce resistance, and motivate readers to act. ✓ Optimize your keywords, phrases, and search tags to reach the
greatest number of interested readers. ✓ Make information visually appealing through strong
organization, layout and design, and visuals that are well integrated with the text.
✓ Write with clarity, coherence, and conciseness to help your readers understand the message and to achieve your purpose.
ETHICS NOTE
Because readers are persuaded only if they believe the source is credible, do not overstate claims and avoid possible logic errors. See also ethics in writing.
889
pronoun reference A pronoun should refer clearly to a specific antecedent. Avoid
vague and uncertain references.
For coherence, place pronouns as close as possible to their
antecedents — distance increases the likelihood of ambiguity.
A general (or broad) reference or one that has no real
antecedent is a problem that often occurs when the word this is
used by itself.
Another common problem is a hidden reference, which has
only an implied antecedent.
Do not repeat an antecedent in parentheses following the
pronoun. If you feel you must identify the pronoun’s antecedent
in that way, rewrite the sentence.
AWKWARD The senior partner first met Bob Evans when he (Evans) was a trainee.
890
IMPROVED Bob Evans was a trainee when the senior partner first met him.
IMPROVED When the senior partner first met Bob Evans, Bob was a trainee.
For advice on avoiding pronoun-reference problems with
gender, see biased language.
891
pronouns DIRECTORY
Case Gender Number Person
A pronoun is a word that is used as a substitute for a noun (the
noun for which a pronoun substitutes is called the antecedent).
Using pronouns in place of nouns relieves the monotony of
repeating the same noun over and over. See also pronoun
reference.
Personal pronouns refer to the person or people speaking (I,
me, my, mine; we, us, our, ours); the person or people spoken
to (you, your, yours); or the person, people, or thing(s) spoken
of (he, him, his; she, her, hers; it, its; they, them, their, theirs).
See also person and point of view.
► If their figures are correct, ours must be in error.
Demonstrative pronouns (this, these, that, those) indicate or
point out the thing being referred to.
► This is my desk. These are my coworkers. That will be a difficult job. Those are incorrect figures.
892
Relative pronouns (who, whom, which, that) perform a dual
function: (1) They take the place of nouns, and (2) they connect
and establish the relationship between a dependent clause and
its main clause.
► The department manager decided who would be hired.
Interrogative pronouns (who, whom, what, which) are used to
ask questions.
► What is the trouble?
Indefinite pronouns specify a class or group of persons or
things rather than a particular person or thing (all, another,
any, anyone, anything, both, each, either, everybody, few,
many, most, much, neither, nobody, none, several, some,
such).
► Not everyone liked the new procedures; some even refused to follow them.
A reflexive pronoun, which always ends with the suffix self or
selves, indicates that the subject of the sentence acts upon
itself. See also sentence construction.
► The electrician accidentally shocked herself.
The reflexive pronouns are myself, yourself, himself, herself,
itself, oneself, ourselves, yourselves, and themselves. Myself is
not a substitute for I or me as a personal pronoun.
893
Intensive pronouns are identical in form to the reflexive
pronouns, but they perform a different function: Intensive
pronouns emphasize their antecedents.
► I myself asked the same question.
Reciprocal pronouns (one another, each other) indicate the
relationship of one item to another. Each other is commonly
used when referring to two persons or things, and one another
when referring to more than two.
► Lashell and Kara work well with each other. ► The crew members work well with one another.
Case Pronouns have forms to show the subjective, objective, and
possessive cases.
SINGULAR SUBJECTIVE OBJECTIVE POSSESSIVE
First person I me my, mine
Second person you you your, yours
Third person he, she, it him, her, it his, her, hers, its
PLURAL SUBJECTIVE OBJECTIVE POSSESSIVE
First person we us our, ours
Second person you you your, yours
894
Third person they them their, theirs
A pronoun that functions as the subject of a clause or sentence
is in the subjective case (I, we, he, she, it, you, they, who). The
subjective case is also used when the pronoun follows a linking
verb.
► She is my boss. ► My boss is she.
A pronoun that functions as the object of a verb or preposition
is in the objective case (me, us, him, her, it, you, them, whom).
► Ms. Davis hired Tom and me. [object of verb] ► Between you and me, she’s wrong. [object of preposition]
A pronoun that expresses ownership is in the possessive case
(my, mine, our, ours, his, her, hers, its, your, yours, their,
theirs, whose).
► He took his notes with him on the business trip. ► We took our notes with us on the business trip.
A pronoun appositive takes the case of its antecedent.
► Two systems analysts, Joe and I, were selected to represent the company. [Joe and I is in apposition to the subject, two systems analysts, and must therefore be in the subjective case.]
► The manager selected two representatives — Joe and me. [Joe and me is in apposition to two representatives, which is
895
the object of the verb, selected, and therefore must be in the objective case.]
If you have difficulty determining the case of a compound
pronoun, try using the pronoun singly.
► In his letter, Eldon mentioned him and me.In his letter, Eldon mentioned him.In his letter, Eldon mentioned me.
► They and we must discuss the terms of the merger.They must discuss the terms of the merger.We must discuss the terms of the merger.
When a pronoun modifies a noun, try it without the noun to
determine its case.
► [We / Us] pilots fly our own planes.We fly our own planes. [You would not write, “Us fly our own planes.”]
► He addressed his remarks directly to [we / us] technicians. He addressed his remarks directly to us. [You would not write, “He addressed his remarks directly to we.”]
Gender A pronoun must agree in gender with its antecedent. A problem
sometimes occurs because the masculine pronoun has
traditionally been used to refer to both sexes. To avoid the
sexual bias implied in such usage, use he or she or the plural
form of the pronoun, they.
896
As in this example, when the singular pronoun (he) changes to
the plural (they), the singular indefinite pronoun (each) must
also change to its plural form (all). See also agreement and
biased language.
Number Number is a frequent problem with a few indefinite pronouns
(each, either, neither, and those ending with body or one, such
as anybody, anyone, everybody, everyone, nobody, no one,
somebody, and someone) that are normally singular and thus
require singular verbs and corresponding singular pronouns.
► As each member arrives for the meeting, please hand him or her a copy of the confidential report. Everyone must return the copy before he or she leaves. Everybody on the committee understands that neither of our major competitors is aware of the new process we have developed.
Person Third-person personal pronouns usually have antecedents.
► Gina presented the report to the members of the board of directors. She [Gina] first summarized it [the report] for them [the directors] and then asked for questions.
897
First- and second-person personal pronouns do not normally
require antecedents.
► I like my job. ► You were on vacation at the time. ► We all worked hard on the project.
898
proofreading Proofreading is essential whether you are writing a brief e-mail
or a high-stakes résumé. Grammar checkers and spell checkers
are important aids to proofreading, but they can make writers
overconfident. If a typographical error results in a legitimate
English word (for example, coarse instead of course), the spell
checker will not flag the misspelling. You may find some of the
tactics discussed in revision useful when proofreading; in fact,
you may find passages during proofreading that will require
further revision.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Proofreading not only demonstrates that you respect readers (who can be distracted, irritated, or misled by errors in writing) but also reflects that you are professional in the way you approach your work.
Whether the material you proofread is your own writing or
that of someone else, proofread in several stages. Although you
need to tailor the stages to the specific document and to your
own problem areas, the following Writer’s Checklist should
provide a useful starting point.
Traditional handwritten proofreaders’ marks are illustrated
in the Chicago Manual of Style, 17th edition, Figures 2.6 and 2.7.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
899
Proofreading in Stages FIRST-STAGE REVIEW
✓ Appropriate format, as for reports or correspondence ✓ Consistent style, including headings, terminology, spacing, and
fonts ✓ Correct numbering of figures and tables
SECOND-STAGE REVIEW
✓ Specific grammar and usage problems ✓ Appropriate punctuation ✓ Correct and consistent abbreviations and capitalization ✓ Correct spelling (including names and places) ✓ Accurate Web, e-mail, or other addresses ✓ Accurate data in tables, figures, and lists ✓ Cut-and-paste errors; for example, a result of moved or deleted
text and numbers
FINAL-STAGE REVIEW
✓ Review of your overall goals: audience needs and purpose ✓ Appearance of the document (see layout and design) ✓ Review by a trusted colleague, especially for crucial documents
(see collaborative writing)
900
proposals DIRECTORY
Proposal Strategies Audience and Purpose Project Management
Proposal Context and Types Writer’s Checklist: Writing Persuasive Proposals Internal Proposals
Informal Internal Proposals Formal Internal Proposals
External Proposals Solicited Proposals Unsolicited Proposals Sales Proposals
Grant Proposals (see entry grant proposals)
A proposal is a document written to persuade readers that what
is proposed will benefit them by solving a problem or fulfilling
a need. When you write a proposal, therefore, you must
convince readers that they need what you are proposing, that it
is practical and appropriate, and that you are the right person
or organization to provide the proposed product or service. See
also persuasion and “you” viewpoint.
Proposal Strategies For any proposal, support your assertions with relevant facts,
statistics, and examples. Your supporting evidence must lead
901
logically to your proposed plan of action or solution. Cite relevant sources that provide strong credibility to your
argument. Do not wander from your main point or make false
claims. See ethics in writing.
Audience and Purpose Proposals often require more than one level of approval, so take
into account all the readers in your audience and their levels of
technical knowledge. For example, if your primary reader is an
expert on your subject but an executive who must approve the
proposal is not, provide an executive summary written in
nontechnical language. You might also include a glossary of
terms used in the body of the proposal or an appendix that
explains highly detailed information in nontechnical language.
If your primary reader is not an expert, write the proposal with
the nonexpert in mind but include an appendix that contains
the technical details.
Writing a persuasive proposal can be simplified by
composing a concise statement of purpose — the exact problem
or opportunity that your proposal is designed to address.
Composing a purpose statement first will also help you and any
collaborators understand the direction, scope, and goals of your
proposal.
Project Management Proposal writers are often faced with writing high-quality,
persuasive proposals under tight organizational deadlines.
902
Dividing the task into manageable parts is the key to
accomplishing your goals, especially when proposals involve
substantial collaborative writing. For example, you might set
deadlines for completing various proposal sections or stages of
the writing process. Proposal-management software allows
businesses to automate the more routine tasks while easily
tracking multiple versions.
Proposal Context and Types Understanding the context of the proposal will help you
determine the most appropriate writing strategy. In general, to
persuade those within your organization to make a change or an
improvement or perhaps to fund a project, you would write an
internal proposal. To persuade those outside your company to
agree to a plan or take a course of action, you would write an
external proposal.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing Persuasive Proposals
✓ Analyze your audience carefully to determine how to best meet your readers’ needs or requirements.
✓ Write a concise purpose statement at the outset to clarify your proposal’s goals.
✓ Divide the writing task into manageable segments, and develop a time line for completing tasks.
✓ Review the descriptions of proposal contexts, structure, and types in this entry.
✓ Focus on the proposal’s benefits to readers, and anticipate their
903
questions or objections. ✓ Incorporate evidence to support the claims of your proposal. ✓ Select an appropriate, visually appealing format (unless one is
defined by the request for proposals). See layout and design. ✓ Use a confident, positive tone throughout the proposal.
Internal Proposals The purpose of an internal proposal is to suggest a change or an
improvement within the writer’s organization. It is addressed to
a superior who has the authority to accept or reject the
proposal. Internal proposals are typically reviewed by one or
more departments for cost, practicality, and potential benefits,
so take account of all relevant audience members. Two
common types of internal proposals — informal and formal —
are often distinguished from each other by the frequency with
which they are written and by the degree of change they
propose.
Informal Internal Proposals Informal internal proposals are the most common type of
proposal and typically include small spending requests,
requests for permission to hire new employees or increase
salaries, and requests to attend conferences or purchase new
equipment. In writing informal or routine proposals, highlight
any key benefits to be realized.
Formal Internal Proposals Formal internal proposals usually involve requests to commit
904
large sums of money or to recommend large-scale
reorganizations. They are usually organized into sections that
describe a problem, propose a solution, and offer to implement
the suggested recommendation. The body, in turn, is further
divided into sections to reflect the subject matter. The proposal
may begin with a section describing the background or history
of an issue and go on to discuss options for addressing the issue
in separate sections.
The introduction of your internal proposal should establish
that a problem exists and needs a solution. If the audience is not
convinced that there is a problem, your proposal will not
succeed. After you identify the problem, summarize your
solution and indicate its benefits and estimated total cost.
Notice how the introduction in Figure P–8 states the problem
directly and then summarizes the proposed solution.
905
FIGURE P–8. Special-Purpose Internal Proposal (Introduction and Body)
906
The body of your internal proposal should offer a practical
solution to the problem and provide the details necessary to
inform and persuade your readers. In the body, describe the
problem for which you are offering a solution; the methodology
of your proposed solution; details about equipment, materials,
and staff; cost breakdowns; and a comprehensive schedule.
Figure P–8 provides a section from the body of an internal
proposal.
The conclusion of your internal proposal should tie
everything together, restate your recommendation, and close
with a spirit of cooperation (offering to set up a meeting, supply
additional information, or provide any other assistance that
might be needed). Keep your conclusion brief, as in Figure P–8.
See conclusions.
907
FIGURE P–8. Special-Purpose Internal Proposal (Conclusion)
If your proposal cites information that you obtained through
research, such as published reports, government statistics, or
interviews, follow the conclusion with a list of works cited that
provides complete publication information for each source.
External Proposals External proposals are prepared for clients and customers
908
outside your company. They are either submitted in response to
a request for goods and services from another organization (a
solicited proposal) or sent to an organization without a prior
request (an unsolicited proposal). The grant proposal is a type
of external proposal. Such proposals are usually submitted to
nonprofit or government organizations to request funding.
Solicited Proposals These proposals seek the most qualified company to help an
organization reach its goals by issuing a request for proposals
(RFP) or an invitation for bids (IFB) to companies that compete
for the work.
An RFP often defines a need or problem and allows those
who respond to propose possible solutions. The procuring
organization generally distributes an RFP to several
predetermined vendors. The RFP usually outlines the specific
requirements for the ideal solution. For example, if an
organization needs a new accounting system, it may require the
proposed system to create customized reports. The RFP also
may define specific formatting requirements, such as page
length, font type and size, headings, and sections. Some large
organizations require that proposals be submitted entirely
online with specific requirements. When responding to RFPs,
follow their requirements exactly — proposals that do not are
usually considered “noncompliant” and immediately rejected.
In contrast to an RFP, an IFB is commonly issued by federal,
909
state, and local government agencies to solicit bids on clearly
defined products or services. An IFB is restrictive, binding the
bidder to produce an item or a service that meets the exact
requirements of the organization issuing the IFB. The goods or
services are defined in the IFB by references to performance
standards stated in technical specifications. Bidders must be
prepared to prove that their product will meet all requirements
of the specifications. The procuring organization generally
publishes its IFB online, either on its own Web site or on others,
such as Federal Business Opportunities at www.fbo.gov. Like
RFPs, IFBs usually define specific format requirements;
proposals that do not follow the required format can be rejected
without review.
Unsolicited Proposals Unsolicited proposals are those submitted to a company
without a prior request. Companies often operate for years with
a problem they have never recognized (unnecessarily high
maintenance costs, for example, or poor inventory-control
methods). Many unsolicited proposals are preceded by a letter
of inquiry that specifies the problem or unmet need to
determine potential interest. A positive response would prompt
a detailed study of the prospective client’s needs. A formal
proposal would then be prepared based on the results of the
study.
Sales Proposals The sales proposal is a company’s offer to provide specific
910
goods or services to a potential buyer within a specified period
of time and for a specified price. The primary purpose of a sales
proposal is to demonstrate that the prospective customer’s
purchase of the seller’s products or services will solve a
problem, improve operations, or offer other benefits.
Sales proposals can be a page or two written by one person;
many pages written collaboratively by several people; or
hundreds of pages written by a proposal-writing team. Many
sales proposals note that the offer is valid for a limited period
(often 90 days). See also collaborative writing.
ETHICS NOTE
Once submitted, a sales proposal is a legally binding document that promises to offer goods or services within a specified time and for a specified price.
Simple sales proposals typically follow the introduction-
body-conclusion pattern. Long sales proposals must
accommodate a greater variety of information and are
organized to include some or all of the following sections
specified in the RFP:
Cover message Title page Executive or project summary General description of products Detailed solution or rationale Cost analysis Delivery schedule or work plan
Site-preparation description Training requirements Statement of responsibilities Description of vendor Organizational sales pitch Conclusion Appendixes
911
COVER MESSAGE. A long sales proposal begins with a cover
message expressing appreciation for the opportunity to submit
the proposal and offering thanks for any assistance received.
The letter should acknowledge any previous positive association
with the customer. Then it should summarize the
recommendations offered in the proposal and express
confidence that they will satisfy the customer’s needs. Cover
messages often list the documents attached or enclosed to help
readers keep the associated documents together.
TITLE PAGE. The title page contains the title of the proposal,
the date of submission, the company to which it is being
submitted, your company’s name, and any symbol or logo that
identifies your company.
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY. An executive summary—
sometimes called a project summary—follows the title page.
Intended for the decision-maker who will ultimately accept or
reject the proposal, it should summarize in nontechnical
language how you plan to approach the work.
DESCRIPTION. If your proposal offers products as well as
services, it should include a general description of the products.
In many cases, product descriptions will already exist as
company boilerplate; be sure to check your company’s files
before drafting a description from scratch.
912
ETHICS NOTE
Using “boilerplate” is neither plagiarism nor a violation of copyright. See also repurposing.
RATIONALE. Following the executive summary and general
description of products, explain exactly how you plan to do
what you are proposing. This section, called the detailed
solution or rationale, will be read by specialists who can
understand and evaluate your plan. It usually begins with a
statement of the customer’s problem, follows with a statement
of the solution, and concludes with a statement of the benefits
to the customer. In some proposals, the headings “Problem”
and “Solution” are used for this section.
COST ANALYSIS. A cost analysis itemizes the estimated cost
of all the products and services that you are offering.
DELIVERY SCHEDULE. The delivery schedule—also called a
work plan—is a commitment to meet a specific timetable for
providing agreed-upon products and services.
SITE PREPARATION. If your recommendations include
modifying your customer’s physical facilities by moving walls,
adding increased electrical capacity, and the like, include a site-
preparation description that details the modifications required.
In some proposals, the headings “Facilities” and “Equipment”
are used for this section.
913
TRAINING. If the products and services proposed require
training the customer’s employees, specify the required
training and its cost.
RESPONSIBILITIES. To prevent misunderstandings about
what your and the customer’s responsibilities will be, draw up a
statement of responsibilities that explains in detail the tasks
that are solely your responsibility and those that are solely the
customer’s responsibility.
VENDOR DESCRIPTION. The description-of-vendor section
gives a profile of your company, its history, and its present
position in the industry. The description-of-vendor section
typically includes a list of people or subcontractors and the
duties they will perform. The résumés of key personnel may
also be placed here or in an appendix.
SALES PITCH. An organizational sales pitch usually follows
the description-of-vendor section and is designed to sell the
company and its general capability in the field. The sales pitch
promotes the company and concludes the proposal on an
upbeat note.
CONCLUSION. Some long sales proposals include a
conclusion section that summarizes the proposal’s salient
points, stresses your company’s strengths, and includes
information about whom the potential client can contact for
further information. It may also end with a request for the date
the work will begin should the proposal be accepted.
914
APPENDIXES. Some proposals include appendixes made up
of statistical analyses, maps, charts, tables, and résumés of the
principal staff assigned to the project. Appendixes to proposals
should contain only supplemental information.
Figure P–9 shows sections from a major sales proposal.
915
916
Figure P–9. Sales Proposal (Cover Message)
917
FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Executive Summary)
918
919
920
FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (General Description of Products)
921
922
FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Detailed Solution)
923
924
FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Cost Analysis and Delivery Schedule)
925
926
FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Site Preparation)
927
928
FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Training)
929
FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Statement of Responsibilities)
930
931
932
FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Vendor Description and Organizational Sales Pitch)
933
FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Conclusion)
934
935
pseudo- / quasi- As a prefix, pseudo-, meaning “false or counterfeit,” is joined to
the root word without a hyphen unless the root word begins
with a capital letter (pseudoscience, pseudo-Keynesian).
Pseudo- is sometimes confused with quasi-, meaning
“somewhat” or “partial.” Unlike semi-, quasi- means
“resembling something” rather than “half.” Quasi- is usually
hyphenated in combinations (quasi-marketing initiatives).
936
punctuation Punctuation helps readers understand the meaning and
relationships of words, phrases, clauses, and sentences. Marks
of punctuation link, separate, enclose, indicate omissions,
terminate, and classify. Most punctuation marks can perform
more than one function. See also sentence construction.
The use of punctuation is determined by grammatical
conventions and the writer’s intention. Understanding
punctuation is essential for writers because it enables them to
communicate with clarity and precision. See also grammar.
Detailed information on each mark of punctuation is given in
its own entry. The following are the 13 marks of punctuation.
apostrophe ’ parentheses ( )
brackets [ ] period .
colon : question mark ?
comma , quotation marks “ ”
dash — semicolon ;
exclamation mark ! slash /
hyphen -
See also abbreviations, capitalization, contractions, dates,
ellipses, italics, and numbers.
937
purpose The primary purpose, or objective, of a writing task is the
answer to the following question: What do you want your
readers to know, believe, or do once they have read your
document? Be careful not to state a purpose too broadly. A
statement of purpose such as “to explain continuing-education
standards” is too general to be helpful during the writing
process. In contrast, “to explain to members of the American
Association of Critical-Care Nurses (AACN) how to determine if
a continuing-education course meets AACN professional
standards” is a specific purpose that will help you focus on the
needs of your audience and what your document should
accomplish. See also context.
The writer’s primary purpose is often more complex than
simply “to explain” something, as shown in the previous
paragraph. Ask yourself not only why you are writing the
document but also what you want your reader to believe or do
after reading it. Suppose a writer for a newsletter has been
assigned to write an article about cardiopulmonary
resuscitation (CPR). In answer to the question what? the writer
could state the purpose as “to emphasize the importance of
CPR.” To the question why? the writer might respond, “to
encourage employees to sign up for evening CPR classes.”
Putting the answers to the two questions together, the writer’s
purpose might be stated as, “To write a document that will
emphasize the importance of CPR and encourage employees to
938
sign up for evening CPR classes.” The primary purpose of this
document is to persuade the readers of the importance of CPR,
and the secondary goal is to motivate them to register for a
class. Secondary goals often involve such abstract notions as to
motivate, reassure, or inspire. See also persuasion.
If you answer the questions what? and why? and put the
answers into writing as a stated purpose that includes both
primary and secondary goals, you will simplify your writing
task and more likely achieve your purpose. For a collaborative
writing project, it is especially important to collectively write a
statement of your purpose to ensure that the document
achieves its goals. Do not lose sight of that purpose as you
become engrossed in the other steps of the writing process. See
also “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”
939
Q
940
question marks The question mark (?) most often ends a sentence that is a direct
question or request.
► Where did you put the tax report? [direct question] ► Will you e-mail me if your shipment does not arrive by
June 10? [request]
Use a question mark to end a statement that has an
interrogative meaning — a statement that is declarative in form
but asks a question.
► The tax report is finished? [question in declarative form]
Question marks may follow a series of separate items within an
interrogative sentence.
► Do you remember the date of the contract? Its terms? Whether you signed it?
Use a question mark to end an interrogative clause within a
declarative sentence.
► It was not until July (or was it August?) that we submitted the report.
Retain the question mark in a title that is being cited, even
though the sentence in which it appears has not ended.
► Can Investments Be Protected? is the title of her book.
941
Never use a question mark to end a sentence that is an indirect
question.
When a question is a polite request or an instruction to which
an affirmative response is assumed, a question mark is not
necessary.
► Will you call me as soon as he arrives. [polite request]
When used with quotations, the placement of the question
mark is important. When the writer is asking a question, the
question mark belongs outside the quotation marks.
► Did she actually say, “I don’t think the project should continue”?
If the quotation itself is a question, the question mark goes
inside the quotation marks.
► She asked, “Do we have enough funding?”
If both cases apply — the writer is asking a question and the
quotation itself is a question — use a single question mark inside
the quotation marks.
► Did she ask, “Do we have enough funding?”
942
questionnaires A questionnaire is a research tool consisting of a series of
questions on a particular topic sent to a targeted group of
individuals in an easy-totabulate form. It may be distributed on
paper, as an e-mail attachment, or as an online digital form. As
you prepare a questionnaire, keep in mind your purpose and
your intended audience. See also interviewing for
information.
Questionnaires have several advantages over the personal
interview as well as several disadvantages.
ADVANTAGES
A questionnaire allows you to gather information from more people than you could by conducting personal interviews. A questionnaire enables you to obtain responses from people who are difficult to reach or who are in various geographic locations. A questionnaire gives respondents more time to think through their answers than a personal interview would. A questionnaire may yield more objective data than an interview because an interviewer’s tone of voice, facial expressions, or mere presence might influence an answer. The cost of distributing and tabulating a questionnaire is lower than the cost of conducting numerous personal interviews.
943
DISADVANTAGES
Results may be slanted in favor of those people who have strong opinions on a subject because they are more likely to respond to a questionnaire than are those with only moderate views. A questionnaire does not allow specific follow-up questions to answers. Distributing questionnaires and receiving responses may take longer than conducting personal interviews.
A sample cover e-mail message with a link to an online
questionnaire is shown in Figure Q–1. The e-mail message and
questionnaire were sent to employees in a large organization
who had participated in a six-month pilot program of flexible
working hours.
944
FIGURE Q–1. Questionnaire (Cover Message)
945
946
FIGURE Q–1. Questionnaire
947
948
FIGURE Q–1. Questionnaire
Selecting the Recipients Selecting the proper recipients for your questionnaire is crucial
if you are to gather representative and usable data. Depending
on the topic, you may need to include people from different
geographic areas, occupations, genders, and educational
backgrounds. Only by using a representative sample of your
target population can you make a generalized statement based
on your findings from the sample. (The best sources of
information on sampling techniques are market-research and
statistics texts.)
Preparing the Questions Keep the questionnaire as brief as possible to maximize the
return rate. Ask questions that are easy to understand;
confusing questions will yield confusing results. Ideally,
recipients should be able to answer most questions with a “yes”
or “no” or by selecting one choice from among several options.
Such answers are easy to tabulate and require minimum effort
on the part of the respondent, thus increasing your chances of
obtaining a response. For help with designing online surveys as
well as collecting and analyzing the results, visit such sites as
surveymonkey.com and surveygizmo.com. See also forms.
ETHICS NOTE
949
Questions should be neutral; they should not be worded in such a way as to lead respondents to give a particular answer, which can result in inaccurate or skewed data.
LEADING Would you prefer the freedom of a four-day workweek?
NEUTRAL Would you choose to work a four-day workweek, ten hours a day, with every Friday off?
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Designing a Questionnaire
✓ Prepare a cover message or an introductory statement explaining who you are, the questionnaire’s purpose, the response deadline, and how or where to send the completed questionnaire.
✓ Frame most questions in ways that are easy to tabulate; keep openresponse questions to a minimum.
✓ Review the software settings for electronic forms so the survey meets your needs, such as limiting response length and ensuring anonymity.
✓ Select the appropriate response type: check box (allowing one or more choices), forced choice with radio buttons (allowing one choice from options provided), single response (such as “yes/no”).
✓ Include a section on the questionnaire for additional comments where the recipient may clarify his or her overall attitude toward the subject.
✓ Include questions about the respondent’s demographics (such as age, gender, education, occupation) only if such information is essential.
✓ State whether the information provided as well as the recipient’s
950
identity will be kept confidential. ✓ Include your contact information (mailing address, phone
number, and e-mail address) and be sure to thank respondents for participating.
✓ Consider offering a copy of the results or a customer discount for those who answer the questionnaire by the deadline.
951
quid pro quo Quid pro quo is Latin for “one thing for another” or “this for
that” in a relationship between two groups or individuals. The
term may be appropriate in business and legal contexts if you
are sure your readers understand its meaning. (“Before
approving the plan, we insisted on a fair quid pro quo.”) See
also foreign words in English.
952
quotation marks Quotation marks (“ ”) are used to enclose a direct quotation of
spoken or written words. Quotation marks have other special
uses, but they should not be used for emphasis.
Direct Quotations Enclose in quotation marks anything that is quoted word for
word (a direct quotation) from speech or written material.
► The contract was explicit: “Monthly deliverables for the duration of this contract are due by close of business on the last workday of each month.”
Do not enclose indirect quotations — usually introduced by the
word that — in quotation marks. Indirect quotations are
paraphrases of a writer’s or speaker’s words or ideas. See also
paraphrasing.
► The contract stated that deliverables are due the last workday of each month.
ETHICS NOTE
When you use quotation marks to indicate that you are quoting word for word, do not make any changes or omissions inside the quoted material unless you clearly indicate what you have done. For further information on incorporating quoted material and inserting comments, see plagiarism and quotations.
953
Use single quotation marks (‘ ’) to enclose a quotation that
appears within a quotation.
► John said, “Jane told me that she was going to ‘stay with the project if it takes all year.’”
Words and Phrases Use quotation marks to set off a special word or term if you
need to point out that the term is being used for a unique or
special purpose (that is, in the sense of the term so-called).
► A remarkable chain of events caused the sinking of the “unsinkable” Titanic on its maiden voyage.
Slang, colloquial expressions, and attempts at humor, although
infrequent in workplace writing, should seldom be set off by
quotation marks.
Titles of Works Use quotation marks to enclose titles of reports, short stories,
articles, essays, single episodes of radio and television
programs, and short musical works (including songs). However,
do not use quotation marks for titles of books and periodicals,
which should appear in italics.
► “Effects of Government Regulations on Motorcycle Safety” [report] cited “No-Fault Insurance and Motorcycles”
954
[article], published in American Motorcyclist [periodical].
Use quotation marks for parts of publications, such as chapters
of books and sections within larger works.
► “Microbusiness Economic Trends: Into the Future” [article] appeared in Small Business Trends (smallbiztrends.com) [blog].
Some titles are not set off by quotation marks, italics, or
underlining, although they are capitalized.
► Professional Writing [college course title], the Constitution, the Bible, Lincoln’s Gettysburg Address, the Lands’ End Catalog
Punctuation Commas and periods always go inside closing quotation marks.
► “Reading Computer World gives me the insider’s view,” he says, adding, “It’s like a conversation with the top experts.”
Semicolons and colons always go outside closing quotation
marks.
► He said, “I will pay the full amount”; this statement surprised us.
All other punctuation follows the logic of the context: If the
punctuation is part of the material quoted, it goes inside the
quotation marks; if the punctuation is not part of the material
955
quoted, it goes outside the quotation marks.
956
quotations Using direct and indirect quotations is an effective way to
support a point and strengthen the credibility of your writing.
But do not rely too heavily on the use of quotations, and avoid
quoting anything that is longer than one paragraph.
ETHICS NOTE
When you use a quotation (or an idea of another writer), cite your source properly. If you do not, you will be guilty of plagiarism. See also note-taking and research.
Direct Quotations A direct quotation is a word-for-word copy of the text of an
original source. Choose direct quotations (which can be of a
word, a phrase, a sentence, or even a paragraph) carefully, and
use them sparingly. Enclose direct quotations in quotation
marks, and separate them from the rest of the sentence by a
comma or colon. Use the initial capital letter of a quotation if
the quoted material originally began with a capital letter.
► The economist stated, “Regulation cannot supply the dynamic stimulus that in other industries is supplied by competition.”
When dividing a quotation, set off the material that interrupts
the quotation with commas, and use quotation marks around
957
each part of the quotation.
► “Regulation,” the economist said in a recent interview, “cannot supply the dynamic stimulus that in other industries is supplied by competition.”
Indirect Quotations An indirect quotation is a paraphrased version of an original
text. It is usually introduced by the word that and is not set off
from the rest of the sentence by punctuation marks. See also
paraphrasing.
► In a recent interview, he said that regulation does not stimulate the industry as well as competition does.
Deletions or Omissions Deletions or omissions from quoted material are indicated by
three ellipsis points (. . .) within a sentence and a period plus
three ellipsis points (. . . .) at the end of a sentence. See ellipses.
► “If monopolies could be made to respond . . . we would be able to enjoy the benefits of . . . large-scale efficiency. . . .”
When a quoted passage begins in the middle of a sentence
rather than at the beginning, ellipsis points are not necessary;
the fact that the first letter of the quoted material is not
capitalized tells the reader that the quotation begins in
midsentence.
958
► Rivero goes on to conclude that “coordination may lessen competition within a region.”
In omitting material, be careful not to change the author’s
original meaning, which would be unethical as well as
inaccurate.
Inserting Material into Quotations When it is necessary to insert a clarifying comment within
quoted material, use brackets.
► “The industry is an integrated system that serves an extensive [geographic] area, with divisions existing as islands within the larger system’s sphere of influence.”
When quoted material contains an obvious error or might be
questioned in some other way, insert the expression sic (Latin
for “thus”) in italic type and enclose it in brackets ([sic])
following the questionable material to indicate that the writer
has quoted the material exactly as it appeared in the original.
► The contract states, “Tinted windows will be installed to protect against son [sic] damage.”
Incorporating Quotations into Text Quote word for word only when a source with particular
959
expertise states something that is especially precise, striking, or
noteworthy, or that may reinforce a point you are making.
Quotations must also logically, grammatically, and syntactically
match the rest of the sentence and surrounding text. Notice in
Figure Q–2 that the quotation blends with the content of the
surrounding text, which uses transition to introduce and
comment on the quotation.
FIGURE Q–2. Long Quotation (APA Style)
Depending on the citation system, the style of incorporating
quotations varies. For examples of two different styles, see
documenting sources. Figure Q–2 shows APA style for a long
quotation (forty or more words).
960
R
961
raise / rise Both raise and rise mean “move to a higher position.” However,
raise is a transitive verb and always takes an object (“raise
crops”), whereas rise is an intransitive verb and never takes an
object (“heat rises”).
962
readers The first rule of effective writing is to help your readers. If you
overlook this commitment, your writing will not achieve its
purpose, either for you or for your business or organization.
For meeting the needs of both individual and multiple readers,
see audience.
963
really Really is an adverb meaning “actually” or “in fact.” Although
both really and actually are often used as intensifiers for
emphasis or sarcasm in speech, avoid such use in formal and
professional writing.
964
reason is [because] Replace the redundant phrase the reason is because with the
reason is that or simply because. See also conciseness.
965
reference letters Writing a reference (or recommendation) letter can range from
completing an online form to composing a detailed description
(see Figure R–1) of professional accomplishments and personal
characteristics for someone seeking employment. In Figure R–
1, a former employer has written a letter for someone seeking
an advanced position as a researcher.
966
FIGURE R–1. Reference Letter (Printed on Letterhead Stationery)
967
To write an effective letter of recommendation, you must be
familiar enough with the applicant’s abilities and performance
to offer an evaluation. Keep in mind the following:
Identify yourself by name, title or position, employer, and contact information. Explain the circumstances and how long you have known the applicant, as in Figure R–1. Respond directly to the inquiry, carefully addressing the specific questions asked. Describe specifically the applicant’s skills, abilities, knowledge, and character, guided by the person’s résumé when possible. Communicate truthfully and without embellishment.
Mention, providing as much evidence as possible, one or two
outstanding characteristics of the applicant. Organize the
details in your letter using the decreasing order-of-importance
method of development. Conclude with a brief summary of the
applicant’s qualifications and a clear statement of
recommendation. See also correspondence.
ETHICS NOTE
When you are asked to serve as a reference or to supply a letter of reference, be aware that applicants have a legal right to examine what you have written about them unless they sign a waiver.
968
refusal letters A refusal delivers a negative message (or bad news) in the form
of a letter, a memo, or an e-mail. The ideal refusal says no in
such a way that you not only avoid antagonizing your reader but
also maintain goodwill. See also audience and “you” viewpoint.
The refusal in Figure R–2 declines an invitation to speak at a
meeting, and the stakes for the writer are relatively low;
however, the writer wishes to acknowledge the honor of being
asked.
969
FIGURE R–2. Refusal with Low Stakes
When the stakes are high, you must convince your reader
that the bad news is based on reasons that are logical or at least
understandable (see also correspondence). Stating a negative
message in your opening may cause readers to react too quickly
and dismiss your explanation. The pattern shown in Figure R–3
is an effective way to handle this problem.
970
FIGURE R–3. Refusal with High Stakes
1. Context. In the opening, introduce the subject, but do not provide irrelevant information or mislead the reader that good news may follow.
2. Explanation. Review the facts or details that lead logically to the bad news, trying to see things from your reader’s point of view.
3. Bad news. State your refusal or negative message, based on
971
the facts, concisely and without apology. 4. Goodwill. In the closing, establish or reestablish a positive
relationship by providing an alternative if possible, assure the reader of your high opinion of his or her product or service, offer a friendly remark, or simply wish the reader success.
Your opening should provide an appropriate context and
establish a professional tone by, for example, expressing
appreciation for a reader’s time, effort, or interest.
► The Screening Procedures Committee appreciates the time and effort you spent on your proposal for a new security- clearance procedure.
Next, review the circumstances of the situation sympathetically
by placing yourself in the reader’s position. Clearly detail the
reasons you cannot do what the reader wants — even though
you have not yet said you cannot do it. A good explanation
should ideally detail the reasons for your refusal so thoroughly
that the reader will accept the negative message as a logical
conclusion, as shown in the following example.
► We reviewed the potential effects of implementing your proposed security-clearance procedure company-wide. We not only asked the Security Systems Department to review the data but also surveyed industry practices, sought the views of senior management, and submitted the idea to our legal staff. As a result of this process, we have reached the following conclusions:
972
The cost savings you project are correct only if the procedure were required throughout the company. The components of your procedure are legal, but most are not widely accepted by our industry. Based on our survey, some components could alienate employees who would perceive them as violating an individual’s rights. Enforcing company-wide use would prove costly and impractical.
Do not belabor the negative message — state your refusal
quickly, clearly, and as positively as possible.
► For those reasons, the committee recommends that divisions continue their current security-screening procedures.
Close your message in a way that reestablishes goodwill — do
not repeat the bad news. (Avoid writing “Again, we are sorry we
cannot use your idea.”) Ideally, provide an alternative, as in the
following:
► Because some components of your procedure may apply in certain circumstances, we would like to feature your ideas in the next issue of The Guardian. I have asked the editor to contact you next week. On behalf of the committee, thank you for the thoughtful proposal.
For responding to a complaint, see adjustment messages. For
refusing a job offer, see acceptances / refusals.
973
regarding / with regard to In regards to and with regards to are incorrect idioms for in
regard to and with regard to. Both as regards and regarding are
acceptable variants.
974
regardless Always use regardless instead of the nonstandard irregardless,
which expresses a double negative. The prefix ir- renders the
base word negative, but regardless — meaning “unmindful” — is
already negative.
975
repetition The deliberate use of repetition to build a sustained effect or to
emphasize a feeling or an idea can be a powerful device. See
also emphasis.
► Similarly, atoms come and go in a molecule, but the molecule remains; molecules come and go in a cell, but the cell remains; cells come and go in a body, but the body remains; persons come and go in an organization, but the organization remains.
— Kenneth Boulding, Beyond Economics
Repetition of keywords from a previous sentence or paragraph
can also be used effectively to achieve transition.
► For many years, oil has been a major industrial energy source. However, oil supplies are limited, and other sources of energy must be developed.
Be consistent in the word or phrase you use to refer to
something. In business writing, it is generally better to repeat a
word or use a clear pronoun reference (so readers know that
you mean the same thing) than to use synonyms to avoid
repetition. See also affectation.
SYNONYMS Several recent analyses support our conclusion. These studies cast doubt on the feasibility of long-range forecasting. The reports, however, are strictly theoretical.
CONSISTENT Several recent studies support our conclusion. These studies cast
976
TERMS doubt on the feasibility of long-range forecasting. They are, however, strictly theoretical.
Purposeless repetition, however, makes a sentence awkward
and hides its key ideas. See also conciseness.
977
reports A report is an organized presentation of factual information,
often aimed at multiple audiences, that may present the results
of an investigation, a trip, or a research project. For any report,
assessing the readers’ needs is essential. Following is a list of
report entries in this book:
annual reports
feasibility reports
formal reports
incident reports
investigative reports
progress and activity reports
trip reports
Formal reports often present the results of long-term projects
or those that involve multiple participants. (See also
collaborative writing.) Formal reports generally follow a
precise format and include such elements as abstracts and
executive summaries. Such projects may be done either for
your own organization or as a contractual requirement for
another organization. See also proposals.
978
Informal and short reports normally run from a few
paragraphs to a few pages and ordinarily include only an
introduction, a body, a conclusion, and (if necessary)
recommendations. Because of their brevity, informal reports
are customarily written as correspondence, including e-mails,
letters, and memos.
The introduction of any report announces the subject of the
report, states its purpose, and gives any essential background
information. The body presents a clearly organized account of
the report’s subject — the results of a test, the status of a project,
and other details readers may need. The amount of detail to
include depends on your reader’s knowledge, your scope, and
the complexity of the subject.
The conclusion summarizes your findings and interprets
their significance. In some reports, a final, separate section
gives recommendations; in others, the conclusions and the
recommendations are combined into one section. This final
section suggests a course of action based on the data you have
presented. See also persuasion.
979
repurposing Repurposing is the copying or converting of existing content,
such as written text and visuals, from one document or medium
into another for a different purpose. For example, if you are
preparing a promotional brochure, you may be able to reuse
material from a product description that is currently published
on your organization’s Web site. The brochure might then be
printed or placed on the Web site for downloading. See also
selecting the medium.
In the workplace, this process saves time because content
that often requires substantial effort to develop need not be re-
created for each new application. The process of repurposing
may be as simple as copying and pasting content from one
document into another or as complex as automatically
formatting and updating multiple documents, such as
brochures and Web sites, through a content-management
system. See also form letters.
Content can be repurposed exactly as it is written only if it
fits the scope, audience, and purpose of the new document. If
the content alters these areas, you must adapt that content to fit
its new context, as described in the following sections.
The reuse of standard texts or content in technical publications is often referred to as “single-source publishing” or simply “single sourcing.” Traditionally, such reuse of standard texts has been referred to as “boilerplate.”
1
1
980
Repurpose for the Context Staying focused on the purpose of your new document is
critical, especially when repurposing content between different
media. If you are writing a sales proposal, for example, and you
only need to describe the specifications for a product, it may be
useful to repurpose the specification list from your
organization’s Web site. However, the purpose of the Web-site
content may be to inform customers about your products,
whereas the purpose of a proposal is to persuade customers to
buy your products. To effectively use the repurposed content in
your proposal, you may need to adapt the tense, voice, tone,
grammar, and point of view to make the repurposed content
more persuasive and fit within the context of a sales proposal.
Repurpose for the Medium The best style and format of content written for a specific
medium, such as a brochure or fact sheet, may not work as
effectively when repurposed for a different medium, such as a
Web site. Solid blocks of text may be easy to read in a brochure,
but Web readers often need blocks of text to be separated into
bulleted lists or short paragraphs because readers process
information differently when reading on a screen. Adapt the
layout and design of the repurposed content to accommodate
your readers’ needs for the medium. See writing for the Web.
ETHICS NOTE
981
In the workplace, repurposing content within an organization does not violate copyright because an organization owns the information it creates and can share it across the company. Likewise, a writer in an organization may use and repurpose material in the public domain and, with proper attribution, content that is licensed under Creative Commons (see creativecommons.org/about).
In the classroom, of course, the use of content or someone else’s unique ideas without acknowledgment or the use of someone else’s exact words without quotation marks and appropriate credit is plagiarism.
982
research DIRECTORY
Primary Research Secondary Research Library Research Strategies Web Research Strategies Writer’s Checklist: Using Search Engines and Keywords Evaluating Sources Writer’s Checklist: Evaluating Print and Online Sources
Research is the process of investigation — the discovery of
information. To be focused, research must be preceded by
preparation, especially consideration of your audience,
purpose, and scope. Effective note-taking is essential for a
coherent organization that strategically integrates your ideas,
supporting facts, and any well-selected quotations into an
effective draft and final document. See also documenting
sources, outlining, and “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”
In an academic setting, your preparatory resources include
having conversations with your instructors, fellow students,
and reference librarians, as well as reading a Wikipedia entry or
another general reference source entry on your topic and
conducting searches on the Internet. On the job, your main
resources are your own knowledge and experience and that of
your colleagues. In business, the most important sources of
983
information may also include market research, questionnaires and surveys, focus groups, shareholder meetings, and the like.
In this setting, begin by brainstorming with colleagues about
what sources will be most useful to your topic and how you can
find them.
Primary Research Primary research is the gathering of raw data from such sources
as firsthand experience, interviews, direct observation, surveys
and questionnaires, focus groups, and meetings. In fact, direct
observation and interaction are often the only ways to obtain
certain kinds of information on such topics as human behavior
and the functioning of organizations, as in ethnographic
research. You can also conduct primary online research by
participating in discussion groups and online forums and by e-
mailing requests for information to specific audiences. When
conducting primary research, focus on keeping accurate,
complete records that indicate date, time of day, observation
duration, and so on, saving interpretations for a later time. See
also blogs and forums, interviewing for information, and
listening.
ETHICS NOTE
If you conduct research that involves observation or a questionnaire at your university or college, ask your instructor whether your methods or questions are appropriate, whether you need to file an application with your school’s Institutional Review Board (IRB), and the best way to
984
obtain permission from your study subjects.
Secondary Research Secondary research is the gathering of information that has
been previously analyzed, assessed, evaluated, compiled, or
otherwise organized into accessible form. Sources include
books, articles, online sources, audio and video recordings,
podcasts, correspondence, minutes of meetings, brochures,
and various reports. The following two sections — Library
Research Strategies and Web Research Strategies — provide
methods for finding secondary sources.
Recent periodicals and newspapers — as well as academic
(.edu in the U.S.), government (.gov), and frequently updated
corporate (.com) Web sites — can be good sources of current
information and include the latest published interviews,
articles, papers, and conference proceedings.
Wikipedia may also be a useful source for your initial
research, but be sure to check the references and confirm when
the document was last updated. Be aware, however, that some
instructors may not accept Wikipedia as an appropriate source
for a college research project because it is collaboratively
written and the qualifications of the writers are unclear. See
Writer’s Checklist: Evaluating Print and Online Sources (page
462).
When a resource seems useful, read it carefully and take
985
notes that include additional questions about your topic. Some
of your questions may eventually be answered in other sources;
those that remain unanswered can guide you to further
research, both primary and secondary. See paraphrasing and
plagiarism.
Library Research Strategies The library provides organized paths into scholarship and
specialized resources — such as subscription-only databases,
indexes, catalogs, and directories — that are not accessible
through standard Web searches. The first step in using library
resources, either in an academic institution or in a workplace,
is to develop a search strategy appropriate to the information
needed for your topic. Begin by asking a reference librarian for
help (in person or by phone, live chat, or e-mail) to find the best
print or online resources for your topic. In addition, use your
library’s homepage for access to its catalogs and various
databases.
Your search strategy depends on the kind of information you
are seeking. For example, if you need the latest data offered by
government research, check the Web, as described later in this
entry. If you need a current scholarly article on a topic, search
an online database (such as EBSCOhost’s Academic Search
Premier) subscribed to by your library. For historical
background, your best resources are books, journals, and
primary documents (such as a labor contract).
986
Online Catalogs (Locating Library Holdings) An online catalog allows you to search a library’s licensed
holdings, indicates an item’s location and availability, and may
allow you to arrange an interlibrary loan.
You can search a library’s online catalog by author, title,
keyword, or subject. The most common ways of searching for a
specific topic are by subject or keyword. If your search turns up
too many results, you can usually narrow it by using the “limit
search” or “advanced search” option.
Online Databases and Indexes (Locating Articles) Most libraries subscribe to online databases, sometimes called
periodical indexes, which are available only through a login to
the library’s Web site:
EBSCOhost’s Academic Search Premier: a large multidisciplinary database, providing full text for nearly 4,500 periodicals, including more than 7,400 abstracted and indexed peer-reviewed journals Gale’s Expanded Academic ASAP: a large database covering general-interest and scholarly journals plus business, law, and health-care publications (many in full text) ERIC (Educational Resources Information Center): a U.S. Department of Education database providing access to journals and reports in education JSTOR: a full-text, archival collection of journals in the humanities, social sciences, and sciences
987
LexisNexis Academic: a collection of databases that is particularly strong for news, business, legal, and corporate and financial information (most articles in full text), as well as congressional, statistical, and government resources
Databases offer various ways to save your results. You may be
able to save your searches and note-taking within the database
itself by creating a personal account, by sending selected
references and full-text articles to an e-mail account, or by
exporting them to citation-management software, such as
RefWorks, Evernote, or Zotero. These programs allow you to
build your own database of references from multiple sources,
sort them into folders, and generate bibliographies in the
format of your choice. Database search tools will vary from
library to library, so contact a reference librarian at your school
for guidance.
These databases are excellent resources for articles
published within the last 10 to 20 years. Many include
descriptive abstracts and full texts of articles. To find older
articles, you may need to consult a print index, such as the
Readers’ Guide to Periodical Literature and the New York Times
Article Archive, both of which have been digitized and may be
available in some libraries.
Reference Works In addition to articles, books, and online sources, you may want
to consult reference works such as encyclopedias, dictionaries,
and manuals for a brief overview of your subject. Ask your
988
reference librarian to recommend works and bibliographies
that are most relevant to your topic. Many are available online
and can be accessed through your library’s homepage.
ENCYCLOPEDIAS. Encyclopedias are comprehensive
collections of articles arranged alphabetically. General
encyclopedias, such as the Encyclopaedia Britannica, cover a
wide range of subjects, while subject-specific encyclopedias —
such as The Encyclopedia of Careers and Vocational Guidance,
17th ed. (Chicago, IL: Ferguson, 2017) — focus on specialized
areas of study. The free online encyclopedia Wikipedia is a
useful starting point for your research, but keep in mind that
users continually update entries (with varying degrees of expert
oversight).
DICTIONARIES. Specialized dictionaries define terms used
in a particular field, such as computer science, architecture, or
consumer affairs, and they offer detailed definitions of field-
specific terms, usually written in straightforward language.
HANDBOOKS AND MANUALS. Handbooks and manuals are
typically one-volume compilations of frequently used
information in a particular field. They offer brief definitions of
terms or concepts, standards for presenting information,
procedures for documenting sources, and visuals to illustrate
principles.
BIBLIOGRAPHIES. Bibliographies list books, periodicals, and
other re-search materials published in areas such as business,
989
medicine, the humanities, and the social sciences.
OTHER LIBRARY RESOURCES. Many libraries offer special
kinds of research information. For example, a library may
provide subject guides that aggregate resources in topic areas
popular with students. Some libraries may provide access to
data that can be downloaded into statistical packages, such as
SPSS (Statistical Package for the Social Sciences), for
manipulation. Others offer GIS (geographic information
systems) software that links data to spatial information,
allowing the researcher to create detailed maps that show such
factors as income, ethnicity, or purchasing habits.
Web Research Strategies The Web varies widely in its completeness and accuracy, so you
need to evaluate Internet sources critically by following the
advice in Writer’s Checklist: Evaluating Print and Online
Sources.
Search Engines Search engines use words or combinations of words that you
specify to locate the documents or files that contain one or
more of those words in their titles, descriptions, or text.
Common search engines beyond Google include DuckDuckGo,
Bing, and Yahoo! Some search engines have specialized
interfaces for searching academic texts (scholar.google.com).
As comprehensive as search engines and directories may
990
seem, none are complete or objective. Some, for example, may
not index PDF files or Usenet newsgroups, and many cannot
index databases and other non–HTML-based content. Search
engines rank the sites they believe will be relevant to your
search based on a number of criteria. Although they vary in
what and how they search, you can navigate them all with
strategies described in the following Writer’s Checklist.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Using Search Engines and Keywords
✓ Check any search tips available in the engine you use, and consider any additional search phrases the search engine may suggest.
✓ Enter precise keywords and phrases that are specific to your topic, such as nuclear power rather than just the term nuclear, which would also list nuclear family, nuclear medicine, and other unrelated topics.
✓ Try several search engines to get more varied and relevant results. ✓ Consider using a metasearch engine, such as Dogpile
(www.dogpile.com), which displays results from multiple search engines.
✓ Refine and narrow your terms as you evaluate the results of each search.
Web Subject Directories A subject directory organizes information by broad subject
categories (business, entertainment, health, sports) and related
subtopics (marketing, finance, investing). A subject-directory
991
search eventually produces a list of specific sites that contain information about the topics you request. Directories like these
can help you conduct selective, scholarly research on the Web:
IPL2 www.ipl.org
The WWW Virtual Library www.vlib.org
Some directories and sites are devoted to specific subject areas,
such as the following resources for researching a business
topic:
CIO’s Resource Centers www.cio.com (use search function)
globalEDGE http://globaledge.msu.edu
Inc.com Articles by Topic www.inc.com (use search function)
LSU Libraries Federal Agency Directory www.lib.lsu.edu/gov/index.html
FedStats www.usa.gov/statistics
Evaluating Sources The easiest way to ensure that information is valid is to obtain it
from a reputable source. For online sources, be especially
concerned about the validity of the information provided.
Because anyone can publish on the Web, it is sometimes
difficult to determine authorship of a document, and frequently
a person’s qualifications for speaking on a topic are absent or
questionable. The online versions of established, reputable
journals in medicine, management, engineering, computer
992
software, and the like merit the same level of trust as the
printed versions. The following domain abbreviations may help
you determine an Internet site sponsor:
.aero aerospace industry .info general use
.biz business .mil U.S. military
.com commercial .name individual
.coop business cooperative .net network
.edu educational institution .org general organization
.gov U.S. government .pro professionals
But note that only a few (such as .edu and .gov) restrict who can
register a Web site with a given domain, and a student may be
just as likely as an expert to have a .edu domain.
As you move away from established, reputable sites, be
especially wary of wikis and unmoderated Web sites, where the
author or source cannot be determined. Wikis, collectively
generated Web sites such as Wikipedia, often make no
guarantee of the validity of information on their sites.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Evaluating Print and Online Sources Keep in mind the following four criteria when evaluating sources: authority, accuracy, bias, and currency.
993
FOR ALL SOURCES
✓ Is the resource up to date and relevant to your topic? Is it readily available?
✓ Who is the intended audience? Is it the mainstream public? A small group of professionals?
✓ Who is the author? Is the author an authority on the subject? ✓ Does the author provide enough supporting evidence and
document sources so that you can verify the information’s accuracy?
✓ Is the information presented in an objective, unbiased way? Are any biases made clear? Are opinions clearly labeled? Are viewpoints balanced, or are opposing opinions acknowledged?
✓ Are the language, tone, and style appropriate and cogent?
FOR A BOOK
✓ Does the preface or introduction indicate the author’s or book’s purpose?
✓ Does the table of contents relate to your topic? Does the index contain terms related to your topic?
✓ Are the chapters useful? Skim through one chapter that seems related to your topic — notice especially the introduction, headings, and closing.
FOR AN ARTICLE
✓ Is the publisher of the magazine or other periodical well known? ✓ What is the article’s purpose? For an academic article, read the
abstract; for a newspaper article, read the headline and opening sentences.
✓ Does the article contain informative diagrams or other visuals that indicate its scope?
FOR A WEB SITE
994
✓ Does a reputable individual, group, or organization sponsor or maintain the site?
✓ Are the purpose and scope of the site clearly stated? Check the “Mission Statement” or “About Us” pages. Does the site carry any disclaimers?
✓ Is the site updated and current? Are the links functional and up to date?
✓ Is the documentation authoritative and credible? Check the links to other sources, and cross-check facts at other reputable Web sites.
✓ Is the site well designed? Is the material well written and error- free?
995
resignation letters Resignation messages, as shown in Figures R–4 and R–5, should
be as positive as possible, regardless of the reason you are
leaving a job. As in refusals (see acceptances / refusals), a
resignation offers the opportunity to establish a record of
positive performance that can benefit your career in the long
term.
996
FIGURE R–4. Resignation Letter (to Accept a Better Position)
997
FIGURE R–5. Resignation Memo (Under Negative Conditions)
You usually write a resignation letter (memo or e-mail) to
your supervisor or to an appropriate person in the Human
Resources Department. Use the following guidelines:
Start on a positive note, regardless of the circumstances under which you are leaving. Consider pointing out how you have benefited from working for the company or say something complimentary about the company. Comment on something positive about the people with whom you have been associated.
998
Explain why you are leaving in an objective, factual tone. Avoid angry recriminations, because your resignation will remain on file with the company and could haunt you in the future should you need references.
Your message should give enough notice to allow your
employer time to find a replacement. It might be no more than
two weeks, or it might be enough time to enable you to train
your replacement. Some organizations may ask for a notice
equivalent to the number of weeks of vacation you receive.
Check the policy of your employer before you begin your letter.
The sample resignation letter in Figure R–4 is from an
employee who is leaving to take a job offering greater
opportunities. The memo of resignation in Figure R–5 is written
by an employee who is leaving because her position has been
reclassified and her supervisor has not supported her
advancement, but no personal conflict is mentioned. Notice
that it opens and closes positively and that the reason for the
resignation is stated without apparent anger or bitterness. For
strategies concerning negative messages, see correspondence.
999
respective / respectively Respective is an adjective that means “pertaining to two or
more things regarded individually.” (“The committee members
returned to their respective offices.”) Respectively is the adverb
form of respective, meaning “singly, in the order designated.”
► The first, second, and third prizes in the sales contest were awarded to Maria Juarez, Dan Wesp, and Simone Luce, respectively.
Respective and respectively are unnecessary if the meaning of
individuality is clear.
1000
restrictive and nonrestrictive elements Modifying phrases and clauses may be either restrictive or
nonrestrictive. A nonrestrictive phrase or clause provides
additional information about what it modifies, but it does not
restrict the meaning of what it modifies. A nonrestrictive
phrase or clause can be removed without changing the essential
meaning of the sentence. It is a parenthetical element that is set
off by commas to show its loose relationship with the rest of the
sentence.
NONRESTRICTIVE The annual report, which was distributed yesterday, shows that sales increased 20 percent last year.
A restrictive phrase or clause limits, or restricts, the meaning of
what it modifies. If it were removed, the essential meaning of
the sentence would change. Because a restrictive phrase or
clause is essential to the meaning of the sentence, it is never set
off by commas.
RESTRICTIVE All employees wishing to donate blood may take Thursday afternoon off.
Writers need to distinguish between nonrestrictive and
restrictive elements. The same sentence can take on two
entirely different meanings depending on whether a modifying
element is set off by commas (because it is nonrestrictive) or is
not (because it is restrictive). A slip by the writer can not only
1001
mislead readers but also embarrass the writer.
MISLEADING He gave a poor performance evaluation to the staff members who protested to the Human Resources Department. [This suggests he gave the poor evaluation because the staff members had protested.]
ACCURATE He gave a poor performance evaluation to the staff members, who protested to the Human Resources Department. [This suggests that the staff members protested because of the poor evaluation.]
Use which to introduce nonrestrictive clauses and that to
introduce restrictive clauses.
NONRESTRICTIVE After John left the restaurant, which is one of the finest in New York, he came directly to my office.
RESTRICTIVE Companies that diversify usually succeed.
1002
résumés DIRECTORY
Sample Résumés Analyzing Your Background Returning Job Seekers Organizing Your Résumé (Sections) Digital Formats and Media
A résumé is a key component of an effective job search and
the foundation for your application cover letter. Prospective
employers use the information in the résumé and application
cover letter to screen applicants and select candidates for job
interviews. During a job interview, the content of your résumé
and application cover letter can provide the interviewer with a
guideline for developing specific questions. See also
interviewing for a job.
Because résumés affect a potential employer’s first
impression, make sure that yours is well organized, carefully
designed, consistently formatted, easy to read, and free of
errors. Most important, target your résumé to the specific job so
that the employer can easily see that you are a perfect fit.
Organize the résumé in a way that highlights your strengths and
fits your goals, as suggested by the examples shown in this
entry. Your résumé should be concise, but its length should
depend on the credentials, skills, and abilities that are a
2
1003
compelling match to the particular position. Proofreading is essential: Verify the accuracy of the information, and have
someone else review it.
ETHICS NOTE
Be truthful. Many employers use outside agencies to check references and stated experience, rejecting applicants with résumés that are even slightly inaccurate or embellished. If you are hired based on false information, you may later be dismissed or even face a lawsuit for the deception. See also ethics in writing.
Sample Résumés The sample résumés in this entry provide starting points that
you can use to tailor your résumé to your own job search.
Before you design and write your résumé, look at as many
samples as possible, and then organize and format your own to
best highlight your strengths, present your professional goals,
and make the most persuasive case to your target employers.
See also persuasion.
Figure R–6 presents a conventional student résumé in which the student is seeking an entry-level position.
1004
FIGURE R–6. Student Résumé (for an Entry-Level Position)
1005
Figure R–7 shows a résumé with a variation in the design and placement of conventional headings to highlight professional credentials.
1006
1007
FIGURE R–7. Résumé (Highlighting Professional Credentials)
Figure R–8 presents a résumé for a recent graduate in a format that is appropriately unconventional for the purpose of demonstrating the student’s skill in graphic design. This résumé includes a tagline, a brief description of the target job, and one or two impressive qualifications to grab the potential employer’s attention. It matches the application cover letter in Figure A–8.
1008
1009
FIGURE R–8. Recent Graduate Résumé (for Graphic Design Job)
Figure R–9 depicts a résumé that incorporates a qualifications summary, or profile, and focuses on the applicant’s management experience. This résumé matches the application letter in Figure A–10.
1010
1011
FIGURE R–9. Résumé (Applicant with Management Experience)
Figure R–10 reflects the résumé of a candidate seeking to switch career fields. It uses a job title and immediately states a goal, followed by credentials.
1012
FIGURE R–10. Résumé (Experienced Applicant Seeking Career Change)
1013
Figure R–11 illustrates how an applicant can organize a résumé by combining functional and chronological elements.
1014
1015
1016
FIGURE R–11. Advanced Résumé (Combining Functional and Chronological Elements)
Analyzing Your Background In preparing to write your résumé, determine what kind of job
you are seeking. Rarely can you construct a one-size-fits-all
résumé: Potential employers will all look for something
different, and you will gain increasingly diverse experiences as
1017
you progress in your career. You may benefit from preparing a
few résumés with different emphases, and you may need to
create a unique résumé for a single position, using the language
of a particular job description as your guide. Review your
credentials and consider the following as you gather
information:
Schools you attended, degrees you hold, your major field of study, academic honors you were awarded, your grade point average, selected academic projects that reflect your best work, continuing education, conferences or seminars you have attended Jobs you have held, your principal and secondary duties in each job, when and how long you held each job, promotions you received, skills you developed in your jobs that a potential employer may value and seek in the ideal candidate, projects or accomplishments that reflect important contributions Other experiences and skills you have developed that would be of value for the job you seek: extracurricular activities that have contributed to your learning experience, leadership assignments you have accepted, interpersonal and communication skills you have developed (speeches, presentations, classes given), collaborative work you have performed, publications you have contributed to, computer skills you have acquired or specialized programs in which you are proficient, languages you speak, notable awards or other types of recognition
Use this information to brainstorm further details and personal
1018
attributes. Then, based on all the details, decide which to
include in your résumé and how you can most effectively
present your qualifications.
Returning Job Seekers If you are returning to the workplace after an absence, most
career experts say that it is important to acknowledge the gap in
your career. If you are reentering the workforce because you
have devoted a full-time period to care for children or
dependent adults, do not undervalue such work. Although
unpaid, this experience often develops important time-
management, problem-solving, organizational, and
interpersonal skills. Although gaps in employment can be
explained in the application cover letter, the following
examples illustrate how you might reflect such experiences in a
résumé. These samples would be especially appropriate for an
applicant seeking employment in a field related to child or
health care.
► Primary Child-Care Provider, 2015–2017 Provided full- time care to three preschool children at home. Facilitated early learning activities; taught basic academic skills, nutrition, arts, and swimming. Organized schedules and events, managed the household, and served as Neighborhood-Watch Captain.
► Home Caregiver, 2015–2017 Provided 60 hours per week in-home care for Alzheimer’s patient. Coordinated health- care and medical appointments, developed and supervised
1019
exercise programs, completed and processed complex medical forms, administered medications, organized and maintained budgets, and managed home environment.
If you have performed volunteer work during such a period, list
that experience. Volunteer work often results in the same
experience as does full-time, paid work, a fact that your résumé
should reflect, as in the following example:
► School Association Coordinator, 2015–2017 Managed special activities of the high school Parent-Teacher Association. Planned and coordinated meetings, scheduled events, and supervised fund-drive operations. Raised $70,000 toward refurbishing the school auditorium.
Organizing Your Résumé (Sections) The following résumé sections and section headings are typical
and, depending on the subject matter, may use alternative
terminology, as shown in the following list. The sections you
choose and the order in which you list them should depend on
your experience, your goals, the employer’s needs, and any
standard practices in your profession.
Heading (name and contact information) Job Objective vs. Headline Qualifications Summary (Professional Profile, Key Attributes) Education (Academic Background, Certifications)
1020
Employment Experience (Career History, Career Chronology) Related Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities (Professional Affiliations, Volunteer Work, Networking Assets) Honors and Activities (Awards, Recognition, Notable Contributions, Volunteer Work, Publications, Affiliations) References and Portfolios
There really is no right or wrong way to organize your résumé,
and any number of organizational patterns can be effective. For
example, whether you place “education” before “employment
experience” depends on the job you are seeking. Organize your
information in the sequence that emphasizes the credentials
that will strengthen your résumé. A recent graduate without
much work experience should list education first. A candidate
with many years of job experience, including jobs directly
related to the target position, may decide to list employment
experience first. When you list information in the education
and employment sections, use a reverse chronological order:
most recent employer or credential first, the next most recent
experience second, and so on.
Heading At the top of your résumé, include your name, the best number
where you can be reached, professional e-mail address, and
links to social-media sites where you have a professional
presence. Make sure that your name stands out on the page. If
you are in transition, list the city, state, and ZIP codes of your
1021
residence(s), along with relevant telephone numbers and e-mail
addresses underneath your name (see Figure R-6). You can omit
your street address for privacy reasons.
Job Objective vs. Headline Hiring managers spend mere seconds for the initial résumé
review, so your career goal should be immediately evident. Job
objectives and résumé headlines (or taglines) both introduce
the material and help the reader quickly understand your
reason for seeking a certain position. An objective is a narrative
statement about the type of job that interests you, and it can
include your career level and credentials. A headline is similar
to a newspaper headline and is meant to quickly grab the
employer’s attention. A headline contains a brief description of
your job target and one or two of your strongest qualifications.
A headline can provide visual impact, especially if it appears as
a banner near the top of your résumé (see Figure R–8). The
following examples illustrate the difference between objectives
and headlines.
SAMPLE OBJECTIVE STATEMENTS
► A computer-science position aimed at solving online security vulnerabilities.
► A position involving meeting the concerns of women, such as family planning, career counseling, or crisis management.
► A programming internship requiring software- development and debugging skills.
1022
SAMPLE JOB TITLE AND HEADLINE COMBINATIONS
► FINANCIAL SERVICES / BANKING PROFESSIONAL Ensuring the Financial Success of Customers, Clients, and Communities
► MECHANICAL ENGINEER Developing Innovative, Efficient, Environmentally Friendly Energy Solutions
► FIREFIGHTER / EMT Prevention, Mitigation, Response or Protecting Life, Property, and the Environment
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
If you include an objective on your résumé, avoid using clichés, such as “seeking a challenging opportunity with potential for advancement” and other overused statements.
Qualifications Summary Include a brief summary of your qualifications to persuade
hiring managers to select you for an interview. Sometimes
called a professional profile, summary statement, or career
summary, a qualifications summary can include skills,
expertise, experience, or personal qualities that make you
especially well suited to the position. You may give this section
a unique heading or simply use a job title, as shown in Figures
R–10 and R–11.
Education List the school(s) you have attended, the degree(s) you received
and the dates you received them, your major field(s) of study,
1023
and any academic honors you have earned. Most career-
development professionals recommend that you include your
grade point average (GPA) only if it is 3.0 or higher. Omit your
GPA if you earned your degree long ago and are focusing on
experience rather than education. List individual courses if they
are unusually impressive, if they provide the opportunity to
include keywords, if they are relevant to your career goals, or if
your résumé is otherwise sparse (see Figure R–8). Consider
including any special skills developed or projects completed in
your course work. Mention high school only if you do not
possess higher education or if you want to call attention to
special high school achievements, awards, projects, programs,
internships, or study abroad.
Employment Experience Organize your employment experience in reverse chronological
order, starting with your most recent job and working backward
under a single heading. You can also organize your experience
functionally, by clustering similar types of jobs into several
sections with specific section headings, such as “Management,”
“Leadership,” “Administration,” or “Logistics.”
Depending on the situation, one type of arrangement might
be more persuasive than the other. For example, if you are
applying for an accounting job but have no employment
experience in accounting, simply list past and present jobs in
reverse chronological order (most recent to least recent). If you
are applying for a supervisory position and have had three
1024
supervisory jobs in addition to two nonsupervisory positions,
you could create a section heading called “Supervisory
Experience” and list the three supervisory jobs, followed by
another section labeled “General Experience” to include the
nonsupervisory jobs.
In general, consider the following guidelines when working
on the “Experience” section of your résumé:
Include jobs or internships when they relate directly to the position you are seeking. Including such experiences can make a résumé more persuasive if they have helped you develop relevant skills. Include extracurricular experiences, such as taking on a leadership position in a college organization or directing a community-service project, if they demonstrate the skills valued by a potential employer. List military service as a job, even though the occupational specialties may not be directly applicable to the positions for which you are applying. Give the dates served, the duty specialty, and the rank at discharge. Discuss military duties if they relate to the job you are seeking, and translate military terminology to be easily understood by hiring managers. For each job or experience, list both the job title and the employer name. Throughout each section, consistently begin with either the job or the company name, depending on which will likely be more impressive to potential employers. Under each job or experience, provide a concise
1025
description of your accomplishments. By listing your accomplishments and quantifying them with numbers, percentages, or monetary value, you will let the employer know what separates you from the competition. That said, do not omit job duties entirely; employers still want to see the scope of your responsibilities. A good strategy for organizing both duties and responsibilities is to create a brief paragraph outlining your responsibilities, followed by a bulleted list of your strongest accomplishments in the position. Focus as much as possible on your achievements in your work history. (“Increased employee retention rate by 16 percent by developing a training program.”) Employers will picture themselves as benefiting from the same types of accomplishments. Use action verbs (“managed,” “supervised,” “developed,” “achieved,” “analyzed”). Be consistent when using past or present tense. Even though the résumé is about you, do not use “I” (for example, instead of “I was promoted to Section Leader,” use “Promoted to Section Leader”).
Related Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities Employers are interested in hiring applicants with a variety of
skills or the ability to learn new ones quickly. Depending on the
position, you might list such items as fluency in foreign
languages, writing and editing abilities, specialized technical
knowledge, or computer skills (including knowledge of specific
languages, software, and hardware).
1026
Honors and Activities List any honors and unique activities near the end of your
résumé unless they are exceptionally notable or would be more
persuasive for a particular objective. Include items such as
student or community activities, professional or club
memberships, awards received, and published works. Do not
duplicate information given in other categories, and include
only information that supports your employment objective. Use
a heading for this section that fits its contents, such as
“Activities,” “Honors,” “Professional Affiliations,”
“Memberships,” or “Publications.”
References and Portfolios Avoid specifying on your résumé that references are available
unless that is standard practice in your profession or your
résumé is sparse. Employers assume that a well-prepared job
seeker will provide a list of professional references. Create a
separate list of references in the same format design and layout
as your résumé, and be ready to provide this page to
prospective employers during the interview. Always seek
permission from anyone you list.
A portfolio is a collection of samples in a binder or on a Web
site of your most impressive work and accomplishments. The
portfolio can include successful documents you have produced,
letters of praise from employers, copies of awards and
certificates, and samples of your work. You can include the
phrase “Portfolio available on request” in your résumé. If
1027
portfolios are standard in your profession, you might even
include a small section that outlines the contents of your
portfolio.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Avoid listing your desired salary on the résumé. You could price yourself out of a job you want if the salary you list is higher than a potential employer is willing to pay, or you might not get the best possible offer if you list a low one.
Digital Formats and Media Once you have developed a strong résumé, consider adapting it
for multiple media and digital formats.
E-mail–Attached Résumés An employer may request that you submit a résumé attached to
an e-mail. If a file-format preference is not specified, send the
résumé in Adobe PDF or MS Word format. Then attach the file,
and treat the e-mail-message body as your cover letter.
Applicant Tracking System Résumés When you submit your résumé via e-mail or to an employer’s
Web site, it may be added to an electronic applicant tracking
system (ATS). These systems parse, store, manage, and rank
résumés based on criteria specified by the hiring manager.
Although these systems vary, some guidelines are universal:
1028
Avoid fancy graphics and icons, because they will not be readable. Choose common titles for headers, such as “Professional Experience” and “Education.” Incorporate keywords that are relevant to your career field in descriptions, but avoid a separate “Keyword” section that wastes valuable space. Use a consistent format in the placement of employer names and job titles.
In general, when developing your résumé for an ATS, try
thinking like a computer, and focus on logic and consistency.
Plain-Text Résumés Some employers request ASCII or plain-text résumés via e-mail
or their Web site, enabling the file to be easily added to résumé
databases. ASCII résumés allow employers to read the file no
matter what type of software they are using. You can copy and
paste a plain-text résumé directly into the body of an e-mail
message. To create an ASCII résumé, look for an option to “Save
as” plain text in your word-processing program. After you save
as a text file with a .txt extension, reopen the file in a text editor
(such as Notepad for PCs or TextWrangler for Macs) and clean
up the file as needed. For more, visit resumepower.com/ascii-
resumes.html.
Scannable Résumés A scannable-résumé format is a paper document that you mail
to the employer. After it is received, the document will be
1029
scanned into an automated program and then downloaded into
the company’s searchable database. For such résumés, avoid
decorative fonts, underlining, shading, letters that touch each
other, or other features that will not scan easily. Before
sending, scan the résumé yourself to make sure that it is legible.
Web-Posted Résumés You can use a personal Web site to post your résumé and
display other items that portray your value as a candidate, such
as awards and samples of your work. You can list a link to your
Web site in your candidate documents and correspondence
with prospective employers. For such Web sites, keep the
following in mind:
Follow the general advice for writing for the Web, and view your résumé and materials on several browsers. Consider building a multipage site for displaying a work portfolio, publications, reference letters, and other related materials. Provide just below your name a series of internal page links to such important categories as “experience” and “education.” Do not include your phone number or home address on the Web site — include an e-mail “contact link” that prospective employers and recruiters can use to reach you. Do not advertise that you are actively seeking a job if you are currently employed; if your employer learns about your search, your job could be in jeopardy. Post copies of your résumé in various file formats so that
1030
employers can select the best format for their needs.
If you do not have your own Web site, you can upload your files
to an online cloud storage service, such as Dropbox
(www.dropbox.com), and send employers the link to your
folder.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
When applying for a position within the U.S. government, America’s largest employer, make sure your résumé’s content and style are suitable for a federal application. Protocol for your federal résumé varies depending on the specific agency you are targeting, but your résumé must address how your qualifications match the requirements outlined in the vacancy announcement. Kathyrn Troutman provides excellent resources for preparing federal résumés (visit www.resume- place.com/fedresblog/federal-resume-writing). See also job search.
A detailed résumé for someone in an academic or a scientific area is often called a curriculum vitae (also vita or c.v.). It may include education, publications, projects, grants, and awards, as well as a full work history. Outside the United States, the term curriculum vitae is often used to mean résumé.
2
1031
revision When you revise your draft, read and evaluate it primarily from
the point of view of your audience. In fact, revising requires a
different frame of mind than writing a draft. To achieve that
frame of mind, experienced writers have developed the
following tactics:
Allow a “cooling period” between writing the draft and revising in order to evaluate the draft objectively. Read your draft aloud — often, hearing the text will enable you to spot problems that need improvement. Revise in passes by reading through your draft several times, each time searching for and correcting a different set of problems.
When you can no longer spot improvements, you may wish to
give the draft to a colleague for review — especially for projects
that are crucial for you or your organization as well as for
collaborative projects, as described in collaborative writing.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Revising Your Draft
✓ Completeness. Does the document achieve its primary purpose? Will it fulfill the readers’ needs? Your writing should give readers exactly what they need but not overwhelm them.
✓ Appropriate introduction and conclusion. Check to see that your introduction frames the rest of the document and that your
1032
conclusion ties the main ideas together. Both should account for revisions to the content of the document.
✓ Accuracy. Look for any factual inaccuracies in your draft. ✓ Unity and coherence. Check to see that sentences and ideas are
closely tied together (coherence) and contribute directly to the main idea expressed in the topic sentence of each paragraph (unity). Provide transitions where they are missing, and strengthen those that are weak.
✓ Consistency. Make sure that layout and design and visuals are consistent. Refer to the same items with the same terms throughout.
✓ Conciseness. Prune unnecessary words, phrases, sentences, and even paragraphs. Use the search-and-replace command to find and revise wordy phrases and unnecessary helping verbs. See conciseness.
✓ Awkwardness. Look for awkwardness in sentence construction — especially any garbled sentences.
✓ Ethical writing. Check for ethics in writing, and eliminate biased language.
✓ Active voice. Use the active voice unless the passive voice is more appropriate.
✓ Word choice. Check word choice, and eliminate affectation, clichés, vague words, and unnecessary intensifiers. Check for unclear pronoun references.
✓ Jargon. If you are unsure that all your readers will understand any jargon or special terms you have used, eliminate or define those words or terms.
✓ Grammar. Check for grammatical errors. Treat grammar checker recommendations as suggestions only.
✓ Typographical errors. Check your final draft for typographical errors both with your spell checker and with thorough proofreading.
1033
rhetorical questions A rhetorical question does not require a specific answer
because it is intended to make an audience think about the
subject from a different perspective. The answer to a rhetorical
question such as “Is space exploration worth the cost?” may not
be a simple yes or no; it might be a detailed explanation of the
pros and cons of space exploration.
Rhetorical questions can serve as effective titles or openings.
The writer or speaker may answer such questions in a
presentation, newsletter article, or blog. (See blogs and
forums.) However, rhetorical questions should be used
judiciously in other, more formal documents. A rhetorical
question, for example, would not be appropriate for the title of
a report or an e-mail addressed to a manager who needs to
quickly understand the subject and purpose of the document or
message.
1034
run-on sentences A run-on sentence, sometimes called a fused sentence, is two or
more sentences without punctuation to separate them. The
term is also sometimes applied to a pair of independent clauses
separated by only a comma, although this variation is usually
called a comma splice. See also sentence construction and
sentence faults.
1035
S
1036
sales letters A sales letter — print or digital correspondence that promotes a
product, service, or business — requires both a thorough
knowledge of the product or service and an understanding of
the potential customer’s needs.
An effective sales letter (1) catches readers’ attention, (2)
engages their interest, (3) convinces them that your product or
service will fulfill a need or desire, and (4) confidently asks
them to take the course of action you suggest. See also
persuasion, promotional writing, and tone.
Your first task in writing a sales letter is to determine to
whom your message should be sent. One good source is a list of
your customers or clients. Other sources are lists of people who
may be interested in similar products or services. Companies
that specialize in marketing compile lists from professional
associations, trade shows, and the like. Because outside lists
may be expensive, select them with care.
Sales letters sent by e-mail are often more economical than
print options, especially for large groups of potential and
existing customers. If you choose e-mail as a medium, however,
consider laws related to e-mail marketing, such as the CAN-
SPAM act (www.ftc.gov/tips-advice/business-
center/guidance/can-spam-act-compliance-guide-business).
Consider as well that e-mail offers the ability to include
multimedia (such as video and purchase links), but it also
1037
requires that content be kept targeted and short. See also
selecting the medium.
Once you determine who is to receive your sales letter, learn
as much as you can about your readers so that you can
effectively tell them how your product or service will satisfy
their needs. Knowledge of your audience — their gender, age,
vocation, geographic location, educational level, financial
status, and interests — will help determine your approach.
Analyze your product or service carefully to determine your
strongest psychological sales points. Psychological selling
involves stressing a product’s benefits, which may be
intangible, rather than its physical features. Select the most
important psychological selling point about your product or
service, and build your sales message around it. Show how your
product or service will make your readers’ jobs easier, increase
their status, make their personal lives more pleasant, and so on.
Then describe the physical features of your product in terms of
their benefit to your readers. Use photos and Web links to help
your readers imagine themselves using and enjoying your
product or service. See also “you” viewpoint.
ETHICS NOTE
Be certain that any claim you make in a sales message is valid. To claim that a product is safe guarantees its absolute safety; therefore, say that the product is safe “provided that normal safety precautions are taken.” Further, although you can highlight differences, do not
1038
exaggerate or speak negatively about a competitor. For further ethical and legal guidelines, visit the Data & Marketing Association Web site at thedma.org. See also ethics in writing.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing Sales Letters
✓ Attract your readers’ attention and pique their interest in the opening — for example, by describing a product’s feature that would appeal strongly to their needs. See also introductions.
✓ Convince readers that your product or service is everything you say it is through case histories, free-trial use, money-back guarantee, or testimonials and endorsements. (For advice, see www.ftc.gov.)
✓ Suggest ways readers can make immediate use of the product or service. Include a brochure or a Web link with photos or videos.
✓ Minimize the negative effect price can have on readers.
Mention the price along with a reminder of the benefits of the product. State the price in terms of units rather than sets ($20 per item, not $600 per set). Identify the daily, monthly, or even yearly cost based on the estimated life of the product. Suggest a series of payments rather than one total payment. Compare the cost of your product with that of something readers accept readily. (“This entire package costs no more than a dinner and a concert.”)
✓ Make it easy and worthwhile for customers to respond: Include instructions for ordering online or by phone, information about
1039
free delivery, or special discount codes. ✓ Include links to social media, and invite readers to become part
of the conversation and community surrounding the product, service, or brand.
1040
scope Scope is the depth and breadth of detail you include in a
document as defined by your audience’s needs, your purpose,
and the context. (See also audience.) For example, if you write
a trip report about a routine visit to a company facility, your
readers may need to know only the basic details and any
unusual findings. However, if you prepare a trip report about a
visit to a division that has experienced problems and your
purpose is to suggest ways to solve those problems, your report
will contain many more details, observations, and even
recommendations.
You should determine the scope of a document during the
preparation stage of the writing process, even though you may
refine it later. Defining your scope will expedite your research
and can help determine team members’ responsibilities in
collaborative writing.
Your scope will also be affected by the type of document you
are writing, as well as the medium you select for your message.
For example, funding organizations often prescribe the general
content and length for proposals, and some organizations set
length limits on other documents. See selecting the medium
and “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”
1041
selecting the medium Selecting the most appropriate medium (or channel) for
communicating in the workplace depends on a wide range of
factors related to your audience, purpose, and context. Those
factors include the following:
The audience’s preferences and expectations The organization’s practices and policies How widely information needs to be distributed The urgency of the communication The sensitivity or confidentiality required Your own most effective communication style
As this list suggests, choosing the best medium may involve
personal considerations as well as the essential functions of the
medium. If you need to collaborate with someone to solve a
problem, for example, you may find e-mail exchanges less
effective than a phone call or face-to-face meeting. If you need
precise wording or a record of a complex or sensitive message,
however, a written medium is often essential.
Many of the following media and forms of communication
overlap and evolve as technology develops. Understanding their
basic functions will help you select the most appropriate
medium for your needs. See Figure S–1 for a table summarizing
the media discussed in this entry. See also adapting to new
technologies.
1042
FIGURE S–1. Choosing the Appropriate Medium
1043
E-mail E-mail functions as a primary medium to communicate and
share files with colleagues, clients, and customers. Although e-
mail may function as informal notes, e-mail messages should
follow the writing strategy and style described in
correspondence. All e-mail requires special review because
recipients can easily forward messages and attachments and
because e-mail messages are subject to legal disclosure.
Memos Memos are appropriate for internal communication among
members of the same organization, especially those who do not
have ready access to e-mail (for example, employees in
manufacturing or service industries). They use a standard
header and are sent on paper or as attachments to e-mails.
Memos can instruct employees, announce policies, report
results, disseminate information, and delegate responsibilities.
Letters Business letters with handwritten signatures are often
appropriate for formal communications with professional
associates or customers outside an organization. Letters on
organizational letterhead communicate formality, respect, and
authority. Letters are used with job applications, for
recommendations, and in other official and social contexts.
1044
Text and Instant Messages Text messaging, or texting, is the exchange of brief written
messages between mobile phones. Text messaging is effective
for simple messages communicated between people on the
move or in nontraditional work spaces.
Instant messaging (IM) on a computer or handheld device is
an efficient way to communicate brief written exchanges in real
time with coworkers, suppliers, and customers. Instant
messaging requires that recipients are ready and available to
participate in an immediate exchange of messages.
Phone Calls and Voice Messages Phone calls are best used for exchanges that require substantial
interaction and the ability of participants to interpret each
other’s tone of voice. They are useful for discussing sensitive
issues and resolving misunderstandings, although they do not
provide the visual cues present during face-to-face meetings. Be
careful when using a cell phone in public places, and follow
appropriate etiquette and organizational policies. See “Web
Conferences and Videoconferences” on page 491.
Should you need to leave a voice-mail message, it should be
clear and brief. (“I got your package, so you don’t need to call
the distributor.”) For complicated messages, use another
medium, such as e-mail.
1045
Faxes A fax is used when a document — like a drawing or a signed
contract — must be viewed in its original form. Faxing is used
when scanning is not an option or when a faxed document is
requested. Fax machines are often located in shared areas, so
let the intended recipient know before you send confidential or
sensitive information. A cover sheet should include the name of
the recipient and the number of pages in the document.
Meetings and Conference Calls In-person meetings with individuals are most appropriate with
an associate or a client with whom you intend to develop an
important, long-term relationship. A face-to-face meeting may
also be useful to help establish rapport, interview someone on a
complex topic, solve a technical problem, or handle a
controversial issue.
Group or committee meetings may be best for
brainstorming, collaborating on a complex topic, and reaching
decisions. A teleconference (or conference call) among three or
more participants is an inexpensive alternative to face-to-face
meetings requiring travel. The person coordinating the call
should provide an agenda to all the participants and direct the
discussion. For advice on how to record discussions and
decisions, see minutes of meetings.
Web Conferences and Video 1046
Conferences These conferences may be used for committee meetings when
participants are geographically separated, for small groups
working on a specific problem, for numerous participants in
training, or for educational seminars (referred to as webinars).
Participants can be connected through downloaded
applications. Web conferences may be enhanced with phone
connections and video applications, like Google Meet,
GoToMeeting, or WebEx.
More formal videoconferences with high-end equipment
often require professional services. These work best with
participants who are at ease in front of the camera, and such
conferences should be carefully planned, with technical
support staff available.
Web Networking and Promotion A company intranet Web site is ideal for sharing documents and
files — including announcements and policies and procedures
— within an organization. An intranet site can serve not only as
a home base for resources like company directories and
newsletters but also as a place where ideas can be developed
through, for example, discussion boards and wikis.
A company’s public Web site can provide sales and product
information as well as information about an organization and
opportunities to foster contacts with customers and clients.
1047
Such sites may include new-product announcements, press
releases, FAQs, manuals, product or service reviews, blogs and
forums, employment opportunities, and requests for proposals.
See also writing for the Web.
Using social media sites can help individuals and
organizations cultivate professional contacts and promote
products and services. Networks for professionals, such as
LinkedIn, aim to connect individuals and groups with common
interests. Organizations may use social networking sites like
Facebook to market their products and services as well as to
enhance their brand identity. See also job search.
1048
semicolons The semicolon (;) links independent clauses or other sentence
elements of equal weight and grammatical rank when they are
not joined by a comma and a conjunction. The semicolon
indicates a greater pause between clauses than does a comma
but not as great a pause as a period.
Independent clauses joined by a semicolon should balance or
contrast with each other, and the relationship between the two
statements should be so clear that further explanation is not
necessary.
► The new Web site was a success; every division reported increased online sales.
Do not use a semicolon between a dependent clause and its
main clause.
With Strong Connectives In complicated sentences, a semicolon may be used before
transitional words or phrases (that is, for example, namely) that
introduce examples or further explanation. See also transition.
► The press understands Commissioner Curran’s position on the issue; that is, local funds should not be used for the highway project.
1049
A semicolon should also be used before conjunctive adverbs
(therefore, moreover, consequently, furthermore, indeed, in
fact, however) that connect independent clauses.
► The test results are not complete; therefore, I cannot make a recommendation. [The semicolon in the example shows that therefore belongs to the second clause.]
For Clarity in Long Sentences Use a semicolon between two independent clauses connected
by a coordinating conjunction (and, but, for, or, nor, so, yet) if
the clauses are long and contain other punctuation.
► In most cases, these individuals are executives, bankers, or lawyers; but they do not, as the press seems to believe, simply push the button of their economic power to affect local politics.
A semicolon may also be used if any items in a series contain
commas.
► Among those present were John Howard, president of the Omega Paper Company; Carol Delgado, president of Environex Corporation; and Larry Stanley, president of Stanley Papers.
Use parentheses or dashes, not semicolons, to enclose a
parenthetical element that contains commas.
► All affected job classifications (receptionist, assistant,
1050
transcriptionist, and clerk) will be upgraded this month.
Use a colon, not a semicolon, as a mark of anticipation or
enumeration.
► Three decontamination methods are under consideration; a zeolite-resin system, an evaporation system, and a filtration system.
The semicolon always appears outside closing quotation
marks.
► The attorney said, “You must be accurate” ; her client replied, “I will.”
1051
sentence construction DIRECTORY
Subjects Predicates Sentence Types Constructing Effective Sentences
A sentence is the most fundamental and versatile tool available
to writers. Sentences generally flow from a subject to a verb to
any objects, complements, or modifiers, but they can be
ordered in a variety of ways to achieve emphasis. When shifting
word order, however, be aware that it can make a big difference
in the meaning of a sentence.
► He was only the accountant. [suggests importance] ► He was the only accountant. [defines the number]
The most basic components of sentences are subjects and
predicates.
Subjects The subject of a sentence is a noun or pronoun (and its
modifiers) about which the predicate of the sentence makes a
statement. Although a subject may appear anywhere in a
sentence, it most often appears at the beginning: “To increase
sales is our goal.” Grammatically, every sentence, except
1052
commands, must have an explicit subject that agrees with its verb in number.
► These departments have much in common. ► This department has several functions.
The subject is the actor in sentences using the active voice.
► The Webmaster reported an increase in site visits for May.
A compound subject has two or more substantives (nouns or
noun equivalents) as the subject of one verb.
► The president and the treasurer agreed to begin the audit.
Predicates The predicate is the part of a sentence that makes an assertion
about the subject and completes the thought of the sentence.
► Bill has piloted the corporate jet.
The simple predicate is the verb and any helping verbs (has
piloted). The complete predicate is the verb and any modifiers,
objects, or complements (has piloted the corporate jet). A
compound predicate consists of two or more verbs with the
same subject.
► The company tried but did not succeed in that field.
Such constructions help achieve conciseness. A predicate
nominative is a noun construction that follows a linking verb
1053
and renames the subject.
► She is my attorney. [noun] ► His excuse was that he had been sick. [noun clause]
Sentence Types Sentences may be classified according to structure (simple,
compound, complex, or compound-complex); intention
(declarative, interrogative, imperative, or exclamatory); and
stylistic use (loose, periodic, or minor).
Structure A simple sentence consists of one independent clause. At its
most basic, a simple sentence contains only a subject and a
predicate.
► Profits [subject] rose [predicate].
A compound sentence consists of two or more independent
clauses connected by a comma and a coordinating conjunction,
by a semicolon, or by a semicolon and a conjunctive adverb.
► Drilling is the only way to collect samples of the layers of sediment below the ocean floor, but it is not the only way to gather information about these strata. [comma and coordinating conjunction]
► The chemical composition of seawater bears little resemblance to that of river water; the various elements are present in entirely different proportions. [semicolon]
► It was 500 miles to the site; therefore, we made
1054
arrangements to fly. [semicolon and conjunctive adverb]
A complex sentence contains one independent clause and at
least one dependent clause that expresses a subordinate idea.
► The generator will shut off automatically [independent clause] if the temperature rises above a specified point [dependent clause].
A compound-complex sentence consists of two or more
independent clauses plus at least one dependent clause.
► Productivity is central to controlling inflation [independent clause]; when productivity rises [dependent clause], employers can raise wages without raising prices [independent clause].
Intention A declarative sentence conveys information or makes a factual
statement. (“The motor powers the conveyor belt.”) An
interrogative sentence asks a direct question. (“Does the
conveyor belt run constantly?”) An imperative sentence issues a
command. (“Restart in SAFE mode.”) An exclamatory sentence
is an emphatic expression of feeling, fact, or opinion. It is a
declarative sentence that is stated with great feeling. (“The files
were deleted!”)
Stylistic Use A loose sentence makes its major point at the beginning and
then adds subordinate phrases and clauses that develop or
1055
modify that major point. A loose sentence could end at one or
more points before it actually does end, as the periods in
brackets illustrate in the following sentence:
► It went up[.], a great ball of fire about a mile in diameter[.], an elemental force freed from its bonds[.] after being chained for billions of years.
A periodic sentence delays its main ideas until the end by
presenting subordinate ideas or modifiers first.
► During the last century, the attitude of the American citizen toward automation underwent a profound change.
A minor sentence is an incomplete sentence that makes sense
in its context because the missing element is clearly implied by
the preceding sentence.
► In view of these facts, is the service contract really useful? Or economical?
Constructing Effective Sentences The subject-verb-object pattern is effective because it is most
familiar to readers. In “The company increased profits,” we
know the subject (company) and the object (profits) by their
positions relative to the verb (increased).
An inverted sentence places the elements in an unexpected
order, thus emphasizing the point by attracting the readers’
attention.
1056
► A better job I never had. [direct object-subject-verb] ► More optimistic I have never been. [subjective
complement-subject-linking verb] ► A poor image we presented. [direct object-subject-verb]
Use uncomplicated sentences to state complex ideas. If readers
have to cope with a complicated sentence in addition to a
complex idea, they are likely to become confused. Just as
simpler sentences make complex ideas more digestible, a
complex sentence construction makes a series of simple ideas
smoother and less choppy.
Avoid loading sentences with a number of thoughts
carelessly tacked together. Such sentences are monotonous and
hard to read because all the ideas seem to be of equal
importance. Rather, distinguish the relative importance of
sentence elements with subordination. See also garbled
sentences.
LOADED We started the program three years ago, only three members were on staff, and each member was responsible for a separate state, but it was not an efficient operation.
IMPROVED When we started the program three years ago, only three members were on staff, each responsible for a separate state; however, that arrangement was not efficient.
Express coordinate or equivalent ideas in similar form. The
structure of the sentence helps readers grasp the similarity of
its components, as illustrated in parallel structure.
1057
sentence faults A number of problems can create sentence faults, including
faulty subordination, clauses with no subjects, rambling
sentences, omitted verbs, and illogical assertions.
Faulty subordination occurs when a grammatically
subordinate element contains the main idea of the sentence or
when a subordinate element is so long or detailed that it
obscures the main idea. Both of the following sentences are
logical, depending on what the writer intends as the main idea
and as the subordinate element.
► Although the new filing system saves money, many of the staff are unhappy with it. [If the main point is that many of the staff are unhappy, this sentence is correct.]
► The new filing system saves money, although many of the staff are unhappy with it. [If the main point is that the new filing system saves money, this sentence is correct.]
In the following example, the subordinate element overwhelms
the main point.
FAULTY Because the noise level in the assembly area on a typical shift is as loud as a smoke detector’s alarm ten feet away, employees often develop hearing problems.
IMPROVED Employees in the assembly area often develop hearing problems because the noise level on a typical shift is as loud as a smoke detector’s alarm ten feet away.
Missing subjects occur when writers inappropriately assume a
1058
subject that they do not state in the clause. See also sentence
fragments.
INCOMPLETE Your application program can request to end the session after the next command. [Your application program can request who or what to end the session?]
COMPLETE Your application program can request the host program to end the session after the next command.
Rambling sentences contain more information than the reader
can comfortably absorb. The obvious remedy for a rambling
sentence is to divide it into two or more sentences. (See also
run-on sentences.) When you do that, put the main message of
the rambling sentence into the first of the revised sentences.
RAMBLING The payment to which a subcontractor is entitled should be made promptly in order that in the event of a subsequent contractual dispute we, as general contractors, may not be held in default of our contract by virtue of nonpayment.
DIRECT Pay subcontractors promptly. Then, if a contractual dispute occurs, we cannot be held in default of our contract because of nonpayment.
Missing verbs produce some sentence faults.
Faulty logic results when a predicate makes an illogical
assertion about its subject. “Mr. Wilson’s job is a sales
representative” is not logical, but “Mr. Wilson is a sales
representative” is logical. See also logic errors.
1059
sentence fragments A sentence fragment is an incomplete grammatical unit that is
punctuated as a sentence.
FRAGMENT And quit his job.
SENTENCE He quit his job.
A sentence fragment lacks either a subject or a verb or is a
subordinate clause or phrase. Sentence fragments are often
introduced by relative pronouns (who, whom, which, that) or
subordinating conjunctions (although, because, if, when,
while).
A sentence must contain a finite verb; verbals (nonfinite) do
not function as verbs. The following sentence fragments use
verbals (providing, to work) that cannot function as finite verbs.
FRAGMENT Providing all employees with disability insurance.
SENTENCE The company provides all employees with disability insurance.
FRAGMENT To work a 40-hour week.
SENTENCE Most of our employees must work a 40-hour week.
Explanatory phrases beginning with such as, for example, and
similar terms often lead writers to create sentence fragments.
1060
A hopelessly snarled fragment simply must be rewritten. To
rewrite such a fragment, pull the main points out of the
fragment, list them in the proper sequence, and then rewrite
the sentence as illustrated in garbled sentences. See also
sentence construction and sentence faults.
1061
sentence variety Sentences can vary in length, structure, and complexity. As you
revise, vary your sentences so that they do not become
tiresomely alike. See also sentence construction.
Sentence Length A series of sentences of the same length is monotonous, so
varying sentence length makes writing less tedious to the
reader. For example, avoid stringing together a number of
short independent clauses. Either connect them with a
subordinating connective, thereby creating a dependent clause,
or turn some clauses into separate sentences.
STRING The river is 63 miles long, and it averages 50 yards in width, and its depth averages 8 feet.
IMPROVED The river, which is 63 miles long and averages 50 yards in width, has an average depth of 8 feet.
IMPROVED The river is 63 miles long. It averages 50 yards in width and 8 feet in depth.
You can often effectively combine short sentences by
converting verbs into adjectives.
Although too many short sentences make your writing sound
choppy and immature, a short sentence can be effective
following a long one.
1062
► During the past two decades, many changes have occurred in American life — the extent, durability, and significance of which no one has yet measured. No one can.
In general, short sentences are good for emphatic, memorable
statements. Long sentences are good for detailed explanations
and support. Nothing is inherently wrong with a long sentence,
or even with a complicated one, as long as its meaning is clear
and direct. Sentence length becomes an element of style when
varied for emphasis or contrast; a conspicuously short or long
sentence can be used to good effect.
Word Order When a series of sentences all begin in exactly the same way
(usually with an article and a noun), the result is likely to be
monotonous. You can make your sentences more interesting by
occasionally starting with a modifying word, phrase, or clause.
► To salvage the project, she presented alternatives when existing policies failed to produce results. [modifying phrase]
However, overuse of this technique can itself be monotonous,
so use it in moderation.
Inverted word order can be an effective way to achieve
variety, but be careful not to create an awkward construction.
AWKWARD So good sales have never been.
1063
EFFECTIVE Never have sales been so good.
For variety, you can alter normal sentence order by inserting a
phrase or clause.
► Titanium fills the gap, both in weight and in strength, between aluminum and steel.
The technique of inserting a phrase or clause is good for
achieving emphasis, providing detail, breaking monotony, and
regulating pace.
Loose and Periodic Sentences A loose sentence makes its major point at the beginning and
then adds subordinate phrases and clauses that develop or
modify the point. A loose sentence could end at one or more
points before it actually ends, as the periods in brackets
illustrate in the following example:
► It went up[.], a great ball of fire about a mile in diameter[.], an elemental force freed from its bonds[.] after being chained for billions of years.
A periodic sentence delays its main idea until the end by
presenting modifiers or subordinate ideas first, thus holding the
readers’ interest until the end.
► During the last century, the attitude of Americans toward technology underwent a profound change.
1064
Experiment with shifts from loose sentences to periodic
sentences in your own writing, especially during revision.
Avoid the monotony of a long series of loose sentences,
particularly a series containing coordinate clauses joined by
conjunctions. Using subordination not only provides emphasis
but also makes your sentences more interesting.
1065
sequential method of development The sequential, or step-by-step, method of development is
especially effective for explaining a process or describing a
mechanism in operation. (See process explanation.) It is also
the logical method for writing instructions, as shown in Figure
S–2 and Figure I–6.
1066
FIGURE S–2. Sequential Method of Development
The main advantage of the sequential method of
development is that it is easy to follow because the steps
correspond to the process or operation being described. The
disadvantages are that it can become monotonous and does not
lend itself well to achieving emphasis.
1067
Most methods of development have elements of sequence to
a greater or lesser extent. The chronological method of
development, for example, is also sequential: To describe a trip
chronologically, from beginning to end, is also to describe it
sequentially. The cause-and-effect method of development
may contain certain elements of sequence. For example, a
report of the causes leading to an accident (the effect) might
describe those causes in the order they occurred (or their
sequence).
1068
service When used as a verb, service means “keep up or maintain” as
well as “repair.” (“Our company will service your equipment.”)
If you mean “provide a more general benefit,” use serve.
1069
set / sit Sit is an intransitive verb; it does not, therefore, require an
object. (“I sit by a window in the office.”) Its past tense is sat.
(“We sat around the conference table.”) Set is usually a
transitive verb, meaning “put or place,” “establish,” or
“harden.” Its past tense is set.
► Please set the supplies on the shelf. ► The jeweler set the stone carefully. ► Can we set a date for the meeting? ► The high temperature sets the epoxy quickly.
Set is occasionally an intransitive verb.
► The new adhesive sets in five minutes.
1070
shall / will Traditionally, shall was used to express the future tense with I
and we. Today, however, will is the generally accepted term.
Shall is commonly used today only in questions requesting an
opinion or a preference (“Shall we go?”) rather than a
prediction (“Will we go?”). It is also used in statements
expressing determination (“I shall return!”) or in formal
regulations that express a requirement (“Applicants shall
provide a proof of certification.”).
1071
slashes The slash (/) — also called slant line, diagonal, virgule, bar, and
solidus — both separates and shows omission. The slash can
indicate alternatives (“You may reach the customer service
department at 515-678-2278/2279”) or combinations (on/off
switch).
The slash often indicates omitted words and letters:
miles/hour (miles per hour); w/o (without)
In fractions and mathematical expressions, the slash
separates the numerator from the denominator (3/4 for three-
fourths; x/y for x over y).
Although the slash is used informally with dates (5/9/18),
avoid this form in business writing, especially in international
correspondence.
The forward slash often separates items in URLs (uniform
resource locators): inlandchorus.com/programs. The backward
slash is used to separate parts of file names: c:\ myfiles\ reports\
annual18.doc.
1072
so / so that / such Avoid so as a substitute for because. See also as / because /
since.
Do not replace the phrase so that with so or such that.
Such, an adjective meaning “of this or that kind,” should never
be used as a pronoun.
1073
social media Social media refers to Web sites or applications — such as
Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter, and Instagram — that allow the
creation of online communities through which individuals and
organizations can create content, interact, and share
information. Accessed through Web browsers or mobile
devices, social-media platforms often incorporate instant
messaging and e-mail components, and many have blogs and
forums that allow for comments, links to other Web sites, and
the collection of information that is of interest to the
community.
Social media plays several vital roles in professional
communication. It can help job seekers establish a professional
presence and network and help companies communicate more
easily with stakeholders.
On an individual level, you can use accounts on sites such as
LinkedIn and Twitter to develop your presence within your field
to connect with colleagues. When you create accounts on these
sites, your profile, including your profile picture, should be
consistent to make it easier for potential employers and
colleagues to find you. Your profile and postings should also be
professional in tone; if you have used social media primarily for
personal reasons, you may wish to create separate accounts that
are focused on your work. You can also use social media for
active networking. Many industries and professional
1074
organizations have established conversations around Twitter
hashtags (such as #SmallBizChat, #IMCchat, and
#womenintech) and meet at regularly scheduled times to
discuss current events and mentoring needs.
Many organizations employ writers to maintain their social-
media accounts in order to connect with their clients, share
information about their products, and reach new customers.
Social media can help organizations promote goodwill, resolve
problems, and obtain near-instant feedback on their products
and services.
Choosing the Appropriate Platforms When you or your organization chooses which social-media
platforms to join, consider both what you hope to accomplish
and which platforms reach more of your target customers or
contacts. For example, a manufacturing company might choose
a platform that focuses on users of products similar to its own,
whereas a service-oriented company might select a platform
that allows users to request and receive immediate assistance. A
small shop might choose several platforms for different
purposes, such as advertising images of its products on a
platform that is heavily image-based while participating in
another platform that allows the owner to build a professional
network.
1075
Two social-media characteristics — status updates and
networks — are particularly useful in the workplace. Status
updates, which include posts on Facebook and tweets on
Twitter, allow individuals or organizations to post brief
announcements or responses to questions. Once these status
updates are published, other accounts can immediately respond
to them. Networks allow one individual or organization to link
its company and products to another individual or organization.
By doing so, the two entities become “connected” in the social-
media community, allowing their posts to be intertwined into a
type of ongoing conversation. Figure S–3 provides an overview
of three popular social-media platforms of interest to
businesses and professionals and shows how each uses status
updates and networks to support its community.
1076
FIGURE S–3. Comparison of Social-Media Platforms
Before selecting a specific social-media platform, consider
the following:
Conversations within social media are impossible to control or pause. You must be willing to respond to the inquiries and comments, positive and negative, of other community members. Social-media platforms may demand significant time from
1077
account holders. Users of many platforms expect quick, ongoing responses and updates. If a crisis occurs, you must be willing and able to monitor the account outside of normal business hours. Communications within a social-media platform might have a wider audience than you intend, even though most platforms allow accounts to limit their audiences.
Writing Style and Privacy Considerations For writing style, follow both the practices of your organization
and the requirements of the selected social-media platform. Pay
close attention to the context, purpose, and audience of your
message, ensuring that your message is clear, precise, and free
of grammatical errors. See proofreading.
Posts in a social-media platform are immediately and often
widely shared among other community participants and
potentially on other, unassociated Web sites. For this reason,
consider both the benefit of your post to your immediate
audience and the potential implications of that post to those
outside your social-media network. Although many platforms
are considered “informal” and used primarily for personal
communication, the ability of writing to be shared throughout a
given network demands that you consider how your
contributions represent you professionally. Organizations often
review the social-media profiles of their applicants as part of
the employment process. Other organizations employ services
1078
to monitor what is said about them online. Many organizations
have policies that prohibit employees from discussing the
workplace, even within a personal social-media account.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Judicious Use of Social Media
✓ Always consider the purpose and suitability of your contributions. Avoid contributions that publicly discuss topics better suited for one-on-one communication or that are considered divisive.
✓ Consider your posts to be available to everyone, and take into account how someone, such as your employer or school, might view your status update or shared picture.
✓ Follow your employer’s policies regarding social media. Attempting to circumvent policies — by using a mobile device to access a blocked site, for example — could result in severe penalties or even termination.
✓ Never comment about a job, an employer, or an instructor. Consider everything that you contribute to a social-media platform as available to the organization or individuals that you might be writing about.
✓ Carefully consider “friend” requests. Before establishing a connection, consider your organization’s policy, your professional relationship, and any potential current or future conflicts of interest.
✓ Have at least one public, professional social-media account, especially if you are searching for jobs. Many employers now search job candidates’ social-media accounts. If they cannot find you online, they may be suspicious that you are hiding something.
✓ Consider also the information in the Ethics Note in blogs and forums as you compose your message.
1079
some / somewhat When some functions as an indefinite pronoun for a plural
count noun or as an indefinite adjective modifying a plural
count noun, use a plural verb.
► Some of us are prepared to work overtime. ► Some people are more productive than others.
Some is singular, however, when used with mass nouns.
► Some sand has trickled through the crack.
When some is used as an adjective or a pronoun meaning “an
undetermined quantity” or “certain unspecified persons,” it
should be replaced by the adverb somewhat, which means “to
some extent.”
1080
some time / sometime / sometimes Some time refers to a duration of time. (“We waited for some
time before making the decision.”) Sometime refers to an
unknown or unspecified time. (“We will visit with you
sometime.”) Sometimes refers to occasional occurrences at
unspecified times. (“He sometimes visits the branch offices.”)
1081
spatial method of development The spatial method of development describes an object or a
process according to the physical arrangement of its features.
Depending on the subject, you describe its features from
bottom to top, side to side, east to west, outside to inside, and so
on. Descriptions of this kind rely mainly on dimension (height,
width, length), direction (up, down, north, south), shape
(rectangular, square, semicircular), and proportion (one-half,
two-thirds). Features are described in relation to one another or
to their surroundings, as illustrated in Figure S–4, which
provides the partial installation requirements for drinking
fountains that comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA). Such descriptions often benefit from visuals, such as
drawings, that can provide overviews and details, as is the case
in Figure S–4.
1082
FIGURE S–4. Spatial Description with Precise Measurements
SOURCE: access-board.gov/ufas-html/fig27a.html. Accessed May 10, 2012.
The spatial method of development might be used for
descriptions of warehouse inventory; proposals for landscape
work; construction-site progress and activity reports; and, in
combination with a step-by-step sequence, many types of
instructions.
1083
spelling Because spelling errors in your documents can confuse readers
and damage your credibility, careful proofreading is essential.
The use of a spell checker is crucial; however, it will not catch
all mistakes. A spell checker or an auto-correct function cannot
detect a spelling error if the error results in a valid word (to
inadvertently typed as too). If you are unsure about the spelling
of a word, consult a dictionary.
1084
spreadsheets A spreadsheet is an interactive computer application for the
organization, analysis, and storage of data in tabular form. (See
also tables.) A typical spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel contains
columns, rows, and cells, as shown in Figure S–5. The columns
from left to right across the top of a spreadsheet are labeled
with letters (A, B, C, and so on), and the rows at the far left of a
spreadsheet are sequenced from top to bottom numerically (1,
2, 3, and so on). A cell is the point at which one column and one
row meet, so it can be identified to match the column and the
number in the row (A1, B2, and so on). The data in the columns
and rows can be sorted (for example, A–Z or Z–A), manipulated
with various mathematical operations, and formatted or printed
as in a word-processing program.
FIGURE S–5. Spreadsheet
Spreadsheet programs like Excel offer a wide variety of
functions, options, and variations, so make use of the tutorials
built into the program for learning spreadsheet capabilities.
1085
Many colleges offer continuing education courses in the use of
spreadsheets, and workplaces often provide courses or experts
within the organization to help employees. The Web offers
many videos and tutorials, but the Microsoft Office Web site for
Excel is a useful starting point to connect with experts and other
users via live chat and blogs (products.office.com/en-us/excel).
Spreadsheets, or sections from them, can be printed and
integrated into reports and other documents, as described in
visuals. See also graphs.
1086
style A dictionary definition of style is “the way in which something
is said or done, as distinguished from its substance.” Writers’
styles are determined by the way writers think and express their
thoughts in writing — the way they use words, sentences,
images, figures of speech, and so on.
A writer’s style is the way his or her language functions in
particular situations. For example, an e-mail to a friend would
be relaxed, even chatty, in tone, whereas a job application
cover letter would be more restrained and formal. Obviously,
the style appropriate to one situation would not be appropriate
to the other. In both situations, the audience, purpose, and
context determine the manner or style the writer adopts.
Beyond an individual’s personal style, various kinds of writing
have distinct stylistic traits, such as business writing style.
Standard English can be divided into two broad categories of
style — formal and informal — according to how it functions in
certain situations. Understanding the distinction between
formal and informal writing styles helps writers use the
appropriate style. However, no clear-cut line divides the two
categories, and some writing may call for a combination of the
two. See also English, varieties of.
Formal Writing Style A formal writing style can perhaps best be defined by pointing
1087
to certain material that is clearly formal, such as scholarly and
scientific articles in professional journals, lectures read at
meetings of professional societies, and legal documents.
Material written in a formal style is usually the work of a
specialist writing to other specialists or writing that embodies
laws or regulations. As a result, the vocabulary is specialized
and precise. The writer’s tone is impersonal and objective
because the subject matter looms larger in the writing than does
the author’s personality. (See point of view.) A formal writing
style does not use contractions, slang, or dialect. Because the
material generally examines complex ideas, the sentence
construction may also be complex.
Formal writing need not be dull and lifeless. By using such
techniques as the active voice whenever possible, sentence
variety, and subordination, a writer can make formal writing
lively and interesting, especially if the subject matter is
inherently interesting to readers. In the following conclusion to
a historical study, a scholar reflects on jargon in business
writing.
► Compared to some of the problems that afflict business and administrative writing — poor organization, obfuscation, and lack of consideration for the reader — phrases such as “as per your request” are a minor ill. It is my own view, however, that texts and teachers should continue to urge students to avoid jargon. People in organizations who face the same situation repeatedly will use similar language to different correspondents; however,
1088
the repeated language can be standard English that is friendly and that makes literal sense. Jargon that is not part of spoken English distances the writer from the reader; jargon that does not make literal sense devalues language as communication.
— Kitty O. Locker, “ ‘As Per Your Request’: A History of
Business Jargon,” Journal of Business and Technical
Communication 1.1
Whether you should use a formal style in a particular instance
depends on your readers and purpose. When writers attempt to
force a formal style where it should not be used, their writing is
likely to fall victim to affectation, awkwardness, and
gobbledygook.
Informal Writing Style An informal writing style is a relaxed and colloquial way of
writing standard English. It is the style found in most personal
e-mail and in some business correspondence, blogs, and
promotional writing. (See also blogs and forums.) There is less
distance between the writer and the reader because the tone is
more personal than it is in formal writing. Consider the
following passage, written in an informal style, from a
nonfiction book on business management.
► Business, like art and science, has been revealed and conceived through the intellect and imagination of people, and it develops or declines because of the intellect and imagination of people.
1089
In fact, there is no business; there are only people.
Business exists only among people and for people.
Seems simple enough, and it applies to every aspect of
business, but not enough businesspeople seem to get it.
Reading the economic forecasts and the indicators and
the ratios and the rates of this or that, someone from
another planet might actually believe that there really are
invisible hands at work in the marketplace.
It’s easy to forget what the measurements are
measuring. Every number — from productivity rates to
salaries — is just a device contrived by people to measure
the results of the enterprise of other people. For managers,
the most important job is not measurement but motivation.
And you can’t motivate numbers.
— James A. Autry, Love and Profit: The Art of Caring
Leadership
As this example illustrates, the vocabulary of an informal
writing style is made up of generally familiar rather than
unfamiliar words and expressions, although slang and dialect
are usually avoided. An informal style approximates the
cadence and structure of spoken English while conforming to
the grammatical conventions of written English.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
1090
Writers who consciously attempt to create a distinctive style usually defeat their purpose. Attempting to impress readers with any specific style (casual, scientific, chatty, formal) can lead to affectation. Business writing need be neither affected nor dull. The key to a clear, direct, and even interesting style is to master basic writing skills and to keep your readers’ needs in mind. What will be both informative and interesting to your readers? When that question is uppermost in your mind as you apply the steps of the writing process, you will achieve an interesting and informative writing style. See “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Developing an Effective Style
✓ Use the active voice — not exclusively but as much as possible without allowing your writing to become awkward or illogical.
✓ Use parallel structure whenever a sentence or list presents two or more thoughts of equal importance.
✓ Vary sentence structure to avoid a monotonous style. ✓ Avoid stating positive thoughts in negative terms (write “40
percent responded” instead of “60 percent failed to respond”). See also ethics in writing, plain language, and positive writing.
✓ Concentrate on achieving the proper balance between emphasis and subordination.
Style guides, such as The Chicago Manual of Style and the
Associated Press Stylebook and Briefing on Media Law, provide
specific and sometimes varied advice for handling issues of
usage, style, and formats for citations, correspondence, and
1091
documents.
1092
subordination Subordination is the use of sentence structure to show the
appropriate relationship between ideas of unequal importance.
► Envirex Systems now employs 500 people. It was founded just three years ago. [The two ideas are equally important.]
► Envirex Systems, which now employs 500 people, was founded just three years ago. [The number of employees is subordinated; the founding date is emphasized.]
► Envirex Systems, which was founded just three years ago, now employs 500 people. [The founding date is subordinated; the number of employees is emphasized.]
Subordination allows you to emphasize your main idea by
putting less important ideas in subordinate clauses or phrases.
DEPENDENT CLAUSE
The regional manager’s report, which covered five pages, was carefully illustrated.
PHRASE The regional manager’s report, covering five pages, was carefully illustrated.
SINGLE MODIFIER
The regional manager’s five-page report was carefully illustrated.
Subordinating conjunctions (because, if, while, when,
although) achieve subordination effectively.
► An increase in local sales is unlikely because the local population has declined.
You may use a coordinating conjunction (and, but, for, nor, or,
1093
so, or yet) to concede that an opposite or a balancing fact is
true; however, a subordinating conjunction can often make the
point more smoothly.
► Although their bank has a lower interest rate on loans, ours provides a wider range of essential services.
The relationship between a conditional statement and a
statement of consequences is clearer if the condition is
expressed as a subordinate clause.
► Because the bill was incorrect, the customer was angry.
Relative pronouns (who, whom, which, that) can be used
effectively in subordinate clauses.
► OnlinePro, which protects computers from malicious programs, makes your system “invisible” to hackers.
Avoid subordinate constructions that overlap and depend on
the preceding construction. Overlapping can make the
relationship between a relative pronoun and its antecedent less
clear.
OVERLAPPING Shock, which often accompanies severe injuries and infections, is a failure of the circulation, which is marked by a fall in blood pressure that initially affects the skin (which explains pallor) and later the vital organs, such as the kidneys and brain.
CLEAR Shock often accompanies severe injuries and infections. Marked by a fall in blood pressure, it is a failure of the circulation, initially to the skin (thus producing pallor) and later to the vital organs like the kidneys, and brain.
1094
Effective subordination can be used to achieve conciseness,
emphasis, and sentence variety.
1095
suffixes A suffix is a letter or letters added to the end of a word to change
its meaning in some way. Suffixes can change the part of speech
of a word.
NO SUFFIX The proposal was thorough. [adjective]
SUFFIX The thoroughness is obvious. [noun]
SUFFIX The proposal thoroughly described the problem. [adverb]
The suffix -like is sometimes added to nouns to make them into
adjectives. The resulting compound word is hyphenated only if
it is unusual or might not immediately be clear (childlike,
lifelike, but dictionary-like, Friedman-like). See hyphens.
1096
surveys (see questionnaires)
1097
synonyms A synonym is a word that means nearly the same thing as
another word does (seller, vendor, supplier). The dictionary
definitions of synonyms are similar, but the connotations may
differ. For example, a seller may be the same thing as a
supplier, but the word supplier does not suggest a retail
transaction as strongly as the word seller does.
Do not try to impress your readers by finding fancy or
obscure synonyms in a thesaurus; the result is likely to be
affectation. See also connotation / denotation and antonyms.
1098
syntax Syntax refers to the way words, phrases, and clauses are
combined to form sentences. In English, the most common
structure is the subject-verb-object pattern. For more
information about the word order of sentences, see sentence
construction, sentence faults, sentence fragments, and
sentence variety.
1099
T
1100
tables A table organizes numerical and verbal data, such as statistics,
into parallel rows and columns that allow readers to make
precise item-to-item comparisons. Overall data/trends,
however, are more easily conveyed in graphs and other visuals.
Table Elements Tables typically include the elements shown in Figure T–1.
FIGURE T–1. Elements of a Table
Table Number Table numbers should be placed above tables and assigned
sequentially throughout the document.
1101
Table Title The title (or caption), which is normally placed just above the
table, should describe concisely what the table represents.
Box Head The box head contains the column headings, which should be
brief but descriptive. Units of measurement should be either
specified as part of the heading or enclosed in parentheses
beneath it. Standard abbreviations and symbols are acceptable.
Avoid vertical or diagonal lettering.
Stub The stub, the left vertical column of a table, lists the items about
which information is given in the body of the table.
Body The body comprises the data below the column headings and to
the right of the stub. Within the body, arrange columns so that
the items to be compared appear in adjacent rows and columns
for ease of comparison. (See Figure T–1.) Where no information
exists for a specific item, substitute a row of dots or a dash to
acknowledge the gap.
Rules Rules are the lines (or borders) that separate the table into its
various parts. Tables should include top and bottom borders.
Tables often include right and left borders, although they may
be open at the sides, as shown in Figure T–1. Generally, include
1102
a horizontal rule between the column headings and the body of
the table. Separate the columns with vertical rules within a
table only when they aid clarity.
Footnotes Footnotes are used for explanations of individual items in the
table. Symbols (such as and ) or lowercase letters (sometimes
in parentheses) rather than numbers are ordinarily used to
indicate table footnotes. Otherwise, numbers might be
mistaken for numerical data or could be confused with the
numbering system for text footnotes. See also documenting
sources.
Source Line The source line identifies where the data originated. When a
source line is appropriate, it appears below the table. Many
organizations place the source line below the footnotes. See also
copyright and plagiarism.
Continuing Tables When a table must be divided so that it can be continued on
another page, repeat the column headings and the table
number and title on the new page with a “continued” label (for
example, “Table 3. [title], continued”).
Informal Tables To list relatively few items that would be easier for the reader to
grasp in tabular form than in running text, you can use an
* †
1103
informal table, as long as you introduce it properly, as shown in
Figure T–2. Although informal tables do not need titles or table
numbers to identify them, they do require column headings
that accurately describe the information listed.
FIGURE T–2. Informal Table
1104
tables of contents A table of contents lists all the major sections of a long
document or Web site in their order of appearance. Tables of
contents allow readers to locate specific information quickly
and easily by referencing section page numbers in printed
documents or portable document format (PDF) files or by
clicking hyperlinks in Web content.
When creating a table of contents, use the major headings
and subheadings of your document exactly as they appear in the
text, as shown in the entry formal reports. (See the table of
contents in Figure F–6.) In print documents, the table of
contents is placed in the front matter following the title page
and abstract, and it precedes the list of tables or figures, the
foreword, and the preface. On large or complex Web sites, the
table of contents typically appears at the top of the first page.
1105
telegraphic style Telegraphic style condenses writing by omitting articles,
pronouns, conjunctions, and transitions. Although
conciseness is important, especially in instructions, writers
sometimes try to achieve conciseness by omitting necessary
words, thus producing misunderstandings. Compare the
following two passages and notice how much clearer the
revised version reads (the added words are italicized).
TELEGRAPHIC Per 5/21 e-mail, 12 instruction booklets/questionnaire enclosed. Report can be complete when above materials received. July filling quickly, so let’s set date. Pls advise.
CLEAR As promised in my May 21 e-mail, enclosed are 12 copies of the instruction booklet and the questionnaire. We can complete the report when we receive the questionnaires. Our July calendar is filling quickly, so please call me to set a meeting date as soon as possible.
Telegraphic style can also produce ambiguity, as the following
example demonstrates.
AMBIGUOUS The director wants report written by New York office.[Does the director want a report that the New York office wrote in the past, or does the director want the New York office to write a report in the future?]
CLEAR The director wants the report that was written by the New York office.
CLEAR The director wants the report to be written by the New York office.
PROFESSIONALISM NOTE
Although you may save yourself work by writing telegraphically, you may produce serious misunderstandings and make your readers work
1106
to decipher your meaning. Professional courtesy requires that you help your reader. Even when text messaging, make sure your reader will understand your meaning.
1107
tenant / tenet A tenant is a person who holds or temporarily occupies a
property owned by another person. (“The tenant was upset by
the rent increase.”) A tenet is an opinion or principle held by a
person, an organization, or a system. (“Competition is a central
tenet of capitalism.”)
1108
tense DIRECTORY
Past Tense Past Perfect Tense Present Tense Present Perfect Tense Future Tense Future Perfect Tense Shift in Tense
Tense is the grammatical term for verb forms that indicate time
distinctions. The six tenses in English are past, past perfect,
present, present perfect, future, and future perfect. Each tense
also has a corresponding progressive form.
TENSE BASIC FORM PROGRESSIVE FORM
Past I began I was beginning
Past perfect I had begun I had been beginning
Present I begin I am beginning
Present perfect I have begun I have been beginning
Future I will begin I will be beginning
Future perfect I will have begun I will have been beginning
Perfect tenses allow you to express a prior action or condition
that continues in a past, present, or future time.
PAST PERFECT I had begun to read the manual when the fire alarm rang.
PRESENT I have begun to write the annual report and will continue for the
1109
PERFECT rest of the month.
FUTURE PERFECT
I will have begun this project by the time funds are allocated.
Progressive tenses allow you to describe some ongoing action or
condition in the past, present, or future.
PAST PROGRESSIVE I was beginning to think we would not finish by the deadline.
PRESENT PROGRESSIVE
I am beginning to be concerned that we will not meet the deadline.
FUTURE PROGRESSIVE
I will be requesting a leave of absence when this project is finished.
Verbs that express mental activity (believe, know, see, and so
on) are generally not used in the progressive.
Past Tense The simple past tense indicates that an action took place in its
entirety in the past. The past tense is usually formed by adding
d or ed to the root form of the verb. (“We closed the office early
yesterday.”)
Past Perfect Tense The past perfect tense indicates that one past event preceded
another. It is formed by combining the helping verb had with
the past-participle form of the main verb. (“He had finished by
1110
the time I arrived.”)
Present Tense The simple present tense represents action occurring in the
present, without any indication of time duration. (“I ride the
train.”)
A general truth is always expressed in the present tense.
(“Time heals all wounds.”) The present tense can be used to
present actions or conditions that have no time restrictions.
(“Water boils at 212 degrees Fahrenheit.”) Similarly, the present
tense can be used to indicate habitual action. (“I pass the coffee
shop every day.”) The present tense is also used for the
“historical present,” as in newspaper headlines (“Dow Jones
Reaches a High for the Year”) or references to an author’s
opinion or a work’s contents—even if it was written in the past
and the author is no longer living. (“Orwell argues for plain
language in his 1946 essay.”)
Present Perfect Tense The present perfect tense describes something from the recent
past that has a bearing on the present—a period of time before
the present but after the simple past. The present perfect tense
is formed by combining a form of the helping verb have with
the past-participle form of the main verb. (“We have finished
the draft and can now revise it.”)
1111
Future Tense The simple future tense indicates a time that will occur after the
present. It uses the helping verb will (or shall) plus the main
verb. (“I will finish the job tomorrow.”) Do not use the future
tense needlessly; doing so merely adds complexity.
Future Perfect Tense The future perfect tense indicates action that will have been
completed at the time of or before another future action. It
combines will have and the past participle of the main verb.
(“She will have driven 1,400 miles by the time she returns.”)
Shift in Tense Be consistent in your use of tense. The only legitimate shift in
tense records a real change in time. Illogical shifts in tense will
only confuse your readers.
1112
text messaging Text messaging, or texting, refers to the delivery or exchange of
brief written messages between mobile phones over cellular
networks. Text messaging is effective for simple messages
communicated between people on the move or in
nontraditional workplaces. (“Client backup servers down.”)
Some text messages can include photographs, video, and other
digital files. As with your workplace e-mail, consider carefully
the content of your messages before sending them. For the real-
time exchange of brief messages, the phone or instant
messaging may be a better choice. See also selecting the
medium.
1113
that / which / who The word that is often overused and can foster wordiness.
However, include that in a sentence if it avoids ambiguity or
improves the pace.
Use which, not that, with nonrestrictive clauses (clauses that do
not change the meaning of the basic sentence).
NONRESTRICTIVE After John left the law firm, which is the largest in the region, he started a private practice.
RESTRICTIVE Companies that diversify usually succeed.
That and which should refer to animals and things; who should
refer to people.
► Dr. Cynthia Winter, who recently joined the clinic, treated a dog that was severely burned.
1114
there / their / they’re There is an expletive (a word that fills the position of another
word, phrase, or clause) or an adverb.
EXPLETIVE There were more than 1,500 people at the conference.
ADVERB More than 1,500 people were there.
Their is the possessive case form of they. (“Managers check
their e-mail regularly.”) They’re is a contraction of they are.
(“Clients tell us they’re pleased with our services.”)
1115
thesaurus A thesaurus lists synonyms and antonyms, which are arranged
alphabetically or retrievable by categories. Thoughtfully used, a
thesaurus can help refine your word choice during revision.
However, the variety of words it offers may tempt you to choose
an inappropriate word for the context or to use an obscure
synonym to impress your readers. (See affectation.) Never use
a word unless you are sure of its meanings; its connotations
might be unknown to you and could mislead your readers.
1116
titles Titles of documents are important because many readers
decide whether to read a report or message, for example, based
on its title. Titles are also crucial for filing and retrieving
documents. For advice on creating and using titles for figures
and tables, see visuals.
Reports and Long Documents Titles for reports, proposals, articles, and similar documents
should identify the document’s topic, reflect its tone, and
indicate its scope and purpose, as in the following:
► “Using Chaos Theory to Evaluate Small-Business Growth Management”
Such titles should be concise but not so short that they are not
specific. For example, the title “Chaos Theory and Small
Businesses” announces the topic and might be appropriate for a
book, but it does not answer important questions that readers of
an article would expect, such as “What does the article say
about the relationship between chaos theory and small
businesses?” and “What aspect of small businesses is related to
chaos theory?”
Avoid titles with such redundancies as “Notes on,” “Studies
on,” or “A Report on.” However, works like annual reports or
feasibility reports should be identified as such in the title
1117
because this information specifies the purpose and scope of the
report. For titles of progress and activity reports, indicate the
dates in a subtitle (“Quarterly Report on Hospital Admission
Rates: January–March 2018”). Avoid using technical shorthand,
such as chemical formulas, and other abbreviations in your
title unless the work is addressed exclusively to specialists in
the field. For multivolume publications, repeat the title on each
volume and include the subtitle and number of each volume.
Do not write titles in sentence form, except for titles of
articles in newsletters, magazines, and similar publications
that ask a rhetorical question: “Is Online Learning Right for
You?”
E-mail, Memos, and Online Postings Subject lines of e-mail messages, memos, and online postings
function as titles and should concisely and accurately describe
the topic of the message. Because recipients often use subject-
line titles to prioritize and sort their correspondence, such
titles must be specific.
VAGUE Subject: Tuition Reimbursement
SPECIFIC Subject: Tuition Reimbursement for Time-Management Seminar
Although the title in the subject line announces your topic, you
should still develop an opening that provides context for the
message. See blogs and forums.
1118
Formatting Titles Use the standards in this section for formatting titles unless you
are following a style that recommends otherwise.
Capitalization Capitalize the initial letters of the first and last words of a title,
as well as all major words in the title. Do not capitalize articles
(a, an, the), coordinating conjunctions (and, but), or short
prepositions (at, in, on, of) unless they begin or end the title
(The Lives of a Cell). Capitalize prepositions in titles if they
contain five or more letters (Between, Since, Until, After).
Italics Use italics or underlining when referring to titles of separately
published works, such as a book, periodical, newspaper,
pamphlet, brochure, legal case, movie, or television series.
► Turning Workplace Conflict into Collaboration [book] by Joyce Richards was reviewed in the New York Times.
Some style guides also recommend italicizing the titles of Web
sites and blogs (but not URLs).
► We will include links to the blog Gizmodo (http://gizmodo.com/) and to Consumer Reports Online (www.consumerreports.org).
Abbreviations of such titles are italicized if their spelled-out
forms would be italicized.
1119
► NEJM stands for the New England Journal of Medicine.
Italicize the titles of CDs, DVDs, plays, long poems, paintings,
sculptures, and long musical works.
Quotation Marks Use quotation marks when referring to parts of publications,
such as chapters of books and articles or sections within
periodicals or blogs.
► Her chapter titled “Effects of Government Regulations on Government Regulation and the Economy was discussed in a recent article, “No-Fault Insurance and Motorcycles?” published on the blog AmericanCycle.
Titles of reports, essays, short poems, short musical works
(including songs), short stories, and single episodes of radio and
television programs are also enclosed in quotation marks.
Special Cases Some titles, by convention, are not set off by quotation marks,
underlining, or italics. Such titles follow standard practice for
capitalization and the practice of the organization.
► Microsoft.com [Web site], Business Writing [college course title], Old Testament, Magna Carta, the Constitution, Lincoln’s Gettysburg Address, the Lands’ End Catalog
The treatment for Internet content, such as individual YouTube
videos, varies among documentation styles. See documenting
1120
sources.
1121
to / too / two To, too, and two are frequently confused because they sound
alike. To is used as a preposition or to mark an infinitive. See
verbs.
► Send the report to the district manager. [preposition] ► I do not wish to attend. [mark of the infinitive]
Too is an adverb meaning “excessively” or “also.”
► The price was too high. [excessively] ► I, too, thought it was high. [also]
Two is a number (two buildings, two concepts).
1122
tone Tone is the attitude a writer expresses toward the subject and
his or her readers. In workplace writing, tone may range widely
—depending on the purpose, situation, context, audience, and
even the medium of a communication. For example, in an e-
mail message to be read only by an associate who is also a
friend, your tone might be casual.
► Your proposal to Smith and Kline is super. We’ll just need to hammer out the schedule. If we get the contract, I owe you lunch!
In a message to your manager or superior, however, your tone
might be more formal.
► Your proposal to Smith and Kline is excellent. I have marked a couple of places where I’m concerned that we are committing ourselves to a schedule that we might not be able to keep. If I can help further, please let me know.
In a message that serves as a report to numerous readers, the
tone would be professional, without the more personal style
that you would use with an individual reader.
► The Smith and Kline proposal appears complete and thorough, based on our department’s evaluation. Several small revisions, however, would ensure that the company is not committing itself to an unrealistic schedule. These revisions are marked on the copy of the report attached to
1123
this message.
The word choice, the introduction, and even the title
contribute to the overall tone of your document. For instance, a
title such as “Ecological Consequences of Diminishing Water
Resources in California” clearly sets a different tone from
“What Happens When We’ve Drained California Dry?” The first
title would be appropriate for a report; the second title would be
more appropriate for a popular blog or newsletter article. See
also blogs and forums, business writing style, and
correspondence.
1124
transition Transition is the means of achieving a smooth flow of ideas
from sentence to sentence, paragraph to paragraph, and
subject to subject. Transition is a two-way indicator of what has
been said and what will be said; it provides readers with
guideposts for linking ideas and clarifying the relationship
between them.
Transition can be obvious.
► Having considered the benefits of a new facility, we move next to the question of adequate staffing.
Transition can be subtle.
► Even if this facility can be built at a reasonable cost, there still remains the issue of adequate staffing.
Either way, you now have your readers’ attention fastened on
the problem of adequate staffing, which is exactly what you set
out to do.
Methods of Transition Transition can be achieved in many ways: (1) using transitional
words and phrases, (2) repeating keywords or key ideas, (3)
using pronouns with clear antecedents, (4) using enumeration
(1, 2, 3, or first, second, third), (5) summarizing a previous
paragraph, (6) asking a question, and (7) using a transitional
1125
paragraph.
Certain words and phrases are inherently transitional.
Consider the following terms and their functions:
FUNCTION TERMS
Result therefore, as a result, consequently, thus, hence
Example for example, for instance, specifically, as an illustration
Comparison similarly, likewise, in comparison
Contrast but, yet, still, however, nevertheless, on the other hand
Addition moreover, furthermore, also, too, besides, in addition
Time now, later, meanwhile, since then, after that, before that time
Sequence first, second, third, initially, then, next, finally
Within a paragraph, such transitional expressions clarify and
smooth the movement from idea to idea. Conversely, the lack of
transitional devices can make for disjointed reading. See also
telegraphic style.
Transition Between Sentences You can achieve effective transition between sentences by
repeating keywords or key ideas from preceding sentences and
by using pronouns that refer to antecedents in previous
sentences. Consider the following short paragraph, which uses
both of those means.
► Representative of many American university towns is Middletown. This Midwestern town, formerly a small farming community, is today the home of a large and
1126
vibrant academic community. Attracting students from all over the Midwest, this university town has grown very rapidly in the last ten years.
Enumeration is another device for achieving transition.
► The recommendation rests on two conditions. First, the department staff must be expanded to handle the increased workload. Second, sufficient time must be provided for training the new staff.
Transition Between Paragraphs The means discussed so far for achieving transition between
sentences can also be effective for achieving transition between
paragraphs. For paragraphs, however, longer transitional
elements are often required. One technique is to use an opening
sentence that summarizes the preceding paragraph and then
moves on to a new paragraph.
► One property of material considered for manufacturing processes is hardness. Hardness is the internal resistance of the material to the forcing apart or closing together of its molecules. Another property is ductility, the characteristic of material that permits it to be drawn into a wire. Material also may possess malleability, the property that makes it capable of being rolled or hammered into thin sheets of various shapes. Purchasing managers must consider these properties before selecting manufacturing materials for use in production.
1127
The requirements of hardness, ductility, and malleability
account for the high cost of such materials.
Another technique is to ask a question at the end of one
paragraph and answer it at the beginning of the next.
► New technology has always been feared because it has at times displaced some jobs. However, it invariably created many more jobs than it eliminated. Almost always, the jobs eliminated by technological advances have been unskilled jobs, and workers who have been displaced have been forced to increase their skills, which resulted in better and higher-paying jobs for them. In view of this history, should we now uncritically embrace new technology?
Certainly technology has given us unparalleled access to
information and created many new roles for employees.
A purely transitional paragraph may be inserted to aid
readability.
► The problem of poor management was a key factor that caused the weak performance of the company.
Two other setbacks to the company’s fortunes also marked
the company’s decline: the loss of many skilled workers
through the early retirement program and the intensification of
the rate of employee turnover.
The early retirement program resulted in engineering staff…
1128
If you provide logical organization and have prepared an
outline, your transitional needs will easily be satisfied and your
writing will have unity and coherence. During revision, look
for places where transition is missing and add it. Look for
places where it is weak and strengthen it.
1129
trip reports A trip report provides a permanent record of a business trip and
its accomplishments. It provides managers with essential
information about the results of the trip and can enable other
staff members to benefit from the information. See also
reports.
A trip report is normally written as a memo or an e-mail and
addressed to an immediate superior, as shown in Figure T–3.
The subject line identifies the destination and dates of the trip.
The body of the report explains why you made the trip, whom
you visited, and what you accomplished. The report should
devote a brief section to each major activity and may include a
heading for each section. You need not give equal space to each
activity—instead, elaborate on the more important ones. Follow
the body of the report with the appropriate conclusions and
recommendations. Finally, if required, attach a record of
expenses to the trip report.
1130
FIGURE T–3. Trip Report (Using E-mail Format)
1131
trouble reports (see incident reports)
1132
try to The phrase try and is colloquial for try to. For business writing,
use try to.
1133
U
1134
unity Unity is singleness of purpose and focus; a unified paragraph
or document has a central idea and does not digress into
unrelated topics.
The logical sequence provided through outlining is essential
to achieving unity. An outline enables you to lay out the most
direct route from introduction to conclusion, and it enables
you to build each paragraph around a topic sentence that
expresses a single idea. Effective transition helps build unity, as
well as coherence, because transitional terms clarify the
relationship of each part to what precedes it.
1135
up Adding the word up to verbs often creates a redundant phrase.
See also conciseness.
1136
usage Usage describes the choices we make among the various words
and expressions available in our language. The lines between
standard English and nonstandard English and between formal
and informal English are determined by these choices. Your
guideline in any situation requiring such choices should be
appropriateness: Is the word or expression you use appropriate
to your audience and your subject? When it is, you are
practicing good usage.
This book contains many entries on specific usage questions.
For a complete list of the usage entries in this book, see
“Commonly Misused Words and Phrases.” Usage entries are
also distinguished by italicized titles (for example, see utilize). A
reputable dictionary is also an invaluable aid in your selection
of the right word.
1137
utilize Do not use utilize as a long variant of use, which is the general
word for “employ for some purpose.” Use will almost always be
clearer and less pretentious. See affectation and plain
language.
1138
V
1139
vague words A vague word is one that is imprecise in the context in which it
is used. Be concrete and specific.
VAGUE It was a good meeting. [Why was it good?]
SPECIFIC The meeting resolved three questions: pay scales, fringe benefits, and workloads.
Some words are vague because they encompass a broad range
of meanings and interpretations (good, bad, real, nice,
important, thing, fine). See also abstract / concrete words and
word choice.
1140
verbals Verbals are verbs used as other parts of speech, such as nouns,
adjectives, and adverbs. Depending on their function in
sentences, verbals are identified as gerunds, infinitives, and
participles.
Gerunds A gerund is a verbal ending in -ing that is used as a noun. A
gerund can be used as a subject, a direct object, the object of a
preposition, a subjective complement, or an appositive.
► Budgeting is a useful managerial skill. [subject] ► I find budgeting difficult. [direct object] ► We were unprepared for their coming. [object of
preposition] ► Seeing is believing. [subjective complement] ► My primary departmental function, programming,
occupies about two-thirds of my time on the job. [appositive]
Only the possessive form of a noun or pronoun should precede
a gerund.
► John’s working has not affected his grades. ► His working has not affected his grades.
Infinitives An infinitive is the bare, or uninflected, form of a verb (go, run,
1141
fall, talk, dress, shout), without the restrictions imposed by
person and number. Along with the gerund and the participle,
it is one of the nonfinite verb forms. The infinitive is generally
preceded by the word to, which, although not an inherent part
of the infinitive, is considered to be the sign of an infinitive. An
infinitive is a verbal and can function as a noun, an adjective, or
an adverb.
► To expand is not the only objective. [noun] ► These are the instructions to follow. [adjective] ► The company struggled to survive. [adverb]
The infinitive can reflect two tenses: the present and (with a
helping verb) the present perfect.
► to go [present tense] ► to have gone [present perfect tense]
The most common mistake made with infinitives is using the
present perfect tense when the simple present tense is
sufficient.
Infinitives formed with the root form of transitive verbs can
express both active and (with a helping verb) passive voice.
► to hit [present tense, active voice] ► to have hit [present perfect tense, active voice] ► to be hit [present tense, passive voice]
1142
► to have been hit [present perfect tense, passive voice]
A split infinitive is one in which an adverb is placed between
the sign of the infinitive, to, and the infinitive itself. Because
they make up a grammatical unit, the infinitive and its sign are
better left intact than separated by an intervening adverb.
However, it may occasionally be better to split an infinitive than
to allow a sentence to become awkward, ambiguous, or
incoherent.
AMBIGUOUS She agreed immediately to deliver the specimen to the lab. [This sentence could be interpreted to mean that she agreed immediately.]
CLEAR She agreed to immediately deliver the specimen to the lab. [This sentence is no longer ambiguous.]
Participles A participle is a verb form that functions as an adjective.
Present participles end in -ing.
► Declining sales forced us to close one branch office.
Past participles end in -ed, -t, -en, -n, or -d.
► What are the estimated costs? ► Repair the bent lever. ► Return the broken part. ► What are the metal’s known properties?
1143
► The story, told many times before, was still interesting.
The perfect participle is formed with the present participle of
the helping verb have plus the past participle of the main verb.
► Having gotten [perfect participle] a large bonus, the smiling [present participle], contented [past participle] sales representative worked harder than ever.
A participle cannot be used as the verb of a sentence.
Inexperienced writers sometimes make that mistake, and the
result is a sentence fragment.
For information on participial and infinitive phrases, see
phrases.
1144
verbs DIRECTORY
Types of Verbs Forms of Verbs Properties of Verbs
A verb is a word or group of words that describes an action
(“The copier jammed at the beginning of the job”), states how
something or someone is affected by an action (“He was
disappointed that the proposal was rejected”), or affirms a state
of existence (“She is a district manager now”).
Types of Verbs Verbs are either transitive or intransitive. A transitive verb
requires a direct object to complete its meaning.
► They laid the foundation on October 26. [Foundation is the direct object of the transitive verb laid.]
► Rosalie Anderson wrote the treasurer a memo. [Memo is the direct object of the transitive verb wrote.]
An intransitive verb does not require an object to complete its
meaning. It makes a full assertion about the subject without
assistance (although it may have modifiers).
► The engine ran. ► The engine ran smoothly and quietly.
1145
A linking verb is an intransitive verb that links a complement to
the subject.
► The carpet is stained. [Is is a linking verb; stained is a subjective complement.]
Some intransitive verbs, such as be, become, seem, and appear,
are almost always linking verbs. A number of others, such as
look, sound, taste, smell, and feel, can function as either linking
verbs or simple intransitive or transitive verbs. If you are
unsure about whether one of those verbs is a linking verb, try
substituting seem; if the sentence still makes sense, the verb is
probably a linking verb.
► Their antennae feel delicate. [Seem can be substituted for feel — thus, feel is a linking verb.]
► Their antennae feel delicately for their prey. [Seem cannot be substituted for feel; in this case, feel is a simple intransitive verb.]
Forms of Verbs Verbs are described as being either finite or nonfinite.
Finite Verbs A finite verb is the main verb of a clause or sentence. It makes
an assertion about its subject and often serves as the only verb
in its clause or sentence. (“The telephone rang, and the
receptionist answered it.”) See also sentence construction.
1146
A helping verb (sometimes called an auxiliary verb) is used in
a verb phrase to help indicate mood, tense, and voice. (“The
phone had rung.”) Phrases that function as helping verbs are
often made up of combinations containing the sign of the
infinitive, to (for example, am going to, is about to, has to, and
ought to). The helping verb always precedes the main verb,
although other words may intervene. (“Machines will never
completely replace people.”)
Nonfinite Verbs Nonfinite verbs are verbals — verb forms that function as
nouns, adjectives, or adverbs.
A gerund is a noun that is derived from the ing form of a
verb. (“Seeing is believing.”) An infinitive, which uses the root
form of a verb (usually preceded by to), can function as a noun,
an adverb, or an adjective.
► He hates to complain. [noun, direct object of hates] ► The valve closes to stop the flow. [adverb, modifies closes] ► This is the proposal to consider. [adjective, modifies
proposal]
A participle is a verb form that can function as an adjective.
► The rejected proposal may be resubmitted when the client’s concerns are addressed. [Rejected is a verb form that is used as an adjective modifying proposal.]
1147
Properties of Verbs Verbs must (1) agree in person with personal pronouns
functioning as subjects, (2) agree in tense and number with
their subjects, and (3) be in the appropriate voice. See also
agreement.
Person is the term for the form of a personal pronoun that
indicates whether the pronoun refers to the speaker, the person
spoken to, or the person (or thing) spoken about. Verbs change
their forms to agree in person with their subjects.
► I see [first person] a yellow tint, but she sees [third person] a yellow-green hue.
Tense refers to verb forms that indicate time distinctions.
The six tenses are past, past perfect, present, present perfect,
future, and future perfect.
Number refers to the two forms of a verb that indicate
whether the subject of a verb is singular (“The copier was
repaired”) or plural (“The copiers were repaired”).
Most verbs show the singular of the present tense by adding -
s or -es (he stands, she works, it goes), and they show the plural
without -s or -es (they stand, we work, they go). The verb to be,
however, normally changes form to indicate the singular (“I am
ready”) or plural (“We are ready”).
Voice refers to the two forms of a verb that indicate whether
1148
the subject of the verb acts or receives the action. The verb is in
the active voice if the subject of the verb acts (“The bacteria grow”); the verb is in the passive voice if it receives the action
(“The bacteria are grown in a petri dish”).
1149
very The use of intensifiers like very is tempting, but the word can
usually be deleted.
When you do use intensifiers, clarify their meaning.
► Web sales were very strong; they were up 43 percent this month.
1150
via Via is Latin for “by way of.” The term should be used only in
routing instructions.
► The package was shipped via FedEx.
1151
visuals Visuals can express ideas or convey information in ways that
words alone cannot by making abstract concepts and
relationships concrete. Visuals can show how things look
(drawings, photographs, maps), represent numbers and
quantities (graphs, tables), depict processes or relationships
(flowcharts, Gantt charts, infographics, schematic diagrams),
and show hierarchical relationships (organizational charts).
They also highlight important information and emphasize key
concepts.
Many qualities of good writing — simplicity, clarity,
conciseness, directness — are equally important when creating
and using visuals. Presented with clarity and consistency,
visuals can help readers focus on key portions of your
document, presentation, or Web site. Be aware, though, that
even the best visual will not be effective without context, which
is often provided by the text that introduces the visual and
clarifies its purpose.
The following book entries are related to specific visuals and
their use in printed and online documents, as well as in
presentations (see that entry for presentation graphics).
drawings maps
flowcharts organizational charts
formal reports photographs
global graphics spreadsheets
1152
graphs tables
infographics writing for the Web
layout and design
Selecting Visuals Consider your audience and your purpose carefully in selecting
visuals. You would need different illustrations for an
automobile owner’s manual or an auto dealer’s Web site, for
example, than you would for a technician’s diagnostic guide.
Figure V–1 can help you select the most appropriate visuals,
based on their purposes and special features. Jot down visual
options as you consider your scope and organization.
1153
1154
1155
FIGURE V–1. Chart for Choosing Appropriate Visuals
ETHICS NOTE
Visuals have the potential for misleading readers when data are selectively omitted or distorted. For example, Figure G–8 (page 242) shows a graph that gives a misleading impression of investment returns because the scale is compressed, with some of the years selectively omitted. Visuals that mislead readers call the credibility of you and your organization into question — and they are unethical. The use of misleading visuals can even subject you and your organization to lawsuits.
Integrating Visuals with Text After selecting your visuals, carefully integrate them with your
text. The following guidelines will improve the effectiveness of
your visuals by describing how to position and identify them
consistently and uniformly.
Begin by considering the best locations for visuals during the
outlining stage of your draft. At appropriate points in your
outline, either make a rough sketch of the visual, if you can, or
write “illustration of . . . ,” noting the source of the visual and
enclosing each suggestion in a text box. You may also include
sketches of visuals in your thumbnail pages, as discussed in
layout and design. When writing a draft, place visuals as close
as possible to — but following — the text where they are
1156
discussed; in fact, no visual should precede its first text
mention. Refer to graphics (such as drawings and photographs)
as “figures” and to tables as “tables.” Clarify for readers why
each visual is included in the text. The amount of description
you should provide will vary, depending on your readers’
backgrounds. For example, nonexperts may require lengthier
explanations than experts need.
ETHICS NOTE
Obtain written permission to use copyrighted visuals in works that you intend to publish in print or online — including images and multimedia material from Web sites. Acknowledge all quoted or borrowed material in a source line below the caption for a figure and in a footnote at the bottom of a table. Use a site’s “Contact Us” page to request approval. Acknowledge your use of any material from the public domain (thus uncopyrighted), such as demographic or economic data from government publications and Web sites, with a source line. See also copyright, documenting sources, and plagiarism.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Creating and Integrating Visuals CREATING VISUALS
✓ Keep visuals simple. Include only information needed for discussion in the text, and eliminate unneeded labels, arrows, boxes, and lines.
✓ Position the lettering of any explanatory text or labels
1157
horizontally; allow adequate white space within and around the visual.
✓ Specify the units of measurement used, make sure relative sizes are clear, and indicate distance with a scale when appropriate.
✓ Use consistent terminology; for example, do not refer to the same information as a “proportion” in the text and a “percentage” in the visual.
✓ Define abbreviations the first time they appear in the text and in figures and tables. If any symbols are not self-explanatory, label them, as in Figure G–13 (page 246).
✓ Give each visual a caption or a concise title that clearly describes its content, and assign figure and table numbers if your document contains more than one illustration or table.
INTEGRATING VISUALS
✓ Clarify for readers why each visual is included in the text, and provide an appropriate description.
✓ Place visuals as close as possible to the text where they are discussed but always after their first text mention.
✓ Allow adequate white space around and within each illustration. ✓ Refer to visuals in the text of your document as “figures” or
“tables” and by their figure or table numbers. ✓ Consider placing lengthy or detailed visuals in an appendix,
which you refer to in the body of your document. ✓ In documents with more than five illustrations or tables, include a
section following the table of contents titled “List of Figures” or “List of Tables,” which identifies each by number, title, and page number.
✓ Follow the editorial guidelines or recommended style manual when preparing visuals for a publication.
1158
voice In grammar, voice indicates the relation of the subject to the
action of the verb. When the verb is in the active voice, the
subject acts; when it is in the passive voice, the subject is acted
upon.
ACTIVE David Cohen wrote the newsletter article. [The subject, David Cohen, performs the action; the verb, wrote, describes the action.]
PASSIVE The newsletter article was written by David Cohen. [The subject, the newsletter article, is acted upon; the verb, was written, describes the action.]
The two sentences say the same thing, but each has a different
emphasis: The first emphasizes the writer (David Cohen); the
second emphasizes what was written (the newsletter article). In
business writing, it is often important to emphasize who or
what performs an action. Further, the passive-voice version is
indirect because the performer of the action generally follows
the verb instead of preceding it. Because the active voice is
more direct, more concise, and easier for readers to
understand, use the active voice unless the passive voice is
more appropriate, as described on later in this section. Whether
you use the active voice or the passive voice, be careful not to
shift voices within a sentence.
Using the Active Voice 1159
Improving Clarity The active voice improves clarity and avoids confusion,
especially in instructions and policies and procedures.
PASSIVE Sections B and C should be checked for errors. [Have they been checked? Who should check them?]
ACTIVE Check sections B and C for errors. [The performer of the action, you, is understood: (You) Check the sections.]
Active voice can also help avoid dangling modifiers.
PASSIVE Hurrying to complete the work, the cables were connected improperly. [Who was hurrying? The implication is that the cables were hurrying.]
ACTIVE Hurrying to complete the work, the technician connected the cables improperly. [Here, hurrying to complete the work properly modifies the performer of the action: the technician.]
Highlighting Subjects One difficulty with passive sentences is that they can bury the
performer of the action within expletives and prepositional
phrases.
PASSIVE It was reported by the testing staff that the new model is defective.
ACTIVE The testing staff reported that the new model is defective.
Sometimes writers using the passive voice fail to name the
performer — information that might be missed.
PASSIVE The error was discovered yesterday.
ACTIVE The attending physician discovered the error yesterday.
Achieving Conciseness
1160
The active voice helps achieve conciseness because it
eliminates the need for an additional helping verb as well as an
extra preposition to identify the performer of the action.
PASSIVE Arbitrary changes in policy are resented by employees.
ACTIVE Employees resent arbitrary changes in policy.
The active-voice version takes one verb (resent); the passive-
voice version takes two verbs (are resented) and an extra
preposition (by).
Using the Passive Voice The passive voice is sometimes effective or even necessary.
Indeed, for reasons of tact and diplomacy, you might need to
use the passive voice to avoid an implied accusation.
ACTIVE Your staff did not meet the sales quota last month.
PASSIVE The sales quota was not met last month.
ETHICS NOTE
Be careful not to use the passive voice to evade responsibility or to obscure an issue or information that readers should know, as in the following examples.
► Several mistakes were made. [Who made the mistakes?] ► It has been decided. [Who has decided?]
See also ethics in writing.
1161
When the performer of the action is either unknown or
unimportant, use the passive voice. (“The copper mine was
discovered in 1929.”) When the performer of the action is less
important than the receiver of that action, the passive voice is
sometimes more appropriate. (“Ann Bryant was presented with
a Sales Award by the president.”) Even in such cases, another
verb may enable you to use the active voice. (“Ann Bryant
received a Sales Award from the president.”)
When you explain an operation in which the reader is not
actively involved or when you describe a process or a
procedure, the passive voice may be more appropriate. In the
following example, anyone — it really does not matter who —
could be the performer of the action.
► Area strip mining is used in regions of flat to gently rolling terrain, like that found in the Midwest. Depending on applicable reclamation laws, the topsoil may be removed from the area to be mined, stored, and later reapplied as surface material during reclamation of the mined land. After the removal of the topsoil, a trench is cut through the overburden to expose the upper surface of the coal to be mined. The overburden from the first cut is placed on the unmined land adjacent to the cut. After the first cut has been completed, the coal is removed.
Do not, however, simply assume that any such explanation
should be in the passive voice; in fact, as in the following
example, the active voice is often more effective.
1162
► In the operation of an internal combustion engine, an explosion in the combustion chamber forces the pistons down in the cylinders. The movement of the pistons in the cylinders turns the crankshaft.
Ask yourself, “Would it be of any advantage to the reader to
know the performer of the action?” If the answer is yes, use the
active voice.
1163
W
1164
wait for / wait on Wait on should refer to the activities of hospitality and service
employees. (“We need extra staff to wait on customers.”)
Otherwise, use wait for. (“Be sure to wait for Ms. Garcia’s
approval.”) See also idioms.
1165
Web design (see writing for the Web)
1166
when / where / that When and if (or if and when) is a colloquial expression that
should not be used in writing.
In phrases using the where ... at construction, at is unnecessary
and should be omitted.
Do not substitute where for that to anticipate an idea or a fact to
follow.
1167
whether Whether communicates the notion of a choice. The use of
whether or not to indicate a choice between alternatives is often
redundant.
The phrase as to whether is clumsy and redundant. Either use
whether alone or omit it altogether.
1168
while While, meaning “during an interval of time,” is sometimes
substituted for connectives like and, but, although, and
whereas. Used as a connective in that way, while often causes
ambiguity.
Do not use while to mean although or whereas.
Restrict while to its meaning of “during the time that.”
► I’ll have to catch up on my reading while I am on vacation.
1169
who / whom Who is a subjective case pronoun, and whom is the objective
case form of who. When in doubt about which form to use,
substitute a personal pronoun to see which one fits. If he, she,
or they fits, use who.
► Who is the training coordinator? [You would say, “She is the training coordinator.”]
If him, her, or them fits, use whom.
► It depends on whom? [You would say, “It depends on them.”]
1170
who’s / whose / of which Who’s is the contraction of who is. (“Who’s scheduled today?”)
Whose is the possessive case of who. (“Consider whose budget
should be cut.”)
Normally, whose is used with persons, and of which is used
with inanimate objects.
► The employee whose car had been towed away was angry. ► The report recommended over 100 changes, more than
half of which the client approved.
If of which causes a sentence to sound awkward, whose may be
used with inanimate objects. (Compare: “The business the
profits of which steadily declined” versus “The business whose
profits steadily declined.”)
1171
word choice Mark Twain once said, “The difference between the almost
right word and the right word is . . . the difference between the
lightning-bug and the lightning.” The most important goal in
choosing the right word in business writing is the preciseness
implied by Twain’s comment. Vague words and abstract words
defeat preciseness because they do not convey the writer’s
meaning directly and clearly.
VAGUE It was a productive meeting.
PRECISE The meeting resulted in the approval of the health-care benefits package.
In the first sentence, productive sounds specific but conveys
little information; the revised sentence says specifically what
made the meeting “productive.” Although abstract words may at
times be appropriate to your topic, using them unnecessarily
will make your writing difficult to understand. See abstract /
concrete words.
Being aware of the connotations and denotations of words
will help you anticipate reactions of your audience to the words
you choose. (See connotation / denotation.) Understanding
antonyms (fresh/stale) and synonyms (notorious/infamous)
will increase your ability to choose the proper word. Make other
usage decisions carefully, especially in technical contexts, such
as average / median / mean and biannual / biennial.
1172
Although many entries throughout this book will help you
improve your word choices and avoid impreciseness, the
following entries should be particularly helpful:
affectation euphemisms
biased language idioms
buzzwords jargon
clichés logic errors
conciseness vague words
A key to choosing the correct and precise word is to keep
current in your reading and to be aware of new words in your
profession and in the language. In your quest for the right word,
use a reputable and current dictionary. See also English as a
second language and plain language.
1173
writing a draft You are well prepared to write a rough draft when you have
established your purpose and readers’ needs, considered the
context, defined your scope, completed adequate research,
and prepared an outline (whether rough or developed). (See
also audience and outlining.) Writing a draft is simply
transcribing and expanding the notes from your outline into
paragraphs, without worrying about grammar, refinements of
language, or spelling. Refinement will come with revision and
proofreading. See also “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”
Writing and revising are different activities. Do not let
worrying about a good opening slow you down. Instead,
concentrate on your ideas — now is not the time to polish or
revise. Do not wait for inspiration — treat writing a draft as you
would any other on-the-job task.
WRITER’S CHECKLIST
Writing a Rough Draft
✓ Resist the temptation of writing first drafts without planning. ✓ Use an outline (rough or developed) as a springboard to start and
to write quickly. ✓ Give yourself a set time in which you write continuously,
regardless of how good or bad your writing seems to be. But don’t stop if you are rolling along easily — keep your momentum.
✓ Start with the section that seems easiest. Your readers will neither know nor care which section was written first.
1174
✓ Keep in mind your readers’ needs, expectations, and knowledge of the subject. Doing so will help you write directly to your readers and suggest which ideas need further development.
✓ When you come to something difficult to explain, try to relate the new concept to something familiar to readers, as discussed in figures of speech.
✓ Routinely save your draft to your local drive, a company network, an external hard drive, or the cloud.
✓ Give yourself a small reward — a short walk, a snack, a brief chat with a friend, an easy task — after you have finished a section.
✓ When you return to your writing, reread what you have written. Doing so can return you to a productive frame of mind.
1175
writing for the Web This entry is intended to help you contribute content for your
company’s or organization’s Web site. For questions about the
appropriateness of content you plan to post, check with your
Webmaster or manager to determine if your content complies
with your organization’s Web policy. On campus, consult your
instructor or campus computer support staff about standards
for posting Web content. See also blogs and forums, content
management, and FAQs.
Crafting Content for Your Site Most readers scan Web pages for specific information, so state
your important points first, before providing detailed
supporting information. Keep your writing style
straightforward and concise, and use plain language as much
as possible. Use the following techniques to make your content
more accessible to your audience. See also conciseness.
Text Content Break up dense blocks of text by dividing them into short
paragraphs so that they stand out and can be quickly scanned
and absorbed. Focus each passage on one facet of your topic.
Where necessary, include links to more detailed secondary
information.
Headings Use informative topic headings for paragraphs or sections to
1176
help readers decide at a glance whether to read a passage.
Headings also clarify text by highlighting structure and
organization. They signal breaks in coverage from one topic to
the next as well as mark transitions between topics. Set off
headings in boldface or another text style, such as a different
color, on a separate line directly above the text they describe, or
in the left margin directly across from the text. See also layout
and design.
Lists Use bulleted and numbered lists to break up dense paragraphs,
reduce text length, and highlight important content. Do not
overuse lists, however. Lists without supporting explanatory
text lack coherence.
Keywords To help search engines and your audience find your site, use
terms that highlight content in the first 50 or so words of text for
each new topic.
WITHOUT KEYWORDS
We are proud to introduce a new commemorative coin honoring our bank’s founder and president. The item will be available on this Web site after December 3, 2018, which is the 100th anniversary of our first deposit.
WITH KEYWORDS
The new Reynolds commemorative coin features a portrait of George G. Reynolds, the founder and president of Reynolds Bank. The coin can be purchased after December 3, 2018, in honor of the 100th anniversary of Reynolds’s first deposit.
For more about search engine optimization (SEO), Google
AdWords, and Internet marketing tools, visit
1177
moz.com/beginners-guide-to-seo.
Directional Cues Avoid navigational cues, such as “on the next page,” that make
sense on the printed page but not online. Instead, position links
so that they are tied directly to the content to which they
pertain, such as the Back to Top links on pages that are several
screens long.
Graphics Graphics provide information that text alone cannot; they also
provide visual relief. Use only visuals that are appropriate for
your audience and purpose. Avoid overusing complex graphs
and animation that can clutter or slow access to your site. Work
with the site Webmaster to optimize all graphics for speed of
access. Ask about the preferred file-compression format for
your visuals. Also consider giving visitors a graphics-free option
for quicker access to your content.
Fonts Font sizes and styles affect screen legibility. Because screens
display fonts at lower resolutions compared to printed text, sans
serif fonts often work better for online text passages. Do not use
ALL CAPITAL LETTERS or boldface type for blocks of text,
because they slow the reader. For content that contains special
characters (such as mathematical or chemical content), consult
your Webmaster about the best way to submit the files for
HTML (hypertext markup language) coding, or post them as
1178
portable document format (PDF) files.
Using Links Use internal links to help readers navigate the information on
your site. If text is longer than two or three screens, create a
table of contents of links at the top of the Web page, and link
each item to the relevant content further down the page. Use
external links to enrich coverage of your topic with information
from outside your site and to help reduce content on your page.
When you do, consider placing an icon or a text label next to the
link to inform users that they are leaving the host site. Avoid too
many links within text paragraphs because they can distract
readers, make scanning the text difficult, and tempt readers to
leave your site before reaching the end of your page.
Links to outside sites can expand your content. However,
review such sites carefully before linking to them. Is the site’s
author or sponsoring organization reputable? Is its content
accurate, current, and unbiased? Does the site date-stamp its
content with notices such as, “This page was last updated on
January 1, 2018”? Link directly to the page or specific area of an
outside site that is relevant to your users, and be sure that you
provide a clear context for why you are sending your readers
there. For more advice on evaluating Web sites, see page 461.
Posting an Existing Document If you post an existing document to a Web site, try to retain the
1179
original sequence and layout of the document. If, for example,
you shorten or revise an existing document for posting to the
Web, add a notice informing readers how it differs from the
original.
Before posting the document publicly, review it offline to
ensure that it is the correct version and that all links work and
go to the right places. Consider creating a “single-file version”
of the content (a version formatted as a single, long Web page)
for readers who will print the content to read offline. See also
proofreading and repurposing.
Convert documents such as reports, flyers, and brochures to
PDF files to make sure your electronic documents look identical
to your printed documents. Readers can view a PDF file online,
download it, or print it in whole or in part. Using specialized
PDF software, you can create sophisticated forms, add
signatures and watermarks to documents, and password-
protect sensitive files.
ETHICS NOTE
Keep a record of how and where you find content online, be it text, images, tables, streaming video, or other material. Seek approval from the copyright holder before using any such information. Besides being legally—and ethically—required, documenting your sources bolsters the credibility of your site. To document your sources, either provide links to your source or use a citation, as described in documenting sources. See also copyrights, patents, and trademarks and
1180
plagiarism.
Protecting User Privacy Ensure that your content is consistent with your site’s privacy
policies for site users. A site’s privacy statement informs visitors
about how the site sponsor handles solicited and unsolicited
information, its policy on the use of cookies, and its policy on
handling security breaches.
Writing for a Global Audience When you write for an international audience, eliminate
expressions and references that make sense only to someone
familiar with American English. Express dates, clock times, and
measurements consistent with international practices. For
visuals, choose symbols and icons, colors, representations of
human beings, and captions that can be easily understood, as
described in global communication and global graphics. See
also biased language, English as a second language, and
idioms.
1181
Y
1182
“you” viewpoint The “you” viewpoint places the reader’s interest and perspective
foremost. It is based on the principle that most readers are
naturally more concerned about their own needs than they are
about those of a writer or a writer’s organization. See audience
and persuasion.
Using the words you and your rather than we, our, I, and
mine can help convey the “you” viewpoint. Consider the
following sentence.
► We must receive your signed approval before we can process your payment.
Even though the sentence uses your twice, the words in italics
suggest that the point of view centers on the writer’s need to
receive the signed approval in order to process the payment.
(See also refusal letters.) Consider the following revision,
written with the “you” viewpoint.
► So you can receive your payment promptly, please send your signed approval.
In some instances, you may need to avoid using the
pronouns you and your to achieve a positive tone and maintain
goodwill. Notice how the first of the following examples (with
your) seems to accuse the reader; the second (without your)
uses positive writing to emphasize a shared goal— meeting the
1183
client’s needs.
ACCUSATORY Your budget makes no allowance for setup costs.
POSITIVE The budget should include an allowance for setup costs to meet all the concerns of our client.
By considering the readers’ interests as you write, you can
achieve your purpose not only in correspondence but also in
proposals, reports, and presentations.
1184
your / you’re Your is a possessive pronoun (“your wallet”); you’re is the
contraction of you are (“You’re late for the meeting”).
1185
Index Words and phrases in bold type indicate main alphabetical
entries. Usage terms appear in italic type.
a / an, 1, 42–43 a few / few, 190 a lot, 1 a while / awhile, 46 abbreviations, 2–5
a / an, use with, 1 acronyms and initialisms, 2, 3, 10 audience and, 2 capitalization of, 68 commas with, 89 in e-mail, 2, 169 in figures and tables, 542 in instant messaging and live chat, 2, 263 in international correspondence, 273 italics with, 289 of Latin words, 4–5, 166–67, 179 list of, in reports, 201 for measurements, 3–4 for names and titles, 4 for organization names, 3 periods with, 3, 376 and plain language, 386 plurals of, 3, 36 postal, 312 scholarly, 4–5
1186
spelling out, 2–3, 183 in tables, 516 in titles of works, 524 writer’s checklist for, 2–3
above, 5 absolutely, 5 absolute phrases, 86 absolute words, 13–14, 178 abstract / concrete words, 5–6
ethics in writing and, 180 figures of speech and, 191 gobbledygook and, 235 and word choice, 549–50
abstract nouns, 24, 350 abstracts, 6–8
vs. executive summaries, 182 in formal reports, 200, 205 in grant proposals, 237–38 samples of, 7, 205
Academia.edu, 358, 360 academic titles, 4 accept / except, 8 acceptances / refusals (for employment), 8–9. See also employment process
professionalism and, 8 samples of, 9
accident reports. See trouble reports accordingly. See conjunctive adverbs accuracy. See also proofreading
in correspondence, 117, 168
1187
in executive summaries, 182–83 of instructions, 266 in minutes of meetings, 333 in note-taking, 350 in résumés, 467
accusative case. See objective case acknowledgments, 10
form letters for, 196–97 sample of, 10
acronyms and initialisms, 2, 3, 10. See also abbreviations action verbs
pronoun case and, 69 in résumés, 481
active listening, 317–18 active voice, 543–45. See also voice
for clarity, 544 for conciseness, 99, 545 for emphasis, 173 in formal style, 511 infinitives and, 534 for instructions, 264 naming the actor, 538, 543 for plain language, 386 in sentence construction, 494
activity reports. See progress and activity reports actually, 447 ad hoc, 10 adapt / adept / adopt, 11 adapting to new technologies, 11
for forms, 224
1188
for infographics, 258–60 for layout and design, 311 for presentations, 399 for research, 460 for résumés, 482–83 for revision, 98
addresses, e-mail, 169, 478 addresses, street
commas with, 88 in letters, 312 numbers in, 355 in résumés, 478
addresses, Web. See URLs adept / adopt / adapt, 11 adjective clauses, 15, 176 adjectives, 12–15. See also adverbs; modifiers
absolute words, 13–14 articles as, 12, 42 commas with, 14, 87–88 comparison of, 13–14 with count nouns, 174 demonstrative, 12–13, 175 descriptive, 12 gerunds as, 537 in idioms, 394 indefinite, 13 infinitives as, 534 irregular, 13 limiting, 12, 42 as modifiers, 338
1189
nouns as, 14, 351, 391 numbers as, 13 order for, 15 participles as, 535, 537 phrases as, 381 placement of, 14 possessive, 13, 175 relative, 98 types of, 12–13 verbals as, 533 verbs as, 15, 499
adjustment messages, 15–18 context in, 104 professionalism and, 18 samples of, 16–17
Adobe PDF files, 482, 552 adopt / adapt / adept, 11 advanced search, 458 adverbs, 18–20. See also adjectives; modifiers
commas with, 19, 87 comparison of, 20 conjunctive, 19 gerunds as, 537 in idioms, 394 infinitives as, 534 intensifiers, 267, 339 irregular, 20 as modifiers, 338 nouns as, 351 numbers as, 13
1190
phrases as, 381 placement of, 20 with prepositions, 394 and split infinitives, 534–35 types of, 19 verbals as, 533
advertisements, job, 297–98 advertising. See promotional writing affect / effect, 20 affectation, 21
abbreviations and, 2 allusions and, 29 buzzwords as, 64 ethics in writing and, 21 foreign words as, 21, 196 formal style as, 110, 511 as gobbledygook, 235 legal terms as, 122 nominalizations as, 348 wordiness as, 98
affinity, 21 aforementioned, 5 aforesaid, 5, 21 agenda, for meetings, 326–27
sample of, 327 agreement, 22–27. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement; subject-verb agreement
in gender, 22, 25–26, 227, 413 in number, 22, 26–27, 352–53, 413–14 in person, 22, 537–38
1191
of pronoun and antecedent, 22, 25–27, 414 of subject and verb, 22–24, 494, 537–38 with this / that / these / those, 12–13
aircraft, italics for names of, 289 all ready / already, 27 all right, 28 all together / altogether, 28 all-capital letters. See also capitalization
in e-mail, 169 for emphasis, 173, 308–9 in Web design, 552
allegedly / supposedly, 27 allude / elude / refer, 28 allusion / illusion, 28 allusions, 28–29, 273 alot / a lot, 1 already / all ready, 27 alright / all right, 28 also, 29 altogether / all together, 28 ambiguity, 29–30
commas for preventing, 85 incomplete comparisons, 30 misplaced modifiers, 30, 339–40 prepositional phrases and, 381–82 in pronoun references, 29, 409 in telegraphic writing, 519 using that for, 522 word choice and, 30, 75
American Psychological Association. See APA documentation
1192
AmeriCorps, 300 among / between, 48 amount / number, 30 ampersands, 30–31
in APA citations, 136 in company names, 3, 30–31
an. See a / an analogy, 191
definition by, 124 in description, 128
and both . . . , 53, 102 commas with, 85, 90 with etc., 179 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 27 subject-verb agreement with, 25
and/or, 31 anecdotes, 285 annotated bibliography, 51 annual reports, 31–35
design of, 34 mission statements in, 335–38 sections in, 31–33 titles for, 523 writer’s checklist for, 35
anonymous. See unknown authors antecedents. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement
compound, 27 implied, 410 pronouns and, 410, 414
1193
references to, 29, 410 antonyms, 35
in thesaurus, 523 word choice and, 549
anxiety, presentation, 402–3 APA documentation, 133–42. See also documenting sources
for articles in periodicals, 138 for books, 137–38 documentation models, 137–40 for electronic sources, 147–50 in-text citations, 136–37 for miscellaneous sources, 139 for multimedia sources, 138–40 sample pages, 141–42
apologies. See adjustment messages apostrophes, 35–36
in contractions, 35, 105 showing possession, 35, 70, 391
appendixes, 36 for business plans, 61 for formal reports, 202 for grant proposals, 240 for proposals, 418, 423 visuals in, 543
applicant tracking systems (ATSs), 482 application cover letters, 36–41. See also application genres
professionalism and, 37 résumés and, 466 samples of, 38–40
application forms, 301
1194
application genres, 301–3. See also job search ethics in writing and, 302, 303 writer’s checklist for, 302
appositives, 42 capitalization of, 67 case of, 42, 70, 412 commas with, 86 gerunds as, 533–34 nouns as, 351
arguments, loaded, 322 articles (a / an / the), 42–43
a / an, 1, 42–43 count nouns with, 175 definite, 42–43 indefinite, 1, 42–43 telegraphic style and, 518 the, 42
articles in periodicals (print and electronic). See also newsletter articles; periodicals
abstracts of, 6–8 APA documentation of, 138 capitalization in titles of, 67, 102 CMS documentation of, , 146–47, 148 databases and indexes for, 458–59 evaluating, 462 MLA documentation of, 138, 139 quotation marks for titles of, 443, 525
as / because / since, 43–44 as / like, 316 as much as / more than, 44
1195
as such, 44 as / than, and pronoun case, 69, 71 as to whether, 548 as well as, 44 ASCII résumés, 482–83 assure / insure / ensure, 267 attachments
e-mail, 169, 171 for grant proposals, 240
attributive adjectives, 14 audience, 44–46
abbreviations and, 2–3 for abstracts, 7 appropriate language for, 385–86 assessing, xviii–xix, 45, 109–10, 393 for brochures, 55 for business plans, 59–60 for correspondence, 109–10 defining terms for, 45, 124, 234–35 drafting and, 550 global, 228–29 goodwill and, 111–13 for instructions, 264 layout and design and, 306 multiple, 45–46, 60 for newsletters, 347 online professional profiles, 358, 360 pace and, 268 for presentations, 396 for promotional writing, 409
1196
for proposals, 416–17 revision and, 484 for sales letters, 486 selecting the medium for, 488–89 for social media, 505 tone and, 526 usage and, 531 for visuals, 539 for Web content, 551 writing style and, 109–10, 510 “you” viewpoint for, 554
augment / supplement, 46 author-date method of documentation. See APA documentation authors, documenting. See corporate authors; multiple authors; unknown authors auxiliary verbs. See helping verbs average / median / mean, 46 awhile / a while, 46 awkwardness, 47
writer’s checklist for, 47 back matter, for formal reports, 202 background
in business plans, 61 in formal reports, 200 opening with, 284 in résumés, 472, 476–77
bad / badly, 48 bad-news patterns
in correspondence, 115, 269 cultural differences in, 269
1197
positive writing and, 390 for refusals, 8, 449–52 for resignation letters, 463 samples of, 115
balance / remainder, 48 bar graphs. See graphs barely, 161 basis
of classification, 130 of comparison, 92
bcc: notations, 171, 315 because / since / as, 43–44 because, reason is, 447 because of / due to, 165, 185 behavior during interviews, 279 beside / besides, 48 between / among, 48 between you and me, 49, 394 bi- / semi-, 49 biannual / biennial, 49 biased evidence, 321 biased language, 49–50. See also sexist language
ethics in writing and, 180–81 professionalism and, 50
bibliographies, 50–51. See also documenting sources abbreviations in, 3 annotated, 51 in CMS style, 134, 143–44, 153 in formal reports, 202 for research, 459
1198
sample, 153 biennial / biannual, 49 bifold brochure, 56–57 bilingual writers. See English as a second language blind-copy notations (bcc:), 171, 315 block quotations
APA style for, 136–37, 446 MLA style for, 154
blogs and forums, 51–53. See also writing for the Web APA documentation of, 139 CMS documentation of, 149 MLA documentation of, 157 ethics in writing and, 53 functions of, 51–53, 492 social media and, 504 subject lines of, 524
board of directors, in annual report, 33 body
of application cover letters, 41 of feasibility reports, 189–90 of formal reports, 201–2, 212–16 of grant proposals, 238–39 of letters, 314–15 of presentations, 397–98 of proposals, 418 of reports, 454 of tables, 516
body depictions, for global graphics, 233 body movement, in presentations, 402, 403 boilerplate material, 106–7, 422
1199
boldface. See also typography for emphasis, 173, 309 in Web design, 552
books APA documentation of, 137–38 capitalization in titles of, 67, 102 catalogs for, 458 CMS documentation of, 144–46 evaluating, 462 italics for titles of, 289–90, 443, 524 MLA documentation of, 155–56
both . . . and, 53, 102 both / as well as, 44 box heads, in tables, 516 boxes
in forms, 222 for organizational charts, 364 in page design, 311
brackets, 53–54 for parenthetical items, 54, 374 in quotations, 445 with sic, 54, 445
brainstorming, 54–55 for job searching, 293 for mission statements, 337 during presentations, 399 for research, 456 for résumés, 477 sample of, 55
brand, personal, 295, 297
1200
brochures, 55–59 APA documentation of, 140 bifold, 56–57 CMS documentation of, 151 designing, 56–57 italics for titles of, 287, 524 MLA documentation of, 158 repurposed content for, 454–55 with sales letters, 487 samples of, 57–58 trifold, 56 writer’s checklist for, 58–59
budget, in proposals, 239 buffer, for bad news, 114, 449 bulleted lists. See lists business description, in business plans, 60–61 business letters. See correspondence; letters business names. See organization names business plans, 59–64 business writing style, 63, 184. See also style
contractions and, 105 ethics in writing and, 63 formal and informal, 510–12 plain language and, 385–86 standard vs. nonstandard English, 177
but, comma with, 85, 90 buzzwords, 64
as affectation, 21 as gobbledygook, 235
callouts. See labels
1201
campus career services, 296 can / may, 65 cannot, 65 capital / capitol, 65 capitalization, 65–68. See also all-capital letters
of abbreviations, 68 of adjectives of origin, 15 after colons, 66, 83 of complimentary closings, 66, 315 after dashes, 120 of events and concepts, 67 of group names, 66 in lists, 320 of organization names, 67 of place names, 66–67 of professional and personal titles, 67 of proper nouns, 66, 350 in quotations, 66, 444–45 of salutations, 66 in sentences, 66 in subject lines, 67, 117 of titles of works, 67, 524
capitol / capital, 65 captions, with visuals, 311, 380 cardinal numbers, 13, 121 career counselors, 296 case, 68–71, 412–13
agreement and, 22 of appositives, 42, 70, 412 objective, 69–70, 412–13
1202
possessive, 70, 391–92, 412 subjective, 69, 412 tests for determining, 42, 70–71, 413
case histories, 487 case statement, in grant proposals, 238 catalog, library, 458 categories
for blogs and forums, 51–53 for FAQs, 186
cause definition by, 125 false, 72, 321
cause-and-effect method of development, 71–73, 331 cc: notations, 169, 171, 315–16 cell phones, 490, 522 center on, 73 centuries, format for writing, 121–22 chalkboards, 399 channel, 488. See also selecting the medium chapters and sections
in annual reports, 32–33 in business plans, 60 capitalization in titles of, 68 in feasibility reports, 188–90 in formal reports, 200–2 in grant proposals, 236–40 numbers for, 355 quotation marks for titles of, 289, 443, 525 in résumés, 478–82 in sales proposals, 421–23
1203
in tables of contents, 200 charts. See also visuals
in annual reports, 34 flowcharts, 193–95, 541 organizational, 364, 541 in presentations, 399, 401 for procedures, 389–90
chat sessions, online, 79. See also instant messaging and live chat check boxes, in forms, 222–23 checklist of the writing process, xxv–xxvi. See also writer’s checklists Chicago Manual of Style (CMS). See CMS documentation choppy writing, 499 chronological method of development, 73, 331
sample of, 74 chunking. See paragraphs circular definitions, 123 circumlocution, 98 citation management software, 458–59 citations, in-text. See also documenting sources
APA style, 134, 136–37, 141 CMS style, 134–35, 143–44 in formal proposals, 418 in grant proposals, 238 MLA style, 135, 154, 159 sample pages, 141, 152–53, 159
cite / sight / site, 73 claims
adjustment messages for, 15–18
1204
in complaint message, 94–95 clarity, 75
active voice for, 544 in business writing style, 63 commas for, 88 conciseness and, 63, 75, 97–99 in correspondence, 116–17 defining terms for, 122–23, 124 grammar and, 236 hyphens for, 252 in instructions, 264–65 plain language for, 385–86 semicolons for, 493 transitions for, 527–29 word choice and, 549
classification, 130–32. See also division-and-classification method of development
sample of, 131 clauses, 75–76. See also dependent clauses; independent clauses; sentence construction
adjective, 176 commas with, 85 missing subjects in, 497 restrictive and nonrestrictive, 465–66
clichés, 76–77 and figures of speech, 191 as gobbledygook, 235 in résumés, 479
climactic order, for emphasis, 172 clip-art images, 164
1205
closed-ended questions, 223–24 closings. See also conclusions
for adjustment messages, 18 for application cover letters, 41 for bad-news letters, 114–15 for correspondence, 110–11, 315 for e-mail, 169–70 for international correspondence, 269, 273 for meetings, 330 for presentations, 398 for refusals, 452
cloud computing, 483 clustering, 54–55
sample of, 55 CMS documentation, 134, 143–53. See also documenting sources
for articles in periodicals, 146–47 for books, 144–46 documentation models, 144–51 for electronic sources, 147–50 footnotes and endnotes, 135–36, 143–44, 150 for miscellaneous sources, 150–51 for multimedia sources, 147–50 sample pages, 152–53
coherence, 77 clarity and, 75 outlining and, 365 in paragraphs, 371 plain language and, 385–86 pronoun references and, 410–11 unity and, 531
1206
collaborative writing, 77–79 brainstorming and, 54–55 coherence in, 77–78 conflict and, 78 outlining for, 365 professionalism and, 78–79 for proposals, 416, 421 purpose in, 435 reviewing, xxiii, 78 schedule for, 243, 244 team tasks in, 77–79 technology for, 79 wikis for, 79 writer’s checklist for, 79
collection letters, 79–82 form letters for, 197 samples of, 80–81
collective nouns, 350 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 26, 351 subject-verb agreement with, 24, 351
colloquialisms in informal writing, 511 as nonstandard English, 177 quotation marks and, 443
colons, 82–84 capitalization after, 66, 83 in citations, 82–83 for enumeration, 493 before lists, 82, 84, 320 with numbers, 82–83
1207
with quotation marks, 83, 444 in salutations, 82–83, 312, 314 in sentences, 82 in titles, 82–83 unnecessary, 83–84
color in brochures, 59 in global graphics, 232, 234 in graphs, 243 in maps, 325 in page design, 310
column graphs. See graphs columns
in newsletters, 347 page design for, 310 in tables, 516–17
commands, 264, 340. See also imperative mood comma splice, 84, 485 commas, 84–90
with addresses, 88 with adjectives, 14, 87 for clarifying, 88 in compound sentences, 495 with conjunctive adverbs, 19, 89 for contrasting, 88 with dashes, 120 in dates, 88, 121 for enclosing elements, 85–86, 120 with interjections, 268 for introducing elements, 86–87
1208
for items in series, 87–88, 90 for linking clauses, 19, 85, 89 with names, 89 with nonrestrictive elements, 465–66 with numbers, 88–89 for omissions, 88 with other punctuation, 89 with parentheses, 374 with quotation marks, 87, 376, 444 unnecessary, 90
common knowledge, 385 common / mutual, 341 common nouns, 66, 350 communication
global, 228–32, 268–73 listening, 317–18 nonverbal, 402 selecting the medium for, xviii, 488–92 social media for, 504–7
company description and strategy, in business plans, 60–61 comparative form
absolute words and, 13–14, 178 of adjectives, 13–14 of adverbs, 20
compare / contrast, 90–91 comparison, 91
with absolute words, 13–14, 178 basis of, 92 incomplete, 30 like and as for, 316
1209
comparison method of development, 91–93, 331 samples of, 92–93
complaint message, 94–95. See also adjustment messages; refusals
sample of, 94 complement / compliment, 95 complements, 95–96. See also objective complements; subjective complements
linking verbs and, 536 sentence construction and, 494 types of, 96 verbals as, 176
complex sentences, 172, 494 compliment / complement, 95 complimentary closings, 66, 315 components, definition by, 125 compose / constitute / comprise, 96 compound sentences, 172, 495 compound words, 97
antecedents, 27 case of, 412–13 commas with, 90 hyphens for, 97, 251 plurals of, 97, 352 possessive, 97, 391 predicates, 90 pronoun case and, 70–71 subjects, 493 subject-verb agreement with, 24–25
compound-complex sentences, 495
1210
comprise / compose / constitute, 96 computer technologies. See adapting to new technologies conciseness, 97–99. See also wordiness
in abstracts, 8 active voice for, 545 in blogs and forums, 52 in brochures, 56 clarity and, 63, 75 in executive summaries, 182–83 functional shifts and, 225 in instructions, 264 in international correspondence, 268–69 in minutes of meetings, 333 overdoing, 2, 98 subordination for, 513 telegraphic style, 518–19 writer’s checklist for, 98–99 “you” viewpoint and, 110
conclusions, 99–102. See also closings in abstracts, 6–8 false, 72 for feasibility reports, 190 for formal reports, 201, 217–18 for grant proposals, 239 in incident reports, 256 for newsletter articles, 346 for progress reports, 406 for proposals, 418, 423, 433 for reports, 454 samples of, 100, 217–18, 433
1211
summary of, 284 for trip reports, 529
concrete nouns, 350 concrete words. See abstract / concrete words conditional statements, 513 conference calls, 491 confidentiality
blogs and forums and, 52 e-mail and, 168 forms and, 220, 222 instant messaging and live chat, 263
conflict in collaborative writing, 78 in meetings, 329–30
conjugation of verbs, 538 conjunctions, 102–3. See also coordinating conjunctions; correlative conjunctions; subordinating conjunctions
and subject-verb agreement, 24 telegraphic style and, 518 types of, 102–3
conjunctive adverbs for comma splices, 84 commas with, 19, 89 in compound sentences, 495 for linking clauses, 19, 75–76, 103 list of common, 19, 89, 103 for run-on sentences, 377 semicolons with, 19, 492
connotation / denotation, 103 of synonyms, 515, 523
1212
of visuals, 232–33 word choice and, 549
consensus, 103 consequently. See conjunctive adverbs consistency
in document naming, 133 in format, 415 in repetition, 453 in résumés, 466–67, 482 for visuals, 401, 542 in voice, mood, tense, 521
constitute / comprise / compose, 96 contacts, personal and professional
lists of, 263 networking and, 296
content management, 454–55 context, 103–5
and adapting to new technologies, 11 in application cover letters, 41 assessing, xviii–xix, 104–5, 393 in bad-news patterns, 114–16 design and, 306 in forewords, 200 for form letters, 197 in formal reports, 200 global communication and, 228–29 global graphics and, 232 listening and, 317 for mission statements, 335–38 online professional profiles, 360
1213
in openings, 105, 117 for proposals, 103–4, 416 purpose and, 435 in refusals, 450 repurposing for, 197, 455 scope and, 487 selecting the medium and, 488–92 signaling, 105 for social media, 505 style and, 510 tone and, 526 for visuals, 232–33, 539
continual / continuous, 105 continuing pages
for letters, 316 for press releases, 403 for tables, 517
continuous / continual, 105 contractions, 105
apostrophes in, 35, 105 in global communication, 269, 273
contrast commas for, 88 dashes for, 120
contrast / compare, 90–91 conversational style, 63
in blogs and forums, 51–53 in correspondence, 109 in informal writing, 511–12 nonstandard English, 177–78
1214
cookies, 553 co-ops. See internships and co-ops coordinate nouns, possessive case of, 392 coordinate series, 87 coordinating conjunctions, 102
for comma splices, 84 commas with, 85, 90 in compound sentences, 495 for linking clauses, 75–76, 85, 102 list of, 85, 102 for run-on sentences, 377 semicolons with, 493 in subordination, 513–14
copy notations (cc:, bcc:), 169, 171, 315–16 copyleft Web material, 107, 384 copyrights, patents, and trademarks, 106–9. See also documenting sources
alternative forms of, 107 ethics in writing and, 53, 106, 107, 180 exceptions to, 106–7 permissions and, 106–7, 201 plagiarism and, 384–85 repurposing and, 107, 455–56 for visuals, 164, 380, 542
corporate authors APA documentation of, 137, 139 CMS documentation of, 145, 148 MLA documentation of, 155
corporate names. See organization names corporate reports. See annual reports
1215
correlative conjunctions, 102 double negatives and, 161 in parallel structure, 372
correspondence, 109–17. See also e-mail; letters; memos; selecting the medium
acceptances / refusals (for employment), 8–9 accuracy in, 117, 168 acknowledgments, 10 adjustment messages, 15–18 APA documentation of, 140 application cover letters, 36–41 bad-news patterns for, 114–16 clarity in, 116–17 closings, 114–15 CMS documentation of, 148–49, 151 collection letters, 79–82 complaint message, 94–95 cover messages, 117–18 e-mail, 168–71 emphasis in, 116–17 employment offers and, 8–9, 281 ethics in writing and, 171 form letters, 196–98 good-news patterns for, 113–14 goodwill and, 111–13 headings in, 116–17 inquiries and responses, 260–62 international, 268–73 letters, 311–16 lists in, 116
1216
memos, 330–31 MLA documentation of, 157–58 names and titles in, 4, 314 openings, 115–16, 283–84 order-of-importance method of development for, 361–63 outlining for, 365 point of view in, 387 reference letters, 447–49 refusals, 449–52 for reports, 454 resignation letters, 463 sales letters, 486–87 thank-you letters, 276, 281 transmittals, 117–18 writer’s checklists for, 112–13, 117
cost analysis, in sales proposals, 422 sample of, 428
count nouns, 350 adjectives and, 13 articles with, 175 subject-verb agreement and, 23
cover messages (or transmittals), 117–18. See also application cover letters
context in, 105 for e-mail attachments, 169 for faxes, 491 for formal reports, 198, 203 for grant proposals, 237 for meeting agendas, 327 for questionnaires, 438, 441
1217
for résumés, See also application cover letters for sales proposals, 421–22, 424 samples of, 118, 203, 328, 424, 438
credible / creditable, 118 critique, 118 cultural differences. See also global communication; global graphics; international correspondence
as context, 105 in directness of messages, 113–14, 228–29, 269 international correspondence and, 268–73 listening and, 317 visuals and graphics and, 232–34
currency, of sources, 457 curriculum vitae, 466n. See also résumés cutaway drawings. See drawings -d endings, 520, 535 dangling modifiers, 119
active voice for, 544 ambiguity and, 30 phrases as, 382–83
dashes, 120–21 for emphasis, 120, 173 for enclosing elements, 120, 493 vs. hyphens, 251
data, 121 data, numerical. See numerical data databases, 458–59
CMS documentation of, 143 for employment, 297 MLA documentation of, 155
1218
for periodicals, 458–59 résumés for, 482 search strategies, 457–58, 460
dates, 121–22 apostrophes in, 35 capitalization of, 67 commas in, 88, 121 format for writing, 88, 121–22 on forms, 222, 224 in headers or footers, 248, 309 in international correspondence, 121, 273 in letters, 312 numbers in, 354, 355 plurals of, 36 publication, 199 slashes in, 503 in subtitles, 199, 524
datum, 121 days. See dates de facto / de jure, 122 deceptive language, avoiding, 180, 390 decimal numbering system
for headings, 251 for outlines, 366
decimals commas with, 89 numerals for, 354 periods with, 89, 376
declarative sentences, 495 decreasing order-of-importance method of development, 333,
1219
363 sample of, 362
defective / deficient, 122 defining terms, 122–23. See also definition method of development; definitions
audience and, 44–46, 124, 234–35 in executive summaries, 182–83 glossaries for, 234–35 plain language and, 385–86
definite articles, 42–43 definite / definitive, 123 definition method of development, 124–26, 331 definitions. See also defining terms; word meanings
by analogy, 124 by cause, 125 circular, 123 by components, 125 by exploration of origin, 125–26 extended, 124 formal and informal, 123 in glossaries, 234–35 is when / is where, 123 negative, 123, 126 opening with, 285
definitive / definite, 123 deletions. See omissions delivery schedules, in sales proposals, 422
sample of, 428 delivery techniques, for presentations, 401–2 demonstrative adjectives, 12–13
1220
and agreement in number, 12–13, 26 with count nouns, 175
demonstrative pronouns, 411 denotation, 48, 103 dependent clauses, 75
and sentence structure, 494 subordinating conjunctions with, 102 subordination of, 513–14
description, 126–28 samples of, 126–27, 508 spatial method of development for, 508–9 of vendor, in sales proposals, 423
descriptive abstracts, 6–8 descriptive adjectives, 12, 14 descriptors, in electronic résumés, 482 design. See layout and design design patents, 107 desktop publishing software, 309, 347 detail
in description, 126–28 opening with, 285
development. See grant proposals; methods of development dialectal English, 177–78 dictionaries
APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 146 MLA documentation of, 156 for research, 459 for usage, 531 for word choice, 549–50
1221
differ from / differ with, 128 different from / different than, 128 difficult personalities, 329 digital object identifier. See DOI (digital object identifier) digital (and print) portfolios, 301–2 direct address, 128
comma with, 86, 128 for emphasis, 173
direct objects, 356 as complements, 96 gerunds as, 533 nouns as, 351 pronoun case and, 70 transitive verbs and, 356, 536 verbals as, 175
direct quotations. See quotations direct statements
for emphasis, 173 for plain language, 385
directional cues, in Web design, 552 discreet / discrete, 129 disinterested / uninterested, 129 division-and-classification method of development, 129–32, 333 document capture and linking, 133 document design. See layout and design document management, 132–33
systems for, 132–33 documenting sources, 133–60. See also APA documentation; citations, in-text; CMS documentation; MLA documentation
1222
abbreviations for, 4–5 APA style, 137–42 bibliographies and, 50–51 CMS style, 143–53 common knowledge, 385 copyright and, 107 drawings and, 164 ethics in writing and, 542 footnotes and endnotes, 143–44 in formal reports, 202 MLA style, 154–60 note-taking and, 349 paraphrasing and, 373, 385 photographs and, 380, 542 plagiarism and, 134, 385 in presentation slides, 399, 542 in proposals, 418 purposes of, 133–34 quotations and, 134, 444, 446 samples of, 141–42, 152–53, 159–60 style manuals for, 134–36 in tables, 517, 542 for Web content, 553
DOI (digital object identifier) APA citation of, 137 CMS citation of, 143
domain names, 461 dots. See ellipses double negatives, 161–62, 390 drafting. See writing a draft
1223
drawings, 162–65. See also visuals ethics in writing and, 164 functions of, 540 samples of, 162–64 writer’s checklist for, 165
due to / because of, 165, 185 dummy, in page design, 311 each, 166
pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 25, 166, 413 subject-verb agreement with, 23, 25, 166, 413
each other, 412 economic / economical, 166 -ed endings, 520, 535 edited collections
APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 145 MLA documentation of, 156
editing. See also proofreading; revision proofreaders’ marks for, 414–15 writer’s checklist for, xxv–xxvi
editions, book APA documentation of, 137 CMS documentation of, 145 MLA documentation of, 155
educational material, copyright and, 106 effect. See cause-and-effect method of development effect / affect, 20 e.g. / i.e., 166–67 either . . . or
as correlative conjunction, 102
1224
in parallel structure, 372 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 27 subject-verb agreement with, 24–25
electronic résumés, 297, 482–83 electronic sources. See also Internet research
APA documentation of, 138–40 CMS documentation of, 147–50 MLA documentation of, 157–58
elegant variation, 21 ellipses, 167
periods as, 375 in quoted material, 445
elliptical constructions, commas with, 88 elude / refer / allude, 28 e-mail, 168–71. See also correspondence
abbreviations in, 2, 169 accuracy in, 168 addresses, 169, 478 APA documentation of, 139, 140 attachments, 169, 171 bad-news patterns for, 115 closings for, 169–70 CMS documentation of, 148–49 confidentiality and, 168 design and, 169–70 for form letters, 196–98 functions of, 168, 489–90 hyphens in, 253 interviewing by, 275 managing, 171
1225
for memos, 330–31 MLA documentation of, 157 netiquette, 169 for newsletters, 347 openings for, 115–16, 283 overload, 171 professionalism and, 168, 169–70 for research, 456–57 responding to, 169, 171 for résumés, 478, 482–83 salutations for, 169–70 samples of, 530 signature blocks for, 170 social media and, 504 subject line of, 67, 117, 169, 524 vs. text messaging, 522 tone for, 526 writer’s checklists for, 171
emoticons, 169 emphasis, 172–73
active voice for, 173 clarity and, 75, 116–17 climactic order for, 172 colons for, 82 conjunctions for, 102 in correspondence, 116–17 dashes for, 120, 173 direct statements for, 173 ethics in writing and, 180–81 figures of speech for, 192
1226
intensifiers for, 173, 267 italics for, 287 pace and, 368 parallel structure for, 371–73 position for, 172 repetition for, 173, 453 in résumés, 467 sentence construction and, 172, 493, 499 subordination for, 513 typography for, 173, 308–9 word order and, 493
employment agencies, 298–99 employment process. See also online professional profile
acceptances / refusals, 8–9 application cover letters, 36–41 applications genres, 301–3 internships and co-ops, 299–300 job descriptions, 291–93 job interviews, 276–86 job searches, 293–303 reference letters, 447–49 resignation letters, 463 résumés, 466–83 returning job Seekers, 477 salary negotiations, 280 service internship and “gap year” opportunities, 300 social media review and, 505 volunteering, 295, 476–77
enclosure notations, 169, 315–16 encyclopedias
1227
APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 146 MLA documentation of, 156 for research, 459
end notations, in correspondence, 315–16 end punctuation. See sentence endings endnotes. See footnotes / endnotes English, varieties of, 177–78
colloquial, 177 dialectal, 177–78 localisms, 178 nonstandard, 177 slang, 178 standard, 177, 510
English as a second language, 174–77 adjective clauses, 176 articles, 175 count nouns, 174 gerunds and infinitives, 175–76 mass nouns, 174 present perfect tense, 176–77 progressive tenses, 177
ensure / assure / insure, 267 entry lines and fields, in forms, 222–23 enumeration
colons with, 493 for transitions, 371, 527, 528
equal / unique / perfect, 178–79 -er / -est endings, 13, 19 -es endings
1228
for plurals, 352, 354, 391 for verbs, 352–53, 538
-ese endings, 21 ESL. See English as a second language essays, quotation marks for titles of, 443, 525 -est endings, 13–14, 20 etc., 179 ethics in writing, 179–81
affectation and, 21 bcc: notations and, 171 for blogs and forums, 53 for boilerplate content, 422 copyright and, 106, 107 documenting sources and, 202, 553 for drawings, 164 euphemisms and, 179–80, 181 for FAQs, 185 for formal reports, 202 for forms, 220–21 graphs and, 241, 539 for incident reports, 256 for instant messaging and live chat, 263 I / we usage, 63, 388 job applications and, 302, 303 logic errors and, 320 for note-taking, 349 paraphrasing and, 373 passive voice, 179–80, 545 persuasive writing and, 378 photographs and, 380–81
1229
plagiarism and, 202, 349, 380–81 positive writing and, 390 for presentation slides, 399 for promotional writing, 409 for questionnaires, 441, 457 for quotations, 443, 444 for reference letters, 449 for repurposed content, 385, 455–56 for research, 457 for résumés, 467 for sales letters, 487 for sales proposals, 421, 422 for visuals, 539, 542 for Web content, 553 writer’s checklist for, 180–81
ethnic groups bias toward, avoiding, 50 capitalization of names of, 66
euphemisms, 181 as affectation, 21 ethics in writing and, 179, 181 as gobbledygook, 235
evaluating sources, 461–62. See also evidence every
pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 25 subject-verb agreement with, 25
everybody / everyone, 181–82 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 25, 181–82 subject-verb agreement with, 181
everyday / every day, 182
1230
evidence biased or suppressed, 321 evaluating, 71–72, 462
except / accept, 8 exclamation marks, 182
commas with, 89 for interjections, 182, 268
exclamatory sentences, 495 executive summaries, 182–83
in formal reports, 201, 207–8 in proposals, 422, 425 samples of, 207–8, 425 writer’s checklist for, 183
experimentation, and technology, 11 explanations
in adjustment messages, 18 in bad-news patterns, 114
explanatory notes, in formal reports, 201 expletives, 183
wordiness and, 98 explicit / implicit, 184 exploded-view drawings. See drawings exploration of origin, definition by, 125–26 exposition, 184 extended definitions, 124 external proposals, 418–23 external Web sites, 52, 491–92 eye contact, in presentations, 402, 403 Facebook, 297, 358, 492, 504–6 fact, 185
1231
facts, vs. opinions, 185, 321 fair use, 106 fallacies. See logic errors false cause, 72, 321 false impressions
and ethics in writing, 179–80 and job applications, 302
FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), 185–87 ethics in writing and, 185 writer’s checklist for, 186–87
fault, admitting. See adjustment messages faxes, 491 feasibility reports, 187–90
sample of, 188–89 titles for, 523–24
few / a few, 190 fewer / less, 190 figuratively / literally, 190 figures, list of, 200, 543. See also numbering; visuals figures of speech, 178, 191–92 file sharing, 79 films
APA documentation of, 139 capitalization in titles of, 67, 102 CMS documentation of, 149 italics for titles of, 289, 524 MLA documentation of, 157
financial statements, 33, 62 fine, 192 finite verbs, 534
1232
first / firstly, 192 first names, in correspondence, 170, 273, 314 first person, 377
antecedents and, 414 in narration, 342 point of view, 386–88
first words. See capitalization Five Steps to Successful Writing, xvii–xxiii. See also writing process flames, e-mail, 169 flip charts, 399 flowcharts, 193–95, 541. See also visuals
samples of, 193–95 fonts, 307, 552. See also typography footers. See headers and footers footnotes / endnotes. See also documenting sources
in CMS style, 135, 143–44 in formal reports, 201 for graphs, 246 for tables, 517
for example vs. e.g. / i.e., 166–67 in sentence fragments, 498
forced choice questions, 224 forceful / forcible, 195 foreign words in English, 195–96. See also Latin words
affectation and, 21, 196 italics for, 196, 287
foreword / forward, 196 forewords, in formal reports, 200
1233
form letters, 196–98 professionalism and, 197
formal definitions, 123 formal internal proposals, 417–18 formal reports, 198–219. See also report elements; reports
abstracts of, 6–8, 200 back matter, 202 body of, 201–2 ethics in writing and, 202 format for, 198–99 front matter, 199–201 functions of, 454 sample of, 203–19 technology for, 202
formal style, 510–11. See also style as affectation, 21 in business writing, 63 in correspondence, 109–10, 273
format, 220. See also chapters and sections; layout and design for activity reports, 406 for business letters, 311–16 for business plans, 60 consistency in, 415 for external proposals, 418 for formal reports, 198–99 for memos, 331–32 for mission statements, 337–38 for newsletters, 347 for résumés, 478–82 templates for, 220, 312
1234
for titles of works, 524–25 former / latter, 220 forms, 220–24. See also application genres
ethics in writing and, 220, 222 samples of, 221
forums, Web. See blogs and forums fractions
numerals vs. words, 354–55 slashes in, 503
fragments. See sentence fragments Frequently Asked Questions. See FAQs front matter, for formal reports, 199–201 full adjustments, 17–18 full justification, 309 full-block-style letter, 312
sample of, 313 full-scale introductions, 286 functional résumé, 479
sample of, 474 functional shift, 224–25 funding. See grant proposals further. See conjunctive adverbs fused sentences, 377, 485 future perfect tense, 520, 521 future progressive tense, 520 future tense, 521 Gantt charts, 243, 244 gap year. See service internship and “gap year” opportunities garbled sentences, 226. See also mixed constructions gathering information. See research
1235
gender, 227. See also sexist language agreement in, 22, 25, 227, 413 in global graphics, 232–34 of nouns and pronouns, 227 unknown, in salutations, 312, 314
general and specific methods of development, 227–28, 333 samples of, 227–28
generalizations, sweeping, 320–21 genre. See selecting the medium geographic features
capitalization of, 67–68 maps for, 323–25, 540
gerund phrases, 383–84 gerunds, 533–34, 537
object of, and pronoun case, 70 possessive pronouns with, 392
gestures cultural differences in, 232–33 in presentations, 402
global communication, 228–32. See also cultural differences; international correspondence
context and, 228–29 idioms and, 254 punctuation for, 234 visuals and graphics for, 232–34 Web content and, 553 writer’s checklist for, 232
global graphics, 232–34 samples of, 233
glossaries, 234–35
1236
in formal reports, 202 in instructions, 264 in proposals, 416
goals. See also purpose in business plans, 61 career, 293 in mission statements, 335–38
gobbledygook, 235 as affectation, 21 ethics in writing and, 180
good / well, 235 good-news patterns, 113–14
samples of, 113 goodwill, establishing
with acknowledgment, 10 with adjustment messages, 15–18 blogs and forums for, 51–53 in closings, 114–15 in correspondence, 111–13 in refusals, 8, 450 social media for, 504 writer’s checklist for, 112–13 “you” viewpoint for, 554
Google, 460 government agencies
invitation for bids from, 418, 420–21 job searches and, 298–99
government publications APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 151
1237
MLA documentation of, 158 as public domain, 107
grammar, 235–36 grammar checkers, 414, 485 grant proposals, 236–40. See also proposals
writer’s checklist for, 240 graphics. See visuals graphs, 240–47. See also visuals
for annual reports, 34 for brochure, 56 ethics in writing and, 241, 539 functions of, 540–41 for presentations, 401 for project schedules, 243, 244 samples of, 241–46 vs. tables, 240, 516 writer’s checklist for, 246–47
had / have, 500, 520, 535 handbooks
for research, 459 for technological tools, 11
hardly, 20, 161 hardware, adapting to new, 11 have / had, 500, 520, 535 he / him / his, 68–71, 377, 412–13 he / she, 248. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement; sexist language headers and footers, 248–49
on continuing pages, 316 in page design, 309
1238
samples of, 249, 316 headings, 249–51
in brochures, 56 in correspondence, 116–17, 312 in document design, 309 in forms, 222 in instructions, 265 italics for, 290 levels of, 249, 251, 366 in meeting minutes, 333 in newsletters, 347 numbering, 251 in outlines, 366 parallel structure for, 372 in résumés, 478 in sales proposals, 422 sample of, 250 style for, 249 in tables, 516 in tables of contents, 200, 518 in trip reports, 529 typography for, 308 in Web design, 551 writer’s checklist for, 251
headlines in blogs and forums, 53 in form letters, 197 in résumés, 478–79
help menus and manuals, 11. See also instructions helping verbs, 384, 494, 537
1239
highlighting devices. See layout and design; typography hooks, in openings, 286 however. See conjunctive adverbs how-to guides, 11. See also instructions humor
in global communication, 269 malapropisms, 323 quotation marks and, 444
hyperbole, 191 hyperlinks. See links hyphens, 251–53
clarity and, 252 for compound words, 97, 251 with modifiers, 252 with numbers, 122, 252–53 with prefixes, 252, 392–93 with suffixes, 252 for word division, 253
I between you and . . . , 49, 394 in business writing style, 63, 388 vs. me, 68–71 me / my / mine, 377, 412–13 in résumés, 481 vs. you, 111–12
icons, 310–11, 541 idioms, 254, 269, 394 i.e. / e.g., 166–67 -ies endings, for plurals, 352, 354 if and when, 547
1240
IFB. See invitation for bids illusion / allusion, 28 illustrations. See visuals IM. See instant messaging and live chat image, business
brochures for promoting, 55–58 in mission statements, 335–38 in newsletters, 346 in press releases, 403–5 visuals and, 34
imperative mood, 340 for conciseness, 99 for instructions, 264 for nonsexist language, 248
imperative sentences, 495. See also commands impersonal point of view, 387 implicit / explicit, 184 imply / infer, 254 in / into, 255 in order to, 255 in regard to, 452 in terms of, 255 incidence / incident, 255 incident / incidence, 255 incident reports, 256
sample of, 257 increasing order-of-importance method of development, 333, 363 indefinite adjectives, 13 indefinite articles, 1, 42–43
1241
indefinite pronouns, 411 one, 357 possessive case of, 392 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 413 subject-verb agreement with, 22, 413
independent clauses in comma splices, 84 connecting with comma and coordinating conjunction, 85 connecting with conjunctive adverb and semicolon, 19, 89, 103, 492 in run-on sentences, 377, 485 and sentence structure, 495
indexes to periodicals, 458–59. See also subject directories indexing, 202, 256
for formal reports, 202 sample of, 160 technology for, 160, 202
indicative mood, 99, 340 indirect objects, 96, 356
as complements, 96 nouns as, 351 pronoun case and, 70
indirect quotations, 442, 445. See also quotations indiscreet / indiscrete, 258 infer / imply, 254 infinitive phrases, 383 infinitives, 534–35
with helping verbs, 537 split, 534–35 subject of, and pronoun case, 70
1242
to as sign of, 383, 534, 537 infographics, 258–60
sample of, 259 writer’s checklist for, 260
informal definitions, 123 informal internal proposals, 417 informal reports, 454 informal style, 511–12. See also business writing style; style informal tables, 517 information sources. See research information technology (IT) specialists, 11 informational brochures, 55–59 informational interviews, 296. See also interviewing for information informative abstracts, 6–8
sample of, 7 informative writing, 184 -ing endings
gerunds, 383–84, for present participles, 535
initialisms. See acronyms and initialisms initials, 315, 376 inquiries and responses, 260–62
for job searches, 301 samples of, 261, 262 for unsolicited proposals, 421
inside / inside of, 263 inside address, 312–13 instant messaging and live chat, 263. See also text messaging.
abbreviations in, 3, 263
1243
ethics in writing and, 263 functions of, 490 social media and, 504 writer’s checklist for, 263
Institutional Review Board (IRB), 457 instructions, 264–67
chronological order for, 73 context of, 104 for forms, 222–23 infographics for, 258–60 plain language for, 264 point of view in, 386–88 procedures as, 289–90 sample of, 266 sequential method of development for, 264, 501–2 testing, 266 visuals for, 162–65, 265 warnings in, 182, 265 writer’s checklist for, 267
insure / ensure / assure, 267 intensifiers, 267–68
adverbs as, 339, 367 for emphasis, 173 overuse of, 5, 99, 267 really and actually, 447 very, 538
intensive pronouns, 411 interface, 268 interjections, 268
commas with, 268
1244
exclamation marks with, 182 internal proposals, 417–18
sample of, 419–20 internal Web sites, 52, 491–92 international correspondence, 268–73. See also global communication
bad-news patterns for, 114–16 context and, 228–29 cultural differences and, 228–29, 269 dates in, 121, 273 euphemisms and, 181 figures of speech and, 192 good-news patterns for, 113–14 idioms and, 254, 269 indirect style for, 229, 269 plain language for, 385–86 punctuation for, 234 salutations for, 234 samples of, 270–72 visuals and graphics for, 240–42 writer’s checklist for, 273
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) symbols. See ISO symbols International System of Units (SI), 4 Internet. See blogs and forums; Internet research; online postings; URLs; Web design; Web sites; writing for the Web Internet research, 460–61. See also electronic sources; library resources; research
evaluating sources, 462 for job searches, 296
1245
primary research, 456–57 search engines, 460 subject directories, 461 writer’s checklist for, 460
internships and co-ops, 299–300 interrogative adverbs, 19 interrogative pronouns, 411 interrogative sentences, 436, 495. See also questions interrupting elements, commas with, 86 interviewing for a job, 276–82. See also employment process
application cover letters, 36–41 follow-up procedures, 8–9, 281 listening, 279, 317–18 professionalism and, 279 résumés and, 466 salary negotiations and, 280–81 sample thank-you note, 282
interviewing for information, 273–76 for annual reports, 33 for job searches, 296 listening, 275, 317–18 for newsletter articles, 344 professionalism and, 274–75 questionnaires and, 437 for research, 457 writer’s checklist for, 275–76
interviews APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 151 MLA documentation of, 158
1246
in-text citations. See citations, in-text intranet, 52, 491–92 intransitive verbs, 305, 536–37 introductions, 283–86. See also openings
conclusions and, 101–2 context in, 105 for feasibility reports, 198–99 for grant proposals, 237–38 for newsletter articles, 346 for presentations, 396–98 for process explanations, 405 for progress reports, 406 for proposals, 417 for reports, 201, 209–11, 454 sample of, 209–11 setting tone with, 526
introductory elements. See also sentence openings commas with, 86–87 dangling modifiers as, 119 wordiness and, 99
inverted sentences for emphasis, 496 subject-verb agreement and, 25 for variety, 500
investigative reports, 287 sample of, 288
invitation for bids, 418. See also requests for proposals IRB (Institutional Review Board), 457 irregardless, 453 is when / is where, 123
1247
ISO symbols for flowcharts, 193–95 for global communication, 234 samples of, 195, 233
it as expletive, 183 and its, 377, 411 as subject, 494
IT (information technology) specialists, 11 italics, 287–90
for emphasis, 173, 287, 309 for foreign words, 195–96, 287 for proper names, 289 for subheadings, 289 for titles of works, 287–88, 524–25 for words, letters, and numbers, 289
its / it’s, 290 jammed modifiers. See stacked modifiers jargon, 291
as affectation, 21 buzzwords as, 64 ethics in writing and, 179 as functional shift, 224–25 in global communication, 269 as gobbledygook, 235 vs. plain language, 385–86
job applications. See application genres; job search; résumés job descriptions, 291–93
in résumés, 481 sample of, 292
1248
writer’s checklist for, 293 job interviews. See interviewing for a job job search, 293–3. See also employment process; interviewing for a job
advertisements, 297–98 application cover letters, 36–41 application genres, 301–3 campus career services, 296 employment agencies, 298–99 ethics in writing and, 303 informational interviews, 296 inquiries, 301 internships and co-ops, 299–300 networking, 296 online professional profile, 358–61 online resources for, 482–83 personal brand and branding, 295, 297 professionalism and, 297, 302 research for, 297 résumés, 466–83 service internship and “gap year” opportunities, 300 social media for, 504–7 trade and professional listings, 298 writer’s checklist for, 302
job titles capitalization of, 68 in résumés, 479
journals. See articles in periodicals; periodicals justification, in page design, 309 key terms. See also keyword searches
1249
defining, 122–23 for indexing, 256 repetition of, 173, 453, 527 in résumés, 306, 482 in Web content, 551–52
keys (legends) for graphs, 246 for maps, 325 for symbols, 193, 542
keyword searches. See also key terms for catalogs and databases, 457–58 for job listings, 298 for search engines, 460 for technical help, 11
kind / type / sort, 12–13, 27 kind of / sort of, 12–13, 27, 304 know-how, 304 labels
for drawings, 165 for flowcharts, 193 for forms, 223 for graphs, 243, 246–47 for maps, 323 for photographs, 380
language. See also English as a second language; word choice biased, 49–50 deceptive, 180, 390 plain, 385–86 pretentious, 21 sexist, 26, 49–50, 248, 413–14
1250
Latin words. See also foreign words in English abbreviations for, 4–5, 166–67, 179 ad hoc, 10 de facto / de jure, 122 quid pro quo, 442 via, 538
latter / former, 220 lay / lie, 305 layout and design, 305–11. See also format; Web design
for annual reports, 34 for blogs, 52 for brochures, 55–59 captions, 311 color in, 310 columns, 310 for e-mail, 169–70 ethics in writing and, 179 for FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), 185 for forms, 222–23 headers and footers, 248–49, 309 headings, 249, 309 for instructions, 265 justification in, 309 for letters, 311–16 for lists, 309 medium and, 455 for newsletters, 347 page-design elements and, 309–10 persuasion and, 378 for presentation visuals, 399
1251
for promotional writing, 409 for résumés, 466–67 rules for, 311 templates for, 220 thumbnails and, 311 typography and, 307–9 of visuals, 310–11, 542 white space and, 310, 311 writing process and, xxii
lectures, MLA documentation of, 158. See also presentations left-justified margins, 309 legal cases, italics for titles of, 287, 524 legal terms
as affectation, 21 de facto / de jure, 122 ethics in writing and, 180 party, 375 vs. plain language, 385–86 quid pro quo, 442
legalese, 235 legends. See keys (legends) lend / loan, 311 length
of business plans, 60 of mission statements, 338–39 of paragraphs, 369 of résumés, 467 of sentences, 172, 499
less / fewer, 190 letterhead stationery, 311–12, 490
1252
letters, 311–16. See also correspondence; salutations body of, 314–15 closings for, 315 formatting, 312 functions of, 490 headings in, 222 openings for, 114–15, 283, 312, 314 samples of, 313
letters of the alphabet capitalization of, 68 italics for, 289 in outlines, 365–66 plurals of, 36
library resources, 457–60. See also Internet research; research catalogs, 458 databases and indexes, 458–59 library homepage, 457–58 reference works, 459
lie / lay, 305 -like, 514 like / as, 316 limiting adjectives, 12, 42 line drawings. See drawings line graphs. See graphs LinkedIn.com, 295–97, 301, 358, 360, 492, 504–7 linking verbs, 69, 536–37 links
in blog writing, 53 in electronic résumés, 483 in Web content, 552–53
1253
listening, 317–18 in interviews, 275, 279 in meetings, 328
list-hosting service, 347 lists, 318–20
of abbreviations and symbols, in reports, 201 in brochures, 56, 57 bulleted, 116, 318, 319–20 colons before, 82, 83, 319 consistency in, 319 contact, 263 in correspondence, 116 in document design, 309 of figures and tables, 200, 543 formatting for, 320 in inquiries, 261 in instructions, 265 numbered, 318, 376 parallel structure for, 372 periods in, 376 in presentations, 319, 401 sample of, 319 in Web design, 455, 551 writer’s checklist for, 319–20
literally / figuratively, 190 literature review, in grant proposals, 238 litotes, 192 live chat. See instant messaging and live chat loaded arguments, 322 loaded sentences, 496
1254
loan / lend, 311 localisms, 178 logic errors, 320–22
biased or suppressed evidence, 321 double negatives and, 161–62 ethics in writing and, 320 fact vs. opinion, 185, 321 false cause, 72, 321 lack of reason, 320 loaded arguments, 322 mixed constructions, 338 non sequiturs, 321 in sentence construction, 498 sweeping generalizations, 320–21
long quotations. See block quotations long variants, 21, 235 loose / lose, 322 loose sentences, 495 -ly endings, 20, 252 magazines. See articles in periodicals; periodicals mailing lists, 347, 486 malapropisms, 323 manuals
for research, 459 for technological tools, 11
maps, 323–25. See also visuals in brochure, 56 functions of, 540 sample of, 324 writer’s checklist for, 324–25
1255
margins for brochures, 58 for letters, 312–13 in page design, 309
market analysis and strategy, in business plans, 61 marketing. See promotional writing marketing plan, in business plans, 62 mass nouns, 350
articles and, 175 subject-verb agreement and, 23
may / can, 65 maybe / may be, 325 me
between you and . . . , 49, 394 vs. I, 68–71 and my / mine, 68–71, 377, 412–13
mean / average / median, 46 measurements
abbreviations for, 3–4 average / median / mean, 46 in global communication, 273 numerals vs. words, 354–55 subject-verb agreement with, 23 units of, 3
media, social. See social media media / medium, 325 median / mean / average, 46 medium. See selecting the medium medium / media, 325 meetings, 325–30. See also minutes of meetings
1256
agendas for, 326–27 attendees, 326 closing, 330 conducting, 328–30 conference calls for, 491 conflict in, 329 face-to-face, 491 functions of, 491 planning for, 325–37 purpose of, 325–26 smartphones and, 330 technology for, 490–92 writer’s checklist for, 330
memos, 330–31. See also correspondence bad-news patterns for, 115 chronological order for, 73 as cover letters, 198, 203 format for, 331 functions of, 490 openings for, 115–16, 283–84 order-of-importance method of development for, 361–63 professionalism and, 331 protocols for sending, 331 samples of, 74, 203, 332, 362, 379, 438 subject line of, 67, 114, 524 tone for, 526 transmittals, 117–18
metaphors, 192 metasearch engines, 460 methods of development, 331, 333
1257
cause-and-effect, 71–73 chronological, 73 clarity and, 75 comparison, 91–93 definition, 124–26 division-and-classification, 129–32 general and specific, 227–28 order-of-importance, 361–63 for organization, 363–64 sequential, 501–2 spatial, 508–9 writing process and, xxi–xxii
metonyms, 192 metric system, 3–4 milestones, in business plans, 61 mind mapping, 54 minor sentences, 496 minutes of meetings, 333–35. See also meetings
assigning responsibility for, 327 chronological order for, 73 sample of, 334 writer’s checklist for, 334–35
misplaced modifiers, 30, 339–40, 383 Miss / Mrs. / Ms., 341 mission statements, 335–38
in business plans, 61 sample of, 336
mixed constructions, 338. See also garbled sentences MLA documentation, 135–36, 154–58 See also documenting sources
1258
for articles in periodicals, 156–57 for books, 155–56 documentation models, 154–58 for electronic sources, 157 in-text citations, 154 for miscellaneous sources, 158 for multimedia sources, 157–58 sample pages, 159–60, 219 works-cited list, 135–36, 160
mobile phones, 490, 522 Modern Language Association. See MLA documentation modified-block-style letter, 312 modifiers, 338–40. See also adjectives; adverbs
ambiguous use of, 29–30 dangling, 119 hyphens with, 252 misplaced, 30, 339–40 order of, 14 redundant, 97 restrictive and nonrestrictive, 465–66 sentence construction and, 493–94 squinting, 340 stacked (jammed), 14, 339
money, numbers for, 354–55 months. See dates mood, 340–41
helping verbs and, 537 imperative, 340 indicative, 340–41 subjunctive, 340–41
1259
more / most for comparison, 13, 20, 178 subject-verb agreement with, 23
more than / as much as, 44 moreover. See conjunctive adverbs movies. See films Ms. / Miss / Mrs., 313, 341 multilingual writers. See English as a second language multimedia sources
APA documentation of, 138–40 CMS documentation of, 147–50 MLA documentation of, 157–58
multiple audiences, 45–46. See also audience multiple authors
APA documentation of, 137 CMS documentation of, 144 MLA documentation of, 155
multiple books by same author APA documentation of, 137 CMS documentation of, 145–46 MLA documentation of, 156
multiple-choice questions, 223 multivolume works
APA documentation of, 137 CMS documentation of, 145 MLA documentation of, 156
musical works, titles of italics for, 289, 525 quotation marks for, 443, 525
mutual / common, 341
1260
names and titles. See also organization names; proper nouns abbreviations for, 3 capitalization of, 67 commas with, 89 first names, 170, 313–14 initials for, 315, 376 in international correspondence, 269, 273 in letters, 313–14, 315 Ms. / Miss / Mrs., 313–14, 341 on title pages, 199 unknown, 314
naming conventions for documents, 133 narration, 342
sample of, 343 narrative section. See also body
in annual reports, 32–33 in grant proposals, 238–39
National Institute of Standards and Technology, 4 nationalities, capitalization names of, 66 nature, 342 navigational cues, in Web design, 552 needless to say, 344 negative definitions, 123, 126 negative messages. See bad-news patterns negatives, double, 161–62, 390 neither . . . nor, 348
as correlative conjunction, 102 double negatives and, 161 in parallel structure, 372 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 27
1261
subject-verb agreement with, 24 netiquette, 169 networking, 296, 491–92, 504–5 nevertheless. See conjunctive adverbs news releases. See press releases newsletter articles, 344–46. See also articles in periodicals
sample of, 345 titles for, 524 writer’s checklist for, 345–46
newsletters, 346–47 blogs as, 52 format and design for, 308, 347 professionalism and, 347
newspapers. See articles in periodicals; periodicals no, comma with, 85–86 no one / not one, 348 nominalizations, 348 nominative case. See subjective case non sequiturs, 321 none, 348 nonfinite verbs, 537 nonrestrictive elements, 465–66. See also parenthetical elements
commas with, 85, 465–66 which with, 465–66, 522
nonstandard English, 177 nonverbal communication, 401–3 nor / or, 348
and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 26 and subject-verb agreement, 24–25
1262
not double negatives and, 161–62 in verb phrases, 384
not only . . . but also, 102, 372 notes section, in formal reports, 201 note-taking, 349–50
in active listening, 318 drafting and, 550 ethics in writing and, 349 for interviews, 274–75, 276 for minutes of meetings, 327, 333–35 paraphrasing, 373 plagiarism and, 349 for presentations, 403 quotations and, 444 for research, 455–56, 458–59 writer’s checklist for, 349–50
nouns, 350–52 abstract, 350 as adjectives, 14, 351, 391 collective, 24, 350, 351 common, 66, 350 compound, 391 concrete, 350 coordinate, 392 count, 13, 23, 174, 350 functions of, 351 gender of, 227 gerunds as, 537 mass, 23, 174, 350
1263
as objects, 356 participles as, 537 phrases as, 381, 384 plurals of, 352, 391 possessive case of, 70, 392, 534 pronouns modifying, 413 proper, 66, 350 as subjects, 494 types of, 350 verbals as, 533
number (grammar), 352–53. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement; subject-verb agreement number (word)
vs. amount, 30 subject-verb agreement with, 23
numbered lists. See lists numbering
in decimal headings, 251, 366–67 for figures, 200, 355 for maps, 323 in outlines, 366 for photographs, 380 for tables, 200, 355, 516
numbers, 353–55. See also measurements; numerical data in addresses, 355 as adjectives, 13 cardinal, 13, 121 for chapters and volumes, 355 colons with, 82–83 commas with, 88–89
1264
in dates, 355 for figures and tables, 355 fractions, 354 hyphens with, 122, 252–53 italics for, 289 measurements, 354 money, 354–55 numerals vs. words, 13, 353–54 ordinal, 13, 121 for pages, 355 in parentheses, 355, 374 percentages, 354, 375 periods with, , 375–76 plurals of, 39, 354 slashes with, 503 for time, 355
numerical data in grant proposals, 239 in graphs, 240–47, 540 in tables, 516, 540
object of preposition, 356 gerunds as, 533 no colon before, 83 nouns as, 351 pronoun case and, 70, 393–94
objective case, 69–70, 412–13 objective complements, 96, 351 objectives
in grant proposals, 238–39 opening with, 284
1265
in résumés, 478–79 objects, 356. See also direct objects; indirect objects; object of preposition observation, in research, 457 of
possessive case using, 391 redundant use of, 263, 367, 395 with this kind / these kinds / that type / those types, 12, 26
of which / who’s / whose, 548–49 OK / okay, 356 omissions
apostrophes for, 35 commas for, 88 ellipses for, 167, 445 ethics in writing and, 181 slashes for, 503 telegraphic style and, 518
on / onto / upon, 357 one, 63, 357 one another, 412 one of those . . . who, 357 online chat sessions, 79 online forms. See forms online postings. See also blogs and forums
APA documentation of, 139 CMS documentation of, 148 MLA documentation of, 157
online professional profile, 358–61 audience and purpose, 358, 360 experience, education, and skills, 361
1266
personal identifying information, 360 sites for, 358, 360 writing style for, 360–61
online resources. See Internet research; Web sites online tutorials, 11 only, 20, 361 open-ended questions, 223 openings. See also introductions
for adjustment messages, 15, 17 for application cover letters, 40–41 for bad-news letters, 114–15 for correspondence, 115–16 good news in, 113–14 hooks in, 286 for international correspondence, 269 for investigative reports, 287 for refusals, 451 routine, 283 for sales letters, 487
opinions conflicting, 378 vs. facts, 185, 321 point of view for, 387
or / nor, 348 and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 26 and subject-verb agreement, 24–25
oral presentations. See presentations order-of-importance method of development, 333, 361–63 ordinal numbers, 121
as modifiers, 13
1267
spelling out, 353 organization, 363–64. See also methods of development
coherence and, 77 for document management, 133 for job searching, 294 outlining, 364–67 paragraphs and, 369 for presentations, 396–98 for résumés, 466–67, 478–82 for sales proposals, 421–23 writer’s checklist for, xxv
writing process and, xxi–xxii organization description, in grant proposals, 239 organization names
abbreviations of, 3 ampersands in, 3, 30–31 capitalization of, 67 as singular nouns, 351 on title pages, 199–200, 422
organizational charts, 364, 541 sample of, 364
organizational newsletters, 346 organizational sales pitch, in proposals, 423
sample of, 432 origins, definitions exploring, 125–26 our / ours, 377, 412 outcomes, in grant proposals, 238–39 outlining, 364–67
abstracts and, 8 brainstorming and, 54
1268
for clarity, 75 coherence and, 77 drafting and, 365, 370, 550 headings in, 249–51 and method of development, 333 for mission statements, 337 numbers in, 251 for organization, 363–64, 365 parallel structure for, 366 types of, 365, 370 unity and, 531 visuals in, 366, 542 writing process and, xxii
outside [of], 367 over [with], 367 overview, in presentations, 396–97 ownership. See possessive case pace, 368
clarity and, 75 in presentations, 402 regulating, 255, 500
page design. See layout and design page numbers, 355
in formal reports, 200 in headers or footers, 248, 309
paintings, italics for titles of, 289, 525 pamphlets
APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 151 italics for titles of, 287, 524
1269
MLA documentation of, 158 panels, brochure, 56–57 paragraphs, 368–71
coherence in, 77, 371 drafting, 370, 550 in e-mail, 169 functions of, 368 length of, 369 outlining, 365, 370 topic sentence of, 368–69 transitions and, 528–29 unity in, 371, 531 in Web content, 551
parallel structure, 371–73 with both . . . and, 53 faulty parallelism, 372–73 for headings, 251 in lists, 319 for nonsexist language, 50 in outlines, 366 in sentence construction, 496
paraphrasing, 373 in active listening, 318 documenting sources and, 134, 385 ethics in writing and, 373 indirect quotations as, 442 in meeting minutes, 333 note-taking and, 349–50
parentheses, 373–74 brackets within, 53–54
1270
commas with, 89, 374 for enclosing elements, 120, 493 numbers in, 355, 374 periods with, 374, 376
parenthetical citations. See citations, in-text parenthetical elements
brackets for, 54, 374 capitalization of, 68 commas with, 85, 465 dashes for, 120, 493 nonrestrictive elements as, 465 parentheses for, 373–74, 493 for sentence variety, 495
part-by-part method of comparison, 92–93 partial adjustments, 18 participial phrases, 382 participles, 535, 537 parts of speech, 374–75 party, 375 passive voice, 545–46
vs. active voice, 544 bad news and, 116 in business writing, 63 ethics in writing and, 179–80, 545 infinitives and, 534 responsibility and, 179–80, 545 wordiness of, 99, 545–46
past participles, 535 past perfect tense, 520 past progressive tense, 520
1271
past tense, 176–77, 520 patents, 107–8 PDF files, 482 Peace Corps, 300 people / persons, 378 per, 375 percent / percentage, 375 percentages, numbers in, 354 perfect / equal / unique, 178–79 perfect participles, 535 perfect tense, 520 periodic sentences, 495, 500–1 periodicals. See also articles in periodicals
currency of, 457 indexes to, 458 italics for titles of, 289, 443, 524–25
periods, 375–77 with abbreviations, 3 commas with, 89 with ellipses, 167 with parentheses, 374, 376 period faults, 376–77 with quotation marks, 376, 444 for run-on sentences, 388
permissions, for copyrighted material, 53, 106–8, 201, 542 person, 377. See also point of view
agreement in, 22, 537–38 in narration, 342 point of view and, 386–87 pronouns and, 414
1272
person / party, 375 personal brand, and job search, 295, 297 personal communications
APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 148–49 MLA documentation of, 158
personal identifying information, 360 personal / personnel, 377 personal names and titles. See names and titles personal pronouns, 413–14
antecedents and, 413–14 in business writing, 63 forms of, 377 point of view and, 386–88
personalities, difficult, 329 personification, 192 persons / people, 378 persuasion, 378
in application cover letters, 36–37 in business plans, 60 ethics in writing and, 378 in grant proposals, 236, 238 in inquiry letters, 260 in openings, 286 in promotional writing, 409 in proposals, 416, 417 in résumés, 467 sample of, 379
photographs, 378–81. See also visuals for annual reports, 33
1273
ethics in writing and, 380–81 functions of, 540
phrases, 381–84 commas with, 85 functions of, 381 gerund, 383–84 infinitive, 383 noun, 384 participial, 382–83 prepositional, 381–82 restrictive and nonrestrictive, 465 verb, 384
pictorial symbols. See symbols picture graphs. See graphs pie graphs. See graphs place names. See geographic features plagiarism, 384–5. See also copyrights, patents, and trademarks
consequences of, 202 documenting sources and, 134 ethics in writing and, 202, 349, 385 note-taking and, 349 repurposing and, 455–56
plain language, 385–86 clarity and, 75 for instructions, 265 point of view and, 386–88 for policies and procedures, 388–90 positive writing and, 390 for Web content, 551 writer’s checklist for, 386
1274
plain-text résumés, 482–83 planning, in collaborative writing, 78–79. See also outlining; preparation plant patents, 107 plays, titles of
capitalization of, 67, 102 italics for, 289, 525
plurals. See also number (grammar) of abbreviations, 3, 36 apostrophes for, 36 of compound words, 97, 352 of foreign words, 196 of nouns, 352 of numbers, 36, 354 possessive case of, 70, 391
podcasts APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 149 MLA documentation of, 158
poems, titles of italics for, 289, 525 quotation marks for, 525
point of view, 386–88. See also “you” viewpoint for business writing, 63 consistent use of, 75, 371 for correspondence, 111–12 ethics in writing and, 388 in narration, 342 person and, 377
policies and procedures, 388–90
1275
decimal number heads for, 366–67 policies, 388 procedures, 389–90 sample of, 389 for social media, 506–7
politeness in correspondence, 112 in global communication, 269 in job interviews, 279 in meetings, 329
portfolios, for résumés, 481–82 position, and emphasis, 172 position descriptions. See job descriptions positive writing, 390
for defining terms, 123 for double negatives, 162 ethics in writing and, 390 in job applications, 302 and plain language, 386 “you” viewpoint, 554
possessive adjectives, 13, 175 possessive case, 391–92
apostrophes for, 35, 391–92 for compound words, 97 of nouns, 70, 391–92 of plurals, 70 of pronouns, 70, 392, 412
post hoc, ergo propter hoc, 321 postal abbreviations, 312 posting to the Web. See blogs and forums
1276
practicing, for presentations, 401, 402–3 predicate adjectives, 14–15 predicate nominative, 494 predicates, 494
complements in, 96 preface, in formal reports, 200–1 prefixes, 392–93
affectation and, 21 hyphens with, 252, 392–93
preparation, 393 analyzing audience needs, 45, 393 for annual reports, 33–34 determining purpose, 434–35 determining scope, 488 for information interviews, 274 for job interviews, 276–78 for research, 456 writer’s checklists for, xxv, 393 writing process and, xviii–xix
prepositional phrases, 381–82 commas with, 90 as modifiers, 394 objects and, 356 overuse of, 382 showing possession, 392
prepositions, 393–95. See also object of preposition agreement in number and, 12–13, 26 at end of sentences, 394 errors with, 395 in idioms, 254
1277
in titles, 394 present participle, 535 present perfect tense, 521
infinitives and, 534 present progressive tense, 520 present tense, 520–21
infinitives and, 534 for instructions, 264
presentation software, 399 presentations, 395–403
anxiety and, 402–3 audience for, 396 delivery techniques for, 401–2 ethics in writing and, 399 infographics for, 258 lists in, 318–20, 400 order-of-importance method of development for, 361–63 practicing, 401 professionalism and, 399 purpose of, 395–96 slides in, 399 structuring, 396–98 technology for, 399 typography for, 400–1 visuals for, 399 writer’s checklists for, 401–2, 403
press releases, 403–5 sample of, 404 writer’s checklist for, 404–5
pretentious language. See affectation
1278
previews, in introductions, 286 primary research, 456–57 principal / principle, 405 privacy statements, for Web sites, 553 problem statement
opening with, 284 in presentations, 396 in proposals, 416, 417, 422
procedures. See policies and procedures process explanation, 405. See also writing process
flowcharts for, 193–95, 541 instructions, 264–67 sequential method of development for, 501
product description in brochures, 57 in business plans, 60–61 in sales letters, 486 in sales proposals, 422, 426 sample of, 426
professional brand, and job search, 296, 297 professional journals, job listings in, 298 professional organizations, online, 298 professionalism notes
acceptances / refusals, 8 adjustment messages, 18 biased language, 50 collaborative writing, 78–79 e-mail, 168 federal job applications, 483 form letters, 197
1279
interviewing for a job, 278 interviewing for information, 274–75 job search, 295, 297 memos, 331 newsletters, 347 presentations, 399 proofreading, 414 résumés, 479, 482 smartphones and meetings, 330 style, 512 telegraphic style, 519
progress and activity reports, 406–8 samples of, 407–8 titles for, 523–24
progressive tense, 520 project description
in grant proposals, 238 in sales proposals, 422
project management, for proposals, 416 projection, in presentations, 402 promotional writing, 409
blogs and forums, 51–53 brochures, 55–59 business plans, 59–62 ethics in writing and, 409 newsletters, 347 press releases, 403–5 sales letters, 486–7 sales proposals, 421–23
pronoun reference, 29, 409–10. See also antecedents
1280
pronoun-antecedent agreement, 22, 25–27. See also agreement with collective nouns, 26, 351 with compound antecedents, 27 with data / datum, 121 with each / every, 25, 166 with everybody / everyone, 26, 181–82 in gender, 25–26, 227, 413 with he / she, 227 with indefinite pronouns, 413 with none, 348 in number, 26–27 with possessive pronouns, 412–13 with this / that / these / those, 12, 26
pronouns, 410–14. See also personal pronouns; pronoun- antecedent agreement
as adjectives, 13 for business writing, 63 case of, 68–71, 412–13 compound, 71, 413 demonstrative, 411 gender of, 25, 227, 413 indefinite, 392, 411 intensive, 411 interrogative, 411 number and, 26–27, 413–14 as objects, 69 person and, 377, 414, 537 personal, 411 plurals of, 352–53 point of view and, 386–88
1281
possessive, 70, 392, 534 reciprocal, 412 reflexive, 411 relative, 411 sexist language and, 25, 50, 248, 413 as subjects, 69, 494 telegraphic style and, 518 for transitions, 527
proofreaders’ marks, 414 proofreading, 414–15
application cover letters, 41 e-mail, 168 professionalism and, 414 proofreaders’ marks, 414 résumés, 467 revision and, 485 writer’s checklist for, 415
proper nouns, 350 capitalization of, 66 italics for, 289
proposals, 415–33. See also grant proposals; sales proposals appendixes for, 36 audience and purpose for, 416 business plans as, 59–62 conclusions, 99–102 context in, 104, 416 cover messages for, 117–18 documenting sources in, 418 ethics in writing and, 421, 422 executive summaries in, 182–83
1282
external, 418–23 feasibility reports for, 187–90 formal, 417–18 informal, 417 internal, 417–18 persuasive writing for, 416, 417 project management for, 416 research, 236–40 sales, 421–23 samples of, 100, 419–20, 424–33 solicited and unsolicited, 418–21 titles for, 523 writer’s checklist for, 417
pseudo- / quasi-, 434 psychological sales points, 486 public domain, 107, 455–56 publication dates. See also dates
in headers or footers, 248, 309 in report titles, 199–200, 524
punctuation, 434 apostrophes, 35–36 brackets, 53–54 colons, 82–84 commas, 85–90 dashes, 120–21 ellipses, 167 exclamation marks, 182 for global communication, 234 hyphens, 251–53 parentheses, 373–74
1283
periods, 375–77 question marks, 436–37 quotation marks, 444 semicolons, 492–93 slashes, 503
purpose, 434–35 audience and, 44–46 of brochures, 56 for business plans, 59–60 clarity and, 75 design and, 306 establishing, xviii, 393 for feasibility reports, 187 of introductions, 286 of listening, 317 of meetings, 325–26 for presentations, 395–96 of proposals, 416 repurposing, 455–56 scope and, 487–88 selecting the medium and, 488 for social media, 505 style and, 109, 510 tone and, 526 unity and, 531 visuals and, 539
quasi- / pseudo-, 434 question marks, 436–37
commas with, 89 questionnaires, 437–42. See also forms
1284
ethics in writing and, 441, 457 sample of, 438–40 writer’s checklist for, 441–42
questions in forms, 223–24 frequently asked (FAQs), 185–87 in inquiry letters, 260–61 for interviewing for information, 274 in job-application forms, 303 in job interviews, 279–80 punctuation for, 436–37 for questionnaires, 441, 442 for research, 457 rhetorical, 397, 485, 524 for transitions, 527, 528 wording, 223–24
quid pro quo, 442 quotation marks, 442–44. See also quotations
for direct quotations, 442–43 ethics in writing and, 443 punctuation with, 182, 444, 493 for titles of works, 289, 443, 525 for words and phrases, 443
quotations, 444–46. See also citations, in-text; documenting sources
block, 136, 154, 446 capitalization of, 66, 443 colons with, 83, 444 commas with, 87, 89, 444 direct, 442–43, 444
1285
ellipses for omissions in, 167, 445 ethics in writing and, 443, 444 incorporating into text, 446 indirect, 442, 445 inserting words into, 53–54, 445 long, 136, 154, 446 in note-taking, 348, 349, 455–56 opening with, 285–86, 396–97 paraphrasing, 373, 385 periods in, 376, 444 plagiarism and, 384, 444 question marks with, 437 quotation marks with, 442–44 within quotations, 444 semicolons with, 444, 493 sic for errors in, 54, 445
racial groups, capitalization names of, 66 radio programs
APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 149–50 MLA documentation of, 158 quotation marks for titles of, 443, 525
ragged-right margins, 309 raise / rise, 447 rambling sentences, 497–98 ranked-choice questions, 223 readers, 447. See also audience really, 447 reason is [because], 447 reasoning. See logic errors
1286
reciprocal pronouns, 412 recommendation letters. See reference letters recommendation reports, 187, 287 recommendations
in abstracts, 6–8 in conclusions, 99–100 in cover message, 422 in feasibility reports, 190 opening with, 284 in reports, 201, 217–18, 454 samples of, 100, 217–18
recruitment firms, 299 redundancy. See also repetition
eliminating, 97, 98–99 of and, 263, 367, 395 one and, 357 reason is [because], 447 up and, 395, 531
refer / allude / elude, 28 reference letters, 447–49
ethics in writing and, 449 sample of, 448
reference works, 459 abbreviations in, 4–5
references. See also reference letters in job applications, 302 in résumés, 467, 481–82
references list (APA), 134. See also APA documentation; documenting sources
documentation models for, 134
1287
in formal reports, 202 in grant proposals, 238 sample page, 142
reflexive pronouns, 411 refusals, 449–52
bad-news patterns for, 114–15 context and, 104 for employment offers, 8–9 samples of, 9, 450–51
regarding / with regard to, 452 regardless, 453 regionalisms, 177 rejections. See bad-news patterns; refusals relative adjectives, 98 relative pronouns, 411
in adjective clauses, 176 for connecting clauses, 76 in sentence fragments, 498 subject-verb agreement with, 23 in subordination, 513 wordiness and, 98
religious groups capitalization of names of, 66
remainder / balance, 48 repetition, 453
for emphasis, 173, 453 for transitions, 453, 527 wordiness from, 98–99, 454
report elements, 454. See also layout and design; reports abstract, 6–8, 200, 205
1288
appendixes, 36, 202 back matter, 202 bibliography, 50–51, 202 body, 201–2, 212–16 conclusion, 99–102, 201, 217–18 cover message, 117–18, 198, 203 executive summary, 182–83, 201, 207–8 explanatory notes, 201 foreword, 200 front matter, 199–201 glossary, 202, 234 headers and footers, 248–49, 309 headings, 249, 309 index, 202, 256, 258 introduction, 201, 209–11, 283–86 list of abbreviations and symbols, 201 list of figures and tables, 200 page numbers, 200 preface, 200–1 problem statement, 284 recommendations, 201, 217–18 references / works-cited list, 202, 219 samples of, 203–19 table of contents, 200, 206, 518 text, 201 title, 523–24 title page, 199–200, 204 visuals, 310–11, 380–81
reports, 454. See also report elements activity, 406
1289
annual, 31–35 APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 151 feasibility, 187–90 investigative, 287, 288 MLA documentation of, 158 progress, 406, 407 pronoun usage in, 63 quotation marks for titles of, 525 recommendation, 187, 287 tone for, 526 trip, 529
repurposing, 455–56 boilerplate material, 106–7 ethics in writing and, 455–56 for form letters, 197–98
reputation, personal, 295 requests for proposals, 236–40, 418. See also invitation for bids research, 456–62. See also documenting sources; Internet research; library resources
for collaborative writing, 78 ethics in writing and, 457 evaluating sources, 461–62 formal reports of, 198–219 interviews, 273–76 for job interviews, 277 methods of, xx–xxi for newsletters, 344, 347 note-taking for, 349–50 observation, 457
1290
for presentations, 395 primary, xx, 456–57 for promotional writing, 409 proposals, 236–40 questionnaires for, 437–42 reference works for, 459–60 secondary, xx–xxi, 457 strategies, 457–60 technology for, 458, 460 writer’s checklist for, xxv writing process and, xx–xxi
resignation letters, 463, 464, 465 samples of, 464, 465
respective / respectively, 463–64 response letters. See inquiries and responses responses
to e-mail, 169, 171 in form design, 223–24 to inquiries, 260–62 to job-interview questions, 279–80
responsibility ethics in writing and, 179–81, 545 in procedures, 389–90 statement of, in sales proposals, 423, 431
restrictive and nonrestrictive elements, 465–66. See also parenthetical elements résumés, 466–83. See also online professional profile
application cover letters and, 36–41, 466 background and, 472, 476–77 in business plans, 62
1291
electronic, 482–83 e-mail and, 482–83 ethics in writing and, 467 length of, 467 organization for, 478–82 plain-text, 482–83 posting online, 297 professionalism and, 479, 482 for returning job Seekers, 477 salary negotiations and, 482 samples of, 468–72, 473–76 scannable, 483 sections in, 478–82
return address, in letters, 312 returning job Seekers, 477 reviewing, xxi, 78 revision, 484–85
in collaborative writing, 78 proofreading and, 415 writer’s checklists for, xxvi 484–85 writing process and, xxiii
RFP. See requests for proposals rhetorical questions, 485
opening with, 397, 485 in titles, 485, 524
rise / raise, 447 roman numerals, in outlines, 366 rules
in page design, 311 in tables, 516–17
1292
run-on sentences, 377, 485 -s endings
for plurals, 352, 354, 391 for verbs, 352–53, 538
salary negotiations acceptances / refusals (for employment) and, 8–9 job applications and, 302 job interviews and, 280 research for, 299 résumés and, 482
sales brochures, 55–59 sales letters, 486–87
ethics in writing and, 487 form letters for, 197 writer’s checklist for, 487
sales proposals, 421–23 conclusions for, 99–102, 423 ethics in writing and, 421, 422 repurposed content for, 422, 455 sample of, 424–33 structure for, 421–23
salutations in business letters, 312, 314 capitalization in, 66 colons in, 82–83 commas in, 89 for e-mail, 169 first names in, 170, 273, 314 in form letters, 197, 198 for international correspondence, 273
1293
for unknown gender, 314 sans serif typeface, 308, 552 scarcely, 161 schedules
charting, 243 chronological order for, 73, 74 for collaborative writing, 79, 243 delivery, in sales proposals, 422, 428 sample of, 244 work, in grant proposals, 239
scholarly abbreviations, 4–5 scope, 487–88
determining, xix–xx, 393 in introduction, 284
screening in maps, 324–25 in page design, 310
sculptures, italics for titles of, 289, 525 search engines, 460–61 search tools, 132 second pages. See continuing pages second person, 377. See also “you” viewpoint
antecedents and, 414 point of view, 386–88
secondary research, 457 sections. See chapters and sections selecting the medium, 488–92
repurposed content and, 455 scope and, 488 technology for, 491
1294
writing process and, xx -self / -selves, 411 semi- / bi-, 49 semicolons, 492–96
for comma splices, 84 in compound sentences, 495 with conjunctive adverbs, 19, 89 for items in series, 87–88, 89 for linking independent clauses, 19, 492 with quotation marks, 444, 493 for run-on sentences, 377 with transitions, 492–93
sentence construction, 493–96. See also sentence faults; sentence types
clauses, 75–76 coherence and, 386 effective, 496 elliptical, 88 emphasis and, 172–73, 493 in formal style, 510 for global communication, 269 predicates, 494 prepositions and, 394 stylistic use, 495–96 subjects, 494 subject-verb-object pattern, 496 variety in, 499–501
sentence endings in lists, 319 within parentheses, 374, 376–77
1295
prepositions at, 394 punctuation for, 182, 376–77, 436–37
sentence faults, 497–98 comma splices, 84 faulty logic, 498 faulty subordination, 497 fragments, 498–99 garbled sentences, 226 loaded sentences, 496 missing subjects, 497 missing verbs, 498 mixed constructions, 338 period faults, 376–77 rambling sentences, 497–98 run-on sentences, 377, 485
sentence fragments, 498–99 with participles, 535 period faults, 376–77
sentence openings. See also introductory elements also at, 29 commas with, 86 conjunctions as, 102 dangling modifiers at, 119 numbers at, 353
sentence outlines, 365 sentence types
complex, 495 compound, 495 compound-complex, 495 declarative, 495
1296
emphasis and, 172–73 exclamatory, 495 imperative, 495 interrogative, 495 loose, 495, 500–1 minor, 496 periodic, 495, 500–1 simple, 172, 494
sentence variety, 172–73, 499–501. See also sentence types; subordination sequential method of development, 333, 501–2
in flowcharts, 193–95 in instructions, 264 in narration, 342 sample of, 501
series of items commas with, 87–88, 90 etc. with, 179 parallel structure for, 372–73 question marks with, 436 semicolons with, 87, 493
serif typeface, 308 service, 502 service internship and “gap year” opportunities, 300 service marks, 108–9 set / sit, 502 sexist language, 49–50. See also biased language
imperative mood for avoiding, 248 Ms. / Miss / Mrs., 314, 341 occupational descriptions and, 49–50
1297
parallel terms for avoiding, 50 pronoun usage and, 50, 248 and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 25–26, 413
shading. See screening shall / will, 502–3, 521 she / he, 248. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement; sexist language she / her / hers, 68–71, 377, 412–13 shifts
functional, 224–25 in mood, tense, or voice, 521
ships, italics for names of, 289 short stories, quotation marks for titles of, 525 SI (International System of Units), 4 sic, 5, 54, 445 sight / site / cite, 73 signatures
for e-mails, 170 for letters, 315 for memos, 331
similes, 192 simple sentences, 172–73, 494 since / as / because, 43–44 single-source publishing, 454n sit / set, 502 site / cite / sight, 73 site preparation, in sales proposals, 422–23
sample of, 429 slang
as nonstandard English, 178
1298
quotation marks and, 443 slashes, 503 slides, for presentations, 399
sample of, 400 so / so that / such, 503 social media, 504–7
and job search, 295, 297 online professional profile, 358–61 photographs (personal) and, 360 platform selection for, 504–5, 506 and professional networking, 492 writer’s checklist for, 506–7 writing style and privacy, 505–7
software. See adapting to new technologies solicited proposals, 418, 420–21 solutions, in sales proposals, 422
sample of, 427 some / somewhat, 507 some time / sometime / sometimes, 507 songs. See musical works, titles of sort / kind / type, 12–13, 26–27 sort of, 12–13, 26–27, 304 source lines, for visuals, 246, 517, 542 sources, citing. See citations, in-text; documenting sources sources, of information. See research spacing
for brochures, 58 for forms, 224 for letters, 312, 314–15 white space, 310, 312
1299
spam, e-mail, 168, 169 spatial method of development, 333, 508–9
sample of, 508 specific-to-general method of development, 228, 333
sample of, 228 speeches, MLA documentation of, 158. See also presentations spell checkers, 414, 485, 509 spelling, 509
hyphens and, 253 split infinitives, 534–35 squinting modifiers, 340 stacked modifiers, 14, 235, 339 standard English, 177, 510. See also grammar; usage statement of need, in grant proposals, 238 statistics. See numerical data status reports. See progress and activity reports status updates in social media, 504–5 steps. See instructions; process explanation; sequential method of development stereotypes. See biased language; sexist language stockholders statement, in annual reports, 32 stubs, in tables, 516 style, 510–12. See also business writing style; plain language; telegraphic style
professionalism and, 512 writer’s checklist for, 512
style manuals, 133–36 stylistic use, in sentence construction, 495–96 subheadings. See headings subject directories, 461
1300
subject lines capitalization in, 67, 117 for e-mail, 117, 169, 524 in letters, 314 for memos, 117, 524 for trip reports, 529
subjective case, 69, 412–13 subjective complements, 96
gerunds as, 533 nouns as, 351 pronouns as, 69 subject-verb agreement with, 23
subjects, 494. See also subject-verb agreement active-voice naming, 545 compound, 494 gerunds as, 533 missing, 497, 498 nouns as, 351
subject-verb agreement, 22–27, 537–38. See also agreement with abstract nouns, 24 with collective nouns, 24, 351 with compound subjects, 24–25 with data / datum, 121 with each / every, 23, 166 with everybody / everyone, 181–82 with indefinite pronouns, 23, 413 with intervening words and phrases, 22 with inverted word order, 23 with measurements, 23 with none, 348
1301
with nor / or, 348 with number, 23 with one of those . . . who, 357 with subjective complements, 23 with this / that / these / those, 12–13 with titles of works, 24 with who / which / that, 23–24
subject-verb-object pattern, 496 subjunctive mood, 340–41 subordinate clauses, 75–76. See also dependent clauses subordinating conjunctions
for connecting clauses, 75–76, 102–3 list of common, 103 in sentence fragments, 498 for subordination, 513–14
subordination, 513–14 bad news and, 114–15 for clarity, 75 for comma splices, 84 for conciseness, 98 effective, 75–76, 496 faulty, 497–98 vs. parentheses, 374 for sentence variety, 500–1, 513–14
subscription newsletters, 346 substantives, 494 such / so / so that, 503 such as, in sentence fragments, 498 suffixes, 514
affectation and, 21
1302
hyphens with, 252 summaries
abstracts and, 6–8 in annual reports, 32 in conclusions, 99–100, 101 executive, 182–83 in grant proposals, 237 in meeting minutes, 333 for note-taking, 349, 444 opening with, 284 in résumés, 479 for transitions, 527
superlative form of adjectives, 13 of adverbs, 20
supplement / augment, 46 supporting documents, 62. See also appendixes supposedly / allegedly, 27 surveys. See questionnaires sweeping generalizations, 320–21 symbols
in flowcharts, 193–95 functions of, 541 for global communication, 232–34 for graphs, 245, 247 keys for, 542 list of, in reports, 201 proofreaders’ marks, 414–15 samples of, 195 standardized, 193–95, 233
1303
in tables, 516 synonyms, 514–15
coordinated, 97 for defining terms, 123 repetition and, 453 in thesaurus, 523 word choice and, 549
syntax, 515 tables, 516–18. See also visuals
for comparisons, 93 functions of, 540 vs. graphs, 240, 516 informal, 517–18 list of, 200, 543 numbering, 200, 355, 516 samples of, 93, 517 screening (shading) in, 310
tables of contents, 518 for FAQs, 186 in formal reports, 200, 206 parallel structure for, 372 sample of, 206
taglines, in résumés, 467, 478 sample of, 471
tags, Web, 53 team writing. See collaborative writing technical terminology
affectation and, 21 ethics in writing and, 180 in global communication, 269
1304
in glossaries, 234–35 in instructions, 264 jargon, 291 plain language for, 385–86 in proposals, 416 word choice and, 549
technology. See adapting to new technologies teleconferences, 491 telegraphic style, 518–19
caution with, 98 in instructions, 264 professionalism and, 519
telephone calls, 275, 491 television programs
APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 149–50 italics for titles of, 289, 525 MLA documentation of, 158 quotation marks for titles of, 443, 525
templates, 312 temporary employment agencies, 298–99 tenant / tenet, 519 tense, 519–21, 538. See also verbs; voice
helping verbs and, 537 for infinitives, 534 in narration, 342 shifts in, avoiding, 521
testing. See usability testing text. See body text messaging, 490, 522
1305
than / as, and pronoun case, 69, 71 thank-you notes, 276, 281 that
with indirect quotations, 442, 445 with one of those . . . , 357 as pronoun, 411 for restrictive clauses, 466
that / those and agreement in number, 12, 23, 24, 26 as demonstrative adjectives, 12 as demonstrative pronouns, 411
that / where, 547 that / which / who, 24, 522 the, 12, 42 then. See conjunctive adverbs there, as expletive, 183 there / their / they’re, 522–23 therefore. See conjunctive adverbs thesaurus, 523 they / them / their / theirs, 68–71, 377, 412–13 third person, 377
antecedents and, 414 in narration, 342 point of view, 386–87
this / these and agreement in number, 12–13, 26 as demonstrative adjectives, 12–13 as demonstrative pronouns, 411 pronoun references with, 410
thumbnails, in page design, 311
1306
thus. See conjunctive adverbs time
in global communication, 269, 273 numbers for, 355
title page in formal reports, 199–200, 204 in grant proposals, 237 in sales proposals, 422 sample of, 204
titles, 523–25. See also names and titles capitalization of, 67, 524 colons in, 82–83 in headers or footers, 248, 309 italics for, 287, 289, 524–25 for memos, e-mails, and online postings, 524 for newsletter articles, 345 prepositions in, 394 question marks in, 436 quotation marks for, 289, 443, 525 for reports, 199–200, 204, 523–24 rhetorical questions in, 485, 524 setting tone with, 523, 526 special cases, 525 subject-verb agreement with, 24
to in prepositional phrases, 383 as sign of infinitive, 383, 534, 537
to / too / two, 525–26 tone, 526
in abstracts, 6
1307
for adjustment messages, 15 for annual reports, 34 for collection letters, 82 for complaints, 94 context and, 104 for correspondence, 109–12 for e-mail, 526 goodwill and, 111–12 for incident reports, 256 for memos, 526 for refusals, 451 for reports, 526 of titles, 523, 526 writer’s checklist for, 112 “you” viewpoint and, 554
topic outlines, 365, 370 topic sentences, 368–69
paragraph unity and, 371 placement of, 369
topics in headers or footers, 248, 309 in headings, 249 in indexes, 160
trade journals, job listings in, 298 trademarks, 108–9 training requirements, in sales proposals, 423
sample of, 430 trains, italics for names of, 289 transition, 527–29
for clarity, 75
1308
for coherence, 77, 371 commas with, 85–86 conjunctions as, 102–3 enumeration for, 371, 527, 528 methods of, 527 in narration, 342 between paragraphs, 528–29 in presentations, 398 in process explanations, 405 for quotations, 446 repetition for, 453, 527 semicolons with, 492–93 telegraphic style and, 518 unity and, 531 for Web content, 551 words and phrases for, 528
transitive verbs, 356, 536 transmittals. See cover messages (or transmittals) trip reports, 529
chronological order for, 73 sample of, 530
trouble reports. See also incident reports chronological order for, 73
try to, 529 tutorials, online and video, 11 Twitter, 297, 504–7 two / to / too, 525–26 type / sort / kind, 12–13, 26 typographical errors, 414, 485 typography, 307–9
1309
for brochures, 58–59 for emphasis, 173, 308 ethics in writing and, 178 for presentation visuals, 399 for résumés, 482–83 typeface and type size, 307–8 in Web design, 552
underlining for emphasis, 173 for italics, 289
understatement, 192 uninterested / disinterested, 129 unique / perfect / equal, 178–79 United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO), 107–8 unity, 531
in paragraphs, 371 transitions and, 529
unknown authors APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 147 MLA documentation of, 157
unpublished data, APA documentation of, 150 unsolicited proposals, 421 up, 395, 531 upon / on / onto, 357 uppercase. See all-capital letters URLs
hyphens in, 253 slashes in, 503
us / our / ours, , 377, 412
1310
usability testing for forms, 220 for global graphics, 234 for instructions, 266
usage, 531 clarity and, 75 grammar and, 235–36
user manuals, 11 utility patents, 108 utilize, 532 vague words, 533
clichés as, 76 as gobbledygook, 235 and word choice, 549–50
vendor description, in sales proposals, 423 sample of, 432
verbals, 533–35 gerunds, 383–84 infinitives, 534–35 as nonfinite verbs, 537 participles, 535 in sentence fragments, 498–99
verbs, 536–38. See also mood; subject-verb agreement; tense; voice
action, 69, 481 as adjectives, 14, 499 agreement with subject, 22–27, 537–38 finite and nonfinite, 537 forms of, 537 in idioms, 394
1311
intransitive, 305, 536–37 linking, 536 missing, 498 mood of, 340–41 phrases as, 381–84, 384 plurals of, 352 as predicates, 494 properties of, 537–38 tense of, 519–21 transitive, 356 types of, 536–37 voice of, 543–46 weak, 348
version management, 132 very, 538 via, 538 video résumés, 302 video tutorials, 11 videoconferencing, 491 videos
APA documentation of, 139 CMS documentation of, 149 MLA documentation of, 157
vision statements, in business plans, 61 visual logic, in page design, 309 visuals, 538–43. See also labels; numbering
for annual reports, 34 APA documentation of, 139 boxes for, 311 captions for, 311, 380
1312
CMS documentation of, 150 copyright and, 164, 380, 542 for description, 128 distortion in, 242, 539 drawings, 160–65, 540 ethics in writing and, 399, 539, 542 flowcharts, 193–95, 541 for global communication, 228–32 graphs, 232–34, 540 guidelines for selecting, 540–41 icons, 310–11, 541 indexing, 256 infographics, 258–60 for instructions, 162–65, 265 integrating with text, 539–40 in layout and design, 310–11 list of figures and tables, 200, 543 maps, 323–25, 540 MLA documentation of, 149 for newsletters, 346, 347 organizational charts, 364, 541 outlining and, 366, 539 photographs, 378–81, 540 for presentations, 399–401 source lines for, 246–47, 517, 543 in spatial method of development, 508–9 symbols, 541 tables, 516–18, 540 types of, 539 for Web design, 552
1313
writer’s checklist for, 542–43 voice, 538, 543–46. See also active voice; passive voice
active, 543–44 ethics in writing and, 545 helping verbs and, 537 passive, 545–46 in presentations, 402–3 shifts in, avoiding, 544
voice mail, 490 volunteer work
and job search, 294 on résumés, 471
wait for / wait on, 547 warnings, in instructions, 182, 265 was / were, 340–41 we
in business writing style, 63, 388 weak verbs, 348. See also nominalizations; voice Web addresses. See URLs Web conferencing, 491 Web design. See also layout and design; writing for the Web
for forms, 220–24 headings for, 551 icons, 310–11 links in, 552–53 lists for, 551 posting documents, 553 for résumés, 482–83 typography for, 308, 552
Web forums. See blogs and forums
1314
Web logs. See blogs and forums Web research. See Internet research Web sites. See also blogs and forums; Internet research; writing for the Web
APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 148 copyright and, 106–7 currency of, 457 evaluating, 462, 553 FAQs on, 185–87 functions of, 492 as information sources, 273–76, 457 internal and external, 52 italics for titles of, 289 résumés on, 298–99, 482–83
well / good, 235 were / was, 340 when / where / that, 547 when and if, 547 where . . . at, 547 where / that, 547 whether, 547–48 whether . . . or, 102 which
for nonrestrictive clauses, 466, 522 as pronoun, 411 subject-verb agreement with, 25 vs. who / that, 23, 522
while, 548 white space, in page design, 310, 312. See also spacing
1315
whiteboards, 399 who
with one of those . . ., 357 who / that / which, 24, 411, 522
who / whom, 411, 548 whole-by-whole method of comparison, 92 who’s / whose / of which, 548–49 Wikipedia
copyright and, 106–7, 384–85 as information source, 458
wikis CMS documentation of, 148 for collaborative writing, 79 MLA documentation of, 157
will / shall, 502–3, 521 with regard to / regarding, 452 word choice, 549–50
abstract / concrete words, 5–6 in adjustment messages, 17 affectation and, 21 ambiguity and, 30 buzzwords, 64 clichés, 76 colloquialisms, 177 connotation / denotation and, 103 deceptive language and, 180 ethics in writing and, 180 figures of speech, 192–93 for global communication, 269 gobbledygook, 235
1316
idioms, 254 jargon, 291 localisms, 178 malapropisms, 323 in mission statements, 337–38 outdated words, 21 slang, 178 standard vs. nonstandard English, 177 thesaurus for, 523 tone and, 526 usage conventions and, 236, 531 vague words, 533
word divisions, hyphens in, 253 word meanings. See also definitions
capitalization and, 65 connotation / denotation in, 103
word order. See also sentence construction emphasis and, 496 and sentence variety, 500 subject-verb-object pattern, 496 syntax, 515
wordiness. See also conciseness as affectation, 21 causes of, 98 as gobbledygook, 235 of passive voice, 99, 544 rambling sentences, 497 that and, 522
word-processing software. See adapting to new technologies words used as words
1317
italics for, 289 plurals of, 36
work plan, in sales proposals, 422 workflow management, 132 works-cited list (MLA), 135. See also documenting sources; MLA documentation
documentation models for, 154–58 in formal reports, 202, 219 in grant proposals, 238 samples of, 160, 219
writer’s checklists abbreviations, 2–3 annual reports, 35 awkwardness, eliminating, 47 brochures, 58–59 collaborative writing, 79 conciseness, 98–99 correspondence, 112–13, 117 drawings, 165 e-mail, 169, 171 ethics in writing, 180–81 evaluating sources, 462 executive summaries, 183 FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), 186–87 global communication, 232 goodwill, establishing, 112–13 grant proposals, 240 graphs, 246–47 headings, 251 infographics, 260
1318
instant messaging and live chat, 263 international correspondence, 273 interviewing for information, 275–76 job applications, 302 job descriptions, 293 lists, 319 maps, 323–25 meetings, 330 minutes of meetings, 334–35 netiquette, 169 newsletter articles, 345–46 note-taking, 349–50 plain language, 386 preparation, 393 presentations, 400–1, 403 press releases, 404–5 proofreading, 415 proposals, 417 questionnaires, 441–42 research, 460, 462 revision, 484–85 sales letters, 487 for social media, 506–7 style, 512 tone, 112–13 visuals, 542–43 writing a draft, 550 writing process, xxv–xxvi
writing a draft, 550. See also writing process collaborative writing and, 79
1319
conclusions, xxiii, 99–102 introductions, xxii–xxiii, 283–86 mission statements, 337 outlining, xxii, 364–67 visuals and, 542 writer’s checklists for, xxv–xxvi, 550–54
writing block, in forms, 223 writing for the Web, 551–53. See also blogs and forums; Web design
ethics in writing and, 553 technology for, 554
writing line, in forms, 223 writing process
drafting, xxii, 550 organization, xxi, 363–64 preparation, xviii-xx, 393 research, xx–xxi, 456–62 reviewing, xxiii, 78 revision, xxiii, 484–85 steps to success in, xvii–xviii writer’s checklist for, xxv–xxvi
writing style. See business writing style; style years. See dates yes, comma with, 85 “you” viewpoint, 554
audience and, 45 in business writing style, 63 in correspondence, 111–12 in FAQs, 186–87 in form letters, 197
1320
in persuasive writing, 378 you / your / yours, 68–71, 377, 412–13 your / you’re, 554
1321
Commonly Misused Words and Phrases A a / an a lot above absolutely accept / except ad hoc adapt / adept / adopt affect / effect affinity all ready / already all right all together / altogether allegedly / supposedly allude / elude / refer allusion / illusion also amount / number and/or as / because / since as much as / more than as such as well as augment / supplement average / median / mean
1322
awhile / a while
B bad / badly balance / remainder beside / besides between / among between you and me bi- / semi- biannual / biennial both . . . and
C can / may cannot capital / capitol center on cite / sight / site compare / contrast complement / compliment compose / constitute / comprise consensus continual / continuous credible / creditable critique
D
1323
data de facto / de jure defective / deficient definite / definitive differ from / differ with different from / different than discreet / discrete disinterested / uninterested due to / because of
E each economic / economical e.g. / i.e. equal / unique / perfect etc. everybody / everyone everyday / every day explicit / implicit
F fact few / a few fewer / less figuratively/literally fine first / firstly forceful / forcible
1324
foreword / forward former / latter
G good / well
H he / she
I imply / infer in / into in order to in terms of incident/incidence indiscreet / indiscrete inside / inside of insure / ensure / assure interface its / it’s
K kind of / sort of know-how
L
1325
lay / lie lend / loan like / as literally/figuratively loose / lose
M maybe / may be media / medium Ms. / Miss / Mrs. mutual / common
N nature needless to say none nor / or
O OK / okay on / onto / upon one one of those . . . who only outside [of] over [with]
1326
P party per percent / percentage personal / personnel persons / people principal / principle pseudo- / quasi-
Q quid pro quo
R raise / rise really reason is [because] regarding / with regard to regardless respective / respectively
S service set / sit shall / will so / so that / such some / somewhat
1327
some time / sometime / sometimes
T tenant / tenet that / which / who there / their / they’re to / too / two try to
U up utilize
V very via
W wait for / wait on when / where / that whether while who / whom who’s / whose / of which
Y
1328
your / you’re
1329
Model Documents and Figures by Topic Use the following list as a quick reference for finding selected
samples of business writing and visuals by topic. See also the
complete Contents by Topic on the inside front cover of this
book. For additional models, see the LaunchPad Solo for
Professional Writers at launchpadworks.com/.
Business Writing Documents and Elements A–1 Informative Abstract (from a Report)
B–2 Front and Back Panels of a Bifold Brochure
B–3 Center Panels of a Bifold Brochure
F–1 Feasibility Report
F–5 Headline Lead
F–6 Formal Report
I–1 Incident Report
I–2 Index Entry (with Main Entry, Subentries, and Sub-
subentries)
I–6 Illustrated Instructions
1330
I–10 Investigative Report
J–1 Job Description
M–6 Mission Statement
N–2 Newsletter Article
P–3 Procedures Chart
P–5 Press Release
P–6 Progress Report (Using Letter Format)
P–7 Activity Report (Using E-mail Format)
P–8 Special-Purpose Internal Proposal
P–9 Sales Proposal
S–2 Sequential Method of Development
S–5 Spreadsheet
T–3 Trip Report (Using E-mail Format)
Design and Visuals D–2 Illustrated Description
D–3 Classification
1331
D–10 Conventional Line Drawing
D–11 Exploded-View Drawing
D–12 Cutaway Drawing
F–2 Flowchart Using Labeled Blocks
F–3 Flowchart Using Pictorial Symbols
F–4 Common ISO Flowchart Symbols (with Annotations)
F–7 Form (for a Medical Claim)
G–5 Graphics for U.S. (left) and Global (right) Audiences
G–6 International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
Symbols
G–7 Double-Line Graph (with Shading)
G–8 Distorted and Distortion-Free Expressions of Data
G–9 Bar Graph (Quantities of Different Items During a Fixed
Period)
G–10 Bar (Column) Graph (Showing the Parts That Make Up the
Whole)
G–11 Gantt Chart Showing Project Schedule
1332
G–12 Pie Graph (Showing Percentages of the Whole)
G–13 Picture Graph
H–1 Header and Footer
H–2 Headings Used in a Document
I–3 Infographic
L–1 Primary Components of Letter Characters
L–2 Type Sizes (6- to 14-Point Type)
L–5 Bulleted List in a Paragraph
M–1 Map
O–3 Organizational Chart
T–1 Elements of a Table
T–2 Informal Table
V–1 Chart for Choosing Appropriate Visuals
Correspondence A–4 Acknowledgment
A–5 Adjustment (When Company Takes Responsibility)
1333
A–6 Partial Adjustment
C–3 First-Stage Collection Letter
C–4 Second-Stage Collection Letter
C–5 Third-Stage Collection Letter
C–9 Complaint Message (Sent as E-mail)
C–12 A Direct-Pattern Message (Good News)
C–13 A Courteous Indirect-Pattern Message (Bad News)
C–14 Cover Message
E–1 E-mail Signature Block
G–3 Ineffective Global Business Communication
G–4 Effective Global Business Communication
I–4 Inquiry
I–5 Response to an Inquiry
I–7 Inappropriate International Correspondence (Draft Marked
for Revision)
I–8 Appropriate International Correspondence
1334
L–3 Full-Block-Style Letter (with Letterhead)
L–4 Alternative Headers for the Second Page of a Letter
M–4 Typical Memo Format (Printed or Attached to E-mail)
R–1 Reference Letter (Printed on Letterhead Stationery)
R–2 Refusal with Low Stakes
R–3 Refusal with High Stakes
S–1 Choosing the Appropriate Medium
Job Search and Application A–2 Acceptance (for Employment)
A–3 Refusal (for Employment)
A–7 Partial Job Ad (Description and Requirements)
A–8 Application Cover Letter (Graduate Applying for a Graphic
Design Job)
A–9 Application Cover Letter Sent as an E-mail (College Student
Applying for an Internship)
A–10 Application Cover Letter (Applicant with Years of
Experience)
I–9 Follow-up Correspondence
1335
O–1 Online Profile
R–4 Resignation Letter (to Accept a Better Position)
R–5 Resignation Memo (Under Negative Conditions)
R–6 Student Résumé (for an Entry-Level Position)
R–7 Résumé (Highlighting Professional Credentials)
R–8 Recent Graduate Résumé (for Graphic Design Job)
R–9 Résumé (Applicant with Management Experience)
R–10 Résumé (Experienced Applicant Seeking Career Change)
R–11 Advanced Résumé (Combining Functional and
Chronological Elements)
Presentations and Meetings M–2 Meeting Agenda
M–3 E-mail Announcing a Meeting with an Attached Agenda
M–5 Minutes of a Meeting (Partial Section)
P–4 Presentation Slides
Research and Documentation D–4 APA Sample Page (from a Report)
1336
D–5 APA Sample List of References
D–6 CMS Sample Page (from a Report)
D–7 CMS Sample Bibliography
D–8 MLA Sample Page (from a Report)
D–9 MLA Sample List of Works Cited
Q–1 Questionnaire
Q–2 Long Quotation (APA Style)
Organization, Writing, and Revision C–2 Chronological Method of Development
C–6 Whole-by-Whole Method of Comparison
C–7 Part-by-Part Method of Comparison
C–10 Conclusion
D–1 Simple Description
D–3 Classification (Tools Placed into Categories)
G–1 General-to-Specific Method of Development
G–2 Specific-to-General Method of Development
1337
N–1 Narration from an Accident Report
O–2 Decreasing Order-of-Importance Method of Development
P–1 Persuasive Memo
S–1 Choosing the Appropriate Medium
S–3 Comparison of Social-Media Platforms
S–4 Spatial Description with Precise Measurements
1338
Digital resources to enhance your professional writing course
LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing offers
online tutorials on today’s most relevant digital
writing topics, from content management to
personal branding. Students develop the
writing skills they need to succeed both in the
classroom and in the workplace and can
explore today’s technologies in clickable,
assignable learning sequences organized by popular
professional writing topics. Walk through various report styles
to see how medium affects message, or discover ways to use
free online tools for presentations, collaboration, multimodal
editing, and more. Get all our great resources and activities in
one fully customizable space online; then use our tools with
your own content.
LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing can be packaged at a
significant discount with The Business Writer’s Handbook.
Digital Tips provide step-by-step guidance on how to use technology to support workplace writing, including synchronizing data, assessing software and hardware,
1339
creating templates, and organizing productive online meetings. Sample documents provide a wide range of effective professional writing models for students to emulate, including emails, résumés, cover letters, reports, proposals, brochures, and questionnaires. Tutorials walk students through maximizing free online tools to access projects across platforms, design dynamic presentations, develop podcasts, manage their personal brand, and build common citations in APA and MLA styles. Adaptive quizzing for targeted learning, skills practice, and grammar help. LearningCurve, a game-like adaptive quizzing program, helps students focus on the writing and grammar skills with which they need the most help. When they get a question wrong, feedback tells them why and links them to additional instruction.
Order ISBN 978-1-319-23939-8 to package LaunchPad Solo for
Professional Writing with The Business Writer’s Handbook to
ensure your students can take full advantage.
Students who rent or buy a used book can purchase access and
instructors can request access at launchpadworks.com.
1340
1341
目录
About This Book 2 Cover Page 2 Inside Front Cover 3 Halftitle Page-1 14 About the Authors 15 Title Page 17 Copyright Page 18 Contents 20 Preface 21 Five Steps to Successful Writing 33 Checklist of the Writing Process 47 Halftitle Page-2 50
A 51 a / an 52 a lot 53 abbreviations 54
Using Abbreviations 54 Forming Abbreviations 56
Names of Organizations 56 Measurements 57 Personal Names and Titles 57 Common Scholarly Abbreviations and Terms 58
above 60 absolutely 61 abstract / concrete words 62 abstracts 63
Types of Abstracts 63 Writing Strategies 65
accept / except 66 acceptances / refusals (for employment) 67 acknowledgments 69
1342
acronyms and initialisms (see abbreviations) 70 active voice (see voice) 71 ad hoc 72 adapt / adept / adopt 73 adapting to new technologies 74 adjectives 76
Limiting Adjectives 76 Articles 76 Demonstrative Adjectives 77 Possessive Adjectives 78 Numeral Adjectives 78 Indefinite Adjectives 78
Comparison of Adjectives 79 Placement of Adjectives 79 Use of Adjectives 80
adjustment messages 83 Full Adjustments 86 Partial Adjustments 87
adverbs 88 Types of Adverbs 89 Comparison of Adverbs 90 Placement of Adverbs 91
affect / effect 92 affectation 93 affinity 95 agreement 96
Subject-Verb Agreement 97 Compound Subjects 101 Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement 102
Gender 102 Number 103 Compound Antecedents 105
allegedly / supposedly 106 all ready / already 107
1343
all right 108 all together / altogether 109 allude / elude / refer 110 allusion / illusion 111 allusions 112 also 113 ambiguity 114 amount / number 116 ampersands 117 and / or 118 annual reports 119
Structure and Parts 119 Financial Highlights 120 Statement to Shareholders 121 Narrative Section 121 Financial Statement 122 Board of Directors and Company Officers 122
Preparing the Report 123 Design and Visuals 124
antonyms 126 apostrophes 127
Showing Possession 127 Indicating Omission 127 Forming Plurals 127
appendixes 129 application cover letters 130
Opening 135 Body 135 Closing 136 Proofreading and Follow-up 136
appositives 138 articles 139 as / because / since 142 as much as / more than 143
1344
as such 144 as well as 145 audience 146
Analyzing Your Audience’s Needs 146 Writing for Varied and Multiple Audiences 147
augment / supplement 149 average / median / mean 150 awhile / a while 151 awkwardness 152
B 153 bad / badly 154 balance / remainder 155 beside / besides 156 between / among 157 between you and me 158 bi- / semi- 159 biannual / biennial 160 biased language 161
Sexist Language 161 bibliographies 163 blogs and forums 165
Organizational Uses 166 Writing Style 166
both . . . and 169 brackets 170 brainstorming 171 brochures 174
Types of Brochures 174 Designing a Brochure 174
Cover Panel 177 First Inside Panel 178 Subsequent Panels 178
bulleted lists (see lists) 180 business plans 181
1345
Purposes and Audience 181 Format, Length, and Sections 182 Company Description and Strategy 183
Business Description 183 Vision and Mission Statements 183 Goals and Milestones 184 Management and Key Team Members 184
Market Analysis and Strategy 185 Marketing Plan 185 Financial Analysis 186 Supporting Documents 186
business writing style 188 buzzwords 190
C 191 can / may 192 cannot 193 capital / capitol 194 capitalization 195
Proper Nouns 195 Common Nouns 196 First Words 196 Specific Groups 197 Specific Places 197 Specific Institutions, Events, Concepts 198 Titles of Works 198 Professional and Personal Titles 199 Abbreviations and Letters 199 Miscellaneous Capitalizations 199
case 201 Subjective Case 202 Objective Case 203 Possessive Case 204 Appositives 204 Determining the Case of Pronouns 205
1346
cause-and-effect method of development 207 Evaluating Evidence 207 Linking Causes to Effects 209
center on 210 chronological method of development 211 cite / sight / site 214 clarity 215 clauses 217 clichés 219 coherence 220 collaborative writing 221
Tasks of the Collaborative Writing Team 221 Planning 222 Research and Writing 222 Reviewing 223 Revising 223
Using Collaborative Writing Software 224 collection letters 226 colons 230
Colons in Sentences 230 Colons with Salutations, Titles, Citations, and Numbers 231 Punctuation and Capitalization with Colons 231 Unnecessary Colons 232
comma splice 233 commas 234
Linking Independent Clauses 235 Enclosing Elements 235 Introducing Elements 237
Clauses and Phrases 237 Words and Quotations 238
Separating Items in a Series 239 Clarifying and Contrasting 240 Showing Omissions 240 Using with Numbers and Names 240
1347
Using with Other Punctuation 242 Avoiding Unnecessary Commas 243
compare / contrast 245 comparison 246 comparison method of development 247 complaints 251 complement / compliment 254 complements 255 compose / constitute / comprise 257 compound words 258 conciseness 259
Causes of Wordiness 259 conclusions 263 conjunctions 268 connotation / denotation 270 consensus 271 context 272
Assessing Context 273 Signaling Context 274
continual / continuous 276 contractions 277 copyrights, patents, and trademarks 278
Copyrights 278 Permissions 279 Exceptions 279
Patents 281 Trademarks 282
correspondence 284 Audience and Writing Style 285 Openings and Closings 286 Goodwill and the “You” Viewpoint 287 Direct and Indirect Patterns 290
Direct Pattern 290 Indirect Pattern 292
1348
Clarity and Emphasis 295 Lists 296 Headings 296 Subject Lines 297
cover messages (or transmittals) 299 credible / creditable 301 critique 302
D 303 dangling modifiers 304 dashes 305 data 308 dates 309 de facto / de jure 311 defective / deficient 312 defining terms 313 definite / definitive 315 definition method of development 316
Extended Definition 316 Definition by Analogy 317 Definition by Cause 317 Definition by Components 318 Definition by Exploration of Origin 318 Negative Definition 319
description 321 design (see layout and design) 325 differ from / differ with 326 different from / different than 327 direct address 328 discreet / discrete 329 disinterested / uninterested 330 division-and-classification method of development 331
Division 331 Classification 332
document management 336
1349
Document-Management Systems 336 documenting sources 339
APA Documentation 342 APA In-Text Citations 343 APA Documentation Models 344 APA Sample Pages 351
CMS Documentation 355 CMS Footnotes and Endnotes 355 CMS Documentation Models 357 CMS Sample Pages 371
MLA Documentation 375 MLA In-Text Citations 375 MLA Documentation Models 376 MLA Sample Pages 383
double negatives 388 drawings 390 due to / because of 395
E 396 each 397 economic / economical 398 editing (see revision and proofreading) 399 e.g. / i.e. 400 ellipses 401 e-mail 403
Review and Confidentiality 403 Writing and Design 406
emphasis 410 Achieving Emphasis 410
Position 410 Climactic Order 410 Sentence Length 411 Sentence Type 411 Active Voice 412 Repetition 412
1350
Intensifiers 412 Direct Statements 413 Long Dashes 413 Typographical Devices 413
English as a second language 414 Count and Mass Nouns 415 Articles and Modifiers 415 Gerunds and Infinitives 417 Adjective Clauses 418 Present Perfect Verb Tense 418 Present Progressive Verb Tense 419
English, varieties of 420 Colloquial English 420 Dialectal English 421 Localisms 421 Slang 421
equal / unique / perfect 423 etc 424 ethics in writing 425 euphemisms 429 everybody / everyone 430 everyday / every day 431 exclamation marks 432 executive summaries 433 expletives 435 explicit / implicit 436 exposition 437
F 438 fact 439 FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) 440
Questions to Include 441 Organization 441 Placement 442
feasibility reports 444
1351
Report Sections 447 Introduction 447 Body 447 Conclusion 447 Recommendation 447
few / a few 448 fewer / less 449 figuratively / literally 450 figures of speech 451
Types of Figures of Speech 452 fine 454 first / firstly 455 flowcharts 456 footnotes (see documenting sources) 460 forceful / forcible 461 foreign words in English 462 foreword / forward 463 form letters 464
When to Use Form Letters 464 Writing Form Letters 465 Repurposing Form Letters 466
formal reports 467 Front Matter 469
Title Page 469 Abstract 470 Table of Contents 470 List of Figures 471 List of Tables 471 Foreword 471 Preface 472 List of Abbreviations and Symbols 472
Body 472 Executive Summary 472 Introduction 473
1352
Text 473 Conclusions 473 Recommendations 473 Explanatory Notes 473 References (or Works Cited) 474
Back Matter 475 Appendixes 475 Bibliography 475 Glossary 475 Index 475
Sample Formal Report 476 format 510 former / latter 511 forms 512
Choosing Paper or Digital 514 Designing a Form 515
Entry Lines and Fields 516 Sequencing Entries 516
Writing Questions 517 forums (see blogs and forums) 520 fragments (see sentence fragments) 521 functional shift 522
G 523 garbled sentences 524 gender 526 general and specific methods of development 527
General to Specific 528 Specific to General 528
global communication 530 global graphics 536 glossaries 540 gobbledygook 541 good / well 542 grammar 543
1353
grant proposals 545 Cover Message 546 Title Page 546 Application Form 547 Introduction 547 Literature Review 548 Project Narrative 548
Project Description 548 Project Outcomes 549 Budget Narrative 550 Task Schedule 550
Organization Description 550 Conclusion 551 Attachments 551
graphs 553 Line Graphs 553 Bar Graphs 555 Pie Graphs 558 Picture Graphs 559
H 563 he / she 564 headers and footers 565 headings 567
General Heading Style 567 Decimal Numbering System 569
hyphens 570 Hyphens with Compound Words 570 Hyphens with Modifiers 570 Hyphens with Prefixes and Suffixes 571 Hyphens and Clarity 571 Other Uses of the Hyphen 572
I 574 idioms 575 illustrations (see visuals) 577
1354
imply / infer 578 in / into 579 in order to 580 in terms of 581 incident / incidence 582 incident reports 583 indexing 586 indiscreet / indiscrete 588 infographics 589 inquiries and responses 593 inside / inside of 597 instant messaging and live chat 598 instructions 600
Writing Instructions 600 Illustrating Instructions 603
insure / ensure / assure 606 intensifiers 607 interface 608 interjections 609 international correspondence 610
Cultural Differences in Correspondence 610 Cross-Cultural Examples 611
interviewing for information 618 Determining the Proper Person to Interview 618 Preparing for the Interview 618 Conducting the Interview 619 Expanding Your Notes Soon After the Interview 620 Interviewing by Phone or E-mail 620
interviewing for a job 623 Before the Interview 623 During the Interview 627
Behavior 628 Responses 629 Salary 630
1355
Conclusion 632 After the Interview 632
introductions 636 Routine Openings 637 Opening Strategies 637
Objective 638 Problem Statement 638 Scope 638 Background 639 Summary 639 Interesting Detail 640 Definition 640 Anecdote 641 Quotation 641 Forecast 642 Persuasive Hook 642
Full-Scale Introductions 642 investigative reports 644 italics 647
Foreign Words and Phrases 647 Titles 647 Proper Names 648 Words, Letters, and Figures 648 Subheads 649 Exceptions 649
its / it’s 650 J 651
jargon 652 job descriptions 653 job search 656
Networking and Informational Interviews 660 Campus Career Services 661 Strategic Web Searches 662 Social Media 663
1356
Job Advertisements 663 Trade and Professional Journal Listings 665 Employment Agencies (Private, Temporary, Government) 665 Internships and Co-ops 667 Service Internship and “Gap Year” Opportunities 668 Direct Inquiries 669 Other Application Genres 670
K 674 kind of / sort of 675 know-how 676
L 677 lay / lie 678 layout and design 680
Design Principles 681 Grouping 681 Contrast 682 Repetition 682
Typography 682 Typeface and Type Size 683 Type Style and Emphasis 685
Page-Design Elements 685 Justification 686 Headings 686 Headers and Footers 686 Lists 687 Columns 687 White Space 688 Color 688
Visuals 688 Icons 689 Captions 689 Rules 689
Page Layout and Thumbnails 690 lend / loan 691
1357
letters 692 Letter Format 692 Heading 695 Inside Address 695 Salutation 696 Subject Line 696 Body 697 Complimentary Closing 698 Writer’s Signature Block 698 End Notations 698 Continuing Pages 699
like / as 701 listening 702
Fallacies About Listening 702 Active Listening 702
Step 1: Make a Conscious Decision 703 Step 2: Define Your Purpose 703 Step 3: Take Specific Actions 703 Step 4: Adapt to the Situation 704
lists 706 logic errors 709
Lack of Reason 709 Sweeping Generalizations 709 Non Sequiturs 710 False Cause 710 Biased or Suppressed Evidence 711 Fact Versus Opinion 711 Loaded Arguments 711
loose / lose 713 M 714
malapropisms 715 maps 716 maybe / may be 719 media / medium 720
1358
meetings 721 Planning a Meeting 721
Determine the Purpose of the Meeting 721 Decide Who Should Attend 722 Choose the Meeting Time 722 Choose the Meeting Location 722 Establish the Agenda 723 Assign the Minute-Taking 726
Conducting the Meeting 726 Deal with Conflict 727 Close the Meeting 729
memos 730 Memo Format 730
methods of development 733 minutes of meetings 735 mission statements 738
Writing a Mission Statement 739 Format and Length 742
mixed constructions 743 modifiers 744
Stacked (Jammed) Modifiers 745 Misplaced Modifiers 745 Squinting Modifiers 746
mood 748 Ms. / Miss / Mrs. 750 mutual / common 751
N 752 narration 753 nature 757 needless to say 758 newsletter articles 759 newsletters 763
Types of Newsletters 763 Developing Newsletters 764
1359
nominalizations 767 none 768 nor / or 769 note-taking 770 nouns 772
Types of Nouns 772 Noun Functions 773 Collective Nouns 774 Plural Nouns 775
number (grammar) 777 numbers 778
Numerals or Words 778 Plurals 779 Measurements 780 Fractions 780 Money 780 Time 781 Dates 781 Addresses 781 Documents 782
O 783 objects 784 OK / okay 785 on / onto / upon 786 one 787 one of those . . . who 788 online professional profile 789
Choosing the Appropriate Site 791 Writing Style and Tips 792
Personal Information and Overview 793 Experience, Education, and Skills 794
only 795 order-of-importance method of development 796
Decreasing Order 798
1360
Increasing Order 798 organization 800 organizational charts 801 outlining 802
Advantages of Outlining 802 Types of Outlines 803 Creating an Outline 803
outside [of] 807 over [with] 808
P 809 pace 810 paragraphs 811
Topic Sentence 811 Paragraph Length 812 Writing Paragraphs 813 Paragraph Unity and Coherence 815
parallel structure 816 Faulty Parallelism 817
paraphrasing 819 parentheses 820 parts of speech 822 party 823 per 824 percent / percentage 825 periods 826
Periods in Quotations 826 Periods with Parentheses 826 Other Uses of Periods 827 Period Faults 828
person 829 personal / personnel 830 persons / people 831 persuasion 832 photographs 835
1361
phrases 838 Prepositional Phrases 839 Participial Phrases 840
Dangling Participial Phrases 841 Misplaced Participial Phrases 841
Infinitive Phrases 841 Gerund Phrases 842 Verb Phrases 843 Noun Phrases 843
plagiarism 844 Citing Sources 844 Common Knowledge 845
plain language 846 point of view 848 policies and procedures 851
Policies 851 Procedures 852
positive writing 854 possessive case 856
Singular Nouns 856 Plural Nouns 857 Compound Nouns 857 Coordinate Nouns 857 Possessive Pronouns 858 Indefinite Pronouns 858
prefixes 859 preparation 860 prepositions 861
Prepositions at the End of a Sentence 862 Prepositions in Titles 862 Preposition Errors 863
presentations 864 Determining Your Purpose 864 Analyzing Your Audience 865
1362
Gathering Information 865 Structuring the Presentation 866
The Introduction 866 The Body 868 Transitions 868 The Closing 869
Using Visuals 870 Flip Charts 871 Whiteboards or Chalkboards 871 Presentation Software 871
Delivering a Presentation 874 Practice 874 Delivery Techniques That Work 875 Presentation Anxiety 877
press releases 878 principal / principle 881 process explanation 882 progress and activity reports 883
Progress Reports 883 Activity Reports 885
promotional writing 888 pronoun reference 890 pronouns 892
Case 894 Gender 896 Number 897 Person 897
proofreading 899 proposals 901
Proposal Strategies 902 Audience and Purpose 902 Project Management 903
Proposal Context and Types 903 Internal Proposals 904
1363
Informal Internal Proposals 904 Formal Internal Proposals 904
External Proposals 908 Solicited Proposals 909 Unsolicited Proposals 910 Sales Proposals 910
pseudo- / quasi- 936 punctuation 937 purpose 938
Q 940 question marks 941 questionnaires 943
Selecting the Recipients 949 Preparing the Questions 949
quid pro quo 952 quotation marks 953
Direct Quotations 953 Words and Phrases 954 Titles of Works 954 Punctuation 955 Direct Quotations 953
quotations 957 Indirect Quotations 957 Deletions or Omissions 958 Inserting Material into Quotations 959 Incorporating Quotations into Text 960
R 961 raise / rise 962 readers 963 really 964 reason is [because] 965 reference letters 966 refusal letters 969 regarding / with regard to 974
1364
regardless 975 repetition 976 reports 978 repurposing 980
Repurpose for the Context 981 Repurpose for the Medium 981
research 983 Primary Research 984 Secondary Research 985 Library Research Strategies 986
Online Catalogs (Locating Library Holdings) 987 Online Databases and Indexes (Locating Articles) 987 Reference Works 989
Web Research Strategies 990 Search Engines 990 Web Subject Directories 992
Evaluating Sources 992 resignation letters 996 respective / respectively 1000 restrictive and nonrestrictive elements 1001 résumés 1003
Sample Résumés 1004 Analyzing Your Background 1017 Returning Job Seekers 1019 Organizing Your Résumé (Sections) 1020
Heading 1021 Job Objective vs. Headline 1022 Qualifications Summary 1023 Education 1024 Employment Experience 1024 Related Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities 1026 Honors and Activities 1027 References and Portfolios 1027
Digital Formats and Media 1028
1365
E-mail–Attached Résumés 1028 Applicant Tracking System Résumés 1028 Plain-Text Résumés 1029 Scannable Résumés 1030 Web-Posted Résumés 1030
revision 1032 rhetorical questions 1034 run-on sentences 1035
S 1036 sales letters 1037 scope 1041 selecting the medium 1042
E-mail 1044 Memos 1044 Letters 1044 Text and Instant Messages 1045 Phone Calls and Voice Messages 1045 Faxes 1046 Meetings and Conference Calls 1046 Web Conferences and Video Conferences 1047 Web Networking and Promotion 1047
semicolons 1049 With Strong Connectives 1049 For Clarity in Long Sentences 1050
sentence construction 1052 Subjects 1052 Predicates 1053 Sentence Types 1054
Structure 1054 Intention 1055 Stylistic Use 1056
Constructing Effective Sentences 1056 sentence faults 1058 sentence fragments 1060
1366
sentence variety 1062 Sentence Length 1062 Word Order 1063 Loose and Periodic Sentences 1064
sequential method of development 1066 service 1069 set / sit 1070 shall / will 1071 slashes 1072 so / so that / such 1073 social media 1074
Choosing the Appropriate Platforms 1075 Writing Style and Privacy Considerations 1078
some / somewhat 1080 some time / sometime / sometimes 1081 spatial method of development 1082 spelling 1084 spreadsheets 1085 style 1087
Formal Writing Style 1088 Informal Writing Style 1089
subordination 1093 suffixes 1096 surveys (see questionnaires) 1097 synonyms 1098 syntax 1099
T 1100 tables 1101
Table Elements 1101 Table Number 1101 Table Title 1102 Box Head 1102 Stub 1102 Body 1102
1367
Rules 1102 Footnotes 1103 Source Line 1103 Continuing Tables 1103
Informal Tables 1104 tables of contents 1105 telegraphic style 1106 tenant / tenet 1108 tense 1109
Past Tense 1110 Past Perfect Tense 1110 Present Tense 1111 Present Perfect Tense 1111 Future Tense 1112 Future Perfect Tense 1112 Shift in Tense 1112
text messaging 1113 that / which / who 1114 there / their / they’re 1115 thesaurus 1116 titles 1117
Reports and Long Documents 1117 E-mail, Memos, and Online Postings 1118 Formatting Titles 1119
Capitalization 1119 Italics 1119 Quotation Marks 1120 Special Cases 1120
to / too / two 1122 tone 1123 transition 1125
Methods of Transition 1125 Transition Between Sentences 1126 Transition Between Paragraphs 1127
1368
trip reports 1130 trouble reports (see incident reports) 1132 try to 1133
U 1134 unity 1135 up 1136 usage 1137 utilize 1138
V 1139 vague words 1140 verbals 1141
Gerunds 1141 Infinitives 1142 Participles 1143
verbs 1145 Types of Verbs 1145 Forms of Verbs 1146
Finite Verbs 1146 Nonfinite Verbs 1147
Properties of Verbs 1148 very 1150 via 1151 visuals 1152
Selecting Visuals 1153 Integrating Visuals with Text 1156
voice 1159 Using the Active Voice 1160
Improving Clarity 1160 Highlighting Subjects 1160 Achieving Conciseness 1161
Using the Passive Voice 1161 W 1164
wait for / wait on 1165 Web design (see writing for the Web) 1166
1369
when / where / that 1167 whether 1168 while 1169 who / whom 1170 who’s / whose / of which 1171 word choice 1172 writing a draft 1174 writing for the Web 1176
Crafting Content for Your Site 1176 Text Content 1176 Headings 1177 Lists 1177 Keywords 1177 Directional Cues 1178 Graphics 1178 Fonts 1178
Using Links 1179 Posting an Existing Document 1180
Y 1182 “you” viewpoint 1183 your / you’re 1185
Index 1186 Commonly Misused Words and Phrases 1322 Model Documents and Figures by Topic 1330 Inside Back Cover 1339 Back Cover 1341
1370
- About This Book
- Cover Page
- Inside Front Cover
- Halftitle Page-1
- About the Authors
- Title Page
- Copyright Page
- Contents
- Preface
- Five Steps to Successful Writing
- Checklist of the Writing Process
- Halftitle Page-2
- A
- a / an
- a lot
- abbreviations
- Using Abbreviations
- Forming Abbreviations
- Names of Organizations
- Measurements
- Personal Names and Titles
- Common Scholarly Abbreviations and Terms
- above
- absolutely
- abstract / concrete words
- abstracts
- Types of Abstracts
- Writing Strategies
- accept / except
- acceptances / refusals (for employment)
- acknowledgments
- acronyms and initialisms (see abbreviations)
- active voice (see voice)
- ad hoc
- adapt / adept / adopt
- adapting to new technologies
- adjectives
- Limiting Adjectives
- Articles
- Demonstrative Adjectives
- Possessive Adjectives
- Numeral Adjectives
- Indefinite Adjectives
- Comparison of Adjectives
- Placement of Adjectives
- Use of Adjectives
- adjustment messages
- Full Adjustments
- Partial Adjustments
- adverbs
- Types of Adverbs
- Comparison of Adverbs
- Placement of Adverbs
- affect / effect
- affectation
- affinity
- agreement
- Subject-Verb Agreement
- Compound Subjects
- Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement
- Gender
- Number
- Compound Antecedents
- allegedly / supposedly
- all ready / already
- all right
- all together / altogether
- allude / elude / refer
- allusion / illusion
- allusions
- also
- ambiguity
- amount / number
- ampersands
- and / or
- annual reports
- Structure and Parts
- Financial Highlights
- Statement to Shareholders
- Narrative Section
- Financial Statement
- Board of Directors and Company Officers
- Preparing the Report
- Design and Visuals
- antonyms
- apostrophes
- Showing Possession
- Indicating Omission
- Forming Plurals
- appendixes
- application cover letters
- Opening
- Body
- Closing
- Proofreading and Follow-up
- appositives
- articles
- as / because / since
- as much as / more than
- as such
- as well as
- audience
- Analyzing Your Audience’s Needs
- Writing for Varied and Multiple Audiences
- augment / supplement
- average / median / mean
- awhile / a while
- awkwardness
- B
- bad / badly
- balance / remainder
- beside / besides
- between / among
- between you and me
- bi- / semi-
- biannual / biennial
- biased language
- Sexist Language
- bibliographies
- blogs and forums
- Organizational Uses
- Writing Style
- both . . . and
- brackets
- brainstorming
- brochures
- Types of Brochures
- Designing a Brochure
- Cover Panel
- First Inside Panel
- Subsequent Panels
- bulleted lists (see lists)
- business plans
- Purposes and Audience
- Format, Length, and Sections
- Company Description and Strategy
- Business Description
- Vision and Mission Statements
- Goals and Milestones
- Management and Key Team Members
- Market Analysis and Strategy
- Marketing Plan
- Financial Analysis
- Supporting Documents
- business writing style
- buzzwords
- C
- can / may
- cannot
- capital / capitol
- capitalization
- Proper Nouns
- Common Nouns
- First Words
- Specific Groups
- Specific Places
- Specific Institutions, Events, Concepts
- Titles of Works
- Professional and Personal Titles
- Abbreviations and Letters
- Miscellaneous Capitalizations
- case
- Subjective Case
- Objective Case
- Possessive Case
- Appositives
- Determining the Case of Pronouns
- cause-and-effect method of development
- Evaluating Evidence
- Linking Causes to Effects
- center on
- chronological method of development
- cite / sight / site
- clarity
- clauses
- clichés
- coherence
- collaborative writing
- Tasks of the Collaborative Writing Team
- Planning
- Research and Writing
- Reviewing
- Revising
- Using Collaborative Writing Software
- collection letters
- colons
- Colons in Sentences
- Colons with Salutations, Titles, Citations, and Numbers
- Punctuation and Capitalization with Colons
- Unnecessary Colons
- comma splice
- commas
- Linking Independent Clauses
- Enclosing Elements
- Introducing Elements
- Clauses and Phrases
- Words and Quotations
- Separating Items in a Series
- Clarifying and Contrasting
- Showing Omissions
- Using with Numbers and Names
- Using with Other Punctuation
- Avoiding Unnecessary Commas
- compare / contrast
- comparison
- comparison method of development
- complaints
- complement / compliment
- complements
- compose / constitute / comprise
- compound words
- conciseness
- Causes of Wordiness
- conclusions
- conjunctions
- connotation / denotation
- consensus
- context
- Assessing Context
- Signaling Context
- continual / continuous
- contractions
- copyrights, patents, and trademarks
- Copyrights
- Permissions
- Exceptions
- Patents
- Trademarks
- correspondence
- Audience and Writing Style
- Openings and Closings
- Goodwill and the “You” Viewpoint
- Direct and Indirect Patterns
- Direct Pattern
- Indirect Pattern
- Clarity and Emphasis
- Lists
- Headings
- Subject Lines
- cover messages (or transmittals)
- credible / creditable
- critique
- D
- dangling modifiers
- dashes
- data
- dates
- de facto / de jure
- defective / deficient
- defining terms
- definite / definitive
- definition method of development
- Extended Definition
- Definition by Analogy
- Definition by Cause
- Definition by Components
- Definition by Exploration of Origin
- Negative Definition
- description
- design (see layout and design)
- differ from / differ with
- different from / different than
- direct address
- discreet / discrete
- disinterested / uninterested
- division-and-classification method of development
- Division
- Classification
- document management
- Document-Management Systems
- documenting sources
- APA Documentation
- APA In-Text Citations
- APA Documentation Models
- APA Sample Pages
- CMS Documentation
- CMS Footnotes and Endnotes
- CMS Documentation Models
- CMS Sample Pages
- MLA Documentation
- MLA In-Text Citations
- MLA Documentation Models
- MLA Sample Pages
- double negatives
- drawings
- due to / because of
- E
- each
- economic / economical
- editing (see revision and proofreading)
- e.g. / i.e.
- ellipses
- Review and Confidentiality
- Writing and Design
- emphasis
- Achieving Emphasis
- Position
- Climactic Order
- Sentence Length
- Sentence Type
- Active Voice
- Repetition
- Intensifiers
- Direct Statements
- Long Dashes
- Typographical Devices
- English as a second language
- Count and Mass Nouns
- Articles and Modifiers
- Gerunds and Infinitives
- Adjective Clauses
- Present Perfect Verb Tense
- Present Progressive Verb Tense
- English, varieties of
- Colloquial English
- Dialectal English
- Localisms
- Slang
- equal / unique / perfect
- etc
- ethics in writing
- euphemisms
- everybody / everyone
- everyday / every day
- exclamation marks
- executive summaries
- expletives
- explicit / implicit
- exposition
- F
- fact
- FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)
- Questions to Include
- Organization
- Placement
- feasibility reports
- Report Sections
- Introduction
- Body
- Conclusion
- Recommendation
- few / a few
- fewer / less
- figuratively / literally
- figures of speech
- Types of Figures of Speech
- fine
- first / firstly
- flowcharts
- footnotes (see documenting sources)
- forceful / forcible
- foreign words in English
- foreword / forward
- form letters
- When to Use Form Letters
- Writing Form Letters
- Repurposing Form Letters
- formal reports
- Front Matter
- Title Page
- Abstract
- Table of Contents
- List of Figures
- List of Tables
- Foreword
- Preface
- List of Abbreviations and Symbols
- Body
- Executive Summary
- Introduction
- Text
- Conclusions
- Recommendations
- Explanatory Notes
- References (or Works Cited)
- Back Matter
- Appendixes
- Bibliography
- Glossary
- Index
- Sample Formal Report
- format
- former / latter
- forms
- Choosing Paper or Digital
- Designing a Form
- Entry Lines and Fields
- Sequencing Entries
- Writing Questions
- forums (see blogs and forums)
- fragments (see sentence fragments)
- functional shift
- G
- garbled sentences
- gender
- general and specific methods of development
- General to Specific
- Specific to General
- global communication
- global graphics
- glossaries
- gobbledygook
- good / well
- grammar
- grant proposals
- Cover Message
- Title Page
- Application Form
- Introduction
- Literature Review
- Project Narrative
- Project Description
- Project Outcomes
- Budget Narrative
- Task Schedule
- Organization Description
- Conclusion
- Attachments
- graphs
- Line Graphs
- Bar Graphs
- Pie Graphs
- Picture Graphs
- H
- he / she
- headers and footers
- headings
- General Heading Style
- Decimal Numbering System
- hyphens
- Hyphens with Compound Words
- Hyphens with Modifiers
- Hyphens with Prefixes and Suffixes
- Hyphens and Clarity
- Other Uses of the Hyphen
- I
- idioms
- illustrations (see visuals)
- imply / infer
- in / into
- in order to
- in terms of
- incident / incidence
- incident reports
- indexing
- indiscreet / indiscrete
- infographics
- inquiries and responses
- inside / inside of
- instant messaging and live chat
- instructions
- Writing Instructions
- Illustrating Instructions
- insure / ensure / assure
- intensifiers
- interface
- interjections
- international correspondence
- Cultural Differences in Correspondence
- Cross-Cultural Examples
- interviewing for information
- Determining the Proper Person to Interview
- Preparing for the Interview
- Conducting the Interview
- Expanding Your Notes Soon After the Interview
- Interviewing by Phone or E-mail
- interviewing for a job
- Before the Interview
- During the Interview
- Behavior
- Responses
- Salary
- Conclusion
- After the Interview
- introductions
- Routine Openings
- Opening Strategies
- Objective
- Problem Statement
- Scope
- Background
- Summary
- Interesting Detail
- Definition
- Anecdote
- Quotation
- Forecast
- Persuasive Hook
- Full-Scale Introductions
- investigative reports
- italics
- Foreign Words and Phrases
- Titles
- Proper Names
- Words, Letters, and Figures
- Subheads
- Exceptions
- its / it’s
- J
- jargon
- job descriptions
- job search
- Networking and Informational Interviews
- Campus Career Services
- Strategic Web Searches
- Social Media
- Job Advertisements
- Trade and Professional Journal Listings
- Employment Agencies (Private, Temporary, Government)
- Internships and Co-ops
- Service Internship and “Gap Year” Opportunities
- Direct Inquiries
- Other Application Genres
- K
- kind of / sort of
- know-how
- L
- lay / lie
- layout and design
- Design Principles
- Grouping
- Contrast
- Repetition
- Typography
- Typeface and Type Size
- Type Style and Emphasis
- Page-Design Elements
- Justification
- Headings
- Headers and Footers
- Lists
- Columns
- White Space
- Color
- Visuals
- Icons
- Captions
- Rules
- Page Layout and Thumbnails
- lend / loan
- letters
- Letter Format
- Heading
- Inside Address
- Salutation
- Subject Line
- Body
- Complimentary Closing
- Writer’s Signature Block
- End Notations
- Continuing Pages
- like / as
- listening
- Fallacies About Listening
- Active Listening
- Step 1: Make a Conscious Decision
- Step 2: Define Your Purpose
- Step 3: Take Specific Actions
- Step 4: Adapt to the Situation
- lists
- logic errors
- Lack of Reason
- Sweeping Generalizations
- Non Sequiturs
- False Cause
- Biased or Suppressed Evidence
- Fact Versus Opinion
- Loaded Arguments
- loose / lose
- M
- malapropisms
- maps
- maybe / may be
- media / medium
- meetings
- Planning a Meeting
- Determine the Purpose of the Meeting
- Decide Who Should Attend
- Choose the Meeting Time
- Choose the Meeting Location
- Establish the Agenda
- Assign the Minute-Taking
- Conducting the Meeting
- Deal with Conflict
- Close the Meeting
- memos
- Memo Format
- methods of development
- minutes of meetings
- mission statements
- Writing a Mission Statement
- Format and Length
- mixed constructions
- modifiers
- Stacked (Jammed) Modifiers
- Misplaced Modifiers
- Squinting Modifiers
- mood
- Ms. / Miss / Mrs.
- mutual / common
- N
- narration
- nature
- needless to say
- newsletter articles
- newsletters
- Types of Newsletters
- Developing Newsletters
- nominalizations
- none
- nor / or
- note-taking
- nouns
- Types of Nouns
- Noun Functions
- Collective Nouns
- Plural Nouns
- number (grammar)
- numbers
- Numerals or Words
- Plurals
- Measurements
- Fractions
- Money
- Time
- Dates
- Addresses
- Documents
- O
- objects
- OK / okay
- on / onto / upon
- one
- one of those . . . who
- online professional profile
- Choosing the Appropriate Site
- Writing Style and Tips
- Personal Information and Overview
- Experience, Education, and Skills
- only
- order-of-importance method of development
- Decreasing Order
- Increasing Order
- organization
- organizational charts
- outlining
- Advantages of Outlining
- Types of Outlines
- Creating an Outline
- outside [of]
- over [with]
- P
- pace
- paragraphs
- Topic Sentence
- Paragraph Length
- Writing Paragraphs
- Paragraph Unity and Coherence
- parallel structure
- Faulty Parallelism
- paraphrasing
- parentheses
- parts of speech
- party
- per
- percent / percentage
- periods
- Periods in Quotations
- Periods with Parentheses
- Other Uses of Periods
- Period Faults
- person
- personal / personnel
- persons / people
- persuasion
- photographs
- phrases
- Prepositional Phrases
- Participial Phrases
- Dangling Participial Phrases
- Misplaced Participial Phrases
- Infinitive Phrases
- Gerund Phrases
- Verb Phrases
- Noun Phrases
- plagiarism
- Citing Sources
- Common Knowledge
- plain language
- point of view
- policies and procedures
- Policies
- Procedures
- positive writing
- possessive case
- Singular Nouns
- Plural Nouns
- Compound Nouns
- Coordinate Nouns
- Possessive Pronouns
- Indefinite Pronouns
- prefixes
- preparation
- prepositions
- Prepositions at the End of a Sentence
- Prepositions in Titles
- Preposition Errors
- presentations
- Determining Your Purpose
- Analyzing Your Audience
- Gathering Information
- Structuring the Presentation
- The Introduction
- The Body
- Transitions
- The Closing
- Using Visuals
- Flip Charts
- Whiteboards or Chalkboards
- Presentation Software
- Delivering a Presentation
- Practice
- Delivery Techniques That Work
- Presentation Anxiety
- press releases
- principal / principle
- process explanation
- progress and activity reports
- Progress Reports
- Activity Reports
- promotional writing
- pronoun reference
- pronouns
- Case
- Gender
- Number
- Person
- proofreading
- proposals
- Proposal Strategies
- Audience and Purpose
- Project Management
- Proposal Context and Types
- Internal Proposals
- Informal Internal Proposals
- Formal Internal Proposals
- External Proposals
- Solicited Proposals
- Unsolicited Proposals
- Sales Proposals
- pseudo- / quasi-
- punctuation
- purpose
- Q
- question marks
- questionnaires
- Selecting the Recipients
- Preparing the Questions
- quid pro quo
- quotation marks
- Direct Quotations
- Words and Phrases
- Titles of Works
- Punctuation
- Direct Quotations
- quotations
- Indirect Quotations
- Deletions or Omissions
- Inserting Material into Quotations
- Incorporating Quotations into Text
- R
- raise / rise
- readers
- really
- reason is [because]
- reference letters
- refusal letters
- regarding / with regard to
- regardless
- repetition
- reports
- repurposing
- Repurpose for the Context
- Repurpose for the Medium
- research
- Primary Research
- Secondary Research
- Library Research Strategies
- Online Catalogs (Locating Library Holdings)
- Online Databases and Indexes (Locating Articles)
- Reference Works
- Web Research Strategies
- Search Engines
- Web Subject Directories
- Evaluating Sources
- resignation letters
- respective / respectively
- restrictive and nonrestrictive elements
- résumés
- Sample Résumés
- Analyzing Your Background
- Returning Job Seekers
- Organizing Your Résumé (Sections)
- Heading
- Job Objective vs. Headline
- Qualifications Summary
- Education
- Employment Experience
- Related Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities
- Honors and Activities
- References and Portfolios
- Digital Formats and Media
- E-mail–Attached Résumés
- Applicant Tracking System Résumés
- Plain-Text Résumés
- Scannable Résumés
- Web-Posted Résumés
- revision
- rhetorical questions
- run-on sentences
- S
- sales letters
- scope
- selecting the medium
- Memos
- Letters
- Text and Instant Messages
- Phone Calls and Voice Messages
- Faxes
- Meetings and Conference Calls
- Web Conferences and Video Conferences
- Web Networking and Promotion
- semicolons
- With Strong Connectives
- For Clarity in Long Sentences
- sentence construction
- Subjects
- Predicates
- Sentence Types
- Structure
- Intention
- Stylistic Use
- Constructing Effective Sentences
- sentence faults
- sentence fragments
- sentence variety
- Sentence Length
- Word Order
- Loose and Periodic Sentences
- sequential method of development
- service
- set / sit
- shall / will
- slashes
- so / so that / such
- social media
- Choosing the Appropriate Platforms
- Writing Style and Privacy Considerations
- some / somewhat
- some time / sometime / sometimes
- spatial method of development
- spelling
- spreadsheets
- style
- Formal Writing Style
- Informal Writing Style
- subordination
- suffixes
- surveys (see questionnaires)
- synonyms
- syntax
- T
- tables
- Table Elements
- Table Number
- Table Title
- Box Head
- Stub
- Body
- Rules
- Footnotes
- Source Line
- Continuing Tables
- Informal Tables
- tables of contents
- telegraphic style
- tenant / tenet
- tense
- Past Tense
- Past Perfect Tense
- Present Tense
- Present Perfect Tense
- Future Tense
- Future Perfect Tense
- Shift in Tense
- text messaging
- that / which / who
- there / their / they’re
- thesaurus
- titles
- Reports and Long Documents
- E-mail, Memos, and Online Postings
- Formatting Titles
- Capitalization
- Italics
- Quotation Marks
- Special Cases
- to / too / two
- tone
- transition
- Methods of Transition
- Transition Between Sentences
- Transition Between Paragraphs
- trip reports
- trouble reports (see incident reports)
- try to
- U
- unity
- up
- usage
- utilize
- V
- vague words
- verbals
- Gerunds
- Infinitives
- Participles
- verbs
- Types of Verbs
- Forms of Verbs
- Finite Verbs
- Nonfinite Verbs
- Properties of Verbs
- very
- via
- visuals
- Selecting Visuals
- Integrating Visuals with Text
- voice
- Using the Active Voice
- Improving Clarity
- Highlighting Subjects
- Achieving Conciseness
- Using the Passive Voice
- W
- wait for / wait on
- Web design (see writing for the Web)
- when / where / that
- whether
- while
- who / whom
- who’s / whose / of which
- word choice
- writing a draft
- writing for the Web
- Crafting Content for Your Site
- Text Content
- Headings
- Lists
- Keywords
- Directional Cues
- Graphics
- Fonts
- Using Links
- Posting an Existing Document
- Y
- “you” viewpoint
- your / you’re
- Index
- Commonly Misused Words and Phrases
- Model Documents and Figures by Topic
- Inside Back Cover
- Back Cover